{"1": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3415", "width": "2205", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "Class JZA-2i5\u00c2\u00a3.\\nBonlr T^7\\nG^gM?_A3Ji3_\\nCTOWRIGHT DEPOStn", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "THE\\nPRINCIPLES\\nOF\\nGREEK GRAMMAR;\\nCOMPRISING THE SUBSTANCE OF THE MOST APPROVED\\nGREEK GRAMMARS EXTANT.\\nFOR THE\\nUSE OF -SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.\\nBY REV. PETER V BULLIOXS, D. D.,\\nLATE PEOFESSOB OF LANGUAGES IX THE ALBANY ACADEMY; AtTTHOB OF THE SEEIES\\nOF GEAM3IAES, GEEEK, LATIN, AND ENGLISH, ON THE SAME\\nPLAN; A GEEEK EEADEB, ETC. ETC.\\nTWENTY-FIFTH EDITION. REVISED AND IMPROVED.\\nPRATT, WOODFORD, AND COMPANY,\\nNO. 4 CORTLANDT STREET.\\n1853.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand eight hundred and\\nfifty-three, hy Petek Bullions, in the Clerk s office of the District Court\\nof the United States for the Northern District of New- York.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nThis work has now been so long before the public, and is so\\nwell known, that a detailed account of it is unnecessary. It is\\nsufficient to say, that the object intended to be accomplished was,\\nto provide a comprehensive manual of Greek Grammar, adapted\\nto the use of younger as well as of more advanced students in\\nour schools and colleges.\\nTime and experience have only strengthened the conviction,\\nlong entertained, that no system of Grammar will answer a good\\npurpose, for those who pursue this study at an early age, which\\ndoes not present the leading facts and principles in such a way\\nas to be easily committed to memory, and so to be always ready\\nfor immediate application when necessary. This principle has\\nbeen steadily kept in view in preparing the following work, as\\nwell as the others belonging to this series. The leading and fun-\\ndamental principles have been reduced to definitions and rules,\\nbrief, and easy to be committed to memory, and are rendered\\ncomprehensive by being printed in large type while, at the\\nsame time, copious illustrations of these principles, and of the ex-\\nceptions and varieties of usage under them, with every thing im-\\nportant to aid the advanced student, have been inserted in their\\nplace in smaller type, in the form of Observations and Notes,\\nall of which are numbered for the sake of easy reference.\\nWhen the leading parts of Grammar are first actually com-\\nmitted to memory, and then constantly applied in the inflection\\nof words, and in analyzing their forms, they soon become so\\nthoroughly understood and fixed in the memory as hardly ever\\nto be effaced, and to be always ready afterwards to account for\\nevery form which words, in their numerous changes, assume, and\\nto solve every difficulty caused by these changes almost without\\nan effort of thought. A student, though young, if thus exercised\\nbut for one year or two, has an immense advantage, in the future\\nprosecution of his studies, over those who have not laid the foun-\\ndation of their success in a thorough course of drilling.\\nIn the preface to the first edition, a full statement was given\\nof the principal sources from which the materials here collected\\nwere drawn, and which need not here be repeated. Suffice it to", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "IV PREFACE.\\nsay, the author has not hesitated to avail himself of every assist-\\nance within his reach, and to gather from every quarter, espe-\\ncially from the ample stores of German Philologists, whatever\\nappeared suited to his design. The labor of condensing and\\narranging, and, to borrow a term from the printers vocabulary,\\njustifying the several parts with due regard to harmony and pro-\\nportion, into one compact whole, has been very great.\\nI would beg leave, in this place, to call the attention of stu-\\ndents and of teachers, who have not yet examined the subject, to\\nthe method of analyzing and forming the tenses of the verb\\nwhich is here exhibited. No part of Greek Grammar has hither-\\nto proved so puzzling and harassing to the pupil as this. For\\nwant of understanding the few simple principles, on which the\\nnumerous changes in the form of the verb depend, they appear\\nto him intricate, arbitrary, and incomprehensible, to such a de-\\ngree as to render his prospect of fully mastering them almost\\nhopeless. That this is owing, in a great measure, to the method\\nof forming the different tenses by deriving one tense from\\nanother to which it has some real or fancied resemblance, ap-\\npears to me beyond a doubt. As there is no foundation in truth\\nfor this mode of formation, so .almost every writer, following\\nimagination as his guide, has proposed a different theory upon\\nthe subject. One, for example, forms the perfect passive from its\\nown future. Another, with equal ingenuity, forms the future\\nfrom its own perfect, through the medium of the first aorist pas-\\nsive Another supposes he has simplified the whole matter by\\nderiving every tense in the passive voice from its corresponding\\ntense in the active voice, by making the simple and natural\\nchange of -ipco into -cpd-fjcopai, -\u00c2\u00a3oa into -x i j jo[ica, -xpa into\\n-cp rjv, into -fpr\\\\v^ -(pa into -fxfiai, -ya into -yfiai, and -xa\\ninto -pai, sometimes into -6{iai. Another still, in order to arrive,\\nfor example, at the first aorist passive, starts with the present\\nactive, and, by a succession of stages, arrives at the end of his\\njourney, thus, azQecpco, satQexpa, eaTgeya, eargafAfiat, taTQantat,\\niaiQacpd qv and when he gets there, he finds he has missed\\nhis way after all, for the first aorist of the verb is not iazQaydtiv\\nbut iGZQtcp rjv and to bring him thither, another rule has to be\\ninvented nearly as dark as the road he has already travelled\\nviz., Verbs which change e of the future into o of the perfect\\nactive, and into a of the perfect passive, take s again in the first\\naorist as, toTQanrai, \u00c2\u00a3W( t(jp# j/j What can be more perplex-\\ning and arbitrary than such a process It is fortunate for the\\nrising generation that such a system is beginning to pass away,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "PKEFACE. V\\nand to Professor Theirsch, of Germany, must we regard ourselves\\nas chiefly indebted for the deliverance. Throwing aside the\\ncomplicated systems of rules and exceptions which such theories\\nhad rendered necessary, he directs to the more simple and philo-\\nsophical method of observing and stating the fact, that the root\\nor stem runs unchanged, or but slightly so, through the whole\\nverb and that one part differs from another in form, only in the\\npart prefixed and added to the stem, and that in all verbs these\\nparts are nearly the same. Instead, therefore, of forming one\\ntense from another by a tedious and complicated process, every\\ntense is formed at once immediately from its root by simply an-\\nnexing the proper tense-ending, and prefixing the augment in the\\ntenses that require it. Thus, for the sake of comparison, instead\\nof the laborious and clumsy process above in order to form the\\n1 aor. passive of GZQtcpco, all that is necessary is to annex the\\naorist tense-ending -d-qv to the root GTQtcp, prefixing the aug-\\nment, and it is done r you have iczQecpd-qv at once and so it is\\nwith every other tense.\\nThe whole system of forming the tenses from the root, accord-\\ning to this method, is given in a brief space 93); and all its\\nmodifications, as applied to the different classes of mute, pure,\\nand liquid verbs, occupy only about three pages. By forming\\nthe tenses in this way, the Greek verb will be found a simple,\\nregular, and beautiful structure, as all that belongs to the lan-\\nguage is. And I hesitate not again to say, after many years\\nfurther experience, and after repeated examinations of other the-\\nories, that in my opinion this method, for beauty, simplicity, and\\nphilosophical accuracy, greatly surpasses every other system of\\nanalysis; and that a more minute, familiar, and certain know-\\nledge of the Greek verb can be obtained, with much more ease,\\nand in a shorter time, by studying it in this way than in any\\nother.\\nREVISED EDITION.\\nNew plates for this work having become necessary, the oppor-\\ntunity thus offered has been embraced, to correct such errors and\\ninaccuracies as had been observed, to make such additions and\\nimprovements as were deemed important, to add to the value and\\ncompleteness of the work, and to render it still more worthy of\\nthe public favor. In a few instances, the mode of expression has\\nbeen slightly changed, partly to render it more accurate, and\\npartly to make the Series of Grammars still more uniform. For", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "VI PREFACE.\\nthis reason, also, a few changes have been made in the arrange-\\nment of the matter but none of these are of such a nature or\\nextent as to alter the character of the book, or prevent its being\\nused in the same class with the former editions. These changes\\nare chiefly the following The general rules for the accents have\\nbeen added to 5-1, and the special rules for each declension,\\nand for verbs, have been transferred from 209 to their respec-\\ntive declensions, c, in order to be studied in their place and\\nthe rules for contractions, in the first and second declensions,\\nhave been transferred to these declensions respectively so that\\nall that belongs to each declension will be found in its proper\\nplace under that declension. The analysis of the terminations\\nof verbs, formerly in the Appendix, has been added to 91 and\\nthe table of contract verbs, also in the Appendix, has been placed\\nafter the Paradigm of the Verb, pp. 136, 137. The sections on\\nNumerals have been placed before the sections on the Compari-\\nson of Adjectives, in accordance with the arrangement in the\\nEnglish and the Latin Grammar. And lastly, the section on\\nthe Analysis of Sentences has been enlarged, and transferred from\\nthe Appendix to its place immediately after the Syntax. By\\nthese changes of arrangement, the several articles affected by\\nthem have been rendered more compact and complete and the\\nmatter belonging to them, being brought together, is less scat-\\ntered than before. As a consequence of this, however, the pages\\nin this edition do not correspond to those in former editions and\\nalso the section numbers from 18 to 41 of the former edition,\\nand from 51 to 59, have been changed, while the matter in\\neach section remains the same as before. In order to obviate any\\ndifficulty from this cause in the way of reference, a list of these\\nsections, indicating the change of number, is given on p. xii.\\nThus have the Grammars belonging to this series, viz., the\\nAnalytical and Practical Grammar of the English Language, the\\nPrinciples of Latin Grammar, and the Principles of Greek Gram-\\nmar, been thoroughly revised, and, it is hoped, greatly improved\\ngreater similarity and uniformity have been effected both in ex-\\npression and arrangement, the references from one work to\\nanother, for explanation and comparison, have been greatly in-\\ncreased in number, and in all, a running series of numbers, from\\nbeginning to end, for the convenience of reference, has been in-\\ntroduced. No labor or expense has been spared to render this\\nwhole series of elementary books unique, practical, accurate, and\\ncomprehensive. Each work, though connected with the others\\nas a series, is complete in itself, and being equally remote from", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "PREFACE. Vll\\na meagre skeleton, or outline, on the one hand, and a diffuse, ex-\\ntended treatise on the other, is convenient in size, pleasing to the\\neye, and carefully adapted to the purposes of instruction.\\nThe author takes this opportunity of acknowledging grate-\\nfully the favor with which his works have been received by\\nteachers and others, and begs leave to assure them, that while no\\nchange will hereafter be made in those now completed, no effort\\nwill be wanting to render those he may yet publish, worthy of\\ntheir notice.\\nNew- York, July, 1853.\\nHINTS RESPECTING THE METHOD OF STUDYING THIS\\nGRAMMAR.\\nThose who have had experience in teaching the Greek language, will\\nneed no instructions from me how to study this, or any other Grammar\\nwhich they may think fit to use; but still a few hints as to the way in\\nwhich it is intended to be used may not be useless to the young teacher,\\nor to the student who may be under the necessity of prosecuting his\\nstudies without a teacher.\\nIt is by no means intended that the new beginner should study, and\\nmuch less commit to memory, every thing in the book. It is presumed\\nthat he comes to the study of Greek with some knowledge of the Eng-\\nlish and Latin Grammars, and he will therefore throughout meet with\\nmuch with which he is already acquainted, and which will require no\\nnew labour. In general, definitions and rules printed in large type, to-\\ngether with the paradigms of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, are\\nabout all that should be attended to at first, but these should be com-\\nmitted very accurately to memory, and repeated so often in daily re-\\nvisals, as to become easy and familiar. If this is not done, the student s\\nprogress will be slow and embarrassed at every step, which otherwise\\nwould be rapid, easy, and pleasant. By youth of ordinary capacity,\\nthis will generally be effected in the course of six or seven weeks. It\\nis then time to begin to read easy sentences, simply with a view to fur-\\nnish a praxis on the rules and paradigms previously committed. In this\\nexercise, every word should be declined, and every rule belonging to its\\ninflection should be repeated, till it can be done not only correctly and\\neasily, but almost without an effort. Two or three lines a day will be\\nsufficient at first increasing the quantity no faster than the pupil is\\nable thoroughly to analyze every word. Simultaneously with this, as a\\npart of each recitation, the part of the Grammar already committed\\nshould be reviewed repeatedly, first, in shorter, and then in longer\\nportions, till the pupil is able to run over the whole in a recitation of\\nfifteen or twenty minutes. All this may be effected in the space of\\nthree or four months. Longer lessons will then be proper, and along\\nwith thisj the study of the Grammar, taking up the more important\\nparts of what was omitted before, not to commit to memory, but to\\nstudy them so as to become familiar with them, and be able to refer to\\nthem at once when they may be needed. By going over the Gram-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "Vlll PREFACE.\\nmar two or three times, in this manner, in the course of a year, every\\npart will become connected in the mind with the rules to which these\\npaints belong, so as to be readily recalled by them.\\nThere are two or three points to which it is necessary for the pupil\\nto pay special attention. First, The Rules of Euphony, 6. To the eu-\\nphony of their language the Greeks paid the greatest attention. In or-\\nder to avoid the harsh sound which would be the result of certain con-\\nsonants coming together, they often exchanged a consonant in certain\\nsituations for another of more pleasing sound; sometimes they changed\\ntheir order, sometimes dropped one of them, or inserted another. To\\nthis is owing, in part, the apparent irregularity in the flection of nouns\\nand verbs, which has led to form so many perplexing rules for cases and\\ntenses. The rules of euphony extend, not to the flection of nouns only,\\nbut to the whole structure of the language to the composition and\\nderivation of words, and even to the collocation of them in a sen-\\ntence. Those principles are few, thoroughly systematized, and very\\neasy to be comprehended. This part, and, as fundamental to it, the\\nfourth section, should be thoroughly mastered before proceeding to the\\nthird declension, where these rules will be needed.\\nAnother thing requiring special attention, and of almost equal im-\\nportance, is, the rules for contraction. These should be studied in their\\nplace after each declension, or they may be omitted till the first re-\\nvisal. A perfect readiness in the rules of contraction renders a para-\\ndigm of contract verbs entirely unnecessary. Still, as some may wish\\nto have such a paradigm, it is furnished in \u00c2\u00a7100.\\nThe last thing to which I would invite special attention, is the mode\\nof teaching the Greek verb, which, on account of its numerous changes,\\nand these effected differently in different verbs by the rules of euphony,\\naccording to the consonants of which it consists, or which concur in the\\ncourse of inflection, has been regarded as so intricate and difficult. First\\nof all, it is necessary to ascertain, in every verb, the root, or stem, which,\\nin certain cases, undergoes changes peculiar to itself. These, however,\\nare few, and under a very few short and plain rules, 82 85. On\\nthese the pupil should be drilled till he can, with perfect readiness and\\ncertainty, tell the root of any regular verb as soon as the verb is named\\nand also its second and third forms, when they differ from the first.\\nThis may be the work of one or two days. To the root is prefixed the\\naugment in certain tenses, the rules for which will be found in S8,\\nand require no special notice. The next step is to commit the tables of\\nterminations, 92, very accurately to memory, beginning at the top of\\neach column and proceeding down the page this will be much more\\neasily accomplished than to commit the paradigm of the verb, and will\\nanswer a better purpose. All that then remains is to learn the method\\nof forming each tense by annexing the tense-endings, 93, to the pro-\\nper root, according to the rules for mute, pure, and liquid verbs in\\n94, 96, 97. This is an important exercise, and should be persevered\\nin, till the iitmost accuracy, ease, and readiness is attained.\\nThe Byntax of the Greek language is a highlj^important part of the\\nsubject, and should be diligent^ and carefully studied but this may be\\npostponed to the second year, as the rules of syntax common to the\\nLatin and Greek will be sufficient for the earlier stages. The subject of\\nanalysis and translation, at the end of Syntax, deserves special attention-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\nPAGE\\nAccents 5\\nfirst declension .21\\nsecond declension 26\\nthird declension 29\\nverbs 9*7\\nAccusative of 3d decl. 34\\nconstruction of 250\\ngoverned by an in-\\ntransitive verb 252\\nAdjectives, of -52\\nof the 1st and 2d\\ndecl 53\\nof the 1st and 3d\\ndecl 55\\nof two terminations 59\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2irregular 61\\ncomparison of 6*7, 68\\nby -low -vatoq 69\\ncomparison of irre-\\ngular 70\\ndefective 70\\ndialects of .71\\nconcord of, with a\\nsubstantive .206\\nother words used as 206\\nused adverbially 268\\nobs. on the con-\\ncord of 206\\npronouns, construc-\\ntion and use of 210\\nwords related, con-\\nstruction of .221\\nAdverbs, signification of 186\\nformation and deri-\\nvation of .188\\ncomparison of 189\\nconstruction of 267\\nAdverbial particles (insepara-\\nble) 190\\nAlphabet 1\\nAnacolutha 284:\\nAnalysis 294\\nPAGE\\nApostrophe 8\\nApposition 205\\nArticle 51\\ndialects of 52\\nconstruction and use of 214\\nas a demonstrative pro-\\nnoun 52, 76\\nas a relative and per-\\nsonal pronoun 52, 78, 118\\nAugment, of 106\\nrules for 107\\nplace of, in compound\\nwords 109\\nobservations on 109\\nAuxiliary verbs 95\\nCsesural pause 312\\nCase, of 19\\nCharacteristic of the verb, of 99\\nCircumstances, construction of 259\\nof cause or origin\\n260\\nof limitation\\n261\\nof cause, manner,\\nand instrument\\n263\\nof place\\n264\\nof time\\n265\\nof measure\\n265\\nof price\\n266\\nof exclamation\\n266\\nComparative deg., construc-\\ntion and use of\\n209\\nComparison of adjectives 67, 68\\ngeneral rule for\\n68\\nin -low and -taroq\\n69\\nirregular.\\n70\\ndefective\\n70\\ndialects of\\n71\\ngovernment of.\\n235\\nConjunctions, of\\n196\\nconstruction of\\n292\\nsignif. and use of\\n196\\nConsonants, of\\n4", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "INDEX.\\nPAGE\\nContractions, of 24\\nof the 1st decl. 25\\nof the 2d decl. 28\\nof the 3d decl. 41\\ngeneral rules for 41\\nexercises on 42\\nspecial rules for 43\\nexamples of 44-47\\nDative pluraL 3d decl. of 36\\nconstruction of 241\\nafter substantives 241\\ngoverned by adjectives 242\\nby verbals in -rog and\\n-rioq 243\\nby verbs 244\\nby impersonal verbs 248\\nDeclension, general rules for 20\\nfirst 21\\nsecond 25\\ndo. Attic form of 27\\nthird 29\\ngen. of 31\\ndo. of adj. 33\\naccusative of 34\\nvocative of 35\\ndative plural of 36\\ndialects of 38\\ngenders of 39\\nDeponent verbs 167\\nDialects of the 1st decl. 23\\nof the 2d 27\\nof the 3d 38\\nof the article 52\\nof comparison 71\\nof the pronoun 81\\nof the verb 144\\nof EijuL 162\\nDiuresis 9\\nDiastole 9\\nDigamma 8\\nDiphthongs 2\\nEnclitics 6\\nEtymology 15\\nEuphony, rules of 10\\nFigures affecting syllables 9\\nFinal letters of the active voice 111\\nFinal letters of the mid. and\\npass, voices Ill\\nof verbs in in. 150\\nPAGE\\nGender, of 18\\nGenders of the 3d decl. 39\\nGenitive of do 31\\nof adjectives of do. 33\\nobs. on construction\\nof 228\\ngoverned by substan-\\ntives 229\\nby adj. in, the\\nneut. gender 231\\nby adjectives 232\\nby comp. degree 235\\nby verbs .236\\nGovernment, of 227\\nImperative mood, syntax of\\n276\\nImpersonal verbs\\n168\\nconstruction of\\n248\\nIndicative, construction of\\n274\\nInfinitive, construction of\\n280\\nas a verbal noun\\n281\\nwithout a subject\\n281\\nwith a subject\\n283\\nused absolutely\\n285\\nMetre, of\\n307\\nIambic\\n309\\nTrochaic\\n309\\nAnapaestic\\n309\\nDactylic\\n310\\nChoriambic\\n310\\nAntispastic\\n311\\nIonic a majore\\n311\\nIonic a minore\\n312\\nPseonic\\n312\\nMetres compound, of\\n313\\ntables of\\n314\\nMood vowels, of\\nIll\\nMoods, subjunctive and opta\\ntive, construction of\\n276\\nMutes\\n4\\nNew present, formation of .170\\nNegatives, of 269\\ndouble .270\\nNom. case, construction of 223\\nconcord of 225\\nNouns, of 16\\naccidents of 17\\nperson of 17\\ngender of 18\\nnumber of IS", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "INDEX.\\nXI\\nPAGE\\nNouns, case of 19\\ndeclension of 19\\nirregular, of 48\\ndefective, of 50\\nof peculiar significa-\\ntion 50\\nNumber, of 18\\nNumbers, cardinal 63\\nordinal 64\\nnotation of 65\\ntable of 66\\nNumerals, classes of 62\\nOrthography\\nParadigm of the active voice 130\\nof the middle .132\\nof the passive .134\\nof contract verbs 136\\nof verbs in -fit, .154\\nParticiples, of 96\\ndeclension of 5*7\\nthe construction of 286\\nfor the infinitive .288\\nwith Xav dvo), c 290\\nwith ripL, ylvofxau, c. 290\\nin the case absolute 291\\nParticles, conjunctive and ad-\\nverbial 190, 196\\nsignification of 19*7\\nParts of speech 16\\nindeclinable, of the 15\\nPassive voice, construction of\\ncases with 25*7\\nPrepositions, of 191\\nalphabetical list of 191\\nconstruction of .272\\nin compo-\\nsition 274\\nPronouns, personal 72\\npossessive 74\\nconstruction of 213\\nin apposition 205\\ndefinite 74\\nconstruction of 210\\nreflexive 75\\nreciprocal 76\\ndemonstrative 76\\nconstruction of 210\\nrelative 77\\nconcord of .218\\nattraction of 220\\nPAGE\\nPronouns, relat., other words\\nused as 219\\nin the sense of\\nother words 220\\ninterrogative 78\\nconstruction of 213\\nindefinite 79\\nconstruction of 212\\ncorrelative 80\\ndialects of 81\\nProsody 299\\nPunctuation 14\\nRoot of nouns and adj. 13\\nof the verb, of 99\\nof finding and changing 99\\nsecond of the 102\\nthird 103\\nverbs wanting 2d and 3d 104\\nof the tenses 105\\nSentences, simple and com-\\nplex 203, 294\\nSpiritus, of the 7\\nSuperlative degree, construc-\\ntion and use of 209\\nSyllables 5\\nSyntax 203\\nparts of 204\\ngeneral principles of 204\\nof the verb 274\\nTable of vowel sounds 3\\nTense-root 105\\nTense-signs 105\\nTense-endings 105\\ntable of 117\\nTenses, of .90\\nobs. on the use of 93\\nof mute and pure verbs,\\nformation of .117\\nexamples of .119\\nof liquid verbs, forma-\\ntion of 125\\nformation, examples of 126\\nof verbs in ^t, of 149\\nformation of. .150\\nof verbs formed from\\nthe primitive 159, 160\\nterminations of .111\\ntable of i .114\\nof verbs in fit, 149", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "Xll\\nINDEX.\\nPAGE\\nVerbs, of 82\\ndifferent kinds of 84\\ninflection of 85\\nauxiliary 95\\nconjugation of 98\\nanalysis of 99\\nroot of 99\\ncharacteristic of 99\\naugment of 106\\ntermination of .111\\nmute, special rules for 118\\npure, do. do. 122\\nliquid, do. do. .125\\ncontract, of 128\\nparadigm of .136\\ndialects of 144\\nof the 2d conjugation 147\\nVerbs in ^t, tenses of 150, 160\\nroot of 149\\nfinal letters 149\\ncombination of 150\\nparadigm of 154\\nobs. on 158\\nirreg. and defective 160, 169\\ninflection of .161\\nPAGE\\nVerbs, alphabetical list of 172\\ndeponent 167\\nimpersonal 168\\nof peculiar signification 168\\nconcord of 224\\nrules and obs. 225\\ngoverning the genitive 236\\ndative 244\\naccus. 250\\nacc. gen. 253\\nacc. dat. 254\\ntwo accus. 255\\nsyntax of 274\\nVoice, of 85\\nactive, table of 130\\nobs. on 138\\nmiddle, of 86\\ntenses of 87\\ntable of .132\\npassive, table of .134\\nmiddle and passive, 2d\\nconj., obs. on 158\\nVowels, of 2\\npronunciation of 3\\nWords 15\\nThe following is a list of the Sections whose numbers have\\nbeen altered in the present edition. The first column contains\\nthe number of the sections in former editions the second gives\\nthe number of the same sections in this edition. All the other\\nsections are the same as in former editions.\\n18 is now\\n\u00c2\u00a720\\n\u00c2\u00a730 is\\nnow 33\\n\u00c2\u00a751 is\\nnow 54\\n19\\n21\\n31\\n39\\n52\\n55\\n20\\n23\\n32\\n40\\n53\\n56\\n21\\n24\\n33\\n41\\n54\\n57\\n22\\n25\\n34\\n18\\n55\\n58\\n23\\n26\\n35\\n19\\n56\\n59\\n24\\n27\\n36\\n22\\n57\\n51\\n25\\n28\\n37\\n34\\n58\\n52\\n26\\n29\\n38\\n35\\n59\\n53\\n27\\n30\\n39\\n36\\n60\\n60\\n28\\n31\\n40\\n37\\n100\\n99\\n29\\n32\\n41\\n38\\n218\\n100", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "Llil^TrBES \u00c2\u00a9HE\\nAUBWffiJBVJTATEOIfBJ\\n1 ii Anc\\niom Greek MSS. 3c\\nEditions\\n-V\\nTQCJTCJ,\\ntw,\\n7\\n/av.\\nera vrc:\\nat-\\nL,\\nMac,\\no#i\\no-U.\\n4i\\na\\\\\\n1*\\ncctTa.\\n(a/J). oa\\\\, crOdi\\nS.\\naJ\\\\^\\\\,\\n*c\u00c2\u00a3f\\nK80CLJ\\\\a,lOV,\\nr\\\\o,\\n0~ )i O,\\njv,\\nar\\nUCLO\\nan.\\nCT~.\\nX*\\ndaw,\\nady\\nus 0,\\ncr-T\\na r,\\ncwrctilj\\navT\\nfit,\\nus v.\\ns;\\nrr,\\ncukyJ,\\na v Tp,\\nMsjv.\\nU\u00c2\u00a3V-\\nry.,\\nd\\nyaq,\\nF?\\njusva,\\n9,%\\n1\\nca 1\\nJ,V,\\nysv,\\nidu/,\\n/*v v\\ncaJg.\\ny?\\n#L\\n/icov,\\nv 4\\nr, r.j.\\nVt]V\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0}f\\nygafietm\\nj- i-\\notoVy or.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0rf pOl\\nrye.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0i\\nSi,\\n(y\u00c2\u00bb-\\ns.\\n$:(s.\\nTO\\n4 v\\ns;\\n8, 6~\u00c2\u00a3\\nOIK OV,\\n\u00c2\u00ae,i\\nTo\\nA* Jp\\nOf a.\\nrfot-,\\nH X.\\nt%t8.\\n1\\n1 (h\u00c2\u00b0,\\nh-\\naft .U.\\nJCaq\\nrtv:\\nrovs*\\nSt.\\n\u00c2\u00a9g\u00c2\u00bb/\\nJtaqa.\\nT%, J,\\nr\\nt\\ns7\\n\u00c2\u00abtf\\nJU\u00e2\u0082\u00acQ,\\nK\\nTOO,\\nSD,-\\nSivat,\\niTTtr\\nTvsq,\\nTV cC\\nrfr\\nyx,\\n8M,\\n*t3V. C\u00c2\u00a3f,\\ncrq,\\nJk?,\\nTjGJV,\\nS,fy.\\nE/ \u00c2\u00abAA,\\ntSJfc^\\nfirga.\\nS.\\nZ\\\\\\n\u00c2\u00a3i IT\\n^V\\n^t^T\\njtoo,\\nI\\nVI\\n6$n, am,\\nffc: N\\n^t^ 3\\n3UQ6),\\n,-^4,\\nv r.\\nk a 8 ion.\\n\u00c2\u00a3*t,\\noa,\\ni X,\\nszrs V,\\ne ^0fi\\nVX\u00c2\u00a30\\nbffeij\\ne?\\nQO,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2WT7).\\nVJTO,\\n\u00c2\u00b0pj\\neq\\ng^,\\nCJ,\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0^L.\\nM^\\n6ii,\\n\u00e2\u0082\u00ac(fT(\\na,\\nM\\n6t,\\n8V 3\\nrav.\\nof,\\nrJ,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "GREEK GRAMMAR.\\nPART I.\\nORTHOGRAPHY.\\n1. Orthogkapht treats of letters, and the mode\\nof combining them into syllables and words.\\n2. A letter is a mark or character used to represent an ele-\\nmentary sound of the human voice. The Greek alphabet con-\\nsists of twenty-four letters, namely\\nFORM.\\nFAME.\\nPOWEE.\\nA a\\nAlpha\\na\\nin\\nfather\\n\\\\iT y f\\nM J 8\\nBeta\\nb\\nin\\nbee\\nGamma,\\n9\\nin\\ngo\\nDelta\\nd\\nin\\ndid\\n\\\\%E\\nEpsilon\\ne\\nin\\nmet\\nz I\\nZeta zz\\ndz)\\nin\\nNebuchadnezzar\\nit n\\nMa\\ney\\nin\\nthey\\no\\nTheta\\nth\\nin\\nthick\\ni i\\nIota\\ni\\nin\\npin\\nvj/C x\\nKappa\\nor\\nhard, kin, care\\nA I\\nLambda\\nI\\nin\\nlay, eel\\nM\\nMu\\nm\\nin\\nmadam\\nTV v\\nNu\\nn\\nin\\nnun\\ns i\\nXi\\nX\\nin\\nfox\\no\\nOmikron\\nin\\ntyro, not\\n77 7t\\nPi\\nP\\nin\\npea\\nP Q\\nRho\\nr\\nin\\nrow\\n2 ex, final g\\nSigma\\ns\\nin\\nsun, us\\nviT r 1\\nTau\\nt\\nin\\ntea, not\\nT v\\nUpsilon\\nu\\nin\\nbrute\\n(p\\nPhi\\nph\\nin\\nphilo\\nXX\\nChi\\nch\\nin\\nbuch (German)\\n*p y\\nPsi\\nps\\nin\\nlips\\nQ co\\nOmega\\nin\\nno, tone\\nThe letter y before x, y, or is sounded like ng in sing\\ntli us, ayy c).oc, ayy.o n pronounced ang-elos, ang-Jcon.\\n1", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "2 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 1, 2.\\nThe letters in the Greek alphabet are either Vowels or Con-\\nsonants.\\n3.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1. VOWELS.\\n1. A vowel is a letter which represents a simple inarticulate\\nsound, and, in a word or syllable, may be sounded alone. The\\nvowels are seven viz.,\\nTwo short, s, o.\\nTwo long, 7], go.\\nThree doubtful, a, l, v.\\n2. A, i, v, are called doubtful, because they are sometimes\\nshort, and sometimes long. Thus,\\na in Tzari iQ, is always short.\\na in Xaog, is always long.\\na in Jiang, may be either long or short.\\n3. There are but five distinct vowel sounds in the Greek lan-\\nguage, viz., a, e, i, o, v. The i], and co, are used to express the\\nlengthened sound of s and o. The vowel sounds then may be\\nthus expressed\\nShort, o, a, I, v.\\nLong, V, oj, a, I, v.\\n4,\u00e2\u0080\u0094 2. DIPHTHONGS.\\n1. The union of two vowels in one sound is called a diph-\\nthong. Diphthongs are of two kinds, proper and improper.\\nNote 1. The first vowel of a diphthong in Greek, is called the pre-\\npositive vowel and the second, the subjunctive vowel.\\n2. A Proper Diphthong is one in which both the vowels are\\nsounded. In Greek, the proper diphthongs are six; and are\\nformed from a, e, o, with i or v subjoined thus,\\nFrom a are formed ca and av.\\nFrom s are formed at and ev.\\nFrom o are formed oi and ov.\\n3. An Improper Diphthong is one in which only one of the\\nvowels is sounded. The improper diphthongs in Greek are also\\nsix viz., ui, dm, commonly written re, ij, ep, in which the first\\nyowl only is Bounded and vv, av, vi, in which the last vowel\\nchiefly is sounded, slightly modified; however, by an imperfect\\nsound of the first. Those three might very properly be classed\\nas proper diphthongs.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a73.\\nPKONUNCIATION.\\nNote 2. The iota {C) in a, r[, o), from its position under the preposi-\\ntive vowel, is called iota subscript. But when this vowel is a capital,\\nthe v is written after it as, A.idt\\\\ adr\\\\ r o) I a o q w I tw aocpo).\\n4. A vowel, preceded by another vowel, with which it does\\nnot form a diphthong, is said to be pure. Thus, a is pure in yia\\nand (pikiu og is pure in Ttoleog, Qadiog, fec.\\n\u00c2\u00a73. THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS AND DIPH-\\nTHONGS.\\n5 The ancient pronunciation of the Greek vowels and diphthongs\\ncannot now be determined with certainty in all cases. The knowledge\\nwe have of it is derived chiefly from Greek words that appear in Latin,\\nand Latin words that appear in Greek from imitation of natural\\nsounds, as the bleating of the sheep, or the barking of the dog; from\\na play upon words, and other hints of a similar character.\\n6 If uniformity in the pronunciation of the Greek, is to be aimed\\nat and it is certainly desirable that it should the Erasmian method,\\namong all others now in use, seems entitled to preference as a standard,\\nnot only on account of its simplicity and perspicuity, but also as having\\nthe authority of the ancients, so far as this can be ascertained, decid-\\nedly in its favor. It is, moreover, the pronunciation that generally\\nprevails in Europe, and has been adopted in some of the most distin-\\nguished schools in America. The whole system is exhibited in the fol-\\nlowing\\n7. Table of Vowel and Dijihthongal Sounds.\\nShort\\na,\\nlike a\\nin Jehovah\\nas\\n[A.0V6CC\\nLong\\na,\\nlike a\\nin far\\nas\\nqjaoog\\nShort\\ne,\\nlike e\\nin met\\nas\\nLong\\nn\\nlike ey\\nin they\\nas\\nd-ijoog\\nShort\\nh\\nlike i\\nin tin\\nas\\n\\\\iiv\\nLong\\nh\\nlike i\\nin machine\\nas\\nohog\\nShort\\no,\\nlike o\\nin tyro, not\\nas\\nrovog\\nLong\\nOJ,\\nlike o\\nin go, tone\\nas\\nijco, cpcovij\\nShort\\nv,\\nlike u\\nin brute\\nas\\nTV7TTCQ\\nLong\\nv,\\nlike u\\nin tune\\nas\\nxvvog\\ncu,\\nlike ay\\nin aye\\nas\\nzvipcu\\nav,\\nlike ou\\nin our, thou\\nas\\namog\\nEl,\\nlike i\\nin ice\\nas\\neig, cpiXei\\nev,\\nlike eu\\nin feud\\nas\\nqjEvyco\\n01,\\nlike oi\\nin oil\\nas\\noida\\nov,\\nlike ou\\nin ragout\\nas\\novdeig\\nrjv,\\nlike ew\\nin few\\nas\\n?jV/6fA,)]V\\n03V,\\nlike ov)\\nin how\\nas\\ncovzog\\nVI,\\nlike ui\\nin quick, or\\nlike th\\n3 English w", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "4 CONSONANTS. 4.\\n8.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 4. CONSONANTS.\\n1. A consonant is a letter which represents an articulate\\nsound, and, in a word or syllable, is never sounded alone, but\\nalways in connection with a vowel or diphthong.\\nConsonants are divided into mutes, semi-vowels, and double\\nconsonants.\\n2. The mutes are nine, and are divided into three classes, ac-\\ncording to their strength viz.\\nSmooth, n, y., t.\\nMiddle, o\\\\\\nAspirate, (jp,\\n3. By strength is meant the force of voice, or of breathing re-\\nquisite in pronouncing, which is different in each of the classes\\nspecified, the smooth mutes requiring the least the aspirates,\\nthe greatest and the middle, a degree of force intermediate be-\\ntween the other two.\\n4. Each smooth mute has its own middle and its own aspi-\\nrate and these three are called mutes of the same sound, or of\\nthe same order, because they are pronounced by the same organ\\nthus,\\n77-mutes, or labials, n, (3, op.\\nK-mutes, or palatals, x, y,\\nT-mutes, or dentals, r, d, xh\\nObs. In mutes of the same sound, one is frequently changed\\nfor another.\\n5. The semi-vowels are five, X, fi, v, q, g. Of these X, p, r, q,\\nare called liquids, because they readily unite with, or flow into,\\nthe sound of other consonants.\\n6. The double consonants are three, t/. 5, They are formed\\nfrom the three orders of mutes with g thus,\\np, p, y, t ps.\\n7 Z f ^th S makes equivalent to x.\\n8, z.\\n*7. In the declension of nouns and verbs, when a tir-mute, or a\\nx-mute, would be followed by g, the double consonant \\\\p or is\\nsubstituted for the two thus, instead of JJnapat or wUWco, must\\nbe written Aoa-tyi, 7r).t^co, fec But a r-mute, corning before\\nmust be rejected thus, for urvzcw must be written drvoco, G.\\n44-8.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "5. SYLLABLES. 5\\n8. In like manner a double consonant may be resolved into\\nthe mute from which it is formed, and g thus,\\nip may be resolved into ng, fig, or qjg.\\ninto xg, yg, or %g.\\ninto rg, dg, or g.\\nThis is done when, in the declension of nouns and verbs, it\\nbecomes necessary to separate the g from the -mute with which it\\nis combined thus, lalXa\\\\p, by dropping the g becomes laZkan\\nxoQa^ becomes xooax and so of other combinations.\\n5. SYLLABLES.\\n9. A syllable is a distinct sound forming the whole of a\\nword, or so much of it as can be sounded at once.\\nEvery word has as many syllables as it has distinct vowel\\nsounds.\\nA word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable.\\nA word of two syllables is called a Dissyllable.\\nA word of three syllables is called a Trissy liable.\\nA word of many syllables is called a Polysyllable.\\n10. In a word of many syllables, the last is called the final\\nsyllable the one next the last is called the penult, and the sylla-\\nble preceding that, is called the antepenult.\\nTo syllables belong certain marks and characters these are\\n1. ACCENTS.\\n11. The accents in Greek are three; viz., the\\nacute the grave and the circumflex\\n12; Accents are supposed to have been used to indicate the tone of\\nthe accented syllable the acute being used to mark an elevation of\\ntone, the grave a depression, and. the circumflex, the union of both.\\nGENERAL RULES.\\n13. In diphthongs the accent stands always on the subjunctive\\nvowel as, ttei co, tovto but on the prepositive of the diph-\\nthongs a, rj, op as, v Ai8rjg adrjg.\\n14. j The acute accent may stand on any one of the three last\\nsyllables of a w T ord but on the antepenult, only when the final\\nsyllable is short.\\n15. The grave is understood on all syllables not accented with\\nan acute or circumflex. The grave accent is used on the final", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "6 SYLLABLES. 5.\\nsyllable of a word when followed by another word with which it\\nstands in connection as, avrog slsys but when the word stands\\nalone, or not connected with words following it, the acute is used\\nas, avrog, rov avtov.\\n16. The circumflex can stand only on a long syllable, and\\nthat must be one of the two last and it can stand on the penult,\\nonly when the final syllable is short.\\n11. An accented penult, if long, and followed by a short sylla-\\nble, must have the circumflex but if the final syllable be long,\\nthe accent on the penult must be acute as, tovzo, rovto), ovrog,\\navzq.\\n18 Note. The diphthongs cu and ot final, syllables long only by\\nposition, and the Attic taq instead of oc, are considered short in accen-\\ntuation but the optative terminations ot. and cu, and ot- in the adverb\\nol/.oo, are long.\\n19 In words declined by cases, except participles, the accentua-\\ntion of the nominative can be ascertained only by consulting a good\\nlexicon. That being ascertained, the accentuation of the oblique cases\\nmay be found by the rules of accent under each declension. These\\nrules apply generally to adjectives and participles of the same declen-\\nsion.\\nENCLITICS.\\n20. Certain words of one or two syllables, when used in dis-\\ncourse, throw back their accent on the preceding word, if in con-\\nnection with it, and stand themselves without an accent. Such\\nwords are called enclitics.\\n21. The enclitics commonly in use are the following viz.,\\n1. The present indicative of the verbs el[U and qjqpt in all the\\nnumbers and persons except the second person singular. 2.\\nThe indefinite tig, ri, in all its cases and numbers. 3. The pro-\\nnouns [iov, (xoi, [ii oov, aoi, ai ov, ol, s [ii v, vlv, and most\\nof those beginning with oq). 4. The adverbs ncog, nlj, not, nov,\\nnod l, nofttv, Tzors, not interrogative, and, 5. The particles,\\nam, zt, rol, d fjv yt, yJv or yJ, vvv or vv, ntQ, qcc, and Se insep-\\narable, as in ode.\\n22. When a word with an acute accent on the antepenult, or\\na circumflex on the penult, is followed by an enclitic, it takes an\\nacute on the final syllable, as the accent of the enclitic as, eXeys\\n[101,, dcOQOV 8GZIV, GGdflO, [IOV.\\n23. But if the preceding word have an acute accent on the\\npenult, the enclitic of one syllable loses its accent, while the en-\\nclitic of two syllables retains it as, Xoyog [iov, Xoyog nvog,\\nXoyog hzlv.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "5. SYLLABLES. 7\\n24. When the preceding word has any accent on the final\\nsyllable, the enclitic following, whether of one or two syllables,\\nloses its accent as, avijo rig, (jpdeo as, yaleTtov iouv, yvv-\\nar/.av rivcov, c.\\n25. When several enclitics occur in succession, the first\\nhaving lost, or thrown back its accent on the preceding word,\\nthe second throws its accent always as an acute on the first, and\\nthe third on the second, c, till the last only is without an ac-\\ncent as, si rig nvd cpqai \\\\jloi naquvai.\\n26. The enclitic retains its accent when it stands alone, or at\\nthe beginning of a clause or sentence when the, final vowel of\\nthe preceding word has been cut off by apostrophe or when the\\nenclitic word is emphatic.\\nACCENTS IN CONTRACTIONS.\\n27. In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables are converted\\ninto one, it is called a contraction.\\n28. If the first concurrent vowel has the acute accent, it is\\nchanged into a circumflex on the contracted syllable as, (pi)Jco,\\n29. If the first concurrent vowel has not the acute accent,\\nthe contracted syllable has not the circumflex as, ys vsog, ytvovg.\\n2. SPIRITUS OR BREATHINGS.\\n30. The Spiritus, or breathings, are two the spiritus asper,\\nor rough breathing, marked and the spiritus lenis, or soft\\nbreathing, marked\\n31. The spiritus asper has the force of the Latin H; thus,\\n(ilia is pronounced Harna.\\nNote. Anciently H was the mark for the aspirate, in Greek, as it is\\nin Latin thus, i/.arov was written hekaton.\\n32. The spiritus lenis only indicates that the spiritus asper\\nis not to be used. These marks are used as follows\\n1st. A vowel or diphthong, beginning a word, has always a\\nspiritus. In the diphthong, it is placed over the second vowel\\nas, dfia, iyoD, evgt, ovzog but over the first in the diphthongs\\n2d. Initial v has always the spiritus asper as, vno, pronounced\\nhupo.\\n3d. Initial q has always the spiritus asper as, q/jtcoq, pro-\\nnounced rhetor q not initial, if single, has no spiritus if double,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "8 SYLLABLES. 5.\\nthe first lias the spiritus lenis, and the second has the spiritus\\nasper as, tzoqco, pronounced poro ttoqqco, pronounced porrho.\\n3. THE ^OLIC DIGAMMA.\\n33. The JEolic dialect, the most ancient form of the Greek\\nlanguage, had no spiritus asper, and it is seldom used in the\\nIonic. The want of it, in the former, was compensated, in all\\nwords beginning with a vowel, by a species of aspirate, now\\nCalled THE ^EOLIC DIGAMMA.\\n34. This was originally a full and strong consonant having\\nthe sound of the Latin F or V. It was called digamma, because\\nits form (f) was that of a double f. It is thought to have been\\nused by the ancients before words beginning with a vowel, and\\nbetween two vowels, which, by its disuse at a later period, came\\ntogether without forming a diphthong thus, ohog, sao, tg, oi g,\\nalcov, aoovog, coov, and the like, were written or pronounced as\\nif Written, FoTvog, Feag, Pig, oFtg, aircov, aFogvog, coFov, etc.,\\nfrom which the Latin vinum, ver, vis, ovis, cevum, avernus, ovum,\\nc, were evidently derived before the digamma disappeared.\\nBetween two vowels, it was at length softened down, and even\\nwith the iEolians passed into v. Thus we have avfjQ, avcog, for\\nthe common ai]o, t)c6g. This accounts for the form of some\\nwords in the Attic and common dialects, in which the digamma,\\nsoftened into v, still remains, especially where followed by a con-\\nsonant. Thus the ancient %\u00c2\u00a3Fco passed into %evco, and lastly into\\n%sco, which still retains in the future %svcm the softened form\\nof the ancient ^irato. So xlcuco, Attic y.ldco, has in the future\\ny.lamco. In like manner vaeg, the plural of ravg, still retains in\\nthe dative vavai, the softened form of the ancient varoi.\\n35. 4. The Apostrophe is written over the place of a short\\nvowel which has been cut off from the end of a word as, dlV\\niyco, for alia, iyco. This is done when the following word begins\\nwith a vowel, and in compounds, when the first part ends, and\\nthe last begins, with a vowel 43-3, 1st. Sometimes the diph-\\nthongs are elided by the poets as, fiovlop iyco for fiovioucu\\niyco and sometimes, after a long syllable, the initial vowel is cut\\noff from the following word as, co yafl-fi for co dyaOt.\\n36. Exc. Instead of the apostrophe, or cutting oft* the final\\nvowel, the concurring vowels are sometimes contracted as,\\nnnovoyov, for ttqo sgyov xclx, for not ix.\\n37 Note. The union, or contraction of Buch words, is indicated by\\nthe spiritus being placed over the vowel, at the place of junction, as in\\nthe preceding examples.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "6. SYLLABLES. 9\\n38. 5. The Diastole is a comma inserted between the parts\\nof a compound word, to distinguish it from another word consist-\\ning of the same letters as, to,te, and this, to distinguish it from\\ntote, then o,ti, what, to distinguish it from ozi, because. Some-\\ntimes they are written apart, without the comma; thus, to te,\\nO T(.\\n39. 6. The Diceresis is placed over a vowel, to show\\nthat it does not form a diphthong with the vowel which pre-\\ncedes it as, big, a sheep, nqavg, mild, pronounced o-is, pra-us.\\n40. 7. The figures affecting syllables are as follows\\n1st. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to the\\nbeginning of a word; as, G[A.ixQog, for [uxoog; eemogi, for\\nEtXOGl.\\n2d. Paragoge is the adding of one or more letters to the end\\nof a word as, qa a, for qg toigj, for Toig.\\n3d. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the\\nbody of a word as, eDm^e, for e1ci$e bnnoTEoog, for\\n07Z0XEQ0g.\\n4th. Syncope, is the taking away of one or more letters from\\nthe body of a word as, ?jl ov, for ijlv ov Evador, for\\nEVQtJGCCfir^V.\\n5th. Aphwresis is the cutting off of one or more letters from\\nthe beginning of a word; as, gteqo7zi), for aGTEoon)];\\nboTi) for EOQTJJ.\\n6th. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from\\nthe end of a word as, da, for da^ia IIoGEidco, for IIo-\\nGEidojva.\\n*7th. Tmesis is a separating of the parts, in a compound word,\\nby an intervening term as, vtteq Tiva f/Eiv, for vtzeq-\\nE /EIV TlVCi.\\n8th Metathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables;\\nas, ETtQa ov, for EnaQ ov eoqcvaov, for e8v.qx.ov y.dgTog,\\nfor xoaiog.\\n41. Obs. The Ionians, by a species of Metathesis, change the\\nbreathing in a word as, xi cov, for %itojv iv avza, for ivTau a.\\n6. EUPHONY.\\n42. In combining letters into words, the Greeks paid the\\nstrictest attention to Euphony, or agreeableness of sound. This\\nprinciple, indeed, pervades the whole structure of the language.\\nFrom a regard to this, they carefully avoided every concurrence\\n1*", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "1 EUPHONY. 6.\\nof consonants not easily pronounced together. The means by\\nwhich this is effected may be summed up in the following\\n43. RULES OF EUPHONY.\\n(It is of great importance for the student to be very familiar with\\nthe following rules, and expert in applying them, before he enters on\\nthe 3d declension, as they are then required in almost every step. To\\naid him in this, a table of exercises is subjoined, in which he should\\npractise, till he can correct the orthography, and give the rule with the\\ngreatest ease and readiness.)\\n1. Words ending in at, and verbs of the third\\nperson in s and c, add v to the termination before\\na vowel, or before a pause as,\\nTLwnv EL7T8V h.eivoig, for naai fine ixstvoig; also the word\\nei xoGi (twenty), and the adverbs tzeqvgi., navzunaai, vocyiy\\nttqog e, 07zi6 y.s and vv. This was called by grammarians v\\nicp xvoTixov, because, by preventing the hiatus between two\\nvowels, it, as it were, drew the second vowel to the first. Among\\nthe poets, it is sometimes added to these terminations before a\\nconsonant, when it is necessary to render a final syllable long\\nand sometimes, by the Attic prose writers, to give energy to the\\ntone.\\nSometimes g is added, on the same principle thus, ovioj be-\\ncomes ovzcog. Also the particle ov is changed into ovx before a\\nvowel, and into ov% before an aspirated vowel.\\n2. When two mutes of a different sound come\\ntogether, they must be of the same strength i. e.\\nthey must be both smooth, or both middle, or both\\naspirate as, tTird, cc/SdtXov, a%{)og.\\nIf, by derivation or declension, two mutes of different strength\\nwould come together, the former must take the class of the latter\\nthus, the terminations rog, 8/jr, \u00c2\u00a3tg, with yfjuqco, the co being\\nomitted, form yqanrog, yqa^t^v, way eig and of two mutes\\nalready combined, one cannot be changed without a correspond-\\ning change in the other. Thus in S7ird and oxtco, if the t be\\nchanged into d, the n must be changed into and the x into y\\nas, Mia, tfidopog oxzco, oydoog.\\n3. A smooth mute in the end of a word is\\nchanged into its own aspirate before an aspirated\\nvowel. This is done,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "6. EUPHONY. 11\\n1st. In the composition of words thus, from m (for ini) and\\nrtfitQa, comes Iqit^qog. So from mrd, by apostrophe,\\n87Z7, and r t fiSQa, comes sqid-r^sqog from vara, and evdco,\\n2d. When words stand together in a sentence; thus, icp 7\\ni\\\\\\\\uv, xad^ Tjpag, city 1 ov, c, for mi r\\\\yuv, xard rjfiag, dno\\nov.\\n3d. When words are united by contraction thus, to lyidtiov\\nunited become ftoijiaziov to 8t8qov, dt8qov, c.\\nObs. 1. The middle mute 8 is never changed before an aspi-\\nrated vowel as, oixad 1 iyJcj ai and |5 and y, only before d, and\\nkv in forming the perfect and the pluperfect active, 218, Obs. 2.\\nThe x in ix is never aspirated.\\n4. When two successive syllables would begin\\nwith an aspirate, the first is changed into its own\\nsmooth and the spiritus asper, into the spiritus\\nlenis thus,\\nIIe(pikj]xa, not cpecpiXyxa Qih Gen. tqi^og, not d-qi^og so\\nfrom the root Qe%, the verb is tqsjcq, not q8%ca from\\nrQs tyw, not %)Q8(pco; from//, \u00c2\u00a3^go, not f^w. (See below, 06s.\\n3.) In like manner from {fay, the root of -framco (R. 2.), is de-\\nrived rdcpog, c.\\nExceptions. To this rule there are five excep-\\ntions; viz.,\\nExc. 1. Compound words generally as, oQn od-fjqag, iqvcptj.\\nExc. 2. or i before d as, cpd i, ^v^vai.\\nExc. 3. When one of the aspirates is joined with another\\nconsonant as, S-acpdeig, dnityd-dfov, nv ia ai. But the rule\\nholds when q follows the first aspirate, as above in tq8%cq, not\\nQ8XC0. _\\nExc. 4. If the second aspirate has been occasioned by a spiri-\\ntus asper following it as, 8 rj% 6 dvdQco7tog, for d-i]x, by apo-\\ncope for t qxs 7i8(p8v%a for mcp8vy-a and so of others.\\nExc. 5. When the second aspirate belongs to the adverbial\\nterminations 8V or fti as, 7zavTa%6 8v, Koqiv o i.\\nObs. 2. Of three aspirates beginning successive syllables, it is\\nusual to change only the first as, zs dyazai for fo dqiazai.\\nIn some cases, however, the second also is changed as, ziza-\\ncpa, zizqo^a, for ftsducpa, ^dqocpa.\\nObs. 3. When the first of two aspirates is the spiritus asper,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "12 EUPHONY. 6.\\nit is changed only before thus, odsv, i, fya, c, preserve\\nthe spiritus asper before the aspirates and }p but f ^co must be\\nchanged into s%cq.\\nObs. 4. When the second aspirate is lost by inflection or\\notherwise, the first is resumed thus, \u00c2\u00a3%cq, fut. e^oj zqe^w,\\nQ8%w ZQt qxo, d-Qsipoo and the derivatives Qmz6g, d-gen-\\nnxog, fcc.\\n06s. 5. The second of two aspirates is seldom changed. It\\nis always done, however, in imperatives in i as, ti sti, zvqi-\\nijzi for zi e i, zvcp Tj i.\\nObs. 6. A mute may be doubled, but if it be an aspirate, the\\nfirst is changed into its own smooth as, Jtz i g, not Jl dlg\\nBax%og, not Bd%%og MazS-aTog, not Madtfalog Zanyw, not\\n\u00c2\u00a3acpq)(6.\\n5. Initial q is doubled when a short vowel is\\nprefixed as,\\nPlTTZW, 8QQ17ZTOV OQQSTz/jgt fl Om d and QS71C0 TTEQIQQOOg,\\nfrom ?rfi()t and qeco.\\n44. 1. THE MUTES BEFORE 2.\\n6. A jF-inute before a, unites with it and forms\\nijj as, Xtlnco, KsmOco, written Xslipco.\\n7. A #-mute before unites with it and forms\\nas, Tjxo), rjxoco, written rjgco.\\nExc. But in never changes v. before 6 as inGtsXXm.\\n8. A T-mute before a, is rejected thus,\\n6c6[Aat(Ji, adaco, oqvi gi\\nwritten (jcopaoi acco oqvuji.\\n45. II. THE MUTES BEFORE M.\\n9. A ;r-mute before ju, is changed into ju thus,\\nzizvn\\\\im, zizQt^icu, ysyQcupfiai;\\nwritten zs zvfifiai, ztznififmi, ytyqa^jiai.\\nExc. But after a liquid, a ^-mute before is rejected as,\\n7Tt7ltfJ(A,ai, for 7t87t\u00c2\u00a3[A7ZfJlCU ztdalfica, for ts ahtfMU.\\n10. A #-mute before ju is changed into y thus,\\nTTBTlXsXLiat, pt@QE)[fl(U,\\nwritten 7Tk7rleyfiai, ptpQEyiicu.\\nHence y before p, remains unchanged as, W.eyfaa.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "6. EUPHONY. 13\\n11. A r-nmte before p, is changed into a thus,\\nTjVVTfMU, ?jQ\u00c2\u00a3ld[A,(U, 7Z87TH HCU,\\nwritten ijVVGficu, rjQEKJftai, nsneiGfJiai.\\nObs. 7. To these rules, there are some exceptions in substan-\\ntive forms, as, ax[if], not dy\\\\ii\\\\ Tiotpog, not TtoGfiog.\\n46. III. CHANGES OF THE LETTER N.\\n12. N, before a ;r-mute, or yj, is changed into\\nft] thus,\\nhvndvco, kavftavco, ivcpvg, 8vipv%og,\\nwritten hp7zdvcQ, Xafi^dvo), l^qivg, epipvyog.\\n13. iV, before a #-mute, or is changed into y\\nthus,\\nevxsificu, cpvvydvco, zvv%dvco, TtldvZw,\\nwritten syxetficu, qivyydvco, rvy^dvco, Tzldy^a.\\n14. N, before a r-niute, remains unaltered as,\\nivtog, ovvdsco.\\n15. N, before another liquid, is changed into\\nthe same thus,\\nivpevco, cvvlctfifidvco, ovvgd^ntco,\\nwritten s t u^svco, Gvlla[i{jdvca, GVQQdmco.\\n16. N, before a or is usually rejected thus,\\n8aifjLOvai f Gvv^ev^tg, written daipoGi, ovtsv^ig.\\nObs. 8. N is retained before g only in a few words as,\\nTtQvvg, tlfiivg, ntyavcai. Before g followed by a vowel, v in gvv\\nis changed into g thus, gvggsvcq, GVGGttia, for gvvgsvo), gvvgiziu.\\nEv retains v before q, g, J.\\n47. IV. OF THE LETTER 2.\\n1Y. In the inflection of the passive voice, when\\na would stand between two consonants, it is re-\\njected; thus,\\nXeleiTZ-G cov, t tQifi-G ou, Xslsy-G coGav.\\nwithout g, XElei7t-dcov, zeTQijj-dai,, Xe).e y- (aGav.\\nby rule 2, XsXeiq cov, raTQicp ai, TLelsx coGav.\\nAnd so from ijyyekad tti, ?jyytldai from ntcpavGd ov, niyav-\\nx)w, or 7isq)UG ov.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "14\\nPUNCTUATION.\\n\u00c2\u00a77.\\nObs. 9. But when the first consonant is a r-mute, it is re-\\njected, and a remains (Rule 8), thus\\nE6XEVad-(j{) 8 i 7Z87T\u00c2\u00a3l\\\\}-o0e.\\nbecome iGX\u00c2\u00a3vaG 7TS7T\u00c2\u00a3ia0s.\\n18. When both v and a r-inute together, are\\ncast out before 6, s preceding it is changed into\\nsi, o into ov, and a doubtful vowel is lengthened\\nbut t] and co remain unchanged thus,\\nTvcpdsvToi becomes rvcp em rvxpavtGi becomes zvxpdGi.\\n67Z8v8(jco ontiaw ylyavtGi ytydGi\\nXiovtGi XiovGi daixvvvTGi deixvvai.\\nObs. 10. In some instances, and perhaps always in the nomi-\\nnative, this alteration takes place when v only has been rejected\\nthus, from kvg, taXavg, fiekavg, come eig, raXag, fuXdg.\\n19. When two consonants meet, which are not\\neasily pronounced together, the pronunciation is\\nsometimes relieved by transposing them, or by in-\\nserting a third consonant between them thus,\\n87iaQ ov by metathesis (40-8th) {tzqci ov.\\navegog, by syncope avQog, by inserting 8 (40-3d) dvdgog.\\n48. Table of words to be corrected according\\nto the foregoing rules\\n(Let the pupil always give the rule for the correction.)\\nsXias ov\\n8dt]rf 6\\n(n flCU\\nX817Z6G)\\nXfjfiaco\\ncpaai 8X\\ncps cpaxa\\navvnXi AG}\\nGvvyovog\\ninQay qv\\neXeye ovg\\n8i} 8 ix a\\nivfiaivco\\niv%8 co\\nivBaXXto\\n8?7Z8\\nayGsi\\n6VVCp8Q(x}\\nGVV^8(0\\nTV71T0VTGI\\nncaal\\nTlXixGCO\\n8vipv%og\\n8vX8l7TCO\\nTVH 8VXGI\\n\u00c2\u00a3(Gl\\nccgjgcu\\nivy.Xiroj\\navvpevw\\n7T8V\\\\ GQ(.iai\\nVOGCpi\\nTtaidaco\\nXfXQW\u00e2\u0084\u00a2\\nGVVQ80D\\nXtOVTGl\\ntvn ca\\nccvvtgov\\n\u00c2\u00a3Y\u00c2\u00a3IQ\\novvhfipig\\nU1TUVTGI\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0fraqjico\\nX8X87T(iCU\\nAdOig\\nT8TV77G CU\\nION.\\ny.QV^TCO\\nPUNCTUAT\\n49. The marks of punctuation in Greek are, the\\ncomma the colon and semi-colon the pe-\\nriod and mark of interrogation", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "WOKDS. 15\\nPAET II.\\nETYMOLOGY.\\n50. Etymology treats of the different sorts of\\nwords, their various modifications, and their deri-\\nvations.\\n8. WORDS.\\n51. Words are certain articulate sounds used\\nby common consent as signs of our ideas.\\n1. In respect of Formation, words are either\\nPrimitive or Derivative Simple or Compound.\\nA Primitive word is one that comes from no other as, ncug,\\ndyadog.\\nA Derivative word is one that is derived from another word\\nas, ncudeia, dya orrjg from rtcug, dyaftog.\\nA Simple word is one that is not combined with any other\\nword as, fidllco.\\nA Compound word is one that is made up of two or more\\nsimple words as, ixfidlXco, from hi and fldllco.\\n2. In respect of Form, words are either De-\\nclinable or Indeclinable.\\nA Declinable word is one which undergoes certain changes of\\nform or termination, to express the different relations of gender,\\nnumber, case, person, c, in grammar, usually termed Acci-\\ndents.\\nObs. 1. In every declinable word, there are at least two parts,\\nthe root or stem, and the termination. The root remains un-\\nchanged, except by euphony, in all the different forms which the\\nword assumes. The termination is added to the root, and is\\nvaried, to produce these different forms.\\nObs. 2. The variation of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and par-\\nticiples, is called Declension that of verbs, Conjugation or Inflec-\\ntion.\\nAn Indeclinable word is one that undergoes no change of ter-\\nmination.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "16 PARTS OF SPEECH. THE NOUN. \u00c2\u00a79, 10.\\n3. In respect of Signification and Use, words\\nare divided into different classes, called Parts of\\nSpeech.\\n9. PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n52. The Parts of Speech in the Greek lan-\\nguage are eight viz.,\\n1. Noun or Substantive, Article, Adjective,\\nPronoun, Verb, declined.\\n2. Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, unde-\\nclined.\\nNote. Any part of speech used simply as a word, and spoken of, is\\nregarded as a noun thus, *Eyo) is a dissyllable ttwc; is an adverb i. e.\\nthe word eyo the word 7Zok, written in Greek to eyo ro nwq. Thus\\nused it is indeclinable.\\nObs. 1. The participle, regarded by some as a distinct part of\\nspeech, properly belongs to, and forms a part of, the verb.\\nObs. 2. In Greek, the interjections are considered, by most\\nGrammarians, as adverbs.\\n10. THE NOUN.\\n53. A Nouisr is the name of any person, place,\\nor thing.\\nNouns are of two kinds, Proper and Common.\\n1. A Proper Noun is the name applied to an\\nindividual only; as, c Of-ir]Qog, *A fjvcci) Homer,\\nAthens.\\nAmong these may be included,\\n1st. Patronymics, or those which express one s parentage, or\\nfamily as, IlQiuftid-ng, the son of Priam.\\n2d. Gentile, or Patriot, which denote one s country as,\\nlAO-qvaiog, an Athenian.\\n2. A Common Noun is a name applied to all\\nthings of the same sort as, ccv/jq, a man olxog,\\na house fiifiXog, a booh.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a711. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 17\\n54. Under this class may be ranged,\\n1st. Collective nouns, or nouns of multitude, which signify\\nmany in the singular number as, laog, people.\\n2d. Abstract nouns, or the names of qualities as, ayadoz^g,\\ngoodness.\\n3d. Diminutives, or nouns which express a diminution in the\\nsignification of the nouns from which they are formed as, ttcci-\\ndioVy a little boy from nuZg.\\n4th. Amplijicative nouns, or those which denote an increase\\nin the signification of the nouns from which they are formed\\nas, xeqalcov, a person who has a large head from xecpuhf.\\nNote. A proper noun is the name of an individual only, and is used\\nto distinguish that individual from all others of the same class. A\\ncommon noun is the name of a class of objects, and is equally applicable\\nto all the individuals contained in that class.\\n11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN.\\n55. To Greek nouns belong Person, Gender,\\nNumber, and Case.\\n1. PEKSON.\\n56. Person, in grammar, is the distinction of\\nnouns as used in discourse, to denote the speaker,\\nthe person or thing addressed, or the person or\\nthing spoken of. Hence,\\n57. There are three persons, called the First,\\nSecond, and Third.\\nA noun is in the first person, when it denotes the speaker or\\nwriter as, Eyw IJavlog eyoaTpa, I Paul have written it.\\nA noun is in the second person, when it denotes the person or\\nthing addressed as, Maivrj, Ilavls, Paul, thou art beside thy-\\nself.\\nA noun is in the third person, when it denotes the person or\\nthing spoken of; as, Uccvlog sept], Paul said.\\nNote. Person has nothing to do either with the form of a noun, or\\nwith its meaning but simply with the manner in which it is used.\\nHence, the same noun may at one time be in the first person; at\\nanother, in the second and at another, in the third, as in the preced-\\ning examples.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "18 ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. \u00c2\u00a711.\\n2. GENDER.\\n58. Gender means the distinction of nouns\\nwith regard to sex. There are three genders,\\nMasculine, Feminine, and Neuter.\\nOf some nouns, the gender is determined by their significa-\\ntion of others, by their termination.\\nThe Masculine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the\\nmale sex.\\nThe Feminine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the\\nfemale sex.\\nThe Neuter gender belongs to all nouns which are neither\\nmasculine nor feminine. Also to any term used simply as a\\nword as, ib ncog, 52, Note.\\nNouns which denote both males and females are said to be\\nof the Common gender, i. e. they are both masculine and femi-\\nnine.\\nThe gender of nouns not determined by their signification, is\\nusually to be ascertained by their termination, as will be noticed\\nunder each declension.\\nObs. 1. In Greek lexicons and grammars, the gender is indi-\\ncated by the article viz., 6 indicates the masculine, the femi-\\nnine, and to, the neuter as, 6 avfjQ, the man ?j yvv/j, the wo-\\nman to \u00c2\u00a3coov, the animal.\\n3. NUMBER.\\n59. Number is that property of a noun by\\nwhich it expresses one or more than one.\\nGreek nouns have three numbers, the Singular,\\nDual, and Plural. The Singular denotes one;\\nthe Plural more than one.\\nThe Dual denotes two, and is most commonly used in speak-\\ning of those tilings which are produced, or are usually spoken of,\\nin pairs.\\nObs. 2. In the oldest- state of the Greek language, the dual is\\nnot used. It is not found in the ^Eolic dialect in the New\\nTestament in the Septuagint, nor in the Fathers. It is most\\ncommon in the Attic dialect, in which, however, the plural is\\noften used instead of it.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "12. DECLENSION. 19\\n4. CASE.\\n60. Case is the state or condition of a noun\\nwith respect to the other words in a sentence.\\n61. Greek nouns have five cases; viz., the\\nNominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and\\nVocative.\\n1st. The Nominative case, for the most part, denotes the\\nname of an object simply, or as that of which something is\\naffirmed.\\n2d. The Genitive connects with the name of an object, the\\nidea of separation, origin, possession.\\n3d. The Dative represents the thing named as that to which\\nsomething is added, or to or for which something is said or done.\\n4th. The Accusative represents the thing named, as affected\\nor acted upon by something else, and also, as the object to which\\nsomething tends or relates.\\n5th. The Vocative is used when persons or things are ad-\\ndressed.\\nObs. 3. There is no Ablative case in Greek, as in Latin. Its\\nplace is supplied by the genitive and dative.\\nObs. 4. All the cases except the nominative, are called ob-\\nlique cases.\\n\u00c2\u00a712. DECLENSION.\\n62. Declension is the mode of changing the\\nterminations of nouns, adjectives, c.\\n63. Words declined by cases, consist of two parts, the Hoot\\nand the Termination.\\n64. The Root is that part which remains unchanged by in-\\nflection, except as required by the rules of euphony. It consists\\nof all that precedes the termination in the genitive singular thus,\\nGen. np-yg, X6y-ov, Xaiinab-og. Roots, tip, loy, lafirtad.\\n65. The Termination is that part which, by its changes,\\nindicates the different cases and numbers.\\n66. Nouns, and also adjectives, pronouns, and participles,\\nare declined by annexing the terminations, or case-endings, to\\nthe root. Except the accusative in v, of the third declension,\\n102.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "20\\nDECLENSION OF NOUNS.\\n\u00c2\u00a713.\\n67. In Greek, there are three declensions, cor-\\nresponding to the first, second, and third, in Latin.\\nThey are distinguished as follows\\nThe first declension lias the genitive in ag, or yg, from feminine\\nnominatives or in ov from masculine nominatives in ag or ^g.\\nThe second has the genitive in ov, from og or ov.\\nThe third has the genitive in og whatever be the nominative.\\nThe difference between these declensions will be seen at one\\nview in the following\\n68\\nTable of Terminations.\\nFirst Declension,\\nSecond.\\nThird.\\nNom. a, rj,\\nag,\\nns\\nog, neut. ov,\\na, i, v, co, v, J, q, g, \\\\p,\\nGen. ag, ijg,\\nov,\\nov,\\nov,\\nog,\\nDat. a, y,\\nP,\\ni,\\nAce. av, r t v,\\nav,\\n1]V,\\nov,\\na, Exc. as 102, 69-2,\\nVoc. a, i],\\na,\\nn-\\ne, neut. ov.\\nDual.\\nlike nom. Exc. as 104.\\nN. A. V. a,\\nCO,\\ns,\\nG. D. aiv.\\noiv.\\nPlural.\\n01V.\\nNom. at,\\noi, neut. a,\\neg, neut.\\nGen. cov,\\n03V,\\nCOV,\\nDat. aig,\\noig,\\n61,\\nAce. ag,\\novg, neut. a,\\nag, neut. a,\\nVoc. M.\\neg, neut. a.\\noi, a.\\n13. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.\\n69. GENERAL RULES.\\n1. The vocative for the most part in the singu-\\nlar, and always in the plural, is like the nomina-\\ntive.\\n2. Nouns of the neuter gender have the nomi-\\nnative, accusative, and vocative alike and these\\ncases in the plural end always in a.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "14. FIEST DECLENSION. 21\\n3. The dative singular ends always in i, either\\nannexed or written under.\\n4. The nominative, accusative, and vocative\\ndual are alike so also the genitive and dative.\\n14. FIRST DECLENSION.\\n70. The First Declension has four termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular; two feminine,\\nrj, a\\\\ and two masculine, tjq, ag. Of these, the\\nprincipal termination is rj.\\nACCENTS.\\n71. Words in the first declension are accented\\naccording to the following\\n72. SPECIAL RULES.\\n1. The genitive plural, for the most part, has\\nthe circumflex on the final syllable.\\nExc. The exceptions are the feminine of adjectives and parti-\\nciples in og, not accented on the last syllable and the words\\nXQi j6Tt]g, izeoiai, and acpvt], which have ^qyigtcov, ivecicov, acpvcov.\\n2. In the other cases, so far as the general rules\\npermit, the accent always remains on the same\\nsyllable as in the nominative.\\n3. When the accent in the nominative singular\\nis on the termination, all genitives and datives\\nhave the circumflex on the final syllable.\\nQUANTITY.\\n73. Nouns in a with the genitive in rjg have a short, except\\nin the nominative dual and accusative plural, which are always\\nlong. Nouns which have the genitive in ag, have a long. To\\nthis there are a few exceptions.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "22\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a715,16.\\n*74. Paradigm of Nouns in t] rip), honour.\\nDual.\\nSing.\\nN. 77/*-//,\\nG. TlfL-TJgj\\nD. Tlfl-fj,\\nA. ti\\\\i-r)v,\\nN. A. V. t^-cc,\\nG. D. Tifi-aTv.\\nPlural.\\nN. Tifi-ai,\\nG. tifi-ojv,\\nD. tifi-aig,\\nA. tifi-ag,\\nV. Tip-ai.\\n75. 15. SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE NOUNS.\\n1. Nouns in a have the accusative singular\\nm\\nav.\\n2. Nouns in a pure (4-4), and qu, retain a in\\nall the cases of the singular.\\nObs. To these may be added a few words ending in da, a,\\nand a, circumflex, contracted for da and a very few in la and\\nfia. Such words have a always long as, 7- /2op;il\u00c2\u00ab, Gen. I ilo[it)-\\nXag, feo.\\n76. EXAMPLES.\\n2.\\n1.\\nN. Mom- a, a muse.\\nG. Mom-vg,\\nD. Mom- 7],\\nA. Mova-av,\\nV. Mom-a.\\nNote. In the dual and plural, all nouns of this declension are de-\\nclined like n,^.\\nN. qjili-a, friendship.\\nG. qjili-ag,\\nD. cpilt,-a,\\nA. qjili-av,\\nV. cpill-a.\\n3.\\nN. i)(jL8Q-a, a day.\\nG. iifiSQ-ag,\\nD. ?][A.EQ-a,\\nA. r^tQ-av,\\nY. ?][j,\u00c2\u00a30-a.\\n11.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a716. SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE NOUNS.\\n1. Nouns in ?;g and aq have the genitive in ov\\\\\\nand lose in the vocative.\\nObs. 1. Some nouns in have the genitive in ov or re as,\\nTzatoanloiag, gen. TiaroanXoiov, or naiqanXaia, a parricide.\\nSome have oc only as, Ocofiag, gen. Ocofia, Thomas.\\n2. Nouns in z- have in the vocative those\\nin Grr}q have either 77 or a as,\\nJJoujTtig, voc. Ttoujrd Xmzi;g, voc. taftmj or Imru,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a717.\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n23\\nObs. 2. Nouns denoting a people or nation; as, IJiqarig, a\\nPersian compounds in nijg derivatives from fietQai, ttoXoj,\\nand TQifico also Xdyvqg, Mevair^vg, and IIvq cuffing, have the\\nvocative in a.\\n3. In the other cases, masculine nouns are de-\\nclined like the feminine, to which their termina-\\ntions correspond.\\nl.\\nAtrides.\\nN. Jtzoeid-vg,\\nG. ^ItQEld-OV,\\nD. JlrQEid-i],\\nA. AzQEld-tjV,\\nV. AzQel8-r r\\nThe dual and plural of masculine nouns are the same as the\\ndual and plural of r/p/.\\nObs. Since the termination rjg, belongs also to the third de-\\nclension, it may be observed, that to the first pertain the nouns\\nin idqg or u8r t g as, Oovy.ididfjg, JUxiftiudng the names of na-\\ntions as, Hvxeliwtrig nouns in 7t]g, derived from verbs as,\\nTToirjTijg from Ttoitco compounds from ovovpai, I buy {.leToa,\\nI measure; roifim, I rub, wear, train ncolm, I sell and from\\nwords of this declension e. g. Olvftmonxng, from vUr\\\\ ccq/8-\\ndixyg, from dixy.\\n78. EXAMPLES.\\nSingular.\\n2. 3.\\n4.\\nCitizen. Youth.\\nPythagoras.\\nnoXiT-ijg,\\n7To)Jt-ov,\\nTZollZ-T],\\n7tolir-7]Vj\\ntzoXlt-u.\\nveavi-ag,\\nveavi-ov,\\nvsavi-a,\\nvsavi-av,\\nveavi-a.\\nIIv ayoQ-ag,\\nIIv ayoQ-ov,\\nIIv ayoQ-a,\\nJJv ayoQ-av,\\nTlv ccyoq-a.\\n11. DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.\\n79. Besides the regular terminations exhibited in the para-\\ndigms, many words are found in different cases declined accord-\\ning to some of the peculiar dialects. In the tables of termina-\\ntions, A. denotes Attic, I. Ionic, D. Doric, JE. ^Eolic but the\\ndistinctions are not strictly observed in every instance, the same\\npeculiarities sometimes occurring in two, and sometimes in three\\ndialects. The following words are exhibited as examples, but it\\nis not to be inferred that each part of them will actually be found\\nin the Greek authors.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "24\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a718.\\nNorn.\\nt i fi-i y D. a\\nft ova -a [j\\no~\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00ab, I. yQvast], golden.\\nsee 31.\\n_ g j_ _7 AS\\nFor the genitive and dative in cpi or qnv,\\n\u00c2\u00a718. CONTRACTIONS.\\n80. In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables\\nare converted into one, it is called a Contraction.\\nOf contractions there are two kinds\\n1. A contraction ivitJiout a change of vowels is\\ncalled Synceresis as, rtlx^h by synseresis, rt-l/bc.\\n2. A contraction with a change of vowels is\\ncalled Crasis as, yta y yrj\\\\ cp i ktz, cpiXtt\\\\ voov,\\nvovv oortov, dorovv.\\nObs. If the first of the concurrent vowels has an acute accent,\\nit is changed into a circumflex on the contracted syllable. If\\nthe first concurrent vowel has not an accent, the contracted sylla-\\nble has not the circumflex, 28, 29.\\n3. In the rules for contractions generally, let it be remembered\\nthat\\nthe two short vowels, e, o,\\nhave their own long vowels, co,\\nand their own diphthongs, ti, ov.\\nNote. A contraction is often made, but not nhva3 T 3.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a719,20.\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n25\\n\u00c2\u00a719. CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.\\n81. In the first declension, no contraction takes place unless\\nthe first of the concurrent vowels is f o, or a short, and the nomi-\\nnative contracted is then declined regularly.\\nRULES.\\n1. Ea not after o is changed into r\\\\ as,\\nyia, earth, ytj, G. ytjg, D. yrj, fec. like 7tp/.\\n%QV6s a, golden, %QV6ij, G. XQVGijg, D. %QV6r[, c.\\nEqiiiag, Mercury, Eoprjg, G. Eopov, D. EQpy, c.\\n2. In and other concurrent vowels, strike\\nout the first as,\\ntzoQCpVQea, purple, Tiootyvoa, G. TToocpVQag, D. rtOQtyvqa y c.\\nanXow, simple, dnXij, G. a7rX?jg, c.\\nJiftrpaot.) Minerva, Jid qva, G. Jld-rjvag, D. Jtfrqva, c, T5.\\nObs. s\\n^TZslXsqg, Apelles, JtrTeXXijg, G. AtzeXXov, D. XtieXXti, c.\\n82.-\\nGeXtjvr], the moon.\\nooq)i(JT)jg, a sophist.\\nTZ leia, a dove.\\nAlvdag, JEneas.\\nyecpvoa, a bridge.\\nXvaaa, frenzy.\\nxidaQiGttjg, a harper.\\nAvaS,ayooag, Anax-\\nagoras.\\nEXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE.\\nyXwaca, the tongue,\\ndyood, the forum.\\nizyfyhvg, an artist.\\nrfiovri, pleasure.\\nycovia, an angle.\\n\u00c2\u00a7ia, force,\\navna, a\\nayoonGTi ig, a wrestler.\\nsiQijvq, peace.\\naocpia, wisdom.\\n[AtXaivcc, black.\\nrdXaiva,\\ndixw, justice.\\nfiovXtj, counsel.\\nlia%aiQa, a sword,\\n(poovijiiariagj high-\\nminded.\\nNote. The learner should decline some of the words in this table ac-\\ncording to the different dialects and, in like manner, in the second and\\nthird declension?, according to their dialects.\\n20. SECOND DECLENSION.\\n83. The second declension has two termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular og and or ov\\nis always neuter, og never.\\n2", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "26\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a720.\\nACCENTS.\\n84. Words in the second declension are ac-\\ncented according to the following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. As far as the general rules permit (19, c.)\\nthe accent remains on the same syllable in the ob-\\nlique cases, as in the nominative. To this rule the\\ngenitive plural is not an exception, as in the first\\ndeclension.\\nExc. 1. The Attic forms in cog and cov are accented as in the\\ncommon form i. e. the final long syllable permits the accent to\\nremain on the antepenult. See 88, dvcoyscov.\\n2. When the accent, in the nominative singular,\\nis on the final syllable, all genitives and datives\\nhave the circumflex on the final syllable.\\nExc. 2. Except the genitive singular of nouns in cog as, vacog,\\ngen. veco.\\n85. EXAMPLES.\\n1. Paradigm of the Masculine and Feminine Nouns in og\\no Xoyog, the speech.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. loy-og,\\nG. loy-ov,\\nD. X6y-q\\nA. loy-ov,\\nV. loy-s.\\nN. A. V. Uy-co,\\nG. D. loy-oiv.\\nN. loy-oi,\\nG. loy-cor,\\nD. loy-oig,\\nA. Xoy-ovg,\\nV. Xoy-oi.\\nIn the same manner also are declined nouns in ov, observing\\nthe second general rule (69-2) thus,\\n2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns in ov [ietqov, a measure.\\nSingular.\\nN. fJLETQ-OV.,\\nG. [AE70-OV,\\nD. [lEtQ-Cp,\\nA. [AEZD-OV,\\nV. UETQ-OV.\\nDual.\\nN. A. V. flETQ-CO,\\nG. D. utro-oiv.\\nPlural.\\nN. flETQ-Ct,\\nG. [lizo-cov,\\nD. fAATQ-Oig,\\nA. [lETQ-a,\\nV. {lETO-a.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a721.\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n86.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a721. DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.\\nSingular.\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Voc.\\nXay-og, A. cog. -ov, A. co, -ov, A. cov, co. -s, A. 6g cog.\\nI. D. ow.\\nNom.\\nXay-ot, A. qj.\\nGen.\\n-ofc, A. a)g,\\nI. D. 0\u00c2\u00abTf.\\nP^ at 7\\nAce. Voc.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0of^, A. cog. -ol, A. cp.\\nD. 034, 0\u00c2\u00a3.\\nvE. oig.\\n87. Neuter nouns in the Attic dialect have the same termi-\\nnations with nouns in og except that v is substituted for g.\\nThus it will appear that the Attic form, in which og is changed\\ninto cog, ov into cov, and oi into cp, is the principal variation in\\nthis declension. Let it be observed, however, that a, long, and ij,\\nbefore og, are changed into e before cog as, Xaog, Attic Xscog. a\\nshort remains unchanged; as, ra-og, ra-cog, or it is contracted\\nwith the o into cog; as, dy/;oaog, dyijocog. For the genitive and\\ndative in epi or cpiv, see 31.\\n88. EXAMPLES OF THE ATTIC DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN Og.\\nSingular.\\ntycog for Xayog.\\na hare.\\nVEcog for mo?. ceyo^sco^ for ay\\na temple. a building\\nN. Xaycog,\\nG. Xayco,\\nD. Xaycp,\\nA. Xayco, or cov,\\nV. Xaycog, or 6?.\\nvecog,\\nVECO,\\nvsqj,\\nveco, or VECOV,\\nvEcog, or vadg.\\nDual.\\ndvcoyEcov,\\ndvcoyEco,\\ndvcoyEop,\\ndvcoyEcov,\\ndvcoyEcov.\\nN. A. V. A\u00c2\u00ab^o5,\\nG. D. ^a/cjw.\\nVECO,\\nVECpV.\\nPlural.\\ndvcoyEco,\\ndveoysepv.\\nN. V. Xayop,\\nG. ActyeoV,\\nD. Xaycpg,\\nA. Xaycog.\\nVECp,\\nVECOV,\\nVEcog,\\nVEcog.\\ndvcoyEco,\\ndvcoyEcov,\\ndvcoyEcpg,\\ndvcoyEco.\\nObs. The Attics did not decline all nouns in og in this man-\\nner, but only a very few. The same forms occur also in the Ionic", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "23\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a722.\\nand Doric writers. After this form, the Attics often declined\\nnouns which otherwise belong to the third declension as, Mirco,\\nAce. for Mivcoa, from Mivcog, G. Mivcoog ytXav, Ace. for je Ico-\\nza, from yshjog, yiXcozog.\\n22. CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.\\n89. In the second declension contractions are\\nseldom used, and never, unless the first of the con-\\ncurrent vowels is short.\\nconcurring are\\nRULES.\\nRule I. Two short vowels\\nchanged into ov.\\nExcept se in the vocative singular, never contracted.\\nRule II. A short vowel before a diphthong,\\nor before a vowel not short, is rejected.\\n90. EXAMPLES.\\n6 voog, contracted vovg,\\nthe mind.\\nSingular.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN.\\nRule 1 vo-og vovg\\nN. A. V.\\nN. 2 vo-oi\\nVOL\\nG.\\n2 vo-ov vov\\n2 vo-co vco\\nG. 2 vo-cov\\nrcov\\nD.\\n2 vo-(p vco\\nG. D.\\nD. 2 vo-otg\\nro7g\\nA.\\n1 vo-ov vovv\\n2 vo-oiv volv\\nA. 2 vo-ovg\\nvovg\\nV.\\n1 vo-e vov\\nV. 2 vo-oi\\nVOL\\nTO OOTtOVy\\ncontracted darovv, the hone.\\nSingular.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN.\\n0078- OV OOZOVV\\nN. A. V.\\nN. ooze- a\\nooza\\na.\\nooze-ov bozov\\nOOZS- CO OOZCO\\nG. OOZE-COV\\nOOZCOV\\nD.\\nOOZE-Cp OOZCp\\nG D\\nD. oozE-oig\\noozoig\\nA.\\nOOZE-OV OOZOVV\\nOOZE-OIV oozoiv.\\nA. 6oTE-a\\nooza\\nV.\\nOOZE-OV OOTOVV\\nV. bozt-a\\nooza\\nDecline and contract in the same maimer, nXoog, navigation;\\n6og, a stream x v oog, doion adaXcpidsog, a nephew.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "23.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n29\\nayyz kog, a messenger\\naETog, an eagle.\\nw log, a combat.\\na Xov, a prize.\\napTtzXog, a vine.\\naoyvQog, silver.\\n91. WORDS FOR PRACTICE.\\naoyvQiov, silver.\\ntQyoVy work,\\n[tijlov, an apple,\\nvorog, the south wind,\\nolxog, a house.\\nTtaidiovj a child.\\nqoSoVf a rose\\naidijoog, iron.\\notQUTog, an army,\\ncpogriov, a burden.\\n%alxog, copper.\\nXQveog, gold.\\n23. THIRD DECLENSION.\\n92. The third declension has seven termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular, a, i, v, (o, v q,\\ng it has all genders, and increases the noun by\\none syllable in the oblique cases.\\nNote. Nouns in and \\\\p are considered as ending in g (8-6).\\n93. The root, seldom unchanged in the nomi-\\nnative, is always found in the genitive singular by\\nomitting og (64).\\nThe oblique cases, for the most part, are formed\\nby adding the terminations (68) to the root.\\nACCENTS.\\n94. Words in the third declension are accent-\\ned according to the following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. The accent, in the oblique cases, remains on\\nthe accented syllable of the nominative, as far as\\nthe general rules permit, 13 17.\\nExc. 1. But avrjQ, da/jQ, nat/jo, and gcqttjq, in the vocative,\\nthrow the accent back on the penult; as, av\u00c2\u00a3Q, dueo, c. See\\n104, Exc.\\nExc. 2. When the genitive singular ends in cog instead of og\\n(98-4), there is no change of accent, and the genitive plural is\\naccented as the genitive singular as, nohg, rtolEcog, ttoIscov.\\n2. Words of one syllable in the nominative sin-\\ngular, accent the final syllable of the genitive and", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "30\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a723.\\ndative in all numbers and in these, the final sylla-\\nble long has the circumflex. So also yvvr], xvcov,\\nand syncopated substantives in r]Q, 99-4.\\nExc. 3. Except d(ig, a torch dpcag, a slave ftc6g, a jackal\\n%Qcig, xgarog, the head ovg, the ear; naXg, a child; cv/\u00c2\u00a3, a\\nmoth Tgcag, a Trojan ycog, a burning q oog, light which in\\nthe genitive plural, and in the genitive and dative dual, have the\\nacute accent on the first syllable.\\nExcept also participles of one syllable as, 8ovg, dovrog, c.\\nand the dual and plural of nag, viz. navtoiv, ndvtcov, nam.\\n3. The vocative of nouns in avg, tvg, ovg, co,\\nand cog, has the circumflex on the final syllable\\nas, yoau, fiaGcXsu, c.\\n95. Nouns in the third declension are declined\\nas follows\\n1. Paradigm of Masculine and Feminine Nouns 6 rjQ, the\\nwild beast.\\nDual.\\nSingular.\\nN. fo f\\nG. fttjo-og,\\nD. 11Q-1,\\nA. dTiq-a,\\nv. afe.\\nN. A. V. fiiJQ-e,\\nG. D. d-no-olv.\\nPlural.\\nN. 7jQ-eg,\\nG. )jq-o5v,\\nD. rjQ-Gi,\\nA. 7jQ-ag y\\nV. fffJQ-eg.\\nNeuter nouns are declined in the same manner,\\nobserving the 2d general rule, 69-2.\\n2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns fiijfia, a tribunal.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN. ^ijjua-za,\\nN. A. V. fifaa-TE, G. fiima\\nD. n\\nG. D. ftmid-toiv.\\nSingular.\\nN. firjpa,\\nG. fitjiAa-tog,\\nD. pfjpa-Ti,\\nA. ptfiia,\\nV. pTifia.\\nrow,\\nD. ftiuia-ci, 44-8.\\nA. fifoa-ta,\\nV. fifjfia-ta.\\nNote. In the declension of nouns which take roc, doq, or oq, in the\\ngenitive, the Rule 44-8 must be particularly attended to in the dative\\nplural.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "N.\\n6 Tiaidv,\\na paean,\\ntO fltll,\\nhoney,\\nfifty\\na moth,\\n6 rivq,\\nfire,\\n6 Sevocpav,\\nXenophon,\\nto aoSfia,\\nthe body,\\n\u00c2\u00a724, 25. THIRD DECLENSION. 31\\n24. FORMING THE GENITIVE.\\n96. GENERAL- RULES.\\n1. If the noun does not end in g, add og, or\\ntoq to the nominative as,\\nG. naiav-og Root naiav\\n\\\\iiXi-tog fisXiz\\n/n}jv-6g fiijv\\n7ZVQ-6g 7TVQ\\nEevotyav-rog Esvocpcovt\\nocofia-tog acofxat\\n2. If the noun ends in q 3 reject g, and add og,\\nrog, dog, or og as,\\nN. 6 ygcog, a hero, reject g yoco G. ljoco-og Root tjooj\\n6 Xdftyg, a caldron, le^i] )J^rj-tog Xe^r t t\\n?j ).a\\\\mdg, a torch, \\\\a\\\\mct. Xci[i7za-8og lafiTzad\\n6, fj oovig, a bird, oqvi oon- og 6qvi\\n6 uva\u00c2\u00a3, a rider, avax avax-tog dvay.t\\nTj XaiXaxp, a storm, XaiXan laiXan-og XaiXan\\nWhether og, tog, 8og, or og, is to be added, can be learned\\nonly by practice and consulting the dictionary.\\n97. Exception. But if the noun ends in og,\\ninsert s before it. All these are neuter as,\\nN. tEi /og, a wall, G. tsfy-e-og Root ter/s\\npsoog, apart, [iso-E-og fisoe\\nooog, a mountain, oo-e-og oqe\\n\u00c2\u00a725. THE PENULT.\\n98. If the final syllable of the nominative con-\\ntain a long vowel or diphthong, it is commonly\\nshortened in the root by the following\\nRULES.\\n1. A diphthong casts away its subjunctive vow-\\nel; as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "32\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a725.\\nN. 6 @a Jilevg, the king, G. fiaGilz-wg, Root fiamls.\\n6 fiovg, the ox, @o-6g, (jo.\\nvuvg, the ship), Doric, va-bg, va.\\n2. A long vowel is changed into its own short\\nas,\\nN. 7Z0t[J,TjV t\\nAnrco,\\n6 xavcov,\\n6 dQcixav,\\nt] aidoog,\\nthe shepherd,\\nLatona,\\nthe rule,\\nthe dragon,\\nmodesty,\\nhaving struck,\\nTtoifisv-og,\\nAqro-og,\\nxavov-og,\\ndgdy.ov-Tog,\\naldo-og,\\nrervyo-Tog,\\nRoot, TTOtjlEV.\\nAr\\\\TO.\\nxavov.\\ndoaxovT.\\naldo.\\nrezvopoz.\\n3. t and z/, whether long or short, are changed\\ninto s as,\\nN. r) dyvafiig, the power, G. dvvdfis-cog, Root, Swaps.\\nto nay, the flock, Tzws-og, ncoE.\\nTHE GENITIVE IN COg.\\n4. Nouns in ig and vg, when they change i and\\nv into s, and likewise nouns in svg, take the Attic\\ncog instead of og in the genitive as,\\nN. 6 vo^Evg, the shepherd, G. vofxs-cog, Root, vofis.\\ni) Tiohg, the city, nols-cog, note.\\n6 Tiiiyyg, the elbow, m)%E-(Qg, ^IX*\\n99. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. Neuters in i and v have the genitive in sog as, aciv G.\\naaiEog. The Ionic and Doric writers retain t in the oblique\\ncases of nouns in ig and t as, Tiohg, G. TioXiog, D. nbhi. But\\neven in these, the dative is usually contracted into ei as, Tioht,\\ntioXei. Also nouns in ig sometimes have the Attic ecov instead\\nof sow, in the genitive and dative dual.\\n2. All Greek words ending in g, which take v in the genitive,\\nappear to have originally ended in vg, and the v at length was\\ndropped for the sake of euphony; 46-16. But to maintain the\\nformer quantity of the nominative, the doubtful vowel was made\\nlong, and the short vowels were changed into their own diph-\\nthongs thus, the original terminations avg, ivg, vvg, svg, ovg y\\nwere changed into ag, Ig, vg, Eig, ovg.\\nBut the oblique cases, regularly formed from the original nomi-\\nnative, remain unchanged as in the following examples", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "originally.\\nGen.\\nRoot.\\nylyavg,\\ndelcpivg,\\nqioQxvvg,\\nxzs vg,\\n68ovg,\\nyiyav-zog,\\ndeXcpiv-og,\\ncpOQxvv-og,\\nxzev-og,\\n68ov-zog,\\nyiyavz.\\ndeXcpiv.\\nCpOQXVV.\\nxzev.\\nb8ovz.\\n\u00c2\u00a726. THIRD DECLENSION. 33\\nNorn.\\nyi yag\\ndeXqjfg,\\ncpoQxvg,\\nxzsig,\\nodovg,\\n3. Instead of rejecting v before g in the nominative, sometimes\\nthe g was dropped and the v retained; and hence the double\\nforms of the nominative which sometimes occur: as, dsXcpig or\\nStXcpiv cpOQxvg or cpooxvv.\\n4. Certain nouns in ztjq, having zsQog in the genitive, are con-\\ntracted by syncope in the genitive and dative singular, and in the\\ndative plural (106-R. 2), and throw the accent in the genitive\\nand dative singular on the final syllable (94-2) as,\\nrtartjQ, a father, nazloog, Ttazqbg.\\nTZCCTtQl, TtCCZQl.\\n(A.rjT?jQ, a mother, [iyzeoog, {njZQog.\\nSo also, dvtjQ, a man, avtQog, avdQog. (47-19.)\\nNote. The nouns thus contracted are 7iart jQ, a father ftTjTtjQ, a mo-\\nther uyd.Tt]Q, a daughter yaarriQ, the belly J^/li^ttjo, Ceres and\\nxvr t q, a man. This last rejects e in all the cases and numbers except\\nthe vocative singular.\\n\u00c2\u00a726. THE GENITIVE OF ADJECTIVES.\\n100. Adjectives of the third declension form the genitive by\\nthe same rules as substantives but some form it from the mas-\\nculine, and others from the neuter gender; and the genitive\\nformed from either gender, is also the genitive of the other. The\\ngender from which the genitive is formed may be ascertained by\\nthe following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. Adjectives in eg and ovc, form the genitive\\nfrom the nominative masculine as,\\nfi.oy cccQig, 1 q q of both, cpiXondtQidog, Root, $XonazQi8.\\nM. 8ijiovg, u u d 8 u 8mo\\nN. OlTtOVV,\\n2. Adjectives not in eg or ovg, form the genitive\\nfrom the nominative neuter as,\\n2*", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "31 THIRD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a727.\\nMasc. Neut. Gen. of both. Root.\\nTtQ)]v, te qev, tender, TEQEv-og, teqev.\\ndh]d-{jg, dln Eg, true, dXi]{rt -og, dfoj s.\\n[At lag, [isXav. black, fit Xav-og, fieiar.\\n%aQmg, %uqIev, graceful, %aol\u00c2\u00a3v-Tog, yaqiEvx.\\nObs. 1. This rule applies universally to participles of the third\\ndeclension, and these have their genitive always in tog as,\\nN. Masc. N. Neut. Gen. of both. Root.\\ncrag, craVf atdv-iog, cravr.\\n8idovg, didov, 8i86v-iog, didorr.\\nrvncovj rvaov, tvTtov-tog, xvnovt.\\nrvq) Eig, rvqi Ev, rvqi Ev-zogy ivcp Evr.\\nFor the declension of adjectives and participles, see 46, 47.\\n27. THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.\\n101. The Accusative singular of masculine and\\nfeminine nouns commonly ends in a. But,\\n102. SPECIAL RULES.\\nRule 1. The genitive in og pure, from ig, vg,\\navg, and ovg, changes g of the nominative into v\\nthus,\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\noqiig, a serpent, ocpi-og, ocpiv, 0(p.\\nfioTQvg, a bunch of grapes, fiorov-og, @6tqvv, @otqv.\\nvavg, a ship, Doric, va-bg, vavv, va.\\nfiovg, an ox, fio-6g, fiovv, fio.\\nLikewise Xdag and %aQtg have v as,\\nNorn. Gen. Ace. Root.\\nXdag, a stone, Xda-og, Xdav, Xaa.\\nXdqig, favour, ^doi-tog, X a Q ir\\nExc. But /llg, /Ji-6g, Jupiter, has Ala and Xdotg, the name\\nof one of the Graces, has Xdoiza and %qovg, the skin, has %ooa,\\nseldom %qovv.\\nRule 2. Words in vg, -tog, and compounds of\\n7ioug, afoot, have a or v as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a728. THIRD DECLENSION. 35\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\ncoxvg, coxs-og, oox\u00c2\u00ab-\u00c2\u00ab, or coxvv, coxs.\\ndinovg, dmo-dog, di7to-du, or diTiovv, dinod.\\nEule 3. Words in ig and vg not accented on\\nthe last syllable, with the genitive in og not pure,\\nhave a or v\\\\ as,\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\nSQig, SQi-dog, sgi-da, or iqiv, ioid.\\nxogvg, xoQV-ftog, xoQV-d-a, or xoqvv, xoqv\\nSo also, xleig, xlei-dog, xlsT-da, or xXziv, xleid.\\nObs. Such words, in prose, have almost always v, seldom a\\nbut in poetry, commonly a, seldom v.\\n28. THE VOCATIVE SINGULAR.\\n103. The vocative singular is for the most part\\nlike the nominative. But,\\n104. SPECIAL EULES.\\nRule 1. A short vowel in the genitive, from a\\nlong vowel of the nominative, remains short in the\\nvocative as,\\nNom. Gen. Voc. Root.\\n{ifjtTjQ, a mother, prjrdQ-og, [lyreo, {i^ref).\\nExtcoq, Hector, Exroo-og, Extoq, Extoq.\\nExc. But nouns accented on the last syllable, have the voca-\\ntive long as, 7ioi\\\\i)\\\\v Gen. noifiev-og, Voc. 7toi[iijV except Tta-\\nrrjQ, avfjQ, and datjo, which have the vocative 7zaz\u00c2\u00a3Q y ccvsq, and\\ndaso, with the accent thrown back.\\n^noXlcov, noasidaiv, and ocotj^q, with the long vowel in the\\ngenitive, have the final vowel short in the vocative, and the ac-\\ncent thrown back thus, UnoXkov, Tlooeibov, acoreQ.\\nRule 2. Nouns in eg, vg, and tvg, reject g in the\\nvocative; as,\\nocpig, V. oqpt fiorovg, V. $6tqv, ^aailsvg, V. fiacilev.\\nLikewise, TtaTg, yqavg, and ftovg Voc. TtaT, yqav, [iov.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "36 THIRD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a729.\\nRule 3. Feminines in cog and co make the voca-\\ntive in oc as,\\naidoog, V. aldoT; 2Ja7tq)(Q, V. ZanyoT.\\nRule 4. Nouns in ag, -avrog (99-2), have the\\nvocative in av those in sig, -tvrog have the voca-\\ntive in sv as,\\nNom. Gen. Voc. Root.\\nAiag, Ajax, Ai av-tog, Aiav, Aiavr.\\nJZifiosig, Simois, JEijiozv-rog, JZifioev, JEijioevt.\\nNote. In proper names, however, the poets often reject v; as, AXa\\nfor AXctv.\\nObs. yvvr\\\\ has yvvai in the vocative and ava%, in addressing\\nthe deity, has ava otherwise ava%.\\nRule 5. In adjectives, the vocative masculine\\nis like the nominative neuter as,\\nN. Masc. N. Neut. V. Masc.\\naXqfrfjg, a%?i sg, aXij e g.\\nils/flA-wv, ilsijftov, zlfyfiov.\\ndiTTOVg, SlTtOVV, 8l7TOVV.\\nfislag, {islav, fisXav.\\nyaqUig, X a Qi sv X a Q^ \u00c2\u00a3v a so X a Q l\u00c2\u00a3l\\nNote. This rule does not apply to participles. These follow the gen-\\neral rule; as, 1ST. V. rv7tro)v, xvnxouaa, tutztov.\\n29. THE DATIVE PLURAL.\\n105. The dative plural is formed by adding ai\\nto the root. Besides the changes required by the\\nrules of Euphony (44-8), other changes are to be\\nnoticed under the following\\n106. special rules.\\nRule 1. Nouns in tvg, avg, and ovg, insert v\\nbefore oi in the dative plural as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a729.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n87\\nN. 6 \u00c2\u00a7a(Jilsvg f the king, G. {taaiXe-wg, D. PL ^aodsv-oi.\\nqavg, the ship, va-6g, Doric. vav-Gi.\\nr) \u00c2\u00a7ovg, the cow, @o-6g, fiov-Gi.\\nExc. But Tiovg, afoot, Tto-dog, has noGi.\\nRule 2. Nouns in ttiq -tsqoq, after a syncope,\\nhave act (99-4) as,\\nnarriQ, G. narso-og, (7taTEQGi) by syncope, narqaGi.\\nSo avrjo, avzo-og, (uve ogi) uvoqolgi.\\nExc. But yaari iQ, G. yaatEQ-og, has sometimes yccGrtjoGi.\\n107. Examples of the preceding Rules,\\nIn the following examples, note the difference between them and\\nthe example tiq, ijQoq, 95-1, and give the rule for the difference.\\nSingular.\\nb, pasturer.\\ncow.\\n6, a divinity.\\n6, lion.\\no, shepherd.\\nN.\\nvopevg\\nfiovg\\ndaifj-cav\\nXecov\\n7ioi\\\\ir]V\\nG.\\nvo^s-cog\\n\u00c2\u00a7o-6g\\ndaipov-og\\nXiovt-og\\nTtOljlEV-Og\\nD.\\nvo\\\\ii-i\\npo-i\\ndaifiov-i\\nXiovt-i\\n7t0l\\\\LEV-l\\nA.\\nvofis-a\\nftovv\\ndaipov-a\\n1eovz-cc\\nnoi\\\\iEv-a.\\nV.\\nVOflEV\\n@ov\\ndaipov\\nDual.\\nXeov\\n7101\\\\L1\\\\V\\n.A.V.\\nV0\\\\HE-E\\n\u00c2\u00a76-8\\ndaipov-s\\nXiovt-s\\nTtOljlEV-E\\nG.D.\\nV0[IE-01V\\nfio-oTv\\ndaifiov-oiv\\nPlural.\\nXeovt-oiv\\n7t0ljlEV-0lV\\nN.\\nVOfiE-Eg\\n@6-Eg\\ndaifiov-sg\\nXiovz-eg\\n7tOlflEV-Eg\\nG.\\nV0\\\\lE-WV\\n@0-CQV\\ndaifiov-cov\\nXeovz-cov\\nTtOtflEV-COV\\nD.\\nVOflEV-OL\\nfiov-oi\\ndaifio-Gi\\nXeov-gi\\n7l0tflE-Gl\\nA.\\nvofis -ag\\n\u00c2\u00a76-ag\\ndafaov-ag\\nXiovz-ag\\nTZoijiEv-ag\\nV.\\nvoiii-Eg\\n\u00c2\u00a76-Eg\\ndaifiov-Eg\\nSingular.\\nXsovz-sg\\nnoijiEv-Eg\\nto\\ncity.\\nsow.\\n6, swift.\\nr) y strife.\\n6, father.\\nN.\\nTtofag\\n6vg\\ncoxvg\\nsj)ig\\nTzazjjg\\nG.\\n7t6).E-cog\\nGv-6g\\ncoyJ-og\\nEQid-og\\nnazo-og\\nD.\\n7l6).E- i\\ngv-l\\ncoyJ-i\\nEQld-l\\nTtarq-i\\nA.\\nTtohv\\ngvv\\nmxs-a, -vv\\nEQIV, EQlda\\nnatEQ-a\\nV.\\nnoh,\\nGV\\nCQXV\\nEQl\\nTZaZEQ", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "38\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n30.\\nDual.\\nN.A.V.\\nTzols-a\\nav-s\\n00X8-8\\nSQlS-S\\n7Zat8Q-8\\nG.D.\\nTloXs-OlV\\nGV-OIV\\nGOXS -OIV\\nPlural.\\n8QIO-OIV\\n71CU8Q-01V\\nN.\\nTzols-eg\\nov-eg\\nCOXt-Eg\\n8Ql8-8g\\n7zat8Q-8g\\nG.\\nttoXe-cov\\ngv-cov\\nCOM- COV\\n8Qld-(DV\\nTtaiEQ- OJV\\nD.\\n7ToXe-Gl\\nGV-Gl\\nCOXE-Gl\\nSQl-Gl\\nnaro-a-Gi\\nA.\\nnoXs-ctg\\nGv-ag\\ncoxs-ag\\nipio-ag\\n7tat8Q-ag\\nV.\\n7z6Xe-8g\\nGv-eg\\ncoxt-eg\\n8Qld-8g\\nnars Q-sg\\n30. DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n108. From the variety of terminations in nouns of this de-\\nclension, it is impossible to exhibit them in one concise table.\\nBut the general principles are The nominative and vocative At-\\ntic are alike, The Attic genitive is in scog, instead of aog and\\nlog, The Ionic has 1] in the penult, through the oblique eases,\\ninstead of and a and with the poets makes egi or 8ggi instead\\nof Gi, in the dative plural.\\nSingular.\\nNom.\\nGen.\\nDat.\\nAce.\\nVoc.\\npaavl-ivq.\\n(L tjos.)\\n-ia.\\n-tv, A. ivq.\\nM. fa\\n-toq,\\nD. [A. \u00c2\u00a3o)q. y\\n-u, I. tjt.\\nfl.^a.\\npaO-vq.\\n[Mete.)\\n-vv, ia.\\n-v, A. vq.\\n6 jP-M?.\\n-lO j,\\nA. ioq.\\n-u.\\n-IV.\\n-i, A. tq.\\nvavq.\\n-aoq,\\nI. tjoq fo )q.\\n-ail. tjt.\\n-avv, Lijvv, tja.\\n-av, A. avq.\\nal8-o )q.\\n-ooq,\\nJEt. oiq.\\n-o i.\\nI. ovv.\\n-oa, j x?\\n-Oi, A. o )q.\\nPlural.\\nNom. and Voc.\\nGen.\\nDat.\\nAce.\\nA. ijq.\\nPaabX-iiq. or rjq.\\n-E0)V, I. TJO)V.\\nI. tiat.\\nP. f/fCTO-t.\\nr I. rival.\\nP. ?jiaav.\\n-iaq, I. ijaq.\\nI ffc.\\nv-aiq, I. rjiq.\\n-aow, I. tjo)v.\\n-avq, I. Tjaq.\\nt\\nI. taai.\\nXiZ-/-ta.\\n-tO)V.\\n-eav,\\nP. haat,.\\n-ta.\\nThus, Gen. %slXeog, of a lip, Dor. %eiXevg\\\\ Voc. Masc. 3vg~\\nrvysg, Attic 8vGzv%?ig; as, dvGtv)[i]g jeqov, unfortunate old\\nman Dat. pi. /c^fft, Ion. xeipsGGi, to hands Accus. yfyTca, La-\\ntona, Ion. yitjrovv, Gen. uGteog, of a city, Attic aGtscog; Voc.\\naidoi, modesty Attic uidcog.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a731, 32. THIRD DECLENSION. 39\\n31. THE PARAGOGIC pi or cpiv.\\n109. Sometimes, and particularly in Epie poetry, the sylla-\\nble qii or qiv annexed to the word, is used for the genitive or da-\\ntive, both singular and plural. It is annexed, in the\\nFirst declension, by changing a or n into ncpi, e. g. xsopoth j,\\nxecpuXfjCpi (tici, fiit](pi, or fiincpiv.\\nSecond declension, by changing og or ov into oyi, e.g. GTQa-\\nrog, GTQixzoqxv.\\nThird declension, by changing og, genitive eog, into soqn; as,\\n6%og, o^eacpi Gn i og, a-iffd-eacpiv.\\n110. A few deviations from this mode of annexing the qpt oc-\\ncur. This form of the genitive and dative appears to have had\\noriginally an adverbial signification like the endings -fri, d-ev, ds.\\nTo render it more definite, the preposition was often prefixed, as,\\n7zaqa vuvyiv, near the ship, or ships and lastly, it was used\\nfor a case without a preposition, in the same manner as the or-\\ndinary forms of the genitive and dative thus, nlaxog nTvocpw,\\nthe breadth of the fan, ayXa fyyi 7ienoi (ag, confiding in valour.\\n111. The termination ev appears to be an appendage of a\\nsimilar nature, but is found only in the genitive; as, s J ovqavo-\\n8V, from heaven. So ipsxrsv for iuov ot ev for gov, g.\\n32. GENDERS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n112. The Genders of substantives of the third declension,\\nso far as determined by the termination, are as follows\\n113. RULES.\\n1. Nouns in evg, ccg -avrog, av, and vv, are al-\\nways masculine as,\\nsvg oftevg, 6 a clasp Gen. 6%\u00c2\u00a3og\\nag -avrog uvdoiag, 6 a statue avdQiavrog\\nav naidv, 6 a pwan TTcuavog\\nvv yooxvv, 6 a harbour cpooxvvog\\n2. Nouns in ccg -ccdog, rr\\\\g -rr\\\\rog, ccvg, co, and\\nverbals in eg, are always feminine as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "40\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a733.\\nag, -adog\\nlaiinag, r\\\\\\na torch\\nGen\\nXafmadog\\nTvg, -TrjTog\\nxaxorqg,\\nwickedness\\nxaxorvrog\\navg\\nvavg, r\\\\\\na ship\\nvabg\\nCO\\nig, verbal\\ncpsida, fj\\n(pvGig, ?j\\nparsimony\\nnature\\nyeidoog\\ntyvamg\\n3. Nouns\\nin a, i, v,\\nag -cctoq,\\nog, and oq, are\\nalways neuter.\\na\\nfitjfta, ro\\na tribunal\\nGen\\nfrjpccTog\\ni\\nfisXi, TO\\nhoney\\nfislizog\\nV\\nTtCOV, TO\\na flock\\nrtco sog\\nag -atog\\n%Qsag, to\\nflesh\\nxomrog\\nog\\nTeiyog, to\\na wall\\nTei-xeog\\nOQ\\naOQ, TO\\na sword\\naooog\\nObs. 1. Nouns of other terminations are so varied in gender,\\nthat no general rule can be given respecting them.\\nObs. 2. Dialect frequently varies the gender in all the declen-\\nsions. Thus, fiarog is masculine in Attic, otherwise feminine\\nand so of others.\\n114.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a733. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECED-\\nING RULES, FROM \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a720-27.\\nDecline the words in the following list accent them give the rule\\nfor the genitive and the accent, and for the other cases when they. vary\\nfrom the example -d-fiQ.\\no\\n7\\nytocov (ovt)\\nat]8 jjv\\ndyxoov\\ncu iq\\nilmg\\neoig\\n7/ xoovg\\nTO XV (MZ\\nb ut iv\\nto avxtog\\nto ytvog\\n?i dxrig\\no TTtvqg\\ne)\\n8)\\nthe old man.\\nthe nightingale,\\nthe elbow,\\nthe air (104-1).\\nthe hope,\\nthe strife,\\nthe helmet,\\nthe wave,\\nthe month,\\nthe flower,\\nthe race,\\nthe ray.\\nthe poor man.\\nTO OQOg\\n6 ogsvg\\ncplo%\\n7Tpa$ig\\n%uov\\nIpdg\\nniTvg\\nU VTIQ\\nat$\\nthe mountain.\\nthe mule.\\nthe flame.\\nthe goose.\\nthe action.\\nthe cough.\\nthe flesh.\\nthe snoiu.\\n(vz) the thong.\\nthe pine.\\nthe seer.\\n(y) the goat.\\n(c) the haven.\\nto\\nto\\nto\\n(o)", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "34, 35. THIRD DECLENSION. 41\\n34. CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n115. In the oblique cases in the third declen-\\nsion, there is no contraction, unless the first of the\\nconcurrent vowels is either short, or a doubtful\\ntaken as short.\\nIn verbs and in some other contractions, the first of the con-\\ncurrent vowels is sometimes long.\\n35. GENERAL RULES.\\n116. The following Rules are universal, being applicable, not\\nonly to contractions of the third declension, but also to those of\\nverbs, and of all cases in which concurrent vowels admit of con-\\ntraction, except such as fall under the rules for contractions in the\\n1st and 2d declensions, 81 and 89. Concurrent vowels are con-\\ntracted as follows\\n1. A short vowel with the same, is contracted\\ninto its own diphthong as, ss into tc oo into ov.\\nExc. 1. In the third declension, ss of the dual is contracted\\ninto 7].\\nII. A short vowel with the other short, is con-\\ntracted into ov as, os or to into ov.\\nIII. A short vowel with is contracted into\\nits own long vowel as, s a into r\\\\ oa into co.\\nExc. 2. But sa pure into a.\\nIV. A short vowel with i 9 is contracted by Sy~\\nnceresis as, t C into tt o t into oc.\\nV. E before a long vowel or a diphthong, is re-\\njected.\\nExc. 3. But in verbs, sai is contracted into\\nVI. 1. O with a long vowel, is contracted into\\nco as, or] into co oco into co.\\n2. O with a diphthong, the prepositive vowel\\nbeing rejected, is contracted by Sy nceresis as, ooc\\ninto o\u00c2\u00a3, c.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "42 THIRD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a736.\\nExc. 4. But osig and oeiv, i being rejected, are contracted by\\nCrasis into ovg and ovv.\\nVII. 1. A with o, or is contracted into co\\nas, #o or ccco, into g?.\\n2. A with a vowel, not o or g?, is contracted into\\na as, into a, c.\\nO65. 1. A before a diphthong is contracted with the preposi-\\ntive vowel only, the subjunctive being rejected.\\nObs. 2. In contraction by crasis, i is never rejected, but is writ-\\nten under: except in osiv and 08ig, 119, Exc. 3.\\nObs. 3. Neuters in ag pure and gag, reject t in the oblique\\ncases, and then contract the concurrent vowels.\\nVIII. If the former of two vowels is i or v, or\\na long vowel, the latter is rejected; as, is contract-\\ned i vs v rjs, r\\\\.\\nNote. 2doc and crooq, safe, when a contraction occurs, are contracted\\nby the foregoing rules thus, adoc, aoiq, VII. 1. adov, fforv, VII. 1. ada,\\nad, VII. 2.; adovq, aox;, VII. 1.; aoaq, amq, III.\\n36. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES FOR\\nCONTRACTIONS.\\n117. The following list comprises all the concurrent vowels\\nthat usually admit of contraction. Contract them and give the\\nrules.\\n1 aa 12 aoi 23 eoi, 34 oco\\n2 es 13 aov 24 sov 35 oei\\n3 u 14 ea 25 tjs 36 oij\\n4 oo 15 8d, pure 26 ?ji 3 V oot\\n5 as 16 si 27 ?/\u00c2\u00a3t 38 oov\\n6 17 to 28 qai 39 va\\n7 ca 18 era 29 ee 40 v\u00c2\u00ab\\n8 ao 19 \u00c2\u00a3(j) 30 oa 41 w/, rare\\n9 aco 20 \u00c2\u00a3ca 31 of 42 aa\\n10 au 21 m 32 o 43 cor\\n11 22 ei] 33 of", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a737.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n43\\nWORDS FOR PRACTICE.\\n1 1 8. In the following words, contract the concurrent\\nthe rule for each contraction, change the accent where\\ncontraction, and give the reason for the change.\\n/lf]fxoa 8vseg\\nAi]\\\\io 5$\u00c2\u00a3vEog\\nXQt sa (exc. 2)\\nAijiioaxfevioiv\\nn\\\\ido[iEv\\ntifidovai\\nyjQu i\\nfiozQveg\\nXSQCCOIV\\n[.IEQ801V\\nTtolesg\\nXSQCCTOg\\n/.tgare\\n116. Ofe.3\\nAyi\\\\lo6$\u00c2\u00a3vee\\n8CLQ\\nAri\\\\i06 \u00c2\u00a3vu\\ncpiXmg\\ndqXooi\\ntifidco\\nzif-idei\\nyjqag -atog\\nfXSQEOg\\nfitQea\\ncpeidoog\\nXEQUTOW\\nyjqara\\ny.EQaTcov\\njjdt s\\nAqxoog\\nAr^oodivEa\\nAqtoi\\ndrjXoco\\nbrjXoov\\nXdag\\nrif^drj\\nocpisg\\nTlflTjEV\\nfJISQSl\\n[IEQEWV\\nqiEidoi\\nrijid.ri\\nd-rjXorj\\ncdog\\nvowels, give\\nrequired after\\n\\\\ieXitoev\\nArpba\\nHgay.Xt tjg\\nd/]X6t]T\u00c2\u00a3\\ndrjXoy\\nTljJLUE\\nrijiaEig\\noyu\\nxtgaa\\n[IEQES\\nuoXei\\ncpEidoa\\ncpiXtoi\\nrifidoi\\ndqXooi\\nooag\\n\u00c2\u00a737.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n119. N. B. In the inflection of declinable words, the vowels\\nthat concur are the final vowel of the root, and the first vowel or\\ndiphthong of the termination. In the examples of contracts that\\nfollow, as well as in the table of contract verbs (258), the hyphen\\ndoes not separate the termination from the root, but that part\\nof the root not affected by contraction, from the rest of the word.\\nBy this means the concurrent vowels are brought together, and\\nthe change made by contraction, is rendered more obvious.\\n120. Concurrent vowels are not always con-\\ntracted in the third declension, but only as direct-\\ned by the following\\nSPECIAL KULES.\\n1. The accusative plural assumes\\ntion of the nominative thus.\\nthe contrac-\\nts roiMQ-ssg, N. ow-isg, N. Sorg-vEg,\\nA.TQitjQ-eag r s /s A. ocp-iac, A. pozQ-vug, r v", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "41\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n37.\\nExc. But sag pure is contracted into dg (116, Exc. 2); as,\\n%osag, xoag.\\n2. The genitive in sog, from rig, sg, og, or in\\noog, not from ovg, and also neuters in ag pure and\\ncontract the concurrent vowels hi all cases.\\n121. Example of the Genitive in sog,from r]g.\\nr t TQtrjQijg, the trireme.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. TQltJQ-7]g\\nN. A. V.\\nN. TQUjQ-EEg\\nG. roirjo-Eog -ovg\\nTQUJQ-88 -7]\\nG. TQ17JQ-ECOV\\n-cov\\nD. TQUJO-El -El\\nG. D.\\nD. TQll iQ-EGl\\nA. TQUJQ-ECC\\ntQlt]Q-\u00c2\u00a3OlV -OIV\\nA. TQUjQ-Eag\\nV. TQitiQ-eg\\nV. TQlfjO-ESg\\n122. Example of the Genitive\\nin soQyfrom\\nOff.\\nto teTxog, the wall.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. T\u00c2\u00a3i%-og\\nN. A. V.\\nN. T\u00c2\u00a3l x-\u00c2\u00a3CC\\n-V\\nG. Tei%-8og -ovg\\nrei%-Ee\\nG. TElX tCOV\\n-cov\\nD. rsi%-si -si\\nG. D.\\nD. TSIX-EGI\\nA. ru^-og\\nTei%-eoiv -olv\\nA. TEiy-sct\\n-n\\nV. Tui-og\\nV. TEIX SK\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2n\\n123.-2%? C\\nrenitive in oog, n\\nrj ?ixc6, the echo.\\notfrom ovg.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. ?)x-c6\\nN. A. V.\\nN. ^f-oi\\nG. ii%-6og -ovg\\njjX-co\\nG. rjx-cov\\nD. )]X-ol -oi\\nG. D.\\nD. 7/x-ofc\\nA. i)x-oa -co\\ni)x-oTv\\nA. ))x-ovg\\nV. in-oi\\nV. ?/\u00c2\u00a3-o/\\n124.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 1. Noi\\njns in co and cog have\\nthe singular on\\niy,of\\nthe third declension. The dual and plural are of the second, 136\\n-2 (4). Hence the contraction takes place only in the singular,\\nas in the above example. The accusative in 6a contracted co,\\nfrom the nominative in cog, has the circumflex according to rule\\n(80 Obs.) as, aiooa contr. aloco. The same contraction from\\nthe nominative in co, has the acute; as in the example 123.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a737.\\nTHIKD DECLENSION.\\n45\\n125. Examples of\\nNeuters in ag pure and nag. (116, Obs\\n3.)\\nzb y.oeag, the flesh.\\nzb yJoag, the horn.\\nSingular.\\nSingular.\\nN. A. y. y.os-ag\\nG. y.oe-azog\\nD. y.qs-azi\\n-aog\\n-a i\\n-cog\\n-a\\nN. A. y. yJq-ag\\nG. yJq-azog -aog\\nD. yJo-azi -at\\n-ag\\n-a\\nDual.\\nDual.\\nN. A. y y.gs -azs\\nG. D. y.oe-dzow\\n-as\\n-doiv\\n-a\\n-cgv\\nN. A. y. y.s q-azs -as\\nG. D. y.eo-dzoiv -doiv\\n-a\\n-cov\\nPlural.\\nPlural.\\nN. A. y. xoe-aza\\nG. XQE-aZCOV\\nD. y.Qt-aai\\n-aa\\n-dcov\\n-a\\n-cor\\nN. A. y. xsQ-aza -aa\\nG. xeo-dzcov -dcov\\nD. yjq-aoi\\n-a\\n-cov\\n126. 3. The genitive in sog or sag, not from qg,\\nsg, og] and also the genitive in cog, contract only\\nthe dative singular and the nominative, accusative,\\nand vocative plural. Those in svg contract also\\nthe nominative dual.\\n127. Examples of the Genitive inecog, not from ?]g, eg, or og.\\n6 fiacriXevg, the king.\\nSingular.\\nN. fiaaiX-evg\\nGr. (laoil-scog, (98-4)\\nD. ttOll-U -St\\nA. fiaoil-s a\\nV. Baail-tv\\nDual.\\nk a. y.\\nfiaoiX-es -j]\\nG. D.\\nfiacnl-s oiv\\nPlural.\\nN. fta6il-seg\\nG. fiamX-ecov\\nD. fiacnl-Ewi\\nA. fiaoiX-tag\\ny. Bacnl-e sg\\n-tig\\n-tig\\n-sig\\nExc. But nouns in svg after a vowel,, contract also the genitive\\nand accusative singular, and the genitive plural thus,\\n6 yosvg, the measure.\\nSingular\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. yo-svg\\nG. yo-ecog\\nD. yo-s i\\n-ag\\n-81\\nn. a. y.\\nyo-ss -ii\\nG. D.\\nN. yo-esg -sig\\nG. yo-icov -cov\\nD. yOSVGl\\nA. yo-sa\\n-a\\nyo-eoiv\\nA. yo-eag -ag (11 6, exc. 2)\\ny. yo-ev\\ny. y o-s eg -eig", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "46\\nTHIKD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a737.\\nIn this way JleiQaievg has genitive Hei-qmi q, Acc. Ileioaia\\nand dyvievg, m the accusative plural, has ayvtdg contracted for\\nIleiQcuscog, TTei^aisa, ayviiag; and so of others.\\nnohg, the city.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. noX-ig\\nN. A. V.\\nN. noX-EEg\\n-eig\\nG. TioX-scog\\n7l6X-EE\\nG. 7l6X-EO)V\\nD. nok-u -EL\\nG. D.\\nD. 77(U-\u00c2\u00a3(7{(l\\nA. noX-iv\\ntcoX-eoiv\\nA. noX-sag\\n-Etg\\nV. ndX-i\\nV. Ttol-eeg\\n-sig\\nThe Ionics always\\ndecline words in ig, genitive wg as, noXig,\\nwg, like noqzig but\\nthey make the dative\\nin ee.\\n128. Example of the Genitive in cog.\\n6, r t TioQTig, the calf.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. nooT-ig\\nf N. A. V.\\nN. noor-ieg\\n-ig\\nG. TZOQT-iOg\\n710QZ-18\\nG. 7TOQT-ICOV\\nD. TtOQT-li -l\\nv G. D.\\nD. 7TOQT-161\\nA. TZOQt-lV\\n7Z0QZ-L01V\\nA. nopr-iag\\n-ig\\nV. TlOQT-l\\nV. TlOQT-lcg\\n-ig\\nNote. The words declined in this way, besides ^ropr*?, are 6 xic, tfAe\\nwood-worm 6, r\\\\ rlyqiz, the tiger 6 Ttoffiq, the husband /Lirjvic, wrath\\n7] toonuz, the keel; and the uncontracted ok, a sheep; some proper\\nnames; as, Tptg; and adjectives in v, which have tog in the genitive.\\nOther nouns in w,- not inserting a consonant are declined like nohc.\\n129. Exc. Adjectives in vg, neuter v, have the commou geni-\\ntive (Bog), and do not contract set in the plural. 152.\\n130. 4. Nouns in vg vog, and ovg oog, contract\\nonly the nominative, accusative, and vocative plu-\\nral; as,\\n6 ly vg, the fish.\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\n1% -V\u00c2\u00a3\\nG. D.\\nr%{r-voiv\\nSingular.\\nN. r^-vg\\nG. i%b x -vog\\nD. ird -w\\nA. i%{r-vv\\nV. l^-v\\nSo 6 \u00c2\u00a7ovg, the ox\\nvg\\nPlural.\\nN. r/fr-utg\\nG. r/fr-vcov\\nD. W -WH\\nA. iy(r-vag -vg\\nV. r/d--vtg -vg\\nG. fioog, N. V. Plural, ^ofc, contr. j5ov\u00c2\u00a3,\\nA. poag, /Jowff.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a737. THIRD DECLENSION. 47\\n131. 5. Comparatives in cov reject v in the ac-\\ncusative singular, and in the nominative, accusative,\\nand vocative plural, and then contract the concur-\\nrent vowels as,\\nfieXzicov, better.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nM. F. M. F. M. F.\\nN. A. V.\\n@eXzi-0V8\\nG. D.\\n$tXzi-bvoiv\\nN. fieXzi-cov\\nG. fieXzi-ovog\\nD. (isXzi-on\\nA. fieXzi-ova, -oa, -w\\nV. fielzi-ov\\nN. fcXzi-oveg, -oeg, -ovg\\nG. fieXzi-ovcov\\nD. fieXzi-ooi\\nA. fisXzt-ovag, -oag, -ovg\\nV. fisXzL-oveg, -oeg -ovg\\nN. A. Y. Plural, Neuter, fieXzi-ova, -oa, -co.\\n132. 6. The nominative contracted, is then de-\\nclined regularly; as,\\nWQ,\\nspring, by contraction r t Q,\\nG. ygog,\\nD. TjQl, G.\\nXaag,\\na stone, lag,\\nG. Xdog,\\nD. Xai] c.\\n133. Ohs. 2. When vowels concur in the oblique cases after\\nthe contraction of the nominative, they are moreover contracted\\nin the usual way thus, Hoay.Xeqg, Hercules, is contracted into\\nHoayJJjg, and then declined and contracted as follows\\nN. HoaxX-yg,\\nG. HoaxX-iog, contr. HoaxX-ovg,\\nD. *Hoay.X-i i, HqcmI-eT,\\nA. *HoayX-\u00c2\u00a3a, HoaxX-jj.\\nV. HoaxX-sg.\\n134. 7. In adjectives, the masculine and femi-\\nnine, in the oblique cases, assume the contraction\\nof the neuter thus,\\n[rttXiTObig, made of honey.\\nNorn. fisXiz-osig fiaXiz-osGcsa fisXiz-oev\\ncontr. fieliz-ovg fieXiz-owaa peXiz-ovv\\nGen. fieXtz-ovvzog fieXiz-ovaG^g (jtsXiz-ovvzog, c.\\nTijurjsig, honoured.\\nNom. zifi-Tj g zi\\\\i-rfi 56a ziji-ijev\\ncontr. zt[A,-rjg zifi-7j6CJa zifi-jjv\\nGen. zifi-tjvzog ziji-r jGCjqg ztp-jjvzog, c.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "48\\nTHIKD DECLENSION.\\n38, 39.\\n135.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a738. WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION\\nBE DECLINED AND CONTRACTED.\\nTO\\n(N. B. The following method of practising on these exercises will\\ndirect the student in his preparation. E. g. evatftyq Form the genitive\\ngive the ride decline; what cases contract the concurrent vowels?\\ngive the rule decline and contract, giving the rule for each contraction.\\nThis exercise should be continued till the student is perfectly ready and\\nat ease in the whole process.)\\nEvaefif jg, pious. yoayevg, a painter.\\ndfiEivcov, better. nsQixXsijg, Pericles.\\ni% vg, a fish.\\ntzXeic\\natayvg, a spike of corn,\\naosicov, more excellent.\\nvofisvg, a shepherd.\\nqseidco, parsimony.\\nytjQag, old age.\\nJiyiXXEvg, Achilles.\\nVTT8Q(pv)]g, excellent.\\ndXtjdeg, true.\\nfivg, a mouse.\\n{Atoog, a part.\\nttXewv, more.\\ncov, more,\\ndarvy a city.\\nTjwg, the morning.\\nfta vg, deep.\\nPeXtigov, better.\\nttei cq, persuasion.\\nrfiv, sweet.\\n\\\\7i6(jig, a husband,\\nj l og, custom.\\nxt oag, a horn.\\naid cog, modesty.\\nTiEQag, a limit.\\nTEi%og, a wall.\\ndQvg, an oak.\\ncfovsvg, a murderer,\\navcudfjg, impudent.\\nogog, a mountain.\\ncpQuaig, diction.\\nTTQtofivg, old.\\nivdeqg, indigent.\\ndioxXsqg, Diodes.\\nirtog, a word.\\ndoopEvg, a runner.\\n136.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a739. IRREGULAR NOUNS.\\n1. Some nouns have one gender in the singular, and another\\nin the plural as,\\n(1.) di cpQog, the chariot-seat; b jioyXog, the lever; 6 xal\\ni] Tdotaoog, Tartarus; 6 ToapjXog, the neck; 6 dEGfiog, the\\ndecree 6 vcoTog, the back 6 EQEtfibg, the oar 6 tvyog, the\\nyoke, are neuter in the plural; as, ra diqjQcc, c. The three\\nlast have also neuter forms in the singular, as, rb vcozov, c, but\\nwith a variation of meaning.\\n(2.) 0 d\u00c2\u00a36[i6g, the bond b Xvyvog, the lamp b xir/.Xog, the\\ncircle; b (jujoog, the thigh; b ovzog, corn; b oraftjiog, the sta-\\ntion; have both a masculine and neuter form in the plural as,\\nol dEGfiot and id dsa^d, fec.\\n(3.) H xt XEV og, the way, has at xeXevitol and rd xtXsv a.\\n(4.) To atddiov, the stadium, has ol orddwi, and id arddia.\\n(5.) rwt j, a woman; bdog, a way noXtg, a city; %eiq, a\\nhand, feminines, have rw yvvawE, rco bdco, rco ttoXie, and rco\\nXEiQE, iii the nominative and accusative dual.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a739. THIRD DECLENSION. 49\\n2. Some have more than one declension thus,\\n(1.) Some are of the 1st and 2d, as, i) orsydv-rj, and 6 Gzscpa-\\nvog, a crown; some, of the 1st and 3d, as, McJGtjg, -ov and\\nMcoaevg, -tcog, Moses. 2d and 3d, as, zb ddxovov, -ov, and zb\\nddxnv, -vog fidoTvoog, -ov, and pdozvo, -vqog, a witness.\\n(2.) Some have more than one declension, in the oblique\\ncases, from one form of the nominative thus, QdXtjg, gen. -ov\\n1st, and -tjzog 3d, Tholes; Jlong, -ov 1st, and -sog and -qzog\\n3d, Mars 6 and zb Gxbzog, darkness bypg, a chariot; eXeog,\\nmercy zdqiyog, pickle; oGGog, an eye; have -ov the 2d, and\\n-sog the 3d oaoog is used mostly in the dual, oggb c. 3d, and\\nG. and D. plural oggcov, oGGoig, 2d.\\n(3.) Some have the forms of different declensions, in certain\\ncases, though not regularly declined through all the cases thus,\\n1st and 3d in the ace. sing. /J^oGOevng, ace. -rpr and -ea, De-\\nmosthenes ^ooxodzyg, Socrates, cc. JLcoxodzijv and -ea dXxij,\\nfortitude, gen. -t/q (1st), dat. -t (3d) vg^iv)], a battle, dat. vg\\\\ii-\\nvi] and VGfim (1st and 3d) dvoodnooov, a slave, 2d, dat. pi. dv-\\nOQunbozGGi, 3d, Horn.; yiXtag b, laughter, G. ysXcozog, aco fsXco-\\nza and ytXwv, after the Attic form of the 2d declension (88).\\n(4.) Feminine nouns in go, and cog, of the third declension,\\nhave generally the form of the second as if from og, in the dual\\nand plural, when their meaning is such as to admit of their being\\nused in these numbers.\\n3. Some, from one form of the nominative, have different\\nforms in the oblique cases, in the same declension thus, ziyqig,\\na tiger, has -wg and -idog Qifug, Justice, has -(dog, -tzog, and\\n-iGzog XaQoov, Charon, has -covog and ovzog ybvv, a knee, and\\n8oqv, a spear, have -vog and -azog XQcog, %Qcoz6g, and %oovg,\\nXQobg, the skin, have two forms of the nominative, as well as of\\nthe oblique cases, both of the 3d.\\n4. Some appear to form the oblique cases from obsolete nomi-\\nnatives; as, ?)7Zuq, a liver; i^iao, a day eidao, food cpgtan,\\na well Gzt uo, fat; xdoijaq, a head; dXacpao, ointment; 6Y-\\nXecw, a bait bvnao, a benefit ov ao, fatness vdco.q, water\\ngxcoq, dirt ybvv, the knee ooqv, a spear, have the genitive in\\n-azog, as if from nominatives in ag thus, tj7tazog, vdazog, ybva-\\nzog. Ovg, an car, coxbg ydXa, milk, ydXaxzog yvvj), a woman,\\nyvvaixbg, voc. yvvai IfijGovg, gen. ov, dat. ov ace. ovv voc. ov.\\n5. Some are indeclinable, i. e. have no change of termination\\nin the different cases such as,\\n(1.) Names of letters; as, zb dXcpa, zov dXcpa, c. (2.) The\\ncardinal numbers from mvie to exuzbv. (3.) Poetic nouns which", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "50 THIRD DECLENSION. 40, 41.\\nhave lost the last syllable by apocope as, xo da, for 6w ua. (4.)\\nForeign names which are not susceptible of Greek inflexions as,\\n6 ^fioadp, rov Afioa ii, c.\\n137.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a740. DEFECTIVE NOUNS.\\n1. Some nouns have no plural; as, dtjQ,air; tivq, fire; elector,\\noil yijj earth aidcog, shame alg, salt.\\n2. Some have no singular; as, dlqura, victuals; Xfttivai,\\nAthens; oveioara, dreams and the names of festivals; as, Tla-\\nva ijvaia, Panathenwa.\\n3. Some occur in one case only, and are called monoptots\\nas, oo zdv, O friend, oj nonoi, O gods to oqislog, the advan-\\ntage.\\n4. Some have only two cases (diptots as, nom. tig, ace. liv,\\na lion; nom. Zevg, voc. Ztv, Jupiter to ovao, the vision; nom.\\nand ace.\\n5. Some have only three (trip tots) as, nom. fidozvg, a wit-\\nness, ace. \\\\idqrvv, dat. plur. (idoxvoi.\\n6. The Poets sometimes by apocope (40-6th) cut off the final\\nletter or syllable from a word as, y.dgn for y.do?jvov, a head.\\nSuch words are then indeclinable (136-5).\\n41. NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION.\\n138. Some nouns have peculiar significations, according to\\ntheir terminations as,\\n1. Masculine Patronymics, (53-1, 1st) commonly in 8ijg or\\ncar as, Tlijlsvg, Peleus, IJslEidtjg, Pelides, or the son of Pele-\\nus Koovog, S turn, Kqovicov or Koovidqg, the son of Saturn.\\n2. Feminine Patronymics, commonly in tag and ig, irtj and\\nicavj] as, Aijrmdg and ylytcotg, from A^tco, Latona JfdotjaTtrn\\nfrom JldQrjGTog Nrioivi] from NijQtvg Jt^Qioimvij from J4v.qi-\\naiog, c.\\n3. Gentile Nouns, (53-1, 2d) commonly in ijg, og, or evg,\\nmasculine and a, ag, or ig, feminine as, Xndqtr], Sparta,\\nHnaqtidtr l g, a Spartan; ^afiaQHa, Samaria, ^a^dqeizig, a\\nwoman of Samaria. But many of these are declined as regular\\nadjectives.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a742.\\nTHE ARTICLE.\\n51\\n4. Diminutives, (53-2, 3d) commonly in la, iov, iGxog, or Xog\\nas, 7taxf t Q, a father, TtaTQidiov, a little father (a term of endear-\\nment) Ttaig, a boy or girl, naioiov, a little boy or girl, nai-\\ndiGxi], a young daughter eoag, love, iocozvlog, a little lover.\\n5. AmpUficatives, (53-2, 4th) commonly in fia, or aw; as,\\nolxog, a house, oixt]{ia, a large building fi-QaGvg, bold, QaGcov,\\na bully.\\n6. Verbal Nouns. From the first root of the verb (209-4),\\nare formed three nouns of different terminations and signification,\\nindicating respectively the thing done, the doing, and the doer\\nas follows,\\nVerb.\\n1 Root.\\nTer.\\nDerivative.\\n7T0lE(O\\n7ZOIS\\nTtOlE\\n-[ICC\\nsig\\nnoiri\\\\ia\\nTtouiGig\\na poem\\nthe art of poetry\\n71018\\n-trig\\nTtoirin ig\\na poet\\nTlQaGGlx)\\nTzoay\\nnqay\\n-fia\\n-Gig\\nTtoay\\\\ia\\nnqahg, 44-7\\na deed\\naction or doing\\nTTQCCy\\n-tnq\\nor -trig\\nTiqavariQ\\nTZQaxri ig,\\n-2 a doer\\n\u00c2\u00a742. THE ARTICLE.\\n139. The article is an adjective word of three\\ngenders, and irregular in the nominative singular.\\nIn the oblique cases, the masculine and the neuter\\ngender are of the second declension the feminine\\nis of the first. It wants the vocative, and is thus\\ndeclined\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nK 6\\nV\\nTO\\nN. A.\\nN\\n01\\nat\\nTa\\nG. iov\\ntlqg\\nTOV\\n700\\nTO, TO)\\nG.\\nT X)V\\ntqSv\\nTWV\\nD. TCO\\nzrj\\nTCp\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nToTg\\nTaig\\nToig\\nA. TOV\\nt{\\\\v\\nTO\\nTOIV\\nTOIV TOIV\\nA.\\nTovg\\ntag\\nto.\\n140.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The Greeks spoke definitely, by placing the article before\\nthe substantive; indefinitely, by omitting it or prefixing the pro-\\nnoun Tig as, 6 av QcoTtog, the man av ocoTtog, a man or Tig\\navxTQCOTTog, any man.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "52 THE ADJECTIVE. \u00c2\u00a743, 44.\\n2. In grammar and lexicography, the article is used techni-\\ncally, to distinguish the gender of nouns (58, Obs, 1).\\n3. The enclitic ds annexed to the article through all its cases,\\ngives it the force of the pronoun this as, ods, ifis, rooa, this,\\nhe, she, it Gen. rovds, rfjads, rovde, c. In Homer and the\\nother old Epic writers, the article itself is, with few exceptions,\\nused in this sense.\\n4. The article 6, to, is sometimes used as a relative. (See\\n186-2.)\\n141. Note. The article 6, tj, to, being commonly placed before a\\nnoun, is by some grammarians called the prepositive article, to distin-\\nguish it from the relative pronoun oq, r\\\\, o, which, from being generally\\nplaced after the noun to which it refers, they call the postpositive arti-\\ncle.\\n142.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a743. DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE.\\nSingular.\\nM. and K\\nFern.\\nN. o ro\\n7 L\\nD. a\\nG. rov A. I. P. rolo D.\\nTea, rev\\nP. ri(o zijg\\nD. rag\\nI). TO) I. zicp\\nT\\nD. ra\\nA. rov to\\nPlural.\\nTi jV\\nD. rdv\\nM. and^N.\\nFern.\\nN. oi D. rol neut. rd\\nat D. rat\\nG. rmv I. rscov\\nrav D. zav\\nM. rdcop\\nD. zciig D. I. rolai I.\\nrloim\\nraTg D. I.\\nraioij T{jGi\\nP. roiSeoi and Toide cai\\nA. rovg D. rog rcog\\nrag\\n44. THE ADJECTIVE.\\n143. An adjective is a word used to qualify a\\nsubstantive; as, ccya og dvr^ a good man;\\n/.iia rj/Lispa, one day.\\nA noun is qualified 1 by an adjective, when the object named\\nis thereby described, limited, or distinguished from other things\\nof the same name.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "45.\\nFIKST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n53\\n1. The accidents of the adjective are gender, number, and\\ncase and in most adjectives also comparison.\\n2. Adjectives in Greek, as well as Latin, indicate the gender,\\nnumber, and case, by the termination as, y.aX-bg masc, xal-rj\\nfern., y.aX-ov neuter, c.\\n3. Participles have the form and declension of adjectives, while\\nin time and signification, they belong to the verb.\\n4. Some adjectives denote each gender by a different termina-\\ntion in the nominative, and consequently have three terminations.\\nSome have one form common to the masculine and feminine, and\\nare adjectives of two terminations and some are adjectives of\\none termination, which is common to the masculine and feminine\\nsuch want the neuter.\\n5. In adjectives of three terminations, the feminine is always\\nof the first declension. In all adjectives, the masculine is always\\nof the second or third and the declension of the neuter, is always\\nthe same with that of the masculine.\\n45. REGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND\\nSECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n144. 1. Adjectives of the first and second de-\\nclensions have the masculine always in og, the\\nfeminine always in r\\\\ or and the neuter always\\nin ov; thus,\\naaXog, beautiful.\\nSingular.\\nN. y.al-og -i] -6v\\nG. y.aX-ov -r t g -ov\\nD. xaX-ctj -fj -cp\\nA. y.aX-ov -rjv -ov\\nV. y.aX-8 -r\\\\ -ov\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\nyal-co -a, -co\\nG. D.\\nxaX-oiv -ciiv -oiv\\nPlural.\\nN. xaX-oi -ai -d\\nG. y.aX-cov -cor -cor\\nD. y.aX-oig -aig -olg\\nA. xaX-ovg -dg -d\\nV. xal-oi -ai -d\\nThus decline dya og, good xaxog, bad; epilog, friendly\\n\\\\iaXayog, soft; Xevxog, white; dtjXog, manifest; analog, tender\\nteonvog, pleasant.\\n145. 2. But og pure, and Qog, have a in the\\nfeminine as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "54\\nFIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n\u00c2\u00a745.\\nSingular.\\nSingular.\\nN.\\nQudi-og -a\\n-ov\\nN.\\n(pavEQ-6g\\nr\\na\\nov\\nG.\\nqciOi-ov -ag\\n-ov\\nG.\\ncpavEQ-ov\\nag\\nov\\nD.\\nQadi-cp -a\\n-co\\nD.\\ncpaveg-cp\\na\\ncp\\nA.\\nqu8i-ov -av\\n-ov\\nA.\\ncpavEQ-ov\\nav\\nov\\nV.\\nQadi-s -a\\n-ov\\nV.\\ncpavEQ-s\\na\\nov\\nThe dual and plural terminations are the same as in xalog.\\nBut the rules for the accents in the masculine and neuter (84),\\nand in the feminine (72), must be carefully observed.\\n146. Exc. The terminations oog, and sometimes sog, espe-\\ncially in adjectives denoting matter and colour, retain n as,\\noydoog, the eighth, oydorj bloog, pernicious, oXo/j yqvGEog, gold-\\nen, %qvo~\u00c2\u00a3T] yoivMsog, purple, cpoivr/Jq. Except where q stands\\nbefore the vowel; as, ad~qoog, frequent, d Qoa dgyvQEog, silver,\\naqyvQEa.\\n147. 3. The Attics often decline adjectives in\\noq, especially derivatives and compounds, by the\\ncommon gender, without the feminine termina-\\ntion thus,\\na dvarog, dd-dvarog, d dvatov, immortal.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nd dvar-og -og\\n-ov\\nN. A. V.\\nN. d dvar-oi\\n-01\\n-a\\nG.\\nadavdx-ov -ov\\n-ov\\nddavdt-co -co -co\\nG. dxtavdr-cov\\n-cov\\n-cov\\nD.\\nddavdr-cp -cp\\n-cp\\nG. D.\\nD. dfravdz-oig\\n-oig\\n-oig\\nA.\\nad civ at- ov -ov\\n-ov\\ndd-avdz-oiv -oiv -oiv\\nA. d avdt-ovg\\n-ovg\\n-a\\nV.\\nd dvar-s -e\\n-ov\\nV. d dvar-oi\\n-01\\n-a\\nAdjectives of the common gender are often expressed thus\\n6, dd-dvarog, to d dvaxov.\\nxov, zi\\\\g^ tov d avdroVi c.\\nIn the same manner decline\\nM. F.\\nN.\\nndncpikog\\nadixog\\nTtdfUflloV\\nadixov\\nfrom ndv and epilog\\nfrom or/.tj\\novnaviog\\nofiOQog\\novQaviov\\nOflOQOV\\nfrom ovoavog\\nfrom 6(j.6g and oqog\\nNote.^ Though this form of declension is most used by the Attic\\nwriters, it is not confined to them. Instances of it occur in Homer.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a746.\\nFIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS.\\n55\\n\u00c2\u00a746. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD\\nDECLENSIONS.\\n148. The masculine and neuter of all adjec-\\ntives not ending in\\nog, are of the third declension.\\nThe regular terminations of these are\\nM.\\nF.\\nN.\\n1. ag\\naiva\\nav\\n2. ug\\nsaocc\\nsv\\n3. vg\\nsea\\nV\\nAdjectives, so far as they are of the third declension, are ac-\\ncented the same as nouns, according to the rules, 94.\\n149. 1. Example\\nof an Adjective in ag, aiva,\\nav\\njusXag, black,\\nSingular.\\nN. fisl-ag\\n[itX-aiva\\nfiiX-av\\nG. [isl-avog\\nfieX-aiv?]g\\n[isX-avog\\nD. fisl-an\\nfieX-aivy\\n\\\\iiX-avi\\nA. (xsl-ava\\nfisX-aivav\\nfisX-aiva\\nliiX-av\\nV. fisl-av\\n[xt X-av\\nDual.\\nN. A. V. (is X-ave\\n(jleX-ccivcx,\\nliiX-ave\\nG. D. iiek-avoiv\\n[isX-awaiv\\nPlural,\\n\\\\jleX-6lvow\\nN. V. fisX-aveg\\ntiiX-aivai\\nlis X-avct\\nG. [leX-dvcov\\n[4,eX-cuvo5v\\n[ieX-cwusv\\nfiEX-aci, 46-16.\\nD. [AsX-aci\\n[iEX-aivaig\\nA. [isX-arag\\nfisX-atvag\\nfieX-ava\\n150. 2. Example\\nof an Adjective in seg, saaa,\\nev;\\n%aoisig, comely.\\nSingular.\\nN. %aQi-Eig\\n%aQi-\u00c2\u00a3G6a\\nXagi-Ev\\nG. xctQi-evxog\\nXaQiEGaqg\\nXaql-Evrog, 100-2.\\nD. laqi-avti\\n^dQi-Ecari\\n%ClQL-EVtl\\nA. ^aQi-Evia\\n%CLQl-EG6aV\\n/CtQl-EV\\nV. %a,Qi-Ev\\n%aQi-EG6a\\n%aQl-EV", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "56\\nFIEST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS.\\nDual.\\n\u00c2\u00a746.\\nN. A. V. yClQl-8VZ8 yaQl-8GGCi y(LQl-8rZ8\\nG. D. yaqi-EVZOiv yaQi-8GGaiv yaqi-tvtoiv\\nPlural.\\nN. V. yaQi-evzeg yagi-EGGcu yaqi-Evza\\nG. yaQi-svtcov yaQi-8GG ov yaoi-tvrcov\\nD. yagl-EiGi yciQi-tGGaig yaQi-sm, 47-18.\\nA. yaQi-evzag yaQi-sGGag yaQi-Eiza\\n151. Obs. According to Buttmann, adjectives in Eig (but not\\nparticiples) have egi and not sun, in the dative plural. Prof. An-\\nthon adopts the same termination. When so used it must be re-\\ngarded as an exception to the general rule, 6, 18.\\n152. 3. Example of an Adjective in vg, sia, v\\n7jdugy siveet.\\nSing\\nular.\\nN.\\nrjd-vg\\nr t 8-Eia\\n?)8-v\\nG.\\n?)8-t og\\n?]8-8i ag\\nrfi-iog\\nD.\\nqS-si, contr.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a081 rfi-Eia\\n1)8-81, contr. g\u00c2\u00bb\\nA.\\n?]d-vv, or -8a,\\n102-2. jfi-eiav\\n)j8-v\\nV.\\n?jO-V\\ntjS-eTcc\\nDual.\\n?]8-v\\nN. A.\\nV.\\nj)8-e e\\njj8-8ia\\n)8-8 e\\nG.\\nD.\\nj)8-s oiv\\nrfi-Eicav\\nPlural.\\n7j8-80lV\\nN.\\nV.\\nrj8-8Eg, contr.\\nEig ?j8-8iai\\nijS-sa, not contr.\\nG.\\ny8-soav\\n?j8-8lG0V\\n?)8-t cj)\\nD.\\njj8-86l\\ni;8-8icug\\n7)8-8 G l\\nA.\\n?j8-8 ag, contr\\nEig ?j8-Eiag\\ni)8-8cc, not contr.\\nAfter the same manner decline\\n1.\\nylvx-\\n3.\\nvg -8Ui -v\\nraX-ag\\n-cava\\n-av\\nvg -8ia -v\\n2.\\n(JltQ-\\njg -sea -v\\nflEllTO-Eig -EGGCC\\n-EV\\nfia\\nvg -8iu -v\\nrtfiij-Eig\\n-EGGCi\\n-8V\\no vg\\n-8UC -V", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a747.\\nDECLENSION OE PAETICIPLES.\\n57\\n47. DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES.\\n153. \u00e2\u0080\u0094Participles are declined like adjectives of three termi-\\nnations: those of the middle and passive in og, are inflected\\nthroughout like xakbg, 144. Of others, the feminine always fol-\\nlows the terminations of the first declension, and the masculine\\nand neuter, those of the third, the genitive being always formed\\nas directed, 100, Obs. 1. The terminations of these are as fol-\\nlows\\nGen.\\nM.\\nF.\\nN.\\n1.\\n-cov\\n-ovaa\\n~ov\\n2.\\n-(OV\\n-ovaa\\n-6v\\n3.\\n4.\\n-ag\\n-(6g\\n-aaa\\n-via\\n-av\\n-6g\\n5.\\n6.\\n7.\\n-eig\\n-ovg\\n-vg\\n-elaa\\n-ova a\\n-vaa\\n-8V\\n-6v\\n-vv\\nOf these the 2d.\\n,3d,\\nM.\\nF.\\nN.\\n-ovtog\\n-ovaijg\\n-ovtog, fec.\\n-ovtog\\n-ovayg\\n-ovtog, c.\\n-avtog\\n-daijg\\n-avzog, c.\\n-btog\\n-vlag\\n-ozog, c.\\n-tvtog\\n-daijg\\n-svtog, c.\\n-ovtog\\n-ovatjg\\n-ovtog, c.\\n-vvtog\\n-vaijg\\n-vvtog, c.\\n2d, 3d, and 4th are declined as examples thus,\\n154.-\\n1. TVTTcov, having struck.\\nSingular.\\nN. tvn-COV\\nG. tvn-ovzog\\nD. tvn-ovti\\nA. tvn-ovta\\nV. ZV7l-(OV\\nN. A.\\nV.\\ntV7Z-OVZS\\nG.\\nD.\\ntVTt-OVtOiV\\nN.\\ntvn-ovtsg\\nG.\\ntvn-ovtcov\\nD.\\ntvn-ovai\\nA.\\ntvn-ovtag\\nV.\\ntvn-ovzeg\\ntvn-ovaa\\ntvn-ovarjg\\ntvn-ovay\\ntvn-ovaav\\ntvn-ovaa\\nDual.\\ntvn-ovaa\\ntvn-ovaaiv\\nPlural.\\ntvn-ovaai\\ntvn-ovaoov\\ntvn-ovaaig\\ntvn-ovaag\\ntvn-ovaai\\n(2 Aor. Act.)\\ntV7t-0V\\ntvn-bvtog\\ntvn-ovti\\ntV7Z-0V\\ntVTl-OV\\ntVn-OVtS\\ntvn-ovtoiv\\ntvn-ovta\\ntvn-6vto3v\\ntvn-ovai, 47-\\ntvn-bvta\\ntvn-ovta\\n18\\nIn this manner are declined all participles which have v before\\ntog in the genitive also the adjectives ixcov and dixcov. When\\nthe accent of the nominative is on the penult, it remains there,\\nexcept as required by the general rules (15 19).\\n3*", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "58 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TEEMIKATIONS.\\n2. Tvipag, having struck. (1 Aor. Act.)\\nSingular.\\n47.\\nMr.\\ntvipag\\ntvipaa-a\\nrvxpav\\nG.\\nrvxpavt-og\\nzvyjuG-qg\\nrv\\\\pavT-og\\nD.\\niv\\\\pavr-i\\nrvxpda-r}\\nrv\\\\pavr-i\\nA.\\nrv\\\\pavz-a\\nvvipaa-av\\ntvxpav\\nV.\\ntvipag\\nzvipaa-a\\nDual.\\ntvipav\\nN. A. V.\\nzvxpavt-s\\nrv^dc-a\\nrvifjavr-e\\nG. D.\\nrvxpdvz-ovv\\nrvxpda-aiv\\nPlural.\\nrvxpdvz-oiv\\nN.\\nrvipavr-eg\\n7V\\\\pGC6-(U\\nzvipavt-a\\nG.\\ntvipdvt-cov\\nrv\\\\paa-cov\\nrv\\\\pdvx-cov\\nD.\\nrv\\\\pa-Gi\\nrvxpda-aig\\nTV\\\\pU-Ol\\nA.\\ntvxpavz-ag\\nivipdc-ag\\nTvxpavz-a\\nV.\\ntv^pavt-eg\\nrv^paa-ai\\ntvxpavr-a\\nIn like manner decline the adjective nag, ndaa, ndv, all.\\n155. 3. T6TV(p-6?g, having struck. (Perf. Act.)\\nSingular.\\nN. V. TSTvcp-cog\\n-via\\n-6g\\nG. rervcp-oTog\\n-viag\\n-oxog\\nD. rsrvqj-OTi\\n-via\\n-on\\nA. T8TVCp-6za\\n-vlav\\nDual.\\n-6g\\nN. A. V. rervcp-ors\\n-via\\n-0T8\\nG. D. rszvcp-oroiv\\n-viaiv\\nPlural.\\n-OTOIV\\nN. V. TEZVCp-OTEg\\n-viai\\n-bra\\nG. T8TVq)-OT(OV\\n-vicov\\n-dzcov\\nD. TETVCp-061\\n-viaig\\n-oat, 44-8.\\nA. 7E7vcp-6rag\\n-viag\\n-ota\\n156. The participle in cog, after a Syncope (26^), has the\\nnominative and vocative cog, coaa, cog G. corog, cootjg, cozog, c.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a748. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 59\\n48. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS.\\n157. Many adjectives of the third declension have but one\\nform for the masculine and feminine, and are therefore said to be\\ndeclined according to the common gender. They are declined\\nthroughout like nouns of the third declension, of the same termi-\\nnation. The regular terminations of these are cov, tjv, qg, ig, vg,\\nand ovg (viz. compounds of novg) and they form the neuter ac-\\ncording to the following\\n158. RULES.\\n1. Adjectives of the common gender in cov, r\\\\v,\\nqg, form the neuter by changing the long vowel\\ninto its own short one thus,\\nM. and F. N.\\nN. owcpocov c tyQOv prudent, G. acoqjQOv-og\\njST. aoQ^v aoQW male, G. ccqqev -og\\nN. alri fjg dXq sg true, G. dlq s -og\\nSo also some in coo as,\\nN. [A,sycd?jT(QQ [ieydX,ijtoQ G. fieyaXijroQ-og\\nNote. But TSQtp, tender, usually has the feminine riqeiva,\\nneuter teqsp.\\n2. Adjectives of the common gender in eg and\\nvg, form the neuter by rejecting g as,\\nM. and F. N.\\nN. evxagig ev^aqi G. ev^dqi-rog\\nN. udcwQvg adaxgv G. dddxov-og\\n3. Compounds of novg, a foot, have the neuter\\nin ovv others in ovg have the neuter in ov as,\\nM. and F. K\\nK dmovg, diTtovv, G. 8i7zod-og, 100-1.\\npovodovg, fiopodov, povod-ovzog.\\nNote. It is probable that novq was originally nooq whence di7tooq,\\nN. Sinoovy contracted Mnovq, Slnovv; and that the declension was after-\\nwards changed from the 2d to the 3d, as was done also in yeAo;?, and\\ntowq, from the ancient yilaoq, and fyctot;.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "60\\nIRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.\\n\u00c2\u00a748.\\n159. Examples of adjectives of the common\\ngender.\\n1. 6,7] o cocpQcov, prudent.\\nSingular.\\nN. 6CQCpQ-(x)V\\n-cnv\\n-ovog\\n-ovi\\n-ova\\n-ov\\nG. oojqiQ-ovog\\nD. GCQCpQ-OVl\\nA. ocoq)Q-ova\\nV. GG)(j)Q-OV\\nDual.\\nK A. V.\\nGCOCpQ-OVE -OVS\\nG. D.\\nGCOCpQ-OVOlV -OVOIV\\nPlural.\\nGcocpo-oveg -oveg\\n(jCOCfQ-OVCOV\\nGCOqjQ-OGl\\nococpQ-ovag\\nGcoqo-ovsg\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\n-ovoav\\n-061\\n-ovag\\n-oveg\\n-ov\\n-ovog\\n-OVl\\n-ov\\n-ov\\n-ovs\\n-OVOIV\\n-ova\\n-ovoov\\n-061\\n-ova\\n-ova\\nevxocQig, acceptable.\\nSingular.\\nsvyao-ig -ig\\nsvydo-izog -izog\\nEvyaQ-iri -izi\\nevydq-vza -iza\\nEvyaq-iv -iv\\nsvyaq-i -i\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\nsvydo-irs -its\\nG. D.\\nevyag-izoiv -izoiv\\nPlural.\\nN. svydo-izsg -izsg -ita\\nG. Evyao-izcov -izoov -izcov\\nD. svydg-iGi -ici -igi\\nA. Ev%do-iTag -izag -iza\\nV. Evyd.Q-izsg -izsg -iza\\n-i\\n-izog\\n-izi\\n-i, or\\n-i\\n-i\\n-ITS\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0now\\n-?jg\\n-s og\\n-81\\n-ea\\n-eg\\n2. 6, r) d%r} r]Q, true.\\nSingular.\\nN. dl?]d -?]g\\nG. akrft-sog\\nD. ahjd-ei\\nA. dlrft-ea\\nV. dkrft-eg\\nDual.\\nN, A. V.\\ndhft-es -es\\nG. D.\\ndl?] -e oiv -eoiv\\nPlural.\\nN. alqd -e eg -ess\\nG. dlyd-e cov\\nD. akyd -eGi\\nA. ahj -iag\\nV. dhft-eeg\\n-eg\\n-e og\\n-e i\\n-eg\\nr\\n-eg\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0eoiv\\n-ewv\\n-hi\\n-eag\\n-eeg\\n-ea\\n-e cov\\n-EGl\\n-ea\\n-ea\\n4.\\nccSccxgug,\\ntearless\\nSingular.\\nudw/.Q-vg\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA. ddaxQ-vv\\nV. dday.Q-v\\naow/.Q-vog\\nadaxo-vi\\n-vg\\n-vog\\n-vi\\n-vv\\n-v\\n-V\\n-vog\\n-vi\\n-v\\n-v\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\ndddy.n-vs -vs\\ndday.Q-voii -voiv\\nPlural.\\nN. dddxp-veg -vsg\\nG. dday.o-vcor -vcov\\nD. dddy.n-vGi -vgi\\nA. dddxQ-vag -vag\\nV. dddy.Q-veg -veg\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2va\\n-vcor\\n-VGl\\n-va\\n-va", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a749.\\nADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED.\\n61\\nNote. In these examples, aX?] qq and ada/.gvq are declined without\\ncontracting. The pupil may contract the concurrent vowels (120-2, and\\n130) and make the necessary changes in the accents.\\n49. IRREGULAE ADJECTIVES.\\n160. Every adjective not ending in some of\\nthe regular terminations already mentioned, is ir-\\nregular, wants the neuter gender, and is de-\\nclined like a noun of the third declension thus,\\nK 6,\\nG. zov,\\ntj aQftaz,\\nrrjg aqnayog, c.\\nObs. 1. The poets sometimes use the genitive and dative of\\nsuch adjectives in the neuter. Sometimes the neuter is supplied\\nby a derivative form in ov thus, dqnayxiY.ov is used as the neu-\\nter of aQ7ta% p.ay.riY.ov, as the neuter of fiXa$, c.\\nExc. 1. Sxcop and dtxcov (by syncope axoov), are declined with\\nthree genders, like participles (154\u00e2\u0080\u00941) thus,\\nN E /.-CQV\\nG. kx-ovzog,\\nsx-ov,\\nex-6vrog, c.\\nsx-owsa,\\nEX-OVGljg,\\nExc. 2. Miyag, great and noXvg, many, are irregular in the\\nnominative and accusative singular. The other cases are regu-\\nlarly formed from the ancient nominatives peydkog and noXXog,\\nof the second declension thus,\\nM.\\nN. fiEyag\\nG. [i ydlov\\nD. fieydXcp\\nA. fityav\\nN. A. V. fieydlm, [isydXa, (isydXaj. tzoXXco, aoXXd, tzoXXcq, etc.\\nthrough the dual and plural, as in y.aXog, 144.\\nNote. Homer and other poets inflect 7to).vq regularly, Gen. noUoc,\\nDat. noXii, c. It was afterwards changed, in those cases in which it\\nwould not be distinguished from the same cases of nohq, a city.\\nSingular.\\nSingular.\\nF.\\nN.\\nM. F.\\nK\\n(zeydXq\\n\\\\iEydXi\\\\g\\n[teydXij\\nHEytd.ijv\\n\\\\iiya\\n[lEydXov\\n[izydXcp\\npsya\\nnoXvg TzoXXij\\nnoXXov TtoXX^g\\ntzoXXo) TtoXXfj\\nnoXvv TzoXXfjv\\nTtoXv\\ntzoXXov\\nTTOXXOJ\\nTtoXv\\nDual.\\nDual.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "62\\nNUMERALS.\\n\u00c2\u00a750,51.\\nObs. 2. Some substantives in ag and ng, inflected in the first\\ndeclension, are called by grammarians, adjectives; as, v^Qiazyg,\\nan insolent man tQavpazi ag, a wounded man but they are\\nreally independent of any other substantives in construction. The\\nsame observation may be applied to several other words, called\\nadjectives of one termination.\\n50. ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED.\\nxax-6g, --q, -ov, bad.\\nrul-ag, -cuva, -av, miserable,\\nfiao-vg, -eTa, -v, heavy.\\nteq-tjv, -qv, -ev, tender.\\nEVGsft-jg, -?jg, -eg, pious.\\n^eItl-cov, -av, ov, better.\\nij,fx?j-Eig, -eaaa, -ev, honoured,\\nadix-og, -og, -ov, unjust.\\na$i-og, -a, -ov, luorthy.\\nQpiko7iarQ-ig, -ig, -i, patriotic.\\n7toXv7Z-ovg,-ovg,-ovv many-footed.\\n6, rj [idxao, happy.\\n@a -vg, -sTa, -v, deep.\\n[tei^-cQv, -cov, -ovj greater.\\nWi~ m S f -saca, -ev,\\nyopEQ-og, -a, -ov,\\naya-fr-og, -i), -ov,\\n6, Tj fJLUXQOyELQ,\\nza%-vg, -Eia, -v,\\nxai)J-eov, -cov, -ov,\\ncpil-og, -v, -ov,\\nflVlJ^l-COV, -COV, -ov,\\nadfj-?jg, -tjg, -eg,\\n6, rj cpvyag,\\nyXvx-vg, -eicc, -v\\nQ(idi-og, -a, -ov,\\nococpo-cov, -cov, ov,\\nsonorous,\\nformidable,\\ngood.\\nlong-handed,\\nswift,\\nmore beauti-\\nful.\\nfriendly.\\nmindful.\\nunconquered\\nan exile.\\neasy.\\n\u00c2\u00a751. NUMERALS.\\nm 161. Numeral adjectives are those which sig-\\nnify number. In Greek they are divided into\\ntwo classes, Cardinal and Ordinal\\n1. The Cardinal express numbers simply, or\\nhow many as, one, two, three, fcc.\\n2. The Ordinal denote which one of a number\\nas, first, second, third, c.\\nDistributives have no separate form in Greek. The meaning\\nof these is expressed by the cardinal numbers, sometimes com-\\npounded with svv\\\\ as, avvdvo, avvroEig, c. 6mm, terni and\\nsometimes preceded by xazd, dvci, c", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "51. NUMERALS. 63\\n162. 1. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.\\n1. Elg, one, has the singular number only, and\\nis thus declined\\nN Eig pia ev\\nG. svog fiidg svog\\nD. svi fiia svi\\nA. era \\\\iiwv ev\\nIn like manner decline the two compounds,\\novo-Eig, ovds-fiia, ovd-sv, plur. ovd-tveg, -spiai, -iva,\\nfirjd-eig, [iqds-pia, [irjd-EV, firid-EVEg, -splat, -(vet.\\nObs. 1. From eig, one, is formed the adjective EZEQog, either,\\none, other and from ovdsig, [iqdeig, are formed ovdszEQog, [ivdi-\\nZEoog, neither.\\nObs. 2. Eig is sometimes used for the ordinal Ttgcozog, as in\\nMatth. 28. 1 Mark 16. 2. This is usually considered a Hebra-\\nism, but it is sometimes used by the Greeks also Herod, iv. 161,\\nThucyd. iv. 115. Also in Latin, Cic. Sen. 5 Uno et octogessi-\\nmo anno.\\n2. Jvojy two, is properly dual it is alike in all\\ngenders, and is defective in the plural thus,\\nDual. Plural.\\nN. A. dvco N. A.\\nG. ovoiv, Attic SveTv G. dvcov\\nD. dvoiv D. 8vGi(y)\\nObs. 3. Avo, two, is indeclinable i. e. it is the same in all\\ngenders and numbers apcpco, both, is declined like dvco, in the\\ndual.\\n3. To tig, three, and reaaaosg, four, are plural\\nonly, and are thus declined\\nTQEig, three.\\nN. rgsTg ZQEig zqioc\\nG. ZQICQV ZQICOV ZQICOV\\nD. zqig i zqigi zqigi\\nA. ZQEig ZQEig ZQia\\nTEGGctQEg (zEZZctQsg), four.\\nNT. ZEGGCCQEg ZEGGCCQEg tEGGaoa\\nG. ZEGGO.QCOV ZEGGUQCOV ZEGGCtQCOV\\nD. ZEGGCiQGl ZEGGCiQGl ZEGGCiQGl\\nA. ZEGGCiQCig ZEGGCCQCtg ZEGGCtQCi\\n4. The Cardinal numbers from ttsvts, five, to\\ntxarov, a Jumdred^ are indeclinable.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "6-4\\nGREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n\u00c2\u00a752.\\n5. After txarov, the larger numbers are regu-\\nlar plural adjectives of the first and second declen-\\nsions; as\\nM.\\nF.\\nN.\\ndiaxoGioi\\ndiaxoGiai\\ndiaxoGia\\ntwo hundred\\ntoiaxoGioi\\nyjhoi\\ndiG%ihoi\\n{JLVQIOI\\ndiGfiVQIOl\\nroiaxoGicu\\nyikicti\\n8kj%i1ku\\nfivQim\\ndiafivQiai\\nroiaxoGia\\n%ilia\\noiGylha\\n[ivQia\\ndlG[M Qltt\\nthree hundred\\na thousand\\ntwo thousand\\nten thousand\\ntwenty thousand\\nObs. 4.\\nIn the composition\\nof numbers, either the smaller pre-\\ncedes, and the two are joined by xai; or the greater precedes, in\\nwhich case the xai is generally omitted; thus, stevte xai eixogi,\\nor eixogi tzevte, twenty-five niyciixog xai EixoGtog, or EixoGtbg\\n7ts[i7tTog, twenty-fifth. When three numbers are reckoned to-\\ngether, the greatest comes first, and so on in succession, with the\\nconjunction xai; as, vr\\\\Eg ixazbv xai eixogi xal sTtzd, a hundred\\nand twenty-seven ships.\\nObs. 5. Instead of the numbers compounded with eight or\\nnine, more frequent use is made of the circumlocution ivog (or\\nfiiag) dsovtog, c. thus, rijsg fiiag deovGai ei xoGi, hoenty ships\\nwanting one, i. e. nineteen shiiis hsa dvcov ds ovra eixogi, twenty\\nyears wanting hvo, i. e. eighteen years.\\n163. \u00c2\u00a752. II. ORDINAL NUMBERS.\\nThe ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinal. All un-\\nder twenty, except second, seventh, and eigh th, end in tog from\\ntwenty upwards, all end in oGtbg, and, in their inflection, are re-\\ngular adjectives of the first and second declensions thus,\\nTtQCQZOg TTQCQTt] TTQGyTOV first\\n{jlQOtEQOg TTQOZEQa TTQOtEQOV first of tllC two)\\ndeviEQog devzeQa Sevteqov second\\ntokog tQiri] tqizov, c. third\\nObs. 1. in order to express half, or fractional numbers in\\nmoney, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words compound-\\ned of ?][it, half, and the name of the weight, c. (fircc, ofiolog,\\ntuhirrov), having the adjective termination or, lor, (dor, append-\\ned to it, and placed before the ordinal number, of which the half", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a753. GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 65\\nis taken as, zqizov fyizdlarzov, 2| talents; i. e. the first a talent,\\nthe second a talent, the third a half talent, and so of others. In\\nlike manner the Latin sestertius, 2|- asses by syncope from semis-\\ntertius the first an as, the second an as, the third a half as {ter-\\ntius semis).\\nFrom this must be distinguished the use of the same com-\\npounds in the plural, preceded by the cardinal number which, in\\nthat case, mean simply so many half talents thus, Tola i\\\\\\\\hjl-\\nrdlavza, not 2-| talents, but three half talents, or one and a half.\\nObs. 2. From the ordinal numbers are formed numerals in\\nawg, expressing on what day as, dsvzeoaiog, on the second\\nday roizaiog, on the third day, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a753. THE GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n164. The Greeks used the letters of the alphabet in three\\ndifferent ways, to denote numbers.\\n1. To express a small series of numbers, each letter was reck-\\noned according to its order in the alphabet; as, 1, /9, 2, e, 5,\\nto, 24. In this manner the books of Homer s Iliad and Odys-\\nsey are distinguished. The technical syllable HNT {nvz), will\\nassist the memory in using this kind of notation for if the alpha-\\nbet be divided into four equal parts, y will be the first letter of\\nthe second part, that is 1 v, of the third, or 13; and of the\\nfourth, or 19.\\n2. The capital letters were used, in denoting larger series of\\nnumbers, thus; I, 1, 17 for Ttsvre, 5, A for dtxa, 10, H for Ha-\\nxarov, 100, X for lilioi, 1000, and M for {ivqioi, 10,000. A\\nlarge 17 round any of these characters, except denoted five\\ntimes as much as that character represented; as, |j|, 50 \\\\m\\\\\\nfor 50,000.\\n3. To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, the\\nGreeks divided the alphabet into three parts but, as there are\\nonly 24 letters, they used g called Imcrjiiov, for 6 Q, called\\nxoTiTza, for 90 and 7ft, called oafjim, for 900. In using this\\nkind of notation, the memory will be assisted by the technical\\nsyllable AlP\\\\ that is, A denotes 1 1\\\\ 10 and P 100. It\\nis to be observed, also, that all the numbers under 1000, are de-\\nnoted by letters with a small mark like an accent, over them\\nand that a similar mark placed under any letter, denotes that it\\nrepresents so many thousands.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "$Q\\nGREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n53.\\n165. TABLE OF NUMERALS.\\nCardinal.\\nOrdinal.\\n1\\na\\nT\\nnqortoq\\n2\\n8vo\\ndtvxfooq\\n3\\nV\\nXQUq\\nxqlxoq\\n4\\n6\\nreacraQfq\\nxixaoxoq\\n5\\nTiivxa\\n7l\u00c2\u00a3fJb7tXOq\\n6\\n5\\nf\u00c2\u00a3\\nkxrog\\n1\\nC\\n\u00c2\u00a371X(X\\ntpdofioq\\n8\\nn\\nOXXUi\\nbydooq\\n9\\n\u00c2\u00a3VV\u00c2\u00a3CL\\nEvvaxoq\\n10\\nb\\ndetta\\nOExaxoq\\n11\\nvet\\nevdexix\\nkvSixaxoq\\n12\\ndttidsxob\\ndo)6ixaxoq\\n13\\nvy\\nXQiGY.alStxa\\nVQiGxabdixaroq\\n14\\nmT\\nTlGGaQlGY.ClldlY.a\\nXfGGaouxoudixaxoq\\n15\\nva\\n7t\u00c2\u00a3VX\u00c2\u00a3xaiS\u00c2\u00a3xa\\n7l\u00c2\u00a3VX\u00c2\u00a3xai8kxaxoq\\n16\\nkxxuldaxa, m\\nkxxabdexaxoq\\nIV\\nenxaxalSfxa\\nknxaxa.b8iy.axoq\\n18\\nvrj\\n6xxo)xald(xa\\nby.xoixab8ty.axoq\\n19\\nld\\nivvtaxaldexa\\n\u00c2\u00a3W\u00c2\u00a3ay.ab8ixaxoq\\n20\\nX\\nii/.oGv\\nfixoGtoq\\n21\\nxd\\n\u00c2\u00a31X0 Gb dq\\nilxoaxbq 7roo xoq\\n30\\nk\\nxouxxovxa\\nXQbaxOGXOq\\n40\\n(4\\nxaGGaqaxovxa\\nXfGGaqaxooxoq\\n50\\nV\\n7t\u00c2\u00a3Vxrjxovx x\\n7tfVX7]XOGXOq\\n60\\nV\\nftt]y.ovra\\n\u00c2\u00a3%7jXOGx6q\\n70\\no\\n\u00c2\u00a3^dour i xovta\\nk/38ojnrjxoGx6q\\n80\\n7l\\noydorjy.ovTci\\nbydorjxoGtoq\\n90\\n5\\nivvtvrjxovTa\\nivvivrjxoGXoq\\n100\\nq[\\nzy.axov\\nkxaxoGxbq\\n200\\ng\\ndi axoGLOv\\ndbaxoGbOGtoq\\n300\\nt\\nXQbaxOGbOb\\nrqvaxoGiOGToq\\n400\\nV\\nreGGaQaxoGiOo\\nX\u00c2\u00a3GGaqa/.OGlOGx6q\\n500\\np\\nmvraxoGiov\\n7T\u00c2\u00a3vray.oGbOGr6q\\n600\\nX\\n\u00c2\u00a3b,aXQGlOl\\nit,axoGbOGx6q\\n700\\ni//\\ninxaxoGiov\\nknxaxoGbOGxbq\\n800\\nHi\\noxxaxoGbOb\\nbxxaxoGbOGXoq\\n900\\nC775\\nivveaxoGoot,\\nivvfaxoGbOGToq\\n1,000\\na i\\nylkbOb\\nybhoGroq\\n2,000\\nA\\nSiGyD.iov\\n6bGyv).vOGx6q\\n3,000\\nV,\\nxqiGylXiOb\\nXQbGybhoGxoq\\n4,000\\nd\\\\\\nxtxqaxoGylhob\\nXtXqaY.bGybhoGXOq\\n5,000\\nf t\\nnavxaxiGylXioi\\nTtivjaxiGyiXioGToq\\n6,000\\ne\\nttaxioyiXbOb\\nItay.iGyUiOGtoq\\n7,000\\nC,\\nknxaxbGyihob\\n\u00c2\u00a37lT XY.lGyihl0GT0q\\n8,000\\nV t\\nhySoxiGyihob\\nbySoxiGybhoGToq\\n9,000\\nivviaxbGylhoi\\nivvicty.LGyi/.iOGroq\\n10,000\\nb f\\nflVQvOb\\nfll QbOGXOq\\n20,000\\nx t\\ndcGjLU QiOi\\n8bG,UVQbOGXOq\\n50,000\\nV t\\nnivxaxiGi-ivqiOb\\n7i\u00c2\u00a3vraxbGuvoboax6(i\\n100,000\\n3tXttXbG,ltV(}bOb\\ndfXCtY.lG/d QbOGXOq\\nThus the number 1853 is a eo v y", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a754. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 67\\nOTHER CLASSES OF NUMERALS.\\n166. From the cardinal numbers are formed\\n1st. The Numeral adverbs; as, dig, twice, from dvo; roi g,\\nthrice, from rqelg and from the others, by adding the termina-\\ntion y.ig, d /.ig, or tdxig, as, TeGGaody.ig, i^dxtg, ixwzovzdxig, four\\ntimes, six times, a hundred times.\\n2d. Multiple numbers in nXoog, contracted nlovg as, dt-\\nnXoog, two-fold; zoinXoog, three-fold TstganXoog, four-fold.\\n3d. Proportionals in nXdaiog as, zoinXdmog, three times as\\nmuch lExoanXdaiog, four times as much.\\n4th. Substantives in dg, ddog, which express the name of the\\nseveral numbers as, fiovdg, Gen. -ddog, the number one, unity\\nSvdg, the number two dtxdg, the number ten sixdg, the num-\\nber twenty rgiaxag, the number thirty, c.\\nNote. The substantive numerals are commonly employed to express\\nthe higher numbers thus, Sh.a ftvQtddiq, 100,000 e/.arbv /uvyoddtq, a\\nmillion. Sometimes the smaller numbers, added to the larger, are\\nlikewise expressed by substantives thus, 517,610, nivTtjv.ovTa fivQid-\\ndzq y.ai /.no., -/ihddtq re enrd v.al nqoq k/.arovrdd^q i\u00c2\u00a7 /.at dfxdq.\\n5th. The Distributives, answering to the question, in how\\nmany parts are formed in ya as, dr/a, ZQiya, r oaya, ntv-\\ntaya in two parts, in three parts, c, and connected with\\nthese are such adverbs as, tqi/tj, trebly, zqi%ov, in three places, c.\\nObs. When other parts of speech are compounded with nu-\\nmerals, the first four assume the following forms, viz. fiovo-, one\\ndi-, two tQi-, three zetqcc-, four as, fiovoxEocog, dixeowg,\\ntQiTiovg, TETQUTtovg, one-homed, two-horned, three-footed, four-\\nfooted.\\n54. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.\\n167. Adjectives have three degrees of compari-\\nson, the Positive, Comparative, and Superlative.\\n168. The Positive expresses a quality simply the Compara-\\ntive asserts it in a higher or lower degree in one object than in\\nanother, or, than in several taken together and the Superlative,\\nin the highest or lowest degree compared with several taken sep-\\narately thus, gold is heavier than silver it is the most pre-\\ncious of metals. Hence, those adjectives only can be compared\\nwhose signification admits the distinction of more or less.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "68\\nCOMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES.\\n55.\\nThe superlative in Greek, as in Latin and English, often ex-\\npresses only a very high degree of the quality, without implying\\ncomparison, and may be called the superlative of eminence.\\n\u00c2\u00a755. GENERAL RULE.\\n169. The comparative degree is formed by\\nadding tzqoq to the positive and the superlative,\\nby adding tcctoq thus,\\nPositive. Comparative. Superlative.\\n[idxag iiaxao-ieoog fiaxdo-zazog\\ntvvovg evvova-TSQog evvova-tazog\\nxaxovovg xaxovovc-TSoog xaxovova-zazog\\ndnloog-cLTilovg dnlovc-zEQog dnlova-zazog\\n170. SPECIAL RULES.\\n1. Adjectives in tig reject i\\\\ as,\\n%aomg %aQih-Z\u00c2\u00a3Qog yaqisG-zazog\\n2. Adjectives in og reject g; and also, after a\\nshort syllable, change o into co thus,\\nogdog\\ndixcuog\\nTtovrigbg\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0fravfiaoTog\\ndtjlog\\nOQ o-zsoog\\noiy.aw-z\u00c2\u00a3Qog\\nTZOvrioo-tEoog\\nd-avfiaczo-zeoog\\ndrjX6-T\u00c2\u00a3Qog\\nogdo-zazog\\ndr/.uio-zazog\\nTtovijoo-zazog\\nftavyLaozb-zaxog\\ndqlo-zazog\\nog after a short syllable\\noocpog 60(pc6-Z\u00c2\u00a3oog aocpco-zuzog\\nxevog y.Evco-zeoog xsvco-zatog\\ncpofteobg cpo@\u00c2\u00a3Q(6-Z\u00c2\u00a3Qog yopenca-zazog\\nquvEQog cpavEQco-zegog yav\u00c2\u00a3Qc6-zazog\\n%ak\u00c2\u00a37iog yal\u00c2\u00a37Zc6-Z\u00c2\u00a3Qog %al\u00c2\u00a37Zc6-zazog\\nObs. The change of o into oo is made, to prevent the concur-\\nrence of four short syllables. Hence o, after a doubtful vowel\\nconsidered long, remains unchanged but if considered short, the o\\nis changed into co thus, evzlpog has ivzi(i6z\u00c2\u00a3oog, and ioyvoog lias\\ni(j%vc 6z\u00c2\u00a3Qog because i and v are considered long but (iyoiog has\\ndyQ((6z\u00c2\u00a3Qog, and (xarog, ixavcozEQog, c, because the i and a arc\\nconsidered short.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "56. COMPAKISON BY mv AND tazog. 69\\n3. Adjectives in ccg, r\\\\g, and vg, add to the neu-\\nter gender; as,\\npsXag ftikawa fjitXav; paXdv-ztQog, c.\\ntv6\u00c2\u00a3$)]g evGefirjg ewsfieg evas^sa-tsQog, c.\\nEVQvg evgeia svqv] evQV-zeQog, c.\\n4. Adjectives in cov and r\\\\v add to the nomina-\\ntive plural masculine as,\\nacfQoov IS P. aopQOveg dcpQove a-ZPQog, c.\\nzt grjv zsos veg ZEQZvta-ZcQog, c.\\nExc. But 7ZS7TQ3V makes n\u00c2\u00a37Taiz\u00c2\u00a3Qog, c, and mW, mozzqog,\\nmozazog.\\n56. COMPARISON BY tW AND wr-roff.\\n1Y1. Some adjectives are compared by lav\\nand ^jto^ viz.,\\n1. Some in gog, derived from substantives.\\nThese form the comparative and superlative, not\\nfrom the adjective, but from the substantive\\nthus,\\nix Qog, inimical, from vjftog, enmity, sjfdiW, f/fiiGZog.\\nor/.zQog, compassionate j oixzog, compassion, or/aiow, or/aiazog.\\nat6%Qog, base, aloyog, baseness, alaylmv, ai a^tazog.\\npaxQog, long, fiqy.og, length, [A/qxicov, [iqxiGzog.\\nAlso y.aXog, beautiful, has y.aXXicov, xaXXiazog, as if from xdX-\\nXog, beauty.\\n2. Some in vg are compared both ways as,\\nftud vg, deep, fiaxtvzeQog, $a\\\\Yvzazog.\\nand fia icov, ftddiozog.\\nIn like manner compare @Qadvg, slow; zayvg, swift Ttayvg,\\nthick yXvxvg, sweet coxvg, quick; c.\\n3. QccSiog, easy, has qaiav, qaiovog or, with i\\nsubscribed, yaav, qdavog.\\nNote. Some of these, and of others compared in this way, are occa-\\nsionally found compared by rzyoq and raroq. Ta/vq also has a com-\\nparative Q-ao~ so)v, Att. B-arxmv. The comparatives in iov are declined\\nlike ffo xpQon; 159-1.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "70 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 57, 58.\\n172. 57. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.\\nThe following adjectives are irregular in their\\ncomparison; viz.,\\nd[isiv(av dya cozazog\\ndgeicov doiGzog from Jtoyg, Mars\\npeXrioov fitlnoroc from fiovXofiai, I wish\\ndya og, good J x Q 8 f a(J(av uodziGzog from xoazvg, brave\\nXmtmv Xqxszog from Xw, for ftsXco, I wish\\nyiozazog\\ncpEQTEoog ytQiGTog l from cpsocQ, I bear\\n(DEOZIGZOG\\nxaxog, bad\\nCp8QTl6T0g\\nxaxioav xdxiGzog\\n%EIQ(QV %ElQlGZOg\\n[is yag, great [a,ei\u00c2\u00a3cov \\\\iiyiGZog\\nTtoXvg, many ttXeicov nXEiGZog\\niXaxvg, small iXdaacw IXd^iGZog\\nfwtQog, little iJggojv, or fisioor, or fnxgoZEQog {iixoozazog\\n58. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON.\\n173. Some adjectives in the comparative and superlative de-\\ngrees, have no positive, but are formed from\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n1. nouns; as,\\nfiaGiXEvg\\na king\\nficiGlXEVZEQOg\\nfiuGiXEvzazog\\nxs odog\\ngain\\nXEodlCQV\\nyJodiGzog\\n0Eog\\nGod\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0d-ECOZEQOg\\nxXinzrjg\\na thief\\nvXETtziGzazog\\nxvdog\\nglory\\nxvoixav\\nxvdiGZog\\nXV03V\\na dog\\nXVVZEQOg\\n7zX?j}tTj]g\\na striker\\nnXrf/.ziGzazog\\nnozqg\\na drinker\\nTToziGzazog\\nQiyog\\ncold, rigor\\nQiyiojv\\nQiyiGzog\\nCpCOQ\\na thief\\nqjcoQzazog\\n2\\npronoun as,\\navzog\\nself\\navzozazog\\n3.\\nparticiple as,\\ni^Qcofisvog\\nstrong\\n80 Q CO/HEV8GZEQ g\\nFQfaliEVEGZUZOg", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a759.\\nDIALECTS OF COMPAKISON.\\n71\\n4. adverbs; as,\\navco\\naopao\\nlyyvg\\nggca\\nr\\n\u00c2\u00a36(0\\n07T16CO\\nTTSQaV\\n7ZOQQCO\\nfZQCot\\nvxpi\\nup\\nimmediately\\nnear\\nout\\ndown\\nin\\nbach\\nbeyond\\nfar\\nearly\\nhighly\\navco-teoog\\nacpdo-reoog\\niyyv-zeoog\\niyy-i(av\\ni^co-TEQog\\nxarw-rsoog\\n\u00c2\u00a36CQ-TSQ0g\\nOTUGCQ-TEQOg\\nTtEQai-TEQOg\\nTtOQQCQ-TEQOg\\nnomai-TEQog\\n5. prepositions: as,\\nTtqo before TZgo-rsoog Ttgo-zarog\\nwhence\\nwhence\\n-rarog\\n-rarog\\n-larog\\n-rarog\\n-rarog\\n-rarog\\n-rarog\\n-rarog\\n-razog\\n-rarog\\nvxpiarog\\n7iQcorog\\n174. Some comparatives and superlatives are again com-\\npared as,\\nXcoicov, better\\n(A.E103V, less\\nQiiav, easier\\nxallicor, more beautiful\\n%eqeicqv,\\nXEIQCOV,\\n%EiQi6zog, worst\\ny.vdiorog, most glorious\\niXaywrog, least\\nTzoarog, first\\nworse\\nXco t/TEQog\\nfiEiorEQog\\nrb QaorsQOv\\nrb xaXhwrEQOv\\nj rb %\u00c2\u00a3Q\u00c2\u00a3ior\u00c2\u00a3QOv\\nand %\u00c2\u00a3iQor\u00c2\u00a3QOv\\nr\\\\ xEtQiarortQij\\ny.vdicrarog\\niXa^iarorEQog\\nTtQwriarog\\n1*75. Some words ending in qg, of the first declension, are\\ncompared; thus (see 160, Obs. 2),\\nv^Qtort;g, an insolent man vfioicro-rEoog vfioitfro-rarog\\n7iX\u00c2\u00a3ovtxrqg, an avaricious man TzlsonxriG-rarog\\n17G.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a759. DIALECTS OF COMPARISON.\\n1. The Attics compare many adjectives in og, ?]g, and J, by\\n-icrEoog -lorarog, -airsgog -airarog, and -Ecrsoog -mrarog\\\\ as,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "72\\nTHE PRONOUN.\\n60.\\nIdlog, loquacious\\nepilog, friendly\\nby Syncope,\\nemovdeuog, diligent\\nay ovog, not envying\\nTtuXaiog, old\\nysQUiog, an old man\\naortal, rapacious\\nTzlEOvt xTTjg, avaricious\\nipEvdijg, false\\nlafa a-TSQog\\nqiilca-TEQog\\ncpil-TSQog\\n67tovdai86-z\u00e2\u0082\u00acQog\\nacp{rov86~-T8Qog\\nnalal-tEQog\\nySQCLl-ZEQOg\\naQ7Tayi(j-7EQog\\n7TlE0VEXri(7-ZEQ0g\\n\\\\pEvdia-tEQog\\n2. Dialects of particular comparatives\\nfor XQE166G3V, I. and D. -AQE66COV, better\\ndat. %\u00c2\u00a3Qq h ace. XEQrja, nom. plur. %EQijEg\\npaGGojv, greater with others which may\\nin reading.\\n-ratog\\n-zazog\\n-tatog and qiliarog\\n-zazog\\n-razog\\n-razog\\n-ratog\\n-tatog\\n-tatog\\n-ratog\\nand superlatives, are,\\n%eiqojv, P. j\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00ab( \u00c2\u00abtW, I.\\nliEi\u00c2\u00a3,wv, I. [itXcov, D.\\nbe learned by practice\\n60. THE PRONOUN.\\n177. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a\\nnoun.\\n178. Pronouns may be divided into Personal,\\nPossessive, Definite, Reflexive, Reciprocal, De-\\nmonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite.\\nOf these the Personal only are substantives the\\nrest are adjectives.\\nI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\n179. The Substantive or Personal Pronouns\\nare tyd), 1, of the first person ov, thou, of the sec-\\nond and ov, of himself, of herself, of itself, of the\\nthird (56) they have the same accidents as nouns\\n(55) are of all genders and, in construction,\\ntake the gender and number of the noun for\\nwhich they stand. They are thus declined", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "60.\\nTHE PRONOUN.\\n73\\ntyco, I.\\nSingular.\\nN. iyco\\nG. i[j,ov or \\\\iov\\nD. ifioi or \\\\ioi\\nA. i fit or fit\\nay, thou.\\nFirst Person, M. or F.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN. tjfieig\\nG. ?](iow\\nD. ijiuv\\nA. itfiag\\nSecond Person, M. or F.\\nN. A. vm or vco\\nG. D. vmv or vow\\nIN T\\nSingular.\\nV. av\\nG. 60V\\nD. 601\\nA. (T\u00c2\u00a3\\nDual.\\nN. A. V. trqpcot or c g)oa\\nG. D. (rgpcoeV or 6Cpa)v\\nov, of himself, of herself, of itself\\nM., F., or N.\\nDual.\\nSingular\\nG. ov\\nD.ol\\nA.\\nN. A. 6(peos, erg) ca\\nG. D. 6cpmv\\nPlural.\\n~N. V. veers\\nG.vfiojv\\nd. iy*m\\nA. v^as 1\\nThird Person,\\nPlural.\\nN. crgoa^, Neut. (rqpe a\\nG. crg a y\\nD. 6Cpl6l\\nA. (jg)a?, Neut. cg)\u00c2\u00a3a\\n180. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The monosyllable forms [iov, fiol, pe, are always enclitic,\\n21\u00e2\u0080\u0094 2 3, and have their accent thrown back on the preceding word.\\nThey are never governed by a preposition.\\n2. In the dual, the forms vco and cqpco are sometimes written\\nvo) and 6q cp.\\n3. The third personal pronoun, like sui in Latin, wants the\\nnominative singular, and is commonly used by the Attic prose\\nwriters in a reflexive sense; i. e. it refers to the subject of the pro-\\nposition in which it stands or of the foregoing, if the second be\\nsufficiently connected with it. Thus used, it is translated of him-\\nself of herself of itself c. In Homer and Herodotus, and the\\nAttic poets, it is more frequently used as the pronoun of the third\\nperson, for the nominative of which they use the relative og as,\\nog tq\u00c2\u00bb], he said. This pronoun, however, is but little in use, the\\ndefinite avzog, 182, and the reflexive savzov, 183, being used in-\\nstead of it. The nominative (not now in use) appears to have\\nbeen anciently i, from which was derived the Latin is. A neu-\\nter form of the nominative and accusative plural, 6Cpe a, occurs in\\nHerodotus.\\n4", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "74 POSSESSIVE AND DEFINITE PRONOUNS. 61, 62.\\n61. II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.\\n181. The Possessive Pkonouns denote pos-\\nsession, and are derived from the substantive pro-\\nnouns.\\n1. In signification, they correspond to the genitive of their\\nprimitives, for which they may be considered as a substitute\\nthus, 6 adeXybg s^ov, the brother of me, and 6 ipbg ddel^pog, my\\nbrother, are synonymous expressions.\\n2. In/om, they are regular adjectives of the first and second\\ndeclensions, and are declined like v,aX6g, 144. They are derived\\nas follows\\nyour, i. e. of you two\\nFrom ifis\\ncomes\\nifiog\\n~i\\n-6v\\nmy\\n68\\ns\\ncog\\ntr\\nog\\n-n\\nGOV\\n-OV\\nthy\\nhis\\nvm\\nvcoitEQ-og\\n-a\\n-OV\\nour, i\\ncgpo5i\\nGtyCQireg-og\\n-a\\n-OV\\nyour,\\n?jfjiEig\\n?1{IE7\u00e2\u0082\u00ac0-Og\\n-a\\n-OV\\nour\\nvfxeig\\nVflETEQ-Og\\n-a\\n-OV\\nyour\\nocpelg\\nOQpETEQ-Og\\n-a\\n-OV\\ntheir\\nDoric\\noqi-og\\n-h\\n-OV\\nObs. To this class also belong tjfiEdanog, one of our country\\nviizdanog, one of your country. But nodanog; of what coun-\\ntry more properly belongs to the interrogative, and dXXoda-\\nTiog, one of another country, to the indefinite pronouns.\\n62. IIT. THE DEFINITE PRONOUN.\\n182. The Definite Pronoun ccvtoq is used to\\ngive a closer or more definite signification of a per-\\nson or thing.\\nThis pronoun has three different significations.\\n1. In the nominative it adds the force of the English self to\\nthe word to which it belongs as, tyoo avrog, I myself; av av-\\nrog, thou thyself; avtog, he himself so also, in the oblique\\ncases, when it begins a clause as, avrbv icogaxa, I have seen the\\nperson himself\\n2. In the oblique cases, after another word in the same clause,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a763.\\nREFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.\\n75\\nit is used for the third personal pronoun, and signifies him, her,\\nit, them as, ov% scoqaxag avzov, thou hast not seen him.\\n3. With the article before it, it signifies the same as, 6 av-\\nrbg av Qconog, the same man.\\nObs. In the last sense when the article ends with a vowel, it\\noften combines with the pronoun, forming one word thus, zav-\\nzov, for zov avtov zavzij, for z rj avtrj zavza, for za avzd, fcc.\\nWhen thus combined, the neuter ends in or as well as o. The\\ncombined zavzfj and zavza ^must be carefully distinguished from\\nzavzy and zavta, parts of ovzog, 185. The former has the Spiri-\\ntus lenis over the v, the latter has not.\\n4. The definite pronoun avzdg is thus declined.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\navz-og -i] -6\\nN. A.\\nK\\navz-oi -al\\n-a\\nt r r\\nG.\\n5\\navz-ov -ijg -ov\\navz-co -a -co\\navz-cov -cov\\n-COV\\navz-co -y -dp\\nG. D.\\nD.\\navz-oig -alg\\n-oig\\nA.\\n3 r\\navz-ov -i\\\\v -6\\navt-oiv -aiv -oiv\\navz-ovg -ag\\n-a\\nIn the same manner are declined\\naXkog akin alio\\n7 r\\nog r\\\\ o\\nanother\\nwho, which\\nixsivog i\\nMSIV1J 8XSIVO\\nthat\\n63. IV. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.\\n183. Reflexive Pronouns are such as relate\\nto the subject of the proposition in which they\\nstand.\\n1. The Reflexive pronouns are formed from the accusative\\nsingular of the personal pronouns, with the oblique cases of avtog.\\nThey are ipavzov, of myself; aeavzov, of thyself savzov, of\\nhimself; and are thus declined.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nG.\\nsavt-ov\\n-ijg\\n-ov\\nG. savz-cov\\n-cov\\n-cov\\nD.\\ntavt-cp\\n-XI\\n-Cp\\nD. savz-oig\\n-aig\\n-oig\\nA.\\niavt-6v\\n-rjv\\n-6\\nA. savz-ovg\\n-ag\\nr\\n-a\\n2. In the same manner are declined ipavzov and aeavzov,\\nwithout the neuter gender, but, in the singular number only. In", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "76 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 64, 65.\\nthe dual and plural, the parts of the compound are used sepa-\\nrately; as, ijiimv avzav, of ourselves.\\n3. Homer never uses the compound form even in the singu-\\nlar but, ifis avzov Gt avzov, c.\\n4. The contracted forms oavzov and avzov, c, are often\\nused for oeavzov and savzov.\\n5. Sometimes in the singular, and often in the plural, savzov\\nis used by the Attics in the first and second, as well as in the\\nthird person. They are all sometimes used as reciprocals, 184\\nand, in some grammars, they are so denominated.\\n6. In these compounds, instead of av, the Ionics have cov, and\\nretain 8 before it thus, ipscavzov, oecovzov, c, for ifiavtov, c.\\n64. V. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.\\n184. The Reciprocal Pronoun indicates a mu-\\ntual relation between different persons, expressed\\nin English by the phrase one another.\\nThis pronoun is formed from dXlog, wants the singular, and\\nis thus declined\\nDual. Plural.\\nG. all ;l-oiv -cuv -oiv\\nD. ciXh jl-oiv -cuv -oiv\\nA. akh jX-co -a -co\\nThe Dual is seldom used.\\nG. dlh)).-(ov -wv -cov\\nD. alh jl-otg -aig -oig\\nA. dlXr X-ovg -ag -a\\n65. VI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.\\n185. The Demonstrative Pronouns are such\\nas point out with precision a person or thing al-\\nready known. They are,\\novzog avzri rovzo 7 7\\ny this, the latter, the one.\\nixstvog ixsivn sxeivo that, the former, the other.\\n1. Ode, ?jde, zode, this, is simply the article 6, r t to, rendered\\nemphatic by the enclitic ds annexed through all its cases, 140-3.\\nExetvog is declined like avzog, 182-4.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a766.\\nEELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n77\\nOvtog, like the article, takes the initial t in\\nthe oblique cases,\\nand is thus declined\\nSingular.\\nN. V. ovtog\\navtrj\\nzovro\\nG. tovtov\\nravrrig\\ntovtov\\nD. tovtcp\\nravrri\\ntovtcp\\nA. rovzov\\nTccvtqv\\nDual.\\ntovto\\nN. A. V. tovtco\\ntavta\\ntOVTOO\\nG. D. tovtoiv\\ntavtatv\\nPlural.\\ntOVtOlV\\nN. V. OVtOl\\nCtt 7\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00ab\\ntavta\\nG. tOVtOOV\\nTOVTMV\\ntovtov\\nD. tovtoig\\ntavtaig\\ntovtoig\\nA. tovtovg\\ntavtag\\ntavta\\nObs. The correlatives toaovtog, toiovtog,\\nand trfkixovtog,\\nhave either ov or o in the\\ni nominative and accusative singular\\nneuter; thus,\\ntoaavtrj\\ntoaovtov, or toaovto\\nN. toaovtog\\nG. tOGOVtOV, C.\\n2. Among the Attics, the demonstratives were rendered em-\\nphatic by adding i to the termination as, ovtoci, tovtovi, tov-\\ntm, c. But when the final vowel is a, or o, or it is dropped,\\nand i put in its place thus, ode, tovto, tavta, with the emphatic\\ni are written odi, tovti, tavti When ye or de follows the de-\\nmonstrative, the i is placed after it, e. g. tovto ye with t becomes\\ntovtoyi This suffix always draws the accent to itself. A sim-\\nilar emphasis is expressed in Latin by annexing the syllables met,\\nte, pte, ce; as, egomet, tute, meapte, hicce (Lat. Gr. 118-4; 121,\\nObs. 4 123-3). The i added by the Attic and Ionian writers to\\nthe Dative Plural, however, is not emphatic but merely euphonic.\\n3. The emphatic i is annexed also to the compounds of ovtog,\\nand a few of the correlatives such as toaovtog, toiovtog, rqh-\\nxovzog, tooog, c, making toaovtoai, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a766. VII. RELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n186. The Kelative Pronoun is one that re-\\nlates to, and connects its clause with, a noun or\\npronoun going before it, called the antecedent.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "78\\nINTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.\\n\u00c2\u00a767.\\n1. The relative og, o, who, which, that, is declined like av-\\ntdg (182-4). It is rendered emphatic by adding the enclitic\\nsyllable naq as, oaneq, ?jneQ, otzsq, 403-20.\\n2. The Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic tragedians, in-\\nstead of og, use the article 6, to, as a relative.\\n3. Instead of og, the compound pronoun oatig is used as a\\nrelative after nag, or any word in the singular expressing an\\nindefinite number and 6(X0t,.after the same words in the plural\\nas, nag oatig, every one who ndvtsg oaoi, all who.\\n\u00c2\u00a767. VIII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.\\n187. The Interrogative Pronoun is used in\\nasking a question as, rig iiioLr}6s Who did it t\\n1. The interrogative tig, ti who? which? what? has the\\nacute accent on the first syllable, and is thus declined\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nN. tig j tig, ti,\\nG. tivog, tivog, tivog\\nD. tin, tivi, tin,\\nA. tiva, tiva, ti.\\nN. tivsg, tiveg, tiva,\\nG. tivcov, tivcov, tivcov,\\nD. tiai, tiai, tiai,\\nA. tivag, tivag, tiva.\\nN. A.\\ntivs, tivE, tive,\\nG.D.\\ntivoiv, tivoiv, tivoiv.\\nIn the same manner decline otig, ovtig, and \\\\ii\\\\tig.\\nObs. Instead of the genitive and dative tivog, tivi, we often\\nfind a secondary form, tov, to)\\n2. The interrogative tig has its responsive oatig, which is thus\\nused tig inoiqas who did it ovx olda oatig Inoiijae, I know\\nnot who did it. The responsive oatig is declined as follows, and,\\nas will be perceived, disregards the usual rules of accentuation\\nSingular.\\nN.\\noatig\\n?}ug\\n0,tl\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\novtivog\\nCOtlVl\\novtiva\\nijativog\\nrpivi\\nijvtiva\\nDual.\\novtivog\\nCptlVl\\n0,tl\\nN. A.\\ncotive.\\nativs\\ncotivs\\nG.D.\\noivnvoiv\\na tvtivoiv\\noivtivovv", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "aizivsg\\ncovzivov\\naziva\\nwvzivcav\\nalarm\\nolcziai\\naazivag\\naziva\\n68. INDEFINITE PKONOUNS. 79\\nPlural.\\nN. oiziveg\\nG. wvzivow\\nD. olaziai\\nA. ovazivag\\n3. Instead of oazig, Homer uses ozig, declined like tig as\\nabove, and instead of the genitive and dative ovzivog, o)zm, we\\nfind the secondary forms ozov and ozop Obs. above).\\n4. There appears to have been, among the ancient Greeks, an-\\nother interrogative pronoun, nog, n?j, no, and its responsive bnbg,\\nbnr\\\\, bno, which have become obsolete, except in two cases, now\\nused adverbially viz. nov, where ny, in what way and hence\\nthe responsives bnov and bnij. From these are formed the inter-\\nrogative nozeoog, -a, -ov, which of the two and its responsive\\nbnbzeoog, -a, -ov, which of the two with several other adverbs\\nand adjectives still in use each interrogative having always its\\nown responsive, the one being the correlative of the other as,\\nINTERROGATTVES. RESPONSIVES.\\nAdj. nolog, of what kind? bnoiog, of what land.\\nnoaog, of what number bnoaog, of what number.\\nnrjlixog, of ivhat age bnylixog, of what age.\\nnbzioog, which of the two bnozeoog, which of the two.\\nAdv. nag, how oncag, how, c. thus,\\nTlrikiv.og iczi of what age is he ov* olda bntjXixog, I know\\nnot of what age. In the same manner the responsives are used\\nwithout an interrogation preceding as, inEld szo bnoiog qv,\\nhe forgets of what kind he was To these also may be added\\nnodunog, of what country\\n68. IX. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.\\n188. The Indefinite Peonouns are such as de-\\nnote persons or things indefinitely. They are,\\nzig\\nzig\\nZl\\nsome one.\\nSsTvot\\ndeivu\\n8eTva\\nsome one, such a one.\\nallog\\nally\\nalio\\nanother.\\ntZEQOg\\ntztoa\\nEZEQQl\\nother, a different one, another.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "80\\nCORRELATIVE PRONOUNS.\\n\u00c2\u00a769.\\nTo which may be added the following negatives viz.,\\nno one.\\novug ovrtg ovri\\novdeig ovde^iia ovdtv\\n[tfjTig fifjtig fijjti\\nfitjdsig [tydefiia iirfiiv j\\n1. The indefinite rig has the grave accent on the last syllable,\\nto distinguish it from rig interrogative, which has the acute ac-\\ncent on the first the former is enclitic (21), the latter is not.\\n2. The indefinite 8uva, some one, of all genders, and always\\nwith the article prefixed, is declined like a noun of the third de-\\nclension; thus,\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. dsiva\\nK.A.\\n1ST. dtTveg\\nG. deivog\\ndeTvjs\\nG. deivcov\\nD. dein\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nA. dsiva\\ndelvoiv\\nA. deTvag\\nAuva is sometimes indeclinable as, G. rov deTva, D. x\\nSeTva. JlXXog is declined like avzog, 182-4 ezeoog, like cpavs-\\noog, 145.\\nObs. 1. All words used interrogatively are also used indefi-\\nnitely, but generally with the accent changed thus,\\nINTERROGATIVES. INDEFINITES.\\nnoaog how great? how many? Ttocog, of a certain size or num-\\nber.\\nnolog of what hind noiog, of a certain kind, such,\\nrznh xog how old how large TTtjh xog, of a certain size or age.\\n189.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a769. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.\\n1. Besides the interrogatives and responsives (187-4), the\\nGreek language has likewise special correlative pronouns, each\\npair of which has a mutual relation. The latter of the two is\\nexpressed in English by as.\\nzooog ooog (Lat. tantus, quantus), so great, as.\\nroiog oiog (Lat. talis, qualis), such, as.\\nTflXixog ifluxog of the same age, as of the same size, as.\\n2. When the correlation is more expressly designated, express-\\ning just as great as, exactly as great as, the former pronoun", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a770.\\nDIALECTS OF THE PRONOUN.\\n81\\n(zoGog, zoiog, z?]h xog) has ds or ovzog attached to it, and the\\nlatter has on (from onr{) prefixed as,\\nzogogSs t zoioods\\nzooovzog\\nt zoioods t znhxoode\\nJ- onooog y onoiog onrikixog\\nj zoiovzog zqMxovzog j\\n190.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a770. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS.\\nEya, I.\\nIonic.\\nDoric.\\niEoLIC.\\nPoetic.\\ns.\\nK\\nejw iywvq.\\niyo )ya, iyo wya.\\nsyo), eyo)v.\\nB. io), io)ya.\\n*ym.\\nG. lf,Ul0, \u00c2\u00a3fl\u00c2\u00a30.\\nl/xev.\\nB. i/xovq.\\ni/xi iv.\\n\u00c2\u00a3/.l\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00bb9-fV.\\nD.\\nIfxiv.\\nEflOl B. /A.V.\\nD.\\nN.A.\\na/xt, ct/ifif.\\nP.\\nN. tjuEiq.\\nx,ufq, dfiutq.\\naf.tfiiq.\\nGr. rjixiow.\\nauo)) af.iEO)V.\\najLif,io)v, a/t/tEdW.\\nr]/un,o)V.\\nD.\\na t uiv, a/.uv.\\ncc/.t^fc, apt [xiv,\\nCtjUfllGoV.\\nrifilv.\\nA. tjfiiaq.\\nt ir\\na t u aq, a,u t, a t u f,i i\\na/x/.iaq, a/x/xeaq.\\n?jfA,ivaq, aixf.il\\n2v f Thou.\\nS.\\nN.y.\\ntv, rvvt], rvya.\\nTovvrj.\\nG. a no, Geo, ai iv.\\nriv, Tivq, Ttovq.\\nGiv, ai iv\\nGtlo tv\\nD.\\nTO I, TIV, Tiiv.\\nTivr\\\\.\\nA.\\nT\u00c2\u00a3, TV.\\nTIV, TUV.\\nD.\\nK A. V.\\nyfie, v/ifie.\\nP.\\nK V. iifiifq.\\nVfitq, d/u/iiiq.\\nv/x/xf, Vfifiiq.\\nG. vjuio)V.\\nVfiCiv.\\nVf.lU0)V, V/U/UE0)V.\\nv[AiU)v.\\nI).\\nV/UV, VfllV.\\nV/X(ll VfXfllV,\\nvf-ifjiiaw.\\nA. v/Asaq.\\nv/xaq, v/xi, v/xfxi.\\nv/x/xaq, v/x/xiaq.\\nVfAtZaq.\\nJv, of Himself c.\\nS.\\nG. f*o, oto, Eftb,\\n\u00c2\u00a30, \u00c2\u00a3#-\u00c2\u00a3V.\\nL lot.\\nIV.\\nk Q-iv, yi iv.\\nuo ev.\\nlot.\\nA. /Liiv.\\nVlV.\\n/ulv, vlv.\\nte, Gq i.\\nD.\\nN A. r ]p\u00c2\u00a3f.\\no~ po)f, o~qio\\nP.\\nN. aq hq.\\nG. acpeo)v.\\nGq \u00c2\u00a3q.\\nGcptTiq.\\nGqitlow.\\nT G([jLv, aqil.\\nao pu.\\nq iv.\\nA. aqiiaq.\\nGcpi, IjJE.\\nGyiq, a,Gq t.\\nfxlv, vlv.\\nGqitlaq.\\nGq\\n4*", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "82 THE VERB. \u00c2\u00a771.\\nObs. 1. fiiv and viv are used for the accusative in all genders\\nand numbers so also is eg)/, among the poets, i. e. for avz-ov,\\n-r t v, -6, and avt-ovg, -dg, -a.\\nObs. 2. The adjective pronouns are inflected in the different\\ndialects according to the models of the first and second declen-\\nsions. Other peculiarities may be learned by practice as, for\\nfyt zeoog, -a, -ov, our D. a\\\\iog, -a, -ov for vpszeoog, D. vpog\\nfor Gcptzsoog, D. G(pog for ovnvog, A. orov, D. ozev, I. ozeo, P.\\nozzsco for (pirn, A. ozco, I. bz co for aziva, A. arret, D. ccggci\\nfor tivog and tivog, A. ro\u00c2\u00a3 I. tio, D. zev for tin and rw/, A.\\ntoo, I. r\u00c2\u00abp for tivcov, I. t*W for tioi, I. tsotGi for tw\u00c2\u00ab, A.\\n\u00c2\u00abtt\u00c2\u00ab, D. (Wet for cog, gi\\\\, gov, thy, D. teog, ted, tsov for og,\\ni\\\\, ov, I. 8og, si], eov, his, c. this form occurs only in the singu-\\nlar number.\\n\u00c2\u00a7\u00e2\u0096\u00a071. THE VERB.\\n191. A Veeb is a word used to express the\\nact, being, or state of its subject.\\n1. Verbs are of two kinds, Transitive and In-\\ntransitive*\\n2. A Transitive verb expresses an act done by\\none person or thing to another. In Greek, it has\\nthree forms, Active, Middle, and Passive, 195.\\nThese two classes comprehend all the verbs \\\\n any language.\\nAccording to this division, Transitive verbs include those only which\\ndenote transitive action i. e. action done by one person or thing to\\nanother, or which passes over, as the word signifies, from the actor to\\nan object acted upon as, Caesar conquered Gaul, or Gaul was con-\\nquered by Caesar. Intransitive verbs, on the other hand, include all\\nthose which have nothing transitive in their meaning nothing passing\\nover from one person or thing to another, and consequently no relation\\nto any thing beyond their subject which they represent in a certain\\nstate or condition, and nothing more. Instead of the terms active and\\nneuter formerly used to denote these two classes of verbs, the terms\\nTransitive and Intransitive are here preferred, as being more expressive\\nand appropriate, and in order to relieve the term active from the\\nambiguity created by using it, both as the designation of a class of\\nverbs, and also, as the name of a particular form of the verb called the\\nactive voice. To the latter of these only, it is now applied in this work.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "71. THE VERB. 83\\n3. An Intransitive verb expresses being, or a\\nstate of being, or action confined to the actor. It\\nis commonly without the passive form. 195, Obs. 2.\\n192. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The use of the verb, in simple propositions, is, to affirm.\\nThat of which it affirms is called its subject, which, if a noun or\\npronoun, is in the nominative but when the verb is in the infi-\\nnitive, its subject is in the accusative.\\n2. The verbs that express being simply, in Greek, are three,\\nslfUf yivofiai, and viiao%(o, signifying in general to be. The state\\nof being expressed by intransitive verbs, may be a state of rest\\nas, evdw, I sleep or of motion as, y vavg nlhi, the ship sails\\nor of action as, TQtjco f I run.\\n3. Transitive and Intransitive verbs may always be distin-\\nguished thus a transitive verb always requires an object to com-\\nplete the sense as, quia oe, I love thee the intransitive verb\\ndoes not, but the sense is complete without such an object as,\\n?)pai, I sit tq8% x), I run.\\n4. Many verbs considered intransitive in Greek, are translated\\nby verbs considered transitive in English as, avddvta, I please\\nVTiaxova, I obey aTZEi co, I disobey ipTtodi^co, I hinder\\n\u00c2\u00a3voy}J(o, I trouble c. In strict language, however, these and\\nsimilar verbs denote rather a state than an act, and may be ren-\\ndered by the verb to be and an adjective word as, I am pleasing,\\nobedient, disobedient, c.\\n5. Many verbs are used, sometimes in a transitive, and some-\\ntimes in an intransitive sense as, (p ivco, tr. destroy, intr. I\\nsink, or decay OQiiaa, tr. i~ stir up intr. rush. This change\\nfrom a transitive to an intransitive sense, however, is generally\\nindicated by a change from the active to the middle form of the\\nverb as, (paiva, active tr. sheiv cpaivofJiai, mid. shew my-\\nself, i. e. intr. I appear. (See 195, Note)\\n6. Verbs usually intransitive become transitive, when a word\\nof similar signification with the verb itself is introduced as its ob-\\nject as, rqii^iiev rbv ay diva, let us run the race.\\n*7. When a writer wishes to direct the attention, not so much to a\\nparticular act, as to the employment or state of a person or thing, the\\nobject of the act, not being important, is omitted and the verb, though\\ntransitive, assumes the character of an intransitive. Thus, when we\\nsay, The boy reads, nothing more is indicated than the present state\\nor employment of the subject boy, and the verb has obviously an", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "84 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 72.\\nintransitive sense still an objeet is implied. But when we say, The\\nboy reads Homer, the attention is directed to the object Homer, as\\nwell as to the act, and the verb has its proper transitive sense.\\n12. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS.\\n193. Though the division of verbs into Transitive and In-\\ntransitive, comprehends all the verbs in any language, yet, from\\nsomething peculiar in their form or signification, they are charac-\\nterized by different names expressive of this peculiarity. The\\nmost common of these are the following, viz. Regular, Irregu-\\nlar, Deponent, Defective, Redundant, Impersonal, Desiderative,\\nFrequentative, and Inceptive.\\n1. Regular Verbs are those in which all the\\nparts are formed from the Root or stem, accord-\\ning to certain rules. 93-97, and 106, 107.\\n2. Irregular, or Anomalous Verbs, differ in\\nsome of their parts from the regular forms. \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a7112,\\n116, 117.\\n3. Deponent Verbs under a middle and pas-\\nsive form, have either an active or middle signifi-\\ncation. 113.\\n4. Defective Verbs are those in which some\\nof the parts are wanting.\\n5. Redundant Verbs have more than one\\nform of the same part.\\n6. Impersonal Verbs are used only in the\\nthird person singular. 114.\\n7. Desideratives denote desire, or intention\\nof doing. \u00c2\u00a7115, 1.\\n8. Frequentatives express repeated action.\\n115, 2.\\n9. Inceptives mark the beginning or continued\\nincrease of an action. 115, 3.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "73, 74. INFLECTION OF VEEBS. VOICE. 85\\n73. INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS.\\n194. To the inflection of verbs belong Voices,\\nMoods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons.\\n1. The Voices in Greek are three, Active, Mid-\\ndle, and Passive.\\n2. The Moods are five the Indicative, Subjunc-\\ntive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive.\\n3. The Tenses, or distinctions of time in Greek,\\nare seven, the Present, the Imperfect, the Future,\\nthe Aorist, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, and, in the\\npassive voice, the Paulo-post-future, or Future-\\nperfect.\\n4. The Numbers are three; Singular, Dual,\\nand Plural.\\n5. The Peesons are three First, Second, and\\nThird.\\n6. The Conjugations, or forms of inflection,\\nare two viz., the First, of verbs in co and the\\nSecond, of verbs in fie.\\nObs. Some verbs appear in both forms as, dei /.vvco and beiy.vv-\\n(M, I show. Some verbs are partly of the first conjugation, and\\npartly of the second thus, ftuivG), I go, of the first 2d Aorist,\\nsfiqv, I went, from ^r^i of the second yiyvaaxco, I knoiv 2d\\nAor. eyvcov, I knew, from yvoopi of the second. Such verbs as\\nthese, however, though regular in each form, are generally reckon-\\ned among the irregular verbs.\\n74. VOICE.\\n195. Voice is a particular form of the verb\\nwhich shows the relation of the subject, or thing-\\nspoken of, to the action expressed by the verb.\\nThe transitive verb, in Greek, has three voices,\\nActive. Middle, and Passive.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "SQ voice. 74.\\nObs. 1. In all voices the act expressed by the transitive verb is\\nthe same, and in all, except sometimes the middle, is equally tran-\\nsitive; but in each, the act is differently related to the subject of\\nthe verb, as follows\\n1. The Active Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acting on some object as, tvtvtco as,\\nI strike you.\\n2. The Middle Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acting on itself, or in some way for it-\\nself; as, TVTiTOfAai, I strike myself a/3XaiijdjLir]v\\ntov TTodcc, I hurt my foot covrjadjurjv ltctzov, I\\nbought me a horse.\\n3. The Passive Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acted upon as, tvtcto/licu, I am\\nstruck; 6 novo, eftXacptfrj, the foot his foot my\\nfoot was hurt.\\nObs. 2. Intransitive verbs, from their nature, do not admit a\\ndistinction of voice. They are generally in the form of the ac-\\ntive voice, frequently in that of the middle or passive but, what-\\never be their form, their signification is always the same; as,\\nvtjisx D or fhnpntojica, I die.\\nObs. 3. The Middle voice, in Greek, is so called, because it\\nhas a middle signification between the active and the passive, im-\\nplying neither action nor passion simply, but a union, in some\\ndegree, of both. Middle verbs may be divided into Five Classes,\\nas follows\\n1st. In middle verbs of the first class, the action of the verb is\\nreflected immediately back upon the agent and hence verbs of\\nthis class are exactly equivalent to the active voice joined with the\\naccusative of the reflexive pronoun; as, lovco, I zoash another;\\nlovofiou, I zoash myself; the same as lovco s[iavt6v.\\n2d. In middle verbs of the second class, the agent is also the\\nremote object of the verb, dr he with respect to whom the act\\ntakes place so that middle verbs of this class are equivalent to\\nthe active voice with the dative of the reflexive pronoun (ipoancp,\\naeavzcp, savico); as, cuquv, to take up (any thing), sc. for another,\\nin order to transfer it to another aioua ca, to take up, sc. in\\norder to keep it for one s self to transfer it to one s self. Hence\\nverbs of this class carry with them the idea of a thing s being\\ndone/or one s self.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a774. voice. 87\\n3d. Middle verbs of the third class express an action performed\\nat the command of, or with regard to, the subject, and is expressed\\nin English by to cause. In other words, this class may be said to\\nsignify, to cause any thing to be done as, ygaqm, I write yoa-\\nqiopcu, I cause to be written I cause the name, as of an accused\\nperson, to be taken down in writing by the magistrate before whom\\nthe process is carried, or simply, I accuse.\\n4th. The fourth class of middle verbs, includes those which\\ndenote a reciprocal or mutual action as, amvoeGxrai, to make\\nlibations along with another, to make mutual libations, i. e. to\\nmake a league dialvsod ai, to dissolve along with another, to\\ndissolve by mutual agreement. To this class belong verbs signi-\\nfying to contract, to quarrel, to contend, c.\\n5th. The fifth class comprehends middle verbs of the first\\nclass, when followed by an accusative, or some other case in\\nother words, it embraces all those middle verbs which denote an\\naction reflected back on the agent himself, and which are, at the\\nsame time, followed by an accusative, or other case, which that\\naction farther regards as, dvafivdcdui zi, to recall any thing to\\none s own recollection.\\nNote. From the reflected nature of this voice, many verbs, which\\nare transitive in the active voice, may be rendered by an intransitive\\nverb in the middle voice as, axi).).o), I send (viz. another) o~tOJ.oi.iai,\\nI send myself, i. e. I go ogylZo), I provoke another ooyltojuai,, I provoke\\nmyself, i. e. lam angry 7iel o), I persuade another; TTci o/na^ I per-\\nsuade myself, i. e. I yield, or obey. In many instances, however, the re-\\nlation to self is not so clearly distinguishable. This is particularly the\\ncase with the later writers, as Plutarch, Herodian, c. In the writings\\nof the ancients, Herodotus, Xenophon, and others, the distinction between\\nthe active and the middle voice is much more strictly observed.\\nObs. 4. The future middle has often an active, and sometimes,\\nespecially among the poets, a passive sense.\\nObs. 5. The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect,\\nand the future-perfect middle, are the same as in the passive, or,\\nmore strictly, they are the passive forms in a middle sense. When\\nthe middle aorists are unusual or wanting, their place is supplied\\nby the passive aorists in a middle sense. Sometimes, when the\\nmiddle aorist is used in the ordinary sense, the passive also is used\\nas a middle, but in a peculiar sense as, middle OTeiXaaxrai, to\\narray one s self; passive GzaXyvai, to travel.\\nObs. 6. The 2 Perfect, and 2 Pluperfect Active (called by the\\nancient grammarians the perfect and pluperfect middle) are of rare\\noccurrence, and, when used, are completely of an active significa-\\ntion. In a few instances, it is true, they incline to an intransitive", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "88 moods. 75.\\nand reflexive sense as, ninoida, I have persuaded myself, i. e.\\nam confident. But still it is certain that, in all cases in which\\na verb can have a middle sense, that sense is expressed, in these\\ntenses, only by the perfect and pluperfect passive in their middle\\nsense.\\n15. MOODS.\\n196. Mood is the mode or manner of express-\\ning the signification of the verb.\\n197. The moods, in Greek, are five, namely\\nthe Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative,\\nand Infinitive.\\n1. The Indicative Mood asserts the action or\\nstate expressed by the verb simply as a fact as,\\ngjiXzcQ, Hove yqacpu, lie tvrites.\\nObs. 1. The indicative, in Greek, being used in dependent, as\\nwell as in independent clauses, resembles the English indicative,\\nand is often used where the subjunctive would be used in Latin\\nas, yiyvooGXEig Tig Ian do you know who he is Latin, An scis\\nqui sit\\n2. The Subjunctive and Optative Moods re-\\npresent the action or state expressed by the verb,\\nnot as a fact, but only as a conception of the mind\\nstill contingent and dependent: that is, they do\\nnot represent a thing as what does, or did, or cer-\\ntainly will exist, but as what may, or can, or\\nmight exist.\\nThe Subjunctive represents this contingency\\nand dependence as present the Optative, as\\npast\\nObs. 2. The subjunctive and optative moods involve a com-\\nplex idea including 1st and chiefly, the general idea of liberty\\nor power, expressed by the English words, may, can, might, c,\\nfrom which the secondary ideas of contingency and futurity are\\nderived; and 2d, the modification of this idea by the meaning of", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "75. moods. 89\\nthe verb common to all the moods thus, He may, or can, ex-\\npressed in Greek by the subjunctive form, represents the person\\nhe in possession of the general attribute of liberty or power. Com-\\nbine with this the meaning of the verb, and then we have the\\ngeneral attribute expressed by the subjunctive form, restricted to\\nthe particular action or state expressed by the verb as, he may\\nwrite he can walk he may be loved.\\nObs. 3. The future indicative is often used in a subjunctive,\\nand also in an imperative sense and hence, in the futures, there\\nis neither subjunctive nor imperative mood. See Syntax, 699-5\\nand 705.\\nObs. 4. The contingency of an action conceived of as past, is\\nnot absolute, but relative to the knowledge of the speaker thus,\\nin the expression, yeyodqjri, he may have written, the act, if done,\\nis past, but of the fact, the speaker is uncertain.\\n3. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts,\\nentreats, or permits as, ygdcps, write thou; it a,\\nlet him go.\\nObs. 5. In the past tenses the Imperative expresses urgency\\nof command, expedition, or completion of action as, Troiqoov,\\nhave done. In the perfect, moreover, the idea of permanent and\\ncompleted action is implied as, ifxfieph jG cD, let him have been\\ncast, i. e. let him be cast speedily, and effectually, and continue so\\n7] voa xexXsig cq, let the door be shut, and kept so.\\nRem. The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the infinitive,\\nare sometimes used imperatively. See Syntax of these moods.\\n4. The Infinitive Mood expresses the meaning\\nof the verb in a general manner, without any dis-\\ntinction of person or number; as, ygdcpsw, to\\nwrite ytyQCKptvac, to have written yqdcpbO cu,\\nto he written.\\nObs. 6. Besides the common use of the infinitive, as in Latin,\\nit is completely a verbal noun, of the neuter gender, 714.\\nObs. 7. Hence the Greek infinitive supplies the place of those\\nverbal nouns called gerunds and supines, in Latin, 717, 718.\\nObs. 8. The infinitive, with a subject, is usually translated as\\nthe indicative, 175.\\nObs. 9. The imperfect and pluperfect exist only in the indica-\\ntive.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "90 THE TENSES. 76.\\n76. THE TENSES.\\n198. Tenses are certain forms of the Verb\\nwhich serve to point out the distinctions of time.\\nThe Tenses in Greek are seven, the Present,\\nthe Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the Per-\\nfect, the Pluperfect, and, in the Passive, the Fu-\\nture-perfect or Paulo-post-future.\\nRem. In some verbs, the perfect and pluperfect active, the aorists in\\nall the voices, and the future in the passive voice, have two different\\nforms, usually distinguished as first and second, but of the same signifi-\\ncation. The second future has no existence in the active and middle\\nvoices that which was so called by the ancient grammarians, is only\\nan Attic form of the first \u00c2\u00a7101, 4 (1).\\nI. The Present tense expresses what is going\\non at the present time; as, ygdcpco, I ivrite, I am\\nwriting.\\nObs. 1. The present tense is used, to express general truths\\nas, \u00c2\u00a3,6)cc tq\u00c2\u00a3%bi, animals run. In historical narration it is used\\nwith great effect for a preterite tense.\\nII. The Imperfect tense represents an action or\\nevent as passing, and still unfinished, at a certain\\npast time as, tyqayov, I was writing (when he\\ncame).\\nRem. This tense corresponds in meaning and use to the past\\nprogressive in English, and tlie imperfect in Latin.\\nObs. 2. From its expressing the continuance of an action, this\\ntense is frequently used to express what was customary, or con-\\ntinued from time to time; as, 6 i7rnox.6{iog tov mnov ETQifis,\\ny.al ixrtvi^e ndaag ype oag, the groom kept rubbing and cur-\\nrying the horse every day.\\nObs. 3. For the same reason it is used instead of the aorist,\\nto express a past action, without reference to any specified time.\\nWhen the action is continued, and not momentary, and when\\nactions of both kinds are mingled in a narration, the continued\\naction is often expressed by the imperfect, and the momentary by\\nthe aorist; as, i^t doafis xcu xaftvldxrEi, He ran forth\\n(the aorist,) and continued barking at them (the imperfect).\\nTovg (tsv ovv Ttelraarag fdt^avTO ol pdflpaQOt, xcu efidftov-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "76. THE TENSES. 91\\nto ETTEitf iyyvg yaav, ol bnkvtai Etoanovro, y.ai ol TreXraGTai\\nevdvg z lnovxo. The barbarians received (aorist) the peltastce,*\\nand fought (imperf.) with them. But when the heavy-armed\\nsoldiers were near, they turned (aorist), and the jpeltastaz imme-\\ndiately pursued them (imperf.).\\nObs. 4. When the action represented by the imperfect as be-\\ngun and continuing in past time, does not succeed, or fails to be\\ncompleted, it expresses only the beginning of an action, or the\\nattempt to accomplish it; as, Klsagyog 8s tovg aTQuncozag\\ni^id^szo is vcu, Clearchus attempted to force the soldiers\\nto go.\\nIII. The Future tense expresses what will take\\nplace in future time as, yqaipco, I shall or will\\niv rite.\\nRem. The future tense corresponds to the simple future in\\nLatin and English and, in the passive voice, has two forms called\\nthe first and second.\\nObs. 5. Other varieties of future time are expressed by means\\nof auxiliary verbs. See 199-1.\\nIV. The Aorist represents an action or event\\nsimply as past; as, tyqaxpa, I wrote.\\nRem. This tense, in all the voices, has two forms, called the\\nfirst and second. It corresponds in meaning to the past tense in\\nEnglish, and the perfect indefinite in Latin. When the time to\\nwhich the imperfect and pluperfect refer, is manifest from the\\ncontext, the aorist is often used instead of them.\\nObs. 6. From the indefinite nature of this tense, it is used by\\nthe Greeks to express what is usually or always true and is ren-\\ndered by the English expressions, usually] to be wont] to\\nuse as, Tug rmv cpavXav ovvrj eiag.oXiyog yqovog ditXvas, A\\nshort time commonly dissolves the confederacies of the wicked.\\nJZoMQCtTng i8i8a ;s tovg iiccdijrag aiiia i, Socrates was wont\\nto teach his disciples without any charge. In this signification,\\nhowever, it differs from the imperfect (Obs. 2), inasmuch as the\\naorist denotes what is always customary; the imperfect, what\\nwas customary during a specified period of time.\\nObs. 1. As the aorist does not, like the imperfect, express con-\\ntinuance, it is often used to express momentary action, and that\\nin the same construction in which the imperfect is used to ex-\\npress continued action (Obs. 3).", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "92 THE TENSES. \u00c2\u00a776.\\nN. B. Though in the paradigm of the verb the full form of both the\\nt first and second aorist is usually given, it must be observed that when\\nthe first aorist is in use, the second is usually wanting, and vice versa.\\nIn a very few words only, are both forms to be found, and even in these,\\nthe two forms for the most part belong to different dialects, ages, or\\nstyles.\\nY. The Peefect tense represents an action or\\nevent as completed at the present time, or in a\\nperiod of time of which the present forms a part\\nas, y tyqacpa, I have written.\\nRem. In some verbs, this tense, in the active voice, has two\\nforms called the Perfect and Second-perfect. It corresponds in\\nmeaning and use to the present-perfect in English, and the per-\\nfect definite in Latin.\\nObs. 8. This tense implies that at or in the present time, the\\nact expressed by the verb is completed, but does not indicate at\\nwhat point or period of time prior to the present it was completed.\\nThus, yeygacpa zr t v imtjToXijv, I have written the letter, does not\\nsay when the letter was written, but only that it is now written.\\nHence it is, that this tense connects the action, either in its com-\\npletion, or, in its continuance as a completed act, with the present\\ntime thus, yeyafiqxa, in Greek, means not only, I have been\\nmarried (without saying when the event took place), but that the\\nmarried state still continues, i. e. am married. Hence the per-\\nfect is generally used to denote a lasting or permanent state or an\\naction finished in itself, and therefore often occurs in Greek,\\nwhere, in English, we use the present; as, afiyipefinxag, thou\\nprotectest (i. e. thou hast protected and still continuest to protect).\\nThe continued force of the perfect accompanies it through all the\\nmoods; as, unov r)\\\\v vquv xsxletad ai, they gave directions\\nfor the door to be shut, and to be kept so 6 fitv h]$zr t g ovzog ig\\ntop HvQicplsysirovia \u00c2\u00a3(i@s{il?]G Q CQ, Let this robber be cast into\\nthe Pyriphlegethon, and continue there.\\nObs. 9. In several verbs, the perfect tense is always used to\\ndenote only the finished action, whose effect is permanent, and\\ntherefore, in English, is translated by the present of some other\\nverb, which expresses the consequence of the action expressed by\\nthe Greek verb. Thus, xaleco, I name, perfect passive x t x A\\n(jlcu, I have been named, and continue to be so, but commonly\\nrendered, am named, or my name is. So also, from xrdofiai,\\nI acquire for myself, xtxrij^ini, I possess (i. e. I have acquired,\\nand the acquisition continues mine) [ivdofxai, I call to my re-\\ncollection fi s [i v i\\\\ fi at I remember.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "77. THE TENSES. 93\\nVI. The Pluperfect represents an action as\\ncompleted at or before a certain past time; as,\\niytyqacpbtv, Iliad written (some time ago).\\nRem. This tense, like the perfect, in the active voice, has two\\nforms called the Pluperfect and Second-pluperfect. In both, its\\nmeaning is the same, and corresponds to the pluperfect in Latin\\nand English.\\nObs. 10. The pluperfect bears the same relation to the per-\\nfect, that the imperfect does to the present and hence whenever\\nthe perfect is rendered by the present Obs. 9), the pluperfect\\nwill of course be rendered as the imperfect as, dedoixa, I fear,\\niSedoixsiv, I feared.\\nVII. The Future-Perfect, or Paulo-post-Future, as it is\\nsometimes called by grammarians, is, both in form and significa-\\ntion, compounded of the perfect and future, and denotes,\\n1. The continuance of an action, or state, in itself, or conse-\\nquences as, ?j Ttohieia zelscog yey.ocpiastai, The city will con-\\ntinue to be completely organized yeyQaipszai, He shall con-\\ntinue enrolled. In thus expressing continuance, it agrees in sig-\\nnification with the perfect, and hence,\\n2. It is the natural future of those perfects which have ac-\\nquired a separate meaning of the nature of the present Obs. 9)\\nas, XsXemtcu, he has been, and continues left, i. e. he remains\\nPaulo-post-F. XeXeixperai, he will remain; yJxrnpcu, I have\\nacquired and continue to retain, i. e. possess Paulo-post-future\\ny.EXT?j6 0{jLai, I shall possess.\\n3. It is frequently used to intimate that a thing will be done\\nspeedily as, (pod y.al TtsTTQa^stai, speak and it shall be done\\nimmediately.\\n199. \u00c2\u00a777. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE\\nTENSES.\\n1. Time is naturally divided into the Present, Past, and Fu-\\nture; and in each of these divisions an action may be represented\\neither as incomplete and continuing, or as completed at the time\\nspoken of; thus,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "94 THE TENSES. \u00c2\u00a777.\\np j Action continuing; as, ygdcpco, I write or am writing\\nI Action completed as, ytygaya, I have written.\\np j Action continuing as, syQacpov, I was writing.\\nAction completed as, syeygatyEbv, I had written.\\nAction continuing as, ygaxpa, I shall write.\\nFuture. Action completed as, yeyodycog hofiai, I shall\\nhave written.\\nOf these six divisions of time, it will be observed, that all ex-\\ncept the last are expressed by distinct forms or tenses of the verb\\nand this last is also expressed by a distinct form in the passive\\nvoice, called the Paulo-post-future. It may also be noticed that\\nin each of these three divisions of time, by means of an auxiliary\\nverb and the infinitive, an action may be represented as on the\\npoint of beginning thus,\\nPresent. [it llco ygatyeiv, I am about to write.\\nPast. b^ieIXov youtyeiv, I was about to write.\\nFuture. [islXtjGw yqaqeiv, I shall be about to write.\\n2. Besides these, the Greek has the advantage of a separate\\ntense under the division of past time, to intimate simply that the\\naction is past without reference to any particular point of time at\\nwhich it took place, and hence is denominated the Aorist, i. e. inde-\\nfinite. This tense is rendered into English by the past tense, and\\ninto Latin, by the imperfect and perfect tenses in an indefinite\\nsense.\\n3. The tenses, divided as above into three classes, in respect\\nof time, are farther, with regard to their termination and use,\\ndivided into two classes or series, which may be denominated the\\nChief or Primary, and Secondary tenses thus,\\nChief or Primary. Secondary.\\nPresent. Imperfect.\\nPerfect. Pluperfect.\\nFuture. 1 Aorist.\\nFuture-passive. 2 Aorist.\\nThe chief tenses are employed in the direct address, to express\\nactions as present or future. The secondary are used in the reci-\\ntal of these actions as past and hence are sometimes denomi-\\nnated the Historical Tenses.\\n4. In the English expression of the moods and tenses, fcc, great\\nprecision cannot be expected. Their signification often varies accord-\\ning to the conjunctions and particles with which they are joined, and\\nhence, a corresponding variety of translation becomes necessary. In\\nconsequence, also, of the number of independent forms being greater in", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "78. AUXILIARY VERBS. 95\\nthe Greek verb than in the English, it is necessary to express certain\\ntenses and moods, in the former, by a circumlocution in the latter and\\nsometimes, in order to give the precise idea of the Greek tense, a to-\\ntally different construction must be adopted in the English sentence by\\nwhich it is translated thus, having no imperative in the past tense\\nin English, the full force of the imperative forms, in the past tenses in\\nGreek, must either be lost in the translation, or preserved at the\\nexpense, often, of a clumsy circumlocution. (197, Obs. 5.) In like\\nmanner, if we were required to give a strict translation to an aorist\\nparticiple, according to the idiom of our language, we must use, not a\\nparticiple, but a tense of the verb thus, rovro Tto^aaq anrjX fv, is\\ncommonly rendered, having done this, he departed; when, in fact, it\\nshould be, when he did this, he departed. The ordinary rendering of the\\nmoods and tenses is the same in Greek as in Latin. This, as well as\\npeculiarities of usage, is fully illustrated, \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a77o, 16.\\n\u00c2\u00a778. AUXILIARY VERBS.\\n200 Although the Greek language is richer than any other in\\nindependent forms, nevertheless a circumlocution is frequently made\\nuse of, by means of the auxiliary verbs dvai, y.vqttv, vnaqyiiv h /a-v,\\n(fee, in connection with a participle or infinitive, partly to supply defi-\\ncient, or to avoid inharmonious forms partly to strengthen the signi-\\nfication and partly to express, with more minuteness and precision,\\nthe time and manner of action or state expressed by the verb thus,\\n1. The subjunctive and optative in the perfect passive, are generally\\nformed with dvai and the perfect participle the independent forms\\nbeing rarely used. The same construction is sometimes used in the\\nactive voice.\\n2. To express a purpose of doing, or the proximity of an event, fieX-\\n?.o L).o), and \u00c2\u00a3?.o), with the infinitive, are used as, o,xv ftUMu:\\nyew, whatever you are about to say.\\n3. Continuance, or a permanent state, combined with the various\\ncircumstances of commencement, simple existence, priority, energy, or\\naccident, is expressed by yivouav, n/xi, vTtdo/o), y.vqo), e/o), rvy/dvo),\\nwith a participle as, iytvtro dv qoynoq d7ttaraXu\u00c2\u00a3voc, there was a man\\nsent.\\n4. The completion of an event is expressed by tlftl, with a past par-\\nticiple. With such a participle, ilul in the past tense, is equivalent to\\nthe pluperfect, but is much more emphatical as, roue; avaoffiavraq rtji;\\ntcoUmi; t}v dio )taq, he was after driving the informers from the city.\\nIn like manner, taouai, in the future, with a past participle, expresses\\nthe future-perfect in the indicative the subjunctive and optative of\\nwhich is supplied from the aorists and perfect as, Tunoirnxivov torai,\\nit shall have been done, or it shall be done quickly.\\n5. Anticipated performance is expressed by ySdvo) or nqoq.0a.vo),\\nwith a participle as, SvvriQtvrcn, pO- xaao xl dqdaavxa; na ilv, they\\nconspire to do something to avoid suffering.\\n6. Secrecy, so as to escape not only the knowledge of others, but\\neven a person s own consciousness, is expressed by Xav dvo), with a", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "96 PARTICIPLES. 79.\\nparticiple as, y d).a ov rtvsq t.twdo avtiq dyyiV.ovq, some persons enter-\\ntained angels unawares.\\n7. A variety of other circumstances are expressed by joining appro-\\npriate adjectives and participles, with iljul; as, qxxvtQbq tjv vo)v, he\\nsacrificed openly.\\n8. Strong and earnest desire is expressed by the imperfect or second\\naorist of oytD.o), agreeing with its subject, and commonly followed bv\\nthe infinitive the particle tlrs is sometimes joined with it, and some-\\ntimes not as, Mt] oqxXov viy.av, I wish that I had not conquered. AlQr\\noq t).ov fielvai,, Would to God I had stayed.\\n9. Imperious duty or necessity is expressed by verbal adjectives in\\ntioq (202), either agreeing with their substantives, or, what is more\\nusual, having their agents in the dative, and governing their objects as\\nthe verbs do from which they are derived; as, 6 dya bq fiovoq rt/i\\nrioq, the good man alone must be honoured.\\n10. In some cases, there appears to be a pleonasm in the use of cer-\\ntain auxiliaries, where there is really none for by analyzing the\\nexpressions, we shall find every word having its own distinct force\\nthus, i/.MV ilvat, inuladouivoq, is incorrectly translated, forgetting will-\\ningly. The full force of the words may be expressed in English thus\\nwilling to be after forgetting according to the ancient Celtic idiom.\\n(See No. 4 also Construction of the Participle, 177-IV.)\\n19. PARTICIPLES.\\n201. Participles are parts of tlie verb, and,\\nwithout affirmation, express its meaning considered\\nas a quality or condition of an object as,\\ni/l e Is 7i co v, he came seeing.\\n6 rag y.drco ev zitipu clvtov, standing below he praised him.\\nParticiples are varied like adjectives, by gender, number, and\\ncase, to agree with substantives in these accidents. If the idea\\nof time be separated from the participle, it becomes an adjective.\\nEvery tense in Greek, except the imperfect and pluperfect, has\\nits participle, a circumstance which gives the language a decid-\\ned advantage over the Latin, which has no present participle pas-\\nsive, nor past participle active.\\n80. VERBAL OR PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES IN zog\\nAND riog.\\n202. The Greeks have verbal adjectives, which, both in signi-\\nfication and use, resemble participles. They are formed by adding\\nthe syllables tog and rtog to the first root of the verb thus,", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "80. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. 97\\nRoot. Verbal Adj.\\nXsyco, I say ley tog ley.tog, said,\\nyodcpco, I write yqay tog yqantdg, written,\\ncptfo co, I love quia tsog cpilrpsog, to be loved.\\nThose derived from liquid verbs add tog and tsog to the sec-\\nond root as,\\ntslvco, I extend, 2d R. tav- tsog, tatsog, to be extended.\\nNote. In those derived from pure verbs, the vowel preceding the ter-\\nmination is sometimes lengthened, sometimes not thus, from yikioj, the\\nadjective is q i).r\\\\xioc, but from aioio), aiQiroq.\\nObs. 1. The verbal adjectives in tog have commonly a pas-\\nsive signification, and either correspond to the Latin perfect par-\\nticiple passive as, Ttoiijtog, /actus, made yytbg, aggestus atgs-\\nntog, flexus or, they convey the idea of ability and capacity,\\nexpressed by the Latin adjectives in His thus, 6oat6g y visibilis,\\nvisible; ay.ovotog, audible, c. Frequently, however, they have\\nan active signification; as, xalv7itog, concealing fis^TZtog, blam-\\ning, c.\\nObs. 2. Those in tsog correspond to the Latin future partici-\\nple in dus, and convey the idea of duty, necessity, or obligation\\nas, tyilrpsog, amandus, who ought to be loved TTots og, bibendus,\\nwhich ought to be drunk.\\nObs. 3. The verbal te ov, in the neuter (among the Attics\\nmore commonly tea in the plural), corresponds to the Latin ge-\\nrund thus, Ttotsov (Attic notsa) soti, bibendum est TtoXs^ivtsa\\nsat i, bellandum est.\\nNote. For the construction of these adjectives, see Syntax, 14*7,\\nRules L and II.\\n203. ACCENTS OF THE VERB.\\nIn verbs, the accent is placed as far from the\\nend of the word as the quantity of the final sylla-\\nble will permit (22 24).\\n204. EXCEPTIONS AND VARIETIES.\\n1. Monosyllables, if long, are circumflected as, w, elg, qifjg,\\npjj, for\\n2. A long syllable after the characteristic, unless followed by a\\nlong syllable, is circumflected\\n1st. In the active, and the middle voice in the future of liquid\\nverbs as, 07TsqoS, ansosTg, gtzsqeiv, GTiegovfiai, c, be-\\ncause contracted for 67Zeqs co, g.\\n5", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "98 CONJUGATION. 81.\\n2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists and\\nin the subjunctive present of verbs in [u as, rvcpft-coj\\n-fjg, rj tVTtco, rvTzyg, c. ti cq, ziftcopcu.\\n3. The third person of the optative in oi and ai has the acute\\naccent on the penult; as, tsrvcpoi, dgsaai, except in the futures,\\nNo. 2\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1st.\\n4. The imperatives, il t, dm, svqv, ids lafia, have the accent\\non the final syllable but the imperative, 2 aor. middle, 2d person\\nsingular, circumflects the final syllable as, tvtzov except yivov,\\nrgaTiov, hzyxov.\\n5. The infinitive of the 2 aorist active circumflects the final\\nsyllable as, tvnuv.\\nThe infinitive of the 1st aorist active, 2d aorist middle, both\\naorists passive, all the perfects, and the infinitives of the active\\nvoice in the 2d conjugation, have the circumflex on the long pe-\\nnult, and the acute on the short.\\n6. The participles of the 2d aorist active, of the present active\\nof verbs in fit, and all ending in cog or eig, have the acute accent\\non the final syllable as, rvncov, lazdg, didovg, zervcpcog, rvcp ei g.\\nThe participles of the perfect passive, have the acute accent on\\nthe penult as, tetvfi[A.svog.\\n*1. El\\\\ii and Cfy^l have the acute accent on the final syllable\\nin the indicative (except the 2d sing.) thus, iati, qp//o~/, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a781. CONJUGATION.\\n205. The Conjugation of a verb is the regular\\ncombination and arrangement of its several voices,\\nmoods, tenses, numbers, and persons, according to\\na certain order.\\n206. Of regular verbs, in Greek, there are two\\nconjugations viz., the first, of verbs in co and the\\nsecond, of verbs in jui.\\n207. Verbs of the first conjugation, in the ac-\\ntive voice, end in co, and in the middle and pas-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a782. THE EOOT. 99\\nANALYSIS OF VERBS IN CO.\\n208. Verbs of the first conjugation consist of\\nthe following parts viz.,\\n1. The root or stem, which is unchanged, except\\nas modified by the rules of euphony and,\\n2. Those parts which, by their changes, distin-\\nguish the voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and per-\\nsons. These parts are the tense-sign, the augment,\\nand the terminations.\\n82. THE ROOT.\\n209. 1. The Root is that part of the verb\\nwhich remains unchanged throughout, except as\\nrequired by the rules of euphony, and serves as\\nthe basis of all the other parts.\\n2. The final letter of the root marks the char-\\nacter of the verb, and is therefore called the char-\\nacteristic it is either a vowel, or a mute, or a\\nliquid.\\nWhen the characteristic is a vowel the verb is\\ncalled puTe; when a mute, the verb is called\\nmute; and when a liquid, the verb is called\\nliquid,\\n3. In regular verbs, the characteristic is the\\nletter next the termination in the present indica-\\ntive as, y, in %k yco tt, in tqstvco s, in cpiXsco.\\nExc. But if of two consonants the last is r or\\na liquid, the first is the characteristic as, tt, in\\ntv tit co and juccqtvtco ju, in ts/uvco.\\nFINDING THE ROOT.\\n4. Rule. Strike off from the present indicative\\nall that follows the characteristic what remains", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "100 THE ROOT. 82.\\nis the root thus, Xsy-a, tsqu-cd, /uccqtz-tco, tsju-\\nvco roots Key, TtQjv, /uaQTz, tsju.\\nOBSERVATIONS.\\n210. Obs. 1. The letter z is frequently added to the root be-\\nfore the termination in the present and imperfect, apparently to\\nstrengthen the sound, as in zvnza. The characteristic, if a mid-\\ndle or aspirate mute, coming before this r, is of course changed\\ninto its own smooth (43-2) thus, ftaq) before zco becomes flan,\\nand the verb, \u00c2\u00a7a7izco. Hence, in order to find the root, the char-\\nacteristic changed by euphony must be restored as in the follow-\\ning words\\nCharac.\\nRoot.\\nfilaTTZCO\\nby euphony\\nfor ftlaftzoo\\nj a/S\\nXQV7ZZCQ\\na\\nXQVpZCO\\ni\\nXQvft\\nxaXvTZza)\\na\\nxalvfizo)\\nxalvfi\\nCLTZZCO\\nu\\nacpzco\\ncp\\ndcp\\nfianzco\\nu\\nfidcpzoi)\\ncp\\nfiacp\\n0.7ZZCO\\nu\\nftdcpzco\\ncp\\nacp\\nGxanzon\\nit\\nGXUtyZCQ\\nCP\\naxccy\\ndQVTtZCO\\nu\\ndgvcpzco\\ncp\\ndgvcp\\nQ17ZZCQ\\nu\\nQltyZCQ\\ncp\\nQicp\\nQanzcQ\\nit\\nQCLCpZOH\\ncp\\nQacp\\nAlso 6\\\\ivyw and ipv%co have their roots G{ivy and ipvy.\\nNote. The preceding list contains all the words to which this obser-\\nvation is applicable.\\nSECONDARY FORMS.\\n211. Obs. 2. Many verbs have a Secondary form in the pre-\\nsent and imperfect, which has come into general use, while the\\noriginal form or theme, has become obsolete, 116. The root\\nof the theme nevertheless remains the proper root of the verb\\nin the other tenses, and will be found in the future by striking off\\noco. If the letter next preceding be a consonant, it is the charac-\\nteristic of the verb. If it be a long vowel, either that or its cor-\\nresponding short vowel is the characteristic. But if it be a short\\nor doubtful vowel, the characteristic is either that vowel itself, or\\na r-mute, which has been rejected before o~co for the sake of sound,\\n44-8. This observation applies in the following cases viz.,\\n1st. Verbs in o*o ca (rrco) or \u00c2\u00a3oo, are secondary forms, derived\\nfrom primary, whose characteristic is a x-mute (commonly y)", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a782.\\nTHE BOOT.\\n101\\nwhen the future ends in x or a r-mute (commonly 8) when\\nthe future ends in o~a The characteristic being substituted for\\ngg (rr), or f, gives the supposed primary form. Thus,\\nChar. Primary form.\\ny TiQwyco\\nSecondary form.\\nFuture.\\n7TQUGGCO (tTOo)\\nTTQagco\\n-Aqat,(o\\nXQd ~(D\\n7zld(JccQ (zrw)\\nnldaco\\nq QaC,(o\\n(pQClGCO\\naQ7id\u00c2\u00a3co\\nj aQ7ZCC%(0\\naQ7tCL6CO\\nXQayco\\nnlddco\\nRoot.\\nnqay\\nxgay\\nnXad\\naQTtayco\\naQTtddco\\naqnay\\ndquab\\nExc. The following are the verbs of this class which have not y or\\nS for their characteristic viz., ftqaao), oQvaao), p(ji r JO), xoqvggo), and\\nXlaffOfiav, which have their roots respectively (2r t x, oqv/, (pqw, xo^v\\nfax, making the primary forms prjxo), ogv/w, q qUb), xoqv o), and Uro/nat,.\\n2d. Most verbs in o*xa are secondary forms from pure verbs\\nin co 116, I and II). The primary forms will appear by drop-\\nping gx thus, yijQCtGitco, primary form yrjQaco, Root, yjjga.\\n3d. Many verbs, irregular in the present and imperfect, are\\nsecondary forms from obsolete verbs which furnish the roots for\\nthe other tenses. See \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a7116 and 117. In nearly all such verbs,\\nthe first root will be found by taking gco or Gonial from the future\\nas found in the Lexicons; thus,\\nSecondary form. Future.\\nXapfidvcQ h j\\\\pO[/,ai\\nXavbdvco h jGG}\\n7tVV dvO[A(U 7l8V60(l(U\\nftaivo) fit iGopcu\\nRem. In reducing secondary into primary forms in this manner, the\\nvowel before ao) and aofiav in the future, made long by 96, R. 1, must\\nbe shortened; and the r-mute, rejected by 94, R. 2, must be restored,\\nto give the proper form of the root as, (Zalvoi and Xav dvo), above. In\\nall mute verbs, the proper characteristics concealed by combining with\\nao), q. will always be seen in the 2 aorist, or 2 perfect. Thus in lav-\\navo), the 2 aor. is %Xa ov, showing the characteristic to be and 1 root,\\nconsequently, Xt] Hence\\nTO FIND THE ROOT IN SECONDARY FORMS.\\n212. Rule. From the future indicative active\\nor middle as found in the Lexicons, strike off aco\\nor oofxat what remains is the root, either in its\\nsimple form, or modified by the rules of euphony\\nthus,\\nRoot.\\nPrimary form.\\nMP\\nXyfico\\nty\\nXrjdw\\nTZSVd\\n7t\u00c2\u00a3V Q\\npa\\nfidoo", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "102\\nTHE SECOND ROOT.\\n\u00c2\u00a783.\\nSecondary form. Future.\\ntzqclggcq TTQa^co elide\\nagd^co %Qci%G3\\ntt1u66(o nldcca\\n(jpod^co cpoddco\\nyrjQaaxcQ yriqdaco\\nlafifidvco Xy\\\\p60{iou\\nlavddvco Xtjcjcq\\nTtVV aVOllCLl TTEWOflCU\\nfiawco prfGopcu\\n213. 3. Many verbs change the form of the root in the se-\\ncond tenses, i. e. in the second future passive, and second aorist\\nand in the second perfect, and second pluperfect active. These\\nforms, for the sake of distinction, are called the second and the\\nthird root the root of the/ me?U being the first root.\\nRoot.\\n(Too leaves\\n(700\\n(700\\nno ay, 44-7\\nAQCLy, 44\u00e2\u0080\u00947\\nTzlud, 44-8\\naco\\ncpgad, 44-8\\n(700\\n6opai\\n(700\\n60[A,CU\\nPJQU\\nlr[^ 44-6\\nhft, 44-8\\nnevd-, 44-8\\ncofiai\\n\u00c2\u00a7a\\n83. THE SECOND ROOT.\\n214. The second root is always formed from\\nthe first, according to the following\\nRULES.\\n1. A long vowel in the first root is changed in-\\nto a in the second thus,\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\naijTtcOf cqit can\\ntgcoyco, to coy rqay\\n2. In diphthongs, a is retained and e is reject-\\ned\\nas,\\nVerb.\\n1st R. 2d R.\\ncpcuvco,\\nxccica,\\ncpcuv\\ncpuv\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\nXsiTZCQ, XsiTt ll7l\\ncfsvyco, cpsvy opvy\\nExc. But liquid syllables change si into a, poly-\\nsyllables into s as,\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\nDiss. tsivco, reiv rav\\nPolysyl. ayuQco, dyeio dytQ", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "84. THE THIRD ROOT. 103\\n3. In dissyllables not pure, before or after a\\nliquid, is changed into a as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. Verb. IstR. 2d R.\\nT8[A,VCO, 1E\\\\JL TCCfl GTs XXcO, GtsX GZCcX\\ndsQXCD, SSQX dctQX TzXeXCOj TtXsX TtXoLK\\nExc. But s remains unchanged after X, in Xsyo, fiXerta, cpttyco.\\n4. Pure verbs in dco and Sco reject the a and\\n(216, Exc. 1) as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R.\\nfjtvxdco pvxa [ivx\\nazvys co arvys Gzvy\\n84. THE THIRD ROOT.\\n215. The third root is always formed from the\\nsecond, according to the following\\nRULES.\\n1. s, of the second root, is changed into o in\\nthe third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\nXeycQj Xsy ley Xoy\\nayeiQCOy aysiQ ay\u00c2\u00a3Q ayoQ\\n2. a, of the second root, from s or ac in the\\nfirst, is changed into o in the third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\nTiXexco, TtXsx nlout tzXox\\nG7TEIQCO, G7TEIQ GTtCCQ G7ZOQ\\nzeivco, zeiv zccv zov\\nztfivcoy ze\\\\jl za\\\\i ZO\\\\L\\n3. i 9 of the second root, from si of the first, is\\nchanged into oc as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\nXeltko, Xsitz Xin Xom", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "104 THE THIRD ROOT. \u00c2\u00a785.\\n4. a, of the second root, from rj or at of the\\nfirst, is changed into r\\\\ in the third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\n(37/7700,\\n07]7Z\\ncan\\n61]7T\\ncpaivco,\\nqjaiv\\ncpav\\n(pqv\\nikewise Calico,\\nal\\nal\\nn x\\nyXd^cOy\\nvlay\\n-/lay\\nxhjy\\n85. VERBS WHICH WANT THE SECOND AND THIRD\\nROOTS.\\n216. Many verbs want the second tenses, and consequently\\nthe second and third roots. (198, Obs. 1, N. B.) These are as\\nfollows\\nKule 1. Pure verbs want the second root.\\nExc. 1. The following primitives are excepted yodca, cnda,\\n\\\\ivy.do\\\\iCLi) yqd toj, dovrtsco, xrvnico, Qi.ydco, tzvtvzcq, orvysco, toqsco,\\nhjxew, oq8co, (jtEQtco, 6X8co, daico, xaica, and a few others.\\nAxovg) has the third root dxo, but no second.\\nExc. 2. A few dissyllables in too and vco have the second and\\nthe third root the same as the first.\\nNote 1. Several of these are reckoned with anomalous verbs, 117.\\nSome verbs derive their second and third roots from obsolete presents\\nsnch as, aiQeo) and many verbs in dvo) and avopai, for which see the\\nsame section.\\nKule 2. Derivatives in svco, dt^co, i\u00c2\u00a3co, alvco\\nvvco, want the second root.\\nNote 2. Primitives, in these terminations, usually have the second\\nroot.\\nObs. 1. Several verbs which have no second root, and conse-\\nquently no second aorist in the first conjugation, derive the sec-\\nond aorist active and middle from forms in the second conjuga-\\ntion thus, dvco, 2 a. sdvv, from ATMI\\\\ fiaivco, 2 a. e\u00c2\u00a7i]v, from\\nBHMI; yiyvcoGxcQ, 2 a. iyvcov, from rJVQMI, derived from\\nyvoco.\\nObs. 2. Many verbs not included under the above rules never\\nuse the second tenses others have them only in the passive\\nvoice others again are used in these tenses only by certain writ-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a786. THE TENSE-EOOT. 105\\ners. In such a variety of usage, it is proper to assume that all\\nverbs not included in the above classes form the second and third\\nroots according to the rules in 83, 84.\\n86. THE TENSE-ROOT.\\n217. The Tense-Koot is that part which re-\\nmains unchanged in all parts of the same tense. It\\nconsists of all that precedes the termination, ex-\\ncept the augment.\\nObs. 1. In some of the tenses, certain letters are inserted be-\\ntween the verb-root and terminations. These are called signs of\\nthe tenses to which they belong, because they serve to distinguish\\nthese tenses from others.\\nThe Tense-Signs added to the verb-root, form the tense-root\\nin these tenses and, prefixed to the terminations, they form the\\ntense-endings, 232-2. Hence, in the tenses which have no sign,\\nthe verb-root alone is the tense-root, and the termination alone is\\nthe tense-ending as, i-lm-ov. Obs. 4.)\\n218. The tense-signs, together with the tenses to which they\\nbelong, are exhibited in the following\\nTABLE OF TENSE-SIGNS.\\n1. In mute and pure verbs, the tense-signs are as follows\\nAct.\\nFuture, -a-\\n1 Aorist, -6-\\n2 Future,\\nPerf. and Pluperf., or -x-\\n2. In liquid verbs, the tense-signs are as follows\\nFuture, -e-\\n1 Aorist,\\n2 Future, -rja-\\nPerf. and Pluperf., -x-\\nObs. 2. If the characteristic be a tf-mute or a x-mute, the\\nsign of the perfect and pluperfect active is the spiritus asper\\nwhich, combining with the mute before it (43-3), changes it or\\ninto jp x or y into But when the characteristic is jp or\\nthe spiritus asper disappears.\\n5*\\nMid.\\nPass.\\n-a-\\n-716-\\nas follows\\n-dria-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "106\\nTHE AUGMENT.\\n\u00c2\u00a787.\\nObs. 3. If the characteristic is a vowel, or a r-mute, or a li-\\nquid, the sign of the perfect and pluperfect active is x.\\nObs. 4. In all the tenses, except those in the preceding table,\\ni. e. in the second aorist through all the voices, the second per-\\nfect and second pluperfect active, and the perfect and pluperfect\\npassive, and also, in liquid verbs, the first aorist active and mid-\\ndle, the tense-root and the verb-root are always the same. So\\nalso in the present and imperfect in all voices.\\nExc. But irregular verbs, and those which fall under the Ex-\\nceptions and Observations, 82, have the tense-root in the present\\nand imperfect different from the verb-root though, like other\\nverbs, it consists of all that precedes the termination in the present\\nindicative. Thus, for example, in nodosa, the tense-root in the\\npresent and imperfect is nqdaa, while the verb-root is ngdy. In\\nXafifidvcQ, the tense-root of the present and imperfect is Xccfifidv,\\nwhile the verb-root is 1/jfi and so of others.\\n219. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING RULES.\\n[In the following list\\nthe kind of verbs form\\ngive the rule for each.]\\nrimroo, I strike.\\nXsyco, I say.\\n%aiQG), I rejoice.\\n67I81QW, I SOW.\\nTQt cpw, I nourish,\\nayco, I lead.\\nxqu\u00c2\u00a3(o, I cry aloud.\\npallw, I cast.\\n7Tei (n, I persuade.\\nalvsco, I praise.\\ndfxei^a), I change.\\ndooco, I plow.\\nfiteTTG), I see.\\nof vei\\nthe\\ntell the characteristic, the root, and\\nand the third root (if in use), and\\nXeiTtco, I leave.\\nTQCoyco, I eat.\\ntiXshco, I fold,\\noqsilco, I owe.\\n[A,dQ7iz(o, I seize.\\n7TQU()6CO, I do.\\nqod^G), I say.\\ncpawco, I show.\\ndoTid^co, I plunder\\niyEiQCO, I aivake.\\nx)vco, I sacrifice.\\nAulsco, I call,\\nw-ioco, shave.\\ndsidco, I fear.\\ndiddoxco, I learn.\\nTQtTZa, I turn,\\npiairco, I pollute.\\n7Te {i7ZG3, I send,\\nrtfiw, I assign,\\nfurco, I remain.\\n7Z01803, I make.\\nort M.co, I send.\\nlA8iQco, I divide.\\na8LQd\u00c2\u00a3co, I try.\\nocurco, I sprinkle.\\nttq/i co, I burn.\\n220.\\n87. II THE AUGMENT.\\n1. The augment is a prefix joined to the root in\\nthe preterite tenses.\\n2. There are two kinds of augments, the temporal and sylla-\\nbic.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a788. THE AUGMENT. 107\\n3. The temporal augment is used when the root begins with\\na vowel or diphthong, and lengthens the initial vowel.\\n4. The syllabic augment is used when the verb begins with a\\nconsonant, and prefixes a syllable to the root.\\nAUGMENTED TENSES.\\n5. The imperfect and aorists have the augment\\nin the indicative only. The perfect, pluperfect,\\nand paulo-post-future, retain it through all the\\nmoods.\\n6. The present and future have no augment.\\n221.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a788. RULES FOR THE AUGMENT.\\n1. If the verb begins with a consonant, the aug-\\nment s is prefixed as, tvtztcq, zrvmov qltitcq,\\n8QQ17TTOV, 43~5.\\n2. The perfect reduplicates the initial consonant\\nbefore s as, tvtvtcq, perfect rkrvcpa.\\nExc. 1. The aspirate reduplicates its own\\nsmooth as, av/nd\u00c2\u00a3cD, perf. rsfravficcxcc cpaivco,\\nperf. Tiscpayxa, 43-4.\\nExc. 2. Verbs beginning with q, yv, p or a\\nbefore or after a consonant, do not reduplicate\\nthus,\\nq QiTZtco SQQiya 6V t,aco etyy.a\\nyv yvoco eyvcoxcc en 67tevdco hnevxa\\nq yd ico styd-ixa ot atQsepco targocpa\\nna \\\\pev8to etyevxa\\nObs. 1. Sometimes also verbs beginning with y.t, and Ttt, do\\nnot reduplicate as,\\nxr Htuvto hiayxa xti%co mtmo.\\n717 7ZT08CO STZTO^Ha\\nAnd sometimes, though rarely, those beginning with yl, @X.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "108 THE AUGMENT. \u00c2\u00a788.\\n3. When the perfect reduplicates the initial\\nconsonant, the pluperfect receives a new augment\\nas,\\ntvnzco ts tvcpa srsrvcpsiv\\nOtherwise not as, qitztco SQQicpa SQQicpsiv\\n4. If the verb begins with a, s, o or with av,\\nat, oc, the initial vowel is changed into its own\\nlong, and i of the diphthong is subscribed; as,\\ndvvco\\nr\\\\vvov\\nav%dvco\\nrjv^avov\\nsXm^co\\nhndt,co\\nconat,ov\\naittco\\nOlXl^CO\\nijtsov\\nCOXl^OV\\nExc. 1. 25 is often changed into its own diph-\\nthong; as,\\n\u00c2\u00a3%co I have uypv\\nThe verbs which change s into si are the following: sdco,\\nS^Ofiai, S l^CO, sXlGGCO, sXxCO, iXxs cO, iXxVCO, sXs cO, sXcO, STZOflCU,\\nSTZco (this verb retains the augment through all the moods), sgdco,\\nigeco, SQ7Tco, EQTZv^cQ, sqvco, scTzyxco, sandco, s%co, and SCO, 20.\\nExc. 2. If the verb begins with so, the s is un-\\nchanged and the o augmented as, ioora^cv,\\n\u00c2\u00a3cgotcc\u00c2\u00a3ov.\\nSo also some 2d pluperf. active viz., from the 2d perf. soXna,\\npluperf. scoXnsiv soixa, scpxsiv, soqya, scoqysiv.\\nExc. 3. Hco, I bloio am, I hear dij saaco^ I am unused\\ndqdi\u00c2\u00a3o[iai, I loathe retain the initial vowel unchanged as also\\nsome verbs derived from olxog, ohog, olcovog, and oia% as, olvi^co,\\nI smell of wine, oi n^ov and also the 2d perfect active when the\\nroot begins with 01 as, oida, plup. oideiv.\\n5. If the initial vowel is not a, t, o or av, at,\\not, it is not augmented but t and v short are\\nmade long as,\\nl\\nixofiat,\\niXO^V\\nsi slxd^co tixa v\\nV\\n^^Ql^CO\\nvfiQf^OV\\nSV SVQ16XC0 EVQIGXOV\\nn\\niipco\\nr\\\\ysov\\nov omd^co ovra^ov\\nCO\\nco co\\nco ov\\nSee Exceptions, 224-4, 5.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "89, 90. THE AUGMENT. 109\\n222.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 89. AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS.\\n1. When the verb is compounded with a pre-\\nposition, the augment comes between the preposi-\\ntion and the verb as, nqoc-cptqco, 7TQog-8-cptQov.\\nObs. 1. The prepositions drop their final vowel before the aug-\\nment s as, a7iotyaiv(o, antqicuvov Karafiaklco, xaTt fiaXXov\\nBut,\\nObs. 2. 7Teqi before s remains unchanged tzqo usually com-\\nbines with it by contraction; thus, iZQOE fitjv becomes ttqov^v.\\n116,11.\\nObs. 3. When v, in the prepositions avv and iv, is changed\\ninto another consonant, by the rules of euphony, 46-15, it is re-\\ncovered when separated from that consonant, by the augment s\\nthus, GvMJyco, avveleyov avyyoaopco, ovvsyoatyov ipfis vcoj ivs-\\n[IEVOV.\\n2. Verbs compounded with dvg or sv, take the augment after\\nthe particle, when the simple verb begins with a, e, o, or with\\nav, ai, oi as, dvaaoeGTsco, dvarjoeazsov evoqxsg), evojqxeov.\\n3. But if the simple verb begin with any other vowel or con-\\nsonant, dvg is augmented, and sv remains unchanged as, dvarv-\\n%\u00c2\u00a3oj, idvGTv%Eov, dEdvGzv%r]xa evtv^e co, Evtv /rjaa.\\n4. Other compounds generally take the augment at the be-\\nginning.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n223. The exceptions from these rules are but few, and will be\\nbest learned by practice. Some writers augment certain com-\\npound verbs in the beginning, and others in the middle while\\nother verbs are sometimes augmented in both as, imata/tai, I\\nunderstand, Tjmotdfjiqv avoo 6(Q, I erect, ?)vcqq oov xa Evdco,\\nI sleep, xa rjvdov or ixd Evdov EvoylEco, I disturb, tjvc6%Xeov.\\n224.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 90. OBSERVATIONS ON THE AUGMENT.\\n1. In the early Greek poets, the use of the augment is very\\nfluctuating, the same word sometimes occurring with the aug-\\nment and sometimes without it as, e^e ^eqe and exqjeqe, he car-", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "110 THE AUGMENT. 90.\\nried out slaps and Xdfis, he took iqysv and dysv, he brought\\nI8s8sy.ro, 8s8sxro, and 8sxto, he had received.\\nObs. 1. From the antiquity of the Ionic, this has been usually\\nconsidered a peculiarity of that dialect but it occurs frequently\\nin the Attic writers, particularly in choruses as, av tj for zov rj,\\nhe was driven ysysvrjto for iysysvqro, it had been dvdXcoxa for\\ndvyXcoxa, I have spent.\\n2. In Horner and Hesiod, aorists often receive the reduplica-\\ntion, which remains through all the moods; thus, xsxdfico for\\ny.dfico, I shall have laboured XsXdftsG ai for Xdfisa ui, to have\\nreceived.\\n3. In all dialects, verbs beginning with X and \\\\i frequently\\ntake si or si as the augment of the perf. as, siXrjcpa for XsXqcpa, I\\nhave taken sifiaQtai for iisfiaqzai, it has been decreed.\\n4. The Attics often change the simple augment s into and\\naugment the initial vowels of verbs beginning with si and sv as,\\n?)8vvdiAf]v for i8vvdf.i}]v, I was able; ijxa^ov for si xa^ov, I assimi-\\nlated; rjV%6[i?]v for ev%6[A?jv, I prayed r(8sw for siSsiv, I knew.\\n5. In verbs beginning with a, s, 0, or with av, ai, 01, the At-\\ntics sometimes prefix s instead of the usual augment i. e. they\\nuse the syllabic instead of the temporal augment as, sa ~a for\\ni\u00c2\u00a3a sdXcoxa for ?jXcoxa. Sometimes they use both as, oodco,\\nI see, swoaovj soooaxa.\\nATTIC REDUPLICATION.\\n6. When the verb begins with a, s, or 0, followed by a con-\\nsonant, the first two letters are sometimes repeated before the or-\\ndinary augment. This is called the Attic Reduplication thus,\\ndyslqco\\nifis co\\ny\\nOL,CQ\\nI assemble\\nI vomit\\nI smell\\nyysgxa\\nijfxsxa\\nc68a\\nAttice, dy-riysQxa\\nifi jjfjisxa\\no8-co8a\\nOQV66CO\\nI dig\\ncoQvxa\\nbo-CQQvya\\nObs. 2. The pluperfect sometimes takes anew augment on the\\ninitial vowel of the reduplication; thus, dx-ijxoa, ?)x-j]x6siv.\\nObs. 3. This form of the verb frequently changes a long vowel\\nor diphthong into a short or doubtful vowel in the third syllable\\nthus, dXijliya for yXsiya, and dX/jXififiai for jjXsififiaif from aXsiqico\\ndxi\\\\xoa for i jxoa, from dxovco.\\n7. Mule. The simple augment is confined to the indicative\\nmood the reduplication remains in all the moods.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a791.\\nTERMINATIONS.\\nIll\\n225.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a791. III. THE TERMINATIONS.\\n1. The terminations are parts of the verb added immediately\\nto the tense-root, and which, by their changes, serve to distinguish\\nthe voices, moods, numbers, and persons. These are different in\\nthe two conjugations.\\n2. The terminations in the first conjugation consist of two\\nparts the mood-vowel, and final letters.\\nThe mood-vowel distinguishes the mood and connects the final\\nletters with the tense-root. The final letters distinguish the voices,\\nnumbers, and persons.\\n3. The mood-vowel is the first letter of the termination, and in\\nthe indicative, is always short or doubtful except in the 1st and\\n2d pluperfect, which has always si in the subjunctive, it is al-\\nways long in the optative, always a diphthong.\\n4. The final letters are of two classes, Primary and Second-\\nary the former are used in the indicative mood in the primary\\ntenses, and the latter, in the secondary (199-3). Also, the jwi-\\nmary final letters are always used in the subjunctive mood, and\\nthe secondary in the optative.\\n226. TABLE OF FINAL LETTERS.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPrimary.\\n1. 2.\\nSing, o ig\\nDual. tov\\nPlural, fisv 7\\n3.\\ni\\ntov\\nVT61\\nSecondary.\\n1. 2.\\nSing, v, fu g\\nDual. rov\\nPlural, msv re,\\nznv\\nV, 6CCV, SV\\nMIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nPrimary.\\n1. 2.\\nSing, [ion 6oli\\nDual, fisd-ov odov\\nPlural, [is a o e\\n3.\\ntai\\n6 OV\\nVZOLI J\\nSecondary.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nSing. {zt]v oo to\\nDual, jie ov 6 ov o nv\\nPlural, [is a o s vzo\\n5. The mood-vowels and final letters combined form the ter-\\nmination in the indicative, subjunctive, and optative moods through\\nthe whole verb, except in the perfect and pluperfect, middle and\\npassive, which, having no mood-vowels, annex the final letters im-\\nmediately to the root.\\nThe following table shows the mood-vowels and final letters,\\nboth separate and combined.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "112\\nTERMINATIONS.\\n\u00c2\u00a791.\\n227. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary.\\nPresent and Future.\\nMood-vowels and final letters separate. The same combined.\\nSing.\\n0-0\\ns-ig s-i\\nCO\\nsig\\n81\\nDual.\\ns-rov s-rov\\nSrOV\\n8XOV\\nPlural.\\n0-\\\\l8V\\n8-ZS O-VTCl\\n0\\\\18V\\n8t8\\novai(v)\\nFirst and Second Perfect.\\nSing.\\na-\\na-g 8-\\na\\nag\\ne\\nDual.\\na-rov a-rov\\nVJIOV\\narov\\nPlural.\\na-fiev\\na-ts a-vrcu\\na\\\\isv\\nare\\nact\\nSecondary.\\nImperfect and Second Aorist.\\nSing.\\no-v\\ns-g s-\\nov\\ne$\\njr)\\nDual.\\n8-TOV 8-Z7JV\\n8T0V\\nsrrjv\\nPlural.\\n0-[A8V\\nS-XS 0-V\\n0\\\\i8V\\n8X8\\nov\\nFirst Aorist.\\nSing.\\na-\\na-g s-\\na\\nag\\ns\\nDual.\\na-rov d-T7]V\\narov\\ndrqv\\nPlural.\\na-[A8V\\na-rs a-v\\na\\\\isv\\nate\\nav\\nFirst and Second Pluperfect.\\nSing.\\nei-v\\n8i- g 8i-\\n81V\\nsig\\n81\\nDual.\\n81-tOV 81-T7JV\\n8VZOV\\n8lt7]V\\nPlural.\\n81-flSV\\nei-rs si-aav\\n8l\\\\JL8V\\nsirs\\nsiaav\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses.\\nSing.\\n(0-0\\nq-ig r\\\\-i\\nCO\\nvs\\nV\\nDual.\\n7]-rov rj-rov\\nTJTOV\\n7]70V\\nPlural.\\nCO-flSV\\nij-rs co-vrai\\nCOflSV\\nijze\\ncoat,\\nOPTATIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses except the First Aorist.\\nSing.\\noe-ftt\\noi-g oi-\\nOljll\\norg\\n01\\nDual.\\nol-tov oi-rr\\\\v\\nOITOV\\noirqv\\nPlural.\\noi-pev\\n01-78 01-8V\\nOljlSV\\n01X8\\n018V\\nThe First Aorist Optative has cu instead of ot for its mood-vowels.\\n6. In this table the indicative mood-vowel o, and the subjunc-\\ntive co, combining with the final letter -o makes co and with\\n-vial they make ovai and coat 6, Rules 8, 16, and 18.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a791.\\nTEKMINATIONS.\\n113\\n228. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary.\\nPresent and Futures.\\nMood-vowels and final letters separate.\\nThe same combined.\\nSing.\\no-[i.ai\\ne-gui E-zai\\nOfiai\\nnii)\\nEzai\\nDual.\\n6-[l\u00c2\u00a3 OV\\nE-G OV E-G OV\\nOfAEd-OV\\nEG OV\\nEG OV\\nPlural.\\no-ps a\\nE-G E o-vzai\\n6tiE a\\nEG E\\novzai\\nSecondary.\\nImperfect and Second Aorist Middle.\\nSing.\\n6-{l7]V\\nE-GO E-ZO\\n0[A1]V\\nov(1)\\n8ZO\\nDual.\\no-fis ov\\nE-G OV E-G 1JV\\nOfXEd-OV\\nEG OV\\nEG TjV\\nPlural.\\no-fis a\\nE-G E 0-VZO\\n6fA,E a\\nEGdE\\nOVZO\\nFirst Aorist Middle.\\nSing.\\nd-[l7]V\\na-GO a-ro\\na^yv\\n(ZGO\\nazo\\nDual.\\nd-pe ov\\na-G ov d-G r^v\\nd\\\\LE$QV\\ndfiE a\\nCCG OV\\naG rjv\\nPlural.\\nd-ps a\\ncc-g e a-vzo\\nCtG S\\navzo\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses.\\nSing.\\nco-fiai\\nIj-GCtl rj-zcu\\ncopai\\nvO)\\nqzai\\nDual.\\nco-psd-ov\\n1J-G OV rj-G OV\\n(6flE OV\\n7]G OV\\nIJGd-OV\\nPlural.\\nca-ps a\\nq-G E oa-vzai\\nafzsd a\\nrjG E\\ncovzai\\nOPTATIVE MOOD.\\nPresent and Futures, also 2d Aorist Middle.\\nSing.\\noi-fiijv\\nOl-GO Ol-ZO\\nOlfATJV\\n010 (1)\\nOIZO\\nDual.\\n01-{1\u00c2\u00a3 0V\\nOl-G OV oi-Gxfrp\\nOlflE OV\\nOIG OV\\nOlG rjV\\nPlural.\\noi-fiE a\\nOl-G E Ol-VZO\\noifie a\\nOIG S\\nowzo\\nThe First Aorist Optative has cu instead of ov for its mood-vowels.\\n1. In the second person singular, sgcu, in combining, elides g,\\nleaving ecu, and then contracts the concurrent vowels into rj (116,\\nExc. 3). So also 7]Gai becomes qui, and then rj (116, R. viii).\\nSo ego becomes so, contracted ov 1 1 6, R. ii) aGo becomes ao,\\ncontracted co (116, R. vii. 1) and oigo, eliding g, becomes oio,\\nwithout contraction.\\n8. In the passive voice, the perfect and pluperfect have no\\nmood-vowels, but annex the final letters (which in this case are\\nthe terminations) immediately to the root, 2*70-10. Also, the\\nfirst and second aorists, in the indicative, as a termination prefix\\nrj, and, in the optative, eiy[, to the secondary final letters of the\\nactive voice, as will be seen in the table, 231.\\n9. The final letters and mood-vowels of the imperative, infini-\\ntive, and participles, will be seen combined in the following tables.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "114\\nTABLES OF TEKMINATIONS.\\n\u00c2\u00a792.\\n92. TABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n229. I. ACTIVE voice.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nPres.\\nand Fut.\\n1st and 2d Perfect.\\ns.\\n-03\\n-sig\\n-81\\n-a -ag -s\\nD.\\n-8T0V\\n-810V\\n-CCTOV -VJIOV\\nP.\\n-0[A,\u00c2\u00a3V\\n-ST8\\n-ova\\n-a\\\\i8v -ars -aoi\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nImp erf.\\nand 2d Aor.\\n1st and 2d Pluperfect.\\n1st Aor.\\ns.\\n-OV\\n-sg\\n-8\\n-ElV -Eig -El\\n-a -ag -s\\nD.\\n-8Z0V\\n-ixijv\\n-EltOV -ElTrjV\\n-atov -drtjv\\nP.\\n-0(A,8V\\n-8ZS\\n-ov\\n-81118V -sirs -siaav\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\n-a\\\\isv -ars -av\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\n-CO\\n-COflSV\\n-rpov\\n-?]T8\\n-XI\\n-qrov\\n-C061\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\n-01 fit\\n-Ol\\\\l8V\\n-oig\\n-oitov\\n-0LT8\\n-01\\n-0LT7JV\\n-OlSV\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2aifu -aig -ai\\n-airov -ainjv\\n-aijisv -airs -aisv\\nS.\\ny\\n-8\\n-8TC0\\n-ov -at co\\nD.\\n-8Z0V\\n-EZCOV\\nThe same as first\\n-atov -drcov\\nP.\\n-8Z8\\n-ETCOGCiV\\ncolumn.\\n-ars -drcQcrav,\\nor\\n-bvrcov\\nINFINITIVE.\\nor -dvrcov\\n-81V\\n-Evai\\nPARTICIPLES.\\n-ai\\nN.\\n-cov\\n-ova a\\n-ov\\nI -cog -via -6g\\n-ag -aaa -av\\nG.\\n-ovrog\\n-ovaijg\\nG.\\n-orog -viag -orog\\n-avrog -darjg -avrog\\nObs. In this table, the terminations in the first column belong to the\\npresent, imperfect indicative, future, and 2d aorist all those in the\\n2d, to the first and second perfect and pluperfect and all those in the\\n3d, to the 1st aorist.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "92.\\nTABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n115\\n230. II. MIDDLE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nMIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nPres. and Fut.\\nS. -Ofiat -rj -EXai\\nT -ofis ov -eg ov -eg ov\\nP. -ops a -EG-ds -ovrai\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nImperfect and 2d Aorist.\\nS. -oprjv -ov -szo -dprjv\\nD. -OfAE OV -EG OV -tC tjV -d[A\u00c2\u00a3 OV\\nP. -OfASd-a -EG E -ovto -dfiE a\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nS. -cofxai -y -ijiai\\nD. -co^e ov -tjad-ov -qcdov\\nP. -o^s a -?]6 e -wvtat\\n1st Aorist.\\n-co -aro\\n-ccodov -dG$y\\\\v\\n-aa E -avto\\nThe same as first column.\\nOPTATIVE\\nS. -ol\\\\ir^v -oio -oiro\\nD. -Oljlsd OV -OIG OV -01G 7JV\\nP. -oip\u00c2\u00a3 a -oig e -oivro\\n-aiptjv -aio -aito\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0ai[A,E ov -aiG ov -aiGd-^v\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0al\\\\iEd-(jL -aiG s -aivzo\\nIMPERATIVE.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\n-ov\\n-EG OV\\n-EG E\\n-e g cq\\n-zg cov\\n-EG COGaV\\n-at\\n-CLG OV\\n-CCG S\\n-dG CQ\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0dG CQV\\n-daftcoGuv\\n-EG dl\\nINFINITIVE.\\n1\\n-aa ai\\nG.\\n-ofisvog\\n-0\\\\iEVOV\\n-OflEVT]\\nPARTK\\n-byiEvov\\n-o\\\\iivov\\n3IPLES.\\n-d\\\\isvog\\n-a\\\\iivov\\n-a\\\\i(vri\\n-afiEP)]g\\n-dftEVOV\\n-a\\\\iEvov\\nObs. In this table of the middle voice, the terminations of the\\nperfect and pluperfect are omitted, being the same throughout\\nas those of the perfect and pluperfect passive on the next page.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "116 TABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n231. III. PASSIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nPASSIVE AND MIDDLE.\\nPerfect.\\nS. -fiat -ecu -tai\\nD. -flE OV -g ov -aftov\\nP. -fie a. -g e -vtai\\n\u00c2\u00a792.\\nPluperfect.\\nS. -(irjv -go\\nD. -[18 OV -G OV\\nP. -fie a -G s\\nSecondary Tenses.\\n1st and 2d Aorists.\\n-rjv -rjg -y\\n-rjrov jzt]v\\n-to\\n-G ljV\\n-VZO\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nS. -fievog co\\nD. -flEVCO\\nP. -fXEVOl CO^IEV\\nvs\\n1\\\\XOV\\n7JZE\\nV\\n-CO\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2is\\n7JTOV\\n-3\\n-TJTOV\\nCOGl\\n-COfAEV\\n-tjte\\nOPTATIVE.\\nS. -fitvog e itjv siyg\\nD. -psvco Eirjrov\\nP. -\\\\ievoi Eir^iEV Eirjxe\\nslrjtqv\\neiijGCtv\\n-ElYlV\\n-EirjfJlEV\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\nM.\\nN. -fitvog\\nG. -\\\\IEV0V\\nIMPERATIVE.\\n-GO -G CO\\n-G OV -G COV\\n-G E -G COGCX.V\\n-G ai\\nF.\\n-\\\\i(vr\\\\\\n-\\\\ihvi]g\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\n-flEVOV\\nflEVOV\\nM.\\n-Eig\\n-Evzog\\n-ELTjg\\n-Elt/ZOP\\n-ElTjTS\\n-ti l\\n-tjrov\\n-7]te\\n-jjvcti\\nF.\\n-EtGCt\\n-ElGtjg\\n-v\\n-tjtov\\n-COGl\\n-Ell]\\n-Eu]rrjv\\n-EiTjGav\\n-TJtCO\\n-t jtCOV\\n-7]rcoGav\\n-EV\\n-EVTOg\\nFor the terminations of the present, imperfect, 1st, 2d, and 3d\\nfutures of the passive voice, see the terminations in the first column\\n01 the table on the preceding page.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "93. FORMATION OF TENSES. 117\\n232.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 93. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN MUTE\\nAND PURE VERBS.\\n1. Each tense consists of its proper root, and\\ntense-ending, together with the augment prefixed\\nin the augmented tenses.\\nObs. 1. The 2 future passive and 2 aorist add the tense-end-\\nings to the second root, the 2 perfect and 2 pluperfect active, to\\nthe third root, and all others to the first.\\nExc. Tqstzgj, TQs cpco, and argtqxa, in the perfect and pluper-\\nfect passive, have the second root, tyevyco and xev cq, in the 2\\nperfect active, have sometimes the first, instead of the third root.\\nIl8fA7T03, x1s7Ztgj, zq87Tcq, leyco, and tgtcpco, in the perfect and plu-\\nperfect active, change e of the first root into o.\\n2. The tense-endings consist of the tense-signs (218) and ter-\\nminations united and when there is no tense-sign, the termina-\\ntion alone is also the tense- ending, as exhibited in the following\\ntable.\\nTABLE OF TENSE-ENDINGS.\\nTense. Active. Middle. Passive.\\n1 Future, -d-co (Hq. -s-co) -6-opcu (liq. -s-opai) ?j-co[iai\\n2 Future, -/jo-opou\\n1 Aorist, -a-a (liq. -a) -a-afA,i]v (liq. -a[A.rjv) -ft-rjv\\n2 Aorist, -ov -Sfirjv -i\\\\v\\nPerfect, A-a, or --a, 235, R.l. -pai -pai\\nPluperf. -x-siv, or -eiv -firjv -^j\\n2 Perfect, -a\\n2 Pluperf. -eiv\\nFut.-Perf. or Paulo-post-future -a-opai -o-o\\\\im\\n233. GENERAL RULES.\\nRule 1. The imperfect is formed from the pre-\\nsent by prefixing the augment and changing co\\ninto ov, and o^iai into 6ur]v as, tvtttoj, ^tvtvtov,\\nTVTVTOfAOCl, 8TVHTO/Ur]V.\\nRule 2. All tenses except the present and im-\\nperfect, add the tense-endings to the proper root\\n(232, Ohs. 1), and prefix the augment in the pre-\\nterite tenses, as follows", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "118\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n\u00c2\u00a794.\\n234. SPECIAL RULES FOR EACH TENSE.\\n1. Active Voice.\\nFuture. Add oa to the 1st root,\\n1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -a a to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ov to the 2d root.\\nPerfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add -x\u00c2\u00ab or -a to the 1st root,\\n235, R. 1.\\nPluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\n-xeiv or -elv to the 1st root.\\n2 Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -a to the 3d root.\\n2 Pluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\n-sir to the 3d root.\\n2. Middle Voice.\\nFuture. Add -aoficu to the 1st root.\\n1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -GcifA,i]v to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ofxr^v to the 2d root.\\nThe Perfect and Pluperfect are the same as in the Passive Voice.\\nFut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -copcu to the 1st root.\\n3. Passive Voice.\\n1 Future. Add -ftrjGOficu to the 1st root.\\n2 Future. Add -//cro^ca to the 2d root,\\n1 Aorist, Prefix the augment, and add S~tjv to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -t\\\\v to the 2d root.\\nPerfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add -\\\\nai to the 1st root.\\nPluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\n-\\\\wp to the 1st root.\\nFut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -oopai to the 1st root.\\n235.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 94. SPECIAL RULES FOR MUTES.\\nRule 1. When the characteristic is a ^-mute or\\na #-rnute, the perfect active is formed by adding\\nc -cc, and the pluperfect by adding --stv\\\\ all\\nothers add -xa, -xuv (218, Obs. 2, 3) thus,\\nl\u00c2\u00a3i7ico Root XeiTt- perf. Xs-l\u00c2\u00a3i7Z--a combined le Xeiya\\npluperf. iXe-XeiTt- -eiv iXeXeicpsiv\\nTtlexo) Root nXex- perf. nt-Tilex -a mnX^a\\npluperf. tru-nXr/.-\\neiv\\ninmh /uv", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "95. FORMATION OF TENSES. 119\\nKule 2. When the characteristic is a T-inute,\\nit is rejected before a consonant in the active and\\nthe middle voice, and changed into a in the pas-\\nsive; thus,\\nActive, 7Z81 CO, Root Tteid-- Fut. tzsi-gco perf. Timei-xa\\nMiddle, Fut. nsi-GOftai 1 Aor. Imi-Gapjv\\nPassive, 1 fut. 7isiG- )JGO(mi 1 Aor. InuG-^r^v perf. 7i87i8iG-\\\\iai\\nExc. The r-mute is rejected in the passive also, when it conies\\nbefore g (44-8) as, ninenacu for tzSttsi gou, or after a liquid\\nas, TZEqd -co, 1 future passive 7ZSQ~ fjGO{icu, perfect ni-neq-fiai.\\nAlso, a 7r-niute, after a liquid, is rejected before pai as, T8Q7Z-co,\\nperfect passive zi-zeQ-fiou.\\nObs. nev co, gsvco, rsvya), and yjm (239-2), have v instead\\nof ev before a consonant in the passive as, 7tv6- r G0{icu, gvg- iig-\\n0(acu (240, R. 2), c. (pevya) has either v or ev as, neqyuy-fiou-,\\nor Tzeysvy-pai.\\n236.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a795. METHOD OF FORMING THE TENSES.\\n1. Tito, I honour.\\nThis verb, requiring no insertion or change of letters for the\\nsake of euphony, affords the simplest example for showing the\\nformation of tenses. A second and third root (zi), and the\\ntenses formed from them, are here assumed, though they do not\\nexist in the verb, to show the manner in which these tenses are\\nformed.\\nActive. Middle. Passive.\\nPres.\\nTl-CO\\nti-0[A,ai\\nri-ofiai\\nImp.\\n8-Tl-OV\\n8-tl-6fl7]V\\n8-Zl-6[MjV\\nFut.\\nri-G-o)\\nti-G-ofjiai\\nTl^ fJG-Ofiai\\n2 Fut.\\nn-yG-opai\\n1 Aor.\\n8-n-G-a\\n8-Tl-G-dflt]V\\n8-tl- -J]V\\n2 Aor.\\n8-Tl-OV\\ni-ti-ofiyv\\nl-ri-riv\\nPerf.\\nT8-ri-x.-a\\n%8-tl-yiOLl\\nrt-ri-pai\\nPluperf.\\n8-T8-tl-X-8lV\\n8-t8-Tl-{M]V\\ni-T8-ri-[ji7]v\\n2 Perf.\\nre -ri-a\\n2 Pluperf.\\n8-78-TI-8W\\nP. P. Fut.\\nT\u00c2\u00a3-tl-G-OfJiai\\nrs-ri-G-o[Aui", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "120\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n\u00c2\u00a795.\\nThe following examples fall under 235, Rule 1. They are\\nexhibited with the parts divided, and then combined, to show the\\neffect of the rules of euphony, 6, in combining the parts. It\\nwill be a profitable exercise for the pupil to apply these rules for\\nevery change.\\n2. The characteristic a 7F-mute.\\nXeiTtoOj I leave.\\nRoots, 1. Xeiti-, 2. XiTt-y 3. Xout-.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nParts divided.\\nParts combined,\\nPres.\\nXei7T-(Q\\nXE17ZO)\\nImperf.\\ne-Xeitt-ov\\neXewov\\nFut.\\nXei7T-a-co\\nXsixpoi)\\n1 Aor.\\ne-Xem-G-a\\niXsixpa\\niXmov\\n2 Aor.\\ne-Xitz-ov\\nPerf.\\nX\u00c2\u00a3-XwTt--a\\nXeXEicpa\\nPluperf.\\ne-Xe-Xeitz--eiv\\neXeXei^eiv\\n2 Perf.\\nXs-XoiTT-a\\nXsXotJia\\n2 Pluperf.\\ni-Xs-Xom-Eiv\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\neXeXoltzeiv\\nPres.\\nX817Z-0[ACU\\nXEi7zo\\\\ian.\\nImperf.\\ni-Xsi7Z-6[M]V\\niXEl7TO[A7]V\\nFut.\\nXei7T-6-0[A,CU\\nXEiii Ofxat\\n1 Aor.\\ni-Xsi,7t-6-dfA,1]V\\n\u00c2\u00a3XEl\\\\p(X[M]V\\n2 Aor.\\ni-Xi7Z-6[tr]v\\niXmofArjv\\nPerf.\\nXi-Xzm-ticu\\nXeXeijiiacu\\nPluperf.\\ni-XE-XEl7T-fl7]V\\niXEXElflflTjV\\nP. P. Fut.\\nXE-Xtln-a-Ofiai\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nXEXEi\\\\po{iai\\nPres.\\nX8l7Z-0[l(U\\nXELTZOflCU\\nImperf.\\ni-Xei7i-6fA,?]v\\neXe17i6{IT]V\\nFut.\\nXeM- }j(j-o[i(u\\nXsiq) fj jo[i(u\\n2 Fut.\\nXm-r t o-oii(u\\nXmijoofiai\\n1 Aor.\\ni-XeLJT-^-rjv\\neXei^Oijv\\n2 Aor.\\nl-Xin-riv\\neXi7Z}]v\\nPerf.\\nXt-XeiTT-fiai\\nXaXEififiai\\nPluperf.\\nE-XE-XElTt-fll^V\\n\u00c2\u00a3XeXei [1{J;11V\\nP. P. Fut.\\nXe-Xe17Z-CO[ICU\\nXtXEiipofiai", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a795.\\nFOKMATION OF TENSES.\\n121\\n3. The characteristic a ^-mute.\\nrtltxcQ, I fold.\\nRoots, 1. ttXex-, 2. Ttlax-y 3. nXox-.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nParts divided.\\nParts combined\\nPres.\\nTZXeX-CQ\\nitXe xg)\\nImperf.\\ne-ttXex-ov\\netzXexov\\nPut\\nttXex-g-g)\\ntzXe^co\\n1 Aor.\\n8-7tlex-0-a\\n87zle za\\n2 Aor.\\ni-TlkoM-QV\\nInXaxov\\nPerf.\\nite -ttXex- -a\\nTtsjrlsxa\\nPluperf.\\ni-nE-nX x- -\u00c2\u00a3W\\niTzeake xeiv\\n2 Perf.\\nni-nXox-a\\nmnXoxa\\n2 Pluperf.\\ni-7te-7tl6x-etv\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nE7t\u00c2\u00a37tX6xElV\\nPres.\\nTiXm-ofjiai\\n7lXtXO[A,at\\nImperf.\\nE-7TX\u00c2\u00a3X-6fA,1]V\\nE7tXex6^)]v\\nPut\\ntiXex-g-o\\\\ivli\\nTzXt^Ofxac\\n1 Aor.\\ni-7iXax-o-d[A,t]v\\nlnX8S,a\\\\ii]v\\n2 Aor.\\nE-nXax-6pjv\\n\u00c2\u00a37zXax6[jir]v\\nPerf.\\n7ii-nXEx-\\\\iai\\nnmXzy\\\\iai\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut\\n\u00c2\u00a3-7TE-7l)Jx-(A,r]V\\nTTE-TzXtX-G-OftGU\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nIntnXtyiiriv\\n7T\u00c2\u00a37zXe\u00c2\u00a3(){MU\\nPres.\\nnX(x-o\\\\iai\\ntiXexo\\\\i(u\\nImperf.\\ni-ftls%-6[MjV\\ninXtxofJLqv\\nFut.\\n7llEX- t]G-0[lCU\\n7tXz*jft)i 50liia\\n2 Fut.\\n7Tlax-? ](y-0[A,(u\\n7lXaX)]GO[A0U\\n1 Aor.\\ni-7r)Jx- -?jv\\niTzXe x qv\\n2 Aor.\\nE-nXax-ijv\\ninXdxqv\\nPerf.\\nfts-nXex-fiou\\nTZSTzXeypcu\\nPluperf.\\nl-7iE-7tXEX-\\\\iryv\\nE7te7rXtyiA,rjv\\nP. P. Fut.\\nviE-7r)Jx- 7-0(tcu\\nn\u00c2\u00a37iX\u00c2\u00a3%onai", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "122\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n96.\\nThis verb\\nnoi and its\\nRule 2.\\nPres.\\nImp.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.\\n4. The characteristic a r-mute.\\nTiai co, I persuade.\\nhas the first root nei-0; the second m the third\\ncharacteristic being a r-mute, it comes under 235,\\nActive.\\naetd-co\\ne-tieiQ-ov\\nTtei-6-co\\nE-7Z81-G-0.\\nE-711 -0V\\n7Tt -7zei-y.-a\\ni-7Z8-7ZEi-y.-eiv\\n7tt -7toi -a\\nE-7lE-7t0ld-ElV\\nMiddle.\\ni-7ZEl -6[4,t]V\\ni-md~-ofitjv\\n7lE-7ltl 3-\\\\iai\\nk-nz-7td(5-\\\\iriv\\nPassive.\\nTtEld-OflCU\\nm -}j(J-OlAGU\\ni-7Z8t6- -T]V\\nE-ni#-rp\\n7l\u00c2\u00a3-7l\u00c2\u00a3lG-(MU\\nE-7T8-7ZEl(J-f^iJV\\n7lE-7lEl-G-0\\\\lU.l 7Z\u00c2\u00a3-7l\u00c2\u00a3l.-G-0[l(U\\n\u00c2\u00a796. SPECIAL RULES FOR PURE VERBS.\\n237. N. B. In the rules for the Moods and Tenses of verbs,\\nlet it be remembered, that\\nThe three short vowels, a e o\\nhave their own long, 77 r\\\\ co\\nand their own diphthongs, at ei 01\\n238. Rule 1. Verbs in dco, sco, and 6co, change\\nthe short vowel into its own long before a conso-\\nnant; as,\\n(pilt coj Root qnXs, fut. cpih joo), perf. nE(pib;y.a, c.\\n239. EXCEPTIONS.\\n1 dco after s or c, retains a and Xdco and qdco\\nafter a vowel as, sdco, sdoco xontdco, xom-\\ndo co ytXaco, ytXdaco.\\nLikewise dissyllables in dco which do not pass into mt; as, video,\\nxldaco. But those which pass into r^u have r\\\\, except yOdco.", "height": "3452", "width": "2059", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "96. FORMATION OF TENSES. 123\\nThe following also retain a; viz. dy.Qodofzai, nsxdco, dapdco,\\nytQSfida}, and vcpdco diqjdco lias a or rj.\\n2. Ten in t co retain viz. dxsco, dXsw, dgxew, k (a, ifttca, VEWt co,\\noXtW, ZSXS(0, 7Q8CD.\\nLikewise those which form new presents in vvvco, vvvyn, and gxco\\nas, ivvvco and svvvfii from I go, OQ Txm from a^sco retain e.\\nSixteen in t co have or ij viz. aldtofiai, aive co, dxeopai, dXcps co,\\nd% \u00c2\u00a3Ofia(, dew, y.aXeco, xydew, xooe co, fxayevfiat, 6\u00c2\u00a3ew (o\u00c2\u00a3co),\\nno ew, 7tovsa, gteqeco, cpoQsco, (pgoveoo besides a few others\\nseldom used as, xoztco, {sXeoj, /oqsod.\\nSix in \u00c2\u00a3co have sv viz. nvew, nXsca, %8(o, oeco, I flow S-ea, I\\nrun; and reco, I swim; but (jta, I speak 8co, I place\\nand veo3, I spin, have rj.\\n3. In primitive verbs, oca retains such as, dgoco, [som, idoco,\\nOjttoco, ovoco. Likewise those which form others in vvoj and\\ngxco, have but those which pass into co[u, have co except\\ndidcofu, which has in the 1 fut. and 1 aor. passive as, oo i]-\\naofAat, idoQijv.\\n4. The anomalous verbs xcaco and y.Xaico change ai into av as,\\ny.afco, fut. xavGco xXaico, xXamco.\\n5. Alqew, evQtco, and cr/\u00c2\u00a3co (for retain before only\\nas, aiQi t 6w, aioE ffiopcu, aiQsdijr, aigr^iai, c.\\n240. Rule 2. Pure verbs which have s, or a\\ndoubtful vowel, or a diphthong before a conso-\\nnant, in the active and the middle voice, insert a\\nbefore a consonant in the passive as,\\nPerf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. Perf. Pass.\\ndXe-co 7jXs-y.cc aXsa-d-ijaofAaL ip.sa-d-^v ?jXsg-[icu\\nyeXd-co yeyeXa-xa yeXao-d^iiao^iai, 8ysXd j-d}jv yeyeXaa-pai.\\n7TQI-CO 7TS7lQl-Xa 7IQL6-{) )j(30[A,(U i7lQlG-d f]V 7TS7TQlG-flCU\\ndvv-co ?jvv-xa dvvo- f l ooiiai i)vvG- t]v ijWG-jAai\\nTzai-oo 7i87zai-xa rtcua- ijGOiA.ai 8naiG-Q i]v 7i8ncfA 5-\\\\ioLi\\ny.Xaioj xtxXav-xa xlav6-fi f i 60[icu ixXav(j- rjv X8xXav j-[A,ai\\nSo also verbs in sico, evoj, oloj, and ovco.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n241. To this rule there are many exceptions as,\\n1. Five which have before a consonant do not insert a viz.\\nCllV8(0, av%8(0, 8[A,8C0, 8Q8CO, oAfiCO.\\n2. Eight which have a viz. dxQodoficu, dtdopat, idopat, y.o-\\nndoj, oquco, ntiQaoiim, neqdoa, qjcogdco.", "height": "3390", "width": "2074", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "124 LIQUID VERBS. 97.\\n3. One which has i viz. zico.\\n4. JSleven which have v viz. dozvco, @qvqj, dvco, vco, iSqvm,\\nAGMVCD, XCOXVCO, XvCO, [AljVVGJ, QVCO, ZQVG).\\n5. Seven which have sv viz. dsvco, vavco, veco (vsvggj), 7ivt.(o\\n(ttvevgco), qeco (qevgco), atvco, %eg3 (%swco). Also many verbs\\nin evoj, derived from nouns as, fiaGiltixo.\\nG. One which has ov viz. lovco, as, lovd/jGopai, c.\\n7. Fourteen verbs sometimes insert g before a consonant in the\\npassive voice, and sometimes not; viz. dovco, Soda, uco,\\niXdco, xaico, xeodw, y.vdoo, aoqeoj, [ivdco, fiijovca, ovoco, navco,\\n%vavoj, ipda.\\n242. Rule 3. Verbs in 6co, forming verbs in\\npi, insert a before a consonant in the passive voice\\nas, yvoj/LU, yvcoO rjOo/Liai, c.\\nExcept gtq(6pvv{u from gtqocOj and dt8cofii from doco, which\\nhave GZQcod-fjGOjjicu, dodtjGopcu, c.\\nFORMING THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS.\\n243. The following example shows the method of forming\\nthe tenses in pure verbs. With few exceptions, having no second\\nroot (216), they have no 2d future, or 2d aorist; and in the ac-\\ntive voice, no 2d perfect, or 2d pluperfect.\\nActive. Middle. Passive.\\nPres. rifia-co n^d-ofica rifid-opai\\nImperf. i-zipa-ov i-zijia-o^v i-zifta-Ofi^v\\nFut. TllAtj-G-G) Tl/Jtij-G-OpOU 7l[Arj-\\\\)tjG-0(lCU\\n1 Aor. i-Tt fDj-G-a i-zi^-G-d^)]v l-rijii)-{1-)jv\\nPerf. ts-t((i.v-n-a Te-rf[i)j-fj,ai TE-rifiJi-fjiai\\nPluperf. i-T8-Tt t uij-x-uv l-ZE-zi\\\\ir r iii^v i-ze-zifi/j-^v\\nP. P. Fut. T8-ztfif]-G-0[iai ze-Tifiy-G-oficu\\n97. LIQUID VERBS.\\n244. Liquid verbs differ from mute and pure\\nverbs in forming some of the tenses, as will ap-\\npear by the following", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a797. LIQUID VERBS. 125\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. The future active and middle shortens the\\nroot, if it contains a diphthong, by rejecting the\\nlast of the two vowels; and instead of aco and\\n60/ucu, adds sco and soficu, contracted co and ov-\\n[iou as,\\nVerb. R. Fut. Act. Fut. Mid.\\nIisvm [isv fiev-ea contr. ij,sv- x), \\\\i8v-8o\\\\xai contr. fxev-ovfiai\\nzsivoi ruv tev-sca tev-co, 18v~80\\\\l(u rev-ovpca\\nqjaivcQ (patv yav-sco qiav-m, (pav-eopai $av-ov\\\\ua\\n2. The first aorist active and middle lengthens\\nthe short root of the future by changing s into\\nec, and lengthening the doubtful vowels and in-\\nstead of da and 6cc[iriv, adds a and dfirjv as,\\nVerb. Fut. 1 Aor. Act. 1 Aor. Mid\\n[ISVCO (Z8V-S03 8-IA81V-0. i-[l8W-d[M]V\\nT81VG) T8V-8G} 8-Z8lV-a 8-1 81V -0.^7 JV\\ncpaivco ycw-sco 8-qjdv-cx. i-cpccv-d[A?iv\\nRem. The Attics often change a into tj as, ityrjva, iq)7]vdfA,t]v.\\n3. The perfect and pluperfect active, and all the\\nthe passive voice, except the present and imper-\\nfect, add the tense-endings to the second root as,\\nVerb. 2. R. Perf. Act, 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. P. Perf. P.\\nG7T8LQCQ, GTldQ, S-GTZCIQ-Xa, GTtClQ-dlJGOfJLai, i-G7iaQ-d r]Vj 8-G7TCtQ-(lUl\\nqjcuvco, cpuv, Tzs-qjay-xa, cpav-tf/jGopai, i-cpdv-frijv, n8- $ct.\\\\i-\\\\i0Li\\nExc. Verbs in /uco form the perfect and pluper-\\nfect active and the 1 future, 1 aorist, perfect, and\\npluperfect passive, from the first root by interpos-\\ning 7] before the tense-endings as,\\nVerb. 1 R. Perf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass.\\nvspco V8iji vs-v8fi-?]-xa v8\\\\i-r\\\\-ftriG0\\\\Lai i-i 8fi-?j-d j]V J fcc.\\nSo also, fidlXco and [livco.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "126 TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 97.\\nNote. The tenses which interpose t; are, probably formed regularly\\nfrom obsolete forms in ew thus, NEMESl, vi^ao), vivif.ir\\\\v.a, c.\\nbut while these tenses, formed in this way, have remained, the others\\nhave given place to the liquid forms now in use. See 250.\\n4. Dissyllables in dvco, ivco, vvco, reject v before\\na consonant as,\\nZ8ivco, zav-, zi-za-xa, ra-d-ijcopat, i-zd-ftijv, ts-ra-ficu t c.\\nKQIVCO, XQIV; XS-XQl-XCt, XDl-dyGOftCU, i-XQl- t]V, Ae-XQl-fACCl.\\nS-VVCO, Q-W-y Z8- V-XCL, ZV- ?]GO[A,CU, 8-ZV- 1JV, TS-dv-fMU.\\nBut xzewco and nXvvco sometimes retain v, sometimes not.\\n245. Obs. Verbs in alvco and vvco commonly drop v before\\nthe termination beginning with [i, and insert g in its stead as,\\ncpaivco, nXvvco, perf. pass. 7it q)a(j[icu, 7Z87iXvofiai. They are in-\\nflected thus\\nSingular, TTtcpaa-^cu rtiyav-Gai mcpav-zai\\nDual, 7zecf)U6-fi8 ov mcpuv- ov (54-1 V) 7iecpav- ov\\nPlural, 7Z8CfdG-[A,e a TT^cpav-ds 7Z8cpciG-{isvoi 8igi(v)\\nNote. Liquid verbs want the paulo-post-future tense.\\nFORMING THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS.\\n246. The following examples show the method of forming the\\ntenses of liquid verbs, according to the preceding rules.\\n247. ZzeXXco, I send.\\n1 R. gzsX. 2 R. GzaX. 3 R. gzoX.\\nActive. Middle. Passive.\\nPres. gzM-co Gis XX-oficu GZ8XX-0[iai\\nImperf. s-areXX-ov \u00c2\u00a3-gz8XX-6[i?jv s-GzsXX-ofitjv\\nFut. OZ8X-8-CO, CO GTsX-i-Opai, OVflttl 8-GZCtX- tjG-0[lCU\\n2 Fut. GzaX-?/G-of(ca\\n1 Aor. 8-GzstX-a i-GZ8tX-dfi^v 8-GzdX- -tjv\\n2 Aor. 8-gzuX-ov i-GzaX-ofiqv i-GzdX-?jv\\nPerf. 8-GzaX-x-a i-GzaX-^iai 8-GzaX-ficu\\nPluperf. i-GzdX-x-8iv i-GzdX-nyv i-GzdX-fiqv\\n2 Perf. 8-GzoX-a\\n2 Pluperf. i-Gz6X-8tv", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a797.\\nTENSES OF LIQUID VEEBS.\\n127\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\n248.-\\n1 R. qiaw.\\nActive.\\nyaw-co\\n8-cpaiv-ov\\ncpav-s -o), a\\nI aivco, I show.\\n2 R. cpar. 3 R\\nMiddle.\\ncpaiv-ofiai\\ni-cpaiv-ofiTjv\\ncpav-8-opai,\\n$r\\\\v.\\nPassive.\\nqiaiv-ouai\\ni-cpaiv-o^tjv\\novycai Qpav-^rja-ofiai\\n8-qidv-a\\n8-qjdv-ov\\nm-yay-y.-a\\ni-TZE-ydy-x-Eiv\\n7Z8-(p7{V-a\\n\u00c2\u00a3-7T8-(pfjV-8lV\\n249.-\\n1 R. TSIV.\\nActive.\\nT81V-CO\\n8-T81V-OV\\nTEV-s -GJ, 65\\n8-q)dv-d(ir t v\\n8-(pdv-d\\\\ir\\\\v\\nni-qsa 5-\\\\iai\\n8-7l8-tyd6-\\\\irjV\\ni-qjdv- -7]v\\ni-qidv-rjv\\nns -qiaG-pai\\n\u00c2\u00a3-7Z\u00c2\u00a3-CpdG-[ir{V\\n-Tsivco, I stretch.\\n2 R. rav. 3 R. rov.\\nMiddle. Passive.\\nTSW-0[iai T8lV-0[A,ai\\ni-TSlV-OfJLTJV i-T8lV-6fJ,r]V\\nrevs -opai, ov\\\\iai %a- rfi-o\\\\iai\\n8-Z81V-CC\\ni-xav-ov\\nri-ta-y-a\\ni-78-zd-y-siv\\nti-tov-a\\n8-T8-TOV-81V\\ni-T8lV-d[M]V\\ni-rav-Sfiqv\\nri-ra-\\\\iai\\ni-rs-zd-^v\\ni-rdd~-i]v\\ni-zdv-qv\\nZE-za-pai\\ni-rs-vd-pTjv\\n250. Nifico, I distribute (244, Note).\\n1 R. V8\\\\i. 2 R. va\\\\i. 3 R. vofi.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nActive.\\nVt fl-CO\\n8-V\u00c2\u00a3[A,-OV\\nV8fl-8-03, CO\\nMiddle.\\nv8\\\\i-o\\\\iai\\n8-V8fX-6(A,T]V\\nV8(l-8-0[iat,\\nPassive.\\nvEfi-ofiai\\nE-VSfi-OfflV\\novpai v8fi-r]- {;6-0fiat\\nvafi-ijG-Ofiai\\nW8[l-r]-d -7]V\\ni-vd(t-7]v\\nve-vEp-q-fiai\\ni-V8-V8fA,-Jj-fA,7]V\\n8-V8lfl-a\\n8-vdfi-OV\\nVE-v8\\\\L-r\\\\-y.-u.\\n1-^8-^811-1]- /.-81V\\nv8-vo\\\\i-a\\n\u00c2\u00a3-V8-vb\\\\l-8W\\n8-v8i\\\\i-d\\\\irp\\n\u00c2\u00a3-VafA.-6flt]V\\nv8-v8\\\\i-r i -\\\\iai\\nE-V8-V8fl-7j-fl7]V", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "128 CONTRACTED VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a798. CONTRACTED VERBS.\\n251. Verbs in -aco, -soo, and -oco, contract the concurrent\\nvowels in the present and imperfect in all the voices, according\\nto the general rules of contraction, 116. See paradigm, 100.\\nAll the concurrences of vowels to be found in these verbs, are\\nthe following viz.\\n1.\\nVerbs in\\ncontr.\\n-do3, -doo,\\n-co,\\n-as,\\n-a,\\n-ao,\\n-co,\\n-a,\\n-U\u00c2\u00a3l,\\n-ay,\\n-a,\\n-aot,\\n-03,\\n-aov,\\n-CO;\\n8\\n2.\\nVerbs in\\n-\u00c2\u00a303, -\u00c2\u00a300,\\n-SS,\\n-\u00c2\u00a30j\\n-sst,\\nlb\\n-sot,\\n-\u00c2\u00a3OV,\\n8\\ncontr.\\n-03,\\n-ov,\\n1?\\n-El,\\n-ol,\\n-ov.\\n3.\\nVerbs in\\n-003, -003,\\n-OS,\\n-00,\\n-oij,\\n-OSt,\\n-6y\\n-001,\\n-onv,\\n8\\ncontr.\\n-CO,\\n-ov,\\n-ov,\\n-co,\\n-01,\\n-Ol,\\n-Ol,\\n-ov.\\nObs. 1. Of the above concurrent vowels (No. 2), dissyllables\\nin \u00c2\u00a303 contract only ss and ssi thus, nXss nXsstv, tiXssts, c, are\\nusually contracted nXsi, tzXsiv, nXslts, c, but ttXe oj, nXsopsv,\\nc, are never contracted. Exc. Aso3, to bind, commonly con-\\ntracts all.\\nObs. 2. Four verbs in dco contract as into and asi into y.\\nThese are t,dco, 7isivdo3, 8i\\\\pdco, and /quo fiat. thus,\\nIndie. \u00c2\u00a3dstg, t,dsi, t,astov, s%asg, stas, c. Inf. tdstv.\\ncontr. lyg, ly, tfitov, s^g, sty, %rp c.\\nAnd so of the others.\\n252. DORIC AND IONIC FORMS.\\nObs. 3. The Dorics, who in other cases use a for ij, in verbs\\nmake use of i\\\\, without i subscript, instead of all contractions of\\na\u00c2\u00a3i and ssi as, oofjv for oqciv xGcjpijv for y.ocjf-isTv. Also, as\\nwas usually contracted by them into y as, toXfijjts for toXfidsts.\\nThe Ionic dialect often converts a, in verbs in \u00c2\u00abco, into s as,\\nbom, bot opsv, for bqdeo, oodo[isv %Q\u00c2\u00a3Stai for yodszat.\\n253. HOMERIC FORM.\\nObs. 4. The Epic writers, on account of the metre, often insert\\nthe kindred long or short vowel before the contracted vowel as,\\nbodstv, contr. boar, Poet, bodav bodco, contr. oqoo, Poet. oqoco.\\nParticiple fern, jjfiuovaa, contr. y^coaa, Poet. yficocooa, c.\\nThis, from the frequency of its occurrence in Homer, is some-\\ntimes called the Homeric form.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a798. EXPLANATION OF TABLE. 129\\nNote. By a little attention to practice, and applying the rules\\n(116) to the preceding contractions, a paradigm of contract verbs is\\nunnecessary; still a table of contract verbs is inserted in its place, 258,\\n8 100.\\n254.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING TABLE.\\n1. The tense-root in the subjunctive (being the same as in the indica-\\ntive, but without the augment), is to be prefixed to the terminations\\nin the optative, imperative, infinitive, and participles.\\n2. Whenever the accent falls on the termination, it is marked in\\nthe following table in its proper place. When it does not fall on the\\ntermination, its place will be the third syllable from the end of the\\nword, if the last syllable be short, or the diphthong av, which is con-\\nsidered short. But if the last syllable be long, the accent will be on\\nthe syllable next the last as, rirvq a, rtrvqio), c.\\n3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive, the characteristic it in all\\nthe moods is put with the termination, to show the changes it undergoes\\nby the laws of euphony, when combined with the initial consonant of\\nthe termination. In combining the root in these moods with the termi-\\nnation, Rules 2, and 6, and 11 of 6, must be observed. See also 101,\\n10. But if the tables of terminations, 92, and the method of forming\\nthe tenses, 93, are perfectly committed to memory, and rendered fa-\\nmiliar to the pupil by thorough drilling, it will hardly ever be neces-\\nsary to take him into this table at all.\\n4. The numbers 1, 2, 3, c, to be found in the following table, refer\\nto the same numbers, 101.\\nN. B. By inspection of the table, it will be seen that the termina-\\ntions of the subjunctive mood are the same in all the tenses, and those\\nof the optative and imperative are nearly the same in all, except in the\\n1 aorist. Attention to this will greatly lessen the labour of committing\\nthe verb to memory.\\n6*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "130\\nTABLE OF THE VERB\\n\u00c2\u00a799.\\n255. I. TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations\\nT-root.\\nTerminations.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\nPres.\\nS.\\nrvirr -co,\\n-eis,\\nrvirr\\n-?7S.\\nP\u00c2\u00bb\\ni\\n-erov,\\n-erov,\\n-TYTOV,\\n-7JTOJ\\nP.\\n-Ofiev,\\n-6T\u00e2\u0082\u00ac,\\n-ovcri.\\n-cofxev,\\n-tyre,\\n-W(Tt.\\nImp.\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\n%-TVTTT -ov,\\n-OfX,\u00e2\u0082\u00acV,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2es,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTOV,\\n-ere,\\n-\u00c2\u00a3TT)V,\\n-ov.\\nFut.\\nS.\\nTllty -CO,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acLS,\\n4\\nrfy-\\nD.\\n-erov,\\n-erov,\\nWanting.\\nP.\\n-OfX\u00e2\u0082\u00acV,\\n-6T6,\\n-overt.\\n1 Aor.\\nS.\\ne-rv\\\\p -a,\\n-as,\\n4\\nri\\\\p\\n-co,\\n-77S,\\nD.\\n-arov,\\n-aTTjV,\\n-TJTOI\\n-r\\\\rov,\\nP.\\n-a/j.ev,\\n-are,\\n-av.\\n-cofxev,\\n-7JT6,\\n-cocri.\\n2 Aor.\\nS.\\n6-TK7T -OP,\\n-es,\\n-e,\\nTV1T\\n-co,\\n-r\\\\s,\\n-V\\nD.\\n-GTOV,\\n-errjv,\\n-rjrov,\\n-r\\\\rov,\\nP.\\n-0/J.ev,\\n-ere,\\n-ov.\\n-co/Jiev,\\n-rjre,\\ncocri.\\nPerf.\\nS.\\nr4-rvcp -a,\\n-as,\\nre-rvcp\\n-co,\\n-r)s\\nV\\nJD.\\n-arov,\\n-arov,\\n-WTOV,\\n-TJTOV,\\nP.\\n-a.fx.ev,\\n-are,\\n-acri.\\n-cojxev,\\n-7JT\u00e2\u0082\u00ac,\\n-cocri.\\nPlup.\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\ni-T\u00e2\u0082\u00ac-TV(j -\u00e2\u0082\u00acIV,\\n-eifizv,\\n-eis,\\n-eirov,\\n-etre.\\n-ei,\\n-eirrjv,\\n-eicrav.\\n2 Perf. S.\\nri-rvir -a,\\n-as,\\n-e,\\nre-rvir\\n-co,\\n-!?y,\\n-v\\nD.\\n-arov,\\n-aToi/,\\n-rjrov,\\n-f]TOV,\\nP.\\n-afxev,\\n-are,\\n-atn.\\n-ccy.ev,\\n-r)re,\\n-cocri.\\n2 Plup\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\ni-rc-rvir -av,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ei/xev,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2eis,\\n-ZITOV,\\n-eiT\u00e2\u0082\u00ac,\\n-eirrjv,\\n-eicrav.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a799.\\nIN THE ACTIVE VOICE.\\n131\\nTABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE, CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nINF.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTe\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2imitations.\\nTerminations.\\nTerm.\\nTerminations.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\n2. 3.\\nM.\\nF.\\nN.\\n-OlfJU,\\n-OIS, 1\\n-01\\n-e, -It w,\\nN.\\n-U)V,\\n-ova a,\\n-ov,\\n-OITOV,\\n-oIt7)V,\\n-eTOV, -ZTGOV,\\n-civ,\\nG.\\n-OVTOS,\\n-OVO-7JS,\\n-OVTOS,\\n-oitiev,\\n-one,\\n-oiev.\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTe, -eTwcrav?\\nD.\\n-OVTl,\\n-OVffT],\\n-OVTl, C.\\n-Olfll,\\n-ois,\\n-01,\\nN.\\n-av,\\n-ovara,\\nOV,\\n-OITOU,\\n-OlTTjV,\\nWanting.\\n-eiv-\\nG.\\n-OVTOS,\\n-ovcrvs,\\n-OVTOS,\\n-oijxev,\\n-one,\\n-oiev-\\nL\\n-OVTl,\\n-ovarj,\\n-OVTl, C.\\n-atpi,\\n-ais,\\n-at,\\n-OV, -d-TO),\\nN.\\n-as,\\n-aaa,\\n-av,\\n-airov,\\n-aiT7)V,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2CLTOV, -O.TCOV,\\n-at.\\nG.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2avTos,\\n-do f]s,\\n-avTos,\\n-aifiev,\\n-aire,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2aiev.\\n-are, -aTwaav.\\nD.\\n-avTi,\\n-dat],\\n-avTi, c.\\n-Olfll,\\n-ois,\\n-01,\\n-6TO),\\nN.\\nv,\\n-ovffa,\\n-6v,\\n-OITOV,\\n-OlTT\\\\V,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTOV, -ZTtoV,\\n-eiv,\\nG.\\n-OVTOS,\\n-ovarjs,\\n-OVTOS,\\n-oifiev,\\n-04T6,\\n-oiev.\\n-6T6, -eTWffav.\\nD.\\n-6vti,\\n-oio-rj,\\n-OVTl, C.\\n-OlfJLl,\\n-ois,\\n-01,\\n-6, -4t(i),\\nN.\\ns,\\n-via,\\n-6s,\\n-OITOV,\\n-OIT7JV,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTOV, -eTCOV,\\n-evai.\\nG.\\n-OTOS,\\n-vias,\\n-6tos,\\n-OlfXSV,\\n-OlT\u00e2\u0082\u00ac,\\n-oiev.\\n-ere, -eTaaav.\\nD.\\n-6ti,\\n-via,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a26ti, cc.\\nOlfll,\\n-ois,\\n-01,\\n-eT(\u00c2\u00bb),\\nN\\n*)S,\\n-v?a,\\n-6s,\\n-OITOV,\\n-01T7]V,\\n-(TOV, -STUV,\\n-evai.\\nG.\\n-OTOS,\\n-vias,\\n-6tos,\\n-01/j.ev,\\n-OtT6,\\n-oiev.\\n-eT\u00e2\u0082\u00ac, -eTwaav.\\nD.\\n-OTl,\\n-via,\\n-6ti.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "132\\nTABLE OF THE VEEB\\n256. II. TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nPres. S. TU7TT -o/xat, -y, -ercu,\\nD. -6p.ebov, -ea ov, -eabov,\\nP. -6(ie a, -etrfre, -ovrat.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nT-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nTI/7TT -wfiai, -y, 8 -yrai,\\n-a /j.e ov, -yo~ ov, -ycr ov,\\n-c6fj.e a, -7)o~ e, -wvrui.\\nImp. S. i-TVTTT -6/J.TJV, -Of, 8 -6TO,\\nD. -ofJ-eSov, -ecr ov, -eoSyv,\\nP. -6fJL\u00e2\u0082\u00ac a, -eff s, -ovro.\\nFut. S. Ttfy -o/iiai, -p, 8 -erect,\\nD. -6jj.eSrov, -eo- ov, -eoSov,\\nP. -ofie a, -ea e, -ovrcu.\\nrirp-\\nWanting.\\n1 Aor. S. e-rtn// -d/xyv, 8 -aTo,\\nD. -dfie^ov, -aoSov, -da yv,\\nP. -cfyie a, -aa-fre, -avTO.\\ntu^/ -oofxai, -y, s -yrai,\\nSfxebov, -7}0~bov,- no- ov,\\n-w/xe a, -Tjo-fre, -coj/tgu.\\n2 Aor. S. 6-TU7T -6fAT)V, -OU, 8 -6TO,\\nD. -S/nefrov, -eo~ ov, -eoSyv,\\nP. -6/J.e a, -ec e, -ovro.\\nTW7T -copal, -y, s -yrai,\\n-oofxe ov, -ncrSrov, -ya^ov,\\n-ofyie a, -Tja e, -uvrcu.\\nPerf. S. t\u00e2\u0082\u00ac-tu -fAfxai, -i//cu, -irrai, 10\\nD. -fifxe ov, p\u00c2\u00a3tov, -(pSov,\\nP. -/x/Ae a, p e, -{xjxevoi elai.\\n10(5)\\nre-Tv/ifxevos ys, fi, n\\n-fx/.ievca -f\\\\rov, i\\\\rov,\\n-p.jj.Evoi S fxev, fire, Sxri.\\nPlup. S. i-Te-TV-/J.fJ.7]V, -$0, -7TTO,\\nD. \u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0096\u00a0/J.iAe oi pdov,-(p 7]v,\\nP. -fJL[Ae a, -0 e, -/xfieuoL tfaav.\\n10(5)\\nP.P.F.S. T6-TVl|/ -ofxai, -y, -\u00e2\u0082\u00acTat,\\nD. -6fx ov, -eoSov,-ecrSov,\\nP. -6/xeSra, -ea e, -ovrat.\\nre-rvty-\\nWanting.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "99.\\nIN THE MIDDLE VOICE.\\n133\\nTABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE, CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n-Oi/XT)V, -010? -OITO,\\n-oi/xe ov, -oio~ ov,-oio- 7iv,\\n-oifxe a, -otcrfre, -oivto.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2.\\n-ov, 8 -ecrbto,\\n-eoftov, -eoSav,\\n-eo-3-e, -eoSuaav.\\nINF.\\nTerm.\\n-ea ai.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTerminations.\\nM. F. N.\\nN. -6/xevos, -fi, -ov,\\nG. -ofxevov, -rjs, -ov,\\nD.-o/xevq -77, -a\\n-oi/XTJV, -oio, 8 -OITO,\\n-oi/xz ov, -oiaSov, -oio ^nv,\\n-oifxe a, -oicr e, -oivto.\\nWanting.\\n-ecr ai.\\nN. -6/xevos, -7], -ov,\\nG. -o/xivov, -7]S, -ov,\\nD. -ofAzycp, -v, -cp.\\n-aifxrjv, -ato, 8 -aiTO,\\n-aifxe ov, -cuo~ ov,-a.icr 7)v,\\n-ai(j.\u00e2\u0082\u00ac a, -cuo~ e, -cuvto.\\n-at, -doSo,\\n-acrdrov, -do- (t)V,\\n-ao- e, -dcr wcrav.\\n-aa-frai.\\nN. -d/xevos, -7], -ov,\\nG. -u/xevov, -rjs, -ov,\\nD. -a/xevcp, -V,\\n-0LfX7]V, -010 -OITO,\\n-oi/xeSov, -oio m ov,-olo~ riv,\\n-oi/x a, -oicr e, -oivto.\\n-ov, 8 -eV w,\\n-eaSrov, -eoScov,\\n-ecr e, -ea coaav.\\n-ecrSrai.\\nN. -Sfxevos, -7j, -ov,\\nG. -o/xevov, -7]s,-ov,\\nD.-o/xevcp, -7i, -p.\\n-jxfxevos eii)v, 6177s, efoj, 11\\n-/x/xevce eirjTov, sItjttiv,\\n-filxevoL^fiev, e:7jT6, \u00e2\u0082\u00ac?7]ffav.\\n-ipo, p ca,\\n-(b ov, -cpSav,\\n-cp e, -(p axrav.\\nCU.\\nN.-p.fj.evos,-7i, -ov,\\nG. -/x/xevov, -7}s, -ov,\\nD.-fXfx4vca, -77, -(p.\\n-oljxr]v, -0L0 8 -OITO,\\n-oifxebov, -oioSov,-olcrfrr)v,\\n-oiixe a, -oiaSe, -oivto.\\nWanting.\\n-ecr cu.\\nN. -6fxevos, -7], -ov,\\nG. -o/xevov, -77?, -ov,\\nD. -o/xevcp, -77, -ct", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "134\\nTABLE OF THE VEKB\\n257. III. TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nPres. S. TU7TT -ofxai, -n, 8 -erai,\\nD. -6iie ov,-so- ov,-\u00e2\u0082\u00ac T oi\\nP. -ofie a, -ecr e, -ovtui.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nT-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nTVTTT-UfJLai, -v 8 -tjtcm,\\n-u fie oi -ncr ov, -nv ov,\\nImp. S. 6-TU7TT -6fi7]V, -OV,% -GTO,\\nD. -6/jLe ov, -eo-frov, -ea nv,\\nP. -cfyzed-a, -ecr e, -ovto.\\n1 Fut. S.Tv p r}cr-o/j.ai, -p, 8 -ercu,\\nD. -6[Ae OV,-\u00e2\u0082\u00acff 0J TS0V,\\nP. -ojJLt a, -eo~ e, -oyTcu.\\nWanting.\\n2 Fut. S. TVTT7} r -ojj.a.1, -rj? -erat,\\nD. -6/n\u00e2\u0082\u00ac ov, -ecr ov,-ecr ou,\\nP. -6/j.\u00e2\u0082\u00ac a, -eofte, -oj/tcu.\\nWanting.\\n1 Aor. S. 4-TV(p -7}V, -T]S, -7],\\nD. -TJTOU, -7)T7]V,\\nP. -Jj/iei/, -7jT6, -naav.\\nTixpfr-w, -ns, -v,\\n-nrou, -t]Tov,\\n-w/j.\u00e2\u0082\u00acV, -nre, n.\\n2 Aor. S. e-Twr -tjj/, -77s, -tj,\\nD. -TjTov, -Tjrrjy,\\nP. -T][iev, -7}T\u00e2\u0082\u00ac, -Tjtrav.\\nTVTT -CO, -77S, -]7,\\n-TjTOV, -T)TOV,\\n-cujuej/, JjTe, wcn.\\nPerf. S. re-Ty -fx/j-ai, -tyou, -tttcu, 10\\nD. -fJLfX6 0V,-(p 0V,- p 0V,\\nP. -/jLfie a, -cpSe, -fifievoielffi.\\n10(5)\\nT6-TU- /AfMSVOS f]S, 7/, 11\\n-fx/j.4uoiS /J.eu, %re, dScn.\\nPlup. S.i-re-rv-/xfji.7jv, -\\\\pat, -ttto,\\nD. -fxfxeSrou,-(p^ov, -(p yv,\\nP. -fi/xe^a, p e, -fifxivoi 9jaav.\\n10(5)\\nP. P. F. S. re-Tity -ojxa.1, -t?, 8 -6tc\u00c2\u00bb,\\nD. -t) 1 uefroj/,-ecr oj -ecr oi/,\\nP. -6{x a, -ecrfre, -oj/tch.\\nT6-TIMJ\\nWanting.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a799.\\nIN THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\n135\\nTABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\noifj.7]V, -oio, 8 -oiro,\\n-oifx^ov, -okt ov, -oiafrrjv,\\n-oi/j.e a, -oio~ e, -oivtq.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n2. 3.\\n-ov, -4cr co,\\n-eo- ov,-4cr cov,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ea e, -4cr cocrav.\\n1 INF.\\nTerm.\\n-scr ai.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTerminations.\\nM. F. N.\\nN.-ofxsvos, -7], -ov,\\nG.-Ofx4vOV, -7)S, -OV,\\nD.-Ofievco, -7j, -co.\\n-oi/jl7]v, -oio, 8 -oiro,\\n-oifj. ov, -oia ov, -oicr TjV,\\n-oifie a, -oicrde, -oivro.\\nWanting.\\n-ecr cu.\\nN .-6/j.evos, -7], -ov,\\nG.-o/xevov, -7)s, -ov,\\nD.-o/xeva), -rj, -co.\\n-OlflTjV, -oio, 8 -oiro,\\n-oipe ov, -oiaStov, -oio- 7)v,\\n-oin a, -oia e, -oivto.\\nWanting.\\n-ecrfraj.\\nN.-6/uL\u00e2\u0082\u00acV0S, -7], -OV,\\nG.-o/xevov, -7]s, -ov,\\nD.-0[J.4vCp, -77, -CO.\\n-617?? -d7]S, -\u00e2\u0082\u00ac177,\\n-617JT0V, -ei71T7]U,\\n-el^/jLcv, -eiTjTe, -eiwo av.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a07]Tl, -7)TC0,\\n-7)T0V, -7]TCCV,\\n-7JT6, -7)Tw rav.\\n-7} vou.\\nN.-eis, -6?cro, -4v,\\nG.-4vT0S, -ei-CT7)S,-4vTOS,\\nD.-eVu, -eiarv, -4vti.\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00ac17)V, -ei7js, -\u00e2\u0082\u00act7J,\\n-eiriTov, -eiTjTTjv,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2eiTifxev, -eirjTe, -eiTjcav.\\n-7) l, -7JTOJ,\\n-7]T0V, -7]TC0V,\\n-7JT6, -7\\\\T(i)ffaV-\\n-7JVCU.\\nN.-eis, -eicra, -4v,\\nG.-ej/ros, -eicr7is,-4vTos,\\nD.-4vti, -ticry, -4vri.\\n-ll(j.4vos c?7)v, zXt)S, efT?, 11\\n-/JLfXeVU S%7\\\\T0V, etTJTTJJ\\n-fj./x4voi zX7}jJ.zv,ti7)Tz, e i7)0~av.\\n-tyo, pS(\\n-cp ov, -cp tov,\\n-(p e, -cp cocrav.\\n-cpSat.\\nN .-fXfj.4vos, -77, -ov,\\nG.-fXfx4vOV, -7]S, -OV,\\nD.-jxjx4vco, -77, -CO.\\n-oilo)v, -oio, -oiro,\\n-oi/x^ov, -oicr ov, -oioSyv,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2oi/uLe a, -otofte, -oivro.\\nWanting.\\n-ecr at.\\nN .-6/J.evos, -77, -ov,\\nG.-OLL4VOV, -7]S, -Ov,\\nD.-0{X.4vCp, -77, -Cf).", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "136\\nCONTRACT VERBS.\\n100.\\n258.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n100. CONTRACT VEKBS.-\\n\u00e2\u0080\u0094Active.\\nPresent.\\nti{i-\\n9\\nll-\\n8rjl-\\nS.\\ndo)\\n-0)\\n\u00c2\u00a3W\\n-0)\\n00)\\n-0)\\nD.\\nanq\\ndo,\\n-pq\\n-a\\nEivq\\niiv\\n-liq\\n-ll\\noevq\\nOil\\n-oiq\\n-ol\\nInd.\\naerov\\n-arov\\neixov\\n-eixov\\noixov\\n-ovxov\\naexov\\n-axov\\neixov\\n-eixov\\noirov\\n-ovxov\\nR\\nao,aiv\\ndire\\n-oyitv\\n-dxe\\nEOfllV\\nsire\\n-OVfAlV\\n-elxe\\noofiev\\noere\\n-OVfllV\\n-ovxe\\naonffv\\n-0)O~V\\nmiter i\\n-OVffV\\nOOVGv\\n-ovo~v\\nS.\\ndo)\\n-0)\\nECO\\n-0)\\nOOJ\\n-0)\\nJ)\\nayq\\ndn\\\\\\n-aq\\n-a\\neyq\\nn q\\n-Oiq\\n-Ot\\nSubj.\\nP.\\ndtjTOV\\ndtjTOV\\ndo)fiiv\\ndtjxe\\ndo)0~v\\n-arov\\n~0)fllV\\n-axe\\n-0)CTV\\netjxov\\nirjxov\\n\u00c2\u00a30)fllV\\nEO) CfV\\n-ijxov\\n-Jjxov\\n-0)/iilV\\n-0)GV\\n6t\\\\xov\\n6)jTOV\\n6v ,uiv\\noo) a v\\n-onov\\n-onov\\n-0)UIV\\n-0)0~V\\ns.\\ndoifiv\\ndovq\\ndov\\n~0)fXV\\n-0 q\\n-0)\\niovfiov\\niovq\\niov\\n-olf.il\\n-otq\\n-ot\\nooif.iv\\noovq\\noov\\n-oliiv\\n-otq\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2ol\\nOpt.\\naovxov\\n-onov\\neovxov\\n-OtTOV\\noovxov\\n-ovxov\\nP.\\naoixr\\\\v\\ndoifitv\\ndo tit\\n-ojxrjv\\n-oifiiv\\n-one\\neoixrjv\\niovfiiv\\niovxe\\n-oixtjv\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0oTjuiv\\n-oixe\\nOOlXtjV\\nOOlfllV\\n6 ovxe\\n-OlTtjV\\n-OlfllV\\n-oixe\\naoviv\\n-0)fV\\nEOVIV\\n-onv\\noovev\\n-OllV\\nS.\\nae\\n-a\\nn\\n-iv\\noe\\n-ov\\naexo)\\n-aro)\\niexo)\\n-eixo)\\nOEXO)\\n-OI TOJ\\nImp.\\nD.\\naixov\\n-arov\\neixov\\n-urov\\nOIXOV\\n-ovxov\\naerow\\n-aro)v\\nIEX0)V\\n-nxo)v\\nOEXO)V\\n-0VT0)V\\nP.\\naexe\\n-axi\\nEire\\n-l IT l\\noixe\\n-Ol Tl\\naexoHjav -axo)0~av\\nl\u00c2\u00a3T0)O~aV\\n-itT ))ffav\\nOETOXSaV\\n-OVX0)0~CtV\\nInf.\\ndiw\\n-dv\\nEl IV\\n-l IV\\nOff)\\n-ovv\\nPart.\\nM.\\nR\\ndo)i\\ndovcrcc\\n-0)V\\n-Mffa\\n\u00c2\u00a30)V\\niovaa\\n-0)1\\n-OVffd\\nOWJ\\noovaa\\n-0)V\\n-ovcra\\nN.\\ndov\\n-0)V\\nEOV\\n-ovv\\noov\\n-ovv\\nImperf.\\nllljl-\\nECpll-\\nidijl-\\nS.\\naov -o)v\\n19V\\n-ovv\\noov\\n-ovv\\naeq -aq\\nliq\\n-evq\\noeq\\n-ovq\\nae -a\\nie\\n-ev\\noe\\n-ov\\nD.\\nInd.\\nccexov -ctxov\\nEIXOV\\n-eixov\\nOIXOV\\n-ovxov\\ncttxqv -axtjv\\nl\u00c2\u00a3Xt]V\\n-eixr t v\\nOEXtjV\\n-OVXtjV\\nP.\\nao/iiv -o)fiev\\niofiev\\n-OVfllV\\nOOfllV\\n-ovfiev\\naixi -axe\\nien\\n-eixe\\noixe\\novxe\\naov -o)v\\neov\\n-ovv\\nOOV\\n-Ol V", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "100.\\nCONTRACT VERBS.\\n137\\nCONTRACT VERBS.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Middle and Passive.\\nn\\\\i-\\nq il-\\ndql-\\ndotxat,\\n-o),uat,\\nEOfiao\\n-ov/nat,\\nooi-tat,\\n-OVflCU\\nat[\\n-a\\n?3\\nli\\n\u00c2\u00b0Jl\\n-01\\naerat,\\n-arat,\\naarat,\\n-air at,\\noarat,\\n-ovrat,\\nao/tta ov\\n-o ),uaOov\\nao,ua ov\\n-OV/iia OV\\nOOfia OV\\n-ov/.ta ov\\ndaa ov\\n-da ov\\niaa ov\\n-ala ov\\noaa ov\\n-ova ov\\ndaa OV\\n-da ov\\niaa ov\\n-ala ov\\noaa ov\\n-ova ov\\naoua at,\\n-0)JU\u00c2\u00a3 CC\\naojua a\\n-ovfxa a\\noo/.ia a\\n-ov/ut a\\ndaa a\\n-da a\\niaa a\\n-aXa a\\noaa a\\n-ova a\\naovrat,\\n-o)vrat,\\naovrav\\n-ovvrai\\noovrai\\n-ovrat,\\ndo) ft at,\\n-0)/Ll Ulr\\nto)uau\\n-o ),u at,\\n6o) /Liat,\\n-oJ,u at,\\nwr\\\\\\n-a\\n*n\\n-v\\n\u00c2\u00b03\\n-01\\nayrat,\\n-ax at,\\nerjrat,\\n-tjrao\\n07]xav\\n-o)rav\\nao )/ta ov\\n-0)JU,a OV\\nao )fia OV\\n-o ),aa ov\\n00)11 a OV\\n-o)f.ie ov\\ndtjG OV\\n-da ov\\niqa ov\\n-tja ov\\n6r t a ov\\n-o )a ov\\nd^aOov\\n-dad-ov\\nirja ov\\n-r^a ov\\n6fja ov\\n-wa ov\\nao )/na a\\n-o )/tia a\\nao )fia a\\n-o )fta a\\noo )fieOa\\n-o )ti e a\\ndr t a a\\n-da a\\nhjada\\n-Tja a\\notja a\\n-ola a\\nao)vrat,\\n-o)vrai\\nao)vrav\\n-on tat,\\noo)vrat,\\n-on xav\\naOlfUjV\\n-0 fl }]V\\ntOlflTfV\\n-oi/irp)\\noolftnjv\\n-oijitrjv\\naot,o\\n-0)0\\niovo\\n-010\\nOOiO\\n-oto\\naoixo\\n-0)TO\\ntot,ro\\n-oiro\\nOOtTO\\n-oiro\\naoi,ua ov\\n-Wfjua ov\\naoljlia OV\\n-ol/ua ov\\nooljua ov\\n-oiua ov\\ndova ov\\n-iija ov\\niot,a ov\\n-ola ov\\nOQlG OV\\n-ola ov\\naoia t]V\\n-waO-fjv\\naoia tjv\\n-oia i]v\\nooia r t v\\n-ola rjv\\naoifia a\\n-oif.uB a,\\naoljua a\\n-ol/tia a\\nooi,uaSa\\n-outa a,\\ndooa a\\n-ola a\\niova a\\n-oia a\\nooia a\\n-ola a\\naouvro\\n-0)VTO\\ntoivro\\n-olvxo\\noot-vro\\n-oivro\\ndov\\n-O)\\ntov\\n-ov\\noou\\n-ov\\nalaOo)\\n-dado)\\naia o)\\n-aia o)\\noia o)\\n-ova o)\\ndaa OV\\n-da ov\\niaa ov\\n-ala ov\\noaa ov\\n-ova ov\\naia o)v\\n-dado)v\\naia o)v\\n-ala o)v\\nota do) v\\n-ova o)v\\ndaa a\\n-da a\\niaa a\\n-ala a\\noaaOa\\n-ova a\\naia oiaav\\n-daOoiaav\\naia o)aav\\n-aia o)aav\\noia o)aav -ova o)aav\\ndaa at,\\n-da at,\\niaa at,\\n-aia av\\noaa at,\\n-ova ao\\nao^iavog\\n-oytavoq\\naouavoq\\n-ov/tiavoq\\noofiavoq\\n-ovftavoq\\nao/.i\u00c2\u00a3vrj\\n-0),U\u00c2\u00a3V)j\\nao/nevrj\\n-ovfievt]\\noo/iiev)]\\n-ov/Atvr}\\nao,uavov\\n-0)fiaVOV\\neouevov\\n-ovjuavov\\noofiavov\\n-ovfjuavov\\nirifi-\\nicptl-\\nidljl-\\nao/*^\\n-o myv\\naouyv\\n-OVfltjV\\noof.ir\\\\v\\n-0V/.17JV\\naov\\n-O)\\naov\\n-ov\\noov\\n-ov\\naaro\\n-aro\\naaro\\n-atro\\noaro\\n-ovro\\nao,ua ov\\n-o wa ov\\naona oi\\n-OV/li OV\\nooii a Oov\\n-ov^a ov\\ndaa ov\\n-da ov\\niaa ov\\n-ala ov\\noaa ov\\n-ova ov\\naia rjv\\n-da ijv\\ntia tjv\\n-aia tjv\\noiaOtjv\\n-ova rjv\\naoi .t a\\n-o ),u a a\\na6fia a\\n-ov,ua a\\noo/ta a\\n-ovtiz a-\\ndta a\\n-da a\\ntta a\\n-ata a\\noaa a\\n-ova a\\naovro\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a00)VTO\\niovto\\n-ovrro\\nOOJ TO\\n-ovvro", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "138 OBSERVATIONS ON \u00c2\u00a7101.\\n101. OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE VOICES.\\n259. The following observations are designed to point out\\nmore particularly, certain changes in the terminations of these\\nparts which frequently occur, and which, without explanation,\\nmight perplex and retard the student in his progress. Further\\ninformation respecting these and other changes will be found in\\nthe table of dialects which follows. See 2*74.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\n260. OPTATIVE.\\n1. In the optative mood, instead of the usual terminations -oifii,\\n-oig, -oi, c. the Attic dialect has the following\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\n-otyv, -oiqg, -oi r] -olrirov, -oif t zrjV -oiqfiev, -oirjze, -oiqGCtv.\\nThis form is also used by Ionic and Doric writers.\\nIn the optative of the 1 aor. active, instead of the common\\ntermination -aifii, -cug, -a/, c. the ^Eolic has as follows:\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\n-siK, -stag, sis -eiarov, -el xti]v -eiapev, -eiaze, -siav.\\nThe Attics, as well as the Ionians and Dorians, use this form\\nin the 2d and 3d persons singular, and in the 3d person plural.\\n261 IMPERATIVE.\\n2. In the 3d person plural of the imperative, in Attic writers,\\nthe termination ovrcov is more common than trcoaav thus, in\\nthe present, rvntovttov for rvntitcoaav. For other varieties, see\\nTable of Dialects, 274. This form is also met with in Doric\\nwriters.\\n262. INFINITIVE.\\n3. The infinitive, in the ancient dialects, ended in t fievai. It\\nwas changed, in the Ionic, into Efiev and afterwards, the fi being\\nrejected, was contracted by the Attics into eiv.\\n263. IMPERFECT AND AORISTS.\\n4. The JSolians and Dorians use a peculiar form of the im-\\nperfect, and first and second aorists, which is made by adding the\\nsyllable xov, to the usual form of the 2d person singular, and then\\ninflecting them like the imperfect; thus, instead of itvnz-ov, -eg,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOIGES. 139\\ne. it makes ezvtizegx-ov, -eg, -s, c. in the 1 aor. izvipaGx-\\nov, -Eg, -e, c, and in the 2d aor. Izvuegx-ov, -eg, -e, c. Hence\\nthe same tenses in the middle voice, and the imperfect, in the\\npassive, make Ezv7iZE,Gx-b\\\\ii]v, -ov, -ezo, 3d plural ovzn.\\nObs. 1. But before the endings -y.ov, -y.Eg, -xs, c. in con-\\ntracted verbs, diphthongs reject the subjunctive vowel, and in\\nverbs in fit, the long vowels are changed into their own short ones\\nas, 2 sing, liroieig, inoiEGy.ov izi qg, eti egxov, c.\\nObs. 2 This form is used only in the indicative mood it usu-\\nally rejects the augment, and is scarcely to be found, except in\\nthe singular number and 3d person plural. It is used only to ex-\\npress repeated action.\\n2(54. FUTURE, ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.\\nThe Future in the dialects has the following varieties\\n(1.) The Attics often reject a from ugco, egcq, igco, ogco, con-\\ntracting the remaining vowels when that can be done as, Hogco,\\nI will drive, reject o, iXoua, contracted ska so ildo g, iXaeig,\\ncontracted l/.ag, c. In like manner we have xalco for xuXegco,\\nI will call oixzica for oixzigco, I will pity and in the middle\\nvoice, b\\\\iov\\\\iai for b.\\\\ioGo\\\\iai.\\n(2.) Attic Futures in m are inflected like contract verbs in\\neco (251, or 258), thus, -m, -mg, -est; -ieizov, c.\\n(3.) 2 is sometimes elided from the future active and middle\\nof pure verbs, especially among the poets, even when gco is pre-\\nceded by a long vowel or diphthong as, present yjco, future /ev-\\n(700, Or %EVCd.\\n(4.) For eft), the Doric termination is |oo as, yEldtco for\\nyEluaco.\\n(5.) Verbs in fico, vm, have the future Ionic in e co uncontract-\\ned (see 273-1); as, vEfit co for ve^ico [ieve cq for [aevcq.\\n(6.) Verbs in qco, in Homer, commonly insert as, oqgco\\nfor oqco, I will excite; sometimes also verbs in ?\u00e2\u0080\u009eoo as, e).gco\\nfrom D.co xekgcq from y.tllco.\\n(7.) The Attic and Ionic termination, particularly of liquid\\nverbs, is often ?jgco as, fiaXh jGco for fialco, I will cast; yaiQf^Gco\\nfor yuQQo, I will rejoice.\\nIn mutes, zvnzijGCx) is used for zvxpco, I will strike.\\n265. PERFECT INDICATIVE.\\n5. a. Some verbs sutler a syncope in the perfect; thus,\\nxaksca I call y.ah jGco xExdh t y.a xexXipca\\nIn like manner dsdt iiqxa dt d[it]y.a\\nxexci[iip ct x8X{M]xa, c.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "140 OBSERVATIONS ON 101.\\nb. Some perfects in ijxa, from verbs in dco, strike out x before\\na, and (except in the participles) change t] into a thus,\\nfrom fidco fteftqxa fitfiaa\\nfrom zldco rsrXqxa zlzXaa, c.\\nc. Of the vowels thus brought together, the latter is sometimes\\nrejected; as,\\npEfiijxapsv fiefidafiev by syncope fitfiafisv\\nt\u00c2\u00a3th)x\u00c2\u00a3vai zEzXaEvai by syncope zlzXavai\\nIn other verbs, the Attics sometimes change e into o thus,\\nZQE71CQ I tU? n ZQEXpCO ZEZQOCfa\\nd. A similar change has taken place in the Ionic-Doric Xe-\\nXoy^a, from (Xijico), Xdyyco {Xay%dvco), analogous to Xr^co, Xdfifico,\\nXapfidvco. Thus also TiEnoG^E is found for 7i\u00c2\u00a3naG%8.\\n266. PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, C.\\n6. The subjunctive and optative of the perfect are sometimes\\nmade by a periphrasis of the perfect participle and the verb d/u,\\nI am thus, subjunctive zEzvcpcog co, ijg, y zEtvcpozE r t zov, fcc.\\noptative zezvcpcog e i ijv, siyg, siy. And sometimes the indicative\\nas, zszvcpcbg tao^ai, I shall have struck.\\n267. PERFECT PARTICIPLE.\\n7. The participles sometimes change into a, and sometimes\\nnot.\\nIn either case, by a syncope of the former vowel, ycog and acog\\nare changed into cog, which remains also in the neuter and the\\nfeminine, which otherwise ends in via, becomes coaa, and, in the\\noblique cases of the masculine and neuter, co is retained thus,\\nUncontracted. Contracted.\\npE^jxcog\\n@s pa-cog\\n-via\\n-Off\\n/fc/3-CO\\n-cog a\\n-c6g G.\\n-cozog\\nTE vqxcog\\nTE vtj-cog\\n-via\\n-6g\\nTE v-cog\\n-cog a\\n-cog\\n-cozog\\nEGztjxcog\\nsail]- cog\\n-via\\n-6g\\nOT,\\nEGZ-cog\\n-cog a\\n-cog\\n-cozog\\nEGzaxcog\\nEGza-cog\\n-via\\n-6g\\\\\\na. The Ionics and Attics insert e before cog thus, EGZ-Ecog,\\n-tcoGa, -Ecog, G. -Ecozog. But in the poets, the ordinary termina-\\ntions frequently remain after the contraction; as, mzt-cog, -via,\\n-6g, G. EGZE-uzog, c.\\nb. The perfects in which these changes most frequently occur\\narc zfahpia, re vqxa, p J{hjxa, taryxa and in these the regular", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOICES. 141\\nform is more common in the singular, and the contracted form,\\nin the dual and plural.\\nMIDDLE AXD PASSIVE.\\n268. 2d person singular.\\n8. The 2d person singular of the present indicative originally\\nended in egui. Id the Ionic dialect, the g being rejected, it be-\\ncame ecu, by diaeresis ea i and was afterwards contracted into r t\\n(116, R. III.) sometimes by the Attics into ei and in the same\\nmanner, in other moods and tenses. In the subjunctive ?]Gca be-\\ncame 7]ca, and then rj. Id the imperative, the indicative imperfect,\\nand 2 Aorist, ego became eo, contracted ov and in the 1 aorist\\nmiddle aao became ao, contracted co. In like manner, in the 2d\\nperson singular of the optative, oigo became oio, and, being inca-\\npable of further change by contraction, remains in this form.\\n269. IMPERATIVE, 3D PERSON PLURAL.\\n9. Id the 3d persoD plural of the imperative, the Ionic, Doric,\\nand especially the Attic writers, use the termination cov instead\\nof 03Gav thus, zvTtTtG cov for rvTzzsG-dcoGav. See Table of Dia-\\nlects, 274.\\n270. PEREECT AXD PLUPERFECT PASSIVE.\\n10. The terminations of the perfect and pluperfect passive,\\ncannot be correctly represented in any paradigm of a mute verb,\\nbecause the termination, combining with the final mute of the\\nroot, undergoes various changes, according to the laws of eu-\\nphony 6), which causes an apparent, but not a real variety in\\nthe terminations of these tenses. For the terminations alone, see\\n231.\\n(1.) The terminations preceded by a jr-mute, as in the para-\\ndigm, according to the laws which regulate the combination of\\nconsonants, combine with it as there exhibited viz.\\nS. zt-TV/ifuu, 45-9 TtTvWai, 44-6 zizvmai\\nD. ZETi [.i[A8 ov zhvcp ov ZSTVty OV, 43-2, 47-1 7\\nP. Tezvi-iped-a zhvy e zhxvh\\\\l(voi sigi\\n(2.) Preceded by a jc-mute, they combine as follows\\nS. XsXaypai XtXe^ai, 4cA-1 lelsy.rai, 43-2\\nD.ltU/fit or W.s x ov Ulex ov, 43-2, 41~H\\nP. ).bXty{.ie a Xeleyde htltypevoi eigi\\n(3.) A r-inute before a consonant in the passive voice, is", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "142 OBSERVATIONS ON 101.\\nchanged into a, and combines with the terminations of the per-\\nfect and pluperfect without change, except where the termination\\nbegins with o, in which case the T-mute before it is rejected\\n(47, 17. Obs. 9) thus, nd o) for example in the perfect indica-\\ntive passive is inflected as follows\\nS. TzeTzeiGfiat, 46-11 nmuacu, 44-8 7i87Z8i6zca\\nD. 71871816 (IS OV 7Z871816 QV 7IS7Z816 0V, 44-8\\nP. 7Z87Z8lGll8 a 7187Z816 8 7T87181GIA8VOI 8161\\n(4.) Liquid verbs whose characteristic is X or q, in the perfect\\npassive, add the terminations to the root without change, except\\nthat those beginning with 6 drop the 6 (47-17). Those whose\\ncharacteristic is \\\\i insert i] before the terminations 97, 3, Exc).\\nOf those whose characteristic is v dissyllables in vco, (vco, vrco\\nreject v (244-4), and then annex the terminations without change.\\nBut when v is retained it is changed sometimes into [i more\\ncommonly into 6 before the terminations beginning with p, and\\nis rejected before those beginning with a Before the other ter-\\nminations it remains unchanged thus, qiaivto in the perfect indi-\\ncative passive is inflected as follows\\nS. TTsyafificu, or 7i8Cpa6ficu 7t8(pav6cu TTscpavzca\\nD. Tisqjd^us op 7Z8($a6ii8d-ov 7Z8cpa6(yov TterfaG ov\\nP. 7T8q}dfA t U80a, 7T8q)a,6fA8d-a 7I8q)a6d S 7T8Cpa6H8l 0l 8161\\nNote. Before the terminations beginning with g v sometimes re-\\nmains, and a is rejected; as, TzeyavOnv niqavOs c. for nicpaaQov, tte-\\n(o.) In all mute and liquid verbs, except some dissyllables in\\n8ivco, ij oj, vpai (244-4), as the terminations vzca in the third per-\\nson plural of the perfect, and vzo of the pluperfect, cannot coa-\\nlesce with the root, the circumlocution of the perfect participle\\nwith 8i6i and lj6av, are substituted thus, zszvfifik voi (at) 8t6i for\\nzhvnvzM iffyekpsvoi (at) 8i6i, for yyysXvtai. But in pure verbs,\\nthis circumlocution is unnecessary, as the terminations vzeu and\\nvzo readily unite with the characteristic vowel of the root preced-\\ning as, z8Zi[x}]vzca, from zijxdco 87i8cpiXijrzo from cfifo oj. To\\nthese are to be added those liquid verbs which drop v before the\\nterminations of the perfect; as, zizavuu from z8uco y.ty.Qwzca\\nfrom xqivoj, c. (244-4).\\n271. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF PERFECT PASSIVE.\\n11. The subjunctive and optative being distinguished from the\\nindicative only by the mood-vowels, and there being no mood-\\nvowels in the term inalion ot the perfect passive, it is necessary.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOICES. 143\\nfor the sake of distinction, to adopt the circumlocution of the\\nperfect participle with the subjunctive and optative of eifii, as in\\nthe table of terminations 231, or in the paradigm of the verb 257.\\nBut if the termination in the perfect and pluperfect passive is\\npreceded by a vowel, the circumlocution in the subjunctive and\\noptative moods, as exhibited in the paradigm, becomes unneces-\\nsary and these moods are formed as in observations 3 and 4,\\nfollowing.\\nObs. 3. In the Subjunctive, the vowel preceding the termina-\\ntion is dropped, and the terminations of the present subjunctive\\nannexed; thus, perfect 7iEcpiX?j-[Aai, subjunctive 7teq)iX(oucu, -v,\\n-ijtou, c. perfect xsxQtfjiai subjunctive xexQ-cofiait -rpai.\\nExc. But verbs in 6a frequently retain to, as a mood-vowel,\\nthrough all the numbers and persons as, dedyXoopai, -wzai,\\nc.\\nObs. 4. The Optative adds the terminations iiijv, o (viz. from\\nao), to, to the characteristic of the tense, with i interposed after\\nand subscribed with v or go thus,\\nXi-XQl-flTJV XtXQl-0 y.EXQl-TO, C\\nXsXv-firjv XsXv-o XsXv-zo, c.\\nixrai-fiijv sxzai-o exzai-zo, c.\\nTZEcpihj-pqv TzecpiXrj-o 7T8q)iXrj-zo, g.\\nStdrjlcp-iArjv ded^Xop-o dedi jXco-zo, c.\\nIn a few instances, the subjunctive copca is made cofi^v in the\\noptative, and the go retained throughout thus, (ispyquai has the\\nsubjunctive ps iAvcafiaij and the optative fxefirco^v, [it ^voio, //g-\\n[AVGJZO, C.\\nNote. Both in the subjunctive and optative, however, these forms\\nare but seldom used, the circumlocution being generally preferred.\\n272. IONIC AND DORIC FORMS.\\n12. In the Ionic and Doric dialects, v before -rat and -zo, in\\nterminations of these tenses in the 3d person plural, is changed\\ninto a, so that vzai becomes aim and vzo, azo thus, XeXvvzai\\nbecomes XeXvazai XsXvvzo, XeXvazo, fcc.\\nObs. 5. A sT-mute or a x-mute before azai and azo, for vzai\\nand vzo, is changed into its own aspirate as, rezvcp-azai, XeXty-\\nazcu, for zezvn-vzai, XeXey-vzai, c.\\nObs. 6. As the circumlocution zezvfxfxevoi elal is used to avoid\\nthe cacophony of the regular termination, zszvcpvzai (10. (5)\\nabove), this being removed by the change of v into the circum-\\nlocution in the indicative, of all such verbs, becomes unnecessary.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "144 DIALECTS OF VERBS IN co AND (U. 102.\\nThus, zezvpifitvoi elm, is changed into rezvyazcu XsXsyfidvoi siai,\\ninto Xels%a7ai, c.\\nObs. 7. If a (changed from a 7-mute, 235, R. 2,) precedes the\\ntermination, it is changed into d or before azai and azo thus,\\noxtvd^co, perfect passive iaxsvaapai 3d person plural Ionic\\nioxevudazai ttXi j gj, perfect passive ninhjafiai, 3d person plu-\\nral TTertEXfj arai for nsTzXijafisvoi. eioi.\\nObs. 8. In pure verbs, y or h before \\\\iai is usually changed\\ninto before the Ionic azai and azo thus, TTEqjtl-rjvrcu and -jpzo\\nare usually changed into m-tyil-mrai and -eazo. In like manner,\\nbefore azai and aro is changed into s, to avoid the duplication\\nof the a thus, avanfaavzai, from \u00c2\u00abya?r\u00c2\u00a3TC\u00c2\u00a3oo, becomes avam-zi-\\nazca.\\nObs. 9. In like manner, v before the termination ro, seldom\\nbefore zai y in the indicative and optative of the other tenses, bat\\nnever in the subjunctive, is changed into a thus, for zvtzzoivzo\\nwe have zvnzoiazo for ysvoivzo, ysroiazo, c. So also in verbs\\nin (m; as, zideazai for zi evzai iGzeuzcu for lazavzai. In these\\nforms, a and o before are usually changed into s as, efiovltazo\\nfor ZftovXovzo, c.\\n273.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN co and pi.\\n1. A principal difficulty in learning Greek, arises from the va-\\nriety of terminations in verbs, according to the different dialects.\\nThese can hardly be reduced to any general principles but a\\npretty clear idea of them may be formed from the following table.\\nIt must be observed, however, that many of the same terminations\\noccur in all the dialects, although that one only is mentioned in\\nwhich they are most usual. Besides the final syllables, of which\\nthis table chiefly consists, the Ionians used to insert a vowel be-\\nfore the last syllable, which the poets often changed into a diph-\\nthong; as, Subj. 2 aor. active or passive zvnu, I. zvtziw, P. zv-\\ntiei co. So cpvy-eiVj I. (pvy-mv fio-cocr, I. o-ocoo7. 6o-ag t I. 6q-\\naag. But as this does not affect the inflexion of the final sylla-\\nble, it is not noticed in the table. 98, Obs. 4.\\n2. These moods and .tenses of the middle and the passive\\nvoice, which agree in termination with the active, and are not\\nhere specified, are subject to similar changes, in the different dia-\\nlects, with those having the same terminations in the active voice.\\nThe same is true respecting the terminations of verbs in [u so", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN co AND [u. 145\\nthat this table is general, applying to the terminations here spe-\\ncified, whether they belong to verbs in co or [xc. The dual is\\nomitted in the table, as it but seldom occurs. For other changes\\nby dialect, see 101 throughout.\\nA Table exhibiting the most usual Dialects of the terminations\\nof Greek Verbs.\\n274.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nFINITE MOODS.\\nSINGULAR.\\n1 Pers. -rjfiij M. -SfAfxi D. -sipi and (if from dec) -apt\\nas, Ti- -8(i(ii for -r^i Igz-ol\\\\ii for i6z-r/[M.\\n-eiv, I. -w, D. A. -r\\\\ as, ixe /^v-y for -siv.\\n-oi[M, A. -oirjv, D. -cp?]v as, cpil-oiqv for -oT{ii.\\n-cpfu, A. -cprjv as, zifi-cptjv for -cp[M.\\n-oiqv, A. -cpijv as, did-cp-qv for did-oiqv and so\\non through all the persons.\\n2 Pers. -sig, D. -sg, M. -yg as, dfisly-eg for -eig.\\n-ag, -i]g, A. -aa a, -rjG a; as, ecp-ycj a for -qg; oid-\\nacj a, contr. o/c#a, for oidag.\\n-aig, JSi. A. -stag as, tvip-ttag for -#t\u00c2\u00a3.\\nA. D. -ij?? as, q)Oiz-rjg for\\n3 Pers. -si i m D as \u00e2\u0084\u00a2nz-i] for\\nplup. A. I. -88 as, izvcp-?] for\\n-a/., ^E. A. -\u00c2\u00a3t\u00c2\u00a3 as, zv\\\\p-8i8 for -at.\\n-r/, I. -??(n as, zvnz-r^i for -77.\\nD. -J, -J as, 6( -?7 for\\n-o t, D. -zi as, zldy-zi for -ere.\\n1 Pers. -jUf^, D. -fisg as, zvnzo-\\\\i8g for -/*\u00c2\u00a3j zv\\\\p-oi\\nfisg or -\u00c2\u00a3iY t\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00a3 for -o/xe^ cpil-8V(i8g for\\n-ov\\\\i8v dtf.-ovfieg for -ovfisv.\\n-?j[A,8v, A. -jW\u00c2\u00a3^ as, zvcp Ei-fxsv for zvydsi-ypsv.\\n2 Pers. -?/7\u00c2\u00a3, A. -r\u00c2\u00a3 as, zvcpd 8(-Z8 for zvq 8i-7]Z8.\\n3 Pers. -tjf, D. -m as, cpdijx-avzi for -cetft s%-covzi\\nfor -oocrt Xt y-ovzi for Isy-ovcn reXfit/m\\nfor -overt; cpd-ovvti for -oi;o t zid-Evzi\\nor -77m for -ftix* did-covzi, for -ot (7t.\\n7", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "146 DIALECTS OF VERBS IN go AND fit. \u00c2\u00a7102.\\n3 Pers. B. into v as, zs zvcp-av for -aai.\\n-dai, -vgi, -em, I. -eaai, -vaoi, -mm as, deixv-vam for\\n-i5(T( zi s am for -\u00c2\u00a3r 7f.\\n-own, I. -cvae 4 aGli D. _ a s, did-oaai for\\n-overt cpiXs -oim for -ovov,.\\noy B. -oday as, ia%d\u00c2\u00a3-o jav for -o*\\n-fiffa?, -^ff\u00c2\u00aby, -o 7cw, -wcra^, P. -m -av, -ov, -av as, t tit-\\ner for -saav\\\\ ed-ov for -ocra* fyy-ew\\nfor -aaav.\\neiaav, A. I. -screw as, Bih]cp-mav for -\u00c2\u00a3fcra*\\\\\\n-?/xao% -ax\u00c2\u00ab(7t, JE. A. -5xsi as, ts v-am for -^acr*.\\n-ca\u00c2\u00a3*, ^E. A. -\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00aby as, zvxp-eiav for -aw?.\\n2. 3. 3. 3.\\n-uzaxrav, -szcoaav, -eizcomxv, -ozcomxv, -ovzcoaav, A.\\ninto\\n1. 2. 3.\\n-avzcov, -ovzgjv, -ovvzojv; as, zv\\\\p-dvzcav\\nfor -dzaaav hy-ovzeov for -szcoaav\\nfam-ovvzeov for -eizcoaav.\\n-dov, contr. -aw, T\\n-io*, contr. -ow, L \u00c2\u00a3w 5 as, ?jya7t-evv for -o3V.\\nINFINITIVE.\\n-\u00c2\u00a3w, -\u00c2\u00a3m\u00c2\u00ab, I. -s^ey, A. D. -epsvou, -svv, M. -sv,\\nas, iX s pevcu for -\u00c2\u00a3w apsly-ev for -a*\\nzi -s[XEv and -e fiEvai for\\n-a\u00c2\u00ab, A. D. -\u00c2\u00a3^\u00c2\u00a3mt as, zvyj-s\\\\usvai for\\n-a^ A.p.-dpevcu, -ijv, M. -rjv, -yg, -cug; as,\\nifjv for 98. 06s. 2.)\\nA. D. -Sfisvai, E. -\u00c2\u00a3w, -c5 iE. -ofc, -ow\\nas, Qiy-cov for -ovy.\\n-ow,\\nPARTICIPLES.\\n-ovaa.\\nD. -oro-a, -ewff\u00c2\u00ab as, ^ar-\u00c2\u00a3w\u00c2\u00ab for tyz-owa.\\n-ag, -aca, -av, D. -a/, /(7 -aiv as, efy-\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00ab ff for -ag,\\nc.\\n-^-w )-wa,- fe, A. -ofc, -c5 j\u00c2\u00ab, -ofc; a s, \u00c2\u00abW-ooV for\\n-w\u00c2\u00bbft j -^kw S \u00c2\u00a7101. 7. I. -eras.\\n^E. -oji; as, zezvcp-cov, G. -o*70?, for -o^,\\n-oro?.\\n-ax", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "103. SECOND CONJUGATION. H7\\nII. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nFINITE MOODS.\\nSINGULAR.\\n1 Pers. -opou, f. D. -ovfiai as, tvxfj-ovfiai for -opai.\\n-ovpm, D. -ev\\\\loli as, \\\\ia$-Ev\\\\iai for -ovfxai.\\n-[i?]Vj D. -\\\\iav as, hvmo-\\\\ioLV for -^t^.\\n2 Pers. -i], A. -s(,, I. inclic. -ecu, subj. -7/at as, @ovI-ei\\nfor c.\\n-ov, I. -\u00c2\u00abo, D. -\u00c2\u00a3z; as, [td%-sv for -ot\\n-co, I. -olo as, iXva-ao for -co.\\n1 Pers. -Ed a, D. -\u00c2\u00a3(7#a as, ixop-EGd-a for\\n3 Pers. -vrou, -evoi eigl, I. -area or -Eatai as, yJazcu for xEivrai\\nEtQV-atca for -u^ca lEli%-atai for -j^\u00c2\u00a3-\\not 6fcr4 (\u00c2\u00a7101. 12.)\\n-^ro, -eVot ^ow, I. -aro or -evjzo as, TtEV oi-aro for\\n-owzo lyEv-Earo for -o^ro ictdX-ato\\nfor -pEvoi 7jaav i 101. 12.)\\n-rjGv.v, J -ev as, dvvrftEt-Ev for -?/(Ta^ Etvcpfi-Ev\\nfor -Tjaav.\\n-oooav, A. I. D. -aw as, Ae^acT^-ocw for -coaav.\\nINFINITIVE.\\n-i/^ca, D. -rjfiEvai, J -tjfiEv as, lsiq) -ijp\u00c2\u00a3v for\\nPARTICIPLES.\\n-ovpEvog, D. yE. -EVfisvog as, cpil-svfiEvog for -ou-\\n|U.\u00c2\u00a32 0\u00c2\u00a3.\\n\u00c2\u00a7103. SECOND CONJUGATION.\\n275. Verbs of the second conjugation end in\\nand are formed from pure verbs of the first,\\nas follows\\n1. co is changed into [u, and the short vowel", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "148 SECOND CONJUGATION. 103.\\nbefore it is changed into its own long, or the\\ndoubtful vowel lengthened thus,\\nFrom ofiico is formed Jp)j{ii I extinguish\\nyvoco yvco^ii I know\\ncpdco qirjfiL I say\\nxlvco yXvyci I hear\\n2. Eegular verbs in do?, soj, oco, reduplicate the\\ninitial consonant with c in the present and imper-\\nfect; thus,\\nFrom oeco is formed M-orjfjii I bind\\nsco tl-^r^ii I place\\nboco didcofii I give\\nBut nUco makes nifinXijiii I fill, 47-19\\n3. Verbs beginning with a vowel, prefix i y\\nwhich is called the improper reduplication thus,\\nFrom sco is formed i -nfii I go\\nsco L-i][u I send\\nObs. 1. Also verbs beginning with at or nr prefix i with the\\naspirate thus,\\nFrom cjrdco is formed i-Gttjfu\\nmctco i-Ttxr^jLi\\n4. The reduplication is not used in verbs in v^u,\\nnor in those whose radical primitive has more\\nthan two syllables thus,\\nFrom vlvco comes xlvfu I hear\\nlodco iarnu I know\\noveco ovnfu I assert\\nLikewise some other verbs as,\\ncpdco cfijfii I say, c. (No. 1.)\\nObs. 2. Some verbs which begin with a vowel repeat the first\\nsyllable, after the manner^ of the Attic reduplication (224-6)\\nthus, atypi and dldlqfM a^fJa and oatdp^iu\\nObs. 3. Some pure verbs add vvv to the root before fu, and\\nsome mute and liquid verbs add w in order to pass into (.u as,\\nGxsddco R. Gxeda Gxedd-vw-[U\\nOEixco Setx omx-w-iu\\n\u00c2\u00abV W dg JtP-NT-MI, aQ-rv-nai", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "104, 105. THE TERMINATION. 149\\n5. Verbs in pi have only three tenses of that\\nform viz. the Present, the Imperfect, and the 2\\nAorist. The other tenses are taken from the\\nprimitive in co, and are of the first conjugation,\\n296. Verbs in vpi want the second aorist, and\\nalso the subjunctive and optative. When those\\nmoods are needed, they are borrowed from forms\\nof the first conjugation in va.\\nObs. 4. Several verbs form only the 2d aorist according to this\\nconjugation, 216, Obs. 1; in such cases, verbs in vco have the\\n2d aorist in vv as,\\n^aivco from fidco Root fta 2d aor. sBtjv\\nyiyvcaazco yvoco yvo syvcov\\ndvco dv sdvv\\nObs. 5. Many verbs of this conjugation are deponent, having\\nonly the passive form, while their signification is active such are\\ndvvufiai, I can xsTpcu, I lie difypai, I seek oiopai, I think.\\n276.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 104. THE ROOT AND AUGMENT.\\n1. The Root of verbs in (u has but one form, and is the same\\nwith the first root of the verb from which it is derived thus,\\nhrrifii from otdco, R. era zifrq[ii from #\u00c2\u00a3oo, R. s, c.\\n2. Iri Verbs that reduplicate (275-2), the reduplication is pre-\\nfixed to the root in the present and imperfect only.\\n3. The imperfect and 2d aorist are augmented in the same\\nmanner as in verbs of the first conjugation.\\n277.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 105. THE TERMINATION, OR FINAL LETTERS.\\n1. In the first conjugation, the terminations consist of two\\nparts, the mood-vowels, and final letters, 225-2. In the second,\\nthe mood-vowels are wanting, and their place supplied by the\\nlast letter of the root, which sufficiently distinguishes the moods\\nby the changes which it undergoes in combining with the final\\nletters.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "150\\nFOEMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES.\\n106.\\n2. The Final letters in all verbs belonging to this conjugation,\\nare the same. They are divided into two classes, Primary and\\nSecondary. The primary belong to the present indicative only\\nthe secondary to the indicative of the imperfect and 2 aorist, and\\nto the optative in all the tenses. They are joined immediately\\nto the root, and, so far as they can be separated from it, are as\\nfollows\\n278. I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nSing. -\\\\ii -g -6i\\nDual. -tov -rov\\nPlur. -per -re -vtoi\\n-\\\\iev\\nSecondary Tenses.\\n-9\\n-rov\\n-re\\n-TY\\\\V\\n-car\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlur.\\nImperative.\\ni\\n-rov\\n-Z6\\n-TCO\\n-T03V\\n-rco6av\\nInfinitive.\\n-vai\\nParticiples.\\n1ST. -vrg -vroa -v G. -vrog, c.\\n279. II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nSecondary Tenses.\\n-to\\n-a nv\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nSing. -\\\\mi -aai -rat\\nDual, -fis ov -c ov -c ov\\nPlur. -fis a -o s -vrai\\n-m v\\n-fie ov\\n-60\\n-6 OV\\n-6 E\\nImperative.\\nSing. -60 -6-Q-a)\\nDual. 1 -6 ov -6 WV\\nPlur. -6 E -6 m6av\\nInfinitive.\\nParticiples.\\nN. -pevog -fisvn -\\\\ievov\\n106. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\n280. In the present and imperfect, through\\nall the moods, prefix the reduplication, in verbs\\nthat reduplicate, and then", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "106. FOKMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 151\\n1. For the Indicative,\\n281. Rule. Change the short vowel of the root\\ninto its own long (237) in the singular of the\\npresent and imperfect, and in all the numbers of\\nthe 2 aorist, and then add the final letters, 277-2\\nthus,\\nPRESENT. IMPERFECT. 2d AORIST.\\nS. latij-ni -g -6i\\nD. lata. -zov -zov\\nP. icza-fisv -zs -61\\n16Z7]-V -g\\ni6za -zov -triv\\ni6ta-(isv -zs -6av\\nz6Tr[-v -g\\nS6ZTJ -ZOV -zr\\\\v\\nS6Z7]-flSV -ZS -6aV\\nExc. 1. In the 2 aorist, zid j]fxt, didcofM, and fyfM, have the long\\nvowel in the singular only.\\n2. For the Subjunctive.\\n282. Rule. Change the final vowel of the\\nroot into the subjunctive terminations, a, rjg, fj,\\nc., 229 thus,\\ni6tt]fii R. 6ta- Subj. Pres. i6Z-a, -rjg, -tjzov, -tjzov, c.\\n2 Aor. 6Z-u -jjg, -r t zov, -ijzov, c.\\nObs. These terminations, in the suhjunctive, combine with the reg-\\nular subjunctive terminations (229) the final vowel of the root, forming\\na sort of mixed vowel or diphthong, and consequently they always\\nhave the. circumflex accent, as here.\\nExc. 2. But verbs in cofii retain co through all the persons and\\nnumbers; as,\\ndidcofxi from doco, R. do, Subj. Pres. did-a, -q g, -op -azov, c.\\n2 Aor. d-co, -egg, -6) -aizov, fec.\\n3. For the Optative.\\n283. Rule. Change the final vowel of the\\nroot into its own diphthong, and add the second-\\nary final letters with r\\\\ prefixed thus,\\nPres. i6zai-7]v -rjg -r\\\\, c. zi ei-rjv -ijg -ij, c. 8i8oi-?]v, c.\\n2 Aor. 6zai-7]V -qg -27, c. \u00e2\u0080\u00a2Qsi-ijv -ijg -rj, c. doi-?]v, c.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "152 FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 107.\\n4. For the Imperative.\\n284. Rule. In the present tense, add the final\\nletters to the root but in the 2 aorist, change the\\nshort vowel into its own long thus,\\nPresent, iGzaSi, -zco, -zov, -zcov, -re, -zmgccv.\\n2 Aorist, GZ?j -#J, -ZCO, -ZOV, G.\\nExc. 3. In the 2 aorist, ti ij[m, didm/ii; and i?][u, retain the\\nshort vowel, and add g instead of l in the 2d person singular as,\\n\u00c2\u00a3-g, -gov, -zcov, g. do-g, -zco -zov, -zcov, g. So also\\nGTttjfM, cpQjjfu, and Gyj\\\\\\\\ii, ne P resen t, have GTtig, cpQeg, G%eg.\\n5. For the Infinitive.\\n285. Rule. In the present tense, add the final\\nletters to the root, and in the 2 aorist, change the\\nshort vowel into its own long thus,\\nPresent, iGzd-vai, 2 aor. Gztj-vcu.\\nExc. 4. In the 2 aorist, zid)]\\\\ii and iijfu change the short\\nvowel of the root into e\u00c2\u00ab, and didcojM changes it into ov as,\\n\u00c2\u00a3i-vai d-vai dov-vai\\n6. For the Participles.\\n286. Rule. Add the final letters to the root,\\nand then combine by the rules of euphony, 6,\\n18 thus,\\niGzd-vzg, -vzgcl, -v, combined hz-dg, -ma, -dv.\\nzi wzg, -vzGa, -v, ti -eig, -elgci, -ev.\\ndido^zg, -vTGa, -v, did-ovg, -owa, -6v.\\ndeixvv-vzg, -vzGa, -v, oeiy.v-vg, -vGa, -vv.\\n\u00c2\u00a7107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE\\nMIDDLE AND THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\n287. Prefix the reduplication in the present\\nand imperfect in verbs that reduplicate (275-2), as\\nin the active voice and then, in all the tenses,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 158\\n1. For the Indicative, Imperative, Infinitive, and\\nParticiples.\\n288. Kule. Annex the final letters (279) to\\nthe root as,\\nIndicative, iGTa-fxai, -Geo, -rat, c. Imp. fotd-pijv, -go, -to, c.\\nImperative, Igtu-gco, -g co, -a ov, -g oov, c.\\nInfinitive, lora-ad ai.\\nParticiples, fctd-fxevog, -\\\\ikvri, -fievov.\\n2. For tlie Subjunctive.\\n289. Kule. Change the last letter of the root\\ninto the subjunctive terminations, afiai, jj, tjtcci,\\nc, 230, and 282, Obs. as,\\nustJjfii, R. oza- Subj. Pres. vGt-fopai, -rj, -r t rai, c.\\n2 Aor. GT-oZfiai, -f[, -TJrai, c.\\nExc. Verbs in mpi retain co through all the numbers and per-\\nsons, as in the active voice, 282, Exc. 2 as,\\ndidw(xi, R. do- Subj. Pres. did-mpiai, -o), -ootai, c.\\n2 Aor. 8-65[A,ai, -o), -wtai, c.\\n3. For the Optative.\\n290. Rule. Change the last letter of the root\\ninto its own diphthong, and add the secondary\\nfinal letters as,\\ntstijfu, R. era- Opt. Pres. .tVrca-^j -go, -to, g.\\n2 Aor. gtul-^v, -go, -to, c.\\nObs. 2! is usually rejected in the 2d person singular mak-\\ning\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\niGtai-fJirjv, -o, -to, c. GTal-fJLrjv, -o, -to, c, 295-8.\\n291. N. B. As the root of verbs in fit ends in a, e, o, or v,\\nthese vowels, combining -with the final letters, cause the appear-\\nance of four different forms of termination, and for this reason\\nfour paradigms have usually been given, though there is in fact\\nonly one. The following tables will show, that, in whatever vowel\\nthe root ends, still there is but one form of inflection.\\n7*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "154\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN m.\\n\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nSingular.\\nIGZV J\\ndeixvv j\\n108. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML*\\n292. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative Mood, 281.\\nDual. p] ura L\\nIGZ\\nrid-\\n-co -rjg -rj\\n-co -cog -co\\niGza j\\ndsixvv J\\nSubjunctive, 282.\\n-ijzov -tjzov\\n-cozov -cozov\\nOptative, 283.\\n-TjZOV -1JTYIV\\nImperative, 284.\\n-fJlSV -78\\n(\u00e2\u0080\u00a2VZGl 1\\nIGTCIGI\\nri em\\ndidovoi\\ndeUvvoi\\n-COflSV -JjZS -COGl\\n-CO t UEV -COTS -COGl\\n-TjfAEV* -1JZE -1-jGCCV\\n-re -rcoGav 5\\nParticiples, 286.\\niGZ-ag\\nzift-Eig\\ndid-ovg\\ndeixv-vg\\nIMPERFECT TENSE, 294-6 (2).\\nIndicative, 281.\\n-CtGCL\\n-ElGCt\\n-OVGCL\\n-VGCi\\n-av\\n-ev\\n-6v\\n-vv\\nIGZt}\\nIzidtj\\nib i dco\\nideixvv\\nS\\n-zov -zrrv\\n-fiev -zs -guv 7\\niGza\\nhide\\nidido\\nideixvv\\nThe other moods in the imperfect are wanting.\\nNote. The numbers 1, 2, 3, Ac, refer to the same lumbers in 109.\\nFor the accents, see 254-2.\\nt 43, Obs. 5.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN fit.\\n155\\nSingular.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nSECOND AORIST.\\nIndicative Mood, 281.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\naazv\\nt dco\\n-G\\neazfj j\\ne8o\\n-zvv\\n-\\\\18V -ZS\\n-aav 7\\nSubjunctive, 282.\\nat\\nj Z\\n8 -c5\\n~fjg -fi\\n-TJZOV -TJZOV\\n-oo^ev -rjzs\\n-W6i.\\n~qjg -co\\nZOV -C0ZOV\\n-OJftEV -03Z8\\nX Gl\\nOptative, 283.\\nczai\\n81 V -nv\\n8ol\\n-vq -n\\n-7]ZOV -?]Z1]V\\n-7][IW -qze\\n-ijaav\\nImperative, 284.\\n6Zl]-dl 3\\ne -g\\nTO)\\n-zov -rav\\n-Z8\\n-zcocav\\n86 -g\\nInfinitive,\\n285.\\nParticiples, 286.\\n8ov\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2vat\\nazug\\nd-aig\\n8ovg\\nozaoa\\n8ov6a\\nozdv\\n8V\\n8ov\\nNote 1. The numbers 1, 2, 3, c, refer to the same numbers in\\n\u00c2\u00a7109.\\nNote 2. For the accents in these tables, as in the tables of the first\\nconjugation, see 254-2.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "156\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN m.\\n108.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML\\n293. MIDDLE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative Mood, 288.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\ntara\\nti s\\ndido r-PM-GM-tai\\ndeixw\\nlar m\\nrid (o ai -y 7 l tai\\ndid -copai -cp -wzai\\n[is ov -g ov -g ov\\nSubjunctive, 289.\\n-ps a -ode -vtai\\n-ape ov -ycd-ov, fec.\\n-ojped-ov -wad-ov, c.\\nOptative, 290.\\n-cope a -tjg s -avzat\\n-cSfie a -oqg e -anal\\niGtai\\nTi-d-ei -finv -o (go 8 -to\\ndidoi\\niGza\\nrifts\\ndido r\u00e2\u0084\u00a2\\ndelxvv\\nInfinitive, 288.\\n[iz ov -adov -G^V\\nImperative, 288.\\n-6 OV -O COV\\n-fisd-a -a s -vro\\n-o e -G coaav\\nParticiples, 288.\\niota\\nri s\\n-G ai\\ndeixvv\\nicta\\nrv s\\ndido r-P evo S V*vri -pevov\\ndsixvv J\\niota\\niri e\\nidido r-M*-\u00e2\u0084\u00a2 -ro\\nideixrv J\\nIMPERFECT TENSE.\\nIndicative, 288.\\n-[is ov -a ov -G qv\\n-pE Ci -G 6 -VTO\\nThe other moods of the imperfect are wanting.\\nNote. The numbers 8, 9, refer to the same numbers in 109.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN pi.\\n157\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nSECOND AORIST.\\nIndicative Mood, 288.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\niGta\\nido\\n-\\\\ir\\\\v -ao -to\\ny -oofxai -rj\\n-ijtai\\n-officii -cp -at ai\\n-psd ov -g ov -a riv\\nSubjunctive, 289.\\n-CO(A,8 OV -iJG OVj C.\\n-COfXSd-OV -G)6d-OV, C.\\n-[is cc -6 S, -vto\\n-CQfis a -7(6 e -mvtai\\n-0Q[A8x}a 6 e -covtai\\n6TCU\\nftei J- -{Mjv -o (go 8 -to\\ndot\\nGta\\nS -GO 9 -6 C0\\ndo\\nOptative, 290.\\n-psdov -G OV -Gd-IJV\\nImperative, 288.\\n-G OV -6 (0V\\n-[IS Gi -G 8 -vto\\n-G 8 -6 C06av\\nInfinitive, 288.\\nGtOi\\n8 -G CU\\ndo\\nParticiples, 288.\\ntd\\nGta\\nE -\\\\18V0$ -flEVrj -\\\\18V0V\\ndo\\nThe present and imperfect passive are like the present\\nand imperfect middle. The second aorist passive is want-\\ning.\\nNote. For the other tenses of verbs in fit,, see 110, 111, and for\\nthe dialects, 102.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "158 OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN fU. \u00c2\u00a7109.\\n109. OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN fu.\\n294. ACTIVE VOICE.\\n1. The final letters of the 3d person plural are properly vzai\\nand these, combining with the preceding vowel according to the\\nrules of euphony (47-18), become aai, eici, ova, va, ma.\\n2. In the optative, 7] is often dropped before the final letters\\nof the plural, making\\n-ai^sv, -airs, -oliev -ei\\\\iev, -size, -ei8v -oijiev, -oite, -oisv\\ninstead of\\n-ai)]fAEr, -aujZE, -aiijaav -EirjfjiEv, c.\\n3. idiijfu has sometimes iazy for foza i in the imperative\\nand in compounds, at a is commonly used for atrfii thus, ava-\\nata for avaazqdi nag data for naoctatrfti, c.\\n4. So also rid-tifu, didoa/ju, and (qfu, have sometimes ti Ei,\\ndidov, hi, for ri sn, dido i, is i but these are properly con-\\ntracted forms of the primitive verb with the reduplication, used\\nin the Ionic and Doric dialects thus, zids co, imperative ti EE,\\ncontracted zi ei.\\n5. As in verbs in co (261), so also in those in pi, evzwv is used\\nfor Ezcoaav in the imperative 3d person plural.\\n6. The primitive in co, with the reduplication, is sometimes\\nused instead of the form in \\\\ii in the present and imperfect thus,\\n(1.) Present.\\nzilhw, -EEig, -hi, contr. -co, -sig, -ei, for ti iftu, -ijg, -rfii, c.\\nlazuco, -dsig, -dsi, -co, -ag, -a, larrjfju, -t]g, -ijai, c.\\nthrough all the moods.\\n(2.) Imperfect.\\nEtld-Eov, -EEg, -ee, contr. -ovv, -Eig, -ei, for izi qv, -Tjg, -q, c.\\n7. The terminations -aaav, -saav, c, in the 3d person plu-\\nral, are frequently shortened by syncope as, tazav for tazaaav\\nezi ev for szid-\u00c2\u00a3(jav sfiav for iftijaav.\\n295. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\n8. In the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative, mid-\\ndle, and passive, cr is often rejected, and the concurring vowels\\ncontracted thus, lazco for lazaao ziftov for zc ego, c. So in\\nthe present indicative, sometimes iaz\\\\] for tazaaai. Also in the", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE. 159\\n2d person singular of the optative, a is rejected, but the vowels,\\nbeing incapable of contraction, remain unchanged.\\n9. The same contraction takes place in the imperative but\\nin the 2d aorist iao is contracted into fi-ov only in compounds\\nas, 7Tapd ov, imod-ov, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a7110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE.\\n296. Verbs in [u have only three tenses of that form; viz.\\nthe present, imperfect, and 2d aorist. All the other tenses are\\nformed from the first root of the primitive, as in the first conjuga-\\ntion (232-2), and are inflected as the same tenses in verbs in co\\nas,\\nTi tfiu, from {reco, has fut. rjGco, dijaofiai, c.\\ndldwfM, from doco, has fut. Scogco, dcoGopat, c.\\nuJtqjUt from Gzdco, has fut. GzrjGco, 1 aor. SGznGcc, o.\\n297. EXCEPTIONS.\\n1. Future. Some verbs occasionally retain the reduplication\\nas, didcoGco from didcopi and verbs from derivatives in vvco and\\nvvvco form the future from their primitives thus, deixvyfu from\\ndeixvvcQ, has the future dsi^co from dsixco.\\n2. First Aorist. Ti rjfii, di Scopi, and itjfAi, have y.a and y.dpjv\\ninstead of Ga and Gafirjv in the 1st aorist indicative as, 1 aor.\\nedijxa, idy/.dfMiv edcoy.a, idcQy.dfA.TjV, c. In these verbs, the\\nother moods of this tense are wanting.\\n3. Perfect and Pluperfect Active. Verbs in \\\\ii from see com-\\nmonly have ft before y.a of the perfect those from dec have r\\\\ or\\na as, zid rjfii from -tJt co, perf. zd sata Igzi]\\\\xi from Gzdco, perf.\\n8GZT]xa, or BGzay.a. In these tenses, Igzi]\\\\ii aspirates the augment,\\nand, except in the singular of the indicative, has a syncopated\\nform which resembles the present thus, first person plural eGztj-\\nxcifiev, by syncope, hzafiev, c. infinitive iGzrjyJvai, by syncope\\nsGzdvai participle, as 267.\\nObs. The perfect active of Igz^ii has a present signification\\nthus, eGztjy.a, I stand, pluperfect iazfaeiv, I stood. In the pre-\\nsent, imperfect, future, 1 aorist, active, it signifies to place, to\\ncause to stand. In the passive throughout, to be placed. The 2\\naorist middle is not in use.\\n4. Passive voice. The short vowel of the root remains short\\nbefore a consonant in the passive voice as, diScopi, future passive", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "160 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\nIll, 112.\\ndo- fj60[A,(U, 1 aorist ido-dyv, perfect St do-pai, c. But si before\\nna in the perfect active returns before pai, in the perfect passive\\nas, perfect active rsdsi-xa, future passive rs-d/ f ;ao[xa(, (43-4), per-\\nfect passive zsdsL-fiai.\\n5. Tenses wanting. Verbs in \\\\ii want the second and third\\nroots, and consequently the tenses derived from them viz. the\\nsecond future passive, the 2d perfect and 2d pluperfect active,\\nand the 2d aorist passive.\\n298.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7111. TABLE EXHIBITING ALL THE TENSES OF\\nVERBS IN ML\\nACTIVE.\\nMIDDLE.\\nPASSIVE.\\nPresent.\\nlarqfu\\nIGZCtflCU\\nhtaficu\\nIrnperf.\\ntcrryr\\nIGtdfinV\\niatafirjv\\nFut.\\n(377/(7 GO\\nattjaofzai\\nGTadfjGOftOU\\n1 Aor.\\nsGTtjGa\\n\u00c2\u00a3G7r]Gdfl7]V\\niGrd qv\\n2 Aor.\\nSGZ7JV\\niGzd\\\\ii]v\\nPerf.\\ntataxa or\\nca\\neatafiai\\nPluperf.\\nsGzdxEiv or dardaeiv\\nSGzdfJ,?]V\\nFut. perf.\\nsgti ;$0[a,gu\\n299. Verbs in\\niijlii from eco I send\\n2 gBsco I extinguish\\nGptVVVfM r J\\ntpvyvvyci fyvyco, I join\\ndid/]{u dew I bind\\nmtn\\\\ii Ttzdco I fly\\noinjfii oveco I help\\nojivviii 6 [to co I swear\\nMI to be conjugated.\\nmptzXyiu, from nXtxo I fill\\nhence 7ih j{tco\\nollvfjii oXecq I destroy\\nvixnfu vwdoj, I conquer\\nq)7][A,i yaw I say\\nyXv\\\\ii y.lvco I hear\\nQcovvvfu qoco I strengthen\\n\u00c2\u00a7112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN ML\\n300. The irregular and defective verbs in {ii are usually-\\nreckoned nine viz. sifxi, I am eljii and typh 1 9\u00c2\u00b0 ttjiju, I send\\nEifiaif I clothe myself eigci, I did set; i^tai, I sit; xeipcu, I lie\\ndown; (fqpi, I say; and olda, I know. The parts in use are as\\nfollows", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n161\\n301.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nI. EljLil y I am.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative.\\nS. slfii\\nD.\\nP. 86\\\\18V\\neft? or\\n\u00c2\u00a3(7?6V\\nS. c?\\nD.\\nP. GU^Sy\\nSubjunctive.\\n7]T0V\\n7]tS\\nS.\\nD.\\nP. tiqfjiev\\nOptative.\\n8i7jg\\neiTjrov\\nsfyre\\nImp\\nS. \u00c2\u00a3(70\\nerative.\\nfcWfi)\\nInfinitive.\\nSIVCU\\nD. earo?\\nP. \u00c2\u00ab(7Te\\nIMPERFECT TENSE.\\nS. 7\\\\V\\nD.\\nP. 7]\\\\18V\\nIndicative.\\n7\\nrjg\\n7J10V\\n7]%\u00c2\u00a3\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nS. rjfitjv\\nD. 7HJL8 OV\\nP. 7]\\\\i8 a\\n7/(70\\ntjG d OV\\n8611\\n86Z0V\\n8161\\nV\\n7JT0V\\nM61\\n\u00c2\u00a317]\\n8l/jtt]V\\n8irj6av\\nParticiples.\\nM. wv\\nF. 0V6Ct\\nF. ov\\n7] or 7\\\\V\\n7]17]V\\n7]6aV\\nrjTO\\nr 6 r]v\\n7 J jVTO\\nFUTURE TENSE.\\nIndie. 86opai, Opt. 86oifit]v, Inf. sasad-ai, Part. 860fi8vog, regular.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "162\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7112.\\n302.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 THE CHIEF DIALECTS OF dpi.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\nIndicative.\\n1.\\nSing, tljul, D. ijii/ul,\\n-^E. rij.ii.\\nPlur. ifffiev, d/A,iq,\\nP. e/ifV, dfxiv.\\nSing. 0), I. \u00c2\u00a30), P. \u00c2\u00a3M\u00c2\u00bb.\\nPlur. o^i/fv, D. oV^\\nP. no)/.uv, iiojuev.\\nSing, ftiyr, I. EOt/tfr.\\nPlur. ntjftiv, I, eifiev.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\n2.\\nsfe, or ft, I. ht,c, P. t,\\neggI.\\n\u00c2\u00a3(7 re, P. \u00c2\u00a3T\u00c2\u00a3.\\nSubjunctive.\\nf[Q, I. \u00c2\u00a37]?, P. \u00c2\u00abMJ(J.\\n5\\n7\\\\XE.\\nOptative.\\n\u00c2\u00a3W/^, I. E0t,q.\\nefyra.\\nImperative.\\nego, P. eggo, A. \u00c2\u00abrth\\n\u00c2\u00a3(TT\u00c2\u00a3.\\nfcrrt, D. ivri, ivi.\\ndq t, D. Ivri, -5C. tvxi,\\ncVvtv, P. tacfv, I aGGt.\\nf[, I. el], eXy, rfii, ei\\\\gv,\\n_ P. uyGt,.\\nMGl, I. EW0Y.\\nft I. KOI.\\niXtjaav, I. A. iliv.\\negto).\\nh aroxrav, A egtmv,\\nP. io vro)v.\\nInfinitive.\\nftvat, I. Z/itv, ri/Liiv, D. i lxtvai, rj^iv, rj/ttq, d/ieq, M. E^tivai, P. tf.ii.uv.\\nParticiple.\\nFem^oiVa, I. \u00c2\u00a3oro-a, D.INeut. or, I. 16 v, JE.\\ni vact L io Tact, eaaaa, tv.\\n-^E. tlffa, tao~(x. j\\nM. aw, I. io )V, M. ttq.\\nSing, ^v, I. fa, |a, P. 87*\\nfl-qv, rirjv, h ov, tjov\\nEGXOV.\\nDu.\\nPlur. ij/iev, T \u00e2\u0096\u00a0q/uiq, P. Bjiitv.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\ntjq, I. cfcj, e fic, P. 7/fc-,\\ni-aq, EGxiq, M. tjG-\\na, ena a.\\ntjTOV, JE. EGTOV, P.\\nETOV, fjGTOV.\\ntiTf, I. fare.\\n?j, ovjjv, I. D. f\\nP. EG/.f.\\n\u00c2\u00bb/ryr, A. %0-Ttjv, P.\\n?/(Tar, P. eaav, EGGav,\\negy.ov.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 163\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nPlur. rjvro, I. i aro, tiaro.\\nFUTURE.\\nIndicative.\\nzairao, by syncope\\ntaxciL, D. iazirai,\\nitTffiirai, P. eWtrca.\\necorrat, D. iaovvx xi.\\nSing, eoo/licu, D. laov/.iav,\\\\ Ear\\\\, A. eitre^ I. screen,,\\nicrivficu, P. %a(TOf.iao. EGcnai, D. e tij, eV-\\ncij, P. eW-jj.\\nPlur. ia6u\u00c2\u00a38ci,JE. Ecrofiicr a. egeg i.\\nInfin. EGta ai, P. eaaia cu. Particip. iaofttvoq, iaaoiicvoc.\\n303.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 II. E?/^, -Z^.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nIndie. Eifu EigorsI siei i zov i zov /per its tatovteun\\nSubj. i a i rjg i rj h\\\\zov i tjzov icofiev lifts i cocu\\nOpt. ioi[u i oig i oi i oizov loiTTjv ioijiev i oizs i oisv\\nImper. i i izco i zov i zcov i zs izcocjav\\nInfin. Uvai Part, low ioi 6a lov,Gen.i6vzog lovarjg, c.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nSing, \\\\eiv or fta fjSig or ijEicj a rjsi\\nDual. fjEizov oyjizov ysizrjv or yzr^v\\nPlur. ijEifiEV or \\\\\\\\juev ^eize or {jze rjscjav, Ion. ?J/b\\nMiddle Voice.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Z^e^ to hasten.\\nIndicative.\\nPresent, -quae -effat -srae ~2[ie ov, c.\\nImperf. i-eptjv -ego -ezo -z pE ov, c.\\nObs. 1. The Attics, and sometimes the Ionians, use the present\\nof slfii, in the indicative, infinitive, and participles, in a future\\nsense, I will go\\nObs. 2. The ancient grammarians have another form of the\\nimperfect viz. eJv, sig, si i zov, vttjv i fisv, i ze, i oav and of\\nthe second aorist, i ov, i sg, Te, c. but, except the third persons\\nie, i zjjv, arid iaav, peculiar to epic writers, no such forms are\\nfound.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "164: IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. \u00c2\u00a7112.\\n304.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 III. I Wh to -send, from EQ.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\niqpi iyg irjai i ezov Iezov Ie\\\\lev ieze laai, or IeTgi\\nIridic.\\nSubj. tm ijjg ijj lifiov lijtov IcofiEv lyzs icogi\\nOpt, hlrjv isiyg, c.\\nImper. tsi (ie- i) Utm iezov itzcov ieze UtmGOLV\\nInfm. Uvai Participles, leig ieTogc lev Gen. livrog, c.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nissg iee) 9 9\\nContr. low hig Iei f l\u00c2\u00a3Tor lET v l\u00c2\u00a3 p lEZS l8(Jav\\nIndie, ieov\\nFUTURE.\\nIndie, yo-co -Eig -ei -ezov, c.\\n1 AORIST.\\nIndie. ?)x-a -ag -e -azov, c.\\n2 AORIST.\\nIndie. ?pta ?)xag ?)xe eczov Eizyv eJjiev eize Eiaai\\nSubj. co rjg fj, c.\\nOpt. EUJV EUjg Ely ElZOV ElZ?jV ElflEV EtZE ElEV\\nImper. Kg ezco ezov ezcov eze ezcoguv\\nInfin. Etvai Participles, eig eigci ev Gen. htog, fec.\\nPerf. tix-a -ag, c. Pluperf. eix-eiv -Eig, c.\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\nIndie. lEfjiai iegcci hzai iEfjiE ov, g.\\nSubj. lco{iai trj Itjtcu ic6{ie ov, c.\\nOpt. loi/xyv, c. Imper. iego or iov. Infin. leo ai. Part. tEfiEvog, c.\\nIndicative.\\nImperf. liftqp iego, c. Fut. yGOfiai, c. 1 Aor. %xd[iip q.\\n2 AORIST.\\nIndie, stfiyy ejgo eJzo e^eOov eIg ov EiGdyv E^iE a, c.\\nSubj. cofA-ai i] f t Tctt, c.\\nOpt. oifiyv oio oizo, c. rarely Ei\\\\iyv eIo, c.\\nImper. ov tGdco, c. Infin. egOoli. Part. fyiEvog -r\\\\ -ov\\nPerf. Indie. sJuai eigch, fec. Infin. eTgO u.\\nPluperf. Indie. Etfiyv e igo, c.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 165\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nFuture. Indie, sd-fcopai. 1 Aon. Indie, uiftp. Part, i stg.\\n305. IV. Eljuctt, I clothe myself.\\nThis verb comes from sco, to go into, to be sent, or, put into.\\nMiddle, to put one s self into, to clothe one s self and it is the\\nsame in the present middle, and present and perfect passive thus,\\nPRES. MID., AND PRES. AND PERF. PASS.\\nIndie. S. si-pou, -aai, -rat and -oral. 3d PI. eivrca. Part, eipevog.\\nFIRST AORIST.\\nIndie, eta (sgg, sets) -d t unv, -co, -azo, c. Part, saodpsvog.\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nIndie, eifiriv, eiao and aaao, ehzo, eeato, eiaro, and iato. 3d PI. ehto.\\n306. V. Eta a, did set, did place.\\nEhsa (from ea 9 to put), a defective trans, verb, to lay a foun-\\ndation i to erect (a building), has the following forms, viz.\\nAct. 1 aor. elaa, kc. Mid. etadfi^v, c.\\nThe diphthong si is properly the augmented root e, which,\\nhowever, is retained in all the moods. The future sfooficu is sel-\\ndom used. The defective parts are supplied from idova).\\n307.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VI. r Hfuu, I sit.\\nl H\\\\iai is properly a perf. passive, with a present intrans. signi-\\nfication, from the same lira, to put, to place, or to set thus, Perf.\\nhave been placed or set, and remain so i. e. sit. It wants the\\nsubjunctive and optative except in the compound xaJhflicu, which\\nhas y.d wfiai, xw oi iirjV, c. and is more common than i]\\\\iai.\\nPRESENT.\\nIndie. i)-[icu -oat -rat \\\\-[isd-ov -a ov -ad-ov l-fie a -a e -vrai\\nImper. -ao -cr#oo| -od-ov -6 cov\\\\ -c e -odcoaav\\nInf. fj6 ai Part, ijfxevog -n -ov\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndie, jj-pyv -ao -ro \\\\-ped-ov -o ov -a ^v \\\\-fieda -efts -vto\\nObs. 3. For rjvtai the Ionians use zazcu, and the Poets eiarcu\\nand for -rjvzo in like manner tato and eiaro. So also for y.dftqvzai\\nand xdiyi]VTO the Ionic forms are xartaiui and xarsato, 272.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "166\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7112.\\nPRESENT.\\nDual. Plural.\\n-psdov -adov -a ov\\n-6 0V -0 G3V\\n-[AE a -a s -vtcu\\n-C 8 -G OJGaP\\n308. VII. KbZjLiai, Hie down.\\nThis verb may be regularly derived from xssa, for ew by pros-\\nthesis of xs; xesoa becomes y.tr]\\\\ii in the 2 conjugation, and in the\\nmiddle, xtsfiai., by contraction, xsificu. It has the Ionic forms,\\nyJarai and iyJaro for ysivxai and exeivto, 2*12.\\nSingular.\\nIndie. xsX-\\\\iai -aai -tea\\nImp. y,si -go -O d co\\nInf. y,ti cu\\nPart, xeifisvog -r\\\\ -ov\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndie. iyu-\\\\ii]v -ao -to \\\\-{isd-ov -o ov -a rjv\\\\-(isd-a -ads -vzo\\nFUTURE.\\nIndie. XEiG-opcu -y -sreu, c. regular.\\n309.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VIII. ri[il, I say.\\n(piffli, except yyg, in the 2d person singular of the present in-\\ndicative active, is like lorrjfM. It appears to have had an ancient\\nform ?jfxt, whence, probably, we have the forms of the imperfect,\\n?jv, 7jg, frequently used in familiar language with iyco\\no og] as, ))v o syco, said I ?j 6 og, said he The i:\\nand\\ninfini-\\ntive (favcu is always used in the sense of the past time as, cpavcu\\ntov ^coy.odzq, that Socrates has said When the present in-\\nfinitive is required, it is supplied by Xiysiv.\\n310.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IX. QlSa, Ihnow.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\nSingular. Dual.\\nPlural.\\nInd. oloa o7a a* olds (v)\\nSubj. sldb) sldrjg sl8rj, c.\\nOpt. sldsirjv stdsiTjg sldsit], c.\\nImp. (Jth (6TCQ\\nInf. slbsvai Pa\\ni atov i otov\\nIGIOV lOTGiV\\nrt. sldcog -via\\nicpsv tars iadai\\ntars tGTcoaav\\n-6g\\nOidaq, with the paragogic a, oidctcr a, by syncope ola a.\\nAttic form o\u00c2\u00ab7#ac.\\nOld", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "113. DEPONENT VERBS. 167\\nIMPERFECT.\\nSing, ijdeiv ydeig (xideiG a, Att. ydvaxra) fidei, Att. yd\\\\]\\nDual. ydeixop jjdtitwv\\nPlur. i j- ydeize (or yore) qdsiaav (or fjaav)\\nFuture eiGopai, more rarely sld/fton, I shall know, experience.\\nVerbal adj. neuter Igzeov.\\nThe aorists and perfect are supplied from yiyvcooxco.\\nObs. 4. Oidcc is strictly a 2d perfect from sioco, I see; perfect\\nhave seen, or perceived, i. e. I know. In this sense it is used as\\na present only, and its pluperfect as an imperfect, as above. For\\ni 7{i8v, the Ionians have i dpev and for etddvca, the Epic writers\\nhave idjievaif and ffyeep.\\nMatthise and the older grammarians derive the above forms, begin-\\nning with 1, by syncope from an assumed verb lat^xi, of which in the\\nDoric dialect the forms Xaa/,iv, icryq, Xaaxv, and the part. Xaaq, are ex-\\ntant. On the other hand, Buttmann, Kiihner, and others, think these\\nforms all belong to olda, or iido) that io~/uev, according to the ordinary\\nmethod of derivation, is formed from the Ionic tdfitv 6, 11), which\\nmanifestly belongs to tXdo), and not to Xar\\\\iii\\\\ while Xarov, igt?, are, by\\na similar analogy, from Xdrov, Xdre, from the same, by dropping the\\nmood- vowel and that the imperative termination, -O-v, is substituted\\nfor the ordinary termination, as is usually done when the mood-vowel\\nis omitted, as in y.i/.Qa/do, avor/Qt,, c. This is probably the true ori-\\ngin of these forms. (See Buttmann s Gr. 109, III.) It is certain, how-\\never, that, so far as usage is concerned, the above mixed paradigm of\\nolda, is the only correct one.\\nFor a catalogue of irregular and defective verbs, see 117.\\n311.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7113. DEPONENT VERBS.\\n1. Deponent verbs are those which under a\\nmiddle and passive form have either an active or\\nmiddle signification.\\n2. The perfect of deponent verbs has sometimes also a passive\\nsense.\\n3. Some of these verbs have also a passive form of the first\\nfuture and first aorist, always used in a passive sense.\\n4. The Tenses of deponent verbs are the present, imperfect,\\nperfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future of the passive form\\n\\\\he future and first aorist of the middle form; and the first fu-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "168\\nIMPERSONAL VERBS.\\n114, 115.\\nture and first aorist in the passive form, and with a passive\\nsense. A few have a second aorist middle. They are usually\\nconjugated by giving the present, future middle, and perfect pas-\\nsive thus, dtjopat, ds^opcu, dtdeyfiai.\\n312. SYNOPSIS OF DEPONENT VERES.\\nIndicative.\\nSubjunctive.\\nOptative.\\nImper.\\nInfin. Part.\\nPres.\\ndiy-Ofiou,\\n8iy-i))fxai\\n-Ol/LCTJV\\n-ov\\n-ta ai\\n-OfliVOQ\\nmp\\nidey-o^v\\nPerf.\\nSidiy-fiat,\\ndcdey-/nivoq o)\\n-UEVOq \u00c2\u00a3l)]V\\n-(TO\\n-G at,\\n-juivoq\\nPlup.\\nididiy-fnjv\\nFut, It\\ndit,-Q[A,ai\\nwanting\\n-Ot,jil1]V\\nwanting\\n-taQ-ai\\n-o/iivoq\\n1 Aor. M.\\niSet-d,u7]V\\ndi^-m/jLOU\\n-ai/LirjV\\n-at,\\n-ao~ cu\\n-a/tiivoq\\n1 Fut. P.\\nd^/d-rja-Of-iav\\nwanting\\n-oif-it]V\\nwanting\\n-iG at,\\n-otitroq\\n1 Aor. P.\\nid/ifr-Tjv\\nds/fr-D)\\n-titjv\\n-7JT0\\n-tjvai,\\n-*k\\nP. P. Fut.\\ndede^-o/uav\\nwanting\\n-Ol,Ut]V\\nwanting\\n-c(jQ(XL\\n-OfifVOq\\nNote. In this table, the imperative and infinitive of the perfect\\ndidiy-ao and dLdty-a at, are changed by euphony into 6tdt%o and Sidtx-\\ncu, 8 6. 1. 17.\\n\u00c2\u00a7114. IMPERSONAL VERBS.\\n313. Many verbs are occasionally taken impersonally as,\\naosoxat, it pleases aoxeT, it suffices ovficpsQEij it is profitable, c.\\nThe following are those which are chiefly taken impersonally\\n1. 71Q87Z81, it is becoming \u00c2\u00a37TQE7is, it was becoming 7iQ\u00c2\u00a37iEiv,\\nto be becoming to noinov, that ivhich is becoming pi. ru 7ZQt-\\nnovra.\\n2. fielsi, it concerns epsls, fielijaei, fiEfiiXtjxe and fUfiyle.\\n3. doxei, it appears; idoxei (from doxe eo); k do$s (from\\nooxoo) tic doxovvra.\\n4. det, it behoves tdsi, detjGEi, dew, to deov, ra diovta.\\n5. %or n it is necessary %Qip XQ i G\u00c2\u00a3l XQV vai an( XQH V\\nXQtwv, contracted for xq^ov. Subj. yQJi-\\n314.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 115. DESIDERATIVE, FREQUENTATIVE, AND\\nINCEPTIVE VERBS.\\n1. Desiderative Verbs are those which denote a desire or\\nintention of doing. They are commonly formed by adding (Jtfco\\nto the first root of the primitive as,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 169\\nyeldco, I laugh; 1 R. yela- yelaaeicj, I desire to laugh.\\n7Zolsp8(Q, I make war; nolens- TiolEfivGEico, I desire war.\\nAnother form of desideratives is that in \u00c2\u00abco or idco, properly from\\nsubstantives as, from ftdvarog, death ftavazdco, I long for\\ndeath oTQUTiffog, a general GToainyidco, I wish to be a general.\\nAlso from verbs, by first forming substantives from them as,\\n(hvHG ai, to buy (avqTijg,) cov^ndca, I wish to bug.\\nxlaio), I iveep (xlavoig,) xlavGidco, lam disposed to weep.\\n2. Frequent atives are those which signify repeated action.\\nThese commonly end in \u00c2\u00a3oo as, qinrd^eiv (from QiTiteiv), to\\nthrow from one place to another, Mid. to throw one s self this wag\\nand that, to be restless; (jtevd iv (from artvEiv), to sigh much\\nand deeply so, from afaeiv, to demand aiti iv, to beg\\neqtzw, to creep 8Q7iv^siv, to creep sloivly.\\n3. Inceptives are those which express the beginning or con-\\ntinued increase of an action. These commonly end in axon as,\\nyevEidcxa), to begin to have a beard rjfidcMOJ, to grow to man-\\nhood (the same as yeveid^oo and tjftdco) in part transitive as,\\n[is vGxm, to intoxicate from [ie vw, I am intoxicated.\\n116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n315 In many of the Greek verbs, a variety of forms appears, and\\nalso an apparent irregularity in the formation of different tenses. This\\nis occasioned partly by the adoption of new forms of the present and\\nimperfect tenses, which are used either jointly with their primitives,\\nif they are still in use or in their stead, if they have become obsolete,\\nwhile the other tenses continue as regularly formed from the primitive\\nverb and partly by the use of tenses taken from synonymous verbs of\\na different theme, in the place of those which have become nearly or\\nentirely obsolete and thus, as it were, out of the fragments of two or\\nmore verbs, whose other parts have disappeared, is formed a new whole.\\nThe parts of this whole, being all that remain in use of their respec-\\ntive roots, considered by themselves are really defective verbs. And\\nsome of these, though regularly formed from their own themes, yet not\\nbeing formed from the present to which they are attached, but from\\nsome other verb related to it in form or signification, the whole verb is\\nnot improperly termed anomalous or irregular. This appellation, then,\\nproperly belongs to all those verbs whose present, future, and perfect,\\ndo not follow the common analogy of conjugation. A few examples\\nwill illustrate these remarks thus, dim, to go tinder, has di nm, Sv/ib,\\nand Svoy.o), all different forms of the present but the tenses of the first\\nroot are regula7*ly formed from the primitive dim, and the second aorist\\n8", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "170\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7116.\\ntSvVj from the form in fit. Again, nda/o), I suffer, has the future 7t x-\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a08-tiao), and perfect mTid ijy.a, from the obsolete present, na io) the\\n2d aorist ena ov, 2 perfect ninrj a, from the obsolete nq oi; and the\\nfuture middle ndaofxai (\u00c2\u00a76. 18), and 2 perfect active ninovda, from\\nthe obsolete niv o). In this latter example, nda/o), the only preseut\\nin use, with its imperfect t7iao~/ov, is a defective verb, having no other\\ntenses from that root in like manner, the other parts from their re-\\nspective themes are so many defective verbs but, taken together, and\\nas attached to nda/a), a theme from which they are not formed, accord-\\ning to the common analogy of conjugation, they form what is called\\nan anomalous or irregular verb.\\nIn most irregular verbs, the irregularity is caused by the adop-\\ntion of a new present and imperfect, formed by certain changes\\non the root of the verb in these tenses, while the other tenses con-\\ntinue to be formed regularly from the primitive root or theme.\\nThus from AH BQ* is formed the new present Xafifidvai, im-\\nperfect ildpfiapov, while the future h]\\\\pco, and all the tenses\\nfollowing it, are formed regularly from the root AHB.\\n316. In this way new presents are formed from old roots as\\nfollows\\nI. By the addition of certain letters to the root thus,\\nTheme.\\nOOXCO\\nTICO\\ndyco\\nECO\\nildco\\n8Q8CO\\nytjQaco\\nHoot\\nbox\\nTl\\nay\\nila\\nyijQa\\nlet. add.\\nVV\\nvvv\\nvv\\n\u00c2\u00a3IP\\nJX\\nmakes\\nVew Pres.\\nFut.\\n8 0X8- CO\\ndo^co\\nTIP- CO\\nayvv-co\\n8PVV-CO\\nilavp-co\\nriaco\\ndtco\\neaco\\nildaco\\n8Q881V-CO\\nyt]Qdcjy.-co\\n8QIJ6CO\\nyqqdoco\\nII. Of roots that end with a vowel, some drop it before the\\nadded letters some change o into go, s into ij, and others change\\ns or o into thus,\\nTJieme.\\nHoot. 12\\nchanged.\\nlet. add\\nNew Pres.\\nFut.\\n1 Ctf4,aQT8CO\\ndflC\u00c2\u00a3QZ8\\ndfiaQT\\nav\\ndfiaQidp-co\\ndfiaQT/jGCO\\n2 tQids ca\\ni()i8e\\n8Qld\\naiv\\n8Qidai p-co\\n8QldfjO~CO\\n3 \u00c2\u00a3ooo\\nto\\nvvv\\nl,covvv-co\\n^cooco\\n4 dldtco\\naide\\nd!8)j\\nOX\\ndld/jGX-co\\ndldi joco\\n5 8VQ8CO\\nEVQS\\n8VQI\\nOX\\n\u00c2\u00a3VQ(OX-CO\\nEVQIjOCO\\ndlcooco\\n6 XAO Sl\\ndlo\\ndfo\\nax\\ndliox-co\\n1 fitoco\\n\u00c2\u00a710\\n\u00c2\u00a7ico\\nox\\nftlCOOX-CO\\nfilCOGCO\\nPrimitive themes, now obsolete, are printed in capitals.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171\\nIII. Of roots that end with a x-mute or a r-mute, the final\\nmute is sometimes dropped before the added letters thus,\\nTheme.\\nRoot. R,\\nchanged.\\nlet. add.\\nNew Pres.\\nFut.\\n1 nodyo)\\nno ay\\n7i q a\\n66\\n71QU66-G)\\nnodzco\\n2 wddco\\nifiad\\nl[ia\\n66\\nl(lU66-CO\\ni[xa6co\\n3 y.odyco\\ny.oay\\ny.oa\\nK\\ny.Qa\u00c2\u00a3-o)\\ny.od\u00c2\u00a3co\\n4 qoddco\\nyoad\\nCfoa\\ni\\n(fod^-co\\nCfQa6CQ\\n5 v jy.(0\\ntivrp\\nvn\\n6 A\\nVt j6y.-CQ\\n\\\\)vtj%CO\\nIV. Some form a new present from the second root changed\\nbefore the added letters by inserting v, which before a ^-mute\\nbecomes \\\\i thus,\\nTheme. 2 Root. 2 R. changed, let. add. New Pres. Fut.\\n1 h ftoy Xa Xav av lav dv-co )Jj6co\\n2 h jfico ).a$ \\\\a\\\\i\u00c2\u00a7 av Xa^dv-co h jipco\\nV. By Syncope or contraction as,\\nNew Pres.\\ndaXaco by syncope alco Fut. {rah fico\\nr/aioco v ErPQ 2 Aor. M. ijyoofirjv\\nocft/.zco by double syncope ocflco Fut. oyeXfeco\\nVI. By Reduplication, viz. of the initial syllable of the ini-\\ntial consonant with i and of i commonly called the improper\\nreduplication as,\\nTheme. New Pres. Fut.\\nay a by Red. of initial syllable dydyco d\u00c2\u00a3co\\noaco cons, with i didaoj d/j6co\\nnlaco m\\\\inlaoy, 47-19 nhpto\\n6tdco by improper Red. hidco 6tr t 6co\\nVII. By Metathesis or transposition of letters, which, however,\\nrarely occurs as,\\nTheme. Root. New Pres. Fut.\\ndagxco Saox by Metathesis ooay. doax-co 8aQ ~co\\nVIII. By Aphceresis, or cutting off the initial letters as,\\ni alco by Aphseresis becomes aXco\\nagaco qsgj\\nIX. In several, two or more of these modes of variation com-\\nbine to form the new present thus,\\n1 By VI and II, yvoco becomes ytyvco6y.co, fut. yvco6co.\\n2 By VI and I, dodco becomes oidod6y.oj, fut. ^\u00c2\u00abcrw.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "172 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\n3 By VI and III, dcc/co becomes diddcxco, fut. diddZco.\\n4 By VI, fievo) becomes fii^evco, and by V, [iipva, fut. fiaveco.\\n5 By VI, ztxco becomes zizexco, by V, ti txcq, and by VII, zixrco,\\nfut. Te\u00c2\u00a3oo.\\n6 By I, U(o becomes Ixdvco, by V, tWoo, by I, htvico, \\\\v.vio\\\\iai, fut.\\nt\u00c2\u00a3co.\\n7 By VIII, (j^\u00c2\u00a3co becomes ^g oa, by VII, 8%co, fut. both fjoa and\\n317. \u00c2\u00a7117. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR\\nAND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\nEXPLANATION.\\nIn the following Table, the words in capitals are the roots from which\\ncertain tenses are formed, but which are themselves either entirely ob-\\nsolete, or are merely supposed, in order to derive from them by analo-\\ngy the forms in use.\\nWhen there is but one root, or one form of the root, the numbers\\n1, 2, 3, are omitted, as in ayo) s. s. means same signification.\\nThe capital R after a tense indicates that the verb is conjugated re-\\ngularly from the tense after which it is placed.\\ny Ado), to injure (R. aa.) pres. pass, ddxai, 1 a. act. daaa, contr. daa, 1\\na. pass, ada rjv, mid. aao-dfiijv. Horn.\\nAyapai, to admire a passive form from dyt],ui,, Th. dydi\u00c2\u00bb, (R. dya,)\\npr. and imp. like Xara^iai, dyd Qoja at,, s. s. fut. dyd-\\naojiiat,, R.\\nAyvvo), ayvvfxv, to break; from ayo), (R. ay,) i d^o), c, R. 1 a. ect^ce, 2\\na. p. idyrjv, 2 perf. taya, with a passive signification. It\\ncommonly takes the syllabic augment, probably owing to\\nits having anciently had the digamma as the initial letter\\nthus, pres. Fdyo), 1 a. \u00c2\u00a5fa$a, and then iccta cfec.\\nAyo), to lead (R. ay,) f. ato), (fee. R. It has a reduplication in the 2 a.\\nijyayov, perf. rj/a, and with the reduplication, dyt ;o/a,\\n(poetic dyvo), dyivo).) 1 a. t] S,a, atav, dtaaOat,.\\nAfio). See avddvo).\\nAtigo), epic and poetic lengthened for al oo). Regular.\\nAi ^o). See avtdvo).\\nv Ar\\\\ia, to blow (fr. do), R. a,) retains throughout as, drjvat,, pass.\\ndiktat,; except the participle dug, aivroq: the passive form\\nhas an active sense.\\nAtom, to take; (1 R. aiQe, 2. IX, from EAJ1,) f. alorjffw, or -ioo), fec.\\nR. Attic fut. |A 5, 2 aor. ilXov, mid. dXdftijv, Alexandrian\\nform for nXofirjv (239-5). Sometimes with an Attic redu-\\nplication in the perfect; as, di alotj/.a, uQaigijfKU.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 173\\nAl go), to raise; (R. do, from APS1,) f. ex^p. r;gy.a, 1 a. ^a, fcc, R.\\nAlad-avouou, to perceive (1 R. alo-fre, 2 alo~ f. m. aia8r t aofiai, c.\\nR. from AIZ9E 0MAI,$ 116, II 2 aor. yff o.uTjv.\\nA/.a/iZo), to trouble (1 R. aza/f and a/, 2 ce^O f. cc/.a/tjao), c. R. 2 a,\\nwith redup. rj/.a/ov pres. Mid. d/o,uai, perf. pass, ax.^-\\nyj(.iai, to be afflicted, to grieve.\\nAlSaivo), tr. to make to grow (R. d/.daiv,) f. aldavw, c. R. imp. AJa-\\nvov from AAA SI.\\nl4).dr;ay.o). intr. fo grow; (R. aA#f,) f. dlS^aoi, c. R. from AAAE Sl.\\nAtecivo), aHouau, to shun; (R. aAa fromL4^\u00c2\u00a3F J2,) 1 a, j f/Ui/ffa, 1 a.\\nm. tjhvdu^v and ?i?.eaurjv, by elision of o for -tjhvadfjirjv.\\nAtt^o), to avert (R. d/.fte and f. a/f ttjao), c. from *AAE\u00c2\u00a3E SI\\n1 aor. m. dk$dut]V, o. from AAEIC SI. 2 a. poet. qJuaX-\\ny.ov by redupl. and syncope for rjk/.ov.\\nAhvSio), tr. to ?*oW (R. dhvdt, and ccA/,, from AAI Sl) f. dXlao), c. R.\\n1 a. p. part, dlwdtid-tiq p. p. part, dhvdr^ivov. Mid.\\nsense, \u00c2\u00a3o wander, to roam.\\nAtia/.o), to take; (R. d).o,) f. cUcaow, cfcc. R. from AAO Sl, 2 |wr.\\nkd/Mv, or ^/ojv, from AASIM I. This verb has a passive\\nsignification in the aorists and perfect active.\\nAJUralvo), to be wanting, to sin; (1 R. dhre 2 dhx f. dfarfoo), fec. R.\\n2 a. rjhxov.\\nA/./.ouat, to leap (R. ctA fromAASl,) f. aAo?,aat, 2 a. r[).6nr\\\\v, R.\\nA/.ia/.o), d).vo-/.dvo), to avoid (R. dlv/.,) fut. cc/i |co, fcc. R. from 14/4 F\\nKSl, s. s. as a/ew.\\n*A?.qicilvo) (d?.qdvo), dJ.yccio),) to gain; (1 R. d/.ye, 2 aAgp,) fut. aAqtijiroi,\\ne. R. from AA I E S1. 2 a, jf/.qiov.\\nc A/.iaordvo), to err (1 R. duayre, 2 a/ia^)T,) f. dfiaqxTjao), fcc. R. 2 a.\\nij/ioQTov, from AMAPTESL\\ny Auptiay.oi, to miscarry (R. d/ufiXo,) fut. d^^).o )ao), fec. R. from a^t-\\n^A/uni/o), and duTao~/vioucu. See i#w.\\nAiiTt/.ay.Lay.o), to miss, to err (1 R. \u00c2\u00ab/t7rAax.f, 2 a,\u00c2\u00ab7rAax,) f. a,\u00c2\u00ab7rAax7j(roj,\\nfcc. R. 2 a. rjjxTtlay.ov.\\nAptqu^wvfi*. See tvvv/xv.\\n3 Avaytvo )(Txo). See jaroicr/co).\\nAvaXiaxw, to read. See d).lo~y.o).\\nAvddvo), to please (1 R. afo, 2 a#, 3 at?,) fut. aJ^o-w, fcc. R. from\\na()E(r), 2 a. tadov for Jov, 2 perf. \u00c2\u00a3ct(5a, with the syllabic\\naugment, s. s. as r t Soi.\\n3 Avotyvvo),dvoiyvv/Lu,dvnlyo) 3 (ctrocand oYyo),) to open; (R. oiy,) f. dvoi%o),\\np. dvior/a, fcc. R. often with both temporal and syllabic\\naugment as, imp. dv wyov, 2 perf. dvmya, c.\\nAvo yyo), to order; (R. dvo)y and dvo)ye,) f. dvo)to), c. R. or, avo)yyo~o),\\nfcc. R. from dvo)yio); hence, pres. imperative, dvur/ i,\\ndvo fX o), Q. by svncope for avo tytj i,, dvoyytro), c. as if\\nfrom ANJITHMJ, 2 perf. jjviaya.\\nAnavqdo), to takeaway (from duo and A Y PS1, R. ai 1 imperf. R.\\na7TT]vqaov, contr. a7Tr]VQ0)v, 1 aor. dnrivoa, m. dnr t v(iduriv,\\nfrom dnavQoi. From this verb, or more probably from\\nAIIOY PJl, (the obsolete Th. of aTroi^tCw, to dispossess,)\\ncomes 1 aor. inf. dnovqat,, part. 7Zovqcu;, and aTroi^a^tJ-\\nrog, used by Homer, Pindar, and Hesiod, in the sense of", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "174 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. \u00c2\u00a7117.\\nto rob; to plunder; to encroach on the limits or\\nproperty of another.\\nAnf/fravotAou. See ix dvoficu.\\nAnoXXvfii. See oXXv/nt.\\nAquqIgym, from AFJi., to Jit, or adapt; (R. dg,) fut. a^w and aoao)\\n101, 4, (6.)), p. I iQ/.a, e. R. 2 perf. Ijoaga and aotjoa,\\nwith the Attic reduplication from r t ga.\\nAgiGxo), to please (R. o\u00c2\u00a3\u00c2\u00a3,) fut. dgeGo), ijotxa, fcc. R. from agio).\\nAu^o), and ai ijaVw, tr. to increase (R. auif,) fut. avirjGo), fec. R. from\\nAYSES1; likewise, at io;, af^aw, tfec. from AESEJL\\nMid. intr. to increase.\\nAx o/xav, to be indignant (R. dyOe,) fut. ax ijao/nav, or -iaojuav, fcc.\\nR. from a/freofiat.\\n*Ao). This verb has four significations in its different parts viz., 1.\\noio), to blow; imp. dov, commonly dtj/xu. 2. ao;, fo sleep\\n1 aor. ao a, and aiaa. 3. aw, fo satisfy f. clffoj, 1 aor.\\na ra, pres. pass, orat and darca*, inf. act. d^ivat. Horn.\\ncontr. for diuevai,, for common form aW.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 4. \u00c2\u00abw, to in-\\njure see aaoj.\\nB.\\nBaivoy, fidaxo), /2t/9a\u00c2\u00ab, fo go; (R. /9a,) fut. prjGo/.iou, p. pf(3r t xa, fec. R.\\nfrom BASl 2 aor. \u00c2\u00a3/9^r, from BHMI imperat. /?^cH, in\\ncompounds shortened, as, xardfta. N. B. This verb has\\nalso the causative signification, to cause to go the future\\n/S^(7o), and 1 aorist active efirjaa, have exclusively this sig-\\nnification.\\nBdXXo), to throw (1 R. p xX, and pake, 2 ftcd, 3 in compounds fioX,) fut.\\n/9aAw (Poet. (iaXXr t Goi), ^pdXrj/.a, fec. R. as if from BA-\\nAE SI hence, by syncope, BAE SI. Hence the synco-\\npated forms efiXqv, eftXrjro, fi/JjO ai,, for ifidXyv, epdXfjro,\\nfa(2a,Xr]Gd-at,, fcc. Epic perf. pass, fii/26/.quai,, as if from\\nBOAE Sl.\\nBccardto), to carry (R. fiaGTad, pass, fictGray, 211,) f. /Saardao), 1 a. p.\\nifiaGrdx ijv.\\nBm io/.o), to live (R. ftio,) fut. ftwao), fcc. R. from /?t6w 2 aor. ifiiow,\\nfrom /9tw,\u00c2\u00abt (all in use).\\nBXaaxdvo), to bud; (1 R. p/.aari; 2 ftXaGT,) f. pXaor/jGia, as if from\\nBAA2TESI, 2 a. h fiXaGrov.\\nB?mgxo), to go (R. ^oA, as if from MO ASl,) 2 a, t,uoXov, f. m. uoXov-\\nfiat,, pei f /(\u00c2\u00a3,\u00c2\u00ab/9Ao;y.a (40-3d) for /nifiXoy/.a, as if from /6w\\n(by metath. 40-8th for ,\u00c2\u00ab6Aoj), whence /9/6o) and fiXwo/.o).\\nBodo), to cry out (R. /5oa,) f. /9o^ffw, fec. R. The Ionics contract o\\ninto o;, making fio )ao/.iai for flo^Go/uca* 1 a. \u00c2\u00a3/?w ra for\\ni^o^aa. 1 a. p. inserts r, ifio wdtjv.\\nBog-ao), tr. to feed (R. fioGxt,) f. poGY.t jGot, tfec. R. from poG/.io).\\nBovXofiai to will (1 R. /5oi Af, 2 /Soc^,) f. ftovX/iGOfiav, fcc. R. from\\nBOYAEJl; 1 a. p. ifiovXq tjv, and with double augment\\nflPovXij ijv; hence also 2 perf. fiifiovXa.\\nB(jo gy.u), fii.ft()o )Gxo), to cat (R. /9( o,) fut. fJgo Go) fec. R. from /9^om\\n2 aor. sfigow, as if from ftgonu.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 175\\nrauio), to marry (R. ya/xt, and ya/x,) fut. ya/AtjGo), and yafxto), yafio),\\nf. m. yafiiaof-iat,, fcc. R. 1 aor. iyd/xTjGa, K T. and eyrifia,\\nas if from rA MJl, or rH MJL\\nrhro, in Homer, he took probably iEol. for thro jy being put for F,\\nand v for as in the Dor. yv e for thus, fihro\\nwould become yivtro, and by syncope, yivxo. Also yivxo\\n2 a. m. of ylvofiav by procope and syncope for iyivixo.\\nr^ to), to rejoice (1 R. ytjde, 3 yi]Q-,) f. yrj yGo), 2 perf. yiyr t a, hav-\\ning the signification of the present.\\nrrjadcrxo), to grow old (R. yrjQa, and y?]0,) f. yrjodao), c. R. from\\nyrjodo) 1 aor. eyqoa, from FH PJl yr\\\\odvav, pres. inf.\\nfrom yrjorifiv.\\nrlyvofiav, ylvofiav, to become (1 R. yfvf, 2 yjv, 3 yov,) fut. yivr\\\\GOfxab,\\nq. R. from FENEtt, 2 perf. ye yova. N. B. Allied to\\nthis verb is\\nrdvofiav, to be bom (R. yiw,) used in the present and imperfect the\\nfirst aor. iycbvdfxrjv is used actively, to beget, to bear hence,\\nol yiwdftivot, parents r^ ytbvauivTj, a mother.\\nriyvd)G/.o), yivd)G/.o), to know (R. yvo,) fut. yvo )GO), p. tyvor/.a, 1 fut.\\nyvwG r[GOfiai, p. p. eyvo)Gfi.ab, R. from FNO II 2 aor.\\neyvo)v, from yvoifib, sub. yvd), opt. yvolfjv, imper. yvo) 9b,\\ninf. yrwvat, part, yvovc.\\nAaio), to learn (1 R. dae, 2 da, 3 da,) fut. datjGo) c. R. from AAESl,\\nby epenth. from 5aoj whence p. didaa 101, 5), 2 aor.\\np. iddrjv, or act. from ddtjfib, from tfaco comes dda/.o) and,\\nby reduplication, tf\u00c2\u00ab)a(xy.\u00c2\u00ab, to teach.\\nAaio), to divide, to feast, to entertain (R. dab, and Sad,) f. daiGo), more\\nfrequently 5aerw, p. didaxa, fec. R. from AA ZSl.\\nAaio), to burn; (1 R. dab, 2 tfa, 3 (fy,) second perfect didtja, regular\\nthrough all its moods.\\nAdxvo), to bite (1 R. drjx, 2 da/.,) fut. dtjtofxab, fec. R. from AHKSl\\n2 aor. \u00c2\u00a3(5a/.ov.\\nAao dvo), to sleep (1 R. (5a\u00c2\u00a3#f, 2 daq fut. dao rjGOfiab, c. R. from\\nAAPOE Sl 2 aor. edaodov, poetic sdya ov.\\nJtldto, to fear (1 R. 2 dbd, 3 (W, also 2 db, 3 from //J /2,) fut.\\ndilao), p. dctJ? tact, or didooxa, 2 perf. didobda also from\\nAl SI, 2 aor. e 3Yov, 2 perf. Jedta (poetice dtidbcc), pi. tffdia-\\n^fv, by syncope didbfitv, fec. and imper. didbQb, with a\\npresent sense, to fear the middle diouab, with its deriva-\\ntives dtdiaxofiab, dibiaaofxab, fec. have an active significa-\\ntion, fo frighten.\\nJibxvvo), dtUvvfu, to show; (R. mj,) f\u00c2\u00abS\u00c2\u00ab, fcc. R. from AEl KSl;\\nIonic AE KSl, hence dtSo), a) $cc, didiy/.tab, fcc.\\nJiofiab, to need; (R. f, from AEEOMAJ,) fut. d^aofiab, c. R. In\\nthe active voice it is used impersonally as, dil, dttjGH,\\nfcc. See Impersonal Verbs, 114.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "176 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nAm, to bind (R. di,) f. dycro), (fee. R. 3 fat. pass. didr ao[.icu, seldom\\ndt rjGotxai,.\\nAiddav.o), to teach (R. dv$a/, and Si^Saa/.t,) f. dida\u00c2\u00a3w (and di\u00c2\u00a7aa/.r t oo)),\\nSidldaya, (fee. R. 116, IX. 3.\\nAidqaaxo), to escape (R. \u00c2\u00a7q x,) fut. doaao), (fee. (R. from d^aw, a regular\\nverb in use) 2 aor. idgtjv (from APHMI), for which also\\nidodv, aq, a, (fee. Subj. dgo), aq, a, (fee., Opt. doaLrjV, Imp.\\ndgd t,, Inf. d^avat, pt. d^ac;. N. B. This verb is used in\\ncomposition only.\\nAo/.m, to think (R. do*?, and doz,) f. do$o), (fee. R. from AO KJl also\\nfut. doY.i iao), (fee. R. but less in use than the other forms.\\nAvvapat,, I can (R. dvva,) like t crra^at, f. dwrjcro/iiou, (fee. R. from\\nAYNAOMAI; 1 aor. pass, idvvda fjv and idvvtj r/v.\\nAvo), dvvo), tr. \u00c2\u00a3o enclose, intr. \u00c2\u00a3o (/o m\u00c2\u00a3o (R. du,) fut. dvao), did v/.a, (fee.\\nR. 2 aor. Uvv, from AY MI.\\nEyiigo), tr. \u00c2\u00a3o wl-e (1 R. iyuq, 2 eyf^, 3 iyog,) R. Mid. intr. to awake\\n2 a. tjYQOfitjv, by syncope for tiyeooju-qv, 2 p. a. cj^yo^a,\\nreduplication anomalous.\\nEdo), ea o), and ia lo), to eat (1 R. edf, 2 Id, 3 cd, also 2 R. giay, from\\n(pdyo),) fut. idiffo), p. pass. cd^dfoyjat for ijdtafiat, 1 aor.\\npass. 7jSia t]v from Mew f. m. Wo^cu and Ido fytat 2 perf.\\n-//da, Attice I dv/da, p. a. ?/doxa (by change of vowel for\\n7/df/.a), Attic \u00c2\u00a3d//do ca, 2 aor. act. %q a.yov, from qciyo)\\n(edo^at is rather the present used in the sense of the fu-\\nture.)\\nE iloi, Mko), iXi a, I wish (R. i tfc, and e).f,) fut. idthjao), and\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a08-ih jGO), rt iXrjua, R.\\nE io, I am wont only with Epic writers 2 perf. iiw a, Ionic to) Oct,\\nM in the same signification. Plup. ilw uv, I loas wont.\\nElASl, to see (1 R. fid, ftdf, 2 td, 3 ud,) an old verb, which, in the\\nactive voice, has only the 2 aor. tidov and idov, used as a\\nsubstitute for the aorist of ogocv), to see a verb which\\nhas only the present oocuo, the imperfect wqaov, Ionic\\ntiooiv, Attic mgow, and the perfect moa/.a, perf. pass.\\nto )()ti/ucu; the other parts being made up from onToiucu,\\nand iido), as here. In the middle and passive, el do) has\\nthe present udo,ucti the imperfect ilSou^v, 1 aor. tladu^v\\n(hi sd[,iijv), like the Latin videri, meaning to be seen, to\\nseem, to appear, to resemble. EldofUjv, or idofiyv, the 2 aor.\\nmid. is also used in an active sense, particularly by the\\nAttics, in the imperative idoi idia e, as an interjection,\\nsee, lo, behold.\\nOf this verb the 2d perfect otda, strictly have seen,\\nperceived, or comprehended, is never used as a perfect, but\\nonly as a present, meaning know, having the pluperfect\\nydiov, as an imperfect I knciv, and the future m. ho-o,uou,\\nrarely tidtiao), I shall know, or experience. The other\\nparts, viz. the aorists and perf. are supplied from ytyvoj-\\na/.o). For the parts of olSa, see ll 2, IX.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 177\\nEJKJl, I resemble, I seem (1 R. dr., 2 IK,Z oix,) is used only in the\\n2 perf. oi/.a, Ionic zov/.a, Attic d/.a, employed as a present\\nin the sense of I am like, I seem, I resemble. Inf. d/.ivat,,\\npart, dxo )q, -t ta, -6q. Hence the adverb d/.otoiq. From\\nthis verb comes da-z.o) and iffxo), to compare.\\nEiXo) and dXXo), to roll up, press together, more commonly dXiw or tlXeo)\\n(R. d)., dXe, or f IXi,) fut. -rjao), (fee. 1 aor. inf. eXaau, Ulacu,\\npart. sXaaq, perf. pass. bzX/xoli, 1 aor. p. idlrjv, inf. cU^ctt,\\nor a).rjf.t,ivau, part, dXeiq, all of which have sometimes the\\nspiritus asper, and sometimes the spiritus lenis.\\nEif.il, lam; (R. I,) from \u00c2\u00a3J2; fut. mid. eaoficu, imperfect riv. See 301.\\nBut\\ngo, comes from V IS1 f. m. daofiai, p. da, Attice rfia. See\\n303\\nEinil, or ETISI, to say used only in the aorists 1 aor. dna, 2 unov,\\n1 aor. mid. dndu^v. The initial *l- is retained through\\nall the moods. Compounds used by the poets are iveno),\\nivianoi, ivlano). The other parts are supplied from ego),\\nwhich see.\\nEtqyo), to shut out (R. dpy,) f. np So), (fee. R. perf. pass. 3 pi. Upyaxm,\\nEpic for dpyuivoi, dai, 272-12. But dpyvvfic, f. dpt,o),\\nmeans to shut in.\\nEXavvo), to drive (R. eka,) fut. tXdao), p. rjlar.a, (fee. R. from eXdo), also\\nin use. The Attic future is Dm, iXaq, iXa, (fee. for iXdao),\\niXdauq, (fee.\\nEXxo), and eXxi m, to draw (R. iX/. and eXxv,) f. tX S,o) and eXuvato, 1 aor.\\nft Aira, fec. R.\\nEvo o), to shake, to agitate (R. ivod-,) 2 perf. ^jvoO-a, Att. svrjvod-a used\\nchiefly in compounds as, nap- vi]voQiv, dv-ijvod-iv, (fee.\\nEvvvfit, to clothe (R. I,) fut. to~o p. pass, dfiat,, and also zapou, from\\n\u00c2\u00a3/2 afitpievvvfjib has Attice dfupio) for duqu^iao) dju pt,d\u00c2\u00a3o)\\nand dfcfio-AO) are rare forms of the same word.\\nEno). See dito).\\nEno), to be actively employed (1 R. i;T, 2 r7r,) 2 aor. tarcov and \u00c2\u00a3C7ro-\\n/tiyv, as if from 2 HE 11. Mid. tTtouau, to follow, fut. etyo-\\n^cet. See t/oj to be found chiefly in compounds.\\nEPril, and eo\u00c2\u00a3w. See Qst^ot. See also in dpyo).\\n^EqiSalvo), to contend (R. e(w?f,) fut. Ipudrjao), (fee. from ^EPIJESl, per\\nepenth. from EPl JSl hence \u00c2\u00a3pIl,o), s. s. fut. ipitro),\\n(fee. regular.\\nEpouat*. See eiow.\\nEdoo), to go aivay (R. \u00c2\u00a3j3$f,) f- i{jorjo~o), (fee. R. from EPPE Sl.\\nEovO-alvo), to make red; (R. ipvfrt, and ipev9;) fut. ipv rjo-o), (fee. (R.\\nfrom EPYOEJl), and also %aW, as if from EPEY QSL\\nv Epyoficu, to go (1 R. IA\u00c2\u00ab 0-, 2 eAi\u00c2\u00bb#, 3 tXvQ-,) fut. iXdxrofiat, 2 perf.\\nrjXv a, Attice i/.ij/.vOa, from EAEY Jl; whencealso 2\\naor. act. rf/.O-ov, by s} T ncope for HAYOOIV. For tjX ov,\\neX dv, the Doric writers have fjvQ-ov, iv iiv. In some\\ntenses ft/\u00c2\u00ab is more in use than zp/ofiat.\\nEPJ1, by metathesis ^io), and by epenth. igica also fl (M0, by ep. dpioy,\\nfrom one or other of which the tenses in use are regularly\\nformed; (1 R. io, \u00c2\u00a7f, and tot, 2. ip,) thus, frome^w, 1 aor.\\nm. ^pduTjv, from fut. Qijao), and 1 aor. p. i^ rjv,\\n8*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "178 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nand iqUdyvj from w fat. itfffot, p. xa p. pass. eX-\\nQt],ua h fut, e^w, 2 a. m. faofiijv; and probably from aWw,\\ncomes the fut. tloijao^ai.\\nEoo^ai, in the sense of to ask, occurs chiefly as an aorist to iooncua\\nf oj ^W sub J* imp- oS, alsof. ioioopa*.\\nAaQ-io), to eat used in the pres. and imp. for Mm. See euw\\nEvdo), to sleep; (R. fut. ew^ffw, fec. R. from EYJE Jl, augments\\nthe initial vowel, thus, yvdov; so in compounds, y.a m\\n00 V, C.\\nEvqIo-xo), to find; (1 R, f {,ot, 2 evo,) f. ffw fcc. R. from EYPE SLby\\nepenth. from EY PJl; whence a form of the 1 aor m\\ntvyd,uijv. This verb has before -Vqaopcu and -fl-^v as\\nfi (j\u00c2\u00a30-rjv; 239-5.\\n\u00c2\u00a3/^aro^\u00c2\u00ab t and amx^dvo M ct h I am hated; (R, i x e,) fut. i X Maon u,\\nperf. p. nx iifiai,, R. from i x 8\u00c2\u00a3oficu, from l/^w, poetic\\nand used only in the present.\\n%o to have; (1 R. fr, and a Xh 2 a X) fut. w (with the aspirate), or\\ncr/fjao), p. \u00c2\u00a3(T//yx\u00c2\u00ab, c. R. from 2XEJI, also tr/^w, 2 aor.\\neoyov, subj. ff/w, opt. ff/ot^v, imp. a/^, inf. o-/hj This\\nverb has another form of the present and imperf I ayo)\\nand layov, in the sense of to hold, which has the future\\nrM To (fee. so also a X i, 9o), eayeOov. In the compounds\\nobserve the following varieties; viz. v\u00c2\u00a3 X w (for which\\nalso avaa X tOo)), m the middle has a double augment in the\\nimperf and 2 aor. %vt X 6iu V v, ijvt r X 6fiijv: dnniyu, to en-\\nclose, has f. a,ucp\u00c2\u00a3io), 2 aor. i^nicyov mid. aunfyoficu, or\\nan7r\u00c2\u00abr X veo f icu, to xoear fut. dpp ytcu, 2 aor. Jjum(T X 6uiiv\\n-i7 t vntff X vtoftcu y to promise, fut, vnoawaoucu, feci R.\\n^w, to coo* (R. tv f tut. eV ^ffw), (fee. Reg. from EVE Jl\\nE 1, to place (R. I,) Defective, 1 a. f m f ff o,m*, m Wa\\nThe derivatives from this root are, 1. faou, I sit (perf. for\\nfifiat), 307 2. ,o^ect, to ser: ofouw (whence t Cw and y.aOL\\ni) \u00c2\u00a3VVI 1 U t0 cl the; and, 4. i W to send, ijao),\\nsixa, R, 304.\\nZ.\\nZdoj, to live; JR. fa,) f. m. ^oo,\u00c2\u00ab\u00c2\u00ab t 2 aor. as if from ZH3/7\\nlor the contractions of this verb, see 251 Obs 2 To\\nsupply the defective parts of this verb, tenses are bor-\\nrowed from fit-oio.\\nZtvyvim and %hm ,tojoin; (JR. fay, 2 fry,) f. u^ w fec. R. from\\nZEY 1 SI, 2 a. p. t^vytjv.\\nZo)vvvo ttmg* to gird; (R. Co,) f. CoW, fec. R. from perf. pass\\ntL.oiO fxao. l l\\nH.\\nHSo to sweeten to please (R. fa) f. ffw c R. s s as\\nT winch see.\\n/fyou, to aft see EJ and 307.\\nJV, by aph*resis for w I say likewise f V for r W See", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 179\\n0.\\n0\u00c2\u00a3Xo). See i ikm.\\nOrjtpo), to be amazed; (1 R. ij(p, 2 -9-atp, S #ijq used only in the 2 aor.\\neraqiov, and 2 perf. xid-rina, in which the second aspirate\\nis changed instead of the first, contrary to 43-4.\\nQqydvb), to sharpen; (R, rjy,) f. q$o), (fee. R. from ?]yo), s. s.\\nGtyydvo), to touch (R. t,y,) f. -di^o), (fee. R. from iyo) 2 aor. e ^yov.\\nOv/ja/.o), to die; (1 R. #i aand uv, 2 av,) f. m. avov/xcu; p. xe vtjy.a,\\nand by syncope, xe vaa, whence the common forms, xiQ--\\nva/Liev, Ti vaGw, xt vdvao, fec. (265-5, b, c) from QA NIl\\ncomes f. m. avov,icat,, and 2 aor. a. e avov. From the p.\\na. xiO-vrjy.a, comes a new present te ynjitw, f. ti{forf\u00c2\u00a3ai.\\nParts also occur as if from a form in f,u thus, xi vaQ-u,\\nrt vairjv, as if from xidv7jfxi.\\nQoqvvo), d-oovvfii, Qb)GM to leap, or spring (R. #oo, from QO PSl,)\\nf. m. ooov,uai Ion. tfooeo/iiai,, 2 aor. edogov.\\nIJPY NSl, tSqvfib, from tj^i o;, Reg. tr. to se\u00c2\u00a3, or place (R. t fyu and\\nwqvv,) f. Idovao), fec. R. 1 aor. p. ttyvv ijv.\\nItdvo), t Cw, fo se\u00c2\u00a3; (R. t\u00c2\u00a3a, and tJ,) fut. l^r/ao), (fee. R. from tCctw and\\n\u00c2\u00abtoj, (fee. R. from t Cw. In like manner xa ^dvo), r.a ito),\\n(fee. See ESl.\\nIrjf.it,. to go pres. m. Xifiai. See 303.\\nItj/ii,, to send (R. I,) f. ^Vw, p. ff/.a, 1 aor. r)y.a, from. ESI. 304.\\nIr.dvo), Ixviofiat,, to come (R. I-/.,) from exa s. s. R. whence they hare\\nf. m. itouav, perf. pass, lyfxai, 2 aor. i/.o/ttjv.\\nD.dav.Ofiou, to propitiate (R. tAa,) f. D.daofiav, (fee. R. from tAaw; whence\\nIAHMI, intr. to 6e propitious, of which some parts occur\\nin Homer.\\nu j7tra,uat See nixo/AOu.\\nIatjut,, to know m. iva/uai,, used in the singular number by Doric wri-\\nters only. See tXdo).\\nJc/w. See e/o).\\nK-\\nKu i^ofxat,, to sit; (y.axd and t^ofiao, R. ed,) fut. za^f Sovficu, 1 aor. p.\\nKnuav. See 308.\\nKi/.o/uat,, to order; (R. x*Af,) f. y.^lrjaoiiao, (fee. R. from y.tttojaat,.\\nKiQuvvlm, Kiqavvvfib, to mix; (R. fut. y.zodo~o), (fee. Reg. from\\ny.f^aoj. Sometimes y.i/.Qd/.a, by syncope for xi/.toavia., in\\nthe perf. active. So also in the perf. p. y.h.oaixau and Ion.\\nY.h.QT[tiat,. Sometimes it inserts a before -^ffo/iat, in 1 f.\\npa~s., sometimes not. Hence also y.vovdo), from which\\nkIqvtj/io, s. s. imper. y.iqvrj for y.iQvct o.\\nKijdto, tr. to make anxious (1 R. xijde, 3 y.tjd,) f. x^Voj, 2 p. yjy.rj a,\\nwith a present intransitive sense, to be anxious. Whence\\nthe Homeric future y.fy.adtjao/uai", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "180 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nKtodalvo), to make gain (R. y.tQdavv, and y.igda,) f. xtgdavo) and xeg-\\ndtjGO) perf. y.entQdtjy.a, or\\nKv/dvo), to overtake; (1 R. y.iyi, 2 y.t/,) f. yiiyrjao), (fee. R. from y.iyiw\\\\ 2\\naor. cV.t/ov, and from KI XHMI, i/.iyrjv.\\nKiyorjfxv, to lend; (R. yqa,) fut. yq^ao), (fee. R. from yqdoi.\\nKim, to go not used in pres. indie, but in the other moods and imperf.\\nind., and is accented like the 2 aor.\\nKXa^o), to cry aloud; (1 R. /J.ayy, 2 y.X.ay, 3 xXtjy,) f. y.XdylM, (fee. R.\\nfrom yJ.dyyo) 2 perf. xiaA^ya, as if from xA^tw. 2 a. ex-\\nAayor.\\nKXvo), to hear (R. xAw,) Reg. except the imperative pres. xlv t, as if\\nfrom KA YMI, as well as xXve, reg.\\nKoqivvvo), y.0Qevvvju,v, to satisfy (R. xo^f,) f. xo^Ecrwand y.oQr t ao), (fee. R.\\nfrom xo^e oj p. p. xfxo^f o~i.i ou. Koqem, reg. \u00c2\u00a3o siceep, is a\\ndifferent verb.\\nKqd^o), to cry (R. x^a/,) f. y.Qato), (fee. R. except the imperative per-\\nfect y.i/.Qaydv, 2 a. t/.qayov.\\nKq^/xavvvM, KQifidvvvfjiv, and y.QTj/j.vijpi; to hang (R. xotfia,) f. y.qtf,idao),\\nAc. R. from KPEMA ll. Attic f. x^ ^o 5, Sq, a, c 264,\\n(1). Perf. p. y.qiixafiat, without the augment.\\nKrtivoj, to kill (1 R. urew, 2 y.rav, 3 xtov,) fut. xrfvw, (fee. R. 2 aor.\\nexrowor, and ezrrjv from KTHMI.\\nKvUvdo), to roll (R. xuAt,) fut. y.vXiaox, (fee. R. from xvXIm, s. s.\\nKvvio), to kiss; (R. xwf, and xu,) fut. xvvrjao), (fee. R. also xiWw, (fee. R.\\nfrom xuw.\\nAayydvo), to receive by lot (1 R, 2 lay, 3 Aoj f. ;ioj, (fee. R. from\\nAH Xll. 2 aor. eXayov, perf. XeXoyyoc. 101, 5.\\nAapfidvo), to take (1 R. A?//?, 2 Aoc/9, 3 At//?,) f. m! Xqipo/iou, p. uXr t qa.\\nfec. R. from AH Bll. Ionic perf. XtXdprjy.a; likewise f.\\nXd/x\\\\pof.iav, (fee. R. as if from AA MBll. Also of the same\\nsignification,\\nAd^ofim, /ce\u00c2\u00a3i ,\u00c2\u00abafr, dep. Ionic and Doric forms for JLa/ifidva*.\\nAav dvoi, to be hid; (1 R. A*j\u00c2\u00a3, 2 3 Afytf-,) f. A^ffw, (fee. R. from\\nXtjfro); in the middle voice,\\nAav dvof.iat,, sometimes XijOo/nav, to forget; f. Xjaoficu, (fee. from the\\nsame.\\nAovo), to wash (R. A,ou,) in the Attic dialect generally omits by syn-\\ncope the short vowel after ov; thus, eXov, eXoitfiw, Xov/ucu,\\nXova ai,, (fee. for eXovi, iX.ovo/nev, Xouofictt, Xoi tod-cu, a\\nAovio), in some of its tenses occurs in Homer.\\nAo to will found only in the sing. Aw, A%, Afj, plur. Aw A5Vr*, Doric\\nas if from A All, contracted like C\u00c2\u00abw, 251, 0/as. 2.\\nM.\\nMavQ-dvo), to learn (1 R. juaOt, 2 /\u00c2\u00aba#,) fut. fia yaofiou, p. ,uf 1 ud ny.a y\\n(fee. R. from MAQEll; 2 aor. tnaO-or.\\nMdyouav, to fight (1 R. 2 a/,) fut. /ia/?/ ro/iat and fiayiaoutu,\\n(fee. R. from MAXEOMAL", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 181\\nMao), an old form from which arise the three following defective verbs\\nviz.\\n1. Perf. /uijiiaa, to strive with a present signification.\\n2. Pres. m. /udouai,, contr. /toi/tai,, to desire, to seek.\\n3. Fut. and 1 aor. m. /xdcrofiau, i/xacrdfitjv also from (.laio/xav, to\\nseek.\\nMh va/M, to intoxicate (R. fit v,) f. [xe vaox, fec. from fii voi, s. s.\\nJSWm, to care for (1 R. [iz).t, 2 /xi)., 3 juij).,) i fistfao), from MEAE Sl.\\n2 aor. \u00c2\u00a3/A,i).ov, perf. jni/,itjXa. In the active voice it is used\\nmostly in the third person impersonally, ju .et,, e/n?.f, fec.\\n\u00c2\u00a7114,2.\\nMW.o), to be about to be; (R. /ut/.?.t,) f. fAi).).rjo~o), fec. R. from /.ul.Uo).\\nMtjy.do/i.at, to bleat (1 R. /.ty-tad, 2 /tax, 3 firjy.,) f. jur t y.dcrojuau, c. R.\\n(firjy.dto), s. s.) 2 aor. sfiaxov, 2 perf /ne^y.a, from MH KSl.\\nJSliyvvo), julyvvfit, f,iio~yo), to mix (R. fit,*/,) f. fiti-oi, fec. R. from filyo), 2\\naor. ijuiyrjv from MITHMI.\\nMifJLvr\\\\ay.b), to remember (R. /ira,) fut. juvrjao), c. R. from fivdo).\\nMooyvvo), /.loqyvvfn, to wipe off; (R. ^o^y,) f. /uoq^o), c. from MO Pril.\\nMv/.douav, to bellow R. Doric forms, 2 a. I /tuxov, 2 p. /xi^vy.a, as if\\nfrom MY KJl.\\nNctio), intrans. to dwell (R. va,) f. vdffo), e. R. from rctoj, trans, to cause\\nto dwell.\\nJVito), to wash; (R. vu7t,) f. vixpo), c. R. from vitzto), s. s.\\nTVos w, to think; reg. is contracted and accented by the Ionics like\\nfiodo) thus, f. vwglo, 1 a. %vo)0~a, tvivono, c.\\nO.\\nOto), to smell (R. bd, and osf,) f. 6V\u00c2\u00ab, R. also o\u00c2\u00a3t (rw and jo~o), p.\\nWs7/za, c. R. from OZJB ii, 2 perf. o^a, with the Attic\\nreduplication bdoid a, with a present sense.\\nOr/vio), oXyvvui, to open; (R. ot/,) f. oi ^w, fcc. R. from ol yox See dvoiyo).\\nOida. See and 310.\\nOidaivoj, olddvo), oldio/.o), to swell; (R. oldt,) f. oio^ao), c. R. from\\nqtJc w, Th. s. s.\\nOXof-iav, and ol/xav, to think (R. otf,) f. olrjaouav, c. R. from oUof.tat;\\nimperf. o)6/nf]V otw, with the diphthong resolved, is re-\\ntained in some dialects.\\nOi/ojucu, to go (R. ot/f,) f. ol-/r t ao/.iav, p. or/j^iai, R. as if from OIXE O-\\nMAJ.\\nO/.ocr alvo), blujfrdvo), to glide (1 R. bhcOt, 2 bhaO;) f. bha i]0 o), c.\\nR. from bhaOiM, s. s. 2 aor. o iha ov.\\nOx/.uw, o).Iv/lu, to destroy (1 R. oAf, 2 o/, 3 o/,) f. 6/f o-f/), fec. R, from\\nOAE Jl Att. fut. a. o/w, m. b).oT;uai,, 2 aor. odoutjv, p. wAa,\\nAttice bloda. Other forms are oXAw, bliy.o), oXeffmt.\\n0/tvvot, opcvvfiir, to swear (1 R. b/xo, 2 bit, from OMJl,) f. buoao), c.\\nR. from OMO Sl, commonly with the reduplication in the\\nperfect; f. m. b.uovficu from OM/2.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "182 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nOfiogyviw, ouoQyvvfib, to wipe off (R. duooy,) f. 6/ 6( \u00c2\u00a3w, (fee. R. s. s. as,\\n/noQyvvo), which see.\\nOvTj[.it 6vLvt]f.ii to help (R. ova,) f. ovrjao), (fee R. from ONA Jl. 2 a.\\nfbvq/ifjv.\\nOqf.ialvoi, to rush (R. oo/na,) f. oq/jlvgo), (fee. R. from oq/uolo), s. s.\\nOqvvo), oqvvjui,, to excite (R. 6o,) f. b^xro;, 101. 4. (6.) from 0-PJ2 f.\\noqo) from o^w, 2 perf. 6 ^o^a hence a new present, o\u00c2\u00a3(xco,\\ns. s. and also 6qo )qo).\\nOo cpQcdvof.icti to smell (R. oGyqaw and oGcpoa,) fut. oocfigavovficu, R.\\nand hatforiaofxai,, (fee. R. from O^fpPE OMAJ, by epenth.\\nfrom oQ-q qo/ucu, from which MGqqoju^v; hence also oaqiodo),\\nand baqiQaopcu, s. s.\\nOvxdo), oirraCw, ovxdaxo), OY THMI, to hit, to wound (R. ovra,) fut.\\novrdao) and ovxqGo), (fee. R. from ovxdo), infin. ovxd/btivav,\\nHorn, for ovxdvau.\\nOqtlho, o plo), oqihcrxdvo), to owe viz. money, punishment, i. e. fo 6e\\nguilty (1 R. bqiuXi and oqpAf, 2 6q eX,) f. bquXijGo) and\\nb(p).riGo), fec. R. from bqniXto) and oqXto) 2 aor. w^f Aov,\\nused only in the expression of a wish thus, q tXov,\\nthat I, titf wquhq, that thou, (fee.\\noqihaxdvo), to forfeit (1 R. oy^.f, 2 6qpA,) f. bqiXtjGo), p. oxphjy.a, 2 aor.\\naipXov.\\nn.\\nfJalo), to strike (R. ttcu, and Ttcut,) f. naiaoi and ttcutjgo) the remain-\\ning tenses are from the root ?rat.\\nnda/oi, to suffer (1 R. mvQ-, seldom naQ-t, 2 7ra#, 3 novQ-,) fut. m.\\nTZtiffo/Mu, 6, 18 2 perf. ninovQ-a; both from J1ENQJI\\n2 aor. Unad-ov, also fut. na iJGo), (fee. R. from IJAQE Sl.\\nIJaxiofiav, to taste, to eat (R. yra, from JJA Jl,) 1 aor. ina.adfii]v, p. p.\\n7T\u00c2\u00a37ra(T^at.\\nTUggo), to digest (R. 7Tf7T,) f. nhftoi, fec. R. from ninxo), s. s.\\nILtxavvvo), mxdvvvfjn, to expand (R. ;t\u00c2\u00a3T\u00c2\u00ab,) f. 7rfTcto R. from rnxdo),\\nexc. p. p. ninxa^ai, which is from the syncopated form\\nnrdo). Other forms are rnxvaw and Ttlxvrj/xi, s. s.\\nHixofiai, nixa t uai, nixdonai, to fly (R. nexa,) f. TCtr^aouat, (fee. R.\\nfrom nixdo(.iav 2 aor. etcxtjv from inr^fib also p. p. 7Tf-\\nnoxrifiav from n ox do n at,) by syncope tTTixoiitjv becomes\\ninxonr t v and so of other tenses.\\nTItcpvov. See g Evo).\\nritjaao), nrjyvvo), nryvv^u, to fasten (1 R. ^rt/^, 2 7Tay, 3 Tr;/; f. 777/ito,\\n(fee. R. from IJUTJI) 2 perf. ntnqya, 2 a. pass. indyrp\\nJlvlvdo), 7rttv?jiut to approach same signification as rnXd^o), from\\nwhich the other tenses are taken.\\nTlmnXdvoi and ni^nXri^i,, to fill (R. ]1AA, whence nlftnXiifttf) i nXr r\\nao), (fee. R. from TlAA Sl TzXij w. When, in composi-\\ntion, ju comes before the initial n in this word, it is omit-\\nted before nX as, ifMijtXrjfii so also in\\nU m7tor\\\\^i, to burn (R. noa,) f. npt jGo), (fee. R. from JJPA Jl n(jt,0 i\\nJlivo), to drink (R. no and m,) iut. 7io Go), (fee. R. from IlO Sl 2 aor.\\ne7nov from tt/w, Th. imperat. commonly 711^, sometimes\\nn a fut. m. nio/uat, probably the present used in the fix-", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183\\nture sense or by elision of r for 7iLaof.iat,; movpcu is\\nalso found. From this theme also comes\\nYImLgy.m, to cause to drink (R. nt,,) f. niao), a. R. from nio).\\nIhit^da/.o), to sell (R. 7iQ x, from JIPA Jl.) The forms in use are ni-\\nnQti/.a, ninqtifiai, inqdQ-riv, 7i\u00c2\u00a37tQaao[A(xv. The future\\nand aorist active are wanting.\\nJJinro), Attic and poetic nlrvo), to fall (1 R. ntr and nro), 2 m a,\\nfrom IJE2EJI,) f. niao), 1 a. emaa, from the ancient\\nJlE TJl; and 7rr\u00c2\u00ab r\u00c2\u00ab, p. nircTory.a, from JlTO Jl; 2 aor.\\nintaov, f. m. maov^av, as if from IIE2EJI.\\nnXdto), to lead astray (1 R. nXctyy, 2 nXay,) f. 7rAay|\u00c2\u00ab, c. R. from\\nnXdyyo) 2 aor. ETrAayov.\\nID.ijaao), to strike (1 R. Tr^/y/, 2 TrA^y for nXay,) f. n)J\\\\\\\\u), fcc. R. exc.\\n2 aor. p. inXtjytjv compounds regular throughout.\\nIJPTAMAJ, to buy of which there is in use only 2 aor. inQid/uqv, as\\nan aorist to uviouai.\\nJJvvd-dvofA,av, to learn by inquiry (1 R. nzvQ-, 2 nvd;) f. TZiwofxcu, e.\\nR. from poetic mvQ-o^ai, 2 aor. m. i7iv 6jii7]v, perf. pass.\\nP.\\nPe Cw, tydo), EPrSl, to do (1 R. and igy, 3 o^y from 2 ^PP,) fut.\\n^e|o and eq1~o), c. R. 2 perf. eogya.\\nr P\u00c2\u00a3o), to flow (R. $ev and Qi f,) f. yevao) and yvrjao), p. iqqvqxa, fec. R.\\nfrom \u00c2\u00a3i/ew, 2 aor. pass, bq^vijv.\\nPijfVWi, qqyw/u, tr. to break (1 R. y/yy, 2 \u00c2\u00a3ay, 3 yo irreg.) f. ffim,\\nfec. R. from ^qaau) (i. e. PHTJl), s. s. 2 perf. e^wj/a,\\nwith intrans. signification, I am torn in pieces. 2 a. pass.\\ni^qdytjv.\\nr Po)vvvo), Qwvvvfii, to strengthen (R. $o,) f. \u00c2\u00a7w(7\u00c2\u00ab, fec. R. from PO Sl.\\n2.\\n2fiivvim, aftivvvjui,, to extinguish (R. a fie,) f. afiiao), fec. R. from x,3ew\\nalso p. Efffiqxa, 2 a. i afitjv, intr. fo #o owi from 2BHMI.\\nSevo), to move, impel reg. except that, like verbs beginning with q,\\nit commonly doubles x after the augment, and, in the\\n1 aor., omits r, the tense-sign thus, 1 aor. taatva, mid.\\niaamdfxriv, perf. pass, eaavficu, 235, Obs.\\nSy.tdavvvo), T/.tddvvuf.u, axi,dvdo), ffy.idvrj/tu, to scatter (R. o~/.i da,) fut.\\na/.tddao), Attic axtSo), c. R. from G/.iddo) p. p. iay.i-\\ndafffiai\\n2xiXXo). to dry up (R. o~/.t X and axaXe f. gxOm, R. also ay.aXrjo o), p.\\nEffxXtjxa (by syncope for iaxdXijxct), 1 aor. iaxrjXct., 2 aor.\\nfoxjbpr, from SKAHMI.\\n2udo), fffivj(i s fcc 251, 06s. 2, fo wjoe; (R. oy/a and ff/wy/,) f. G/urjo-o),\\nc. 1 aor. p. io-jutf/d-riv, from a/ui]/o), s. 6.\\nSnivSoi, to make a libation (R. X7rfr#,) f. andao), fec. R. 6, 18.\\n2rootvvvo), aToofovv/iu, to spread (R. crro^f,) f. aroqiao), c. R. from\\nZTOPEJl; also,", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "184 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\n^rqwvvim, atQMvvvfxv, to spread (R. gxqo,) f. gxqwgo), fec. R. from\\nZTPO tt, by metathesis and syncope from 2TOPESL.\\nSytlv. See e/co.\\nSmtfii, to save (R. go S or go),) f. go )Go), fec. R. exc. 1 aor. pass. \u00c2\u00a3oo )9-rjv\\ninstead of iao w qv and iaao^ rjV, from the older form\\ncraoo).\\nT.\\nTaXdo), to bear (R. xla,) f. xXtjgo), fcc. reg. from the syncopated form\\nxXdo), s. s. 2 aor. exhyv, from xXrjfiv.\\nTtfxvoi, to cut (1 R. xtp, also r^a and Xfirjy, 2 t\u00c2\u00ab/(, 3 to/*,) fut. xe/uo),\\nreg. also f. XfitjGo) and T^z/i-w, from x/udo and r/urjyo) 2\\naor. ETctfiov and txfxavov, sometimes ext/iov.\\nTioGopai, intr. to dry 2 aor. inf. pass. Tioijvai, and TfoayjAivat,, as if\\nfrom ixioGr^v.\\nTermor and extx/uov, a defective 2 aorist used in Homer, \u00c2\u00a3o ?n^ w^A,\\n\u00c2\u00a3o j?\u00c2\u00ab. i.\\nTUxo), to bear (1 R. t*k, 2 ft*, 3 to*,) f. t\u00c2\u00a3-w, fec. R. from TE KSl\\n2 aor. erfxov, 2 perf. xixo/.a.\\nTlvo), twvvo), tlvvvfxv, to expiate (R. xi f. xigw, fee. R. from rio), to\\nhonour.\\nTYtoccw, Xitqaivoy, xixori/iv, to bore (R. tocc,) f. xqSjgo), Ac. R. from\\nToactf.\\nTrtQwGY.w, to wound (R. too,) f. tocoo fcc. R. from tooo;.\\nTot/w, \u00c2\u00a3o nm (1 R. #Of/ and tfoa.u, 2 tfoa//.,) f. dqito), p. dtdoduy/.a,\\n244, -E^c. fec. R. from JPA MJl 2 aor. Moc^ov, f. to.\\nd^a/tor /toa.\\nTfjv/o), to consume (R. xovyo,) 1 aor. \u00c2\u00a3toi /ojo (fee.\\nTvyxdvo), to be, to obtain; (1 R. ti and th 2 tj f. xv/r jGo), fec.\\nR. from TYXE Sl 2 aor. exvyov, fut. m. t* vto/nat from\\nxiv/o). -Vote. This verb must be carefully distinguished\\nfrom the regular kindred verb xivyo), to prepare fut.\\nxtv \u00c2\u00a3o), fec. R.\\nY.\\nYTtiO /viouav, to promise (from vno and g/eco,) f. v7toGyr,Gonai, fec. R.\\nfrom c YU02XE0MAI. See\\nl dyo^av, pres. m. \u00c2\u00a3o ea\u00c2\u00a3 (R. g ay,) also the future for tpayov/icu, in the\\nK T. and later writers by the same anomaly as edojuat\\nand niofiav 2 aor. ecpayov. The rest of the tenses are\\nformed from eg Lo). See tJw.\\n*I dGM). See pw/ii.\\nI lvo), to kill (1 R. jp*r, 2 qpav,) 2 aor. niyvov and tmqvor, by redupl.\\nand syncope for eqxxvov part, niqvm accented on the\\npenult, p. p. niqictficu,, 3 f. p. 7Ttq rjo~o,iiat,. Hence gdvo\\nfrom 3d root q ov.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185\\nfpiqio, to bear used in the pres. and imperf.^l R. oi, ivex, and iviyx,\\n2 ivtyy., 3 ho/,) f. oiao) (from OUl), p. HNEXA, e. R.\\nfrom ENE KSL also 1 f. pass, oia riao^av 1 aor. act.\\nTJveyv.a for rjvtyta, from EJVETKJl, Attice commonly\\n?jvicy.a, c. 2 aor. r\\\\vt y/.ov, from the same 2 perf. r,voyu\\nfrom ElVE XSl.\\nI ij,ul, to say (R. q a,) f. qn^ao) 2 aor. ecp^v. See 309.\\nf l civo), to come before, to anticipate (R. y a,) f. q do~o) or yfrtjao),\\n(fee. R. from (pQA Jl, 2 aor. ey ijv from qi rj/ul.\\nP lvo), to corrupt, to fall (R. (p^,) f. qi iao), c. R. from qidlo), s. s.\\nother forms are fpdia o), q t,vio), and y i.vv o), used in\\nthe pres. and imperf.\\nfpQayvvo), qiqayvv/xu, to enclose (R. pqay,) f. p\u00c2\u00a3a\u00c2\u00a3a)j tc. R. from 0PA\\nrSl, same as qiqdaao), s. s.\\ntPv^w, to flee, to put to flight (R. gu f. gwfw, fcc. R. Other kindred\\nforms are yvyw and tpevyo), R. and it has the derivatives\\n(pv Qao) and qtv jftir.\\nfproo), to mix, to knead (R. qwq and qivqa,) f. quiqdao), Ion. qivQtjaoi old\\nfut. qjvqao) 1 a. eV^ca; p. p. niyvQfxai, and mqivqauav.\\nPvo), to beget (R. gn f. qivao), 1 aor. ecpvaa. But the perf. niyvy.a,\\nand 2 aor. eitpw, have a passive or intransitive significa-\\ntion, \u00c2\u00a3o begotten, to be, to become.\\nX.\\nXul,o), yavSdvo), to recede, to stand open, to contain (R. yaS,) fut. ydcro),\\nc. R. from XA ASl (s. s. with KA ZJl, whence yJy.ao-f.iai\\nor y.iy.ad fiai) 2 aor. eyatiov and y.e xadov, 2 perf. y.iyada\\nderivatives and varieties of forms are numerous.\\nXalvo), ydffy.o), yaa/.d^o), to gape or yawn (R. yaw,) f. yavo), c. R.\\nfrom yalvo), a derivative from XASl from which also\\ny.a^o; and ydZoi which see above.\\nXaloo), to rejoice; (1 R. yaiq, later yavqt, 2 yaq, B yt]Q,) f. yavqi^ffo),\\nc. R. 2 a. p. iydqr^v, perf. y.cydqyjuau and y.iyaQfiav.\\nXavddvo), \u00c2\u00a3o grasp (1 R. /ard, ^wd, 2 /ad, 3 yavd,) f. m. ytlaofxai,\\n\u00c2\u00a76, 18 2 aor. dyadov, 2 perf. y.iyavda.\\nXdo~y.o). See yaivw.\\nXioi, to pour out (R. ;m f. ytvao), fec. R. 1 aor. eyivaa and E/f\u00c2\u00ab (by\\nelision for tytvaa) hence imperative /eov, /f cctoj, fec.\\ninfinitive /tea also f. ;/\u00c2\u00a3a T 4, yn, mid. yiofiav.\\nXqdo). This verb has five different forms, with as many different sig-\\nnifications root of all, yqa.\\n1. yqdco, to give an oracular response regular.\\n2. y-lyorifiv, to lend like tcrr\\n3. %Qf], it is necessary partly like verbs in fit (see Impers.\\nVerbs, \u00c2\u00a7114).\\n4. yqdouai, to use; in the contracted tenses takes r\\\\ for a,\\n251, Obs. 2.\\n5. dnoyoi], it suffices pi. dnoyq^aw, inf. a7ro/^^v, cfcc.\\nXqo)vvvo), yqd)vvvuv, to colour (R. yqo,) f. yqwaw, c R. p. pass. *e-\\nyqoWfiai,.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "186 SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. \u00c2\u00a7118.119.\\nXo)vvvo), xdiVWfiv, to heap, to dam (R. /o,) f. /ojcoj, fec. R. from %6o),\\ns. s. perf. pass, Y.k%o)o~[\\\\ai.\\nSI.\\n3 J20io), to push (R. o) and lias the syllabic augment, through-\\nout thus, imp. io /Oovv, f. \u00c2\u00abffw and w^ow, regular from\\nboth 1 f. p. wo-frrjo-ofiai,.\\n\u00c2\u00a7118. INDECLINABLE WORDS OR PARTICLES.\\n318. The Indeclinable parts of speech, sometimes denominat-\\ned Particles, are those which suffer no change of form by inflec-\\ntion. They are the Adverb (which includes the Interjection),\\nthe Preposition, and the Conjunction.\\nTHE ADVERB.\\n319. Ail Adverb is a word joined to a verb,\\nan adjective, or another adverb, to modify it, or to\\ndenote some circumstance respecting it.\\nAdverbs may be considered in respect of Signification, Deri-\\nvation, and Comparison.\\n\u00c2\u00a7119.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS.\\n320. In respect of signification, adverbs may be arranged in\\nGreek as they are in Latin and other languages, under the fol-\\nlowing heads\\n1. Adverbs of Place comprehending those which signify,\\n1st. Rest in a place. These generally end in i, m, ov, oi,\\nov Wl as uyQO i, in the field.\\n2d. Motion from a place. These generally end in ev or e\\nas, aygo ev, from the field.\\n3d. Motion to a place. These generally end in ds, ge, \u00c2\u00a3e as,\\ndyoovde, to the field. 324-6.\\n4th. Motion through or by a place. These are generally femi-\\nnine adjectives in the dative singular, having odaj under-\\nstood as, alhj, by another way.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7119.\\nSIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS.\\n187\\n2. Adverbs of Time as, w, now rots, then nott, some-\\ntimes, c.\\n3. Adverbs of Quantity; ndaov, how much; nolv, much;\\nokiyovj a little, c.\\n4. Adverbs of Quality these end in cog sometimes in a and\\nv (which are properly datives of the first declension) also in\\nn, i, si, 8ov, 8qv, on, and J.\\n5. Adverbs of Manner (viz. of action or condition,) including\\nthose which express exhortation, affirmation, negation, granting,\\nforbidding, interrogation, doubt, c.\\n6. Adverbs of Relation or such as express circumstances of\\ncomparison, resemblance, order, assemblage, separation, c.\\n1. Adverbs of Exclamation; in other languages usually de-\\nnominated Interjections. (See 321, Obs. 2.)\\n321,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2OBSERVATIONS.\\nObs. 1. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning\\nwith a vowel, they are indefinites with tz, interrogatives\\nwith r, redditives, or responsives, as follows\\nINDEFINITE.\\ne a j which way.\\nV? by what means,\\nore, onoTt, rjvi/.a, when.\\no iv, oTto iv, whence,\\nov, or oQ-v, where.\\noaov, how much,\\nolov, after what manner,\\nboduq, how often.\\nINTERROGATIVE.\\nj which way?\\nI by what means\\nTtore, Ttrjvi/.a, when?\\nn:6friv, whence?\\n7iov, or 7t6 t, where?\\nnoaov, how much? [ner\\nno Xov, after what nian-\\nnoady.ic, how often\\nREDDITITE.\\nTJ[(h or j this way, or\\nTavTij, by this means.\\nTOTc, Trjvi/.a, rtjvt-\\ny.avra, then,\\nro ev, thence.\\nrodv, there.\\ntogov, so much. [ner.\\nroTov, after that man-\\nroadxic, so often.\\nObs. 2. Under adverbs in Greek are classed those particles of\\nexclamation which express some sudden emotion of the mind, and\\nare, in the grammars of most other languages, denominated In-\\nterjections. The most common of these are the following, which\\nexpress\\nRejoicing as, Iov, ico. Condemning as, oo, qpev.\\nGrieving as, lov, co, and co. Admiring as, co, fia{iai, nanai.\\nLaughing as, a, a. Deriding; as, iov, co, o.\\nBewailing as, at, hi, Ico, ororoT. Calling as, co.\\nWishing as, ei, ei s. Unjoining silence as, i], r t\\nRejecting as, anaye. Threatening as, ovai.\\nPraising; as, eta, evye. Raging; as, svoT.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "188 FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 120.\\n\u00c2\u00a7120. THE FORMATION AND DERIVATION OF\\nADVERBS.\\n322. A few adverbs in Greek are primitives as, vvv, now\\n^a\\\\iai, on the ground %tJeg, yesterday.\\nBut the greater part are derivatives, and are of two classes.\\n323. I. The first class of derivatives consists of such words as\\nare not strictly speaking adverbs, but are so denominated from\\nbeing sometimes used in an adverbial sense, either by virtue of\\ntheir signification, or by ellipsis for an adverbial phrase of these\\nthe following are examples\\n1. The accusative of neuter adjectives as, nocorov, to tiqco-\\nrov nocoza, ra nqcora, first ra pdliora, chiefiy 6\u00c2\u00a3v,\\nsharply.\\n2. The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns as,\\nGen. 6fiov, together from 6fiog, united.\\novdapov, never from ovdctfiog, no one.\\nDat. xvxXop, around (i. e. in a circle) from y.vxlog, a circle.\\nrdyei, swiftly, with swiftness from rd%og, swiftness.\\nAce. cigpjv and doydg (sup. Kara), from the beginning\\nfrom clqii i, the beginning.\\ndixnv, as, like from dixn, manner.\\n3. Verbs are sometimes used as adverbs thus,\\nThe imperative as, aye, i i, i de, c.\\nThe 2d aorist active; as, ocpalov, coqeXov from dcpeiXco.\\nThe present optative of dpi; viz. step.\\nObs. 1. To these may be added\\n1st. Nouns compounded with prepositions as, ix7to8c6r,\\nout of the way.\\n2d. Prepositions united together as, naow, abroad.\\n3d. Prepositions joined with adverbs as, en at a, then.\\n324. II. The second class of derivatives consists of such\\nwords as have undergone a change of form, and are used only in\\nan adverbial sense. These are so numerous and varied in form\\nand derivation, that a perfect classification cannot be given. The\\nfollowing, as being the most important, may be noticed viz.\\n1. Adverbs in cog, express a circumstance of quality or man-\\nner, and are for the most part formed from adjectives by chang-\\ning og of the nominative or genitive into cog; as, cpilcog from qpt-\\nXog dcocpQovcog from ecoyqeov, gen. ccocpoorog.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "121. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 189\\n2. Adverbs in t, or et, express a circumstance of manner, and\\nare generally formed from nouns as, avaifiei, without bloodshed\\navTO%8iQi, with one s own hand.\\n3. Adverbs in zi and rei are formed from the verbal adjec-\\ntives in xdg and rtog thus, ovo\\\\iolgzi, by name uvidgcoTi, with-\\nout sweating. So also those in dqv (the characteristic of the\\nverb being changed, when necessary, according to the laws of\\nEuphony, 6, 2) thus, from fiatog is formed (Iddrjv, by steps\\n(from f\u00c2\u00abw) from Gvlhj7zrog, Gvih jfidtjv, collectively from\\nXQVTzrog, y.Qv^d^v, secretly, c. Sometimes the termination ddqv\\nis added as, GTrooddrjv, scattered.\\n4. Adverbs in igzl come from verbs in l^ca, derived from\\nnouns signifying a nation, party, or class, and signify after the\\nmanner, language, c. of such nation, c. as, ED.TjVigzi, after\\nthe manner of the Greeks avOQanodiaii, after the manner of\\nmen.\\n5. Adverbs in oov and rfiov are for the most part derived\\nfrom nouns, and relate chiefly to external form and character\\nas, dyehjdov, in herds fiozovdov, resembling grains.\\nNote. If derived from verbal adjectives, they agree in signification\\nwith those in dqv as, avaq.a.vdov, openly.\\n6. Adverbs denoting certain relations of place, are formed by\\nthe addition of certain syllables to the words from which they\\nare derived viz. In a place is denoted by the terminations xfr,\\njt, ov, 7], oi, yov, and A fi] from a place, by -dsv or e and to a\\nplace, by de, gb, and \u00c2\u00a3e.\\n325. Exc. Adverbs of place, derived from prepositions, ex-\\npress the relations of in a place and to a place by the termina-\\ntion w thus,\\nIn a place. To a place. From a place.\\narm, above, avco, upwards. avco{rsv,from above (from dvd).\\nxdza, below, y.dzco, downwards. xdtcQ ev, from below y.ard).\\n326.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7121. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.\\n1. Adverbs derived from adjectives compared by regog and\\ntatog, are compared by changing og of these terminations into\\ncog as,\\nGoqimg Goycoreocog Gocpcozdtcog from cocpog\\n2. Adverbs derived from adjectives, compared by icov and", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "190 INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. 122.\\nlaxog, commonly take the neuter singular of the comparative,\\nand the neuter plural of the superlative for their comparative and\\nsuperlative thus,\\naiayocog diayiov aiG /iGta from ala /Qog\\nNote 1. This mode of comparison is also used, though more rarely,\\nfor those derived from adjectives compared by rtoo and raro as,\\naotfb)^ aoqidniQov aotpdnaxa\\nNote 2. The accusative neuter of adjectives, both singular and plu-\\nral, is sometimes used adverbially in all the degrees. To the superla-\\ntive degree, the article is frequently prefixed as, to nltlarov (sup.\\nnard).\\n3. Adverbs in oo, formed from prepositions, are compared by\\nadding T8Q(o and zdzco as, avco, dvcoze ooo, dvcozdzco. So also\\nprepositions in the sense of adverbs as, dno, dawTa aco.\\nNote. Some other adverbs imitate this mode of comparison; as,\\niyyvq, iyyvriqo), iyyvrdro); yet as often otherwise; thus, comparative\\niyyvriQov, and eyyvov, superlative tyyiaxa.\\n122. INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES.\\n327. Certain particles, never used by themselves, but pre-\\nfixed to words by composition, affect the signification of the\\nwords with which they are compounded, as follows\\n1. The particle d (which becomes dv before a vowel) has\\nthree different significations\\n1st. It marks privation (from dvsv, without) as, dvvSQog,\\nivithout water.\\n2d. It denotes increase (from dyav, much) as, d^vXog,\\nmuch wooded.\\n3d. It denotes union (from dpa, together) as, dloyog, a\\nconsort.\\n2. J^qi, BQt, fiov, @qT, dd, fa, Id, ti, and sometimes vl\\\\ and vd 9\\nincrease the signification as, d/jlog, manifest doidnlog, very\\nmanifest. fcc.\\n3. Ni) and vi generally express privation or negation; as,\\nvtjTzwg, an infant, from Vi] and tTzco, I speak but\\nExc. Ni j sometimes increases the signification as, vfyvzog,\\nthat flows in a full streamy from vtj and %va).\\n4. Avg expresses difficulty, trouble, or misfortune; as, dva-\\npsvfjg, malevolent dvazvyfco, I am unhappy.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "124. PREPOSITIONS. 191\\nNote. The contrary of dvq is iv (which is also found by itself). It\\nsignifies well or with facility as, tv/iiirfq, benevolent; ivrvyia), I am\\nhappy.\\n\u00c2\u00a7123. THE PREPOSITIONS.\\n328. A Preposition is a word which shows\\nthe relation between a noun or pronoun following\\nit, and some other word in the sentence.\\n1. The primary use of prepositions seems to have been, to in-\\ndicate the relation of one thing to another in respect of place.\\nFrom this, by a natural and easy analogy, they are used to ex-\\npress similar relations in respect of time.\\n2. From their primary and more common use, to express\\ncertain relations of place and time, they are also used by analogy\\nand figure, to express various other connections and relations\\namong objects, in all of which, however, the primary and original\\nuse of the word may easily be traced.\\n3. All prepositions ending with a vowel, except dficpi, Ttsgi,\\nand 7tqo, reject the final vowel when compounded with, or stand-\\ning before, a word beginning with a vowel dfxqii generally re-\\ntains i, but there are many exceptions. It is always rejected be-\\nfore the augment e. TIqo before e sometimes combines with it\\nby contraction; thus, nqo iqyov becomes Tzoovoyov. 222, Obs. 2.\\n4. There are eighteen prepositions, properly so called, in the\\nGreek language of these\\nFour govern the Genitive only, viz. Ami, dno, iv, or f\u00c2\u00a3, nqo.\\nTwo govern the Dative only, Ev, gvv.\\nTwo govern the Accusative only, Elg or ig, and dvd.\\nFour govern the Gen. and Ace. did, y.ard, [xerd, vniq.\\nSix govern the Gen., Dat., Ace. Ji\\\\i^i, nsqi, ini, nana,\\nnobg, and vno.\\n329.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 124. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PREPOSITIONS.\\n1. jinqi, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification round, round about, on both sides.\\nWrrn the Genitive round, round about at the same time proceed-\\ning or originating from; of or concerning, upon, in addition to, for the\\nsake of, for the love of.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "192 PREPOSITIONS. 124.\\nWith the Dative; round, with the idea of rest and continuance of\\nor concerning, among, after or near, upon, for, i. e. in defence of; for, i. e.\\non account of; with.\\nWith the Accusative round, with the idea of tendency or approxi-\\nmation to near, of, concerning, or belonging to. See also 3 34, 13.\\nIn Composition about, round about.\\n2. Jiva, the Accusative. In poetry, sometimes the Dative.\\nPrimary Signification; motion upwards, from below to above, op-\\nposed to y.axd.\\nWith the Accusative; over, up along, through, during, among, with,\\nin in computation, up viz. from a point below.\\nWith the Dative upon, on, in, with the idea of elevation and rest.\\nIn Composition motion upwards, repetition, increase, back again.\\n3. jivti, the Genitive.\\nPrimart Meaning; in front of, in a state of rest; set over against,\\ni. e. by way of exchange, comparison, equivalence, or preference. Hence,\\nWith the Genitive for, i. e. equivalent before, in preference in-\\nstead of against, equal to, for, in consideration of; upon.\\nIn Composition; equality, substitution, reciprocity, comparison, op-\\nposition.\\n4. Anb, the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification; removal from, viz. from contact with; oppo-\\nsite of TCQOq.\\nWith the Genitive from, on, after (from the time of), against, by\\nmeans of, with, upon, of, i. e. proceeding from on account of, for, of\\ni. e. belonging to; e. g. ol ano, those belonging to, viz. the Council, Ple-\\nbeians, Stoics, c.\\nIn Composition; departure, separation, negation, privation, augmen-\\ntation.\\n5. /Iia, the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification through, motion through.\\nWith the Genitive 1. place, through 2. time, through, through-\\nout, during with regard to the space or time passed through, at, in\\nwith numerals, every; as, dm nivrt, every five 3. cause, by means of\\nwith, viz. as an instrument.\\nWith the Accusative; by, by means of during as the end, occasion,\\nor cause for, on account of e. g. navra avrov iyivfro, all things were\\nmade by him navra dv avxbv iyivtrn, all things were made for him.\\nIn Composition separation, division, arrangement, passage through,\\nreciprocation, opposition, or competition, perseverance.\\n6. Elg or ig, the Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification to, into motion from without to within; the\\nopposite of ix.\\nWith the Accusative; to, into, toward, against, among, before, con-\\ncerning, in respect of in, till, until, for with numerals, about, up to.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "124. PREPOSITIONS. 193\\nIt forms distributives; as, ilq zva, one by one it is used adverbially,\\ntlq anai, once ilq dlq, twice.\\nIn Composition into.\\nNote. When dq or iq stands before a genitive, an accusative is un-\\nderstood.\\nV. \u00c2\u00a3k (before a vowel 3 E%), the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification from, out, out of, motion from within to\\nwithout opposite of eiq.\\nWith the Genitive it denotes motion from, causation, change of state,\\nrendered of, i. e. made of; of, viz. the number out of, by, with, accord-\\ning to, since.\\nIn Composition out of, it denotes division or separation, pre-emi-\\nnence, completion or success, intensity.\\n8. Ev, the Dative.\\nPrimary Signification; in, with the idea of rest and being con-\\ntained within.\\nWith the Dative within, during, among, before, in the power of by,\\nviz. by means of; in the case of, with, into.\\nIn Composition in or among.\\n9. 3 Em, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification on or upon, with motion or rest.\\nWith the Genitive on, upon, at, in, or near during, through, under,\\nin the time of; after, with, by.\\nWith the Dative upon, i. e. close and continuing upon, in the power\\nof, i. e. resting upon on condition, during, besides, i. e. in addition to\\nfor, i. e. in order to after, toith, against, along, among, at, by, over\\nviz. in authority.\\nWith the Accusative on or upon, with the idea of tendency or ap-\\nproach towards to, towards, under, so as to be dependent upon in,\\nover, during, against; viz. motion towards with hostile intent.\\nIn Composition addition, increase, reciprocity, succession.\\n10. Kara, the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification direction from above to below, down along\\n(parallel); down to, upon, or at (perpendicular); down through (trans-\\nverse) opposite of avd.\\nWith the Genitive down from, viz. originating or proceeding down\\nfrom, directed down by; along, on, through, downwards; under, upon,\\nat, as a mark; before, respecting, by, viz. in swearing; against, among.\\nWith the Accusative down (not from, but) parallel to, down along,\\nor to through, according to, in respect of; in, on, by, near to, at, op-\\nposite, or before, during. Adverbially, y.ara /lil/.qov, by degrees.\\nIn Composition down, opposition, intensity.\\n11. l\\\\hzu, the Genitive, Dative (with the Poets), or the Accusa-\\ntive.\\nPrimary Signification with, together with, not as a part of, or one\\nwith expressing a connection less close than avv.\\n9", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "194 PREPOSITIONS. 124.\\nWith the Genitive with, together with, by means of, viz. as con-\\nnected with and depending upon according to, and, i. e. in conjunction\\nwith, as an agent, or object; with, i. e. against; with, i. e. for, on the side\\nof; among.\\nWith the Accusative after, i. e. following close or near to, in re-\\nspect to space or time next to, next after, to, towards, for, or after, with\\na view to bring between, in, among.\\nWith the Dative by the poets only, in, with, among.\\nIn Composition; participation, change, reciprocity.\\n12. Uaqa, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification, by the side of; it denotes motion from, close\\nto, or towards an object, according to the case with which it is joined.\\nWith the Genitive from, i. e. from beside of, proceeding from\\nby, with, near, from among, above, or in comparison with.\\nWith the Dative at, with, near, among, with the idea of continu-\\nance.\\nWith the Accusative; to, beyond, beside, towards, i. e. to the side of;\\nthrough along, against, in comparison with.\\nIn Composition it retains its general meaning also defect.\\n13. IIeqi, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification round, round about, nearly the same with\\nautpi, but in a sense less close: ajucpl means on both sides; Tifqi, on all\\nsides.\\nWrm the Genitive round, round about, with the idea of origin\\nor cause about, i. e. of, or concerning with, for, viz. in defence of\\nabove or before, denoting pre-eminence or superiority.\\nWith the Dative round, round about, with rest or continuance\\nfor, i. e. concerning, on account of; from.\\nWith the Accusative round, or about, with tendency or approach\\nto concerning or towards, about, i. e. near to, advancing towards about,\\ni. e. with regard to in, of against.\\nIn Composition round about, also denoting increase, abundance.\\n14. 77(00, the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification before, in respect of place or time, but with-\\nout the idea of opposition or comparison which belongs to dvri.\\nWith the Genitive; before, in the presence of; at the command of\\nthrough, denoting cause or origin; for, in defence of; for, for the ad-\\nvantage of; before, denoting preference.\\nIn Composition; before; with verbs of motion, forth, forward.\\n15. IlQog, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification transition or passage, the relative direction\\nbeina; indicated by the case.\\nWith the Genitive; from, i. e. transition from; from, by, denoting\\nthe agent; belonging to or the property of of, proceeding from; on\\nthe side of: by, in oaths and supplications; before, to, so as to be pro-\\ntected by.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "124. PKEPOSITIONS. 195\\nWith the Dative close to, near, and continuing besides, in addition\\nto, before, occupied or busy with.\\nWith the Accusative to or towards, against, according to, in conse-\\nquence of, on account of, with, in comparison of.\\nIn Composition motion to, addition, against, close to.\\n16. \u00c2\u00a3vv, the Dative.\\nPbimary Signification with, closely connected with another, so as\\nin some sense to form one with it see ucTu.\\nWith the Dative with, together with, according to, besides, with the\\nassistance of, at, during, to, on the side of\\nIn Composition concurrence in action, association, combination, col-\\nlection, completion or fulfilment, collision, intensity.\\n17. c T7zsq, the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification over or above, viz. in respect of place, and\\nhence figuratively, over, in respect of power, authority, protection.\\nWith the Genitive above, in a state of rest over, in a state of mo-\\ntion for, i. e. in defence of for, viz. in the place of for, on account\\nof; by, for the sake of, of, concerning, in order to.\\nWith the Accusative over beyond, above or beyond, above, i. e. more\\nthan against.\\nIn Composition it retains its primary signification, also sometimes\\nit augments.\\n1 8. TttSj the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification; lender, modified by its case.\\nWith the Genitive; place: from below, from under, out of; fig.\\nunder, generally with the idea of protection, subjection, or the object of\\ninfluence proceeding from also, by, with, i. e. under the direction of;\\nby means of, for, i. e. under the influence of.\\nWith the Dative simply under, completely under and continuing\\nWith the Accusative under, viz. moving and proceeding under or\\ncoming up to the under part of a thing to, behind, about, on the eve of.\\nI\\\\ Composition; it retains its primary signification. Sometimes it\\ndenotes diminution, privacy, beginning.\\n330. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The preposition, as its name imports, usually stands before the\\nword which it governs. When it comes after it, as it sometimes does,\\nthis is indicated by the change of the accent from the last syllable to\\nthe first.\\n2. In composition, with a word beginning with a vowel, and gen-\\nerally when standing before such a word, the final vowel of the prepo-\\nsition is dropped, and, if the next preceding letter be a consonant, it is\\nsubject to the changes required by the laws of euphony thus, an.6\\nictvrov must be written ay iavrov. Thyi, however, never drops its\\nfinal vowel, and in never changes its final letter except before a vowel,\\nwhen it is changed into It.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "196 CONJUNCTIONS. 125.\\n3. The preposition alone, with the accent thrown back to the first\\nsyllable, is sometimes used for certain compounds, of which it forms a\\npart; thus, evo is used for tvton, it is lawful niou for mo iiari,, it is\\nsuperfluous oiva for avao~rtj9-i arise; 7101,0a for Tt QiGTt,, he is present.\\n\u00c2\u00a7125. THE CONJUNCTIONS.\\n331. A Conjunction is a word winch con-\\nnects words or sentences.\\n332. Conjunctions, according to their different meanings,\\nare divided into different classes, of which the following may be\\nnoticed; viz.\\n1. Connective as, xai, rs, and in poetry, ?)8s i8s f ?)^sv, and\\nxal 8s, also, c.\\n2. Disjunctive as, ?j, ipoi in poetry, ys and sometimes ijyovv,\\nt]7T0v, or.\\n3. Concessive; as, y.av, xainsQ, el xai, although.\\n4. Adversative as, alia, 8s, azaq, but ys, at least \\\\isv, uX-\\nXa \\\\isv, but, truly, indeed \\\\isvroi, yet, c.\\n5. Causal, which assign a reason for something previously\\nsaid; as,ydg,for; ha, on, oTtojg, ocpga, that cag,\\nroWf, that, so that; ovvsxa (in poetry), because\\nsin eg, since indeed insi, since, after that.\\n6. Conclusive, or such as are used in drawing a conclusion, or\\ninference from something previously said as,\\naga, ovv, therefore 816, 8(07Tsq, wherefore 8)\\\\,\\nthen, truly toivvv, vv or vvv, therefore roiya-\\nqovv (emphatic), wherefore ovxovv, not there-\\nfore.\\n1. Conditional as, si, av, lav, yv, in poetry, as or v.iv, at, ai xs,\\nif; t i7ZEQ, if indeed.\\n8. Expletive as, ys, tzs q, toi, gd, {^sv, vv, nov, nco, ag, c.\\nADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES.\\nThe following remarks on the signification and use of certain\\nadverbial and conjunctive particles, will be useful for reference.\\nFor more ample information on this subject, the advanced stu-\\ndent is referred to the work of Hoogeveen on the Greek Par-\\nticles, an abridged translation of which has been published by\\nthe Kev. John Seager, B. A.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "125. CONJUNCTIONS. 197\\n333. JlAAA.\\n1. AXXd is adversative, and commonly answers to the English but.\\nIt is sometimes nsed elliptically, to indicate confidence or readiness, and\\nmay be rendered well, then; therefore. Thus, dXX* iv Xa v, on, ita,\\nrov ovToiq, Well, then, know that this will be so, i. e. ova oy.vtjao), dXX\\\\\\nc. I will not be unwilling, but, on the contrary, know that this will be so.\\n2. AXXd ydo. Thus combined ydq introduces a reason for the op-\\nposition expressed by dXXd as, dXXd ydy Kqiovxa Xevaao), navaoi rovq\\nTHxQiGTMxaq, Xoyovq, But will stop the present discourse, for I see Creon\\ncoming. Sometimes, however, the reference is more latent, and a clause\\nis to be supplied from what precedes thus, Plato, dXXd ydq iv ciSov\\nSiy.^v SwGo^ev, where there must be supplied from the preceding sen-\\ntence, ov/. aQrifxiov dnaXXd%ouev, But we shall not escape unpunished, for\\nwe shall render satisfaction in Hades. Sometimes the reference is to a\\nsucceeding clause, and sometimes to some general remark which the\\nconnection and sense of the passage will readily suggest, such as, But\\nthis is not surprising, for But this is not impossible, for fec.\\n3. AXXd ye restricts with emphasis that which is general to some-\\nthing more special as, dXX ovy. dv dyqoi/Mq ye, oXo/^au, XoidoQ-rjatbav.\\nBut at least they would not, I think, revile us in a rude manner.\\n4. AXX ovv ye. When these particles are combined, they usually\\nintimate that along with the opposition expressed by dXXd, a conse-\\nquence of what has preceded is also expressed; thus, dXX ovv rovtov\\nye xbv xqovov rjxxov dydjjq e co/ioct. Yet I will for this reason now at\\nleast be less disagreeable.\\n5. ^AXXd joined with ovSk strengthens the negative as, aXX ov6e\\n7iei(ido~0[A.ab, Nay, I will not even try. In such sentences ov uovov ov may\\nbe supplied, equivalent to, I will not only not do it, but I will not even\\ntry.\\n6. *AXXd is strengthened by adding to/; as, uXX ydv xov, ijv avXot;\\nnaor^, Why, that is a pleasant thing enough, if, o.\\n334.\u00e2\u0080\u0094JIIV (Poet. KE or KEN).\\nv Av (Poetice y.e or xiv) according to Professor Dunbar, is derived from\\ndo), the same as ido), to give, grant, or allow and that the primary\\nmeaning of the particle thus derived is granted or allowed, which can be\\nreadily traced in all the variety of expression in which it is employed.\\nThis particle is used\\n1. In the sense of idv, if, of which, in this sense, it is probably only\\nan abbreviated form. Thus used, it expresses a condition, and may be-\\ngin a sentence as, dv ebq d-iXr\\\\, if [granted) God will. In all its other\\napplications dv can stand only after other words in its clause.\\n2. It is used with indefinites, adding to them the force of the Latin\\n-eunque, -soever as, oaxiq dv, whoever, or whosoever.\\n3. It is used most generally to limit the verb to which it belongs,\\nand partly or entirely takes from that verb its direct affirmative power.\\nWith the indicative imperfect, pluperfect, and aorists, it is rendered\\nby should, would should have, woidd have, c. 170, 4, and Obs. 1\\nand also to express ability, and rendered by could or could have. It is\\nsometimes joined to the future, and seems to soften the decisiveness of", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "198 CONJUNCTIONS. 125.\\nthe statement as, 6 6e xav -/.t/olMatTat, ov y.w IvMficu, and he will per-\\nhaps be angry to whom I go. It is but very seldom found with the in-\\ndicative present a few instances, however, have been produced from\\nAristophanes and Plutus.\\nWith the subjunctive it is never joined, unless accompanied with cer-\\ntain other words, such as oq, baoq, oanq, oTtoxtooq, ov, ottov, iva, c.\\nfcc. except when used in the sense of lav as above, 334-1.\\nIt is used with the optative of all the tenses except the future, as in\\n172, Obs. 6, II. 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th.\\nWith the infinitive and participles it gives a contingent significa-\\ntion (commonly in the future), which may be resolved by changing the\\nverb or participle into the optative with av as, oiovtav avaixdyjG ai,\\ndv, they think that they could retrieve themselves ralla o~io)7to), no /.X dv\\nt/oiv dntZv, I omit the rest, though I have much to say.\\n4. It is used in positive statements with different moods, to give an\\nexpression of hesitation and modesty to the assertion as, dtq dv not,\\ndoxfi, as it seems (would seem) to me ov% civ olda, I (should) hardly\\nknow.\\n5. Av is frequently repeated, either on account of its standing at a\\ngreat distance from the verb, or, to give emphasis to the condition sug-\\ngested by it ardq civ Xtyov/nb av, having stationed myself\\nwould say nou; dh y civ KaXiaq Xiyot,q av how can you, how\\ncan you say, fcc. v\\n6. It is sometimes used, to intimate that the verb in the preceding\\nclause is to be repeated; as, ei drj tw croqxj jTtooq (pa irjv ilvai, rovxo) av\\n(sc. (palr]v hivai aoipMn^oq), if I thought to be more wise in any thing, it\\nWOULD BE IN THIS.\\n335.\u00e2\u0080\u0094APA\u00e2\u0080\u0094APA.\\n1. Aoa, denoting inference or conclusion, always stands after some\\nword in its clause its proper signification is of course, in the na-\\nture of things and is commonly rendered therefore, consequently it is\\nused in the successive steps of a train of reasoning as, If there are\\naltars there are also gods dXld jutjv elai {3o)[.ioi ualv doa y.ai ioi,\\nBut there certainly are altars therefore there are gods too. It is used\\nin making a transition to what follows in the order of time or events, or\\nin the progress of thought. With tl or idv it expresses conjecture as,\\nzi doa dvvovrat,, if indeed (i. e. in the course of things) they can. Some-\\ntimes it serves for an emphatic asseveration as if founded on an infer-\\nence.\\n2. The adverb doa is different from this, and is always placed first\\nin a clause or sentence. It is merely an interrogative particle like the\\nLatin num or utrum as, doa /.axd8t]lov o fiovXo,uat, liynv Is, then,\\nwhat I wish to say evident When a negative answer is expected it\\nhas generally the particle /t^ annexed. The Latin nonne is expressed\\nby ay ov, and sometimes by doa alone.\\n336.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 rA p.\\n1. rdo,for, always follows other words like the Latin cnim, which\\nit resembles in signification, and for which at the beginning of a sen-\\ntence xal yaQ, like the Latin etenim, is often used. Its use is to assign\\na reason for what is said. Very often, however, that of which it assigns", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "125. CONJUNCTIONS. 199\\nthe cause is merely implied or hinted at, and must be supplied, to show\\nthe force of ydq. It will frequently be found to refer to such expres-\\nsions understood; as, Yes. No, no wonder, I believe, I cannot, c, as,\\nfor example, in the answer so common in Plato, %axt,yaQ ovxw, Yes, or\\ncertainly, for so it is. Thus, Homer, Od. 10. 501, SI Kioy.rj, xlq ydo\\nxavxr\\\\v 6S6v -qytfiovtiHTtb; Oh Circe, (I cannot go thither,) fob, who will\\nguide me on this way From this interrogative use it came sometimes\\nto be used, merely to strengthen a question, like the Latin nam in quis-\\nnam.\\n2. In such expressions as v.al yuQ, dlld ydq, the former particle in-\\ndicates the omission of something of which ydo assigns a cause thus,\\ny.al ydo strictly translated means, and (no wonder, for and (it is na-\\ntural,) for and the like. For the rendering of alia ydo, see alia,\\n333-2.\\n337.\u00e2\u0080\u0094/^.\\nr i (enclitic) is a pai*ticle of limitation, and signifies at least, certainly,\\nhowever, indeed, and is used to single out an individual object from a\\nnumber; as, ii /atj olov /zigoq ye, if not the whole at least a part eyo)\\nye, I indeed, I at least. In most combinations it can be rendered into\\nEnglish only by giving greater emphasis to the word with which it is\\nconnected.\\n338.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 JE\\\\\\nThe particle Si, but, is used both to distinguish and oppose, and\\nalways stands after one or more words in a clause. It often serves,\\nhowever, merely to mark transition from one proposition to another\\nand, in general, every proposition which has no other conjunction at\\nits commencement, takes this Si, whether really opposed to the prece-\\nding or not. When so used, it may be rendered by and, for, or any\\nother word which the nature of the connection may require or it may\\noften remain untranslated. Its principal use, however, is in connection\\nwith fxiv, which see.\\n339.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 AH\\nAr\\\\, a particle of affirmation, signifies truly, really, without doubt.\\nIt is used in affirmative answers as, Sljlov Srj, it is certainly manifest.\\nIt is used ironically, especially after q and after relative and compar-\\native words it is usually emphatical. With nov joined to it {Sr\\\\no\\\\)), it\\nsignifies certainly, viz., and sometimes, perhaps. It differs from fjaqv and\\nyi, also affirmative words, in this, that 8r t strongly asserts a thing as\\nalready established: (.irjv goes on to press the assertion without relax-\\ning as to what has preceded while yi asserts with limitation, yielding\\nas to the past, or other things, but insisting upon this.\\n2. Jrj, from r t Stj, as an adverb, signifies now joined with vvv, this\\nvery moment as, vvv V}St] fxa/tjxiov, we must fight this very moment.\\nWith verbs in the preterite, it denotes just now. As a conjunction, it is\\nused, 1. In exhorting; as, liye Srj, come now, read; 2. In questions, it\\nindicates the earnestness of the speaker, and his desire of an immediate\\nanswer; as, xd nola Sr; xavxa what now are these? 3. In expressing\\nadmiration when joined with Ttoxe as, xi Sr t 7toxe xovxow, why now", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "200 CONJUNCTIONS. 125.\\nthese 4. In commencing a subject as, *SlSe Stj oy.o7ioj,uev avro, now let\\nus consider it in this way 5. In marking the successive stages of thought\\nas they rise one above another. In each of these, it signifies now truly,\\nuntil at the last it signifies finally.\\n340.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 KAT and Ttf.\\nKal and re have the same significations in reference to each other\\nas the Latin et and que. Both connect single ideas, and the entire parts\\nof a sentence. With the older poets, re is more common than in the\\nAttic prose writers, and it is commonly put not merely once betAveen\\nthe connected parts, but joined to each of them; as, nar^o olvS^mv re\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0d-tiav re, the father of both gods and men. When re precedes y.al in sep-\\narate clauses, the former signifies not only the latter, but also re y.al,\\nand also, connect more closely than simple y.al xal y.ai, both and;\\nas well as; aXXux; re xal, especially, i. e. (both in other respects) and\\nalso, particularly also.\\n341.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 MA and NH\\nMa and vt\\\\ are particles of obtestation, and always govern the ac-\\ncusative of the object; vt\\\\ is always affirmative; (ia, when alone, is\\nnegative, but is nevertheless attached both to affirmative and negative\\nobtestations as, val (ia J la, and ov (xa Ala.\\n342.-M.ElN and /IE!.\\nMiv and Si are two particles referring to each other they are used\\nto distinguish, and at the same time to connect, the different clauses of\\na sentence together. Thus used, (dv is generally placed in the first\\nclause of a sentence, and Si in each of the succeeding ones. Hence,\\nwhenever we find (iiv in the first member of a sentence, the thought\\nnecessarily turns to an opposite member with Si. Sometimes, however,\\nafter (dv the expected Si does not actually follow i. e. when the op-\\nposition is so clear that Si is not necessary to point it out, or when\\nsome other word, such as aXXd, ardo, c, supplies its place. In like\\nmanner Si is often used without being preceded by /.dv, referring to\\nsomething conceived in the mind but not expressed or, without such\\nreference, it is used, simply to connect the parts of a sentence less\\nclosely than by (dv Si, or other conjunctions. In opposition they are\\ncommonly rendered indeed but. See Si.\\nThe distributive use of (.dv and Si with the article, relative pronoun,\\nc. will be noticed 133, 3, 134, 19.\\n343.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 OtN and OfKOTN.\\n1. Ovv, wherefore, is used, 1. In drawing an ultimate conclusion\\nin the view of all that has been said before in this it differs from doa,\\nwhich is used in successive steps in the process of reasoning. 2. It com-\\nmences a chapter or paragraph, with some reference to what has pre-\\nceded. 3. It continues or resumes a subject, after a digression. 4. It\\nintroduces a transition to some new subject; and lastly, it has an affirm-\\native force, particularly in replies; as, ylyverai ovv oi Twg, it is certainly\\nso hence the compounds,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7125.\\nCONJUNCTIONS. 201\\n2. Ovxovv and uwv, for ur t ovv. The former is properly a negative\\ninference as, it is not therefore though sometimes it loses itsnega-\\ntive character, and denotes therefore now is used interrogatively,\\niC is it not therefore\\nsu.\u00e2\u0080\u0094nEP.\\nTIiq (enclitic) is nearly allied to yi, and is used to express the idea\\nwith more emphasis than it would have without it. This is indicated\\nin English merely by a greater emphasis of the word, or by the words\\nvery, ever, and the like. Joined with a participle, it is commonly ren-\\ndered although, how much so ever with a relative, it adds the force of\\nthe Latin cunque, or the English ever thus, anto, qxuecunque, whatever,\\n0G7Ttq, quicrunque, whoever, fcc. as, anto /.iyei,, whatever he does say;\\naya oq tciq zoiv, excellent though thou art fato el/ev,just as he was.\\n345.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 not.\\n1. JJov is a particle interrogative, of place, and signifies 1. where?\\n2. whither? As an enclitic it signifies motion to a place as, arrzido)\\nnor, I am hastening to some place, somewhither, and also indicates place\\nindefinitely, anywhere hence it is joined with adverbs of place as, lv.il\\ndi nor, somewhere there-abouts.\\n2. From the indefiniteness of its signification arises its conjectural\\nuse, to express a thing with a degree of uncertainty and cantion, ex-\\npressed in English by probably, perhaps, if I mistake not, fcc, and hence\\nis used in eliciting and asking consent as, o~ivot,o~ d nov /.at ai to? on,\\nd:c. You yourself, as icellasl, know, if I mistake not, or doubtless, that,\\nfcc, where an affirmative reply is evidently expected. Hence also its\\nuse as a diminutive, to qualify what might otherwise seem too positive\\nor peremptory. Thus used it may be rendered by pretty nearly, in my\\nopinion, perhaps, fce. This particle, though often used, is never redun-\\ndant; or dr t nov, for example, is, no indeed, as I think not truly, in my\\nopinion.\\n346.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 n z.\\n1. This particle with the circumflex is interrogative and signifies\\nhow as. tt ol \u00c2\u00ab;to? icrrl tovtov how can he but be worthy of this\\nJoined with yo\\\\(j they constitute an emphatic negative, 7iHk, ydo nou]G\u00c2\u00ab)\\nfor how shall I do it? i. e. I will not do it at all. So also y.ai noiq\\nGuoTto); I cannot be silent literally, and how am I to be silent?\\n2. As an enclitic 7rojt; signifies some how, in some degree, e. as, aJJuaq\\n7to)q, in some other way o)de timz, somehow thus tfce.\\n347.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 QZ.\\nThis particle is extensively employed, and with a great variety of\\nusage; as, 1. It is used for h-ct, to denote a purpose as, ox; StiJ-WfifV,\\nin order that we may shew 2. for art with the meaning of that; as,\\niiyovrfq exiZvoq, Ac., saying that he, c 3. More commonly it signi-\\nfies as, expressing similitude; as, or; dovloq, as a slave; He taught\\nthem uq ttoialav t/o)v, as one having authority. 4. With the acute\\naccent, and not before an enclitic, nor after a word on which it depends,\\n9*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "202 CONJUNCTIONS. 125.\\nit has the sense of oj twc, thus as, wq ilnwv, having spoken thus. 5. In\\nexclamations it has the sense of how as, wq 7f i.ia/.a,Q LZ,o,uiv, how happy\\nwe deem you hence its use with the optative in the sense of the Latin\\nutinam as, w? pu ocpt A Exto)q y.Tiivai, Would that Hector had slain\\nme literally, how Hector ought to have slain me 6. Before superlative\\nadjectives and adverbs, like oru, it strengthens the meaning as, o )q t\u00c2\u00ab-\\n/uara, as quickly as possible. Allied to this, is its power as a strength-\\nening particle, with the positive degree, in such expressions as, o q\\naktjO-oiq, truly, really. *7. It is used for the purpose of limiting proposi-\\ntions with the infinitive; as, w? dniiv, so to speak sludffcu, as far\\nas one may conjecture and also in the same sense it is used before\\nwhole clauses and propositions as, w? inl to no).v, for the most part\\n6 q 7Tobq to ueyt oq xTjq Ttoltioq, in proportion to the size of the city s 8.\\nAs a particle of time, it signifies when, sometimes while as, o)q dk ?j).0-f,\\nbut when he came. 9. With numerals it signifies about as, w? xoia rj\\nxixxaoa axddva, about three or four stadia. 10. With particles in the\\ngenitive absolute, and also in the dative or accusative, it is rendered as,\\nsince, because, inasmuch as, as if; and the participle is then rendered by\\nthe indicative as, o)q ravtijq xtjq yMQaq i/i Qo)xdx)]q ovaijq, because this\\nplace was the most secure. 11. It is often put by the Attics for the pre-\\nposition tlq, TtQoq, or i/ti as, ojc; t/ui, towards me o q xbv paavtta, to\\nthe king.\\nj^W\u00c2\u00b0 For the negative particles ov and jut}, with their combinations\\nand compounds, see 166.\\n348. Obs. Though it is, in many cases, difficult to give a distinct\\ntranslation of some of the Greek particles, or even always to feel their\\nforce, yet they ought never to be regarded as mere expletives. In all\\nlanguages there are particles which are often employed chiefly for the\\nsake of completeness, or in order to produce a well-sounding fulness,\\nyet never without their own peculiar sense aud though it is often dif-\\nficult to define what that sense is, yet every one feels that the expres-\\nsion is incomplete without them. So it is also in the Greek language.\\nThe full and original meaning of many of those particles has become\\npartially lost, and they now give to the discourse only a slight colour-\\ning which we cannot properly feel except after long acquaintance and\\npractice. For a more full elucidation of the force and use of these par-\\nticles, we refer the reader to the elaborate work of Hoogeveen on the\\nGreek Particles.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "126. SYNTAX. 203\\nPART III.\\n126. SYNTAX.\\n349. Syntax is that part of grammar which,\\ntreats of the proper arrangement and connection\\nof words in a sentence.\\n350. A Sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes\\ncomplete sense as, Man is mortal.\\n351. A Phrase is two or more words rightly put together,\\nbut not making complete sense as, In truth, in a word.\\n352. Sentences are of two kinds, Simple and Compound.\\n353. A Simple sentence contains only a single affirmation\\nas, Life is short.\\n354. A Compound sentence contains two or more simple\\nsentences connected together as, Life, lohich is short, should\\nbe well employed.\\n355. Every simple sentence consists of two parts, the subject\\nand the predicate.\\n356. The subject is that of which something is affirmed. It\\nis either in the nominative case before a finite verb, or in the\\nnominative or accusative before the infinitive.\\n357. The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject.\\nIt consists of two parts, the attribute and copula. A verb which\\nincludes both, is called an attributive verb as, John reads. A\\nverb which only connects the attribute expressed by another word,\\nwith the subject, is called a copulative verb as, John is reading.\\n358. Both subject and predicate may be attended by other\\nwords called adjuncts, which serve to restrict or modify their\\nmeaning as, Too eager a pursuit of wealth often ends in pov-\\nerty and misery?\\n359. When a compound sentence is so framed that the mean-\\ning is suspended till the whole is finished, it is called a period.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "204 PARTS OF SYNTAX. 127, 128.\\n360.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7127. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX.\\n1. In every sentence there must be a verb and a nominative,\\nor subject expressed or understood.\\n2. Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle,\\nmust have a substantive expressed or understood with which it\\nagrees.\\n3. Every relative must have an antecedent, or word to which\\nit refers, and with which it agrees.\\n4. Every subject nominative has its own verb expressed or\\nunderstood.\\n5. Every verb (except in the infinitive and participles) has its\\nown subject or nominative expressed or understood.\\n6. Every oblique case is governed by some word expressed\\nor understood in the sentence of which it forms a part or it is\\nused, without government, to express certain circumstances as\\nfollows\\n1) The genitive is governed by a noun, a verb, preposition,\\nor an adverb or it is placed as the case absolute with the parti-\\nciple.\\n2) The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, and preposi-\\ntions. It also expresses the cause, manner, or instrument.\\n3) The accusative is governed by a transitive active verb or\\npreposition.\\n4) The vocative either stands alone, or is governed by an\\ninterjection.\\n5) The infinitive mood is governed by a verb, an adjective, or\\nadverbial particle.\\n128.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 PARTS OF SYNTAX.\\n361. The parts of Syntax are commonly reck-\\noned two, Concoed and Goveenment.\\n362. Concoed is the agreement of one word\\nwith another in gender, number, case, or person.\\n363. Goveenment is that power which one\\nword has in determining the mood, tense, or case\\nof another word.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "129. SUBSTANTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 205\\nI. CONCOKD.\\n364. Concord is fourfold, viz.\\n1. Of a substantive with a substantive.\\n2. Of an adjective with a substantive.\\n3. Of a relative with its antecedent.\\n4. Of a verb with its nominative, or subject.\\n\u00c2\u00a7129. A SUBSTANTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE.\\n365. Rule I. Substantives denoting the same\\nperson or thing agree in case as,\\nIlavXog anoaroXog, Paul, an apostle.\\n2JcoxQdz)]g 6 cfiXoooyog, Socrates, the philosopher.\\nQecp XQizy, To God, the judge.\\n366 Substantives thus used are said to be in apposition. The\\nsecond substantive is added to express some attribute, description, or\\nappellative belonging to the first, and must always be in the same\\nmember of the sentence i. e. they must be both in the subject, or\\nboth in the predicate. A substantive predicated of another, though\\ndenoting the same thing, is not in apposition with it. See 436.\\n367. Obs. 1. One of the substantives is sometimes under-\\nstood as, Aozvayrig 6 Kva^aQOV (sup. vlog), Astyages, the son\\nof Oyaxares.\\n368. Obs. 2. The possessive pronoun in any case being equi-\\nvalent in signification to the genitive of the substantive pronoun\\nfrom which it is derived, requires a substantive in apposition\\nwith it to be put in the genitive as, Aul)\\\\q ifibg i]v y,vvihni-\\ndog, He was the brother-in-law of me, a shameless woman.\\nSee 399-17.\\n369. Obs. 3. On the same principle, possessive adjectives\\nformed from proper names, being equivalent to the genitive of\\ntheir primitives, have a noun in apposition in the genitive as,\\nNsatOQtrj naoa vrfc Tlvlijyevtog fiuoilrjog, Near the ship\\nof Nestor a king bom at Pylos Adijvaiog x\u00c2\u00bb noXecog\\nTijg pEyiGTTjg, Being a citizen of Athens, a very large city. See\\n399-18.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "206 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 130, 131.\\n370. Obs. 4. Sometimes the latter of two substantives sig-\\nnifying the same thing, is put in the genitive as, Ilohg Ji n-\\nvav (for Ad-Jjvai), The city of Athens.\\n\u00c2\u00a7130. AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE.\\n371. Rule II. An adjective agrees with its\\nsubstantive in gender, number, and case as,\\nyorjavbg avyjo, a good man.\\nxalij yvvij, a beautiful woman.\\naya ov XQi^a, a good thing.\\n372 This Rule applies to the article, adjective, adjective pro-\\nnouns, and participles.\\n373. Obs. 1. Other words are sometimes used as adjectives,\\nand consequently fall under this rule viz.\\n1st. A substantive which limits the signification of a more\\ngeneral term as, EkXag q)oovtj, the Greek language.\\n2d. Adverbs placed between the article and its substantive\\nas, 6 fisTa^v %onog, the intervening space.\\n374. Obs. 2. The place of the adjective is sometimes sup-\\nplied by a substantive with a preposition as, fjdopq fist a dofyg\\n(for tvdo^og), exalted pleasure sometimes, by a substantive gov-\\nerning the other in the genitive as, fia og yrjg, depth of earth,\\ni. e. deep earth 7) TteQiaaeTa ztjg %doizog, abundance of grace,\\ni. e. abundant grace. For the adverbial adjective, see 662.\\n131. OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONCORD OF THE\\nADJECTIVE.\\n375. Obs. 1. Two or more substantives singular, unless taken\\nseparately, have an adjective plural. If all the substantives be\\nof the same gender, the adjective will be of that gender. If of\\ndifferent genders, the adjective takes the masculine rather than\\nthe feminine, and the feminine rather than the neuter. But if\\nthe substantives signify things without life, the adjective is com-\\nmonly put in the neuter gender. Not unfrequently, however, the\\nadjective agrees with one of the substantives and is understood", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "131. CONCOKD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 207\\nto the rest; as, alei ydg zoi iqig ze cpiXy, tzoXe^olze [Mx.%aiz\u00c2\u00a3\\ncontention to thee is always delightful, and wars and battles.\\n376. Obs. 2. When the substantive to which the adjective\\nbelongs may be easily supplied, it is frequently omitted, and the\\nadjective, assuming its gender, number, and case, is used as a\\nsubstantive as, 6 Jifrrpaiog, the Athenian ol dixaioi, the right-\\neous.\\n377. Obs. 3. Adjectives in iv.og are used in the neuter gen-\\nder with the article, and without a substantive in tw r o different\\nsenses. 1. In the singular they express generally a whole as,\\nzo i7T7tix6v f the cavalry zo ttoXizmov, the citizens. 2. In the\\nplural they signify any circumstance which can be determined\\nby the context; as, zd Tocoixd, the Trojan war; zd EXXjjnxd,\\nthe Grecian history.\\n378. Obs. 4. The adjective, especially when used as a predi-\\ncate, without a substantive, is often put in the neuter gender,\\nyoTjua, nqdy\\\\ia, t,coov, c. being understood as, 7iazq}g\\nqjlXzazov (scil. XQW a \u00c2\u00a7Q( zoTg, their country is (a thing) very\\ndear to men yaXsTtov to tzoieiv, to do is hard.\\n379. Obs. 5. Two adjectives are frequently joined together,\\none of which, by expressing negatively the sense of the other,\\nrenders it more emphatic as, yvcozd x ovx dyvcozd pot, literally,\\nknown and not unknown (i. e. well known), to me.\\n380. 06s. 6. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter\\nsingular or plural, with or without an article, for adverbs as,\\ntzqcozov, in the first place to nqtizov, at first zee fidXiaza,\\nchiefly xQvepaTa, secretly, fcc.\\n381. Obs. 7. In any gender or number, adjectives are some-\\ntimes used in the sense of adverbs, to express a circumstance of\\ntime, place, order, manner; as, ettsgov dyynGzTvoi, they fell\\nnear each other; dcpixEzo 8 evz eq aio g\u00e2\u0080\u0094z q iz alo g he came\\non the second third day, 662. So in Latin, qui creatur an-\\nnuus. Cses.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n382. Exc. 1. An adjective is often put in a different gender\\nor number from the substantive with which it is connected, tacitly\\nreferring to its meaning rather than to its form, or to some other\\nword synonymous with it, or implied in it as,\\nxoqiov xaXXiGzct, a most beautiful girl.\\nco dya s tyvyf\\\\, brave soul.\\nXrjGz/jQiov nvQ imqiEQOvzag, a band of thieves bringing fire.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "208 CONCOKD OF THE ADJECTIVE. \u00c2\u00a7131.\\n383. Exc. 2. A collective noun in the singular may have an\\nadjective in the plural, and in the gender of the individuals which\\nform the collection; as, ^ovXrj ifivyjav ei%ev ovx uyvovvzsg,\\nthe council kept peaceable not being- ignorant.\\nSo in Latin, maxima pars in flumen acti sunt. Lat. Gr. 279.\\n384. Exc. 3. In the dual number, the Attic writers some-\\ntimes join a masculine adjective with a feminine noun; as, rovtco\\ntoo rjfiSQa, these two days.\\n385. Exc. 4. An adjective masculine, in the superlative de-\\ngree, is sometimes joined to a feminine noun, to increase the force\\nof the superlative as, at xoqcci [tsXavrazoi, very black pu-\\npils. Also, a masculine adjective is joined with a feminine noun,\\nwhen the plural is used for the singular, and when a chorus of\\nwomen speak of themselves thus, Medea says of herself, y.al yuq\\nTjdixTjiiiivoi Giyyaofie a, xoeiGaovav vixco/ievoi, though in-\\njured I will be silent, yielding to superior powers.\\n386. Exc. 5. An adjective in the masculine gender may be\\njoined with a noun denoting a female, if the attention is drawn\\nto the idea of a person without regard to the sex.\\n387. Exc. 6. A substantive dual may have an adjective plu-\\nral and vice versa, a substantive plural, when two is denoted,\\nmay have an adjective dual as, cpiXag 7Teq\\\\ X e ^Q s fidXojfiEv, let\\nus embrace dvo ^da^ata iyofisvoj aXXrjXeov, two successive\\nchasms lit. two chasms adjoining each other.\\n388. Exc. 7. The adjectives f/.aazog, dXXog, in the singular,\\nare put with nouns in the plural, to intimate that the objects ex-\\npressed by them are spoken of individually and distributively as,\\noids ixaazog \u00c2\u00a3di%ovro de xa, they each received ten.\\n?]Q(Qzociv 8s dXXog aXXo, they asked some one thing\\nand some another.\\nSo in Latin, Quisque pro se queruntur. Li v. Lat. Gr. 281.\\n389. Exc. 8. Plural adjectives sometimes agree with their\\nsubstantives in gender and number, and govern them in the gen-\\nitive case as,\\nol naXaiol tojv TioinTojVj the ancient poets.\\nSo also among the Attic writers in the singular as,\\ndiarotficov top noXXov tov %qovov, spending much time.\\n390. Exc. 9. Instead of agreeing with its substantive, the\\nadjective is sometimes put in the neuter gender, and the substan-\\ntive following it in the genitive (461); as, sig togovtov roXfiqg", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "132. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 209\\n(for zoaavz7]v Tolpujv), to such a pitch of boldness. The abstract\\nnoun is sometimes used instead of the adjective as, fta og yr t g,\\ndepth of earth, instead of fia eTa ytj, deep earth. 374.\\n391. Exc. 10. Proper names in the singular, are sometimes\\naccompanied by the adjectives itq iog, nag, and others in the\\nneuter plural, as predicates or in apposition as, Adfincov, Alyi-\\nvqzt cov t a nowta, Lampon, the chief of the JEginetai n ar-\\nia drj ?jv toIgi JBafivlcovi oim Zconvoog, Zopyrus was indeed\\nevery thing to the Babylonians.\\n392. Exc. 11. Demonstrative pronouns in the neuter singu-\\nlar, may refer to nouns of any gender which do not express a\\nperson and in the neuter plural, to persons as well as things,\\nand to the singular as well as to the plural as, negl avdoiag,\\nem noGco ar avrov [drdqiag) de^aio GTeoeG ai concerning\\nmanly fortitude, for how much would you consent to be de-\\nprived of it loig elg tavta i^apiaqravovGi, who offend against\\nthese, scil. zovg naidag y.ai rag yvvatxag, wives and children.\\nSo also with the adjectives nluov, 7ileT(o, fielov, c; as,\\nluniag \\\\ikv a%ei ov [xsTov di6{ivoi(ov, he will bring not less\\nthan twenty thousand horse lit. he will bring horsemen not\\nfewer than twenty thousand.\\n393.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 132. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.\\n1. The comparative is used when two objects or classes of\\nobjects are compared the superlative, when more than two are\\ncompared.\\n2. The positive is sometimes used in a comparative sense, and\\nis followed by the infinitive as, bllyoi avpfiaXeiv, too few to\\nfight.\\n3. When one quality is compared with another in the same\\nsubject, the adjectives expressing these qualities are both put in\\nthe comparative degree connected by as, TrXovaicoregog rj\\nGocpwzzQog, more rich than wise. So in Latin, decentior quam\\nsublimior fuit. Tacit. Lat. Gr. 474.\\n4. The comparative is sometimes made by joining [lulXov\\nwith the positive and, for the sake of emphasis, sometimes with\\nthe comparative as, pallor olfticoTeoog, more happy.\\n5. The superlative is often used to express a very high degree\\nof a quality in an object, but without comparing it with any", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "210 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 133.\\nother as, av^Q qxlorijiotarog, a very ambitious man TtQijyfia\\n\u00c2\u00a3vt;{}s(jTazov, a very foolish thing. 168.\\n6. The superlative is often strengthened in signification by\\nadding certain adverbial words and particles; such as, nolhh,\\nftuxQcp, nokv, [ictMGTa, 7T/MGTOV, o/\u00c2\u00ab, cat, O7zcog, on, y, (fee. as,\\nTiollq) dG svsGTarov, much the weakest o% aoiGiog, eminently\\nthe best ag xupGta, as quickly as possible oxi ttXeigxov yoo-\\nvov, as long time as possible. Also by the numeral elg as, eig\\napijQ fitlxiGxog, a man of all others the best.\\nFor the construction of the comparative and superlative de-\\ngrees, as it respects government, see 472 and 482.\\n\u00c2\u00a7133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.\\n394. Special Rule. Adjective pronouns agree\\nwith, their substantives in gender, number, and\\ncase.\\n395. The Definite, ccvrog.\\nFor the import and use of the Definite pronoun avxog, see\\n62. In construction it is often similar to the demonstratives,\\n396-5.\\n1. When used as a personal pronoun, avxog takes the gender\\nand number of the noun for which it stands, and the case which\\nthe noun would have in its place. Sometimes, however, like the\\nadjective (382), it takes the gender and number of a synony-\\nmous substantive, or of one that expresses the meaning of that for\\nwhich it stands; as, ixadyjxevGaxs rzdvxa xa, i vij ^anxiXovxeg\\navxovg, teach all nations baptizing them, where avzovg is\\nput for av Q x 7Zovg, which expresses the meaning of e rn.\\nNote. This observation applies to all adjective pronouns used with-\\nout, and instead of, the substantives, to which they refer.\\n396 Demonstratives.\\n2. The Demonstratives are used without a substantive, only\\nwhen they refer to a noun, or pronoun, or substantive clause in\\nthe proposition going before, or in that coming immediately after.\\n3. When two persons or things are spoken of, ovxog, this, re-\\nfers to the latter; ixeTvog, that, to the former. In the same", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 211\\nmanner are sometimes used 6 fie v, og fie v, referring to the for-\\nmer, and 6 8e, og ds, referring^ to the latter sometimes vice verm.\\n4. The demonstratives ovzog and o8s are generally distin-\\nguished thus ovzog refers to what immediately precedes, ode to\\nwhat immediately follows as, ravza dy.ovoag, having heard\\nthese things eleye rdde, he announced as follows.\\n5. The demonstrative words are frequently used in a kind of\\nopposition with a noun, or pronoun, or part of a sentence in the\\nsame proposition. This is done, 1. for the sake of emphasis, or,\\nat the beginning of a sentence, to call the attention more particu-\\nlarly to what is to be said; as, ti 8 ey.eiva epeopev, rag nevmg\\nis xcu SQCQzfjGEig, what shall I say as to these things question\\nand interrogation? Long, zl noz zozlv avzo, r\\\\ dpezi) what\\nis virtue In such cases the pronoun is commonly in the neu-\\nter gender. 2. If the parts of a sentence immediately related,\\nare separated by intervening clauses, the pronoun, being intro-\\nduced in the last part, in apposition with the distant word in the\\nfirst, brings them as it were together as, alia eovg ye zovg\\ndel ovzag y.ai zovzovg cpofiovpevoi pjze doefieg itrfiev\\n7toujG)]ze, but the gods ivho are eternal, and whose power and\\ninspection extend over all things, and who preserve the harmony\\nand order of the universe free from decay or defect, the great-\\nness and beauty of which is inexplicable fearing these, do\\nnothing wicked?\\n6. When that with which the demonstrative stands in appo-\\nsition is a sentence, or part of a sentence, it is put in the neuter\\ngender, and is often connected with it by ozi or cog as, all\\noide zovzo, ozi zavza fiev iaziv anavza zd %ooQia yel\\\\ieva iv\\n[xeocp, but he knows this tuell, that all these places are openly be-\\nfore them.\\nThe sentence is sometimes so arranged that the clause with\\nozi stands first; as, ozi etye nzeqa, zovz^ i ouev, but we knew\\nthis, that he had wings. This construction, so common in Greek,\\nis seldom if ever used in Latin.\\n7. Ovzog, with y.al before it, is used in the latter clause of a\\nsentence, in an adverbial or conjunctive sense, to call the atten-\\ntion more particularly to the circumstance which it introduces,\\nand may be rendered and that and truly _ indeed al-\\nthough c, as the sense may require as, ovzoi yaq \\\\iovvoi\\nIcavcov ovx dyovai JinazovQia, y.al ovzoi v.azd cpovov zivd\\nO /JjilHV, for these alone of the lonians do not celebrate the Apa-\\ntouria, and that under pretext of a certain m,urder lit. and\\nthese (do so) under pretext, c. rvvaiv.bg y.al zavzijg vexQag,", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0096\u00a0\u00e2\u0096\u00a0i\\n212 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. \u00c2\u00a7133.\\nsi Tig fafysi zovvofia, nityoixs, if any one mentions the name of a\\nzooman, although (i. e. and that woman being) dead, he shud-\\nders.\\nBut when the pronoun is less definite, not referring to any-\\nparticular substantive in the preceding clause, but to something\\nexpressed in it, it is put in the neuter plural, and may generally\\nbe rendered especially although c. as, JEv dt poi BoxsTg\\nov tzqoos xsiv iov vovv Tovzoig, A a i tavta ooajbg m but you do\\nnot seem to me to give your attention to these things, although\\nbeing wise. Expressions of this kind are doubtless elliptical,\\nTtoieig or some such word being understood, and may be ren-\\ndered and these things you do. Indeed, it is sometimes ex-\\npressed thus, in Dem. pro Phor., after reproaching Apollodorus\\nwith his dissolute conduct, he adds, %al zavta yvvaixa tyav\\nTtoieTg, and these things you do, having a wife which, with-\\nout notsig, might be rendered though having a wife.\\nYet sometimes these words seem to have no dependence on\\nany part of the sentence, but are thrown in to call the attention\\nto a special circumstance.\\n8. The demonstrative pronoun is often joined with adverbs of\\ntime and place, to define these circumstances with greater empha-\\nsis or precision as, ra vvv tads, just now rovz ixei, at that\\nvery time.\\n9. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes used instead of\\nthe personal pronouns lyco and ov, and, in speaking, when thus\\nused, were probably accompanied with action, so as clearly to\\npoint out the person intended. When used instead of the 2d\\nperson, they most commonly express contempt. The expression\\novrog eifii is equivalent to the Latin en ad sum Lo here am I.\\n397. The Indefinite rig.\\n10. The indefinite rig, 188, added to a substantive, commonly\\nanswers to the English words a, an, a certain one, any one, c\\nas, tig uvtjo, a man, any man, some man. Sometimes with a\\nnoun it is used collectively as, qc6o A(ov rig xaza xvpa\\n1%0-vg, many a fish bounding through the wave. Sometimes\\ndistributively as, xal 1 1 g oixivv avuTTlaadoxrco, and let every\\none build his own house.\\n11. With adjectives of quality, quantity, and magnitude, es-\\npecially when they stand without a substantive expressed, or in\\nthe predicate, it serves to temper the expression by asserting the\\nexistence of the quality in a less positive and unlimited manner,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 213\\nsuch as may be expressed by the English words somewhat, in\\nsome degree, rathe?- as, dvafiazog zig, somewhat difficult to be\\npassed dva/xa ^g Tig, rather hard to learn. With numerals\\nit means nearly, about, c. as, 8r/.a twig, about ten. So also\\nwith adverbs as, a^edov, nearly 6%e86v zi, pretty nearly\\nnokv, much nokv zi, considerably ovdtv, nothing ov8tv zt,\\nscarcely any thing.\\n12. Without an additional adjective, zig has the sense of emi-\\nnent, distinguished as, ev%ezai zig elvai, he boasts himself to\\nbe SOME GREAT ONE.\\n13. In the neuter gender, it is also sometimes nearly redun-\\ndant, being introduced apparently for the sake of sound. In such\\ncases it is to be considered in the accusative governed by xazd,\\nand seems to strengthen the expression as, ovzs zi \\\\idvzig icov,\\nnot being at all a prophet [tz ya zi xal xr\u00c2\u00a367ZS(jiov ztyvovQyij^ia,\\na work of art evidently great and divine.\\n398. -The Interrogative rig.\\n14. The interrogative zig, zi, is used in asking a direct ques-\\ntion as, zig lnou]oe. avho did it Though sometimes used in\\nthe indirect interrogation, oozig is more common as, {ravfxd^co\\nzig (or more frequently oazig) \u00c2\u00a37Toit](j\u00c2\u00a3, I wonder who did it.\\nSometimes it is accompanied by the article 6 zig, who to zi,\\nwhat. Oozig is always used interrogatively when a person to\\nwhom an interrogation is put, repeats it before answering it as,\\nav d el zig dvdQCov oazig eljju 1 iyco Mszcor, who are you who\\nam I? Meton.\\n15. In the predicate, zi, with mi following it, is sometimes ac-\\ncompanied by the subject of iozi in the plural as, d-avpd^w zi\\ntioz i(jzi zavza, I ivonder what these things are.\\n1G. The interrogative zig is often used independently of other\\nwords in the sentence, being governed by xazd, or some such\\nword understood, and may be rendered in what as to what\\nc. as, ztiv z i aocpav Imozqiioveg in what sort of wisdom\\nare they expert Sometimes it is used for did zi, or noog zi,\\nwhat why on what account ln\\\\ zi, for what purpose nag\\nzi, how So, zi 8s, but what\\n399. Possessive Pronouns.\\n17. The possessive pronoun is in signification equivalent to\\nthe genitive pf the pronoun from which it is derived, and while,\\nlike the adjective, it agrees with its substantive in gender, liura-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "214 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 134.\\nber, and case, yet other words at the same time often regard it as\\nthe genitive of the personal pronoun. Hence the following modes\\nof expression, rb gov fibvov dojQtjpa, equivalent to rb gov \\\\ibvov,\\nc, the gift of thee alone. Aovv\\\\iEvog natQog rs fitya yJJog\\nijd 1 Efibv avzov, where ejiov agrees with yJJog in the accusative,\\nand yet, as if it were the genitive of the substantive pronoun, it\\nis coupled with TzcczQog in the genitive, and followed by avzov.\\nSo also vcoizeqov fajog avzav, our own bed toe vpETEoa avztiv,\\nyour own property i)p g $ezeqciv avzcjv (sell, ycooav), their own\\ncountry.\\nThe same construction is common in Latin as, meo, ipsius\\nculpa Cum mea nemo scripta legat, vulgo recitare timentis.\\nBeneficio meo et populi Romania Lat. Gr. 256 and 283.\\n18. The same observation extends to possessive adjectives;\\nas, ei os pe oel \u00e2\u0096\u00a0yvvaixeiag ti UQEzy)g ooai vvv ev %riQEia egov-\\nzai, [A-vtjG ijVca, If I must also say something concerning the vir-\\ntue of those women, who are from this time to live in widow-\\nhood where yvvaiy.Etag, is equivalent to the genitive tcov yvvai-\\nx6)v, to which ogcli refers.\\n19. The possessive pronouns are employed only when an em-\\nphasis is required in all other cases the personal pronouns are\\nused in their stead as, narijQ i)[a,6)v, our father, literally, the\\nfather of us. But tzcizijq ijiiEZEQog means our own father.\\n20. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively;\\nas, Gog Tto og, not thy regret but regret for thee zapa\\nvov ET iiiictt a, not the lessons which 1 give but the lessons\\nwhich thou givest me. This use of the possessive corresponds to\\nthe passive sense of the genitive, 452.\\n21. The possessive pronoun is sometimes put in the neuter\\ngender with the article, for the personal as, zb v/xezeqov for\\nvpEig zdfA.d for lyco to e/uov for ifis. Also without the article\\nafter a preposition as, ev )fLETE oov (scil. Scopazi), for ev ))ficoi in\\nour house.\\n\u00c2\u00a7134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE.\\n400. Special Rule. The article agrees with its\\nsubstantive in gender, number, and case.\\n401. Exc. 1. In gender. The masculine article is often put\\nwith a feminine noun in the dual number (384) as, zoj yvrcuxE\\nthe two women.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 215\\n402. Exc. 2. In number. The article may be put in the\\nplural, when it refers to two or more nouns in the singular {Si 5)\\nas, at jLtirpain te xal Hqi], Minerva and Juno.\\n403. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. Nouns used indefinitely are commonly without the article.\\nIn general, the article is prefixed to all nouns not used indefinitely.\\nNouns are made definite by a limiting word, phrase, or clause\\nby previous mention, by general notoriety or distinction, by pecu-\\nliarity of state or relation, or by emphasis or contrast.\\n2. The article is prefixed to nouns when they designate a\\nclass or species as, 6 av QCQ7z6g iazi -frvntog, man is mortal.\\n3. It is prefixed to abstract nouns when personified, or with\\na reference to something expressed or understood as, H v. ay. la\\nvnolaftovoa sine,- Vice interrupting said z ?j v a X tj d s i a v neol\\nzovrcov, the truth concerning these things.\\n4. When one noun is predicated of another, the subject of the\\nproposition is generally found with the article, and the predicate\\ntvithout it as, clay.bg lyivetf y xoqtj, the maiden became a\\nwine-skin.\\n5. The article is prefixed to nouns to mark emphasis or dis-\\ntinction; as, 6 7z6Xsfi,og ovy. arev y.irdvvcov, ds eiQrjv?] axurdv-\\nvog, war is not without dangers, but peace is free from danger\\n(here the opposition between 6 7z6l\u00c2\u00a3 t uog and eioijvn renders both\\nwords emphatic, which is marked by the article prefixed 6\\nrtotqTyg, the Poet, scil. Homer,\\n6. Proper names, when first mentioned, are without the arti-\\ncle on renewed mention, they generally have it. But the arti-\\ncle is never prefixed to a proper name followed by an appellative\\nwith the article as, Kvqog 6 fiuailevg, Cyrus the king.\\n1. The article is generally placed before appellatives, and all\\nwords and phrases which are placed after a substantive for the\\npurpose of definition or description such as a substantive in ap-\\nposition, an adjective, a participle, an adverb, a preposition with\\nits case as, ^co-AQarijg 6 cpiloaocpog, Socrates, the philosopher\\nol vb\\\\ioi ol ao%aioi, the ancient laws, c.\\n8. Before a participle, the article is to be translated as the re-\\nlative, and the participle as the indicative mood of its own tense\\nas, slal ol Xt yovieg, there are (those) who say. But,\\n9. A participle between the article and its noun is to be re-\\ngarded as an adjective, and rendered accordingly as, ol vtzclq-\\nyovztg vofioij the existing laws. So also, other words and phrases\\nbetween the article and its noun, like an adjective, qualify the", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "216 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 134.\\nnoun, and frequently have a participle understood as, nqbg\\nraXdzag f^a^rj scil. yEvo\\\\i(vi], the battle against the Gauls.\\n10. An adverb with the article prefixed is used sometimes as\\na noun, sometimes as an adjective as, ol steXag, those near, i. e.\\nthe neighbours ?j dvco noXig, the upper city, 378.\\n11. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, adverbial particles and\\nphrases, used in the sense of nouns, have the article prefixed as,\\nol v?]7oi, mortals ol xoXaxEvovTEg, flatterers avQiov (scil.\\ntjIieqo), the morrow to ti, the substance to noibv, the quality\\nto 71060V, the quantity to cog, the manner in which, c.\\n12. The article without a substantive, before d{icpL or wept with\\ntheir case, denotes something peculiar to, or distinguishing the\\nperson, place, or thing expressed by the noun as, ol tzeqi di ioar,\\nthose devoted to the chase, i. e. hunters to tzeqi Ad{i\\\\paxov,\\nthe affair at Lampsacus to. dficpi tcoXe\\\\iov, what belongs to war\\nsometimes it is a mere circumlocution for the noun itse]f as, to,\\ntzeqI t)\\\\v dfiagTiav, for ij k\\\\ia.QTia.\\n13. Ol tteqi, and ol dftcpi, with a proper name, have the fol-\\nlowing peculiarities of meaning; viz. 1. the person himself as,\\nol dfiqA Ugiafiov xal Ildv oov, Priam and Panthous 2. the\\nfollowers of the person named as, ol neol Aq^idafiov, the com-\\npanions of Archidamus 3. the person named, and his compan-\\nions and followers as, ol dpcpl IlEiaiaTQazov, Pisistratus and\\nhis troops.\\n14. The neuter article in any case prefixed to the infinitive\\nmood 173, I.), gives it the sense and construction of the Latin\\ngerund, or a verbal noun as, tov CfiXoaocpEiP to QtytEvv, inquir-\\ning is the business of philosophy to xaXcog Xtysiv, the speaking\\nwell.\\n15. In the neuter gender, and in any case which the con-\\nstruction requires, the article is placed, 1. Before entire propo-\\nsitions or quotations in a sentence construed as nouns as, Ezi\\nds tovtcov tqlti] tiiacpOQu, to, cog ixaata. tovtcov ili\\\\iii solito dv\\nTig, Moreover there is in these a third difference, viz. the manner\\nin which one should imitate each of these objects ex dt tovtcov\\nbo cog av e%oi to iqyov 5 1 ovdev ovEtdog, but according to\\nthese views, the sentiment iL labour is no dishonour ivould be\\ncorrect. 2. Before single words quoted or designated in a sen-\\ntence; as, to o v\\\\iEig ozav Emco, ztjv nbXiv Xt yco, when I say\\nyou, mean the state to Xt yco, the word Xt yco. But in nouns,\\nthe article is commonly in the gender of the noun as, to ovofxa\\n6 A ioijg, the name Hades.\\n16. The article is often prefixed to possessive, demonstrative,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7134.\\nCONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE.\\n217\\ndistributive, and other pronouns, for the\\nor more precise definition thus, ipbg\\nmine but 6 ipbg vlog, is my son. The\\nnification effected by the article may be\\nsake of greater emphasis\\nvlog y is merely a son of\\nfollowing change of sig-\\nnoticed\\nallot\\nothers,\\nol allot\\nthe others, the rest.\\nalii]\\nother,\\ny dlln Elldg\\nthe rest of Greece.\\nnolloi\\nmany,\\not nolloi\\nthe multitude.\\nnlstovg\\nmore,\\nol nlstovg\\nthe most.\\navzog\\nhimself,\\n6 avzog\\nthe same.\\nndvzsg\\nall,\\not ndvzsg\\n{after numerals) in all.\\nbliyot\\nfew,\\noi bliyot\\nthe few, the Oligarchs.\\n17. When the article is used with ovzog or ixstvog, the pro-\\nnoun must stand before the article, or after the substantive as,\\novrog o avijo, or o avijQ ovzog, this same man.\\n18. The article is frequently used alone, having its substantive\\nunderstood. This is the case when the substantive to which the\\narticle refers, being apparent from the connection or sense of the\\npassage, can be easily supplied. The neuter article is often thus\\nused with the genitive of another noun, %QW a ^Qdy\\\\ia, c,\\nbeing understood 1. In the singular, to intimate what a person\\nhas done, is wont to do, or has befallen him as, y.at rot doxai\\njiot z b zov IfivxsTov innov nsnov s vat, and I seem to be in the\\nsame situation with the horse of Ibycus. 2. In the plural, to\\ndenote every thing that concerns, arises from, or belongs to, that\\nwhich the substantive expresses as, zd (piXcov tf ovds v, the as-\\nsistance of friends is nothing; dsi tysqsiv id zav mv, we\\nmust bear the visitation of the gods. In the singular or plural,\\nit is often merely a periphrasis for the substantive as, to or zd\\nz?jg boytjg, for i) boyi] and an adjective, c. put with such a\\nperiphrasis takes the gender and number of the substantive, and\\nthe case of the article; as, zd zcov dtaxovoov noiovpsvot, the\\nmessengers considering.\\n19. The article combined with (isv and ds, has in some de-\\ngree the force of a pronoun, and is used in a distributive sense,\\nthe article with fisp standing in the first member of the sentence,\\nand with ds in the parts that follow; as, zbv psr^ iztfia, zbv d\\nov, this one, he honoured, that*one not ol psv ixvfisvov, ol\\no* sntvov, old iyvf-ivd^ovzo, some played at dice, some drank,\\nsome exercised themselves. When governed by a preposition,\\npe v and ds are placed immediately after the preposition thus,\\niv [tsv zoig iv ds zotg.\\n20. In the Ionic and some other writers, especially Homer\\n10", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "218 EELATIVE PRONOUN. 135.\\nand Herodotus, the article 6, y, to, is very frequently used as a\\nrelative, and sometimes as a personal pronoun as, Jiyiklka\\nyevyo) xbv Iduv aloxvvofiai, I Jlee from Achilles whom am\\nashamed to see to fiev fokftanTO, it (the child) was buried.\\n186-2.\\n\u00c2\u00a7135. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n404. Eule III. The relative agrees with its\\nantecedent in gender, number, and person as,\\nyvvij ijv s l dofxev, the woman whom we saw.\\n6 ccvjjq og ?jl e, the man who came.\\nra xQ?jfiara a ei%e, the things which he had.\\n405. 1. The antecedent is the substantive, or something\\nequivalent to a substantive (421), in a preceding clause to which\\nthe relative refers. Sometimes, however, as in Latin, the relative\\nand its clause is placed before the antecedent and its clause.\\n406. 2. Strictly speaking, the relative does not agree with\\nthe antecedent, but with the same word expressed or understood\\nafter the relative, and with which, like the adjective, it agrees in\\ngender, number, and case, as well as person thus, 6 Innog ov\\n(i7i7iov) e7%\u00c2\u00a3 f the horse which (horse) he had. Hence, in connect-\\ning the antecedent and relative clauses, the following variety of\\nusage occurs viz.,\\n1st. The word to which the relative refers is commonly ex-\\npressed in the antecedent clause, and not with the rela-\\ntive as, ovzog ion 6 avt/Q ov eideg, this is the max\\nwhom you saw.\\n2d. It is often not expressed in the antecedent clause, and\\nexpressed with the relative as, ovzog ion ov eldsg av-\\n8qa.\\n3d. Sometimes, when greater precision is required, it is ex-\\npressed in both as, ovtog ion 6 a v ?jq ov zideg av8 qu.\\n4th. When the reference is of a general nature, and there is\\nno danger of obscurity, the word to which the relative\\nrefers is understood in both clauses as, ov y e foi ixiave,\\nbv ij slei iiocooe, whom he ivould lie slew, whom he would\\nhe saved alive. All this variety is common in Latin as\\nwell as in Greek. (Lat. Gr. 280.)", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "135. EELATIVE PEONOUN. 219\\n407. 3. The antecedent is sometimes implied in a preceding-\\nword as, oixia r\\\\ vfiszs oa oi ye XQtja e, c, your house who\\nuse, c, where oi refers to the personal pronoun implied in vps-\\nztqa (399-17).\\n408. 4. When the relative comes after two words of differ-\\nent persons, it agrees with the first or second person rather than\\nthe third as, eifii d iyoj ftaailevg og zipm pat.\\n409. 5. When the relative is placed between two substan-\\ntives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in gender with the\\nlatter; as, to aazqov i)v bvo\\\\id C ovaiv ^4iya, the constellation\\nwhich they call the Goat.\\n410. 6. HJxc. The relative sometimes takes tlie\\ngender and number, not of the antecedent noun,\\nbut of some one synonymous with it, or implied\\nin it as,\\n1st. ftavovzmv zixvav ovg Jldgaazog %yaye, their children\\nhaving died, whom Adrastus led. In this sentence, ovg\\nrefers to naldcov, as synonymous with ztv.vcov.\\n2d. ndvzcov dv gojncov og xs aev dvzi eh rj, of every\\nman, who shall come against you where og in the sin-\\ngular^ referring to a plural antecedent, shows that the\\nmen are spoken of in the relative clause individually.\\n3d. vTieq andar^g EXldoog cov nazigag ezzeive, for all\\nGreece, whose fathers she slew where cav refers to the\\nmeaning of EXXddog in this sentence i. e. the men of\\nGreece.\\n4th. -QrjOavQOTZOibg dvijg ovg dy xcu STzaiveT zb 7tX?jd og, A\\nman increasing in wealth, whom even the multitude ap-\\nplaud. Here, though the antecedent dv)\\\\g is singular,\\nthe relative ovg is plural, because it refers not to an indi-\\nvidual man, but to the class or kind of men spoken of.\\n411. 7. Instead of og the compound pronoun oazig is used\\nas a relative after nag, ovdeig, or any word in the singular ex-\\npressing an indefinite number, and oaoi after the same words in\\nthe plural as, nag oazig, every one who ndvzeg oaoi, all who\\nand if the indefinite is not expressed in the antecedent clause,\\nthe use of the relative shows that it is understood, and is to be\\nexpressed in the translation as, zdg n6leig oaai, all the cities\\nwhich. Sometimes it is used simply for og.\\n412. 8. If no nominative come between the relative and\\nthe verb, the relative will be the nominative to the verb.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "220 RELATIVE PRONOUN 135.\\nIf a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the\\nrelative will be of that case which the verb or noun following,\\nor the preposition going before, usually governs. But,\\nAttraction of the Relative.\\n413. 9. Mxc. I. The relative is often attracted\\ninto the case of its antecedent as,\\nExamples. 1. gvv rtug vclvgIv alg (for dg) el%e, with the\\nships which he had. 2. \\\\iETaGyETco tijg ?)dov?jg ?)g (for i)v)\\nedcoxa v\\\\iiv, let him share the pleasure which I gave you. 3.\\n\\\\ie\\\\wri\\\\ievog cov engage (for tcov ngcty\\\\i xTcov a engage, 406-4th),\\nbeing mindful of what he did. 4. dnolavco cov e%co aya cov,\\nI enjoy what goods I have (406 r 2d).\\nNote 1. The rule of attraction seems to have its foundation alto-\\ngether iu euphony and hence, generally, attractions will be found only\\nwhere they improve the euphony of a sentence.\\nNote 2. This construction is sometimes, though very seldom, imi-\\ntated in Latin as, Circiter sexcentas ejus generis cujus supra demonstra-\\nvimus, naves invenit. Cms. See Lat. Gr. 298.\\n414. 10. JSxc. II. The antecedent is sometimes\\nattracted into the case of the relative as,\\nJ^tllov 8 ov rev oida rsvav xXvtcc Tev^ea 8vco, I know not\\nany other person whose renowned armour I could put on. Here\\naklov is attracted by the relative rsv (for tov, 142, used for ov,\\n186-2), from the accusative into the genitive. Lat. Gr. 299.\\nOn this principle are to be construed such sentences as the\\nfollowing: ovdsva xlvdvvov ovtiv 3 ov% vne\\\\ieivav, for ovdeig\\ni\\\\v xivdvvog bvTiva, there was no danger which they did not\\nundergo; ovdsva scpaoav ovtiv ov daxgvovTa anoGTgz-\\ncpsa-d cu, for ovdeig i\\\\v ovtiv ecpaaav ov daxgvovTa, c. there was\\nno one who, they said, did not return weeping Tivag tovgcY\\nbgco zevovg, for nveg eialv ovtoi ol %evoi ovg bgco who arc\\nthese strangers whom I see\\n415. 11. The relative plural, and in all its cases with egti\\nbefore it, is used for, or rather is the original form of, the adjec-\\ntive evioi, -ca, -a, some (egti beino; sometimes written evi) as,\\nxai eat i oi (i.e. evioi) STvy%avov xrcoQaxcov, and some hit\\nbreastplates; anb tcov nolecov egtiv cov (i.e. in cor), from\\nsome cities.\\nIn this construction sort is found with bang, both singular\\nand plural as, e gti bang, some one egti olnveg, some.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "136. EELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 221\\n416. 12. In certain cases, it is used adverbially, some other\\nword being understood thus, ov, where 77, where, as far as,\\nhovj, in what manner and sometimes thus used, it is preceded\\nby iazi, the two words being used as an adverb as, iaxiv ov or\\nsv a, sometimes, in some places, in many places.\\n417.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7136. THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS\\noiog, oaog, fjh xog, c.\\n1. The relative adjectives olog, oaog, ?)Xixog, like the relative\\npronoun, always refer to a kindred word before them expressed\\nor understood, implying a comparison of equality similar to talis\\nqualis, tantus quantus, in Latin (Lat. Gr. 300) as,\\nroiog or roiovzog olog, such as.\\nroaog or zoaovzog oaog, so many as.\\nznXixog ijXUog, of such an age or size as.\\n2. The antecedent and relative adjectives both refer to the\\nsame substantive, with which they agree in gender and number,\\nwhile each takes the case required by the construction of the\\nclause in which it stands thus, Dem. Olynth. I, As for the\\nrest they are thieves and flatterers, and zoiovz ovg av oco-\\nnovg olovg \\\\i \u00c2\u00a7va \u00c2\u00a3vzag ooy a ai zoiavza ola iy a vvv\\noxvoi bvo\\\\iaaa.i, such men as, when intoxicated, to dance such\\ndances as dare not name.\\n3. The antecedent word is most commonly understood, and\\nthe relative is translated with some variety according to the con-\\nnection in which it stands. The most of the cases in which, e. g.\\nolog is used for zoiovrog olog, may be reduced to three viz. 1st,\\nwhen it stands before a substantive 2d, before an adjective 3d,\\nbefore a verb.\\n4. First. Before a substantive, olog elegantly takes the case\\nin which its antecedent roiovzog would be, if expressed, and\\nchanges the substantive before which it stands into the same\\ncase by attraction; thus, ovx k ativ dvdgl oico ^coxqutsi\\nipEvdea ai, to lie is not befitting such a man as Socrates is, for\\noi x eaziv avdol zoiovrco olog ^ooxodTTjg iaiiv ipsvdeadcu. Again,\\nyaqiQo\\\\iEvov oicp aol uvoqi, gratifying such a man as thou\\nart, for avooi toiovto) olog av (elg).\\nIn some instances the noun after olog is not attracted into the", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "222 RELATED ADJECTIVE WOEDS. \u00c2\u00a7136.\\nsame case with it; as, tcov (toiovtcov) olcovnEQ avtbg ovtcov,\\nthey being such as he.\\nWhen the substantive to which oiog refers is obvious from\\nthe connection, it is frequently omitted, as in the preceding ex-\\nample.\\n5. Sometimes oiog, with the clause in which it occurs, is ap-\\nparently unconnected with the sentence. In such cases the con-\\nnection is to be formed by supplying cog or on as, ifiaxdoi v\\ntrjv fMjtEoa (oti) olcov tsxvcov ixvQ7]aSy they blessed the mother\\n(because) she gave birth to (lit. became possessed of) such children.\\nOf a similar nature are the Homeric expressions oi dyooEvsig\\nof iooyag, i. e. on ol\\\\ c. because you say-\u00e2\u0080\u0094 because you\\ndo such things.\\n6. The construction is the same when olog y or the substantive\\nto which it belongs, is in the nominative, or is governed by a\\npreposition as, aXij sg dyovtag Tie v og (on toiovtog) oiog\\navtovg 6 ftvvvog disyvyev, being truly grieved because such a\\nthunnt fish as this escaped them. Lucian UniCovrzg ndyyv\\nanoltecvai sg oia xaxa rjxov, i. e. cog Eg toiavta oia xaxa,\\nexpecting total destruction since they were come into such cala-\\nmities as these. In this way that difficult sentence in Thucy-\\ndides is explained, xal fiovn (scil. rjvaicov nohg) owe rop tioIe-\\nfiicp inzk ovn ayavdxtrjGiv fysi, vcp olcov xuxona u, i. e. cog\\nvnb toiovtcov olcov TjfisTg, and we are now the only state\\nwhich does not excite indignation in an invading enemy, because\\n(or since) they suffer from such a brave people as we are.\\nIn all constructions of this kind, the idea will be readily per-\\nceived by considering oiog as put for on or cog toiovtog. See\\nnumerous examples in L. Bos. Ellipses, Gr. 271. Vigerus, Ch. 3.\\n\u00c2\u00a78,9.\\n7. Second. Before an adjective, it may be resolved by supply-\\ning the infinitive eIvui as, ei fisv ydo tig dvtjg iv avtoig sari\\noiog EfiTTEiQog nol iiovy if any one among them is skilful in\\nwar, Dem. O. 2. for toiovtog oiog elvai E(i7TEiQog, is such as to be\\nskilful, c. oiog aoiarog, the best, for toiovtog oiog slvai doia-\\ntog, such as to be the best, c.\\n8. Oiog is frequently, however, joined with an adjective in the\\nform of an exclamation or interrogation, apparently without re-\\nference to the usual antecedent as, oiog jxsyag, oiog xulenog,\\nhow great how difficult Thus Lysias, oiog [isyag xul dsivbg\\nxivdvvog ?)ycovi6\\\\)tj, how great and terrible danger was risked\\n(scil. for the liberty of Greece). If this and similar sentences,\\nhowever, are thrown into the assertive form, they readily admit", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "127. CONSTRUCTION OF NOMINATIVE CASE. 223\\nof the same resolution as the others thus, danger such as to be\\ngreat and terrible was risked.\\n9. Third. Joined with the verb ei(d expressed or understood,\\nand followed by an infinitive, it signifies I am of such a kind\\nas, or such as and, according to the connection in which it\\nstands, may mean I am able i~ am wont am ready, or\\nwilling zoiovtog bejng always understood as an antecedent\\nwordj thus, ov yaQ i\\\\v oiog ano navzog xzoftuvai (i.e. zoiov-\\nzog oiog), for he was not (such) as to make gain from every\\nthing i. e. he was not willing (or inclined) to do every thing for\\nthe sake of gain.\\n10. The abbreviated expressions oiog elpi, and oiog z eifii, are\\nvery common, and usually, but not always, observe this distinc-\\ntion viz., that the former signifies am wont, the latter,\\nam able, I can and is equivalent to dvvapai as, oiog z e tfi i\\nzovzo Ttoieiv, I can do this. In the neuter, it is used imperson-\\nally as, oidv zs iazi, it is possible.\\n11. Sometimes the verb siju is also omitted; as, dvvaizo\\nav.ovuv iy. zov oiovzs {elvai), or whether he could hear\\nFROM NOT BEING ABLE TO HEAR FORMERLY.\\n12. In the same manner roTog or zoiovtog stands related to\\noiog following it, expressed or understood as, ovx civ 6{Ail? i6ai(u\\nzoiovzoo (scil. oiog avzog ian), I would have no intercourse with\\nsuch A man (scil. as he is).\\n13. The neuters olov and oia, either alone or combined with\\nvarious particle s, and used in a conjunctive or adverbial sense,\\nare, no doubt, elliptical expressions similar to those noticed above,\\nthough it may be difficult to resolve many of them in a satisfac-\\ntory manner. The ordinary meaning of these words will be\\nfound in the Lexicons.\\n418 Note. The observations which have been made on the con-\\nstruction of the related adjectives xoloq or xoaovxoq oioq, are applica-\\nble, almost without exception, to xoaoq or roaovxoq oaoq observing\\nthat the former relates to the quality of objects, the latter to their\\nnumber or quantity. The same also may be said of zqUxoq fjXixoq, of\\nsuch an age or size.\\n\u00c2\u00a7137. CONSTRUCTION OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE.\\n419. The nominative case is used\\n1st. To express the subject of a proposition.\\n2d. In apposition with another substantive in the nomina-\\ntive (365), or predicated of it (436, 438).", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "224 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 138.\\n3d. In exclamations as, co dvazdXaiva iyoo wretched\\nme\\n4th. Absolutely, or without dependence on any word in the\\nsentence 7 72) as, noXXi\\\\ ydo czoazia ovaa, ov\\nnaorjg iatai 7toX8cog vnodi^cca ai (avz? jv),for the army\\nbeing numerous, it will not be in the power of the whole\\nstate to accommodate them, Or without a participle, by\\npleonasm before an affirmation; as, 6 Mojvatjg ovx oi-\\ndafxev zi yiyov8v avzcp, this Moses, we know not what\\nhas become of him.\\n138. A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.\\n420. Rule IY. A verb agrees with its nomi-\\nnative in number and person as,\\niya yodq)co, I write,\\nvfieig zvttzszs, ye strike,\\nocp alfiod XdfjiTiezoVy his eyes shine.\\n421 Rem. The subject of a finite verb, if a noun or pronoun, or\\nadjective used as a noun, is put in the nominative. The subject may\\nalso be an infinitive mood (719), or part of a sentence and to all these\\nthis rule applies.\\n422. Obs. 1. The nominative of the first and of the second\\nperson is generally omitted, being obvious from the termination\\nof the verb also of the third person, when it may be readily\\nsupplied from the context as, Xsyovai, they say.\\n423. Obs. 2. The subject is also omitted, when the verb ex-\\npresses an action usually performed by that subject as, GaXm-\\n\u00c2\u00a3si, the trumpeter sounds ixtjov^e, the herald proclaimed or\\nwhen it expresses an operation of nature as, vsi, it rains ftoov-\\nt\u00c2\u00ab, it thunders.\\n424. Obs. 3. Impersonal verbs are usually considered as\\nwithout a nominative still they will generally be found to bear\\na relation to some circumstance, sentence, clause of a sentence,\\nor infinitive mood, similar to that between a verb and its nomi-\\nnative as, 8%8gzl iioi am-tvcu, it is lawful for me to depart, i. e.\\nto depart is lawful for me %qi} G8 ttoiew, it behoves you to do\\nit, i. e. to do it behoves you. Lat. Gr. 307.\\nNote. On the other hand, the subject or nominative is some-\\ntimes expressed, and the verb usually some part of the verb\\nthai is omitted as, EXXijv iyco, I (am) a Greek.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "139. VEKB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 225\\n139. SPECIAL RULES AND OBSERVATIONS.\\nI. Agreement in number.\\n425. Rule 1. A neuter plural commonly has\\na verb in the singular as,\\n\u00c2\u00a3c5\u00c2\u00ab rqt%\u00c2\u00a3i, animals run.\\n426. Obs. 1. This construction is more common with the\\nAttic than with the Ionic and Doric writers^ But with all, there\\nare many exceptions, especially when the neuter plural signifies\\npersons or animals as, roadds tdvtj icTodrEvov, so many na-\\ntions went to ivar. Homer joins a singular and a plural verb\\nwith the same nominative. Odyss. \\\\i. 43. So Xen. Mem.\\ndaroa avkynvav a y\\\\\\\\iiv rag woag rijg vv/abg ipyavi^Ei,\\nthe stars shone forth, which shew to us the hours of the\\nnight.\\n427. Obs. 2. Sometimes, also, masculine and feminine nouns\\nin the dual and plural have a verb in the singular; as, ova\\niarlv oinvsg dnEyovzai, there are none who abstain;\\nay e it a i opcpal (xeXegjv, the voice of melody sounds.\\n428. Kule 2. Two or more substantives sin-\\ngular, taken together, have a verb in the plural\\ntaken separately, the verb must be in the singu-\\nlar as,\\nToo-ether, aldojg 8s xal (pofiog k ftqiv- Shame and fear are na-\\nroi eigi av Q amp, tural to man.\\nSeparately, ool ydo e8ojxe vmqv Zevg For Jupiter and Apollo\\ny.al JItjoIIojv, gave you the victory.\\n429. Obs. 3. To both parts of this rule, however, and espe-\\ncially to the first, there are not a few exceptions for it often\\nhappens that when two or more nouns have a common verb, it\\nagrees with one of them, and most commonly the one next it.\\nAlso, if the two nouns are of similar signification, they are in\\nconstruction considered as one, and the verb follows in the sin-\\ngular as, Zoi 8 Inl rolpdrco y.aodiri y.al Ov^iog, let your\\nheart and soul dare.\\n430. Obs. 4. A substantive in the singular, connected with\\nother words as the subject of a verb, conveying the idea of plu^\\nrality, has the verb in the plural as, Pta iraoalafiovaa xal\\n10*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "226 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 139.\\nrovg Koovfiavrag tikqitzoXovgiv, Rhea, having taken with her also\\nthe Corybantes, wandered about So in Latin; as, Juba cum\\n.Labieno capti in potestatem Ccesaris venissent. Lat. Gr. 314.\\n431. Kule 3. A noun of multitude expressing\\nmany as one ivhole has a verb in the singular as\\ne\u00c2\u00a3ezo Xaog, the people sat down.\\n432.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 But when it expresses many as individu-\\nals, the verb must be plural; as,\\ntjQojznaav avzov to nXTftog, the multitude ashed him.\\n433.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 5. To both parts of this rule there are also ex-\\nceptions, and in some cases it seems indifferent whether the verb\\nbe m the singular or plural sometimes both are joined with the\\nsame nominative as, i\u00c2\u00a3ero Xaog, igyrv ycav ds xaMdoag,\\nthe people sat down and kept their seats.\\n434.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule 4. A dual nominative may have a\\nplural verb as,\\na/upa tXeyov, both spake and a plural nominative, limited to\\ntwo, may have a verb in the dual.\\nII. Agreement in Person.\\n435.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule 5. When two or more nominatives are of differ-\\nent persons, the verb takes the first person rather than the sec-\\nond, and the second rather than the third as, fo xal ob ei no-\\nper, you and I spoke.\\nTo this rule there are many exceptions.\\nIII. The Nominative after the Verb.\\n436.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule 6. Any verb may have the same\\ncase after it as before it when both words refer to\\nthe same thing as,\\nVfisig hxl to (pug rov xoo-pov, Ye are the light of the world.\\n^A 3 Ji~f 6m The n u tive before is e object, the nominative after\\nthepredzcate-the verb is the copula, and is either a substantive or intran-\\nsitive verb, or a passive verb of naming-from its use ca lied copulative.\\n438.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 6. This rule applies to the infinitive, whatever bo\\ntne case of its subject also to participles, 738 and 752.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "140. GOVERNMENT. 227\\n439. Obs. 7. When the predicate is an adjective or a parti-\\nciple, without a substantive, it agrees with the subject before the\\nverb, by R. II Except as noticed, 3*78.\\n440. Obs. 8. In this construction, the verb usually agrees\\nwith the subject sometimes, however, it agrees with the predi-\\ncate as, tjaav ds (jzadioi oxzco to ^lEzai^iMOv avzdcav, the space\\nbetween them was eight stadia. So also when the copula is a\\nparticiple as, he usually let go, zovg yJyiaza l^TjiiaQzr^ozag\\n[isyLGTrjV dt ovaav (for ovzag) fildfinv Tzolecog, the greatest\\noffenders being (or who are) the greatest injury to the state.\\n140. II. GOVERNMENT.\\n441. Government is the power which one word has over\\nanother depending upon it, requiring it to be put in a certain\\ncase, mood, or tense.\\nTHE GOVERNMENT OF CASES.\\n442. The construction of the oblique cases depends in gen-\\neral upon the following principles viz.\\n1. The Genitive expresses that from which any thing pro-\\nceeds, originates, or begins or to which it belongs, as expressed\\nby the English words of, from, in regard of, in respect of, c.\\nviz. as cause or origin.\\n2. The Dative is the case of acquisition, and denotes that to\\nvjhich any thing is added, or to or for which it is done hence\\nthe end or remote object to which any action tends. It is also\\nused to express the cause, instrument, or means, by which a thing\\nis done, in which sense it usually depends on a preposition ex-\\npressed or understood.\\n3. The Accusative expresses the immediate object on which the\\naction or influence of a transitive active verb terminates or of\\nmotion or tendency to, expressed by a preposition.\\n4. The action of a verb may be considered in reference either,\\n1. to its immediate object, i.e. to that on which its action is im-\\nmediately exerted, and which is always governed in the accusa-\\ntive; as, didovai ifxavzov, to give myself; or, 2. to a remote ob-\\nject (i. e. to one which is not acted upon by the verb, but is\\nmerely that to which the action is related in the manner ex-\\npressed by the case), and is put in the genitive, or dative, or ac-\\ncusative, either after the accusative with a transitive active verb,\\nor without an accusative after an intransitive verb as, anallaz-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "228 THE GENITIVE. 141.\\ntsiv tiva vogov, to free one from disease didovai ifiavrbv ty\\\\\\nnoXu, to give myself to the state qjeideo^ai rwv ioicpow, to spare\\nthe kids ^o?]{reiv ry Ttazoidi, to aid (i. e. to render assistance to)\\nmy country.\\n\u00c2\u00a7141. THE GENITIVE.\\n443. The Genitive is in extensive use in the Greek lan-\\nguage, being used in many cases in which the ablative is used\\nin Latin. Its primary, as well as its general and leading idea, is\\nthat of separation or abstraction, going forth from, or out of ori-\\ngin, cause. So that the meaning of the words of out of from,\\nis implied in the case itself.\\nThe numerous and diversified uses of this case are reduced by Mat-\\nthise to the following heads\\n444 I. In Greek, words of all kinds may be followed by other\\nwords in the genitive, when the latter class limits, and shews in what\\nrespect the meaning of the former is to he taken. When used for this\\npurpose, they may usually be rendered by such phrases as with re-\\nspect to, in respect of thus,\\n1. With verbs; as, tag ttoSmv dyov, as fast as they could run, lit.\\nas they had themselves with respect to their feet; y.alwq %ynv uid-rjq,\\nto have one s self well with respect to intoxication; oydkltad at ilnl-\\ndoq, to be deceived with respect to hope nareaya t?jq xiqxxkijq, I am\\nbroken with respect to my head, i. e. i have broken my head.\\n2. With adjectives avyyvo )uo)v ro)v av Q o)7zivo)v a./A.aQr?]jLioi-\\nro)v, forgiving with respect to human errors; tyyvq rrjq noli ox:,\\nnear with respect to the city yrj nXtla, xay.wv, a land full of (i.e.\\nwith respect to) evils; fitlfav TzarQoq, greater than (i. e. with re-\\nspect to) his father.\\n3. With all words which represent a situation or operation of the\\nmind, which is directed to an object, hut without affecting it; such as\\nverbs signifying fo remember, to forget, to neglect, c. and adjectives sig-\\nnifying experienced, ignorant, desirous, a.\\n4. With all words which indicate fulness, defect, emptiness, and the\\nlike. Under this head fall adjectives signifying full, rich, empty, de-\\nprived of, c. and adverbs denoting abundance, want, sufficiency, c.\\n5. To this principle must be referred the construction of the geni-\\ntive with the comparative degree, 482 with all words denoting superi-\\nority, inferiority, and where a comparison is made with respect to the\\nvalue of a thing as, atooq tovtov, worthy of this, i. e. equal in value\\nwith respect to this or where the idea of difference is involved.\\n6. When that loith respect to which a thing is done may also be con-\\nsidered the cause of its being done, the word expressing it is often put\\nin the genitive, and may be rendered on account of; as, qOornv\\nnvi ffoq laq,to envy one on account of wisdom. Hence it is used with\\nverbs signifying to accuse, or criminate, to pray, to begin, c. and also,\\nwithout another word, in exclamations.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "142. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 229\\n445 II. The genitive in Greek is used to express the relation of\\na whole to its parts; i. e. it is put partitively. Hence it is put with\\nverbs of all kinds, even with those that govern the accusative, when the\\naction does not refer to the whole, but to a part as, hur^aou, y.geoiv,\\nto roast some of the flesh iyd) olSa ro)V e/loo)v \u00c2\u00abXbXttot5v f 1 know\\nsome of those of my age. Hence, also, it is put with verbs which sig-\\nnify to share, to participate, c.\\nOn this principle is founded, the construction of the genitive of the\\npart affected, after verbs signifying to take, to seize, to touch, c. Hence,\\nalso, it is put with the superlative degree, to express the class of which\\nthat one, or those marked by the superlative, form a part.\\n446 HL The genitive is used to mark the origin, or cause from\\nwhich any thing proceeds and hence, the person or thing to which\\nany thing belongs, whether it be a property, or quality, habit, duty, c.\\nHence, also, verbs govern the genitive, which express feelings and op-\\nerations of the mind, which are the result of external impressions, or\\nwhen they denote motions and actions in bodies which are the effects of\\nthe operation of other bodies. Thus, verbs which express the sensa-\\ntions of hearing, tasting, touching, fec. as well as those which signify to\\nadmire, to care for, to desire, fcc. are followed by the genitive of the ob-\\nject heard, tasted, touched, admired, or cared for, because it is viewed\\nas the source, origin, or cause, of these sensations and operations.\\nHence, also, the common rules, that verbs denoting possession, prop-\\nerty, or duty, fec. govern the genitive that the material of which\\nany thing is made is put in the genitive and that one substantive\\ngoverns another in the genitive.\\n447 IV. The genitive is also governed by certain prepositions,\\nand by verbs compounded with prepositions that is to say, when the\\nprepositions may be separated from the verb and placed before the\\ngenitive without altering the sense.\\n448 V. The genitive is used to determine place and time in an-\\nswer to the question where? when? fec. Hence the adverbs oi%\\nnov, onov, where, which are, in fact, old genitives, and refer to part of\\nplace or time in general.\\nTo the general principles contained in these five heads, may be re-\\nferred all the cases which occur under all the following rules for the\\ngenitive.\\n142. I. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTAN-\\nTIVES.\\n449. Rule V. One substantive governs an-\\nother in the genitive, when the latter substantive\\nlimits the signification of the former as,\\n6 x)v 7iax?iQj the father of gods.\\nava% uvSqwv, king of men.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "230 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. \u00c2\u00a7142.\\n450 This rule is founded on the general principle mentioned 44-4\\nand 446. In the examples above, the general term naxriQ is restricted\\nby the word diwv governed by it. It is not any father, nor the father\\nof men, but of gods so avat, not any king, but, the king of men.\\nWhen a noun is restricted by another of the same signification, it is\\nput in the same case by Rule I. (365).\\n451. Obs. 1. The noun governing the genitive is frequently\\nunderstood (36*7); viz. 1. after the article such words as vlog,\\nlitjTtjQ, ftvydrno, c. as, MiXxidong 6 Kipcovog (sup. vlog),\\nMiltiades, the son of Cimon ik rjjg zvyrjg (sup. dcoofyaTa),\\nthe gifts of fortune. 2. Ofaog or dapa after a preposition; as,\\nig narqog (sup. dcopa), to the house of her father dg adov\\n(dopov), to Hades; iv adov (8opcp), in Hades. 3. After the\\nverbs dpi, yi vopai, vndq^i c. See 491 and 446.\\n452. Obs. 2. When the noun in the genitive signifies a per-\\nson, it may often be taken in an active or passive sense thus, t)\\nyvojaig zov eov, the knowledge of God. In this sentence, God\\nmay be either the subject or the object of the knowledge spoken\\nof, i. e. the phrase may denote our knowledge of God, or his\\nknowledge of us no og vlov, generally (not the regret of thy\\nson, viz. which he has, but) regret for thy son dvoohg svpsvsia\\nroiovde, good will towards such a man. Lat. Gr. 334.\\n453. This passive sense of the genitive is more common\\nwhen the governing noun is derived from a verb which usually\\ngoverns the dative, and when the one substantive is in one sense\\nthe cause, and in another the object, of that which is expressed\\nby the other substantive; as, vsqt\u00c2\u00a3qg v dcoofyaza, offerings\\n(not o/j but) to the dead; evypara IlalXddog, prayers to\\nPallas; -q roSv niaraiscov miGrqaiua, the march against\\nthe Plat^eans.\\n454. Nouns thus derived, however, are more frequently fol-\\nlowed by the dative as, Movgbgov oocig dv qojtzoigi, the\\ngift of the Muses to men sometimes by the preposition sig with\\nthe accusative; as, dewv sig dv oojTiovg doGig, 518.\\n455. Obs. 3. Many substantives derived from words which\\ngovern the genitive, are often followed by a genitive governed by\\nthe force of the primitive contained in the derivative thus, iXev-\\ndeoog novov (466), free from labour hence, tXevdeoia novov,\\nfreedom from labour; xqcltuv qdovoov (511), to be superior to\\npleasures iyxoazeia rjdovar, mastery over or moderation, in\\npleasures dxpazeia ijoovwv, subjection to or want of moderation\\nin pleasures \u00c2\u00a3mxovon[A,a rtjg %iovog, protection against the snow.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0248.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7142. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 231\\n456. Obs. 4. Sometimes the genitive after a substantive is\\ngoverned not so properly by the substantive as by a preposition\\nunderstood. These generally express the material of which a\\nthing is made, or the author or source from which it proceeds\\n(617) as, ozzcpavog (i$) avd-i^icov, a crown of flowers %a).xov\\navaXfia (scil. lx), a helmet of brass nivd-og [0.710) daifiovcov,\\ngrief sent from the gods {yep) \u00c2\u00b0Hpag dXateiai, wanderings caused\\nby Juno.\\nNote. In this way, perhaps, the examples, Obs. 3 (455), may be re-\\nsolved as, ifov eQtct ano novov.\\n457. Obs. 5. A noun in the genitive, after another of the\\nsame kind, denotes either the highest pre-eminence, or the lowest\\ninferiority as, fiaodEi ftaodJmv, to the king of kings dovXog\\ndovXcov, a slave of slaves.\\n458. Obs. 6. A number of substantives followed by the gen-\\nitive of a noun, or by a possessive adjective formed from it, are\\noften put, by a kind of circumlocution, for the noun itself. The\\nchief of these are, fiia, i g, [levog, strength xtjg, the heart\\nyofiog, fear nelpag, zslog, relevzrj, the end dt[iag, a body\\nxapa, xdor/vov, y.ecpahj, the head, c. as, ftia Kddiopog, for\\nKucttcop, Castor fity Hpaxlvei)], for HpayJSjg, Hercules ttXog\\nftavdrov, for dvatog, death loxdat^g xdqa, for Ioxdavn.\\n459. Obs. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two differ-\\nent genitives in different relations as, V7tsdvv\u00c2\u00a3 rcov Icovcov tijv\\nijysfiovi rjv tov npog Aapziov n o 1 s p o v he assumed the leading\\nof the IonIANS in the war against Darius rcov oixsicov\\nTtQOTrqXaxiGsig toy yi] q cog, insults of relations to old age.\\n460. Obs. 8. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded\\nby a neuter article, for the noun itself; as, to ryg iv*fr\\\\g for\\niv%)], fortune td rcov fiapfiuQcov (for ol ftdpftaqoi) dmard\\nion, the barbarians are not to be trusted.\\n461. Kule VI. An adjective or article in the\\nneuter gender, without a substantive, governs the\\ngenitive as,\\nto no)Xov rrjg orQantjg, the greatest part of the army,\\nrd zrjg Tv%rjg, the gifts of fortune.\\n462. Obs. 9. The adjective in the neuter gender is either it-\\nself considered as a substantive (390), or as having a substantive\\nunderstood, which is properly the governing word.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0249.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "232 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 143.\\n463. Rule VII. A substantive added to ano-\\nther, to express a quality or circumstance belong-\\ning to it, is put in the genitive as,\\navi]Q fisydlng doEztjg, a man of great virtue.\\n464. 06s. 10. The substantive in the genitive has commonly\\nan adjective with it, as in the example above, but sometimes not\\nas, TtoXepog ovx otzXcqv alia da7tdvng,a war, not of wea-\\npons, but of money. But,\\n465. Obs. 11. The substantive expressing- the quality or cir-\\ncumstance of another, is more commonly put in the accusative\\ngoverned by aard or did expressed or understood as, dvyo\\nanovdaiog rov TQ07tov, a man of ingenuous disposition.\\n143. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES.\\n466. Kule VIII. Verbal adjectives, and such\\nas signify an affection or operation of the mind,\\ngovern the genitive as,\\ndv oconav brjlrnicav, liurtful to men.\\nifjiTteiQog ^ovcjixtjg, skilled in music.\\n467 Rem. The principle on which this rule is founded is con-\\ntained in 444-1. 1, 2. But others suppose that the foundation of the\\nprinciple, as well as of the rule, is to be sought in the ellipsis of a pre-\\nposition, such as 7HqI, which is sometimes expressed as, niQi row\\nre/vow i7iiGxr]pu))V) skilled in the arts. However plausible this supposi-\\ntion may be, it militates strongly against it that we have the same\\nrule in Latin in which there is no preposition that governs the geni-\\ntive. The stronger probability is, that the rule in both lang\\\\iages is\\nto be referred to the same general principle already mentioned.\\n468. tinder this rule are comprehended,\\n1. Adjectives denoting action or capacity, which are derived\\nfrom verbs, or corresponding to them, especially those in tog,\\nmog, and rjgtog.\\n2. Many adjectives compounded with a privative (327-1, 1st)\\nas, d MTog xal dv/jaoog aTzavrcov, without seeing or hearing of\\nany thing.\\n3. Participles used in an adjective sense, especially among", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0250.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "143. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 233\\nthe poets as, m($vy\\\\ilvog ae lav, free from troubles olavojv\\neidcog, skilled in augury.\\nNote. These, however, are often followed by the accusative as,\\ni Idwq a e/LuorLa, skilled in wickedness.\\n4. Adjectives expressing a state or operation of mind as, de-\\nsire, aversion, care, knowledge, ignorance, memory, forgetfulness,\\nprofusion, parsimony, and the like.\\n5. Adjectives derived from, or of a similar signification with\\nverbs which govern the genitive as, imxovoog ^pvyovg, oxozov,\\nx. z. X. serviceable against cold, darkness, c.\\n469. Rule IX. Adjectives signifying plenty\\nor want, fcc., govern the genitive (444-4) as,\\n[isazbg xroQvfiov, full of confusion.\\n8o ]f/,og avdQoSv, destitute of men.\\n470. Under this rule are comprehended,\\n1. Adjectives of fulness, plenty, and want; value, dignity,\\nworth, and the contrary.\\n2. Adjectives expressive of power, eminence, superiority, and\\ntheir opposites also, of participation, diversity, separation, pecu-\\nliarity, or property, and the like.\\n3. Adjectives followed by the genitive of the cause as, a hbg\\nTtjg zv /ijg, miserable on account of fortune.\\n471. Note. Adjectives of plenty and want sometimes govern the\\ndative as, acpvewi; fiyXovq, abounding in fruits.\\n472. Rule X. Partitives, and words placed\\npartitively, comparatives, superlatives, interroga-\\ntives, indefinites, and some numerals, govern the\\ngenitive plural as,\\n1. zwv uv Qomcov ol fisv o~ocpoi, of the men some were wise,\\nol d ov, others not.\\n2. ol Ttalaiol rav 7Toijj76)v, the ancient poets.\\n3. sv zoov TzXoicov, one of the ships.\\n4. ngodTog ^fl-qvaiav, the first of the Athenians.\\n5. 6 vsooTSQog zoSv adslqjcov, the younger of the brothers.\\n6. s%d-i6Tog fiaGiitcov, most hated of kings.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0251.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "234 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 143.\\n473. Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 445. It has also\\nbeen supposed that the genitive under this rule is properly governed\\nby ex or dno. The same remark made 46*7 is also applicable here, and\\nfor the same reason; viz. that the same rule holds in Latin, which has\\nno preposition governing the genitive.\\n474. Obs. 1. All words are denominated partitives which\\nexpress a part of any number or class of objects, the whole being\\nexpressed by the noun following it in the genitive.\\n475. Obs. 2. The genitive after the partitive is sometimes\\ngoverned by the preposition ix or ef as, anaocov r\\\\ xaXliari],\\nthe most beautiful of all and sometimes, instead of the geni-\\ntive, there is found a preposition with another case as, aaXXiarij\\niv taig yvvaiki, fairest among women so in Latin, justissimus\\nin Teucris. Lat. Gr. 360.\\n476. Obs. 3. Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive\\nis sometimes used; as, rovg qiiXovg rovg plv an(y.ruv\u00c2\u00a3,\\nSOME OF HIS FRIENDS he slew.\\n477. Obs. 4. The partitives rig and slg are sometimes\\nomitted; as, cpegco aoi Grolqv rear xaXXiurojv (sc. \\\\iictv), I\\nbring you a very excellent robe; r t els rav fievovrcov uvea\\n(sc. slg), he desired to be one of those who remained. On this\\nprinciple is explained such phrases as iarl rwv ala%Q(ov (sc. slg),\\nfor iarl ataxQog, he is base (literally u one of the base\\n478. Obs. 5. Partitives agree in gender with the substantives\\nwhich follow in the genitive. When two substantives follow in\\nthe genitive, the partitives, c. commonly agree with the former,\\nbut sometimes with the latter.\\n479. Obs. 6. Collective nouns are governed by partitives in\\nthe genitive singular.\\n480. Obs. *l. Adjectives in the positive form, but conveying\\na superlative sense, on the principle of this rule govern the geni-\\ntive plural as, e\u00c2\u00a3o%og navrcov, the most excellent of all diet\\nQsacov, goddess of goddesses (i. e. supreme goddess) diet yvvoti-\\nxtiiv, most excellent of women. /lai\\\\ibvi\u00c2\u00a3 dvdQOJV, Good sir. Also\\nnouns compounded with a in a privative sense as, a%aXxog ctcm-\\ndcov, unarmed with brazen shields.\\n481. Obs. 8. On a similar principle an adjective in the geni-\\ntive plural sometimes accompanies substantives of all kinds, in\\norder to mark the class to which the person or thing mentioned\\nbelongs; as, roo%bg rcav xeQCtpeixav, a wheel of the class\\nof the earthen, i. e. an earthen wheel ne Xexvg roov vavnyyi-\\nnojv f an axe of those belonging to ship-builders, i. e. a ship-\\nbuilders axe.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0252.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "143. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 235\\n482. Kule XI. The comparative degree, with-\\nout a conjunction, governs the genitive as,\\nj lvxicov {xihtog, sweeter than honey,\\nxgsiaacav oixtiQfiov q ovog, envy is stronger than pity.\\n483. Bern. The principle of this rule is stated 444-5. There is\\nnot the same objection to the usual explanation of this rule, by supply-\\ning the preposition kqo or av.rl, that is stated 467. Yet the analogy of\\nthe cases already referred to are opposed to- this explanation, and seem\\nto render it more proper to refer to the general principle above stated.\\nAt the same time it must be noticed, that after the comparative degree\\nthe genitive is sometimes governed by one of these prepositions ex-\\npressed; as, oiaw 7] xvQavvlq ttqo eksv iQ Itjc; ?}v a a zr a error f\\nqov, to whom tyranny was mobe agreeable than liberty but this will\\nnot decide in favour of explaining the construction under this rule by\\nsupplying the preposition, any more than it did in the other, 475.\\n484. Obs. 9. The conjunction than, after the comparative\\nis usually followed by the same case that precedes it as, In\\ndvdqag Ttolv d^eivovag ?j JExv ag, against men much braver\\nthan the Scythians. Sometimes, however, it is followed by the\\nnominative, if elfii, or another word, can be supplied as, roig\\nvscotsgoig iyco, to those younger than I am.\\n485. Obs. 10. After the comparative, is sometimes followed\\nby an infinitive with or without cog or mats as, xaxd fxai^co\\nwars dvaxlaiEiv, evils too great to excite my tears voa)]\\\\ia\\nH iQov r\\\\ cpsoeiv, affliction too great to bear.\\n486. Obs. 11. The comparative without ?j (than) is followed\\nby the genitive according to the rule as, qimva. ylvxeocozeoa\\n[Ashx/joco, a voice sweeter than honey-comb.\\n487. Obs. 12. The genitives tovrov and ov, governed by a\\ncomparative, are often followed by an explanation with as,\\novk iati rovds natal xdlliov ysqag, itatoog ia iov xdya ov\\nnecpvxtvai, there is no greater honour to children than this (viz.\\nthan), to be descended from a brave and virtuous father.\\n488. Obs. 13. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence\\nbeing equivalent to a noun (714), is sometimes governed in the\\ngenitive by a comparative as, to yvld zai x dyad a tov\\nKznada ai ia.lzna rzQOv sazi, to preserve property is\\nMORE DIFFICULT THAN TO GAIN IT.\\n489 Q 0St 14. Words which imply a comparison, govern the\\ngenitive on the same principle; these are\\n1st. Such words as express difference as, neqiaaog, davreoog,\\nvarsQog] also, didcpooog, heqog y dXkog, dXloTog, dXlo-\\nTQiog.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0253.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "236 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 144.\\n2d. Multiplicative numbers as, diTtXaGiog, zqmXaGiog as,\\noinXaGiov deT dxovsiv zov Xeyeiv, one should hear\\nTWICE AS MUCH AS HE SPEAKS.\\n490. Obs. 15. The superlative is sometimes used for the com-\\nparative, and is then subject to the same rules; as, (with the con-\\njunction) XcpGzov zb (frXsyqag Trediov, better than the plain of\\nPhlegra (without the conjunction) gslo 8 ovzig dvijq fiaxdq-\\nzazog, no man is happier than you.\\n144. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS.\\n491. Rule XII. The person or thing to which\\nany thing belongs, is put in the genitive after eipl,\\nyivo/acu, v7iccq%g) as,\\nsgzl zov fiaGiXscog, it belongs to the king,\\neivai iavzov, to be his own (master),\\nzov xaXoog 7toXefisTv to id s- alacrity is necessary to fight\\nXsiv \u00c2\u00a3gzi, well i. e. belongs to it.\\n492 Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 446. Consistently\\nwith this, in constructions of this kind, a substantive may be considered\\nas understood, which is the governing word. Lat. Gr. 365.\\n493. Obs. 1. Yet here also we have the genitive governed\\ndirectly by a preposition expressed, indicating that from which\\nthe quality, c. proceeds as, ova eon nqbg aoXscog, it is not\\nproper for the state lit. it is not a thing proceeding- from the\\nstate. On this principle are to be explained such sentences as\\nthe following ovx dyafiai torn dvoqbg dqiGzeog, I do not\\napprove this in a prince; i. e. nqbg dvdqog, c.from a prince\\nzovzo 87zcuvdS JiynGiXdov, I commend this in Agesilaus zov-\\nzo [is fiyovzcu \\\\idXiGza i/pav, this they blame chiefly in us.\\n494. Rule XIII. Verbs expressing the opera-\\ntion of the senses, govern the genitive as,\\nxXvd~i fiEv, hear me.\\nfii] fiov anzov, touch me not.\\n495. Exc. 1. Verbs of seeing govern the accusative; as,\\n0eov oxpovzai) they shall see God.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0254.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "144. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 237\\n496. jEJxc. 2. In the Attic dialect, all verbs of sense govern\\nthe accusative and sometimes, though very rarely, in the other\\ndialects as, foovaa cpcovijv, I heard a voice anlay^va znaaav-\\nto, they tasted the entrails.\\n497. Obs. 2. The principle on which verbs under this rule,\\nand some of those that follow, govern the genitive, is, that the\\nword in the genitive, following the verb, expresses that which is\\nviewed as the origin or cause, in some way or other, of the sensa-\\ntion, or of the act or state expressed by the verb, 446.\\n498. Rem. If, after verbs which usually govern the genitive, the\\ngenitive is governed by a preposition interposed, the preposition gener-\\nally corresponds to the idea of origin or cause, c. expressed by the\\ngenitive (as, ano, 7Zqoc, and the like) and thus, instead of militating\\nagainst the principles stated above, it adds its own force to that of the\\ngenitive, giving emphasis and distinction to the sentence. But to sup-\\npose from this, that when the genitive follows a verb, it is always gov-\\nerned by a substantive or preposition understood, besides being wholly\\nunnecessary on the principles already stated, serves only to destroy\\nthe original and characteristic simplicity of the language, and to render\\nits construction perplexed and intricate.\\n499. Rule XIV. Verbs signifying an opera-\\ntion of the mind, govern the genitive as,\\n\\\\)av{id\u00c2\u00a3co gov, I admire you.\\naptXetg tmv qjiloov, you neglect your friends.\\n500 Rem. Verbs which come under this rule govern the genitive\\non the pinnciples stated, 444-3 and 446. Examples occur also in Latin\\nsee Lat. Gr. 369. It applies generally to verbs which signify\\n1. To pity, to spare, to care for, or neglect as, smiuelsTcjxrar,,\\ntyoovriQmv, aXeyi^etv, apsleiv, okiyoqelv.\\n2. To remember or forget as, (AvaG cu, \\\\ivn\\\\iovzmw, lavxrd-\\nvecj cu, c. with their compounds. But these frequently\\ngovern the accusative.\\n3. To consider, to reflect, to perceive, or understand these\\nalso govern the accusative.\\n4. To admire, to aim at, to desire or to loathe, to revere or to\\ndespise.\\n501. Obs. 3. Many of these verbs used transitively (i.e.\\nsignifying to cause the operation of mind they express), govern\\nthe accusative of the person with the genitive of the object as,\\nvft\u00c2\u00a3{ivtjaev i naroog, he put him in mind of his father eyevaag\\nfit Evdcufioviag, you have caused me to taste of happiness. Verbs", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0255.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "238 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 144.\\nthus used are sometimes denominated causative or incentive verbs,\\nand hence the\\n502. Rule. Causative verbs govern the accu-\\nsative of the person with the genitive of the thing.\\n503. Kule XV. Transitive verbs govern the\\ngenitive when they refer to a part only, and not\\nto the whole of the object as,\\nems rov voarog, he drank of the water.\\n504. This construction depends on the principle stated, 445, or we\\nmay consider the expression elliptical, and supply some such word as\\npiqoq, a part, or il, some, as the direct object of the verb, and that which\\ngoverns the genitive according to Rules V. and VI.\\n505. To this rule belong more especially such verbs as sig-\\nnify,\\n1. To share, participate, or impart, which, with the genitive\\nof the thing, frequently govern the dative of the person to\\nwhom it is imparted as, per ad idea pi rep adelfpcp rav\\nXQijpaTCQV, I share the property with my brother.\\n2. To receive, obtain, or enjoy as, npyg Ha^s, he gained\\nhonour iav Xd^wfiev cxol?]g, if we yet leisure.\\n3. Verbs signifying to take, to seize, and their contraries to\\ntouch, or to cany, especially in the middle voice, with the\\naccusative of the ivhole, govern the genitive of the part af-\\nfected ildfiovzo ri\\\\g \u00c2\u00a3oovi]g rov Ooovrijv, they seized\\nOrontes by the girdle.\\n506. Exc. Some verbs, such as lafifidvopar, fieze^w, aXijqo-\\nvofieco, layxdva, rvyydvco, sometimes govern the accusative of\\nthe thing xlnoovopeco with the accusative of the thing, governs\\nalso the genitive of the person from whom it is received as,\\nixh]QOv6p)]G8 rov narobg rd xrij/tara, he inherited his posses-\\nsions from his father sometimes it governs the genitive of both.\\n507. Rule XVI. Verbs of plenty or want, fill-\\ning or depriving, separation or distance, govern\\nthe genitive (444-4) as,\\ntvnoQzT XQjjfidrcQVj he abounds in riches.\\nXQV60V vrjfjGao co vija, let him fill his ship with gold.\\nStiG ai XQ/jfidrcov, to be in want of money.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0256.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "144. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 239\\n508. Under this rule there may be comprehended verbs\\nwhich express the general idea of separation, or which signify\\n1. To beg or entreat as, deofiai gov, I beg of you.\\n2. To bereave or deprive as, gzeqe gj, dnoGZEQEca.\\n3. To deliver, loose, or set free as, iXEvdsoocQ, Xvco, dnaX-\\nXdaaoo.\\n4. To escape as, ixcpEvyco, aXwxco.\\n5. To keep off, to hinder, or prevent, to desist as, xcoXvco,\\nioriTsvo), Eyca (soil, tivcc zi.vog), Ei oyofiai, c.\\n6. To differ from, to be distant, to abstain as, diE /oo,\\ndnkyja, diaXXdzzco, diacfEQG), uMEyoixai. But some verbs\\nof differing govern also the dative as, diaqjEQCo goi, I\\ndiffer from you.\\nt l. To separate, repel, or drive away; as, ^oqi^co, diooiZco,\\ndf/,vv x), d /Eioco, dicoxcQ, fcc.\\n8. To make way for, or retire from, to resign as, ec/.co,\\nV7Z0/GJQECO, VTtdyCQ, 6Vy%CQQ\u00c2\u00a3CQ.\\n9. To err, to cause to err v7io7t).avdofiai, d7tozvy%dvo[A,ai,\\nduaozdvco, TzXavdco.\\n10. To cease, to cause to cease as, 7iavco, 7tavofiai, dr^w, c.\\n11. To deceive, frustrate, or disappoint as, ipEvdofiai, 7Zzaico,\\noyuXXouui, c.\\n509. Obs. 5. Many of these are transitive; and with the\\ngenitive of the remote object, govern the accusative of the direct\\nobject thus, under No. 3, as zovd eXev eqoj yovov, I clear you\\nof this murder dtyaiQEi6 ai, to deprive, sometimes governs the\\naccusative and genitive, sometimes two accusatives, and some-\\ntimes the accusative and dative.\\n510. Obs. 6. The genitive after these verbs, whether transi-\\ntive or intransitive, is sometimes governed by a preposition inter-\\nvening, the effect of which is, to give emphasis to the expression\\nas, iXEvd-EQcaoag ttpf EXXdda dno Mrfiav, having liberated Greece\\nfrom the Medes, 498.\\n511. Kule XVTI. Verbs of ruling, presiding\\nover, excelling, and the contrary, govern the geni-\\ntive (444-5) as,\\nnoXXojv tttvwv do /Eiv, to rule over many nations.\\nzojv 7tQayudzcov imazuzErv, to have the superintendence of affairs.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0257.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "240 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 144.\\n512. The verbs which come under this rule are those which\\nsignify,\\n1. To rule; as, ao%co, xoaivfo, deG7z6\u00c2\u00a3co, bvvaatEvoa, i%ov-\\ncid^co, av evtsco, xaraxvoiEixn.\\n2. To reign as, vvoavvEvw, ^aadevco, dvdtyaco.\\n3. To lead as, Tjyt oficu, ijyEfiovEvca, 6Zqvlxi])4(x).\\n4. To preside over as, imGTatbw.\\n5. To survive, or to be over as, tieqieijii.\\n6. To surpass, or excel as, ttqqozevco, vnEoftaivcOj 7T\u00c2\u00a3Qi@ullco,\\ndiacpEQco, 7iEQiyivo\\\\ia.i.\\n7. To begin, i. e. to be first, to lead the way as, aQ%o[*ou so\\nao%co, v7taQX(o, xaxdo%Gi.\\n8. The contrary are such as signify to be ruled, led, presided\\nover, c. to obey, to be inferior to, to be overcome.\\n513. Obs. 7. Some verbs govern the genitive by the force\\nof a noun implied in them thus, xvqolvvevew is equivalent to\\ntvoavvog sivai and hence ezvqolvveve Koqiv ov, he was king of\\nCorinth, is equivalent to tvoavvog i]v Koqiv ov.\\n514. Obs. 8. Many verbs under this rule sometimes o-overn\\nthe dative as, avaGGco, ar^iaivco, xqcczecq, ?jyso[AUi, yysfiovEvoo,\\ndo^co and sometimes the accusative.\\n515. Rule XVIII. Verbs of buying, selling,\\nestimating, and the like, govern the genitive of\\n\\\\hs price (648) as,\\nG w)] jd[A,i]v rovro nivtE doaxpoov, I bought this for five\\nDRACHMAE.\\ntcov Ttovtov TtcalovGiv i\\\\\\\\uv 7zdvta tdyd a ol eoi, the\\ngods sell every good thing to us for labour.\\nd^iovtai dialog ripijg, he is thought worthy of double\\nhonour.\\n516. Mem. The genitive in this construction is properly\\ngoverned by dvxi understood, sometimes expressed. The price\\nis sometimes put in the dative with the preposition im, and some-\\ntimes in the accusative with the preposition itqog. 649.\\nN. B. For the construction of the genitive with the accusa-\\ntive, see 151 also, for the genitive governed by adverbs, see\\n\u00c2\u00a7164, 165; by 2)repositions, 168, and as used to express cer-\\ntain circumstances, 156, 157, and from 160 to 163.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0258.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "145, 146. DATIVE AFTEE SUBSTANTIVES. 241\\n\u00c2\u00a7145. CONSTRUCTION OF THE DATIVE.\\n5 1 7. The dative has, in general, two significations\\n1. It is used to express the remote object to which any quality or\\naction, or any state or condition of things tends, or to which it refers.\\nThis tendency is usually expressed in English by the words to or for.\\nAs thus used, it corresponds to the dative in Latin, and is subject to\\nnearly the same rules.\\nRem. To this general character of the dative may be referred a use\\nof this case common in the best Greek writers, when the dative of the\\nperson to whom the thing spoken of may, in some way or other, be in-\\nteresting, is thrown in, without any dependence for its construction\\non any word in the sentence, and when the sentence as regards syntax\\nis complete without it. In such cases the dative is said to be redundant.\\nBut though it is so in respect of construction, it is not so in respect of\\neffect, as it imparts a touch of feeling and sentiment easily felt, but not\\nso easy to express in a translation. Thus, r\\\\ /xr t rrjQ i x ae noitlv o,tv av\\npovlfi, iv avr fi /j,ay.a.Qvq rfi (Plat. Lys.), thy mother permits thee to do\\nwhatever thou p leasest, in order that thou mayest be happy (to hee). The\\navrr[ is added with reference to the feelings of the mother. The datives\\nHoi and o~oL are very often used in this way. Thus, Oedip. Tyr. 2. tlvaq\\n7toQ- td Qccq rdade pov od^ere; where //ot intimates the mournful in-\\nterest the good king felt in the scene before him. In Xen. Cyr. Cyrus\\naddressing his mother, says, olual o~oi i/.t ivovq v^aei^v c. I have no\\ndoubt that I will easily surpass these; where Got intimates the delight-\\nful interest an affectionate mother might be supposed to feel in the\\nevent anticipated. So in Latin, Quo tantum iimi dexter abis, Virg.\\n^Eneid V. 162. Lat. Gr. 377-3.\\n2. It is used to express that with which any thing is connected as an\\naccompaniment, cause, instrument, manner, means, or end. This connec-\\ntion is usually expressed in English by such words as with, by, from, in,\\nfor, or on account of. Used in this way, it corresponds to the ablative\\nin Latin, both in meaning and construction.\\n146. THE DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES.\\n518. Eule XIX. Substantives derived from\\nverbs which govern the dative, sometimes govern\\nthe dative also as,\\ntov dsov domg vfxiVj the gift of God to you.\\ni] iv to) TZolifAq) roig cpiloig fioij- the assistance of (i. e. rendered\\nua, to) friends in war.\\nig avnloylav roig %v[i[idxoig, for the contradiction of your\\nallies\\nBecause di dojfxi, \u00c2\u00a707]Oeco, and avnXtyai, govern the dative.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0259.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "242 DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. \u00c2\u00a7147.\\n519. Obs. 1. The dative often follows a substantive in the\\nsense of the genitive, for which construction, with examples, see\\n533.\\n520. Obs. 2. The dative sometimes depends on an adjective\\nand substantive joined together, but chiefly on account of the\\nadjective as, xleivov tfdlog Tzazoi, illustrious offspring to the\\nfather.\\n521. Obs. 3. The dative sometimes follows a substantive,\\nnot, however, as implying possession, but where the idea of adap-\\ntation or design is implied as, %eQolv Tzorog, labour for the\\nhands i. e. adapted for, designed for, suited to.\\n522. Obs. 4. The dative is also put with substantives to ex-\\npress the idea of companionship, being governed probably by\\novv or biiolwg understood as, (ov) vnevdvvog et zoig alloig,\\nyou are responsible, as well as (or equally witK) the rest.\\n147. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES.\\n523. Rule XX. Adjectives signifying profit\\nor disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, govern the da-\\ntive as,\\nbtpthfjLog zfj nolu, profitable to the state.\\nbfAOtog 7c5 tzcczqi, like his father.\\n524. The dative after such adjectives, expresses the object to\\nwhich the quality expressed by the adjective refers and hence,\\nall adjectives in which such a reference is involved, are followed\\nby the dative of the object to which they relate. In this class,\\nbesides those mentioned in the rule, may be reckoned,\\n1st. Adjectives signifying usefulness, friendliness, equality suita-\\nbleness, resemblance, ease, fitness, agreement, and the like,\\nwith their contraries. Hence, 6 avzog, the same, and some-\\ntimes tig, one, and zoiovzog, such, are followed by the da-\\ntive as, za avza (zavza) szdax x ooi, I suffer the same\\nthings with you\u00e2\u0080\u0094 (so in Latin, Invitum qui servat, idem\\nfacit occtdenti. Hor. He who preserves a man against his\\nwill, acts the same part with the man who kills him)\\nog spot [A,iag iytvsz In fjinztgog, who ivas of the\\nsame (of one) mother with me Xoyovg zqi zoiovzovg\\nXt yw, to speak such words as he would.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0260.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "147. DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 243\\nExc. Adjectives signifying likeness, equality, c. are sometimes fol-\\nlowed by the object of comparison, not in the dative, but in the same\\ncase with the adjective, and connected with it by_ the conjunction xai\\nas, ovxoq ye _6 ).6yoq \u00c2\u00a3uot,ye doy.zl dv b/AOvoq ilvav y.al tiq or igoq\\n(instead of tlvav tw nooxiooj), this argument would seem to me at least\\nto be like the former. So also the nominative is used after the adverbs\\n6,uolo)q, iffo)c, y.axa xavxd; as, ov% 6fiolo)Q 7li7lovr^y.aGi xal 0 jutj q oq,\\nthey have not done like Homer y.axa tana ovxoq yxqat y.al y.i, a-\\nqa,he sounded just as a harp. These constructions are probably to be\\nresolved thus ovxoq ye 6 ).6yoq y.al nooxtQoq doxii, fcc. ovxoq y.al\\ny.i dqa rjxi 1 e\\n2d. Adjectives compounded with uw, opov, and fiEzd, signifying\\nwith as, ovvrgoqiog, ouooog, fiezaiziog rivi, c. yet\\nsometimes these govern the genitive.\\n3d. Some adjectives derived from verbs which govern the da-\\ntive, govern the dative also as, d /.olov og, dy.olovOr^zr/.og,\\ndiddoyog.\\n525. Obs. 1. There are many adjectives which govern either\\nthe genitive or dative as, opoiog, like io~og, equal 6[u6vv{iog,\\nof the same name opoTzdzoiog, of the same father ofioprjrQiog,\\nof the same mother avvTQoq,og, educated together Gw/jflys,\\nfamiliar ioooQonog, of the same force xoivog, common\\nTzlovoiog, d(fp\u00c2\u00a3iog, rich evizooog, abundant ivde/jg,poor tvo-\\nyog, vTiodiy.og, vTtwdwog, exposed, obnoxious or/.eiog, familiar\\nojiiog, to be sold dovXog, a slave ilEv toog, free as, ofioiog\\nzov naxQog, or tcp natol, like his father opcovvfxog tov Tiatobg,\\nor icp Ttatgij of the same narne.witli his father.\\n526.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 2. It has been observed (202, Obs. 1), that the ver-\\nbal adjectives in tog and vs og have a passive signification corres-\\nponding nearly to the Latin verbals in bilis and dus. Their con-\\nstruction, when thus used, is also similar and hence the following\\n527. Special Rule I. Verbals in rog and\\nraog, signifying passively, govern the dative of the\\ndoer as,\\ntovto ov orpov lorl pot, this is not fit to be spoken by me.\\nrj nohg ojqebjTtu aol son, the city ought to be served by thee.\\n528. Rem. The dative, however, in this construction, when\\nit is general in its nature, is commonly omitted as, zippta iariv\\njj dotzij, virtue must be honoured (viz. ftfjuv, by us).\\n529. Obs. 3. Verbals in log, not signifying passively, govern\\nthe case of their own verbs as, ei tm ificp rdvSo) [itpnTog tiui,", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0261.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "244 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 148.\\nif I blame my husband. Soph. Trach. aipavozbg ey%ovg 9 not\\nhaving touched the sword. 202, Obs. 1.\\n530. Special Rule II. The neuter verbal in\\ntsov, in the sense of the Latin gerund, with the\\ndative of the doer, governs also the case of the\\nverb from which it is derived as,\\nzavta TtULVta noirfciov {ioi, all these things must I do.\\ntoig (isv vn aq%ov6i vopoig xqtjgteov, xaivovg dn er/Sj fit]\\nd-arsov, we should use the present laws, and not rashly enact\\nNEW ONES.\\n531. Obs. 4. The doer is sometimes put in the accusative, in\\nwhich case the necessity involved in the verbal is much weaker\\nthan in the ordinary construction as, ov dovlevteov tovg vovv\\n\u00c2\u00a3%ovzag toig xaxoog cpgovovm, the prudent ought not to obey\\nthe unwise iniGxm iiov ta fjilv avtov, ta ds yvvaixa (for\\navtco, yvvcuxi), some things are to be looked to by him, some by\\nhis wife. Both are united by Plato, Rep. 5, ovxovv xcu tjfiw\\nVEV6T80V IXniQovtag.\\n\u00c2\u00a7148. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS.\\n532. Rule XXL The verbs ei[u ylvo/Ltcu,\\nand vttcc^co, signifying to be, or to belong to, are\\nfollowed by the dative of the possessor as,\\neat i pot XQijiACiza, possessions are {belong) to me, i. e. I have pos-\\nsessions.\\nTiXXcp ncudeg ijaav xaXoi xuya oi, good children were to Tellus,\\ni. e. Tellus had good children.\\n533. Obs. 1. On the principle of this rule may be explained\\nthe numerous instances, both in Greek and Latin, in which the\\ndative signifying possession is used with another substantive appa-\\nrently for the genitive. Thus, Te llcn ol Ttaideg is equivalent to\\nTe Xlov ol Ttaldsg, the children of Tellus but the principle of\\nconstruction is different. In the latter expression, the genitive is\\nImmediately governed by the other substantive, ol TtaidEg, by\\nRule V., and signifies the children proceeding from, and belong-", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0262.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "148. DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 245\\ning to, Tellus. In the former, the dative is not governed by the\\nsubstantive, but depends on some part of the substantive-verb\\nunderstood thus, Ttlho ol naldeg (ol ovzeg), Tello filii (qui\\nsunt), the children which are to (belonging, or added to) Tellus\\nor, without a periphrasis, the children of Tellus. In this man-\\nner may be resolved all such expressions as ocas ds ol, his two\\neyes bvyaxr^q rt oi, her daughter tod Jlvdoaifion 6 raopog, the\\nsepulchre of Andrcemon, c. Lat. Gr. 380, 381.\\n534. Rem. 1. This mode of expression -with the dative is so nearly\\nsynonymous -with the more common construction with the genitive,\\nthat it appears often to have been a matter of indifference which of\\nthem was used so much so, that a sentence sometimes begins with\\nthe one construction and ends with the other; thus, tj/juZv ds xarixXd-\\na rj (f L).ov tjtoq dtiauvrotv q 6yyov re (taovv literally, the heart to\\nrs dreading his growling voice was broken down. In this sentence 8u-\\nadvrorv refers to rj^ilv as if it were rj^oiv in the genitive. In the follow-\\ning sentence the order is reversed: rt/q d* auToi* lino qiUov ?/rop aij-\\n/xccTu dvayvovafi, her heart was moved when she recognized the to-\\nkens. Here dvayvovari in the dative, refers to rijq in the genitive, as\\nif it had been r^.\\n535 Item. 2. In other instances in which the dative follows a sub-\\nstantive apparently for the genitive, the idea of tendency towards or of\\nacquisition or addition, expressed in English by the preposition to or\\nfor, is generally apparent as, narol touo)q6v yovov, an avenger of\\nyour fathers mtcrder plainly an avenger of murder to or for your fa-\\nther. Indeed, the idea of possession, one of the meanings of the geni-\\ntive, and of acquisition, the proper idea expressed by the dative, are\\nso nearly allied as to render the use of the one case for the other not\\nunnatural.\\n536. Obs. 2. When of two nouns in the dative, the one ex-\\npresses a part of or something belonging to, the other, the latter\\nmay be rendered as the genitive, and the construction explained\\nas in Obs. 1 (533) yet it may be often better to consider them\\nin apposition, both depending on the same governing word the\\none term being added to limit or define more precisely the more\\ngeneral idea contained in the other thus, in the sentence, ovx\\nJiya\\\\i(\\\\ivovi rjvdavs vpo), the dative Aya\\\\ii\\\\ivovi may be\\nconsidered as regularly governed by ?]v8ave (548-1), and -dvfim\\nadded in apposition, more particularly defining the part affected\\nas, he did not please Agamemnon viz. his mind (his feelings).\\nThis construction is imitated in Latin (Lat. Gr. 371). So also\\nthe following examples\\ny.o6(A.ov ov oq iv ^7iacev Ztvg ytvei, an ornament which Jupi-\\nter gave to them, viz. their race.\\n{laozvQtH de poi trj yvcopr}, (the oracle) bears witness for me,\\ni. e. FOR MY OPINION.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0263.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "246 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 148.\\n537. In the following sentence, instead of the second dative,\\nwe have the accusative with x\u00c2\u00abra; viz., yds 8s poi \u00e2\u0096\u00a0a ax a v-\\nfjibv clqigtv cpaivszo ftovXrj, but this counsel seemed best to me in\\nrespect of my feelings i. e. this counsel pleased me most.\\n538. Rem. 3. The correctness of this view of the construction is\\nalso rendered more probable from the fact, that the same apparent tau-\\ntology is used when the word to be limited or defined is connected with\\nwords which govern the accusative as, xl S\u00c2\u00a3 a a g q v a q ixexo nh oq\\nwhat grief has invaded your mind? Where, instead of saying that a\u00c2\u00a3 is\\nthe accusative used for the genitive gov according to one mode of reso-\\nlution, or that q q\u00c2\u00a3vaq is governed by xard understood according to\\nanother, it appears better to consider o~\u00c2\u00a3 as the general direct object,\\nand (pQevctq as in apposition, defining more precisely the part affected\\nas in the above examples thus, what grief has come upon you viz.\\nyour mind. So in other instances as,\\nTqoJaq Ss rqo/uoq v7ti]h) e yvta e jt a a x o v trembling came upon\\nthe Trojans, every one in their limbs.\\nxbv ye liri bax\u00c2\u00a3a S-vpoq aytjvoio, the noble soul left Mm; viz.\\nhis body.\\nBQWibv rd/Livs v\u00c2\u00a3ovq ooTttjaaq, he cut the wild fig tree, its\\nYOUNG BOUGHS.\\n539. 06s. 3. The dative of some participles and adjectives\\nis joined with the dative after the third person of ei(it or yivoiicuj\\nfor the verb itself these are such as fiovlofievog, qdofisvog, a%-\\nxropsvog, TTQOods^ofierog, axcov, aGfievog, c. as, si goi fiovlo-\\nfitvcp egxi, for si iiovXrj, if you are willing ovds avtcjj axovxi ijv,\\nnor was he unwilling rjdofisvoiGiv r^iiv ot loyoi ysyovaoi, we\\nwere pleased with your discourse. This construction has been\\nimitated in Latin thus, Tacit. Agr. 1 8, quibus bellum volentibus\\nerat, who were inclined for war. So Sallust, Jug. 100, uti\\nmilitibus labos volentibus esset, that the labour might be agree-\\nable to the soldiers. See Lat. Gr. 396, Note.\\n540. Obs. 4. Somewhat similar to this is the construction of\\nthe dative with the participle or adjective, expressive of some\\nfeeling or emotion, after verbs signifying to come as,\\na j[is vr} d fyol tjX e, he came to me delighted (scil. with his\\ncoming) i. e. am delighted that he is come.\\nnotiovvxi TtQOvqjdvng, thou comest to me earnestly wishing it,\\ni. e. earnestly wished that thou wouldst come.\\n541. Obs. 5. To this rule also belongs the construction of\\nsuch phrases as xi z\\\\io\\\\ xai goi (scil. koivov egzi) what have\\nI to do with thee? (literally, what common thing is there to me\\nand you?) xi nliov egtIv ifioi what advantage have I from\\nit what good is it to me", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0264.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "148. DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 247\\n542. Rule XXII. All verbs govern the dative\\nof the object to which their action is directed; as,\\nsv^ovto fteoTg, they prayed to the gods.\\nava$7Jneiv tivi, to look up to any one.\\nJi iivi^ *ifioag avsG /pv, they lifted up their hands to Minerva.\\n543. Rem. 4. This rule maybe considered as general, applying to\\nall eases in which a verb expressing action is followed by the dative,\\nthe action not being exerted upon, but simply directed to the object\\nexpressed in the dative. Hence, if the verb is transitive, it will govern\\nalso its immediate object in the accusative (584); if intransitive, it will\\nbe followed by the dative only. More particularly to this rule belong\\n544. I. Verbs expressing action, compounded with im,\\nTtQog, eig, ava, c. These prepositions serve to mark more pre-\\ncisely the direction of the action, or state of action, to an object\\nas, efosQxead ai zin, to come to one.\\n545. Obs. 6. These verbs sometimes govern the accusative\\nby the force of the preposition with which they are compounded\\nas, 87t8GtQdz8vas Tiohv, he waged war against the city, 693.\\n545. Obs. V. Hence the dative in this construction generally\\nis equivalent to the preposition eig, Ttoog, im, c. with the accu-\\nsative. Further, to this rule belong\\n547. II. Verbs which signify\\n1. To profit or hurt to please or displease to reverence or\\nto yield to shew to seem to appear.\\n2. To favour or assist and the contrary, to pray to, or en-\\ntreat.\\n3. To command, exhort, or address to obey or disobey to\\nserve or resist.\\n4. To fit or accommodate to use and resemble.\\n5. To give to, or to trust to approach, to meet or to follow.\\n6. To reproach with, to censure, to reprimand or rebuke, to be\\nangry with.\\n548. Exc. dm or ds opcu, Task, governs the genitive; lla-\\ncoficu and liraveva, always the accusative.\\n549.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 8. Many of these verbs sometimes govern the da-\\ntive, and sometimes the accusative, according as their action is\\nviewed by the writer as directed to, or exerted upon, the object.\\nIn the former case they are viewed as intransitive verbs in the\\nlatter, as transitive.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0265.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "248 DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. 149.\\n550. Rule XXIII. Verbs implying connec-\\ntion or companionship, govern the dative as,\\nOfiiXsTv tin, to associate with any one.\\n551. In this construction, the dative is considered as corres-\\nponding to the ablative in Latin (517-2). To this rule belong\\n1. Verbs compounded with avr, b^iov, fisrd (with) as, ov^v\\ntin, to live with any one.\\n2. Verbs after which 6vv, b\\\\iov, \\\\ivza, may be supplied con-\\nsistently with the sense, such as those which signify\\n(1.) To follow {with), to converse, to mix, to be reconciled,\\nto dwell (ivith).\\n(2.) To contend, or strive with, or against, c.\\n552. Obs. 9. Verbs signifying to contend, c. in one\\npoint of view may come under the principle referred to 543, and\\nhence are sometimes followed by an accusative with noog but\\nthen they signify more properly to attack.\\n553. Obs. 10. If a dative of the manner or instrument (627)\\nfollows the verb [iiyvvfM, to mix, instead of the dative of the per-\\nson associated with, the genitive is used, governed by the word\\nin the dative; as, Maia Aihg iv cpilornri [iiyeiGa, Maia\\nBEING EMBRACED BY JUPITER.\\n554. Note. To the principle of this rule may be referred the con-\\nstruction of the dative, expressing repetition or succession as, d villa\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a09-vilXri, storm upon storm allov 3* av allot 7tQoo~idoi,q, you might see\\none and then another (scil. rushing to the regions of Pluto).\\nFor the dative, construed with the passive voice, see 604.\\n\u00c2\u00a7149. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL\\nVERBS.\\n555. Rule XXIV. Impersonal verbs govern\\nthe dative as,\\ne Gti [jioi, it is lawful for me,\\nsdo^s avzcp, it seemed proper to him (i. e. he determined).\\n556. Obs. 1. Special Rule. Atl, hXKuitbi, diet-\\nCptQtl, fltTtOTL, /LLtXsi, \u00e2\u0082\u00acvSs%\u00e2\u0082\u00acTCCl, and 7lQOC)1]X\u00c2\u00a3C 9", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0266.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "149. DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. 249\\nwith, their compounds, govern the dative of a per-\\nson with the genitive of a thing as,\\ndsT nolXcov coi, you have need of much.\\n\\\\iSTScri \\\\ioi rovrov, I take part in that.\\ntl ds ttqogtJxsi sfAol Kogivdicov what are the Corinthians to me?\\nFor the principle of this rule, as it respects the genitive, see\\n505-1.\\n557. Rem. 1. The dative of the person is frequently omitted.\\n558. Rem. 2. The nominative, agreeing with the impersonal,\\nis frequently used instead of the genitive as, diacpsosi ri aoi\\nvovto, or tovrov how does this concern you\\n559. Exc. I. J si and frequently take the\\naccusative of the person with the genitive of the\\nthing; as,\\nov ydg gcov pe 8si dscrmcj^dzcov, for I do not want your oracles,\\novds zi as %of] ravzyg dcpQoavvijg^ you have no need of this folly.\\n560. Obs. 2. From analogy, the derivative substantives xqsco,\\nXQEicQ, XQSia, are often construed with the accusative and geni-\\ntive as, ifis ds %qsco yiyvsrai aizijg, I have need of it tig %QEia\\na spov what need have you of me\\n561. Exc. II. xQri, TtQSKBi, and del, it behovetli,\\ngovern the accusative with the infinitive as,\\n%Q*1 (W g) TToiqouGxrai tijv sigrjvqv, we ought to make peace,\\noocpcozsoovg yuo ost fioozcov shai ftt ovg, It behoves those who are\\nwiser than men to be gods.\\n562. Obs. 3. The dative is used in certain phrases in which\\nit appears to depend on an impersonal or some other verb under-\\nstood viz.,\\n1st. After cog to show that a proposition is affirmed, not as\\ngenerally true, but only with respect to a certain person as,\\npaxQCtv cog ysgovti TtQovazdlrjg boor, you have travelled a\\nlong way for an old man scil. cog cpaivEtai ysgovti, long,\\nas it appears to an old man.\\n871E17ZSQ si ysvvcdog cog io6vri,but since thou art noble in\\nappearance i. e. cog eixucou iazl idovri, as a person\\nhaving seen you may suppose.\\n2d. To express the opinion or judgment of a person with or\\nwithout cog: as, a iyco riunaa rolg cpgovovaiv sv, I have\\n11*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0267.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "250 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 150.\\ndone honour to you according to the judgment of the wise\\ni. e. cog doxei roig, c. as it appears to those who are wise.\\nHence the common phrase, cog ipoi, or cog y ipoi (scil. 8oxei),\\naccording to my judgment.\\nFor the dative governed by adverbs, see 655 and 664.\\n\u00c2\u00a7150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE.\\n563. The accusative in Greek, as in other languages, is used\\nto express the immediate object of a transitive active verb, that\\non which its action is exerted, and which is affected by it as,\\nhctpftavco %i\\\\v acJTtida, I take the shield. When used to ex-\\npress the remote object of a verb, or after verbs properly intran-\\nsitive, it is governed by a preposition understood.\\n564. Rule XXV. A transitive verb, in the\\nactive or middle voice, governs the accusative as,\\nyvco i oeavtov, know thyself.\\njJQ7ia\u00c2\u00a3ov ttjv jzofov, they plundered the city,\\naya bv avdoa npag, thou honourest a good man.\\n565. Obs. 1. Several verbs in Greek are used in a transitive\\nsense, and have an accusative as their immediate object, which\\nin Latin are considered as intransitive, and followed by some\\nother case. They are chiefly the following viz.,\\n1st. ttsi co as, tzei eiv nvd, to persuade any one.\\n2d. v@qi\u00c2\u00a3cq as, vftoi iv Tivci, to insult any one sometimes\\nEi g Tiva.\\n3d. adixscd as, adixeTv nva, to injure, or do injustice to any one.\\n4th. Several verbs which signify to assist, to profit, to injure as,\\ncocpelsco, ovtjfii, eveq^eteco, \u00c2\u00a7la7zrco, and with these verbs the\\nadverbs more, very, are expressed by the accusative neuter\\nof the adjectives tiXei cov, fiEyag, viz. nltov, \\\\iiya.\\n5th. The verbs clfisiftopcu, avTUfAEt fiofA,a(, TipcooEopai as, clfiEi-\\nfiEG ai ziva, to remunerate any one zijicoQEiG cd nva.\\n566 Note 1. Some of these verbs govern other eases, but then\\nthey generally convey a different idea thus, w q I e tv rwa, to assist\\nany one w p i A f tv twu, to be useful to any one.\\n567. Obs. 2. Many verbs are followed by an accusative, not\\nof the object on which the action is exerted, but to which it has", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0268.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 251\\nan immediate reference. Verbs thus used are properly intransi-\\ntive, and the accusative is governed by the force of a preposition\\nin composition with the verb, or understood after it. These are\\nsuch as the following viz.,\\n1st. TiQOG AvvtG) as, tzqocjxvveTv viva, to bow the knee to any one,\\nto adore.\\n2d. doovopooeoj as, doovcpogsTv ziva, to be a spearsman to any\\none. So also,\\n3d. imzQ07zeveiv, to be a tutor or guardian.\\n4th. Xav dvEiv, to escape the notice of, or to remain unknown to.\\noth. w aveiv, to come before, prevent, or anticipate.\\n6 th. EmltiTiaiv, to be wanting to, or to fail.\\n7th. dnodidodGXEiv, to run away from.\\n8th. a7T0fidy8odai, to ward off 6 t uvvvai or imoQXEiv nvd, to\\nswear by any one.\\n9th. To these may be added, intransitive verbs expressing some\\nemotion or feeling as, to be ashamed of, or afraid of, any\\none to compassionate any one, c. c, which are followed\\nby the accusative of the object thus, aldovvzai tovg doyov-\\nrag, they respected the rulers rig dv rdds yrftifiEiEv who\\nwould rejoice at these things dXysiv n, to be grieved at\\nany thing ftaQQUv ri, to take courage with respect to any\\nthing. The accusative in such cases may be governed by a\\npreposition understood as, im, tzeqi, y.ard or by the par-\\nticiple of a transitive active verb, to be supplied as, oqcqv,\\ndxovcov, c. seeing, hearing.\\n568 Note 2. Instead of the accusative, many of these verbs are\\noften followed by a genitive or dative, according to the rules for these\\ncases.\\n569. Ob s. 3. Special Rule. The infinitive\\nmpod or part of a sentence is often used as the\\nobject of a transitive verb instead of the accusa-\\ntive as,\\nJtyco ndvrag EioyEQEiv, I say that you should all con-\\ntribute.\\ndEi^drco cog ov A dln ij Xt yco, let him shoio that I do not\\nSPEAK THE TRUTH.\\n570. Note. The infinitive is also used instead of the genitive and\\ndative after verbs governing these cases. 714.\\n571. Obs. 4. In constructions of this kind, the object of the\\nverb is frequently expressed twice. First, in a noun or pronoun", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0269.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "252 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 150.\\nin the case required by the verb, and Secondly, in a dependent\\nclause as, avdQco7tovg ze oida oia Titnov aoi vq) Eomzag, 1\\nknow men what things they have suffered from love jcovug qo-\\nfisecu p) iiEtapaXXoioi, you fear the lonians lest they revolt clq\\ni/xov [As fivrjG e bnoTa. etiquggov do you remember me what things\\nI did This construction is especially common with the demon-\\nstrative pronoun in a sort of apposition with the clause which is\\nthe object of the verb, 396-5, 6 it is also sometimes used in\\nLatin (see Lat. Gr. 445, Obs. 2) but the English idiom requires\\nthese and similar sentences to be rendered as follows know\\nwhat things men have suffered from love You fear that the\\nlonians will revolt Do you remember what things I did\\n572. Obs. 5. The accusative is often governed by a transi-\\ntive verb or participle understood as, ge dt; qrjg 8edQay.tr ca\\nza.de (sc. eqcozoj), but thee, (I ask) dost thou confess thou didst\\nthese things 6 e zi\\\\v nooyvoioa (sc. e%cov), the man with (hav-\\ning) the purple robe.\\n573. Obs. 6. In this way, the words ovo^ia, vipog, nli-flog,\\nevqog, and others, are frequently construed in the accusative as,\\niTZTtoOQOiiog Gzadtov zb nlazog (sc. e%cQv), a race course {hav-\\ning) THE BREADTH of a Stadium.\\n574. Obs. 1. In like manner the accusative, apparently in\\napposition with an entire proposition, or placed in the beginning\\nof a sentence, to express the leading idea, may be considered as\\ndepending on some preposition or verb understood as, Eh r);v\\nxzdr x)[A.\u00c2\u00a3v MeveIeco Ivnrp mxouv, let us slay Helen (sc. sig, in\\norder to or, noiovvzEg, causing) bitter grief to Menelaus prpi-\\nga de a\\\\p izco (i. e. ttsqi, or y.aza, {inzEQa), as to your mother\\nlet her return.\\n575. Obs. 8. Special Rule. An intransitive\\nverb used transitively, governs the accusative as,\\ntio1e{ielv tt61e(xov, to wage war.\\nThis is done\\n1st. When the accusative is a substantive of a similar significa-\\ntion with the word that governs it as, fjj fitov ?jdi szov y he\\nlives a very agreeable life.\\nNote. To this principle of construction may be referred such phra-\\nses as qiQovnv /.liya (scil. (f q6vt}ua), to be proud a dvara fiev yyovu,\\n(sc. qi^ovf j/iiara), think as bccomcth an immortal.\\n2d. When they only signify to cause that state or feeling which\\nthey express as intransitivea as, rj^er xei qcc, he caused the", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0270.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7151. ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 253\\nhand to move forward, i. e. he stretched out the hand al\\natffou o tov a i ydXa y.al fish, the fountains caused milk\\nand honey to flow i. e. the fountains fiowed with milk and\\nhoney. So Virgil\\nEt durae quercus sudabunt roscida mella.\\n576. Obs. 9. A passive verb used in an active sense governs\\nthe accusative, 195, Obs. 5, and 612 as, rjQvnvzai nooeiav, they\\nrefused a passage.\\n\u00c2\u00a7151. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND\\nGENITIVE.\\n577. Many transitive active verbs, together with the accusa-\\ntive of the direct object, govern also another word to which the\\naction has an indirect or remote reference, in the genitive, dative,\\nor accusative, as the nature of that reference may require.\\n578. Rule XXVI. Verbs of accusing, con-\\ndemning, acquitting, and the like, govern the ac-\\ncusative of the person with the genitive of the\\ncrime as,\\nduaxopai ge OEiXiag, I accuse you of cowardice.\\nanolvcQ 68 zr\\\\g alziag, I acquit you of this blame.\\n579. The genitive after verbs of accusing, is often governed\\nby a preposition or some other word interposed, by which the ex-\\npression is rendered more emphatic as,\\niyodifjazo (pt) zovzcov avzwv he accused me of these same\\nevExa, things.\\ndicoxco 08 7Z8o\\\\ ftavdzov, I accuse thee of a capital\\ncrime.\\nq \u00c2\u00a3vysiv In alzia qjovov, to be accused of murder.\\n580. O65. 1. Verbs of accusing, c. are such as im ^sifit,\\nyodcpopou, diay.oj, iTZcuzidoficu, to accuse or criminate cpEvya,\\nto be accused, or to defend aigsco, to gain one s suit ala^i, to\\nlose one s suit dixat.w, to judge Xayydvco, to commence a suit\\ninika\\\\i$dvo\\\\i(a and dvziXapftdvoftai, to blame, c. U7tolv(o, us\\\\i-\\nj][Ai, a.7Z0\\\\p7]cpi(s0[A,ai, c. to acquit.\\n581. Obs. 2. Verbs of this signification compounded with\\ny.azd take the person in the genitive, and the crime or punish-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0271.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "254 ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. \u00c2\u00a7152.\\nment in the accusative as, xatTiyoQOWi gov gtolgiv, they charge\\nsedition against you. Sometimes the crime or punishment is\\nalso in the genitive as, xatayivcooxco gov ftavdrov or -Q-avdrov\\nbut the punishment, seldom, except the word davdiov, and the\\ncrime, only after xctTijyoQsco as, naoavbyoxiv avtov xartjyoQeTv.\\n582. Obs. 3. Verbs of accusing sometimes govern the dative;\\nas, iyxcdoS ooi 7ZQoadociav f I accuse thee of treason.\\n583. Rule XXVII. Verbs of hearing, enquir-\\ning, learning, c. govern the genitive of the per-\\nson with the accusative of the thing as,\\nijaovae rov dyytXov ravza, he heard these things from the\\nmessenger.\\nnvv dvm ai tl nvog, to hear any thing from any one.\\nThe genitive here is probably governed by ano or ix.\\n\u00c2\u00a7152. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND\\nDATIVE.\\n584. A transitive active verb governs the accusative and\\ndative when, together with the immediate object of the action, it\\nis followed by the person or thing in relation to which it was ex-\\nerted. The more common constructions of this Mnd are com-\\nprehended under the following rule viz.,\\n585. Eule XXVIII. Verbs of comparing,\\ngiving, declaring, promising, and taking away,\\ngovern the accusative and dative as,\\nvniGyryzoiiai o~oi dsxa rdlavta, I promise you ten talents.\\nXovyov djAvvcu toig dXXoig, to avert the plague from others.\\n586. Obs. 1. After verbs of promising, declaring, and the\\nlike, the promise or declaration, forming part of a sentence, and\\nsometimes a number of sentences, often stands as the accusative\\nwith the dative of the person as,\\n^Xt^avdoog dn(oT8ik8 roTg ElhjGi sbv avtov ipqyiaaa-\\nai, Alexander ordered the Greeks to vote him a god.\\nei7i8 pot ri avrcp XQV^Vf ie me what you would do\\nWITH HIM.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0272.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "153. VEEBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 255\\n587. Obs. 2. Instead of the dative of the person, the accusa-\\ntive with noog is often used, and sometimes without it?\\n588. Obs. 3. In all constructions under this rule, both in Latin\\nand Greek, the verb, together with the accusative after it, is to be re-\\ngarded as expressing the amount of what is done to the remote object\\nin the dative. Thus in the expression narras fabulam surdo, the words\\nnarras fabulam express the whole amount of what is done (surdo) to the\\ndeaf man. With verbs of taking away, the English idiom requires the\\ndative to be rendered by from as, eripuit mihi gladium, he forced the\\nsword away from me. On this account, some have supposed that the\\ndative in such expressions in Latin is governed by some such word as\\nexistentem understood and others, to obviate the difficulty, have given\\nthe Greek an ablative. All this perplexity arises evidently from over-\\nlooking the principle of the construction. While the Enghsh idiom ex-\\npresses that from which a thing is taken away, the Latin and Greek,\\nwith no less elegance, on the general principle of the rule, express in\\nthe dative, that to which the act of taking away is done. Thus in the\\nabove expression, the words eripuit gladium together, express what is\\ndone (mihi) to me. So also Terence Seni animam extinguerem ipsi\\nadolescenti oculos eriperem, to the old man, I would put out the\\nbreath to the young man, I would put out the eyes. In Greek, Qi-\\nfit,o~Ti 6iy.ro dinaq, to Themistis, he took away the cup i. e. taking away\\nthe cup was what he did to Themistis according to the English idiom,\\nhe took away the cup from Themistis. [See Hunter s Notes on Liv. B. I.\\nChap. I. line 2. ^Eneae Antenorique, fec]\\n589. Obs. 4. Verbs of giving, govern the genitive and da-\\ntive when their direct object is in the genitive, according to Rule\\nXV. as, fist ad id co {al aoi roov xqjjiautgw, I share the property\\nwith you.\\n153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES.\\n590. Many verbs are followed by the accusative not only of\\nthe immediate, but also of the remote object hence,\\n591. Kule XXIX. Verbs of ashing and teach-\\ning, clothing, concealing, depriving speaking or\\ndoing well or ill to, and some others, govern two\\naccusatives, the one of a person, the other of a\\nthing as,\\nOrjfiuiovg XL W ara Xl tr l aav i ^ey sought money from the\\nThebans.\\ndidaaxovai rovg naidag acocpQO- they teach their youths pro-\\ncvvvv, bity.\\nti Tzotj iGoo avtov ivhat shall I do to him", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0273.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "256 VERBS GOVERNING- TWO ACCUSATIVES. 153.\\n592. Obs. 1. The immediate object of verbs which signify\\nto do m to speak is the action done or the word spoken\\nthe remote object is the person or thing to which it is done or\\nspoken; thus,\\ntcoieiv dya- d (scil. soya) ziva, to do good to any one.\\nXtyeiv xaxd (sc. ETtn) ziva, to speak evil of any one.\\n593. Instead of these adjectives with verbs of this significa-\\ntion, the adverbs ev and xaxwg are frequently joined thus, y.a-\\nxwg noisiv zivd, to do a person evil ev Xtysiv zivd, to speak well\\nof a person. Sometimes these words are in composition with the\\nverb; as, svloysTv, xaxoloyeiv, EVEqyEZElv, xaxovgyew in which\\nthe accusative becomes the direct object, and is governed by the\\ncompound transitive verb; as, xaxovQyEiv zivd, to maltreat a\\nperson. This corresponds to the English mode of expression, to\\nmaltreat a person, to eulogize a person.\\n594. On the same principle several verbs, such as loidoos o-\\nfiai, Xv\\\\iaivo\\\\iai, c. which are usually followed by a dative, fre-\\nquently take an accusative; as, oXnv z\\\\v noXiv XvficuvEo ai,\\nto abuse the whole city.\\n595. Obs. 2. When a verb admits of either of the words\\nthat follow it, as its immediate object, they are both put in the\\naccusative thus, ivdvsiv nvd zov xizcova, to clothe a person with\\na tunic, and, to put a tunic on a person, convey the same idea.\\n596. Obs. 3. A transitive verb, besides the accusative of the\\nimmediate object, may be followed by the accusative of a noun\\nof similar signification with itself; as, ov Zevg cpilu navzoujv\\ncpiloznza, whom Jupiter loves with great affection ivimjae zovg\\nfiuofidoovg z)\\\\v Iv Maoa avi fid%nv, he conquered the barbarians\\nin the battle of Marathon w gun guv ndvzag zovg ozoazicozag\\nzovg fjieyiazovg ooxovg, they bound all the soldiers with the\\ngreatest oaths.\\n597. Obs. 4. When tzoieTg cu, with a noun derived from a\\ntransitive verb, is used as a circumlocution for the verb itself, it\\nwill of course be followed by two accusatives thus, ttoieig cci\\nz?]v (id qo iv for fiav dvEiv V7z6fxvyaiv noiEiadca for vnoiivav\\nnoiEiad-ai zi\\\\v dQ7tayr t v for dond^Eiv, as, 6 aevij xcu dvdod7Toda\\naonay\\\\v noir\\\\Gd\\\\iEvog, plundering the furniture and slaves sc.\\nmaking plunder of c.\\n598. Obs. 5. Verbs which signify to call, or name, choose,\\nreckon, make, constitute, and the like, besides the accusative of the\\nobject, take also the accusative of the name, office, character, c.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0274.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "154. CASES CONSTKUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 257\\nascribed to it; as, (jTQarqybv avtbv dnio8iS,Ev, he appointed\\nhim general. In this construction the verb efoai is frequently\\ninterposed thus, 6oq i6T?iv ovofid vai rbv dvdoa, or rbv dvdoa.\\nthai, they call the man a philosopher, 743-2d.\\n599. Obs. 6. The accusative neuter of pronouns and adjec-\\ntives is often admitted in this construction, as well as with verbs\\nwhich govern the genitive or dative, when the accusative of the\\nsubstantive could not be used as,\\nzovro lie qdixtjGE, he injured me in this.\\ntt %QU iiai avxeij for what may I use it\\n600. Obs. 7. Instead of the second accusative, many verbs\\nunder this rule frequently take the genitive or dative and, on\\nthe other hand, some verbs which are usually followed by an ac-\\ncusative with the genitive or dative, sometimes take the double\\naccusative thus, og dq noXka xdx dvd-Q(Q7toiGi (for dv Qcortovg)\\nicooyei, who verily inflicted many evils on men dnooTEQEiv tivoc\\nid %Q?][iaTa, and r x v XQvpdtcQv, to deprive a person of his goods.\\n601. Obs. 8. The second accusative is often to be explained\\nby a preposition after such verbs as TZQOxaXs co, dvayxd \u00c2\u00a3co, u.no-\\nXQivofxai, and verbs which signify to divide, as, diatom, 8d\u00c2\u00a3co,\\nc. as, 7iQ0xuleTad-ai tiva (sg) aaovdag, to invite a person to\\na treaty; Kvgog to GzodxEvpa xartveifiE (elg) dcoosxa fJtSQrj,\\nCyrus divided the army into twelve parts.\\n602. Note. With verbs of dividing, the whole which is divided is\\nsometimes put in the genitive, and the word (xiqoq, /xoiqa, c, referred\\nto the verb as, do )dey,a TIeqgwv q v).al du^Qrivrau, the tribes of the Per-\\nsians were divided into twelve, for, the Persians were divided into twelve\\ntribes /aolgaq du ilhv y.al Innrnv y.al b7thr j)v, literally, he divided\\nthe parts of cavalry and infantry into six i. e. he divided the cavalry\\nand infantry into six parts. This construction is imitated in Latin, Cic.\\nde Orat. Deinde eorum generum quasi gucedam membra dispertiat, for ea\\ngenera quasi in quwdam membra, g.\\n154. CONSTRUCTION OF CASES WITH THE PASSIVE\\nVOICE.\\n603. The passive voice is usually followed by a genitive of\\nthe doer, governed by the prepositions vno, ix, nana, noog, and\\nconsequently, the government of the case falls under the rules for\\nprepositions as, p/ vixoj vnb tov xuxou, be not overcome of evil.\\nSometimes, though very seldom, it follows the preposition in the\\ndative as, vnb cwtQanuig dioixtiGOai, to be governed by viceroys.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0275.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "258 CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 154.\\nBut instead of this, and equivalent to it, the dative without a pre-\\nposition is common hence the two following rules viz.,\\n604. Rule XXX. Passive verbs frequently\\ngovern the dative of the doer as,\\ningdrtEro avroig ra zijg no- the affairs of the city were con-\\nXewg, ducted by them,\\nnsnoinrai poi, it has been done by me.\\n605. Note. This construction most commonly takes place with the\\nperfect passive, and the dative is equivalent to the genitive with vno,\\nwhich is in common use; as also tcqoc, and sometimes na.qd, ex. or i$,\\nand cbro. On the same principle, the verbal adjectives in to c; and riot;,\\nhaving a passive signification, govern the dative of the doer, 528.\\n606. Rule XXXI. When a verb in the active\\nvoice governs two cases, in the passive it retains\\nthe latter case as,\\nxazi]yoQSO[j,ai xXonijg, I am accused of theft\\nido t] fioi naaa s^ovcia, all power is given to me.\\nfiovGtyJjv fisv vno Aa\\\\inqov being taught music by Lam-\\nnuidev eig, prus.\\n607. Obs. 1. Any passive verb may be followed by an ac-\\ncusative of similar signification with itself, on the principle laid\\ndown 596 as, rvntetai nXtjyag noXXdg, he is struck with many\\nbloivs.\\n608. Obs. 2. When a verb in the active voice governs the\\naccusative with the dative of a person, the passive frequently re-\\ntains the former case, the latter being used as the subject of the\\nverb. Thus, the same idea may be expressed in three different\\nways; viz.,\\n1st. With the active voice as, 6 dijpog iniazevas Avxovgycp r\\\\v\\nirig noising smjieXeiaVy the people committed the care of the\\ncity to Lycurgus.\\n2d. By the passive voice with the latter case as, /Ivyovoyo?\\nini.G7Ev n vno xov dfaov ij rijg noXscog inifieXtia, the man-\\nagement of the city ivas entrusted to Lycurgus.\\n3d. By the passive voice with the former case, according to the\\nObs. as, AvxovQyog z)\\\\v rtjg noXecog inifitXtiav vno rov\\ndfj[A,ov IniGTEvd i], Lycurgus was entrusted with the manage-\\nment of the city by the people.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0276.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "155. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 259\\nThe following are examples of this construction ol imrsTpap-\\n[Ae poi ttjv cpvlay./jv, those entrusted with the watch for oig rj cpv-\\nlaxrj inithqanto rrjv tf ix %eiqgjv aQTid^ofxai, she is torn from\\nmy hands for ?j ix %\u00c2\u00a3iqgjv donaCzruLi.\\n609. Hence, also, such phrases as the following Jfidioneg\\nTTaodaXmg ivrjfifitvoi, the Ethiopians girded ivith panthers skins\\nXsiTtsi dt /.toj \u00c2\u00a3yy\u00c2\u00a3yoa[A{i8V}jv ^vv /-fi-aza, he leaves a tablet inscri-\\nbed with writings because in the active voice it would have\\nbeen Ivanxuv Al ionaoi 7tao8a)Jag iyyoucpeiv %w fj(iaza 8t).-\\nrcp. The accusative, in almost all such cases, may be explained\\nby supplying y.atd. This construction is not used in Latin, ex-\\ncept in a few instances, which are manifest Graecisms e. g., in-\\nscripti nomina regum fores, flowers inscribed with the names\\nof kings. Lat, Gr. 525.\\n610. Note. This construction, used in Latin only as a Graecism, is\\ncommon in English with such verbs as, to ask, teach, offer, promise,\\npay, tell, allow, deny, and the like as, He allowed me great liberty\\npassively, great liberty was allowed me, or, I was allowed great liberty.\\nSo, They were offered (to) me, or, I was offered them. See Ana-\\nlytical and Practical English Grammar, 812, 813. Crombie s Etymolo-\\ngy, P- 2?0.\\n611. Obs. 3. On the same principle the part affected (505-3),\\nis often put in the accusative after the passive voice thus, instead\\nof to Toavpcc ixov imdeiTai, my wound is bound up, the genitive\\nis changed into the nominative to the verb, and the nominative\\nor part affected into the accusative thus, (iya) imdaofiai, r 6\\nTouv[ia L I am bound up as to my wouxd noofir^evg ixei-\\nqsto to ?j7zao, literally, Prometheus was torn out as to his\\nliver i. e. his liver was torn out. See also 622.\\n612. Obs. 4. When the passive is used in a middle sense\\n(195, Obs. 5), it becomes deponent, and may be followed by an\\naccusative in the same manner as the active voice as, naotoy.tv-\\naofJLtvoi Tidvra e7z).sov, having provided every thing, they sailed\\nriQvijvTai TTOQSiav, they refused a passage, 576.\\n\u00c2\u00a7155. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.\\n613. Words and phrases are often thrown in between the\\nparts of a sentence in an adverbial manner, to express some cir-\\ncumstance connected with the idea of the simple sentence, and\\nwhich do not depend for their case on any word in. the sentence", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0277.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "260 EEMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN. 156.\\nto which they belong, but on a preposition, or adverb, or other\\nword understood as,\\ni^ekavvsi Gtad-fiovg Svo Eig Iaaovg, xal ivrav a sfAEivEv rifil-\\nqug ZQEig, he advanced two days journey to Issus, and\\nremained there three days.\\nfiEydXrj Gizovdrj Ttdvza ETtQaziEio, every thing was done with\\nGREAT HASTE.\\nUnder the general name of circumstances may be included\\nwords which indicate, 1. The remote cause or origin, 156 2.\\nA particular qualification or direction of a general expression,\\n157 3. Cause, manner, or instrument, 158 4. Place, 159\\n5. Time, \u00c2\u00a7160; 6. Measure, 161 1. Price, \u00c2\u00a7162; 8. Excla-\\nmation, 163.\\n\u00c2\u00a7156. I. THE REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN.\\n614. Rule XXXII. The cause, source, or ori-\\ngin, and the part affected, are put in the genitive\\nas,\\nfA.axd.Qiog vr t g tv /rjg, happy from his fortune.\\ncpiXti avzov ttjQ aQETtjg, he loves him on account of his virtue.\\nivxov XQatEiv cot cor, to take a wolf by the ears.\\n615. Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often\\nused, governed by xard, did, c. understood.\\n616. Obs. 2. The circumstance of cause expressed by the\\ngenitive, differs from that expressed by the dative the genitive\\nexpresses the remote or moving cause the dative, the immediate\\nor effective cause.\\n617. Obs. 3. The material of wdiich a thing is made is ex-\\npressed in the genitive as, 6%Ediai dicp EQCov, rafts made of\\nskins. See 456.\\n618 Note. The genitive of the material is considered by some\\ngrammarians as depending on ix or ccno understood and an argument\\nin favour of this ellipsis is drawn from the circumstance of ex or ano\\nbeing sometimes expressed. In all such passages, the preposition seems\\nto contain a more direct reference to the material than could be done\\nby the common construction, especially if a passive participle be like-\\nwise used as, td^a l\u00c2\u00a3 uddfiavroq 7if7ioi.Tif.iiv)], a scat made of adamant.\\nSometimes the dative is used for the genitive, when the material of", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0278.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7157. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 261\\nwhich any thing is made may be considered also as the means by which\\nit is made as, at /xev yao x Qaacrcri xixivywzai, oX ikiq ccv xi\\nsome were made of hoe t some of ivory.\\n\u00c2\u00a7157. H. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION.\\n619. A particular qualification of a general expression, made\\nin English by the phrase in respect of il with regard to, is\\nexpressed by the genitive and dative or, more briefly, as fol-\\nlows\\n620. Eule XXXIII. Respect wlierein is ex-\\npressed by the genitive, sometimes in the dative,\\n444.\\nI. In the Genitive as,\\niyyvzaza avzdp iifu yivovg, I am very near him in respect of kin.\\ndaavg dtvdocov, thick ivith trees.\\nTikrfiioi ulh jlwv, near (in respect of) each other.\\n621. The genitive is used\\n1. After syeIj in the sense of to be (se habere), with such adverbs\\nas so, ag, oncog, Ttcog, ovzcog, xaloyg, c. as, 7zaidsiag ovzcog\\nsysi, he is so in inspect of learning y.aloog s%eiv f^txr^g, to be\\npretty drunk foco is used in the same way as, Tellog zov\\nfiiov ev fawv, Tellus being ivell advanced in {respect of) life.\\n2. After other verbs as, inu-fuaftai uotjog, to be in haste with\\nrespect to the battle.\\n3. After adjectives as, dnaig uqqs vcov naldcov, childless with\\nrespect to sons i. e. without male offspring.\\n4. With adverbs as, tzqocjcq doEZijg dv?jxeiv, to carry it far ivith\\nrespect to virtue.\\n5. With substantives as, dyyeh a zijg Xwv, the relation con-\\ncerning Chios.\\n6. With entire propositions; as, el nazqog vt fiei ziv oxqav zov\\ny.alcog ttquooelv doxeiv, if he possesses any care of his\\nfather, in respect or his appearing to prosper.\\n622. Obs. 1. Respect wherein is also put in the accusative\\ngoverned by xazd understood viz., when the idea expressed by\\na verb or adjective is to be more accurately determined by an\\nadditional circumstance as, zov ddxzvlov dXyco, I am pained", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0279.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "262 CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 157.\\nin my finger; %eqei(ov ov depag, ovds qjot vag, inferior nei-\\nther in body nor mind Ttodag gtavq JdyjXXevg, Achilles swift\\nOF FOOT.\\n623. Note 1. This is the construction so often imitated by the Latin\\npoets thus, Os humerosque deo similis. Lat. Gr. 538.\\n624. Note 2. The accusative in this construction is in signification\\nadverbial, and hence is frequently used as an adverb thus, doy^v, above\\nall, originally xd/oq, quickly xiloq, finally xr\\\\v nqwxr\\\\v, at first, c,\\nnard being understood. So also such expressions as to havxiov, on the\\ncontrary xo liyoixzvov, according to the proverb, c.\\nII. In the Dative.\\n625. This case is used in a sense nearly similar,\\nto express that with respect to which a thing is\\naffirmed to be or take place. This usage, in Greek,\\nmay be illustrated by the following examples\\n1. a^iog i\\\\v xravaxov rrj noXei, he was worthy of death, with\\nrespect to the state i. e. he was guilty of a capital crime\\nagainst the state.\\n2. y,oli d)j [isdiev yalETtoXo yoloio Trjlefiaxop, and now they\\nlaid aside their grievous anger against (with respect to) Tele-\\nmachus so tycoyE lidoo^iai JtyiXXiji \\\\le$e\\\\iev ybXov, I will\\npray him to lay aside his anger against Achilles.\\n3. to fitv e\u00c2\u00a3co\\\\)ev dnTOfisvcp cmpa ovx ayav -deofibv i)v, the\\nsurface of the body was not very hot when one touched it\\n(lit. with respect to one touching it).\\n4. E7Zi8a[j.v6g ioti nbXig iv de^ia egtzXeovti tbv Joviov xoX-\\nTtov, Epidamnus is a city on the right hand as you enter\\n(with respect to one entering) the Ionian bay.\\n5. dvcodexdrn 8e oi ?)wg xEtpe vqj, the twelfth day since he lay\\n(to him lying).\\n6. HqcixXei fiev 8tj oaa avzol Alyvntiol qiaai thai eteci ig\\nJ^fiaaiv, the Egyptians themselves tell how many years passed\\nfrom Hercules (or since tlie death of Hercules) to Amasis.\\n1. Tiprjv aovvpevoi MsveXdcp, looking for the advantage (or\\npleasure) of Menelaus.\\n8. oQxnGafievoi, Q-eolgi, dancing in honour of the gods.\\n626. Rem. Respect tvherein is also sometimes expressed in\\nthe dative governed by iv understood as,\\nttogI rayvg, swift of foot.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0280.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "158. CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT. 263\\n158. III. THE CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT.\\n627. Rule XXXIV. The cause, manner, and\\ninstrument, are put in the dative as,\\nyoficp E7iQaTtov, I did it from fear.\\niyevero tcpds zq TQoncp, it happened in this manner.\\nTratdaasiv (tdfidco, to strike with a stick.\\n628. Obs. 1. The cause or motive may be considered as in-\\nternal or external. The internal cause represents the act as pro-\\nceeding from some particular state or disposition of the subject,\\nor quality residing in it, and contains the answer to the question\\nfrom what? or whence? and consequently may generally be ren-\\ndered from evvoia y avdco, I speak from good-will. The\\nexternal cause represents the action as caused by something with-\\nout the agent, and may generally be rendered for, on ac-\\ncount of, sometimes according to, in consequence of; as,\\niq{]liaoiv maiqo\\\\iEvog, elated with, or in consequence of riches\\nAeovzivtov xaTOixiGei, for (i. e. in order to) the re-establishment of\\nthe Leontines, the motive being derived from the end avpid\u00c2\u00a3cQ\\nrrj uttoxIeicjei pov tcov ttvXcov, I am astonished at the shutting\\nup of my gates.\\n629. Obs. 2. In this construction the dative expresses the\\nnearer or immediate cause, the more remote being usually ex-\\npressed by the genitive, or by did with the accusative (615) as,\\ndo EVEia Gcopdrcov dice r?jv (juodsiav v7ie%coqovv, they (the\\nLacedemonians) gave way, from the weakness of their bodies in-\\nduced BY WANT OF PROVISIONS.\\n630. Obs. 3. The dative of the cause is probably governed\\nby the preposition dftqji, tteqi, or Ini understood. Sometimes\\nthey are expressed but whether with or without a preposition,\\nthe whole expression is adverbial in its nature and hence, disre-\\ngarding its case, a neuter adjective or pronoun is sometimes put\\nin the same construction with it, in the accusative as, ei nvog\\n{AEya ?/v to aco/ACC q v6si, r\\\\ ZQOtyrj, ?j dftcpotSQa, if the body of\\na person was large naturally, or by nourishment, or both.\\n631. Obs. 4. The dative of the manner is governed by iv\\nor avv understood, and may be considered as adverbial. Hence,\\nperhaps, verbs of punishing are followed by the punishment in\\nthe dative; as, Qniiiovv riva d-avdtoi, cpvyfj, c. to punish any\\none with death, with banishment, c.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0281.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "264 CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 159.\\n632. Obs. 5. The dative of the instrument or mean may be\\na person as, roig naQOvaiv itsfyit.Bv, he built the wall by\\nMEANS OF THOSE WHO WERE PRESENT. It is also put with Sub-\\nstantives as, xivrjang zcp ccofiaii, motions made with the\\nBODY.\\n633. Note. Hence the construction of xQrjcr av with the dative;\\nthat which we use being considered as an instrument. On the same\\nprinciple, the dative is put after other verbs which imply the idea of\\nusing; Tiy.juaiQta at, rolq 7Zqog iv M/AoXoyrj^ivovt;, to infer from what was\\ngranted i. e. to use as proof s the things formerly granted.\\n634. Obs. 6. Instead of the dative, the prepositions iv, U7t6,\\ndid, ovv, with their cases, are sometimes used.\\n159. IV. CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE.\\n635. The oircumstances of place respect motion to, or from,\\nor through, a place, and motion or rest in a place in all of\\nwhich the Greek writers generally use a proper name with a\\npreposition thus, i\u00c2\u00a3 Jldqvcov, from Athens elg Bquzavviav, to\\nBritain iv Thikty, in Pylos dia zJjg Ttolecag, through the city.\\nBut,\\n636.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Kule XXXV. The place where, without\\na preposition, is expressed in the genitive or da-\\ntive; as,\\nJlgyeog, at Argos MaQU oovi, at Marathon.\\n637. Obs. 1. In this construction the genitive may be gov-\\nerned by inl or moi\\\\ and the dative by iv understood. The\\npreposition is also often understood before common nouns de-\\nnoting place as, iq^ead ov xlioujv, they two come to the tent.\\n638. Obs. 2. The genitive after slg, to a place, or iv, in a\\nplace, is governed by a substantive understood as, tig adov (sc.\\nd()fA,ov), to Hades iv slqyzog (sc. ttoIei), at Argos, 451.\\n639. Obs. 3. The terminations {ri and 07, added to a noun,\\ndenote at a place as, ayooxri, in the country QtjfirjGi, at\\nThebes 8s and je, to a place as, ^{r^vaade, to Athens y.h-\\nmnvde, to the tent {tev and xre, from a place as, xXiGiq e P\\navttlero iyypg, he took a spear from the tent, 324.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0282.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "160, 161. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 265\\n\u00c2\u00a7160. V. CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIME.\\n640. Rule XXXVI. Time when is put in the\\ndative time lioio long, in the accusative thus,\\nwhex as, tjfit oa tqii:r d on the third day.\\nhow loxg as, rgsTg olovg fiijpag aaQSfmvsv, he remained\\nthree whole months.\\n641. Obs. 1. When the reference is to a fixed time at which\\na thing took place, the dative is used as in the rule but if the\\nidea of duration is implied, it is put in the accusative as, rag\\ntjfiSQag y.al tag vvv.rag, by day and by night sometimes in the\\ngenitive as, izaxcoos fib] Uoay.bjeitj roctp noon ocar irsav, Her-\\ncules distressed us informer years.\\n642. 055. 2. Time how long, may respect the time during\\nwhich, since which, or after which, some event took place. The\\nfirst is put in the accusative, as above the second is more com-\\nmonly expressed in the genitive as, n o 1 o v avrovg ovy i(6ga-\\nxa yqovov, I have not seen them for a long time the third,\\ngenerally in the dative as, ov itoXkatg i^itQaig varsoov, not ma-\\nny days after. But sometimes in the genitive, when protracted\\nand indefinite as, ixsuss ovx acpixrstrai irav [avqicov, he\\ncomes not thither in tex thousand years. In this, however,\\nthere is some variety.\\n\u00c2\u00a7161. VI. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE.\\nThe circumstances of measure respect magnitude, distance,\\nand the measure of excess, as follows\\n643. Rule XXXVII. The measure of magni-\\ntude is put in the genitive as,\\navdoiag dvcodtxu n-jj^tav, a statue of twelve cubits.\\n644.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule XXXVIII. The measure of die-\\ntance is put in the accusative, sometimes in the\\ndative as,\\n12", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0283.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "266 EXCLAMATION. 162, 163.\\nEcpecog a7i\u00c2\u00a3%ei TQiav 7j[ieq(qv bdov, or 6#o5, Ejohesus is distant\\nthree days 1 journey.\\nTzevzsxaidexa nii%Eig vxpco i] to vdooo, the water rose fifteen\\nCUBITS.\\n645. Obs. When measure of magnitude or distance is found\\nin the nominative after a substantive verb, or in the accusative\\nafter an infinitive, \u00c2\u00a3he construction is according to 436.\\n646. Rule XXXIX. The measure of excess is\\nput in the dative after the comparative degree\\nas,\\nivnavro) noE6[}vTEQog, older by a year.\\n647. Obs. Hence the expressions nollo), oli yoj, figcc/Ei, c.\\nwith the comparative. It is, however, sometimes put in the ac-\\ncusative as, noXv psi^cov, much greater noXVov d^Eivcov, much\\nbetter.\\n\u00c2\u00a7162. VII. CIRCUMSTANCE OF PRICE.\\n648. Rule XL. ThepW ?6 of a thing is put in\\nthe genitive as,\\ndbg rovro doaxiiiig, give this for a drachma.\\n649. Obs. The price is put sometimes in the dative, with the\\npreposition em expressed or understood as, em {.uo-d cp fiEydXcg,\\nfor a great reward. Sometimes in the accusative as, nmoa.6y.Ei\\n6 yay.bg nana nobg aoyvoiov, the wicked man sells every thing\\nfor silver.\\n163. VIII. EXCLAMATION.\\n650. Rule XLI. Exclamations of praise, in-\\ndignation, compassion, c, are put in the geni-\\ntive, sometimes in the accusative as,\\nrtjg avaidstag, the impudence\\ncpev Tov dvdgog, Alas the man.\\nco i[M deikuiov, wretched me", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0284.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "164, 165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 267\\n651. Obs. Sometimes with the genitive, there is an addition\\nof the nominative as, o \\\\ioi toov ifimv iyw xaxow, ah my mise-\\nries, lev, oval, oi, and co, govern the dative as, 1(6 poi, woe\\nis me.\\n164. CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS.\\n652. Adverbs are joined to adjectives, verbs, and other ad-\\nverbs, to express some circumstance, quality, or manner, of their\\nsignification.\\n653. Many adverbs in Greek have the force of prepositions\\nin Latin and English. These are often joined with substantives,\\nas will appear in the following rules. They are also sometimes\\nused as substantives or adjectives as, ano tots, from that time\\n6 \u00c2\u00a3%cn avd-Q0J7tog, the outward man. 373-2d.\\n654. Rule XLII. Derivative adverbs com-\\nmonly govern the case of their primitives as,\\na cog 7j[A,G)v, in a manner worthy of us.\\nliahaia ncivTwv, most of all.\\nOfioicog Tolg uXkoig, in a manner similar to the rest.\\ntzclqe a vtja, without the ship.\\n\u00c2\u00a7165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS.\\n655. Adverbs having the force of prepositions govern the\\nsame case with the prepositions which, in meaning, they resem-\\nble thus, opov, apia, together, having the force of avv, govern\\nthe dative evexa, on account of, resembling did, governs the\\ngenitive. This general principle authorizes the two following\\nrules\\n656. Rule XLIII. Some adverbs of time,\\nplace, and quantity, likewise of number, order, and\\nexception, govern the genitive as,\\nov ytjg eifii where am I\\na%Qi Tijg 6? ]{i\u00c2\u00a3Q0v ijfitQag, to this day.\\n657. Obs. 1. To these may be added adverbs of cause, com-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0285.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "268 ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 165.\\nparison, distinction, concealment, separation, or exclamation and\\nalso nouns used adverbially, as, %aoiv, dixqv, ivcomov, c. as,\\ndixrjv TtorafMtiV, like rivers.\\n658. The adverbs which come under this rule are the follow-\\ning avev, ccteq, dr/a, %wqiq, without dvTixov, d.vxv/.ovg, dnav-\\ntixqv, against, opposite dxQi, [*\u00c2\u00a3XQh ty even t\u00c2\u00b0 ^xa f evey.ev,\\non account of; iyyvg, TzXrjaiov, dyxh daaov, near ixrog,\\n8XT06 EV, without ivtog, egco, eiaco, evzog ev, within nh)v,\\nTTaosxzog, except, but \\\\ietcl\u00c2\u00a3,v, among omaa, omafiEV, be-\\nhind 7T0O6 EV, before moav, iaix m, beyond, c.\\n659. Exc. 1. ayfi an d ^S sometimes govern the dative.\\n660. Exc. 2. 7iki\\\\v, except, has sometimes the nominative\\nafter it; as, 7tlr]v ol zcov naidtov diddoxaloi, except the\\nteachers of the boys.\\n661 Note. Adverbs of the final cause are frequently omitted as,\\nsyoa^a tovdf, I wrote for this reason, sup. evexa.\\n662. Obs. 2. Adverbs of time, place, c. are frequently\\nchanged by the poets into adjectives; as, oids 7iavr\\\\\\\\iEoioi\\n[Aolftfi eov ildoxovro, they propitiated the god with song the\\nWHOLE DAY. 381.\\n663. Certain adverbs are joined sometimes with one case,\\nand sometimes with another as follows\\n1st. dfAfiiya, dfxixiyotjv, lyyvg, iyyv Ev, ndoEyyvg, avvsyyvg, i$tjg,\\niqiE^Jjg, 6%\u00c2\u00a3d6v, 6%e\u00c2\u00a76 ev, avzo6%Ed6v, are put with the gen-\\nitive or DATIVE.\\n2d. dyyj, dy%6d~i, iy.7to8cov, nlijolovj ErtiTtooa Ev, oftener with\\nthe GENITIVE.\\n3d. dvdnahv, E^7Za,hv, oftener with the dative.\\n4th. EiGoo, pEGCpa, TtdoEx or TtdoE^, tie qi%, with the genitive or\\nACCUSATIVE.\\n5th. dsvgo, with the dative or accusative.\\n6th. a%Qi, dxQig, ^e xqi, ^xqig, with the genitive, dative, or ac-\\ncusative.\\n664. Kule XLIV. Adverbs of accompanying\\ngovern the dative as,\\ndfia rj ?jf**QK, at day-break.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0286.jp2"}, "287": {"fulltext": "166. NEGATIVES. 269\\n665. Rule XV. Adverbs of swearing govern\\nthe accusative as,\\nv\\\\ /Jia, by Jupiter fid rods GY.tnrqov, by this sceptre.\\n666. Obs. 3. In sentences of this kind, fid commonly denies,\\nunless joined with vai; and vi) affirms, unless joined with a nega-\\ntive.\\n667. Obs. 4. Adverbs of showing are put with the nomina-\\ntive as, idov 6 av Qomog, behold the man ids ?j \\\\ii\\\\rno fxov\\nxcd ol ddalqoi fiov, behold my mother and my brethren.\\n166. NEGATIVES.\\n668. The Greek language has two simple negatives, ov and fii],\\nfrom which all the compound negative terms are formed, and to\\nwhich, in their use and manner of construction, they are similar.\\nBetween these two negatives and their respective compounds there\\nis a total difference of use, the foundation of which is as follows\\n669. 1. Ov is the direct and independent negative, which\\nexpresses a positive denial without reference to any thing else\\nas. ova idtlco, I ivill not ovx dya ov ian, it is not good ov-\\ndslg tzuq^v, no one icas present. A direct negation of this kind\\ncan never be expressed by prj or its compounds.\\n670. 2. on the other hand, is uniformly a dependent\\nnegative. It is therefore used in all propositions in which the\\nnegative is represented, not as a fact, but as something dependent\\non the conception, as a condition, supposition, c. and hence\\nit is used in the manner following\\n1st. After the conditional conjunctions si, idv, ?}v, orav, inuddv,\\ntag, dv, and those which intimate an end, design, motive, as,\\nIva, cog, onag, acre as, si [iij oo ag )Jya, if I do not\\nspeak correctly; a7ze8tj[jit]GS iva fiif dvayxaa f L x.Z.l., he\\n(Solon) went away that he might not be compelled, c.\\n2d. Without any such particle, fiij is always put with the im-\\nperative mood in all the tenses with the subjunctive, in the\\naorists used imperatively and with the optative, when it ex-\\npresses a wish as, \\\\ii\\\\ \\\\iz fidlle, or \\\\ii\\\\ fie pdlrjg, do not\\nstrike me (i?j yivoiro, may it not be.\\n3d. Mi) is used after relatives, and with participles when they\\nexpress a condition or supposition as, rig da oovvai dvvazai", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0287.jp2"}, "288": {"fulltext": "270 DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 167.\\nizs ocp a fiy avzbg s%8i; who can give a thing to another,\\nif he has it not himself? a ova avzbg fast would mean,\\nthat which he has not himself. So also, 6 fit] mazevcov, if a\\nperson does not believe. But 6 ov mazavcov, is, one who\\ndoes not believe.\\n4th. Mr] is used with infinitives whether they are dependent upon\\nanother verb, or used with the article as a verbal noun (714)\\nas, dvdyxn zovzo pr t ttoisiv, it is necessary not to do this\\nzb fitj noiEiv, the not doing.\\n5th. With verbs which signify to fear, to warn, and the like, pj\\nis used, like ne in Latin, where a positive expression is used\\nin English as, dsdoixco p/ zi yivrjzai, vereor ne quid acci-\\ndat, am afraid that something may happen. Sometimes\\nthe preceding verb is understood as, p/ zovzo dXXcog fyy\\n(scil. ds doMa), I fear lest this be otherwise.\\nSo also, after verbs which signify to forbid, deny, prevent,\\nrefrain, disbelieve, to be cautious, and the like, it is frequently\\nput with the infinitive, where the negative is not used in\\nEnglish as, uTzavdco zovzbv fit] naoiEvai, I forbid this man\\nto enter.\\n6th. Mq is sometimes merely an interrogative particle like num\\nin Latin, giving, however, greater emphasis to the question\\nas, [if] dveXsLV fie av eXsig loilt thou kill me\\n671. 3. A negative placed between the article and its noun,\\nconverts it into a sort of compound negative term as, tj ov did-\\nIvaig z x v yeqjvoav, the not destroying of the bridges 7) ifA,-\\nneiQia, the inexperience.\\n672.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rem. In the same manner, it is used with certain verbs,\\nnot as a negative, but to reverse their meaning; thus, (fVfjih I say,\\nov cpyfu, I deny, contradict idco, I allow, ovx idco, I forbid\\nvmcxvEOfiai, I promise, ovx vnurxviofiai, 1 refuse thus, ovx\\nscpaaav zovzo eIvcu does not signify, they did not say that this\\nwas, but, they denied that this ivas, or, they said this ivas not.\\n167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES.\\n673. When to a proposition already negative, and also to\\nverbs which signify to deny, to contradict, to hinder or oppose,\\nand the like, other qualifications of a general nature are to be\\nattached such as ever, any body, any ivhere, fec. it is usual to", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0288.jp2"}, "289": {"fulltext": "167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 271\\ndo this by compounds of the same negative. Hence the follow-\\ning rules\\n674. Rule XLVI. Two or more negatives,\\njoined to the same verb, strengthen the negation\\nas,\\novx \u00c2\u00a37T0i7i68 rovro ovdapov ovdeig, no one any where did this.\\n675. Obs. 1. To the negation of the whole, is joined, in the\\nsame sentence, the negation of the parts; as, ov dvvarai ovre\\nXeyeiv ovre noieiv, he can neither speak nor act.\\nNote. Consequently, in translating such propositions into English,\\nonly one negative can be used.\\n676. Rule XLYII. Two or more negatives\\njoined to different verbs, destroy the negation,\\nand are equivalent to an affirmative as,\\nov dvvaued*a XaleTv, we cannot but speak,\\novdeig bang ov yeXdaerai, there is nobody who will not laugh, i. e.\\nevery body will laugh sari being understood with ovdeig.\\n677. Obs. 2. Indeed, so common is the ellipsis of eari in\\nthis expression, that it is lost sight of, and the antecedent ovdeig,\\nwhich should be its nominative, is often attracted into the case\\nof the relative which follows as, ovdevi ozeo ovx aoiaxei, there\\nis nobody ivhom it does not please, for ovde)g orco, c. ovdeva\\nbvnvcc ov xarexXavaev, he caused every one to weep, for ovdeig\\near iv bvriva, c. there is no one whom he did not cause to\\nweep.\\n678. Obs. 3. It is also proper to observe the use of the nega-\\ntive in such sentences as the following xai ov ravra fitv ygdcpei\\n6 ibiXinnog roig 8 egyoig ov noieT, Philip does not write these\\nthings and not perform them i. e. think not that Philip writes\\nthese things and does not execute them where the first ov does\\nnot affect the verb yoacpei, but the two propositions together. It\\ndenies an assertion which might be thus expressed youyei (xev\\nov noiel de, he writes but does not execute. So also ov dq rcov\\nlilv yeiooreyvav earl ri negag r?jg eqyaaiag, rov avQ-qconhov\\n[iiov ovx tan, it cannot be that there is some object in the la-\\nbours of the artist, but none in the life of man.\\n679. Note. In phrases of this kind, the two propositions, as here,\\nare usually distinguished by fiiv and 5e; and the second is negative.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0289.jp2"}, "290": {"fulltext": "272 PREPOSITIONS. 168.\\n680. Obs. 4. Tn some phrases ov and fjtq are united as, ov\\nfit] and (A,)] ov. Ov \\\\ii\\\\ is a stronger and more emphatic negation\\nthan ov, and is used in the same way, 669. Mi] ot in general,\\nis only a stronger expression of [it], and is used in the same man-\\nner, subject, however, to the following modifications\\n1st. In dependent propositions, when the verb of the principal\\nproposition is either accompanied by a negation, or contains\\na negative idea in itself, fxij ov destroy each other, and may\\ngenerally be rendered that as, oi x dovovfiai fit] ov\\nyev\u00c2\u00a3G ai, I do not deny that it has taken place Tzei ofxai\\nya.Q ov zooovzov ovdsv coats {ii} ov y.alcog \u00e2\u0080\u00a2d avsTy i for I am\\npersuaded that there will nothing happen to me so bad but\\nthat shall die nobly.\\n2d. Mi] ov, after verbs signifying to fear, to ivarn, c, as above,\\n6*70-5th, render the sentence negative, which, with p/ alone,\\nwould be positive as, dtdoixa fii] ov n ysvnrai, I am afraid\\nlest something may not happen qjofiovpai fiy ov xaXbv\\nvereor ne non honestum sit, i fear that this may wot be\\nproper.\\n3d. In independent propositions with the subjunctive mood,\\njoined with ov makes the negative expression less positive\\nas, alia jU?) ovx {j didaxrbv i] aoezi], but virtue may per-\\nhaps be a thing not to be taught. The sentence may be ex-\\nplained by supplying an omitted verb, as ooa, or the like,\\nand be rendered literally but see whether virtue may not\\nbe, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a7168. PREPOSITIONS.\\n681. Prepositions are used to express the relation in which\\none thing stands to another. For the primary and various de-\\nrived meanings of prepositions in different constructions, see 124.\\nThe influence they exert over the words with which they are\\njoined, as far as it respects their case, is regulated by the follow-\\ning rules\\n682.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule XLVIII. Awl, cino, ex or i\u00c2\u00a3, and\\nnqo, govern the genitive only as,\\ndcp aXpbg avrl ocp aXpov, an eye for an eye.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0290.jp2"}, "291": {"fulltext": "168. PKEPOSITIONS. 273\\n683. Rule XLIX. 3 Ev and civ govern the da-\\ntive.\\n684. Rule L. Eig (or Sg) and dvd govern the\\naccusative.\\nObs. 1. Avd, among the poets, also governs the dative.\\n685. Rule LI. /lice, xard, /li^tcc, vtusq, govern\\nthe genitive or accusative.\\n686. Obs. 2. Metdy among the poets, also governs the da-\\ntive of a plural noun, or a noun of multitude as, peTa tQizdzoiai\\navaaaev.\\n687. Rule LII. ^Afxcpi, tcsql, \u00c2\u00a3jvi y nctQcc, nyog,\\nand vtvo, govern the genitive, dative, or accusa-\\ntive.\\nNote. For the meaning of the prepositions, as modified by the case\\nwith which they are joined, see 124.\\n688. Obs. 3. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, their\\ncase being understood. This is the case especially with iv in the\\nIonic and noog in the Attic. Hence, in the Ionic writers, they\\nare often put twice, once adverbially without a case, and again\\nwith a case or in composition with a verb as, iv Sis xcd iv Ms [i-\\n(pi, in Memphis also.\\n689. Obs. 4. Prepositions are sometimes separated from\\ntheir case as, iv ydo os jy vvxti ravTrj avcuooficu. In Attic,\\nthis takes place, according to the rule, with the conjunctions\\n[xev, de, ydQj ovv as, iv fiev yao EiDi jvrj ig fisv ovv tag Afti]-\\nvag and with noog with the genitive when it signifies^?*.\\n690. Obs. 5. Prepositions are often put after their case, par-\\nticularly by the Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic poets as,\\nvecov kno xal xlmdav. In the Attic prose writers, it takes place\\nonly in tzeql with the genitive. When so placed, the accent is\\nalways thrown back to the first syllable thus, uno nioi, c.\\n691. Obs. 6. When a preposition should stand twice with\\ntwo different nouns, it is often put only once by the poets, and\\nthat too with the second noun as, dlbg im y7jg, Horn, by\\nsea or land.\\n692. Obs. 7. A preposition is frequently understood.\\n12*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0291.jp2"}, "292": {"fulltext": "274 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 169, 170.\\n169. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.\\n693. Rule LIII. A preposition in composition\\nsometimes governs the same case as when it stands\\nby itself as,\\ni%?jlde 7?jg olxiag, he went out from the house.\\n694. Obs. 1. This is done when the preposition can be sepa-\\nrated from the verb, and joined with the substantive, without\\naltering the sense.\\n695. Obs 2. In Homer, Herodotus, and other old writers,\\nthe preposition is frequently found separated by one or more\\nwords from that with which it may be considered in composition\\nas, r\\\\\\\\nXv ano loiybv a\\\\ivvai (II. 1. 67), for q[uv ana\\\\ivvai loiyov\\nanb fiev 6803vzbv SXsaag (Herod. 3. 36), for osco vibv psr anonXs-\\naag. Hence, when the verb is to be repeated several times, after\\nthe first time, the proposition only is often used as, anolu nb-\\nXiv, anb 8s nariqa. Grammarians, however, consider the prepo-\\nsition in such cases as used adverbially, and not properly in com-\\nposition. Instances of the proper tmesis are very rare, especially\\nin the Attic prose writers.\\nSYNTAX OF THE VERB.\\n\u00c2\u00a7170. THE INDICATIVE MOOD.\\n696. The indicative mood is used, in Greek, when any thing\\nis to be represented as actually existing or happening, and as a\\nthing independent of the thought and ideas of the speaker. Hence\\nit is often used where the subjunctive, and sometimes the accusa-\\ntive with the infinitive, would be used in Latin as,\\n1. It is used after negative propositions with the relative as,\\nov8sig egti bang rovto ttoibi, there is no one ivho does this.\\nLat. nemo est qui hoc faciat. Lat. Gr. 636.\\n2. It is used in indirect interrogations, where the Latin re-\\nquires the subjunctive as, boars ri Tzoiovfisv, you see what\\nwe are doing. Lat. vides quid faciamus. Lat. Gr. 627.\\n3. It is used in quoting the language of another, stating what\\nis actual and fact, after on, cac, c, where the Latin uses the", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0292.jp2"}, "293": {"fulltext": "170. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 275\\naccusative with the infinitive, or the subjunctive with quod as,\\ntjyelXev oti ol noltjioi ecpevyov, he announced that the enemy were\\nfleeing. Lat. nunciavit hostes fugere, or hoc nunciavit, quod hos-\\ntes fug event.\\nTHE INDICATIVE IN CONDITIONAL PEOPOSITIONS.\\n697. The indicative, in Greek, is used in conditional propo-\\nsitions in various ways, as follows\\n1. When the thing supposed in the condition is regarded as\\na fact, and neither contingent nor uncertain, the indicative in any\\ntense is used with el in the condition, followed by the indicative\\nor imperative, and sometimes by the subjunctive used impera-\\ntively (709), without av in the conclusion as, el elm @w[A.oi, elm\\nxal deoi, if there are altars, there are also gods el e^Qovrtjae,\\ny.al ifitQaipev, if it thundered (as it did), it also lightened el\\nfiqovxrfiei, xal aatqmpei, if it shall thunder, it will also lighten.\\nThis accords with the Latin construction. Lat. Gr. 624-2.\\n2. When the thing supposed in the condition is not a fact, or\\nwhen a denial of it is implied, the indicative in the past tenses is\\nused with el in the condition, and with av in the conclusion\\nand here there are three cases viz.,\\n1st. When the reference is to present time, or to past and pres-\\nent time, the imperfect tense is used in both parts as, el ti\\neTyev, ididov av, if he had any thing (now), he would give it.\\nLat. si quid haberet, daret.\\n2d. When the reference in both clauses is to past time, the aorist\\nmust be used instead of the imperfect in both, or, at least,\\nin one of them as, ei ti eayov, edwv av, if I had had any\\nthing, I would have given it. Lat. si quid habuissem, dedis-\\nsem ovx av nooeXeyev, el p/ inimevGev dXnd-evaetv, he\\ntvould not have foretold it, unless he had believed he would\\nspeak the truth.\\n3d. When the condition refers to past time, and the conclusion\\nto present, the indicative aorist with el is used in the former,\\nand the imperfect with av in the latter as, el spa-d-ov, eyl-\\nyvwoxov av, if I had learned (then), should know (now).\\n698. Obs. The indicative without ei or av is sometimes used\\nin suppositions, where, in other languages, the subjunctive would\\nbe put as, Te vrjxa zrj ay vyaro), v.a\\\\ \\\\i anfoleae, suppose\\nthat 1 had been slain by thy daughter, and that she had made\\nan end of me.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0293.jp2"}, "294": {"fulltext": "276 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 171, 172.\\n\u00c2\u00a7171. IMPERATIVE MOOD.\\n699. The imperative in Greek is used as in other languages,\\nin addresses, entreaties, commands, c. The pronouns (being\\nthe nominative) are omitted, except where emphasis or distinc-\\ntion is required. In the use of this mood the following peculi-\\narities of construction may be observed viz.,\\n1. The second person sometimes stands for the third as,\\nallcc (fivlavtH nag tig, but let each one watch.\\nneXag rig v t, let some neighbour go.\\n2. As in English, the plural is sometimes used for the singu-\\nlar as, iroootX ETS, co nai narqi, come, my child, to thy fa-\\nther. Also, sometimes the singular, when more than one person\\nis mentioned as, sins [ioi, co JZcoxoazs g ts xal innoxgazsg.\\n3. In prohibitions with p/, the present imperative is most\\ncommonly used. If the aorist is used, (itj must be put with the\\nsubjunctive. The few exceptions to this rule belong to Homeric\\nusage.\\n4. The imperative after ohd on, oTatf o, olatf cog, seems to\\nbe used elliptically, and to have arisen from a transposition of\\nthe imperative as, oiatf cog noincrov hnowest thou in what\\nway thou must act (i. e. act, hnowest thou in what ivay ohd\\novv o doacjov hnowest thou what to do (i. e. do, hnowest thou\\nwhat?)\\n5. Sometimes the imperative is used for the future; as, n\\novv xeig co vojjiog ivhat then shall a law exist i. e. What\\nthen? (do you say,) let a law exist? On the other hand, the\\nfuture is still more frequently used for the imperative as, yvco-\\noeai AtQsidtjv Aya^itfjivova (for yvco i), recollect Agamemnon,\\nAtreud son. Especially is this the case with a negative inter-\\nrogatively as, ovxovv \\\\i idaeig will you not leave me alone\\ni. e. leave me alone.\\n172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS.\\n700. The subjunctive and optative moods represent an ac-\\ntion, not as actually existing, but rather as dependent upon, and\\nconnected with, the ideas and feelings of the speaker. The sub-\\njunctive represents this dependence as present the optative rep-\\nresents it as past (197-2). Hence the following general rule", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0294.jp2"}, "295": {"fulltext": "172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 277\\nI. The Subjunctive and Optative in Dependent Propositions.\\n701. Rule LIV. In dependent clauses, the\\nsubjunctive mood is used in connection with the\\nprimary tenses the optative, with the second-\\nary (199-3) as,\\nTTUQSifii tva idea, I am present that I may see.\\n7iaQr t v ha i doifu, I was present that I might see.\\nOn this general principle the whole construction of these\\nmoods depends, as may be illustrated by the following observa-\\ntions\\n702. Obs. 1. These moods are used after conjunctions whose\\nuse is to introduce a subordinate or dependent clause, in which\\nactual existence is not definitely expressed as, Iva, ocfga, wzcog,\\ncog thus, tXsig oyg avzbg syng ytoag do you wish that\\nyou yourself may have a reward? fit; \\\\l iQSxriQ, cacoteoog cog\\ny.s v\u00c2\u00a3r\\\\ at, provoke me not, that you may return the safer. This\\nsentence, which contains the direct address (oratio directa) of Aga-\\nmemnon to Chryses, has the subjunctive after cog, in connection\\nwith the present ioiftiQz. When this is afterwards related as a\\npast event, in the style of the indirect address (oratio obliqua), the\\nsubjunctive is changed into the optative; thus, amevcu ixsksvs\\nxai fit] SQe iXsiv, Iva ocog oixads eXxroi, he commanded him to\\ndepart and not provoke him, that he might return safe.\\n703. In like manner when a person, without quoting the di-\\nrect language of another, relates what was said by him, not as\\nactual and fact, but as a supposition or the opinion of that per-\\nson, as the reference must be to what is past, the optative is\\nused with on or cog prefixed; as, Elt^t fioi, on ij odbg cpeooi\\ndg t)\\\\v nohvj c. he told me, that the road would lead me into\\nthe city, c. See also 696-3.\\nWhen or i has been already expressed, it is often omitted before\\nsucceeding clauses in the same construction.\\nNote. On, that, is also used, in Greek, when the words of another\\nare quoted without change in direct discourse. It is then equivalent\\nto quotation marks only, and is to be omitted in translation as, ant-\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2/.oivaro, oti, BaGufciav ov/. av delalu?jv, he answered: I will not re-\\nceive the kingdom; Xaoiq av ilbnouv, otv r 2 2d)Qy.aitq, f.irj dav/xa^i ra\\nhyoueva, perhaps they (the laws) might say, Socrates, wonder not\\nat the sayings (lit., things said).\\n704. Obs. 2. Whena^ as\u00c2\u00a3 event is related in the present\\ntime (198, Obs. 1), the verb in the dependent clause may still be", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0295.jp2"}, "296": {"fulltext": "278 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. \u00c2\u00a7172.\\nin the optative and in like manner, after the historical tenses,\\nthe subjunctive is used when the event, though past, yet continues\\nin its effects and operation, to, and through, the present time.\\nThus, in the address of Minerva to Diomede, I removed the\\nmist from your eyes that you may distinguish (pcpgu yiv(6axr t g) a\\ndeity from a man in the field of battle. Here, however, there\\nmay be a change of reference, i. e. the subjunctive yivcoGxyg may\\nrefer, not to the time of the removal, but to the time of the ad-\\ndress, as if she had said, I removed the mist from your eyes\\nthat you may from this time forward distinguish, c. Such\\nchanges of reference are not uncommon in all languages.\\n705. Obs. 3. It was noticed, 197, Obs. 3, that the future in-\\ndicative is used in a subjunctive sense. Accordingly it is often\\nfound in a dependent clause, especially after oncog, in the same\\nconstruction as the subjunctive as, Cyrus deliberates (oncog\\n[iiJTTOze hi earai) how he may no longer be subject to his brother,\\nbut, if possible, (fiaailevGEi) may reign in his stead. Exetizeov\\nO7zcog aaqiale ezaza u7tiw[a,ev (subj.), xai oTtcog za imzrfiEia\\nQofxsv (fut.), We ought to consider how we may get away most\\nsafely, and obtain the necessary supplies.\\n706. Obs. 4. After adverbs of time, when the precise point\\nof time is not determined but left indefinite, the subjunctive and\\noptative are used. These are inr^v, inudav, ozav, o7Tozav, refer-\\nring indefinitely to the present, and so followed by the subjunc-\\ntive 87TEi, E7Z8i8/j, ore, ottoze, referring indefinitely to the past, and\\nfollowed by the optative as, Menelaus entertained him when\\n(from time to time) he came from Crete, otzoze KQtjtfi ep\\nixoizo. Here otzoze Koijztidsv Ixezo would mean, when he actu-\\nally came from Crete. The primary part of the sentence, then,\\nmay be considered as understood, when it happened, that he\\ncame from Crete.\\n707. Obs. 5. When the relatives og, oczig, ocog, onov, c.\\nrefer to definite persons or things, and to what actually took\\nplace, they are followed by the indicative mood. But if the per-\\nson or thing to which they refer is indefinite, and the whole pro-\\nposition affirms of past time, then the verb is in the optative\\nwithout av as, ovziva [aev ^aaiXr t a M^ei v, whatever monarch he\\nfound navzag ozcp evzv%oiev xzEivovzsg, slaying all whomsoever\\nthey might meet. On the other hand, if the proposition affirms\\nsomething of present or future time, the verb is in the subjunctive\\nwith av as, iv rj av t(av cpvlcav tzIeiozoi coat, c, in which-\\nsoever of the tribes there may be the greatest number, fcc. gfrsG e", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0296.jp2"}, "297": {"fulltext": "172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 279\\nOTioi av Tig rfirpai, folloiu ichere (it is possible that) any one may\\nlead the ivay. In such sentences the primary part may be under-\\nstood, such as it is possible that, it happened that, c.\\nII. The Subjunctive and Op tative in Independent Propositions.\\n708. Obs. 6. Both the subjunctive and optative are used\\nwithout being preceded by another verb, and so apparently in\\nindependent clauses. In all such instances, however, there is an\\nellipsis of the verb on which they depend.\\n709. I. The subjunctive is thus used,\\n1st. To command in the first person as, i cofiev, let us go, i. e.\\nit is necessary that we go and so of others.\\n2d. In forbidding, with pj or its compounds in the aorist, not in\\nthe present as, [ir t ofioayg, swear not.\\n3d. In deliberating with one s self; as, not Toancofiai, whither\\nshall I turn Ei7tcofiev rj oiycofisv, shall we speak or be silent.\\n710. II. The optative is thus used,\\n1st. To express a wish or prayer as, rovto jiij ye voito, that\\nthis might not be. In this case ei ds, ei, cog, Tzcog av, are\\noften used with the optative.\\nRem. A wish relating to what is past, or that cannot be realized, is\\nexpressed by the indicative of the historical tenses, with tt s, ii d\\nydq, ok, prefixed; as, (X s dwarbv r,v, would that it were possible. Or,\\nby the 2 aorist indicative of byiU.o) (onft/.ov, -iq, 200-8.) with the\\ninfinitive; as, ur\\\\nox oxptlov noihlv, would that I had never done it il\\nya.Q wqt/.i xvciv, O that he had died\\n2d. In connection with av, to express doubt, conjecture, bare pos-\\nsibility as, tivkg av zhv vopeig, they loere perhaps (or, it is\\nprobable that they were) shepherds and in volitions, to ex-\\npress, not a fixed resolution, but only an inclination to a\\nthing as, ifitcog av dsaaaiuriv, I would gladly see them.\\n3d. To express a definite assertion with politeness or modesty\\nas, ov% ?;x\u00c2\u00a3i ov8 av y^oi tiwoo, he has not come, and\\nwill xot come back i. e. I rather think it was his purpose\\nthat he would not come back.\\n4th. Sometimes it is used for the imperative, to convey a com-\\nmand or request in milder terms as, %tQQOig av eigcq, you\\nmay go in, i. e. go in.\\n5th. It is sometimes used for the indicative, to give an air of in-\\ndeterminateness to the circumstances of an action which is\\ndeterminate in itself; as, tcov veqqv ag xazadvaetav, the ships\\nwhich they may (or might) have sunk i. e. zvhich they have\\nsunk.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0297.jp2"}, "298": {"fulltext": "280 CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. 172.\\n6th. It is also used in a potential sense, to denote power or vo-\\nlition as, ov A av dv fiEivEiag avxov could you not with-\\nstand him i eh jGEisv av would he be loilling\\nIII. The Subjunctive and Optative in Conditional Propositions.\\n711. Obs. 7. The use of the indicative in conditional propo-\\nsitions has been noticed, 697. The subjunctive and optative are\\nalso used in conditional propositions, as follows\\n1st. Uncertainty in the condition, with an actual result, is ex-\\npressed by lav with the subjunctive in the condition, and\\nthe indicative future or imperative in the conclusion as,\\nlav ri e%(Q[iev dcoaopsv, if we have any thing we will give\\nit lav n 8%ng, dog, if you have any thing, give it.\\n2d. A mere hypothetical supposition with a determinate result,\\nputs the condition in the optative with si, and the result in\\nthe indicative as, ovg sdei zijg vvxzbg Tzaoayeveod ai nav-\\nGtqaxTa, si ti aqa [a,ij ttqo^coqoiv zoTg IgeXeXv ogi, who\\nwere to come in the night with the ivhole army, if success\\nshould not attend those who had entered. On the contra-\\nry, an actual case supposed in the condition with a hypo-\\nthetical result, would require the first in the indicative with\\nsi, and the last in the optative as, si ycto ^ds ravza oida,\\nv,ai TQ3V avooanoScov yavXoreoog av si nv if I did not know\\nthese things, /should be more worthless than the slaves.\\n3d. When the case is altogether hypothetical, the condition is\\nexpressed by the optative with ei, and the result by the op-\\ntative with av as, ei Tig ravza nqatToi, \\\\i(ya \\\\l av\\ncocpeltjGeis, if any one should do this he would greatly\\nassist me.\\nSometimes the subjunctive with lav or av, instead of the\\noptative, is put in the condition.\\n712. Obs. 8. All conditional propositions in Greek may be\\nturned into the infinitive or participle with av as, oiovrai ava-\\n[Ad%EG{rai av GVfifiayovg TtooglafiovTEg, they think they might\\nretrieve their fortune in war if they should obtain allies.\\nCONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE.\\n713. The infinitive mood expresses the meaning of the verb\\nin a general and unlimited manner, without the distinctions of\\nnumber or person, 197-4. In construction it may be considered", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0298.jp2"}, "299": {"fulltext": "173, 174. INFINITIVE WITHOUT SUBJECT. 281\\nunder the four following divisions viz., as a verbal noun with-\\nout a subject, as the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or\\nadjective with a subject absolutely after certain particles.\\n\u00c2\u00a7173. I THE INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN.\\n714. The infinitive, with the neuter article prefixed, 403-14,\\nis used as a verbal noun, in all the cases except the vocative\\nand, as such, is subject to the same rules of construction as the\\nnoun, being used in the nominative as the subject of a verb, and\\ngoverned, in the oblique cases, by verbs or prepositions.\\n715. Obs. 1. When the infinitive, with, or without, a clause,\\nis used as the nominative to a verb, or the accusative governed\\nby it, it is frequently without the article very rarely so after a\\npreposition as, naoiv ijiiiv y.az avsiv oqeO.ezai, dying is due to\\nall of us.\\n716. Obs. 2. Not only the simple infinitive, but the infini-\\ntive with the whole clause to which it belongs, may often be re-\\ngarded as a substantive, and stand in almost every variety of\\nconstruction in which a substantive can be placed as, Nom. zb\\nrovg uvOoconovg aiAaozdreiv ovdtv av{ia(jz6v (iazt), that men\\nshould err is nothing wonderful Gen. imto zov fx^dsva ano-\\n{fv^G-Ativ, that no one might r perish Dat. ha aniGzaoi zcq ifis\\nTezifitjo ai vrth daiftorcov, that they may disbelieve my having\\nbeen honoured by the gods Ace. iy.oiva zb {ii} naXiv sl eiv, I\\ndetermined not to come again.\\n717. Obs. 3. With the article alone, the infinitive is gener-\\nally equivalent to the Latin gerund as, tvexa zov IJyew, causa\\ndicendi iv zo) Ityuv, dicendo nobg zb Xiyav, ad dicendum.\\n718. Obs. 4. Without the article, it has often the force of\\nthe Latin supine as, ijlds Vt]ztjaai., venit quasitum rfiv uxov-\\neiv, Suave audita aiG tfGzog 6cpdi;vai, tuipissimus visu.\\n174. II. THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT.\\n719. Rule LV. One verb, being the subject\\nof another, is put in the infinitive as,\\n(fEvyeiv avzoTg uacpalJazeoov loziv, to fly is safer for them.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0299.jp2"}, "300": {"fulltext": "282 INFINITIVE WITHOUT SUBJECT. 174.\\n720. Rule LVI. One verb governs another\\nas its object, in the infinitive as,\\nijQ^aro Isysiv, he began to say.\\nRem. Both these rules apply to the infinitive with a subject, 175.\\n721. Rule LVIT. The infinitive mood is gov-\\nerned by adjectives denoting fitness, ability, capa-\\ncity, and the contrary as,\\ndsivbg Itysw, powerful in speaking,\\na^iog av{ia jai, worthy to be admired.\\nNote. It is also used after substantives as, l^ovalav yevea ai,,\\npower to become.\\n722. Obs. 1. The infinitive under these rules is in the same\\nclause with, and expresses the cause, end, or object, of the action,\\nstate, or quality expressed by, the verb or adjective that governs\\nit. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly in this way are\\nsuch as denote desire, ability, intention, endeavour, and the like\\nas, idslst yodcpsiv, he wishes to write deopai oov ilxrsiv, I beg\\nof you to come.\\n723. Obs. 2. The infinitive is sometimes placed after verbs,\\nto express the design or consequence of that which they affirm.\\nThus used it is governed, not by the verb, but by some such word\\nas coots understood as, iycov ode ndvta naosoysiv, i. e. coats\\nnccvta naosoyjsiv, I am here (so as) to furnish all things tjxopsv\\n(coots) iiav aveiv, we have come (in order) to learn.\\n724. Obs. 3. After a verb or adjective, a verb denoting an\\nincidental object not directly in view, is put in the infinitive\\nwith coats as, cptkotijiotatog ?jv coats navta V7i0[isivai, he was\\nvery ambitious, so as to endure all things, c. This construction\\ntakes place especially after such words as toaovtog, toiovtog, ov-\\ntcog, and the like.\\n725. Obs. 4. The infinitive is sometimes put after verbs or\\nadjectives which indicate some state or quality, in order to ex-\\npress the respect in which that state or quality obtains, and would\\nbe expressed in Latin by the supine, or gerund in do, and in En-\\nglish, by the substantive as,\\ncog id sir scpaivsto, as it appeared to the sight.\\nsiEiv avs{imoiv b^Loloi, like the winds in running.\\novds TtQOvcpaivst ids a ai, nor did he appear to the sight.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0300.jp2"}, "301": {"fulltext": "175. INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. 283\\n726. Obs. 5. The infinitive active is used often in Greek in\\nthe sense of the latter supine, or infinitive passive in Latin as,\\navijQ qacov (pvlaaaeiv, a man is more easy to be guarded against.\\nQdbia noiuv, things easy to be done.\\n\u00c2\u00a7175. III. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT.\\n727. 1. A subordinate or dependent clause containing a verb\\nand its subject, is connected with the leading or primary clause, in\\ntwo ways. First, by a conjunctive particle, such as on, cog, and\\nthe like as, Xiyovai on 6 izaioog zs i i]xe, they say that our com-\\npanion is dead. Here the verb is finite, and its subject in the nom-\\ninative. Second, without a conjunction as, Xsyovoi zbv Stuiqov\\nze vdvcu, they say that our companion is dead. In this case, the\\nverb is in the infinitive, and its subject, usually in the accusative.\\n728. 2. Sometimes both modes of expression are united in\\nthe same sentence as, ecszi Xoyog cog ^tg^vg ixopi^szo eg\\nzr v Jioirp nlcoovza 8i yav dv \\\\iov Hz qv [loviwv vnoXa^elv.\\nSometimes a sentence begins with the one form and ends with\\nthe other as, Xtyovai 8 i\\\\\\\\iu.g, dv,iv8vvov fiiov \u00c2\u00a3co~(iev, they say\\nthat we live a life free from danger as if it had been intended\\nto say, Xiyovai 8 fyag dy,iv8vvov ftiov ^f t v 735.\\nThe construction of the subordinate clause connected by the\\nfirst method mentioned above, is subject to the rules 138, 139\\nconnected by the second, it comes under the rules that follow\\n729. Rule LVIII. The infinitive mood in a\\ndependent clause, has its subject in the accusative\\nas,\\nzovg eovg ndvza elStvai t Xsyev, he said that the gods knew all\\nthings.\\n730. Exc. When the subject of the infinitive\\nis the same with the subject of the preceding verb,\\nit is put by attraction in the same case as,\\necpn shai azoazwyog, he said that he was a general.\\n731. 3. In this construction, the subject of the infinitive is\\ngenerally omitted, except when emphasis is required as, eqyn\\nai zbg elvcu ozQazijyog, ovx r/.elvovg, he said that he was a gene-", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0301.jp2"}, "302": {"fulltext": "284 INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. 175.\\nraZ, that they were not generals. This construction lias been\\nfrequently imitated in Latin thus, Sensit medios delapsus in\\nhostes. Virg. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis. Hor.\\n732. Obs. 1. In a few instances, constructions vary both\\nfrom the rule and the exception. Occasionally, the subject of\\nthe infinitive is in the nominative, when it signifies a different\\nthing from the subject of the preceding verb, and in the accusa-\\ntive, when it signifies the same.\\n733. Obs. 2. If the subject of the infinitive be the same with\\nthe object of the preceding verb, it may either be in the accusa-\\ntive according to the rule, or stand before the infinitive, in the\\ncase governed by the preceding verb thus,\\nxslsvca 60i zovro noislv, or r 7\\nt y 1 command you to do this.\\nxeIevoj as tovzo noisiv, J\\n734. In either case there is an ellipsis in the first form, of\\nas, the immediate subject of the infinitive and in the second, of\\ngoi, the remote object of the preceding verb. Both these modes\\nof construction are common, and sometimes they are intermixed\\nin the same sentence thus, Lysias, dt opai vficov to. dr/.cua ipn-\\nq iaaadru, iv vfiovfjLsvovg on, x.t.L, I beg or you to deter-\\nmine, justly considering that, c. Here vpoov stands before\\nthe infinitive governed in the genitive by deoficu, and yet irOv-\\nIxovjjLtvovg follows in the accusative, evidently agreeing with vfidg\\nthe subject of the infinitive understood. With equal propriety, it\\nmight have been put in the genitive.\\n735. Rem. Constructions of this kind, in which the end of a sen-\\ntence does not grammatically correspond to the beginning, are called\\nanacolutha. For other examples of this, see 535 and 728. The most\\ncommon form of anacoluthon appears to be, when the speaker commen-\\nces a period in the manner required by the preceding discourse, but\\nafterwards, especially after a parenthetic clause, passes over into ano-\\nther construction. This method of construction, however, is never\\nadopted by Greek writers unless something is thereby gained in con-\\nciseness, perspicuity, smoothness, or emphasis.\\n736. Obs. 3. When used in the passive voice, the subject of\\nthe infinitive is changed into the subject of the preceding verb,\\nor it remains unchanged in the accusative, the passive verb being\\nused impersonally as,\\nTJyETia Kvoog, a Q\\nv~ r ysvsoxTca Kaupvaov.\\nksyszai kvoov, r r\\nCyrus is said to have been n\\nrf -J 4i n Y the son of Camoyses.\\nIt is said that Cyrus ivas j J J", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0302.jp2"}, "303": {"fulltext": "176. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 285\\n737. Obs. 4. The same observation is true of the verb doxeT;\\nthus, doxei avzbg etvai, he seems to be or doneT avrbv shou, it\\nseems that he is. The following sentence unites the two y.al\\nfiijv yyyeXtai ye pa XV ^X V Q^ yzyovtvai xal noXXovg\\nze vavai, and indeed it was said that the battle was obsti-\\nnate, and that many died. In like manner, the adjectives dt xai-\\nog, 8/jXog, qaveoog, c, with the verb eijil, are used for the neuter\\ngender with iazi, as impersonals thus, dr/.aiog sifu, for dr/.aiov\\nioz(, c, it is just that I, c. d*jX6g eozvv, for dJf/.ov laziv av-\\nrov it is manifest that he 755.\\n738. Obs. 5. The case after the infinitive of a copulative verb\\n(437), must be the same with the case before it, if the word re-\\nfers to the same thing (438) as, Nom. ecpq (avzbg) ehai ozqazr r\\nyog, he said that he was a general Gen. /.azeyvcoxozoov rfiq pr r\\nxtzi -AoaL6 j6vcQV tivo.1, having learned that they are no longer\\nsuperior; Dat. icp i\\\\\\\\ilv eozi zb \u00c2\u00a3tzielx86i elv a i, it depends\\nupon ourselves to be reasonable. And this observation holds\\ngood whether the word before the infinitive be its proper subject,\\nor (that being omitted, 731), the subject or the object of the pre-\\nceding verb.\\n739. 05s. 6. Whatever case is required before the infinitive\\nby the preceding rules, it continues the same though preceded\\nby cog or cooze, or a preposition, because the preposition affects\\nnot the subject of the infinitive, but belongs to the infinitive it-\\nself, or to the whole clause thus, ovdslg znlixovzog eazco naq\\nv[iiv coaze zovg vb\\\\iovg naqa^ag \\\\i)\\\\ dovvai dr/.rjv, let no one\\nbe so great among you, that, breaking the laws, he can go unpun-\\nished ?jfia.Qzavov did rb fi?] Gocpol eivai, they erred be-\\ncause THEY WERE NOT WISE.\\n\u00c2\u00a7176. IV. THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.\\n740. Rule LIX. The infinitive is often put\\nabsolutely with the particles cog, coots, tvqiv, iixQh\\njusxQt, c, before it as,\\ncog IdeTv avd-Qconov, when the man saw.\\nttqIv dno aveiv zb tzuiMov, before the child died.\\ncog [mxqov fieydXo) elxdoai, to compare small with great.\\n741. Obs. 1. Qg, with the infinitive, is frequently used to\\nlimit a proposition in the sense of as far as thus, cog efxs ev", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0303.jp2"}, "304": {"fulltext": "286 THE PARTICIPLE. 177.\\n(A.t[ivrJ6 ai, as fa? as I recollect distinctly cog ye fioi doxeiv, as\\nit seems to me. But cog is frequently omitted hence such ex-\\npressions as, ov 7TolXcp loyco elneiv, in few words [mxqov deer,\\nlittle is wanting, almost noklov detv, much is wanting.\\n742. Obs. 2. The infinitive is often used for the imperative\\nmood, oqcc, [IXtTiE, gxotzsT, c. being understood; as, %aiqeiv\\nfj,8ta %cuq6vzcqv, xlaieiv psta vXaiovTcov, rejoice with them\\nthat do rejoice, and weep with them that weep. Sometimes, also,\\nfor the optative, dog, eXco, or Ev%o[iai, being understood as,\\nco Zev ev.yeveod-ai \\\\ioi Jl )]vaiovg tig dad at, Jupiter, may\\nit, be granted to me to punish the Athenians sometimes ex-\\npressed as, co Zev, dog ps Tiaao cu pogov narqog.\\n743. 05s. 3. The infinitive eivai is sometimes absolute and\\nredundant, both with and without the article viz.,\\n1st. After adjectives, adverbs, and prepositions thus, Show eivcu\\nfor excov, willing as, excov dv eivai tovto Tzou jcjaifit, I\\nwould willingly do this. So the phrases, to ovfinav eivcu,\\ngenerally tie y eivcu, with respect to you to pev TrjfieQOV\\nshcu, to-day at least xata tovto eivai, with respect to this\\nto vvv eivcu, now to en ev.eivoig eivai, as far as depends\\non them.\\n2d. After verbs of calling, choosing, making, c. as, coy ujttJv,\\nbvo\\\\ictQov 5i ye top dvdga eivcu, they ccdl the man a philoso-\\npher ol de 5v\\\\i\\\\iayov \\\\iiv eiXovzo eivai, they chose him as\\nan ally (598).\\n\u00c2\u00a7177. THE PARTICIPLE, 201.\\n744. Rule LX. Participles, like adjectives,\\nagree with their substantives in gender, number,\\nand case, 372.\\n745. Rule LXI. Participles govern the case\\nof their own verbs as,\\nol noXe^uoi to Xoylov eldozeg, the enemies knowing the oracle.\\ntovtcov \u00c2\u00a3{iov deope vov, I being in want of tJiese things.\\n746. The Greek language, having a participle in every tense\\nof every voice, uses it much more extensively than the Latin.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0304.jp2"}, "305": {"fulltext": "177. THE PARTICIPLE. 287\\nThe principal purposes for which it is employed are the follow-\\ning\\n747. I. A participle is joined with another verb agreeing\\nwith its subject, for the following purposes viz.,\\n1st. Simply to connect an accompanying with the main action\\nin the same subject. Thus used, the participle and verb\\nare to be rendered as two verbs with a conjunction as,\\niraotl cov zig dei^dzay, let any one come forward and shew.\\n2d. To combine the accompanying with the main action as the\\ncause, manner, or means of accomplishing it in which use\\nit is equivalent to the ablative gerund in Latin, as in the\\nfollowing examples.\\nCause; as, ii aoifjoag xazsypco^n dvazov for having\\ndone what (quid faciendo) was he condemned to die\\nMeans; as, sveoyszav avzovg ixzrjadfnjv, I gained them by\\nkindness (bene faciendo) Ini^opevoi ^aoiv, they live by\\nplunder (populando).\\nManner; as, tysvywv ixqevyei, he escapes by flight (fugien-\\ndo) zoXfi?](jag elgrjld e, he went in boldly (audendo).\\nThis construction is found also in Latin writers thus, Hoc\\nfaciens vivam melius, Hor. by doing this I shall live bet-\\nter as if, hoc faciendo, c.\\nNote. The participle thus used agrees with the agent in any case\\ne.g. in the dative as, a rovq avd-qwrtoiq ^do)y.av ol eol ua ovGi,\\ndtaxQtviw, which the gods have put it in the power of men to find out by\\nstudy; the accusative as, a \\\\t,earw ccQv /.i7jGuvxaq i) jueTQr jO avTaq rj\\nGT^Gavxaq ildtvcu, which we may know by counting, by measuring, or by\\n3d. It is used, to limit a general expression, by intimating the\\naction in respect of which the assertion is made; as, ddixstze\\ntrole fiov ao%ovz\u00c2\u00a3g, ye do wrong in beginning the war.\\n748. Obs. 1. In this way, the participle is used with verbs\\nthat signify any emotion of the mind, to show the cause of the\\nemotion; as, iftoficu (lev a eigidcov, lam rejoiced at seeing\\nyou; ovdmoze goi {iszccfiel/jGei ev aotyaavzi, you will never\\nrepent of having done a kindness.\\n749. II. The participle is used for the purpose of further de-\\nscribing a person or thing mentioned in a sentence, and may be\\nrendered by the relative and the verb or for connecting with a\\nstatement, some relation of time, cause, or condition, expressed in\\nEnglish by such words as when, while, after that; because,\\nsince, as; if, although, fec; the relation intended, and of", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0305.jp2"}, "306": {"fulltext": "288 THE PAETICIPLE. \u00c2\u00a7177.\\ncourse the proper rendering of the participle, will generally have\\nto be ascertained from the nature of the sentence itself, or from\\nthe connection in which it stands thus, meaaETito^riv tov irat-\\nqov vooovvtu, may signify, according to the context, I visited\\nmy comrade who was sick or when, or because, he was sick\\nds vdoa ph Tfinxrtvra ra%mg yvstcu, trees, though lopped\\n(WHICH HAVE BEEN LOPPED, AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN LOPPED,\\nwhen lopped, as to their branches), quickly grow again.\\n750. Obs. 2. When the article precedes the participle refer-\\nring to a word already expressed or easy to be supplied, the two\\nmay be rendered by the relative and the indicative as, 6 \u00c2\u00a3Q%6-\\nfievog, he that cometh, 402\u00e2\u0080\u00948.\\n751. Note. The participle, with the article before is frequently\\nequivalent to a noun designating the doer of the action expressed by\\nthe verb; as, ol yqaif- d/xivov 2o)y.oarrjv, the accusers of Socrates. There\\nis, however, this difference the participle expresses the doer in a state\\nof action, the substantive does not thus, 6 dovloi; is a man in the con-\\ndition of a slave 6 doidevow is one, at the time referred to, performing\\nthe part of a slave.\\nThe Participle as the Infinitive.\\n752. III. The participle, in Greek, is often used as the in-\\nfinitive, and has for its subject, according to the sense, either the\\nsubject or the object of the preceding verb, with which it always\\nagrees in gender, number, and case.\\n753. In the construction of the participle with its subject,\\nthere occur the following varieties viz.,\\n1st. The participle takes as its subject, the subject of the pre-\\nceding verb, and agrees with it in the nominative or accusa-\\ntive as, Nominative, ov itavGo\\\\iai yoacpcov, I will not cease\\nto write oloa \\\\rv?]rbg oor, I know that I am a mortal.\\nAccusative, as leyovGiv avxov (ispv-nG cu TTou jGavttt, they\\nsay that he remembers having done it, or, that lie did it.\\n2d. The participle agrees with the immediate object of the pre-\\nceding verb as its subject, in the accusative as, Gctcpcag xa-\\nrtpuxrov ydopaxa avzov vytiv syfteavra, I plainly perceived\\nthat he had infused poison for you.\\n3d. The participle agrees with the remote object of the verb as\\nits subject, in the genitive or dative. Genitive, as, ?/o~i?-o-\\n[x?]v ccvmov olofiivcov elvca GOtycorazmv, I perceived that they\\nfancied themselves to be very wise Dative, nijOtnozt iieze-\\nfjtshjoi [ioi GiytjGczvn, I never repented of having been silent,\\nor, that I was silent.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0306.jp2"}, "307": {"fulltext": "177. THE PARTICIPLE. 289\\n4 tli. When the verb is followed by a reflexive pronoun, the par-\\nticiple may agree either with the pronoun or the nominative\\nto the verb as, cvvoida ipavzco upaozuvcov or aiiaozavorzi,\\nI am conscious that I am doing wrong eavzbv ovdelg bfio-\\nloyec xaxovoyog cov, or, y.uy.ovoyov ovza, nobody confesses\\nthat he himself is wicked.\\nIbi. Obs. 3. The verbs after which the participle is thus\\nused, are 1st. Verbs of sense as, to see, hear, c. 2. Verbs de-\\nnoting any act or feeling of the mind as, to know, \u00e2\u0080\u00a2perceive, dis-\\ncern, consider, observe, experience, sheiv, recollect. 3. Verbs sig-\\nnifying to overlook, to permit, to happen, to persevere, bear, en-\\ndure, to be pleased or contented with, to cease, and to cause to\\ncease.\\n755. It is used, also, with adjectives signifying clearness; as,\\nd/p.og el Gvxocfdvzcov, it is clear that you are a sycophant. Some-\\ntimes on with the indicative is used as, evdrj.og cov on ?jG7tu^8Z0j\\nby its being manifest that he loved, 737.\\n756. Obs. 4. Instead of the participle with the verbs men-\\ntioned above, the infinitive is sometimes used but in that case,\\nthe idea expressed is usually different e. g., 1. alayvvofxai 71011)-\\noag, I am ashamed to have done it uiayvrouai TtoitjGai, I am\\nashamed to do it, and therefore will not. 2. 6 ytiiicov potato\\nytrouevog, the winter was come on, had actually commenced 6\\n/Etficor (q /zto yiyreadui, the ivinter was beginning to come on,\\nbut had not yet arrived. 3. ijxovea rbv Ji-uoadtvn tiyovza, I\\nheard Demosthenes speak yxovau rbv /Jijuoo tvn tiyeiv, I\\nheard (i. e. I am told), that Demosthenes says. 4. icpauezo\\ny.laioiv, he evidently wept kpaivezo yJ.ou eir, he seemed to weep.\\n5. With verbs to declare, to announce, the participle represents\\nthe thino- announced as a fact, the infinitive, as matter of report,\\nbut not asserted as a fact. With many verbs, however, it is in-\\ndifferent which construction is used; as, Zitficfooov iari ravru\\nrroayO^rui, or raiza ^vurpood lazi Troayfrtvzu, it is unfortunate\\nthat these things were done.\\n757, Ols. 5. After verbs of motion, the future participle is\\nused to point out the design or object of the motion expressed by\\nthe verb, and is rendered by the English phrase in order to\\nas, 68-/8 8 id a J cov coo^fxai, I leave hastened forward ix obdeb\\nTO TEACH THEE.\\n758. l n this construction ag is often interposed before the\\nparticiple as, 7iaQ mevd\u00c2\u00a3ovTo cog noUptpwyreg, they prepared\\nto make war.\\n13", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0307.jp2"}, "308": {"fulltext": "290 THE PARTICIPLE. 177.\\n759. Sometimes the present participle is used in this way\\nas, TitfiTzei [xs (pSQOvra, he sent me to carry. The future partici-\\nple after toyoucu is only a circumlocution for the future tense\\nas, sq%0[A,(u yoaGOdv, tor qiQacjcQ, 1 wilt speak 8q%ojagu vltiovu.-\\nvovpsvog, I shall die or, I am about to die.\\n760. IV. Joined with Xav dvoD, qj dvw, Tvy%dv(o diaralecoy\\nc, the participle is used to express the main action or state, and\\nrendered in the indicative, while the verb with which it is joined,\\nexpressing a subordinate circumstance, is often rendered as an\\nadverb thus, iXadEV v7tExqivyc6v, he escaped unpcrceived ihv\\n(povEa Xav divEi fiooxcov, he unconsciously feeds his murderer\\nEy jjv acpelwv, I took it away just before ezv^ev dmcov, he went\\naway accidentally erv%ov naqovzEg, they ivere accidentally pres-\\nent diazsXsL Traocov, he is continually present.\\n761 Note. The participle mv is wanting with adjectives, and some-\\ntimes without them as, rvyxdvtu y.altj (sc. owa), she happens to be\\nbeautiful. With a negative, q dvo may be rendered scarcely, no soon-\\ner as, ova scpfrqactv nv 6(.woi, they no sooner heard. Sometimes it is\\nfollowed by the infinitive instead of the participle as, novrj^bg dv\\nq 9dcm,\u00c2\u00a3 rilivrriaav nqlv, x. r. a wretched man would sooner die than,\\nc.\\n762. Obs. 6. In the same sense, these verbs stand sometimes\\nin the participle with other finite verbs as, dno tefysog dXzo\\nXaircov, he sprung unobserved from the wall tjvtteq tvy^dvcov\\nV7ZE(T%6[A,r]v, tvhich I happened to promise.\\n763. V. A participle with the verbs e\\\\\\\\iL ywopcu, vnaofa,\\n\u00c2\u00ab^co, and //xco, is often used as a circumlocution for the verb to\\nwhich it belongs, and these verbs take the place of auxiliaries;\\nthus, TtQO^E^rjy.ozEg r t 6av for 7tQ0EpE^ijy.EiGav, they had gone for-\\nward yij^iag s^sig for Eyijpag, you have married O-avfjiuaag\\ne%cq for TE av[A,axa, 1 have admired, fec.\\n764. Obs. 1. Instead of a simple verb signifying to go\\naway, the verb olyo\\\\ioLi is frequently joined with a participle\\nthe former, to express the idea of departure the latter, to con-\\nnect with it the idea of the manner, both of which may generally\\nbe rendered by a simple verb thus, \u00c2\u00a7%vi dnonzdyLEfVog, he de-\\nparted flying, i. e. he flew away dr^EZo qzvycov, he departed\\nfeeing, he escaped cp%ovTO dnod EOvtEg, they ran away o t %\u00c2\u00a3zui\\nxhircov, he is dead. Homer uses fiai vco in the same manner.\\n765. VI. The participle, in definitions of time, is often joined\\nwith the adverbs avzixa, sv vg, fiEta^v, ufia, the last, with the\\ndative as, cog avzi xa yevofievog, as soon as he ivas bom ueia^v", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0308.jp2"}, "309": {"fulltext": "178. THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 291\\noqvggow, during the digging a\\\\ia rep ?jqi ev vg aQ%Ofisvcp, on\\nthe first commencement of spring.\\n766. VII. The participles of some verbs, when joined with\\nother verbs, appear to be used in an adverbial sense, or at least,\\nto denote a circumstance which, in our language, is better ex-\\npressed by an adverb as, aQ%6[A vog Einov, I said in the begin-\\nning do^dfxevog dnb, especially relevTayv, lastly diaXi7za)v\\n%q6vov, after some time, (frsocov and aycov with verbs which\\nsignify to give, to place, and the like, are redundant as, cpeocov\\ndaxs, he gave with verbs of motion cptocov expresses zeal,\\nquickness, c. with their cases, they are equivalent to the Latin\\ncum, with. A participle joined to its own verb, or to one of sim-\\nilar signification, appears to be redundant as, taaiv tovxeg, they\\nwent Zopi] Xtycov, he said Xsysi cpdg, he says.\\nJSP For the dative of the participle with a personal pronoun\\nafter the verb iozi, see 540.\\n\u00c2\u00a7178. THE CASE ABSOLUTE.\\n767. Rule LXII. A substantive with a par-\\nticiple whose case depends on no other word, is\\nput in the genitive absolute as,\\nQsov didovtog, ovdtv loyvEi cf ovog, when god gives, envy\\navails nothing.\\n768 Rem. The genitive is said to be absolute, in this construction,\\nbecause it is neither governed by, nor is dependent on, any word ex-\\npressed or understood, in the sentence with which it is connected, and\\nmight be separated from it without affecting its construction. Yet,\\nstrictly speaking, it is not really absolute in such a sense as to be with-\\nout government, or that there is no more reason for its being in the\\ngenitive than in any other case for the absolute clause will generally\\nbe found to express a circumstance of time, and so may come under 642\\nas,\\nKvqov paadivovroq, in the reign of Cyrus (sc. ini).\\nQ)tdyvrfi ao ^ftat, Sioiv f?.6vro)v, Thcagncs is safe from the gods\\nWILLING IT.\\n769. Obs. 1. The participles of elfji, ylvopai, and some\\nothers, are frequently omitted as, ipov fiovijg, sc. ovorjg, I being\\nalone.\\n770. Obs. 2. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence, asjf\\nit were a noun, is used absolutely with the participle as, nvo", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0309.jp2"}, "310": {"fulltext": "292 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 179.\\ntzvsiv rovg zavqovg, {xviroXoyn svzog, that bulls breathe fire, being\\ncirculated as a story.\\n771.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 3. The dative absolute is used to express the\\nfixed time (see 641); as, nsqubvzi ds zcp inavzep, after the year\\nhad elapsed and also when the subject of the participle may be\\nconsidered as that in reference to which the action of the verb\\ntakes place.\\n772. Obs. 4. The nominative and accusative are some-\\ntimes used absolutely. These instances, however, probably arise\\nfrom an omission of some words, which, being supplied, complete\\nthe construction as, avoi^avzsg rov (jcopazog nooovg, nahv\\nylvszcu to nvq, when they have opened the pores of the body, there\\nis again fire i. e. cog avoi^avzsg cooi, c. zavza ysvo\\\\isva,\\nthese things being done i. e. \\\\iszk zavza, c.\\n773. Obs. 5. The participles of impersonal verbs, and other\\nverbs used impersonally, are put absolutely in the nominative or\\naccusative neuter as, sB,6v, it being permitted fit ov, it being\\nnecessary doxovv, since it seems proper thus, diet zi ptrizig,\\n\u00c2\u00a3%bv amsvai, why dost thou remain, it being in thy power to\\ndepart\\n774. Obs. 6. The construction with the participle is often\\npreceded by the particles cog, coats, azs, ola, 6V/, olov, when a\\nreason of something done by another is expressed as, ioico7ra\\ncog navzag sidozag, or navzeov sldozcov, he held his peace be-\\ncause ALL KNEW.\\n\u00c2\u00a7179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.\\n775. Conjunctions serve to connect words or sentences to-\\ngether this connection is of two kinds\\n776. I. Of the parts of a sentence which are complete of\\nthemselves and independent of each other. These are connected\\nby conjunctions, simply connective or disjunctive, 332-1, 2 and\\nthe parts thus connected have a similar construction hence,\\n111. Rule LXIII. Conjunctions couple the\\nsame moods and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns\\nand pronouns as,\\nIjlxtov xal sldov, they came and saw.\\nzifia zbv nazsqa xul z)p \\\\M\\\\zsqa, honour thy father and thy\\nmother.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0310.jp2"}, "311": {"fulltext": "179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 293\\n778. Obs. 1. To this rule there are many exceptions as it\\nrespects the tenses of verbs see an example, 198, Obs. 3.\\n779. II. But the parts of a compound sentence are often\\nvariously related, and have a certain dependence upon each other,\\nthe nature of which is indicated by the conjunction employed,\\nand the mood of the verb with which it is joined. The general\\nprinciples of this connection are expressed in the following rules\\n780. Kule LXIV. Conjunctions which do not\\nimply doubt or contingency, are for the most part\\njoined with the indicative mood (696, 697) as,\\novtoi si rjGctv avdosg aya oi, ovx av nor 8 ravra inaayov,\\nif these had been good men, they would never have suf-\\nfered these things.\\n781. Rule LXV. Conjunctions which imply\\ndoubt or contingency, or which do not regard a\\nthing as actually existing, are for the most part\\njoined with the subjunctive and optative moods\\n(\u00c2\u00a7172); as,\\nat rig uiQ86iv fxoi do in, if ant one should give me the\\nchoice.\\n782. Obs. 2. As the meaning of a conjunction varies in dif-\\nferent connections, the same conjunction is often found with dif-\\nferent moods. On this subject no very definite or satisfactoiy\\nrules, can be given.\\n783. The particles ydo, 8ai, dtj f donors, seta, snsira, y.ui,\\nare often used not so much to connect, as to give strength to a\\nquestion, like the English then, but, yet.\\n784. The Greeks do not distinguish direct and indirect ques-\\ntions, like the Latins, by different moods (Lat. Gr. 627-5). In\\nGreek, the direct question is usually made by the definite inter-\\nrogative particles nag, norsoog, nor 8, nov, not, n^rixu, rig, c.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u0094the indirect by onag, onozeoog, onors, onov, onoi, onijvUu,\\noazig, c. But here there are many exceptions.\\nFor further remarks on conjunctive and adverbial particles,\\nsee \u00c2\u00a7125.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0311.jp2"}, "312": {"fulltext": "294 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 179.\\n785.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.\\nA sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes complete sense\\nas, 6 av Qoinoq tarw dvyroq, man is mortal.\\nAll sentences are either simple or compound.\\nA simple sentence contains only a single affirmation as, 6 plot; f.arl\\nftqaxvq, life is short.\\nA compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences con-\\nnected together as, S-ioq latw oq ndvxa xvfie^vS,.\\n786. SIMPLE SENTENCES.\\nA simple sentence or proposition consists of two parts the subject\\nand the predicate.\\nThe subject is that of which something is affirmed.\\nThe predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject.\\nThe subject is commonly a noun or pronoun, but may be any thing,\\nhowever expressed, about which we can speak or think.\\nThe predicate properly consists of two parts the attribute affirmed\\nof the subject, and the copula, by which the affirmation is made thus,\\nin the sentence, 6 Qioq iarw dya oq, the subject is Qioq; the predi-\\ncate is wriv aya oq, of which aya oq is the attribute, and iarlv the\\ncopula. In most cases, the attribute and copula are expressed by one\\nword as, mnoq xqiyn, the horse runs. 357.\\nThe name of a person or thing addressed forms no part of a sen-\\ntence.\\nThe predicate may be a noun, a pronoun, an adjective, a preposi-\\ntion with its case, an adverb, a participle, an infinitive mood, or clause\\nof a sentence, as an attribute, connected with, and affirmed of, the sub-\\nject by a copulative verb (437) or, it may be a verb which includes in\\nitself both attribute and copula, and is therefore called an attributive\\nverb.\\n787. THE SUBJECT.\\nThe subject of a proposition is either grammatical or logical.\\nI. The grammatical subject is the person or thing spoken of, unlim-\\nited by other words.\\nThe logical subject is the person or thing spoken of, together with\\nall the words or phrases by which it is limited or defined thus, in the\\nsentence, 6 /uiXaq oivoq iaxi d-Qinrv/.wTaroq, the grammatical subject is\\noivoq the logical, 6 /.liXaq oivoq. Again\\nII. The subject of a proposition may be either simple or compound.\\nA simple subject consists of one subject of thought, either unlimited,\\nas the grammatical, or limited, as the logical subject.\\nA compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, to\\nwhich belongs but one predicate as, ZoMQarrjq xal 26Xo)v o~oq ol r t aav.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0312.jp2"}, "313": {"fulltext": "179. ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 295\\n788. MODIFICATIONS OF THE SUBJECT.\\nA grammatical subject maybe modified, limited, or described in va-\\nrious ways viz., 1. By a noun in apposition. 2. By a noun in tbe\\ngenitive or dative. 3. By an adjunct, i. e. a preposition and its case.\\n4. By an adjective word, i. e. an article, adjective, adjective pronoun,\\nor participle. 5. By a relative and its clause.\\nEach grammatical subject may have several modifications; and if\\nit has none, the grammatical and logical subject are the same.\\n789. MODIFICATION OF MODIFYING WORDS.\\nModifying, or limiting words, may themselves be modified.\\n1. A noun modifying another may itself be modified in all the ways\\nin which a noun, as a grammatical subject, is modified.\\n2. An adjective qualifying a noun may itself be modified 1. By an\\nadjunct. 2. By a noun. 3. By an infinitive mood or clause of\\na sentence. 4. By an adverb.\\n3. An adverb may be modified 1. By another adverb. 2. By a\\nsubstantive in an oblique case.\\n790. THE PREDICATE.\\nL The predicate, like the subject, is either grammatical or logical.\\nThe grammatical predicate consists of the attribute and copula, not\\nmodified by other words.\\nThe logical predicate is the grammatical, with all the words or\\nphrases that modify it thus, tj f.ddr\\\\ /.uy.oa jxavla laxlv the gramma-\\ntical predicate is par la iarlv the logical, jur/.oa juavla iarlv.\\nWhen the grammatical predicate has no modifying terms, the logi-\\ncal and grammatical are the same.\\nII. The predicate, like the subject, is either simple or compound.\\nA simple predicate affirms but one thing of its subject; as, 6 (iloq\\nfioa/iq iaxw ininvzov ol avt^oi.\\nA compound predicate consists of two or more simple predicates\\naffirmed of one subject as, Kdd/uoq a7tiy.rave xbv dody.ovra, xai to~7iti-\\nQ6 rovq odovraq avrov.\\n791. MODIFICATIONS OF THE PREDICATE.\\nThe grammatical predicate may be modified or limited in different\\nways.\\nI. When the attribute in the predicate is a noun, it is modified 1.\\nBy a noun or pronoun limiting or describing the attribute. 2. By an\\nadjective or participle limiting the attribute.\\nII. When the grammatical predicate is an attributive verb, it is mod-\\nified i. By a noun or pronoun as its object. 2. By an adverb. 3\\nBy an adjunct. 4. By an infinitive. 5. By a dependent clause.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0313.jp2"}, "314": {"fulltext": "296 EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. 179.\\n792 Nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and other words modifying the\\npredicate, may themselves be modified, as similar words are when\\nmodifying the subject.\\nInfinitives and participles modifying the predicate, may themselves\\nbe modified in all respects, as the attributive verb is modified.\\nCOMPOUND SENTENCES.\\n793. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple senten-\\nces or propositions connected together. The propositions which make\\nup a compound sentence, are called members, or clauses.\\n794. The propositions or clauses of a compound sentence, are ei-\\nther independent or dependent in other words, coordinate, or subor-\\ndinate.\\nAn independent clause is one that makes complete sense by itself.\\nA dependent clause is one that makes complete sense only in con-\\nnection with another clause.\\nThe clause on which another depends, is called the leading clause\\nits subject is the leading subject; and its predicate, the leading predi-\\ncate.\\n795 Clauses of the same kind, whether independent or dependent,\\nare connected by such conjunctions as y.al, rt, rj, ijroi^, c.\\n796. Dependent clauses having finite verbs, are connected with\\ntheir leading clauses in three different ways as, 1. By a relative. 2.\\nBy a conjunction. 3. By an adverb.\\n797. A subordinate clause, consisting of an infinitive with its sub-\\nject, is joined to a leading clause without a connecting word.\\nABRIDGED PROPOSITIONS.\\n798. A compound sentence is sometimes converted into a simple\\none, by rejecting the connective, and changing the verb of the depend-\\nent clause into a participle. A simple sentence thus formed is called\\nan abridged proposition as, dt,e?. o)v de Qgax-qv, fjy.ev dq Qrjpaq, hav-\\ning gone through Thrace, he came to Thebes t7tivdav dk dlqk t Ofjaxtjv,\\nfjxtv dq Oyfiaq.\\n799.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS.\\n1. cpofiog rov Kvqiov iarh ao/?] rijg (jocpiag, the fear of the\\nLord is the beginning of ivisdom.\\nThis is a simple sentence, of which\\nThe logical subject is 6 (poftoq rov Kvglov.\\nThe logical predicate is iariv a^/ij ryQ aoylaq.\\nThe grammatical subject is yofioq, shown to be definite by the article\\n6, and restricted by rov KvqIov.\\nThe grammatical predicate is iariv oppfr of which iariv is the copula\\nand agx*} the attribute, restricted by rTjq aoqiaq.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0314.jp2"}, "315": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7179.\\nSYNTACTICAL PARSING-. 297\\n2. e ^HqavXTjg to qottciIov, o icpooei, avtbg srefiev ix A r \u00c2\u00a3(ttag,\\nHercules himself cut, from tlie forest of Nemea, the club which\\nhe was accustomed to carry.\\nThis is a compound sentence, consisting of one leading, and one depend-\\nent clause connected by the relative o.\\nThe leading clause, 6 Hga/J.tjq to qonalov avroq Utf/ttv Ix Ne/uiaq, is a\\nsimple sentence, of which\\nThe logical subject is o Hqaxl.ijq avroq.\\nThe logical predicate is srifisv ix J\\\\ r f/.iiaq to q6na).ov.\\nThe grammatical subject is HQa/J.rjq, shown to be definite by the arti-\\ncle 6, and rendered emphatic by the definite pronoun avroq.\\nThe grammatical predicate is \u00c2\u00a3re,uev, modified by its object to \u00c2\u00a3o7rcdov,\\nand by the adjunct ix JVe/uiaq.\\nThe dependent clause is o (avroq) iq.0Qcv, of which\\nThe logical subject is avroq understood, a substitute for HQaxXtjq.\\nThe logical predicate is o i(p6()ii\\nThe grammatical subject is the same as the logical.\\nThe grammatical predicate is hrtjutv, modified by its object o, standing\\ninstead of qonalov, and, being a relative, it is the object of the\\nverb, and also connects its clause with the leading clause.\\n800.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 SYNTACTICAL PARSING.\\nThese two sentences, thus analyzed, may be parsed syntactically in\\nthe following manner\\nFirst Example. 0 cpofiog rov Kvqiov lath xq%ii rtjg ao-\\nCfiag.\\n0, the, the definite article, in the nominative singular, masculine, agree-\\ning with yoftoq, and showing it to be definite. Rule, The\\narticle agrees, fcc. 400, declined thus, 6, rj, ro, c.\\n(pofioq, fear, is a noun, masculine, second declension, giofioq, -ov. It is\\nfound in the nominative singular, the subject of iarlv. The\\nsubject of a finite verb is put in the nominative, 421.\\nTof of the, the definite article, genitive singular, masculine, agreeing\\nwith Kvqiov, and showing it to be definite. Rule, as before,\\n400.\\nKvqiov, Lord, is a noun, masculine, second declension, Kvqioq Kvqiov.\\nIt is in the genitive singular, governed by 6 qofioq, which it\\nlimits. Rule V. (449), One substantive governs another, c\\niarlv, is, is a verb intransitive irregular, tltu, tao,uai,, r t v, Root i. It is\\nfound in the present indicative, third person singular, and\\nagrees with its subject yofioq. Rule IV. (420), A\\nagrees, fec.\\naqyj], the beginning, is a noun, feminine, first declension, jy r -r-, C.\\nIt is found in the nominative singular, the predicate after\\niarlv its copula, and is therefore without the article, 403-4.\\nRule VI. (436), Any verb, c.\\n13*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0315.jp2"}, "316": {"fulltext": "298 SYNTACTICAL PARSING. \u00c2\u00a7179.\\ndys (not translated), the definite article, in the genitive singular, femi-\\nnine, agreeing with aoyiaq, an abstract noun, 403-3. Rule,\\nThe article agrees, (fee. 400.\\naocpiaq, of wisdom, a noun feminine, first declension, aocpla, -aq. It is\\nfound, in the genitive singular, governed by ao/rj, which it\\nlimits. Rule V. (449), One substantive governs another, (fee.\\nSecond Example. 0 HQayl^g to QonaXov, o iqioQei, avtbg\\nfaspev ix Ntfi ag, construed thus JfQaxtfg avtbg\\nfaefAEV ex A r 8fisag rb qotzoXov o icpoQU.\\n0 (not translated), the definite article, in the nominative singular, mas-\\nculine, agreeing with Hoaxltjq, definite, 403-1. Rule, The\\narticle, (fee. (400), declined 6, rj, to, (fee 139.\\nHoay.Xijq, Hercules, contracted for HQaaUijq (133), a proper noun, mas-\\nculine, third declension, HoayJ.ijq, -eoq, contr. -ovq. It is found\\nin the nominative singular, the subject of ereuev. The sub-\\nject of a finite verb is put in the nominative, 421.\\navroq, himself, a definite adjective pronoun, avroq, -r\\\\, -6, 182. It is\\nfound in the nominative singular, masculine, and agrees with\\nHoay.k^q, rendering it emphatic. Rule II., An adjective\\nagrees, (fee. 371 and 394.\\netifiev, cut, is a verb transitive, first conjugation, liquid, r^uvo), to cut,\\n1 Root re/jtj 2 rau, 3 tqjjl. It is found in the 2 aorist indicative\\nactive, third person singular, and agrees with Hoa/.ltjq. Rule\\nIV., A verb agrees, (fee. An irregular form for erape. See\\nthe word, 117. Give the tenses from the first root from the\\nsecond from the third.\\nIa, from, is a preposition atonic {i% before a vowel), of, out of, from, and\\ngoverns Ntuiaq.\\nNi/xiaq, the forest of Nemea (without the article, being the first mention-\\ned), a proper noun, feminine, first declension, Ntaia, -aq. It is\\nfound in the genitive singular, governed by ex. Rule XL VIII.\\nAvrl, ano, ex or it, (fee. (652).\\nto, the, the definite article, 6, tj, to. It is found in the accusative sin-\\ngular, neuter, agrees with ^onalov, and shows it to be definite.\\nRule, The article agrees, (fee. (400).\\nhonalov, club, is a noun, neuter, third declension, (JonaXov, qonaLov. It\\nis found in the accusative singular, the object of, and governed\\nby, ertfiev. Rule XXV., A transitive verb, (fee. (564). It is\\nlimited by the relative clause following it.\\no, which, the relative pronoun, oq, rj, o. It is found in the accusative\\nsingular, neuter, agreeing with its antecedent ^onalov. Rule\\nIII., The relative agrees, fec. 404. It is governed in the ac-\\ncusative by iyona,. Rule XXV., A transitive verb, (fee. 564\\nit connects its clause with o7Ta).ov, and limits it.\\nlyooti, was accustomed to carry (198, Obs. 2), is a verb, transitive, first\\nconjugation, pure, qooeo), to carry, kindred to ipiqw, to bear.\\nRoot (foot (216). It is found in the imperfect indicative active,\\nthird person singular, contracted for iyooii, and agrees with\\nits nominative avroq understood, referring to Hoa d?jq. Rule\\nIV., A verb agrees, (fee. (420).", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0316.jp2"}, "317": {"fulltext": "180, 181. pkosody. 299\\nPAET IV\\nPROSODY.\\n801. Prosody, in its common acceptation, treats of the\\nquantity of syllables and the construction of verses in other\\nwords, of Quantity and Metre. In the ancient grammarians,\\nnooccpdia applies to accents.\\n180. QUANTITY.\\n802. Quantity means the relative length of time taken up in\\npronouncing a syllable.\\n1. In respect of quantity, every syllable is either long or short.\\nWhen a syllable is sometimes long, and sometimes short, it is\\nsaid to be common, or doubtful.\\n2. The quantity of syllables is determined by certain estab-\\nlished rules or, when no rule applies, by the authority of the\\npoets.\\n3. In Greek, the quantity of certain vowels is determined as\\nfollows\\n1. The vowels e, o, are naturally short as, liydpev.\\n2. n, (o, are naturally long as, ^//rco.\\n3. a, i, v, are doubtful as, d[A,vvco.\\n4. Diphthongs and contracted syllables are long as, iaTi,\\nocpleg, contracted bcplg*\\n\u00c2\u00a7181. I. POSITION.\\nSPECIAL KULES.\\n803. Rule I. A short or doubtful vowel, before two conso-\\nnants or a double letter, is almost always long as,\\n7ZdXlag, TTootaipev, care Zevg.\\nIn the Prosody the accents are omitted, as they often interfere\\n-with the mark for the quantity.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0317.jp2"}, "318": {"fulltext": "300 pkosody. 182.\\nThis rule holds good in Epic poetry, except in proper name?, and in\\nwords which could not be used in any other situation in the verse. In\\ndramatic writers, observe the following exceptions\\nExc. A short or doubtful vowel before a mute and a liquid,\\nis common as, IlazQbyXog, or TldTQbxXog.\\nObs. 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid is generally short.\\nBut before a middle mute y, 6), followed by q in tragedy, it is mostly\\nlong and followed by X, /.i, v, almost always long, both in tragedy and\\ncomedy.\\nObs. 2. A short vowel before two liquids is always long, and some-\\ntimes before a single liquid, which in this case should be pronounced as\\nif double thus, Zlapt, pronounced eXXafa.\\nNote 1. A short vowel in the end of a word, before q in the begin-\\nning of the word following, is long in the dramatic poets as, i/ut Qi7tov.\\nNote. 2. We sometimes find a short syllable before two consonants\\n(both mutes), but this is rare and should not be imitated.\\n\u00c2\u00a7182. II. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER.\\n804. Rule II. A vowel before another vowel is short, unless\\nlengthened by poetic license as, nokvamog.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. a is long in the penult of nouns in tiow, aovoq; as, Ma/don Mayao-\\nvoq. And sometimes when the genitive ends in wvoc;; as,\\nJloatidaow, TloaaSaoivoq.\\nin feminine proper names in a fc thus, Qaiq.\\n2. i is long in the penult of nouns in mv, covoq, and sometimes twroc;\\nas, S1qIo)v, JIqvovoq, or Jlqlon oq; except yitav.\\nin the penult of verbs in tw as, rm but the Attic\\ntragic writers have -to).\\n3. v is common in the penult of nouns in vet and ir\\\\ as, y.aXia and xaXta.\\n4. v is common in the penult of verbs in vm as, lo~yvo or uryvo).\\n805. Rule III. Long vowels and diphthongs are mostly\\nshort at the end of words, when the next word begins with a\\nvowel as,\\nJfjco e\\\\).c5v o ds xtv xtxb\\\\lco6Hat bv xlv ixldtfjiat.\\nObs. 1. A vowel in the end of a word, before a word beginning with\\na vowel, does not suffer elision, as in Latin, unless an apostrophe is\\nsubstituted (35).\\nObs. 2. Two vowels, forming two syllables, frequently in poetry\\ncoalesce into one; as, yqvaeo), II. a. 15, where to) form a short syllable.\\nThis frequently takes place though the vowels be in different words;\\nas, rfovx aXlq, ll. 349. 828-2,", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0318.jp2"}, "319": {"fulltext": "183, 184. pkosody. 301\\n\u00c2\u00a7183. III. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FIRST AND\\nMIDDLE SYLLABLES.\\n806. Rule IV. A doubtful vowel before a simple consonant\\nis short as, y,av,oq.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. a is long in nouns in a/iiow, avo)Q, aQoq; as, Tttdo^d/xow, aydvo)(),\\n/nvadQoq.\\nin numerals in oGuoq as, didyoaioq.\\nin derivatives from verbs in ao pure, and quo) thus,\\ndvvdxoq from awctw idaifioq from Idofxav y.axaqdxoq from\\nv.axaqdo^ai\\\\ 3-idxrjq and Ved/ucc from d-ido/xav; rnqdavf-ioq\\nfrom niQao) TtQdavq from {TTvnqaGy.oi for) nqdo).\\n2. i is long in the penult of nouns in wtj, ixrj, ixr\\\\q, ixiq thus, dlvrj,\\n^Aq Qo8lxrj, 7loXZxT]q, nolZxvq.\\nin the penult of verbs in ifio), wo) thus, xQlfio), nZvo)\\nso also y.Tveo), dZvm, fcc.\\n3. v is long in verbals in vfia, v/noq, vxtjq, vxoq, vxojq as, ?.v/ua,\\n%vjLioq, qvxo)Q.\\nin pronouns as, vfiitq.\\nin the penult of verbs in wo), vqo), v/o), vuv as, izkvvo),\\ny.vQO), fiqv/o), qiVfxt,, ksvyvv/.u.\\nin adverbs in vdov as, (loxQvdov.\\n\u00c2\u00a7184. IV. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYL-\\nLABLES.\\n807. Rule V. a, i, v, in the end of a word, are short as,\\npovoa, ptXl, yXvAv.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. A in the end of a word is long, viz\\nIn nouns in la, da, a; as, td, Arjdd, Maq d exc. d/.avSa.\\nIn the dual number as, Tcqo^r\\\\xd, fxovad.\\nIn polysyllables in caa; as, ^ilr^vaid.\\nin aa, derived from verbs in tvo) as, dovXad,\\npaffbfotci, from doidiuo), fiaodevo). But fiuadiid, a queen,\\nhas the final a short.\\nIn tec; as, /.aha, except verbals inxQt,a; as, ipalxQtd; and\\nfibcc, /nod, noxvia.\\nIn the vocative of nouns in aq of the 1st declension as, Alvud\\nfrom Alvdaq.\\nIn feminines from adjectives in oc;; as, 6/(Ovd, ijntxtQa.\\nIn nouns in ^ccnot preceded by a diphthong; as, rjfitQd, y^Qd.\\n^XQei)tdy/A^jd,yi(pv()d,Kf(jy.v^a,6hi(jd ff-/.o).07Ttvd^a,a(pv(}d,\\nxavayqd, and compounds of j.uxqu); as, yno/ietQa.\\nIn poetic vocatives as, ILaV.d for TlaXXaq.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0319.jp2"}, "320": {"fulltext": "302 pkosody. 184.\\n2. i final is long in the names of letters as, nl.\\n3. v final is long in the names of letters as, /iv, vv.\\nin verbs in vfiv as iq v.\\nin /xataL,v and y^v.\\n808. Kule VI. A doubtful vowel in the final syllable, fol-\\nlowed by a simple consonant, is short as, ^lekdv, laiinag.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. av is long in masculines; as, Tvrdv; and Tztiv, when not in com-\\nposition.\\nin accusatives when their nominatives are long; as,\\njilvudv from Aivtvdq.\\nin adverbs as, dydv.\\n2. ag in y.dq and ipaQ is long in yaq it is either long or short.\\n3. aq is long in nouns of the first declension as, Alvudq, /xovadq.\\nin words having avroq in the genitive as, rmpdq,\\nrvipavToq.\\nalso in ^/.idq, v/xdq, y.Qdq.\\n4. vv is long in nouns in w which have woq in the genitive as,\\n0t]yjulv, Qt]y/A.wog.\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, d/.rlv, or d/.tvq.\\nalso in \u00e2\u0080\u00a2fj/.uv, v/xlv.\\n5. vq is long in monosyllables; as, ).lq; but the indefinite nq is\\ncommon.\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, uY.Tlq, d/.xlv.\\nin feminine dissyllables in vq, vdoc, or v oq; as, xv^filq,\\nxvtj/iudoq oQvlq, bqw oq except dantq, Iqtq, /ccQiq, and a\\nfew others.\\nin polysyllables preceded by two short syllables as,\\nTzXoy.dfilq.\\n6. vv is long in nouns which have vvoq in the genitive; as, /uoaavv,\\n/.loffdvvoq.\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, yoQY.vq, or cpoQavv.\\nin accusatives from vq in the nominative as, ovqvv\\nfrom ocpQvq.\\nin the ultimate of verbs in vf.iv; as, lq vv from yvfAv.\\nvvv, now but in vvv, enclitic, it is short.\\n*7. vq in the end of a word is always long as, /uciqtvq\\n8. vq is long in monosyllables as, p. vq.\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, yoQY.vq, q 0Qxvv.\\nin nominatives which have vvroq or oq pure in the gen-\\nitive; as, Sivy.vvq, divuvvvtoq; 6q Qvq, ocpQvoq.\\nin y.oifivq, y.o)f v8oq; and\\nin the last syllable of verbs in vfiv; as, iqvq.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0320.jp2"}, "321": {"fulltext": "185, 186. prosody. 303\\n\u00c2\u00a7185. V. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INCREMENT\\nOF NOUNS.\\n809. Rule VII. The quantity of the nominative remains in\\nthe oblique cases thus, Tuav, Tixuvog y.r^filg, xvqfudog.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. vq in the nominative shortens the crement as, f^aQivq, ^aqxvQoq.\\n2. A vowel long by position, in the nominative, shortens the cre-\\nment in the oblique cases as, avkah, airtaxoq. But nouns in a$ after\\na vowel have the crement long as, ve at, vttixoq.\\nLikewise o)Qcct, ItQat, y.vo)da$, xogdat, Aa/?\u00c2\u00a3a\u00c2\u00a3, olat, (jai, avgcpaz,\\nqttvat, with many words in tip, moq, and vt, vyoq or woq to which add\\nyQvip, yv-ip, and generally Btfigvz, doidct, 6qtv\u00c2\u00a3, aavdvt.\\n3. oc,- pure in the genitive, from a long syllable in the nominative,\\nvaries the crement; as, dqvq, dgvoq, or dqvoq.\\n4. The dative plural, after a syncope, has the penult short; as,\\nTCarqaav, avdqudo.\\n186. VI. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INFLECTION\\nOF VERBS.\\nThe doubtful vowels, a, v, v, are short in verbs, unless it be other-\\nwise specified in the Rules.\\n810. Rule VIII. a and v before oa in participles, and al-\\nways before ai in verbs, are long as, zvxpaca, deixrvaa, tezv-\\nqtiGi, deixvvai 6, 18).\\nFUTURE.\\n81 1. Rule IX. The future in aow, logo, vgco, from aco after\\na vowel, or from paco, ico, i co, vco, lengthen the penult as,\\niaoo, EU6G) dpaco, Spacco pQi co, ^gtaco ig /vg), iapiGCQ.\\nBut the future in aaco, toco, vaco, from a\u00c2\u00a3co, i\u00c2\u00a3co, v\u00c2\u00a3co, shorten\\nthe penult as,\\nagna^co, apnaGCd onli^co, okIigw xlv\u00c2\u00a3co, xIvgoj.\\n812. Rule X. Liquid verbs shorten the penult in the future\\nas, XQIVCO, XQIVCO.\\n813. Rule XL The second future, in the passive voice,\\nshortens the root-syllable as, zepveo, rdfi^o^iai cpatva, cpavr r\\naofica.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0321.jp2"}, "322": {"fulltext": "304 prosody. 187.\\nTHE OTHER TENSES.\\n814. Rule XII. The doubtful vowels have the same quan-\\ntity in the tenses as in their roots thus,\\n1 Root. kqIv, hqZvo), ixQlvov, r.^Zvojxav, bhqIvo/u^v.\\n2 Root, y.giv, kiy.qV/.cc, ixiHQixttv, y.^t TjdOjLiai (xQtS-ijv, y.(uvr\\\\Goiiai,\\nixQtvtjv, y-v/.^ifxav, itievqft/wtfiri\\n2 Root. rvTt, ixvTtov, ItvTioixr^v, rv7Ztj(To/na^, \u00c2\u00a3rv7irjv.\\n3 Root, rim, rervrra, ixzxvnuv.\\nExc. 1. Liquid verbs in the future active and middle, as in Rule X.\\nExc. 2. The initial and v, in the augmented tenses and moods, are\\nlong as, tuo/xav, Zxofiyv.\\nThe quantity of a doubtful vowel in the root is. ascertained as fol-\\n815. I. Verbs in aco pure, or in oaco, too, i co, and vco, have\\nthe final vowel of the first root long, unless followed by a vowel\\nif followed by a vowel, it comes under Rule II. All others are\\nusually short.\\n816. II. The final syllable of the second root is always short,\\nunless made long by position.\\n8 1 7. III. The first root of liquid verbs is shortened in the\\nfuture, 244-1.\\nSPECIAL RULES FOR VERBS IN \\\\il.\\n8 1 8. Rule XIII. The proper reduplication is short, unless\\nmade long by position as, Ti- ?](ii. The improper reduplication\\nis common as, iqfM or l^fu.\\n819. Rule XIV. a, not before a a or ai, is every where\\nshort as, lardiiEv, torare.\\n820. Rule XV. v is long in polysyllables, only in the sin-\\ngular of the indicative active every where else it is short as,\\n8\u00c2\u00a3ixvv[Uf deixvvot, dstxvvTco, deixvvfJLai, fec.\\n821 In dissyllables, it is every where long; as, Svf.iv, Svrov, Sv-\\nfiav, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a7187. VII. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION.\\n822. Rule XVI. Derivatives follow the quantity of their\\nprimitives and compounds, that of the simple words of which\\nthey are composed as,\\nrZfirj arZfioq, OfiorZ/ioq, TZjuavwQ, c.\\nluoc, AaofiiSov, Miveldoq, c.\\nXvo), Xvao) AvaavSQoq, Avcrv/.ay.oq, c.\\noval;, ovdy.oq oldy.oo~TQO(poq, ovd/.ovofioq, c.\\nTtvQ 7ivqav(TTt]ii, nvQcpoQoq, tfec.\\n(us or qlv yZvtjXctrto), noXkvQZvoq, c.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0322.jp2"}, "323": {"fulltext": "188, 189. pkosody. 305\\n823. Rule XVII. a privative before two short syllables, is\\nfrequently long as, a.Y.a\\\\iaxoq.\\n824 Also gvv in composition is sometimes long; as, avvitj/j-v.\\n\u00c2\u00a7188. VIE. DIALECTS.\\nATTIC.\\n825. Rule XVIII. The Attics lengthen a in the accusative\\nof nouns in evg as, fiamlevg, ace. facilea, contrary to Rule V.\\nAlso, i instead of a, e, o as, xavxl for Taura odl for bdt\\nThe Paragogic v in pronouns (the dative plural excepted), and in\\nadverbs, is long as, ovxool, vvvl, Dat. pi. xovxoial.\\n826. IONIC.\\n1. The Comparative in iov shortens the neuter the Attics lengthen\\nit as, -/.aXXiov, I. zaV.lov, A.\\n2. In adjectives of time, u is long; as, hnwolvo^.\\n3. In verbs, the Ionic a, av not following it, is short as, lot-rat- for\\ntjvxco,.\\n827. DORIC AND ^EOLIC.\\n1. The Doric a is long the vEolic is short as, Alvad,, Doric for\\nAlvuov innoxti, -/Eolic for Irtnoxrjq, q.\\n828.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7189. IX. POETIC LICENSE.\\n1. The last syllable of a verse is common, except in Iambic, Trochaic,\\nAnapaestic, and Greater Ionic.\\n2. The Sv v q unites two syllables into one as,\\nr 4\\nXqvozo) ava ay.rinxqu) -/.at, nheraexo navxw\u00c2\u00b1 A-/auovc,\\nl-r-r J J I I\\nH Xa ix 7\\\\ ovx ivoqerev aaaaxo de [iiya v[io),\\ni_ i i i r\\nH pi. nikca, (T/fdiri niqaav /uiya ).at,x/j,a tyalcKjaqq.\\n3. The Arsis makes a short syllable in the end of a word long; as,\\nAvSovoq xs fiov tdffi qis)Z i/.vqt Ofivoc; Xf,\\nI I I I J\\nJrinovq d Avxo/ittdovxa doox; L,tvyvvfiiv avo)yf.\\nNote 1. The Arsis means the elevation of the voice, which, in Hexa-\\nmeter verse, is always on the first syllable of afoot.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0323.jp2"}, "324": {"fulltext": "306 prosody. 190.\\nNote 2. A short syllable is sometimes, and but very rarely, length-\\nened at the end of a foot thus,\\nI I I I, I\\nTji 6 Ini /utv roqyo) fi).oavQ0)7rtq EGTtipavoiTO.\\n829 Besides these deviations from the usual rules of quantity,\\nthe Poets sometimes varied the quantities of syllables, as follows\\nI. They lengthened a syllable, 1. By doubling or inserting a conso-\\nnant as, tdds lge for f d etat dnroXiq for cLnohq. 2. By changing a\\nvowel into a diphthong as, dtvo/.iai, for dtoixau. 3. By Metathesis as,\\nInqad-ov for tnao ov.\\nII. They shortened a syllable. By rejecting one vowel of a diph-\\nthong as, eXov for elXov.\\nIII. They increased the number of syllables, 1. By resolving a diph-\\nthong; as, alho) for avto). 2. By inserting or adding a letter or sylla-\\nble as, aaa/d tot; for aa/troq fjiktoq for tjXvoq fiir^i for /9wj.\\nIV. They lessened the number of syllables, 1. By aphseresis as, vtgOt\\nfor ivtQ t. 2. By syncope; as, iygtro for iyetotro. 3. By apocope\\nand apostrophe; as, do) for 6 a) pa; pvoi for fivoia.\\nOther varieties will be learned by practice. Many conjectures have\\nbeen made with regard to the ancient orthography, and the principles\\nof versification as depending upon it. But the best of them deserve\\nthe credit of ingenuity alone for, as they rest on no unquestionable\\nauthority, they are of little or no use.\\n\u00c2\u00a7190. FEET.\\n830 A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables\\nstrictly regulated by time and is either simple or compound. Of the\\nsimple feet, four are of two, and eight are of three syllables. There\\nare sixteen compound feet, each of four syllables. These varieties are\\nas follows:\\n831. Simple feet of two Syllables.\\nPyrrichius\\nw\\nw\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0S-eoq.\\nSpondeus\\nTimrC).\\nIambus\\ns\\nXtyoi.\\nTrochseus\\na0)f.ia.\\n832.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Simple feet of\\nthree\\nSyllables.\\nTribrachys\\n-w\\nw\\n7To) l[ioq.\\nMolossus\\nev/oiXfj.\\nDact} lus\\nftccQTvyot;\\nAnapsestus\\nV_^ V\u00e2\u0080\u0094 S\\nPaolXivq.\\nBachius\\nt7rfjTij\\nAntibachius\\nv_^\\ndfixvvfu.\\nAmphibraeh} T s\\ns_^\\nW\\nTiOtjfii.\\nAmphimacer\\ndtlXvl TO).", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0324.jp2"}, "325": {"fulltext": "191, 192.\\nPROSODY.\\n307\\n833. Compound feet of four Syllables.\\nChori ambus\\nAntispastus\\nIonic a niajore\\nIonic a minore\\nFirst Paeon\\nSecond\\nThird\\nFourth\\nFirst Epitrite\\nSecond\\nThird\\nFourth\\nProceleusm aticus\\nDispondeus\\nDiiambus\\nDitrochaeus\\nffoiyooavvfj\\na.,uaQTF;ua\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2/.daf.ir j TOQd\\n7t?Jtoviy.rFjq\\n6c jTQoJ.oyo\\navatloq\\ndva.dfji.ioi\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0frloyivrfi\\naudoroilfj\\ndvdodqovTF^\\nevova ivfjq\\nnoli fiioq\\navvdovfovcro)\\n\\\\maxdxrfi\\na trochee and an iambus,\\nan iambus and a trochee,\\na spondee and a pyrrich.\\na pyrrich and a spondee,\\na trochee and a pyrrich.\\nan iambus and a pyrrich.\\na pyrrich and a trochee,\\na pyrrich and an iambus,\\nan iambus and a spondee.\\na trochee and a spondee,\\na spondee and an iambus.\\na spondee and a trochee,\\ntwo pyrriehs.\\ntwo spondees,\\ntwo iambi,\\ntwo trochees.\\n\u00c2\u00a7191. OF METRE.\\n834 Metre, in its general sense, means an arrangement of syllables\\nand feet in verse, according to certain rules and in this sense applies,\\nnot only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or to any number\\nof verses. A metre, in a specific sense, means a combination of two feet\\n(sometimes called a syzygy), and sometimes one foot only.\\n835 Note. The distinction between rhythm and metre is this:\\nthe former refers to the time only, in regard to which, two short sylla-\\nbles are equivalent to one long the latter refers both to the time and\\nthe order of the syllables. The rhythm of an anapaest and dactyl is the\\nsame the metre different. The term rhythm, however, is also under-\\nstood in a more comprehensive sense, and is applied to the harmonious\\nconstruction and enunciation of feet and words in connection thus, a\\nline has rhythm when it contains any number of metres of equal time,\\nwithout regard to their order. Metre requires a certain number of\\nmetres, and these arranged in a certain order. Thus, in this line,\\nAo/ite, 2v/.ih/.al, rw niv ioq ao/tre MoZacu.\\nthere is both rhythm, as it contains six metres of equal value in respect\\nof time and metre, as these metres are arranged according to the canon\\nfor Hexameter heroic verse, which requires a dactyl in the 5th, and a\\nspondee in the 6th place. Change the order thus,\\nAqytri, Moiaau Saishxal, rw 7liv ioq ciq/trf.\\nand the rhythm remains as perfect as before, but the metre is de-\\nstroyed it is no longer a Hexameter heroic line.\\n\u00c2\u00a7192. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE.\\n836 1. Metre, in the general sense, is divided into nine species:\\n1. Iambic. 4. Dactylic. 7. Ionic a majore.\\n2. Trochaic.\\n3. Anapaestic.\\n5. Choriarnbic.\\n6. Antispastic.\\nIonic a minore.\\nPcconic or Cretic.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0325.jp2"}, "326": {"fulltext": "308 peosody. 192.\\nThese names are derived from the feet which prevail in them.\\nEach species was originally composed of those feet only, from which it\\nis named but others, equal in time, Were afterwards admitted under\\ncertain restrictions.\\nIt often happens that two species, totally dissimilar, are united in the\\nsame verse, which is then termed Asynartetes. When the irregularity\\nis great, and it cannot be reduced to any regular form, it is called Poly-\\nschematistic or anomalous.\\n837 Note. The invention or frequent use of any species of metre\\nby a particular poet, or its being used in some particular civil or reli-\\ngious ceremony, or appropriated to some particular subject or sentiment,\\nhas been the occasion of certain kinds of verse receiving other names\\nthan those specified above. Thus, we have the Asclepiadean, Glyco-\\nnian, Alcaic, Sapphic, and others named from the poets, Asclepiades,\\nGlycon, Alcazus, Sappho, Phalcecus, Sotades, Archilochus, Alcman,\\nPherecrates, Anacreon, Aristophanes, c. So also the Prosodiacus\\n(from TiooGodoq), so called from being used in the approach to the altars\\non solemn festivals and the Paroemiacus, a kind of verse much used in\\nthe writing of proverbs {jtaQo^dav).\\n838 In the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a metre con-\\nsists of two feet in the others, of one only.\\n839 2. A verse or metre is farther characterized by the number\\nof metres (in the specific meaning of the term) which it contains, as\\nfollows\\nA verse containing one Metre is called Monometer.\\ntwo Metres Dimeter.\\nthree Metres Trimeter\\nfour Metres Tetrameter.\\nfive Metres Pentameter.\\nsix Metres Hexameter.\\nseven Metres Heptameter.\\n840. 3. A verse may be complete, having precisely the number\\nof metres which the canon requires or it may be deficient in the last\\nmetre or it may be redundant. To express this, a verse is further\\ncharacterized as follows viz.\\n1. Acatalectio, when complete.\\n9 j Catalectic, if wanting one syllable.\\nBrachycatalectic, if wanting two syllables or one whole foot.\\n3. Hypercatalectic, when there is one or two syllables at the end,\\nmore than the verse requires thus,\\nyjl Xzwv dody.ovraq w\u00c2\u00a7. iEsch. Lept. Theb.\\nis denominated trochaic dimeter catalectic; the first term referring\\nto the species, the second to the number of metres, and the third to the\\napothesis or ending.\\n841. Note. The two last terms, viz. that designating the number\\nof metres, and that which refers to the ending, are sometimes reduced\\nto one thus, when a verse of a given species consists of two feet and\\na half, it is called Penthemimcr of three and a half, Hephthemimer (five\\nhalf feet, seven half feet) and when it consists of one metre and a\\nhalf, it is called Ilemiholius.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0326.jp2"}, "327": {"fulltext": "193, 194, 195. prosody. 309\\n842. The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called its\\nplace (sedes).\\nThe rules or canons of the different kinds of metre are briefly as\\nfollows.\\n193. I. IAMBIC METRE. Scheme, \u00c2\u00a7204, I.\\n843 A pure iambic verse consists only of iambuses.\\nA mixed iambic verse admits in the first, third, and fifth place, an\\niambus or a spondee.\\nIn the second, fourth, and sixth, an iambus only.\\nVariation 1. The iambus in the odd places may be resolved into a\\ntribrach the spondee, into a dactyl or an anapaest.\\nVariation 2. The iambus in the even places (except the last), may\\nbe resolved into a tribrach. An anapaest is substituted for it in the\\ncase of a proper name only.\\nObserve, however, 1st. -that a dactyl should be avoided in the fifth\\nplace and, 2d. that resolved feet should not concur.\\nOf this verse there are all varieties of length, monometers, dimeters,\\ntrimeters (called also senarian, each line having six feet), and tetra-\\nmeters.\\n194. II. TROCHAIC METRE. Scheme, 204, II.\\n844. A pure trochaic verse consists of trochees only.\\nA mixed trochaic verse admits in the odd places, a trochee only in\\nthe even places, a trochee or a spondee.\\nThe trochee may, in any place, be resolved into a tribrach, and the\\nspondee into a dactyl or anapcest.\\nA dactyl, in the odd places, occurs only in the case of a proper name.\\nTrochaic verses are mostly catalectic. A system of them generally\\nconsists of catalectic tetrameters sometimes of dimeters, catalectic and\\nacatalectic intermixed.\\nIn tetrameters, the second metre should always end a word.\\n195. III. ANAPAESTIC METRE. Scheme, 204, III.\\n845. An anapaestic verse, without any restriction of places, admits\\neither an anapwst, spjondee, or dactyl.\\nExc. 1. The dimeter catalectic, called paraemiacus, requires an ana-\\npaest in the last place but one and is incorrect when a spondee is found\\nthere.\\nExc. 2. In some instances the propjer foot is resolved into the proce-\\nleusmatic.\\nAnapaestic verses are sometimes intermixed with other species, but\\nare oftener in a detached system by themselves.\\n846 A system is chiefly composed of dimeters under the following\\ncircumstances:\\n1. When each foot, or at least each metre (syzygy), ends a word.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0327.jp2"}, "328": {"fulltext": "310 pkosody. 196, 197.\\n2. When the last verse but one of the system is monometer acata-\\nlectic, and the last, dimeter catalectic, with an anapaest in the second\\nmetre.\\nIn a system, this peculiar property is to be observed, that the last\\nsyllable of each verse is not common (as in other species), but has its\\nquantity subject to the same restrictions as if the foot to which it be-\\nlongs occurred in any other place of the verse.\\n847. A series, therefore, of anapaestic verses, consisting of one or\\nmore sentences, is to be constructed as if each sentence was only a single\\nverse.\\n848 Note. The monometer acatalectic is called an anapaestic base.\\nThis is sometimes dispensed with in a system in the parcemiacus, rarely.\\n849 To this metre belong the Aristophanic, being catalectic tetra-\\nmeters and the proceleusmatic, consisting of feet isochronal to an ana-\\npaest, and, for the most part, ending with it.\\n196.. IV. DACTYLIC METRE. Scheme, 204, IV.\\n850 A dactylic verse is composed solely of dactyls and spondees.\\nIn this species one foot constitutes a metre.\\nThe common heroic is hexameter acatalectic, having a dactyl in the\\nfifth place and a spondee in the sixth.\\nSometimes in a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, a spondee\\ntakes the place of the dactyl in the fifth foot; from which circumstance\\nsuch lines are called spondaic.\\n851 The elegiac pentameter consists of five feet. The first and\\nsecond may be either a dactyl or a spondee at pleasure the third must\\nalways be a spondee the fourth and fifth anapaests.\\n852. Though a heroic verse is confined to a smaller number of ad-\\nmissible feet than an iambic verse, several licenses are allowed which\\nare not used in the latter.\\nThe most considerable of these are\\n1. The lengthening of a short final syllable in certain cases, viz. at\\nthe caesural pause, and where its emphasis is increased by its beginning\\na foot.\\n2. The hiatus, or the concurrence of two vowels, in contiguous words.\\n853. That irregular sort of dactylics which Hephaestion calls\\n^Eolics, admits, in the first metre, any foot of two syllables the rest\\nmust be all dactyls, except where the verse is catalectic, and then the\\ncatalectic part must be part of a dactyl.\\n854. A second sort of dactylics, called b}* the same author Logatc-\\ndics, requires a trochaic syzygy at the end, all the other feet being dactyls.\\n197. V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. Scheme, 204, V.\\n855. The construction of an ordinary choriambic verse is very\\nsimple. Each metre, except the last, is a choriambus, and the last may\\nbe an iambic syzygy, entire or catalectic.\\n856. The iambic syzygy (two iambic feet) is sometimes found at", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0328.jp2"}, "329": {"fulltext": "198, 199. prosody. 311\\nthe beginning, and, in long verses, in other places but this happens\\nless frequently.\\n857. If any other foot of four syllables is joined with a choriambus,\\nthe verse is then more properly called epichor iambic. Of this there is\\na very great variety, and they sometimes end with an amphibrach,\\nsometimes with a bachius.\\n198. VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. Scheme, 204, VI.\\n858 An antispastic verse, in its most usual and correct form, is\\nconstructed as follows\\nIn the ^rs^ place, beside the proper foot, is admitted any foot of four\\nsyllables ending like an antispastus in the last two syllables i. e. either\\nw w, -s, or w\\nIn the intermediate places, only an antispastus.\\nIn the last, an iambic syzygy, complete or catalectic, or an incom-\\nplete antispastus.\\nThere is scarcely any limit to the varieties in this species.\\n859 The following are the must usual:\\n1. In short verses, the proper foot frequently vanishes, and the verse\\nconsists of one of the above-mentioned feet and an iambic syzygy.\\n2. All the epit rites, except the second, are occasionally substituted\\nin the several places in the verse, particularly the fourth epitrite in the\\nsecond.\\n3. If an antispastus begins the verse, and three syllables remain,\\nwhatever those syllables are, the verse is antispastic because they\\nmay be considered as a portion of some of the admissible feet, or of\\nsome of them resolved.\\n4. In long verses, an iambic syzygy sometimes occurs in the second\\nplace, and then the third place admits the same varieties as the first.\\nAn antispastus, with an additional syllable, is called Dochmiac.\\nAn antispastus, followed by an iambic syzygy, is called Glyconian.\\nTwo antispasti, with an iambic syzygy, is called Asclepiadean.\\nAntispastic dimeter catalectic, is called Pherecratian.\\n199. VII. IONIC METRE A MAJORE. Scheme, 204, VII.\\n860 An Ionic verse admits a trochaic syzygy promiscuously with\\nits proper foot. The verse never ends with the proper foot complete,\\nbut either with the trochaic syzygy or the proper foot incomplete. The\\nvarieties of this metre are numerous, among which observe the follow-\\ning\\nVar. 1. The second pceon is sometimes found in the first place.\\nVar. 2. A molossus in an even intermediate place, with a\\ntrochaic syzygy following.\\nVar. 3. The second paion is occasionally joined to a second or third\\nepitrite, so that the two feet together are equal in time to two Ionic\\nfeet. This is called an Ava/.laGiq the defect in time of the preceding\\nfoot being, in this case, supplied by the redundant time of the subse-\\nquent and the verse so disposed is called AvccxMfitvoq.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0329.jp2"}, "330": {"fulltext": "312 prosody. 200, 20x, 202.\\nVar. 4. Resolutions of the long syllable into two short ones, are\\nallowed in all possible varieties.\\n861 If the three remaining pseons, or the second pajon in any place\\nbut the first, without an AvdxXciaiq or,\\nIf an iambic syzygy or third epitrite a choriambus, or any of the\\ndiscordant feet of four syllables, be found in the same verse with an\\nIonic foot, the verse is then termed Epi-ionic.\\n200. VIII. IONIC METRE A MLNORE. Scheme, 204,\\nVIII.\\n862 An Ionic verse a minore is often entirely composed of its own\\nproper feet. It admits, however, an iambic syzygy promiscuously, and\\nbegins sometimes with the third pceon followed by one of the epitrites\\nfor an Avaxlaavq.\\n863. A molossus sometimes occurs in the beginning of the verse,\\nand also in the odd places with an iambic syzygy preceding.\\n864. In the intermediate places a second or third pseon is prefixed\\nto a second epitrite and this construction is called *Avax).a nq as before.\\nResolutions of the long syllables are allowed in this, as in the other\\nIonic metre.\\n865. An Epionic verse a minore is constructed by intermixing with\\nthe Ionic foot a double trochee, second epitrite, or pseon without an Ard-\\nxXaavq.\\nPROSODIAC VERSE.\\n866 When a choriambus precedes or follows an Ionic foot of either\\nkind, the name Epionic is suppressed, and the verse called Prosodiacus.\\nAnd, in general,\\nThis name is applied to a verse consisting of an alternate mixture\\nof choriambic and Ionic feet, or of their respective representatives.\\nN B. The two species of Ionic are not to be intermixed in the same\\nverse.\\n201. IX. PHONIC METRE. Scheme, 204, IX.\\n867 A pseonic verse requires all the admissible feet to have the\\nsame rhythm with its proper foot i. e. to consist of Jive times, or be\\nequal to five short syllables.\\nThe first and fourth pseons are mostl}- used, but not in the same verse.\\nThe construction of this verse is most perfect when each metre ends\\nwith the several words of the verse, as was before remarked of the a?ia-\\npcestic metre.\\nTo this head may be referred those verses which are called by some\\nauthors Bacchiac and Cretic verses.\\n202. THE CJESURAL PAUSE.\\n868 Besides the division of the verse into metres and feet, there\\nis another division, into two parts only, owing to the natural intermis-", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0330.jp2"}, "331": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a72l^,204. prosody. 313\\nsion of the voice in reading it, and relevant to the rhythmical effect.\\nThis is called the pause, which necessarily ends with a word and its\\ndistance from the beginning is generally, though not invariably, deter-\\nmined by the length of the verse.\\n869 Heroic verses and trimeter iambics are esteemed most har-\\nmonious when the pause falls upon the first syllable of the third foot.\\nThis is the penthemimeral caesura. When it falls upon the first syllable\\nof the fourth, it is called the hephthemimeral. In iambic and trochaic\\ntetrameters, its place is at the end of the second metre. These rules are\\nmore observed by the Roman than by the Greek poets. In anapaestic\\nverse, and paeonic, no place is assigned to the pause because, since the\\nmetres (if rightly constructed) end with a word, the effect of a pause\\nwill be produced at the end of each metre. The same may be observed\\nof the Ionic a minore.\\n203. COMPOUND METRES.\\n870 Besides the preceding nine species of metre, the compositions\\nand modifications of these are very numerous. Of these, observe the\\nfollowing\\n1. A long syllable is sometimes inserted between the parts of a verse\\nconsisting of similar metres.\\n2. In some species, the portions of an admissible foot of four sylla-\\nbles are separated by the intermediate metres.\\n3. It happens not unfrequently that two species, totally dissimilar,\\nare united in the same verse which is then denominated Asynartetes\\n1. Dactylic Tetram. -f- Troch. Hemiholius.\\n2. Iambic Penth. -f- Troch. Hemiholius.\\n3. Dactylic Dim. -j- Troch. Monom. or Logaaedic.\\n4. Iambic syzygy -f- Troch. Syzygy, and vice versa.\\nThis last is called Periodicus.\\n4. When a verse is so irregular as to contain in it some glaring vio-\\nlation of the preceding rules, it is called Polyschematistic or anomalous\\nthus,\\n87 1 To this title may be referred,\\n1. A verse otherwise iambic, having a spondee in the second or\\nfourth place.\\n2. An iambus in a trochaic verse, fec. c.\\nThese rules are exemplified in the following tables.\\n204. METRICAL TABLES.\\n872 The following tables exhibit a scheme of the different feet\\nallowed in each kind of metre, and the place which they occupy. In\\nthe tables the following abbreviations occur; viz., A. C. for Acatalec-\\ntic C. for Catalectic B. C. for Brachycatalectic H. C. for Hypcrcata-\\nlectic and P. N. for Proper Name. 840. In Iambic, Trochaic, and\\nAnapaestic verse, each metre consists of two feet, and is followed by a\\ndouble line.\\n14", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0331.jp2"}, "332": {"fulltext": "314\\nPKOSODY.\\n\u00c2\u00a7204.\\n873.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 I. IAMBIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7193.\\n1. Monometer Base. 2. Dimeter Acatalectic.\\n1.\\n2.\\n1\u00c2\u00ab\\n2\\n3.\\n4. i\\nw\\nw _\\nw\\nw\\nI w\\nW v-\\nN-\\nV_X W\\nN^\\nw w\\nw w\\n3. Trimeter Acatalectic.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\n4.\\n5.\\n6.\\nw\\nw\\nw\\nw-\\nw-\\n3w w\\nZw w\\nw\\nP.N.\\n874.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 II. TROCHAIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7194.\\nExplanation of the Scheme.\\nIn this verse, each metre is alike. If from the trimeter scheme\\nexhibited below, the first and the second metre be taken away, the\\nremainder will be a scheme of the Monometer, which is always hyper-\\ncatalectic or acatalectic. If the first be taken away, the remainder\\nwill be a scheme of the dimeter and if a metre be prefixed, it will be a\\nscheme of the tetrameter, which is always catalectic.\\nTrimeter Acatalectic.\\n1. 2. 1 1 3. 4. i 5. 6.\\n_wwl_wwli-w^l-wwli_ww\\n875.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 III. ANAPAESTIC METRE.\\nExplanation of the Scheme.\\n19;\\nThis scheme is dimeter. The removal of the first metre leaves it\\nMonometer (which is called an anapaestic base) by prefixing one\\nmetre, it becomes trimeter and by prefixing two it becomes tetra-\\nmeter, which is always catalectic. A catalectic dimeter is also called\\nParmniac.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0332.jp2"}, "333": {"fulltext": "204. prosody. 315\\n1. Dimeter Acatalectic. Paranoic or Dim. Cat.\\n1. 2. 3. 4.\\n1- 2. 3. 4.\\n876.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IV. DACTYLIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7196.\\n1. Dimeter. 2. Trimeter.\\nA C.\\nH.C.\\nAdonic.\\n1. 2.\\nWW \u00e2\u0080\u0094WW\\nW W WW\\nj\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\nw ww\\nzz~\\\\\\nw w\\n1\\nA. C.\\nH. C.\\n6. Tetrameter.\\nt 2. 3. 4.\\n\u00c2\u00abi\\n^Eolic.\\n4. Pentameter.\\nL\\n2.\\n3. i 4.\\n5. i\\n1 1 1\\n1 1)1)\\nZLZ ZZ\\nWW\\nWW\\nf\\n1\\nWW\\nA. C.\\nJEolic.\\nElegiac.\\n5. Hexameter.\\n1.\\n2. 8. 4. 5.\\n6.\\npure,\\nv impure.\\nHjboHi", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0333.jp2"}, "334": {"fulltext": "316\\nPROSODY.\\n\u00c2\u00a7204.\\nLogacedics.\\nw I called also Choriambic Dimeter Cataleetic.\\nI w I Alcaic (the most common).\\nI w _ w j w w Logasedics only.\\n877.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7197.\\nM.\\nII.\\nTrimeter.\\nIII.\\nCat.\\npure acatalectic seldom occurs.\\nimpure do. in which also other\\nfeet are intermixed, as the\\nPseons and Epitrites.\\nMonometer is the same as Dact. Dim. Dimeter removes the first\\nMetre. Tetrameter prefixes a metre, and is always Cataleetic.\\n878.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7198.\\nAn Antispastic Metre.\\nIambus. Trochee.\\nIn the varieties of this verse, any of the simple\\nw w feet under the Iambus may precede any of those\\n_ under the Trochee. Dimeters, Trimeters, and\\nw _ Tetrameters, are formed as directed 198, and\\nare cataleetic, acatalectic, and hypercatalectic.\\nThe Dochmiac dimeter and trimeter is formed\\nby repeating the Dochmiac monometer. The\\nDochmiac also sometimes precedes, and some-\\nw times follows, the Antispastus.\\npure-\\nMetres. I.\\nII.\\nAny form of\\nan Antispas-\\ntic metre.\\nAntispastic Varieties.\\nCat. is called Pherecratic.\\nA. C. is called Glyconic.\\nH. C. is called Sapphic.\\nA. C. is called Glyconic Polyschematistic", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0334.jp2"}, "335": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7204.\\nPROSODY.\\n317\\n879.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VII. IONIC METRE, a majore, \u00c2\u00a7199.\\nTrimeter.\\nMetres I. II. III.\\nH Cat\\npurej w w I _ _ _\\nas above.\\nas above and\\nall the paeons.\\nDimeter may be formed by joining I. and III.\\nA. C.\\nVARIETIES OF THE IONIC A MAJORE.\\nIonic a majore tetrameter B. C. is called Sotadic.\\nw w Alcaic.\\nProsodiacus.\\nm\\n880.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VIII. IONIC METRE, a minore, \u00c2\u00a7200.\\nDimeter. Tetrameter.\\nis formed by joining a Dim. Cat. to\\na Dim. A. C. A Molossus\\nin the odd places must always be\\nA. C. preceded by an iambic syzygy.\\nThe Ionic a minore, preceded or followed by a choriambus, is an-\\nother form of Prosodiacus. For the Epi-Ionic, see 199.\\n881.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IX. PHONIC OR CRETIC METRE, \u00c2\u00a7201.\\nA Pceonic metre. Dimeter, Trimeter, and Tetrameter,\\nare formed by a repetition of the metre a reso-\\nv w or w lution of into is common.\\n205. SCANNING.\\n882 To those who are accustomed to the scanning of the Latin\\npoets, the ordinary hexameter and regular systems of the Greek poeti\\nwill present no difficulty. After a little exercise in these, the best\\npraxis is furnished by the Choruses in the Dramatic writers, and the\\nodes of Pindar as almost every line furnishes a different kiml of erse,", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0335.jp2"}, "336": {"fulltext": "818 ACCENTS. 206.\\nand the student is compelled to make himself thoroughly acquainted\\nboth with the rules of quantity and of metre in order to discover it.\\n883. In scanning, for example, the Proodus in the Medea of Euri-\\npides, beginning at the 131st line, after ascertaining the quantity of\\neach syllable, and comparing the whole line with the preceding tables,\\nthey will be as follows\\n131\\nAnapaestic\\nDim.\\nAc.\\n132\\nDactylic\\nTrim.\\n133\\nAnapaestic\\nDim.\\n134\\nDactylic\\nTrim.\\nH. C.\\n135\\nPseonic\\nDim.\\nAc.\\n136\\nAntispastic\\nK\\n137\\nDactylic\\na\\npure.\\n138\\nAntispastic\\n884 Proceeding\\nin the same way with the second Olympic ode of\\nindar, it will be as follows\\n1. Periodicus, or circulating dimeter.\\n2. Ionic Dimeter Catalectic.\\n3. Pasonic Dimeter Hypercatalectic.\\n4. Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic.\\n5. Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic.\\n6. Dochmiac and so on of the others.\\n885 Note. In the choruses of the dramatic writers, and the odes\\nof Pindar, each line of the antistrophe is the same kind of verse, and\\noften, though not always, the order of syllables is the same, with the\\ncorresponding line of the preceding strophe.\\n206. ACCENTS.\\n886 In the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that one\\nsyllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone or elevation\\nof the voice. On this syllable, the accent is marked in the Greek lan-\\nguage. The elevation of voice does not lengthen the time of the sylla-\\nble so that accent and quantity are considered by the best critics as\\nperfectly distinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. These\\ncan be of no use to us now, as far as regards the pronunciation of the\\nlanguage, however useful in this respect they may have been to those\\nby whom it was spoken. Still, however, the study of these is useful,\\nas they serve to distinguish between words which are spelled alike, but\\nhave different significations. This difference was doubtless marked in\\nthe language as originally spoken by a different intonation, which, b} 7\\nthe different marks called accents, it was intended to convey to the eye.\\nThus, in English, the words des ert, and desert though spelled with\\nthe same letters, differ both in sound and meaning; and this is marked\\nby the accent. So in Greek, b\\\\uo)q and o/uoiq, spelled with the same let-\\nters, differ in meaning and the difference of the accent would doubt-\\nless lead the Greek to express this by a difference of tone which is now\\nlost. Scapula has given a list of more than four hundred words which", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0336.jp2"}, "337": {"fulltext": "206. ACCENTS. 319\\nare thus distinguished. The accents also indicate, in many cases, the\\nquantity of one or more syllables of a word.\\n887 The accents in form are three the acute grave and\\ncircumflex Strictly speaking, however, there is in reality but one\\naccent, the acute, which is placed over a vowel to mark the emphatic\\nsj llable. When the accent is marked on a diphthong, it is placed over\\nthe subjunctive vowel; as, paarf.tvq.\\n888. The accent is placed over one of he last three syllables\\nonly, and words are denominated accordingly,\\nOxytons, when accented on the final syllable as, eog.\\nParoxytons, when accented on the penult as, av Qwnov.\\nProparoxytons, when accented on the antepenult; as, av-\\nQ(O7Z0g.\\n889 The two last are called barytons, because the final syllable\\nis not accented, for every syllable not accented is called grave {fiaqiq)\\nbut the grave accent is never marked, as such, upon a syllable.\\n890 In the structure of a sentence, when any oxyton is followed\\nby another word in continued discourse, the grave is used instead of\\nthe acute as, i6q r t uo)v but the word is still considered an oxyton.\\n891 When two syllables, the first of which is accented, are con-\\ntracted into one, the circumflex is used to denote that an acute or ac-\\ncented syllable, and a grave or unaccented, are united thus, qu.io), as\\nif, jsv).io), q i ).oi q t,).iot ixi, as if q v).iol/xv, q i,).oli.it,. Hence, if there be no\\naccent on the first of the syllables to be contracted, there will be no\\ncircumflex on the contraction thus, qi^toi^v, p J.oc^v. But oi con-\\ntracted for occ in the accusative singular of nouns in lias not the\\ncircumflex.\\n892. It is evident, also, that as the accent must be upon one\\nof the last three syllables, the circumflex must be upon one of the\\nlast two and words are denominated accordingly,\\nPerispomenons, when the last syllable is circumflexed as,\\ncfilw for q.i)J o.\\nProperispomenons, when the penult is circumflexei I as, q ilov-\\nfiav for (filsofxev.\\n893. U. B. Of many words, both the uncontracted and contracted\\nforms are in use; but of others, the contracted form only remains, and\\nwe must conjecture from analogy what the uncontracted\\ntagyov, rioyov, tov, ovv. This reasoning from analogy, however, pro-\\nceeds on the assumption that all syllables havine the circumflex, w. re\\noriginally two. now united by contraction. Whether this wot so or\\nnot cannot be satisfactorily ascertained nor, if it could, would the\\nknowledge be of much value, as the rules for the accentuation t words\\nwould still continue the same.", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0337.jp2"}, "338": {"fulltext": "320 ACCENTS. 207.\\n201. PLACE OF THE ACCENT IN THE NOMINATIVE.\\n894. No rule can be given for ascertaining the proper place\\nof the accent in the nominative of nouns and adjectives this\\nis best learned from practice, and the use of a good Lexicon.\\nThe following observations, however, may be of use\\n1. The articles, pronouns, and prepositions, have the place of\\nthe accent marked in their inflexions in the grammar.\\n2. In verbs, it is thrown as far back as possible, except stfii\\nand tyiftxi.\\n3. The following have the accent on the last syllable, and are\\ntherefore oxytons; viz.,\\n1. All monosyllables which are not contracted; as, yilq, oq. When\\nthey have suffered contraction, they take the circumflex as, yjj,\\n{yea), q o)Q (qxioq). So also at, vvv, ovv, vq, Sqvq, juvq, vavq, ovq,\\nnat$, nvQ, most or all of which are contractions. 2. All nouns in\\nivq as, fiaai-Xivq. 3. All verbals in r^g as, yaoaxrfy. 4. Ver-\\nbals in rtjq as, fia tjr^q but those from verbs in fit, on the\\npenult; as, #ett/ j. 5. Verbals in fit] and /uoq (from the perfect\\npassive); as y^a/i/ty, anaafioq. 6. Verbals in to?, from the 3d\\nsingular perfect passive as, novrjxoq except some compounds as,\\nanodtwaoq. h i. Verbals in r\\\\ and a from the 2 perf. active as,\\no~roXij, Staqioqa. 8. Diminutives, patronymics, and other deriva-\\ntive nouns in tg; as, mqafilq, fiaavXiq. 9. Compounds of 7zoi eo),\\nayo), y QO), ovQoq, eQyov; as, TiaiSaywyoq, dtatpood, nvXoQoq, 6ftfi()i\\nfioegyoq (but naqd and tziqL throw back the accent as, niQUQyoq).\\n10. Adjectives in -r\\\\q not contracted; as, dXrj ^q. 11. Compound\\nadjectives in rjq; as, evqiv^q; except compounds of ri oq and aQY.m\\nas, xaxo7] Tjq, 7todd()y.t]q. 12. Adjectives in vq, na, v as, r t 8vq,\\nfjdila, tjdv. 13. Adjectives in goq; as, aiayqoq. 14. Adjectives in\\nMoq, from verbals in roq as, 7io^r^6q from noir\\\\x6q. 15. The\\nadverbial terminations v and dov; as, a eti, 6fio vfiadov.\\n895. Accent on the Penult.\\n4. The following have the accent on the penult viz.,\\n1. Diminutives in t,o~xoq, vXoq, vu)v\\\\ as, vtavlaxoq, 7tavdlayitj, vavrlXoq,\\nf,io)pio)v. 2. Nouns in tiov, denoting a place as, Avmtov, c.\\n3. Nouns in vvij as, d^y.atoavvrj. 4. Nouns in ta, if derived from\\nadjectives in oq; as, q vXia. If derived from substantives, the\\naccent varies as, arqaxvd from aroaroq. 5. Nouns in it,a derived\\nfrom verbs in evo as, ftaavXtla from (ZaavXivo). 6. Almost all\\nnouns denoting national relation as, Po)fiatoq. 7. Verbals in\\ntw( as, ^7/tw^, y.TrjTo)Q. 8. Adjectives in *\u00c2\u00abr uaaa tv; as, ya-\\nqiivq. 9. Adjectives in o)dqq as, vU#w 10. Verbal adjectives\\nin toq; as, yQanrioq. 11. Comparatives in uov as, piXxiow. 12.\\nAdverbs of quantity in axtq as, rovaaxvq, noXXdnoq. 13. Adverbs\\nin (hjv; as, o~vXX^d/]v.", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0338.jp2"}, "339": {"fulltext": "208, 209. accents. 321\\n896. Composition.\\n5. Compound words in many instances, especially in adverbs,\\nretain the accent on the syllable where it stood in the simple\\nas, avzoqi, ovoavo ev. In the following cases, however, the ac-\\ncent is drawn back to the antepenult viz.,\\n1. Words compounded of particles, u, ev, dvg, di, 6fio, uori,\\nart, tzeqi, tzuqu, vTto, c. as, (iniGzog from mGxog, oYm/o,-\\nfrom ipvytj.\\n2. Words compounded of two adjectives as, ydoGoqog of\\ntwo substantives as, vavxXqoog of adjectives and substantives\\nas, quXoGTooyog.\\n208. GENERAL RULES.\\n897. I. If the final syllable is long, the accent on the penult\\nis the acute thus, dv QCJ7zov, 8ovgu (dual), wpscog, Tl^/.ei udecoj\\nTV7ZZG), ZVTZTtG OO.\\nObs. The Attic terminations scov and eojg, in the second and\\nthird declensions, and the Ionic em in the first, are considered as\\nforming one syllable as, uv 6ysa v, noleag.\\n898.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 II. If the final syllable be short, then\\n1. In dissyllables, the accent on the penult, if short, is the\\nacute as, tvtite if long, with the final syllable short, the accent\\nis the circumflex as, yeToa, Soma (sing.).\\n2. In polysyllables, the accent on the antepenult is the acute\\nthus, uv oconog, avd~Qco7T0(, Tvnrontv, rvTZtofiat.\\nObs. 1. The diphthongs oi and ai final, and syllables long by\\nposition only, are considered short in accentuation thus, uv).u E,\\navXcbtog.\\nObs. 2. These rules apply to the inflections of nouns, and to\\nall the parts of verbs except as in the following\\n\u00c2\u00a7209. SPECIAL RULES.\\n899. 1. IN THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS.\\n1. The first declension has the circumflex on the ultimate of\\nthe genitive plural thus, (iovgwv, from {aovgu.\\nExc. The feminine of baryton adjective in og follows the\\nfirst general rule; ayi cov from dying (not ayuw)] h vioy from\\n\u00c2\u00a3ei og also, yn tjavmv, yhwi(or, hi^iwr.\\n14*", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0339.jp2"}, "340": {"fulltext": "322 accents. 209,\\n2. Oxytons of the first and second declensions, circumflect the\\nlast syllable in the genitive and dative thus, zi[i?j, Tifiijg, ztpfj,\\ntifiijv, T(,[a,wv xaXog, xalov xaloi, xaloig.\\nI 3. In the third declension, the acute accent on the last sylla-\\nble of the nominative is transferred to the penult in the oblique\\ncases thus, gcot/jq, ocQTjjoog, gcot/jqcov (Rule I.) nat/jo, naii-\\noog TQidg, TQiddog.\\nExc. 1. The final syllable of vocatives in ov and oi change the\\nacute into the circumflex as, fiaGilEvg, fiacilev xXwdod, y.Xco oi.\\nJExc. 2. M^rno and ftvydzno, though barytons, accent the pe-\\nnult as, [inrt oog.\\nExc. 3. Genitives and datives of two syllables, have the cir-\\ncumflex on the final syllable long, and the acute on the final syl-\\nlable short as, {irjvog, \\\\ir\\\\vi, [Arjvoiv, [invar, finoi, dvav, dvGi. But\\nTig and participles follow the general rule as, tivcqv, ftivTog,\\novai also, ddocov, Sfioocov, ficocov, xodzcov, Ttaidcov, Tqokov, ov-\\ntojv, (pazoov (of lights), Tidvrcov, tiglgi.\\nAlso syncopated nouns and yvvt], except the dative plural\\nas, TiazQog, Tiarowv, ttcitqcqgi yvvaiy.bg.\\nAlso, a short vowel of the genitive from a long vowel in the\\nnominative, throws back the accent in the vocative thus, dvr t Q,\\navtQog, aveo evdaiftcov, Evdatpovog, svdaipov. Except when\\nthe penult is long not by position as, Ma%dov, HuQTttjdov.\\n900. II. IN VERBS.\\n1. Monosyllables, being long, are circumflexed as, w, elg y\\ncpijg, \u00c2\u00a7ij for kpq.\\n2. A long syllable after the characteristic is circumflected,\\n1st. In the active and middle voices, in the first future of liquid\\nverbs and in the second future of all verbs.\\n2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists, and in\\nthe subjunctive of the present of verbs in fu thus, oneoo),\\nGTTEQSig, GTZEDElV, GTTEQWV, G7ZEQ0V(l(U TV7TGJ, TVTIOVflEV, TV71-\\n01^ TVTlOVfiai TV(p G) TV7Zljg Tl G) Tl X (l(tl.\\nExc. Except when the last syllable ends in nv as, TvnToiTnv\\n(see 1st General Rule).\\n3. The third person of the optative in oi and ai has the acute\\naccent on the penult as, zszvqjoiy doEGai.\\nExcept in the futures mentioned in rule 2d.\\n4. The imperatives eX e, eitzs, evqe\\\\ ids Xa@E, have the acute\\naccent on the final syllable.\\nBut the imperative circumflects the last syllable in the second", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0340.jp2"}, "341": {"fulltext": "210, 211. accents. 323\\nperson singular in the second aorist middle thus, rvnov. Ex-\\ncept ysvov, TQa.7tov, ivsyxov.\\n5. The infinitive of the second aorist active circumflects the\\nfinal syllable thus, rvne.lv, viz. as if contracted from rvnifiEvai,\\nTV7Z8[A,EV, TV718EV, TV7ZEIV.\\nThe infinitive of the first aorist active of the second aorist\\nmiddle of both aorists passive of all the perfects and of the\\nactive voice of verbs in ju, have the accent on the penult viz.,\\nthe circumflex on the long penult, and the acute on the short\\nthus, XQivai, ildacu, dxovaat, xvnia ai tvcp tjvai, rvmjvcu\\ntezvqjtvai, tsxvTtsvai, rstvcp ai, Tieyiljja ai lazdvcu.\\n6. The participles of the second aorist active, and of the pres-\\nent active of verbs in fit, and all ending in ag or eig, have the\\nacute accent on the final syllable thus, TV7i(ov, lazdg, didovg,\\nzervcpcog, rvqi sig.\\nThe participles of the perfect passive have the acute accent\\non the penult as, Tsvvfi[i\u00c2\u00a3vog.\\nExcept when abbreviated as, dsyfievog for dedeyfitvog.\\n7. Eipi, I am, and q)ijfu, I say, have the acute accent on the\\nfinal syllable of the indicative (except the second singular) thus,\\nian, qiaai.\\nObs. When iari is emphatical, or forms the copula between\\nthe subject and its predicate, it throws back the accent thus,\\nav\\\\ QG)7Tog tan \u00c2\u00a3(6ov, man is an animal tan av QCOTiog, xi\\nd tan; This is commonly, though improperly, classed under\\nenclitics.\\n\u00c2\u00a7210. IN CONSTRUCTION.\\n901. Words accented on the last syllable, when that is lost\\nby apostrophe, throw the accent back as, dtivd dsiv emf.\\nExc. 1. JilXd and the prepositions are excepted, which lose\\ntheir accent.\\nExc. 2. Prepositions placed after their cases {dvd and 8td ex-\\ncepted), throw back the accent thus, 7itQi\u00e2\u0080\u0094xpvxi i g ntQi.\\n\u00c2\u00a7211. PROCLITICS OR ATONICS.\\n902 The following ten words, when written by themselves o* be-\\nfore another word, have no accent, but seem to rest upon and form, IS\\nit were, part of the word following; viz. the articles 0, r;, n t, u the\\nprepositions Iv, tk (e\\\\-) ix t t$ the conjunctions ti, q and the nega-\\ntive adverb ov (ovx, ov/).", "height": "3413", "width": "2167", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0341.jp2"}, "342": {"fulltext": "324 ACCENTS. \u00c2\u00a7212.\\nBut these words have the accent when it is thrown back upon them\\nfrom an enclitic following as, iiya in the end of a sentence as, noiq\\nyccg ov, why not after the word on which they rest as, {6q ok, like\\na god; xcexwv e\u00c2\u00a3, in consequence of evils. Also the article, used as a\\npersonal pronoun, often has the accent as, o ydo tfk e.\\n\u00c2\u00a7212. ENCLITICS.\\n903. Enclitics (from lyxXlvo)) are so denominated, because, like the\\nLatin que, they lean or rest their accent upon the preceding word as\\nforming a part of it, and have no emphasis on themselves. They are,\\n1. Mov, fiiv, Pol, ixi, gov, o~tv, aol, at, ov, oi, t, julv, viv, aq Lv,\\naq o)t, o~q aqiiaq, ayiai, o~ p\u00c2\u00a3o)v, and the indefinite tic, in all cases and\\ndialects.\\n2. Elfil and (pri/xl in the indicative present, except in the second per-\\nson singular.\\n3. Hij, nov, no), Ttwq, nodtv, noxi, not interrogative\\n4. JTt, xi, ni, y.tv, vvv, ntq, qd, toi.\\n904. RULES.\\nI. Enclitics throw back their accent on the last syllable of the pre-\\nceding word when its antepenult has the acute accent, or its penult,\\nthe circumflex as, avO-Qoinoq taxi rjX i /xov, o~o)/,id fiov, ov n.\\nNote 1. In this case the acute accent is always used, though the\\nenclitic may have a circumflex.\\nNote 2. When the preceding word ends in a double consonant, and\\nwill not easily coalesce with the enclitic following, the accent remains\\nunchanged as, ofitjfoi; /nov.\\nII. Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word\\nhas any accent on the final syllable, or the acute on the penult as,\\ndyanaQ fit, o\\\\vr\\\\q rtq, rv7tro) T\u00c2\u00a3.\\nDissyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word has\\nan acute, or a circumflex (in this instance regarded as an acute) on the\\nfinal syllable as, y.aloq iaxiv, r.alov xivoq, for ymIoq laxly, y.aXov xuvoq.\\nBut they retain their accent when the penult has the acute as, koyoq\\nxwoq, koyoq, iaxlv.\\nObs. The principle of these rules is, that two successive syllables in\\nthe same word cannot be accented, and that a circumfiected syllable is\\nequivalent to one acuted followed by another unaccented.\\nIII. If several enclitics follow each other, the last only is without\\nthe accent, the accent of each being thrown back on the word which\\nprecedes it as, it et xlq xiva qiaal /tot.\\nIV. The enclitic pronouns retain their accent after prepositions, and\\nafter tvata and ij as, d\u00c2\u00abi at.\\nV. All the enclitics retain their accent when they arc emphatic, and\\nwhen they begin a clause.\\nVI. Eaxi accents its first syllable when it begins a sentence or is em-\\nphatical, or follows x).\u00c2\u00a3 ti, ova, ox;, or xovx as, ovk taxi,.\\nFINIS.\\nLR\u00c2\u00a30?9", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0342.jp2"}, "343": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3398", "width": "2043", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0343.jp2"}, "344": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0344.jp2"}, "345": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3398", "width": "2043", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0345.jp2"}, "346": {"fulltext": "LIBRARY OF CONGRESS\\n003 037 640 7 t\\n\u00c2\u00abj\\nI", "height": "3468", "width": "2160", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bul_0346.jp2"}}